AutoCAD Electrical 2008

User’s Guide

February 20, 2007

 2007 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
Disclaimer
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE
SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF
THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the time
of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI,
AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk
Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap,
AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil
3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer,
Create>what’s>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer,
DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert,
DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up
Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical
Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream,
ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual
Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual
Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap.
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,
Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Credits and Attributions

ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp.
Copyright © 1999-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software
Foundation (http://www.apache.org) subject to its license terms and conditions (http://xml. apache.org/dist/LICENSE.txt).
Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library Copyright© 1992.
HLM© Copyright D-Cubed Ltd. 1996-2006. HLM is a trademark of D-Cubed Ltd.
AutoCAD® 2008 and AutoCAD LT® are produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals,
Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink
and Chemicals, Inc.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Active Delivery™ 2.0 © 1999-2004 Inner Media, Inc. All rights reserved.
ISYS and the ISYS logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of ISYS® Search Software Inc.
Copyright© 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Copyright© Lingea s.r.o. 2006.
The New Features Workshop contains Macromedia Flash™ Player software by Macromedi, Inc. Copyright © 1995-2005 Macromedia, Inc. All
rights reserved. Macromedia® and Flash® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States or other
countries.
Copyright© 1996-2006 Macrovision Corporation. All rights reserved.
Copyright© 1996-2002 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Copyright© 2002 Hiseoph M. O’Leary.
PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult
current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color.
PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2004. Pantone Inc. is the coyright of color
data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products.
PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk
software product.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1992, 1996. All rights reserved.
RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2004
RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2004
Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German
Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin.
This product includes code licensed from RSA Security, Inc. Some portions licensed from IBM are available at http://oss.software.ibm.com/icu4j/.
The Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine Copyright© 1994-2003 Wintertree Software, Inc.
Portions of this software include one or more Boost libraries. Use of the Boost libraries is subject to its license agreement
http://www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt.
Stingray Objective Toolkit & Objective Grid © Rogue Wave Software, Inc..
promis-e® is a registered trademark of ECT International, Inc..

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
Published By: Autodesk, Inc., 111 Mclnnis Parkway, San Rafael, CA 94903, USA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents

Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
What's New in Previous Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
What's New in 2005 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
What's New in 2006 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
What's New in 2007 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Chapter 2 Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Overview of projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Use recently opened projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Create a new project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Add a new drawing to the current project . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Add existing drawings to the current project . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Group drawings within a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Change the order of drawings in the project . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Remove a drawing from the active project . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Assign a description to each drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Preview a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
About collaborative design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Create a new drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Change drawing display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Overview of project related files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

v
 Overview of the project file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Archive a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Work with Multiple Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Overview of set up for multiple clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Overview of project and drawing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Use replaceable parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Save settings to the project file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Create a template drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Updating the WD_M Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Overview of the WD_M block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Using Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Manage layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Use wire layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Change wire types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Determine symbol block names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Library Symbol Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Overview of symbol naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Split a tag name into two pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Use multiple symbol libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Overview of Hydraulic and P&ID symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Attribute Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Schematic Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Overview of schematic attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Non-Schematic Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Overview of non-schematic attributes . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Overview of parent and stand-alone component attributes
(TAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Overview of child component attributes (TAG2) . . . . . . . . . 196
Copy attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Managing Library Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Substitute symbols in the library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Change appearance of existing library symbols . . . . . . . . . . 197
Predefine symbol annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Create a new library symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Overview of the Symbol Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Swap blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 5 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Generate PLC layout modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Parametric PLC symbols vs. Full Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

vi | Contents
 Insert PLC modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Overview of the PLC database file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Single, Stand-Alone I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Modify single, stand-alone PLC layout symbols . . . . . . . . . 246
Work with PLC styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Modify a PLC appearance style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Create a new PLC style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Add a new PLC style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Create PLC I/O Drawings from Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format . . . . . . . . 253
Create PLC spreadsheets using RSLogix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Create XML files for export to Unity Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Chapter 6 Component Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Insert schematic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Insert a copy of a component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Insert similar components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Insert from catalog lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Use the schematic lookup file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Insert from panel lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Manipulate Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Manipulate components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Annotate ratings attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Reverse/flip components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Swap contact states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Check coil/contact count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Follow signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Insert dashed link lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Overview of DIN Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Edit schematic lookup files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Overview of user data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Component Cross-References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Use stand-alone cross-reference symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Change cross-reference visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Insert a dashed link line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Overview of cross-reference settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Overview of graphical cross-reference formats . . . . . . . . . . 368
Overview of table cross-reference formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Update cross-reference tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Use cross-reference exception reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Use circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Wire Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Define wire jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Contents | vii
Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Edit attribute values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Force attributes to layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Manipulate component text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Manipulate terminal text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Move description values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Manipulate Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Manipulate component attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Set tags to fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Change to multi-line text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Add location codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Update child codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Location Mark Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Substitute location mark symbols for text location codes . . . . 418
Change attribute justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Change attribute text style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Change attribute text size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Modify library symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Add attributes to blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Overview of wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Insert 3-phase bus wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Insert wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Trim wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Stretch wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Overview of wire color/gauge labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Insert cable markers into wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Insert cable markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Insert multiple cable markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Insert shield symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Add a second shield to a cable/shield represenation . . . . . . . 467
Insert in-line wire markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Wire Gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Manipulate wire gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Ladder Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Define and insert new ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Modify an existing ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Overview of wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Set wire number placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Find or replace wire number text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Encode wire color/gauge information into wire numbers . . . . 502
Fix Wire Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Fix wire numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

viii | Contents
 Reposition Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Reposition wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Modify Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Modify wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Erase or Hide Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Erase or hide wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Wire Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Control from/to report connection sequencing . . . . . . . . . . 525
Add custom signal arrow styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Edit the cable conductor database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Source and Destination Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Show source and destination markers on wires . . . . . . . . . . 543

Chapter 9 Terminal Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

Overview of connection sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Insert terminals and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Multi-Level Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Overview of terminal relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Edit terminal jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Resequence terminal numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
View terminal wire connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Show terminal internal/external connections . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Mark internal connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Mark external connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Erase connection codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Terminal Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Create terminal strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Use the terminal strip editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Generate terminal strip tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Terminal Properties Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Overview of terminal properties database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

Working with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Use point-to-point wiring tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Bend wires at right angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Insert multiple bus wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Import data from Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable &
Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Overview of the spreadsheet import file structure . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Insert splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687

Move from reference to reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Contents | ix
 Start the Surfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
Continue a previous surf session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Move between drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Plot one or more drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Create a project-wide script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Track drawing changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Translate description text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Publish to the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Title Block Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Use drawing title blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Link information to the title block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Map AutoLISP values to the title block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724

Chapter 12 Icon Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Add a new icon to the menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Edit the properties of an existing icon in the menu . . . . . . . 733
Use alternate icon menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Modify Icon Menu File Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Overview of the icon menu file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760

Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765

Use catalog tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Catalog table naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Family tables in the default_cat.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Overview of the catalog database table structure . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Use the merge utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
Catalog Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Assign catalog information to components . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Overview of the LISTBOX_DEF catalog database table . . . . . . 788
Copy catalog assignments from component to component . . . 790
Show missing catalog assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
Contact Quantity/Pin List Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
Use pin lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
Set pin list assignments for special uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Chapter 14 Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

Generate reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Schematic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Generate schematic reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Panel Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Generate panel reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Overview of format files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Run automatic reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991

x | Contents
 Modify spreadsheet data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Create user-defined attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
Export to Autodesk Inventor Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Set up for export to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable &
Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008

Chapter 15 Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021

Overview of panel layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
Automatic schematic/panel update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
Relationship between schematic drawings and panel layouts . . . . . 1026
Overview of footprint attributes/Xdata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
Footprint/Terminal Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Select and insert footprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Insert a copy of a panel footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
Copy code values to components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
Use panel templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
Select component data from a spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
Layout Wire Connection Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
Merge schematic wire numbers onto footprints . . . . . . . . . 1074
Add wire information to footprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
Lookup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
Use the footprint lookup file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
Item Numbers/Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
Assign an item or detail number to a footprint . . . . . . . . . 1087
Nameplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
Insert nameplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
Panel Leveling/Sequencing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Remove sequencing assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Show sequencing assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Swap terminal strip wire text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095

Chapter 16 Conduit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109

Overview of conduit tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
Conduit Marker Intelligence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
Overview of conduit marker support files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116
Generate a conduit marker report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118
Generate a conduit routing report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120

Chapter 17 Conversion Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123

Convert promis.e drawing files to AutoCAD Electrical . . . . . . . . 1124
Convert non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
Finish mapping values from non-AutoCAD Electrical
blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
Convert text to an attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131

Contents | xi
 Convert Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
Convert non-AutoCAD Electrical arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
Overview of ECDS legacy conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
Tagging and Linking Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
Use tagging and linking tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
Overview of block/attribute mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151

Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157

Overview of power check tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158
Overview of pneumatic tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
Insert hydraulic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
Insert P&ID components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
Troubleshooting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
Overview of real-time error checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
Modify invisible data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184

Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187

Set up peer-to-peer component relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
Create automated pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
Set up AutoCAD Electrical for multiple users . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193
Show source and destination markers on cable wires . . . . . . . . . 1197
Use the PLC Database File Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
Add your own symbols, circuits and commands to the icon
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214
Build your own symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
Configure projects for various drawing standards . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
Use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250

Chapter 20 AutoCAD Electrical Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257

AutoCAD Electrical Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271

xii | Contents
AutoCAD Electrical
What's New 1
In this chapter
■ What's New in AutoCAD
Electrical 2008
■ What's New in Previous
Releases
■ What's New in 2005
Release
■ What's New in 2006
Release
■ What's New in 2007
Release

1
What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2008
PLC I/O Import/Export

You can now communicate your electrical designs between AutoCAD Electrical
and Schneider Electric’s Unity Pro. Employing the widely used XML language
format, you can transfer design data back and forth while maintaining structure
and organization.
Use the new Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool to import Unity Pro XML
export files to aid in the creation of PLC-style ladder drawings and panel layout
drawings (in both vertical and horizontal format) in the active project. The
Unity Pro export files also contain catalog information. You can reformat it
to generate an equipment list to aid in the creation of a rack layout drawing
used in panel layouts or separate rack layout drawings.
Use the new Unity Pro Export tool to create a Unity Pro I/O variable file (*.xsy)
in the Unity Pro XML format from your AutoCAD Electrical drawings. The
Unity Pro export file is generated from the PLC drawings and their respective
PLC symbols.
For More Information (page 270)

PLC I/O Libraries Enhancements

You can quickly create PLC I/O drawings by selecting from a library of over
3,000 intelligent PLC I/O modules from the industry’s most popular
manufacturers.

Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Enhancements

You no longer have to create and save the starting drawing for the Spreadsheet
to PLC I/O Utility tool. You can now define a starting drawing file name or
start with the active drawing. Additional enhancements include:

■ Default settings are now read automatically the first time you run the tool.

■ You can select a settings file and make it the default.

■ You can have the newly created drawings added automatically to the end
of the active project.

For More Information (page 257)

2 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

Surfable Reports

When reports are placed into a drawing as a table, you can click on various
report cells to quickly find the corresponding devices within the schematic
or panel layout drawings in the active project.
When surfing on a table inserted by the Terminal Strip Editor, you can click
the title cell to surf on the Tagstrip value, even if the Tagstrip is not included
in the title. If you select a cell that is not surfable (such as the Tag, Catalog,
or Wire Number cell) the Tagstrip value is surfed for the terminal strip.
For More Information (page 688)

Insert Component and Insert Footprint Enhancements

The Insert Component and Insert Footprint dialog boxes are updated to
improve ease of use when selecting components to insert into your drawing.
Enhanced dialog box controls include:

■ Menu tree structure

Displays the main menu and submenus from which you can freely navigate.
Clicking the menus displays the corresponding menu icons in the Symbol
Preview window. The menu is created by reading the *.dat file defined in
the Project Properties dialog box.

■ Symbol Preview window

Displays the symbol icons and submenu icons corresponding to the selected
menu. Clicking an icon performs one of the following functions based on
the icon properties as defined in the *.dat file: insert a component or circuit,
display a submenu, or execute a command.

■ Recently Used
Displays the last components inserted during the current editing
session.The most recently used icon displays at the top. This list follows
the view options setting in the symbol preview window and the total
number of icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display
edit box.

■ View
Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently
Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check mark.
Options include: Icon with text, Icon only, or List view.

■ Tooltips
When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name and
block/circuit/command names display as tooltip information.

What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2008 | 3

 Icon Menu Wizard Enhancements

The Icon Menu Wizard allows you to easily customize the icon menus. You
can now copy and paste icons from one submenu into another, drag and drop
icons to place those that are commonly used at the top of the Symbol Preview
window and those that are used less frequently at the bottom of the window,
and create new icons to use when inserting components.
You can also easily modify the existing icon or menu properties like changing
the name, image or block name. Right-click the menu or icon on the Icon
Menu Wizard dialog box and select Properties. The existing data is overwritten
in the *.dat file with the new changes.
For More Information (page 730)

Direct Wire Sequencing

You can now use the Edit Wire Sequence tool to define additional
direct-to-terminal wire connection sequences in schematic networks. For
example, 1 side of a schematic terminal might be connected to 3 field devices.
A specific wire connection sequence can be defined to force the connection
reporting, but it is limited to reporting the terminal as a common connection
point for only 2 of the 3 field devices. The third has to be reported as jumpered
to 1 of the other 2 devices. Now, with the support for secondary
direct-to-terminal sequences, the third field device can be sequenced directly
to the terminal and the Wire From/To report shows all 3 field devices tied
directly to the terminal.
For More Information (page 528)

Visual Wiring Sequence Indicators

Once you define additional wire connection sequences, use the Show Wire
Sequence tool to graphically show the new sequencing. When any changes
are made to a wire sequence, the updated information is accurately reflected
in the from/to wire list report.
For More Information (page 530)

Terminal Strip Editor Enhancements

The Terminal Strip Editor provides an easy way to manage and edit terminals
used throughout a project. You can now start designs with a terminal strip
layout drawing representing the terminal strip. In the modified Terminal Strip
Selection dialog box, you can either select a terminal strip for editing, or create

4 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

a new terminal strip definition in the project and maintain its properties in
the graphical terminal strip layout drawing.
The Terminal Strip Editor dialog box now has an enhanced grid control with
bolder grid lines that provide better visual definition for the terminal strip.
Other enhancements to the dialog box include:

■ The Terminal Pin (TPin) column is now “T.”

■ The TERM column is now “Number” to indicate the terminal numbering,

whether it is a wire number or user-defined number.

■ The Function column is now “Installation.”

■ A new column (on the far left side of the grid) indicates the level definition.

■ Tooltip instructions display once you move your cursor over 1 of the tool
buttons in the dialog box.

■ There is better context menu support that is based on individual cells.

■ The Preview tab is now “Layout Preview.”

■ The Cable Preview tab is now “Cable Information.”

New tools are available on the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box to create
associations, separate levels from a multiple level terminal block into separate
terminal blocks, reverse the left and right wiring information for a terminal,
and edit terminal block properties such as the number of levels and number
of wires per connection.
The Layout Preview tab of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box has been
enhanced to allow AutoCAD’s table objects to be inserted as a terminal strip.
This allows for more accurate representations of what is in the Terminal Strip
Editor, more flexibility with the style, and provides a means for automatic
updating.
For More Information (page 585)

Inserting Spare Terminals

Extra terminal block definitions and accessory information is now maintained

and saved on the graphical terminal strip layout. You can insert spare terminals
and have them accurately update the Bill of Materials as well as various
terminal reports.
For More Information (page 614)

What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2008 | 5

 Multi-Level Terminals

Multi-level terminal blocks are quickly becoming an industry standard. Using

AutoCAD Electrical, you can define and manage the terminal numbers and
levels as well as all connectivity information with no added complexity.
You can now associate schematic terminals to build a multi-level terminal
block that is limited to the number of levels defined in the block properties.
Use the new Add/Modify Associations tool to search project terminal strips
for existing multi-level terminal blocks so that you can define and maintain
terminal associations. Terminals must be in the same terminal strip and be in
the same project to be associated together. You can also remove a terminal
from any multi-level relationship and copy terminal properties from 1 terminal
symbol to another.
Associating schematic terminals combines the terminals into a single terminal
block property definition. The number of schematic terminals that can be
combined is limited to the number of levels defined for the block property.
Terminal associations can also tie together a set of schematic terminal block
symbols to one panel representation of a terminal footprint.
For More Information (page 568)

Terminal Properties Database Editor

Terminal properties data is now managed based on manufacturer. Use the

new Terminal Properties Database Editor tool to select the manufacturer table
to edit or create a new one in the catalog database for the active project.

Terminal Jumper Support

Use the new Edit Jumper tool to add, edit, or remove jumpers between
terminals that share the same potential in a schematic drawing. You can
display temporary line graphics between the primary terminal and secondary
terminals within the same drawing.
Jumpers now display on the panel drawing so you have a visual representation
of jumpers that appear on tabular terminal strips. Cells of a table row are
joined with a graphical jumper that looks like 2 circles connected by a solid
thick line. Three columns of jumpers are supported within a single jumper
column in the table.

6 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

Pin List Data Management

Pin list data is now managed based on manufacturer. Use the Pin List Database
Editor tool to select the pin list table to edit or create a new table.
The _PINLIST table in the default_cat.mdb file now uses a single PINLIST
column and a single PEER_PINLIST column. The continuation columns have
been removed.
For More Information (page 795)

Installer Improvements for Manufacturer Content

You can now selectively install content based on manufacturer, reducing the
size of the content databases and data redundancy. If you later decide you
want to install content from another manufacturer, open the Add or Remove
Programs tool in your Control Panel, select AutoCAD Electrical 2008, and
click Change/Remove. Click Add/Remove Features, click Next on the first
screen, and then select the manufacturers to install on the Manufacturer
Contents Selection screen.

Catalog Content Updates

AutoCAD Electrical ships with a manufacturer’s catalog database that contains

over 350,000 components from the industry’s most popular vendors. These
components provide a full spectrum of input and output devices including
switches, sensors, lights, and numerous panel devices, such as wireway and
panel enclosures.

Improved Performance

Significant improvements in running commands that affect other drawings

have dramatically improved the performance of AutoCAD Electrical 2008.
Most notably, the Project Database Service (PDS) now only monitors the active
project.

64-bit AutoCAD Electrical

AutoCAD Electrical now ships in 64-bit and 32-bit versions. The 64-bit version
supports the same functionality as the 32-bit version.

DWG product recognition

Easily identify which Autodesk product created a DWG file and open the file
with the application that owns the DWG file. For example, if the DWG file is

What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2008 | 7

 owned by AutoCAD, double-clicking the file in Windows Explorer
automatically opens the file in AutoCAD. When you move the cursor over a
DWG icon, the tooltip identifies which Autodesk product and version was
used to create the DWG.

Parametric Twisted Pair Symbol Enhancements

The icon menus are enhanced to include three new parametric twisted pair
symbols. To insert a twisted pair symbol, click Components > Insert
Component. On the Insert Component icon menu, click Cable Markers.

User’s Guide

A User’s Guide for AutoCAD Electrical is now available in PDF format. This is
accessible from the Launchpad and the homepage of the Help.

InfoCenter

A new search engine, InfoCenter, is included on the title bar of the main
AutoCAD Electrical window. It searches AutoCAD and AutoCAD Electrical
Help systems to give you the most relevant information for any query you
enter. You can filter content and add frequently used content to the “Favorites”
section.
InfoCenter replaces the Communication Center. It provides notifications of
software and content updates through a balloon notification mechanism. You
can also publish internal content within your team, support RSS feeds, and
easily provide feedback to Autodesk.

What’s New for Previous Releases

You can now quickly see which features were added or enhanced in past
releases of AutoCAD Electrical. This PDF is accessible from the homepage of
the AutoCAD Electrical Help. Click on the “x” for a particular feature to get
more information about what functionality was added for that release.

8 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

What's New in Previous Releases
The chart below shows which features were added or enhanced in past releases
of AutoCAD Electrical. Click the ‘x’ for detailed information on what was
added or enhanced for a particular release.

Feature 2005 2006 2007 2008

PLC Module Builder X (page 12)

Support for Multiple Design Standards X (page 13)

Automatic Report Generation X (page 12)

Merge Utility X (page 12) X (page 13)

Autodesk Inventor Professional Integration X (page 13) X (page 17)

Terminal Strip Editor X (page 12) X (page 4)

Engineering Design Management X (page 13) X (page 13) X (page 21)

Catalog Content Updates X (page 12) X (page 20) X (page 7)

MDI Aware X (page 14)

Insert Component (Equipment List) Tool X (page 13)

AutoCAD Data Migration X (page 14)

Convert promis.e Drawings X (page 14)

Project Manager X (page 13) X (page 20)

PLC I/O Libraries X (page 14) X (page 2)

Wire Sequence Updates X (page 14) X (page 4)

What's New in Previous Releases | 9

Feature 2005 2006 2007 2008

Help Updates X (page 14) X (page 8)

Connector Generation X (page 15)

Splice Tool X (page 16)

Wire Number Placement X (page 16)

Multiple Wire Bus X (page 18)

Bend Wire Tool X (page 17)

New Symbol Libraries X (page 18)

Real-time Error Checking X (page 18)

User Defined Attributes X (page 18)

Wire Label Report X (page 19)

New Project Tool X (page 20)

New Drawing Tool X (page 20)

Wire Type Selection X (page 20)

Autodesk Productstream Integration X (page 21)

Simplified Configuration Settings X (page 21)

Wire Number Leaders X (page 17)

Wire Connection Improvements X (page 16)

Wire Collision Avoidance X (page 16)

10 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

Feature 2005 2006 2007 2008

Cross-Reference Updates X (page 19)

Table Style Cross-Reference Updates X (page 19)

Enhanced Drawing Audit Report X (page 19)

Improved Performance X (page 20) X (page 7)

Insert Components from a Menu X (page 15) X (page 3)

Icon Menu Wizard Enhancements X (page 4)

PLC I/O Import/Export X (page 2)

Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Enhance- X (page 2)

ments

Surfable Reports X (page 3)

Direct Wire Sequencing X (page 4)

Inserting Spare Terminals X (page 5)

Multi-Level Terminals X (page 6)

Terminal Jumpers X (page 6)

Terminal Properties Database Editor X (page 6)

Pin List Data Management X (page 7)

Installer Improvements X (page 7)

64-bit AutoCAD Electrical X (page 7)

What's New in Previous Releases | 11

Feature 2005 2006 2007 2008

DWG Product Recognition X (page 7)

InfoCenter X (page 8)

User’s Guide X (page 8)

What's New in 2005 Release

Terminal Strip Editor

The Terminal Strip Editor tool automatically creates accurate terminal strip
drawings in either a graphical or table format. You can now manage and edit
terminals used throughout an entire project through a simple interface.

PLC Module Builder

Use the new PLC Module Builder tool to graphically add new PLC modules
as they are introduced by manufacturers. This eliminates the need to ever
manually add any module information or wait for a new version of AutoCAD
Electrical to ship.

Expanded Catalog Content

The standard parts catalog has been expanded to include more than 43,000
components from multiple vendors.

Merge Catalog Database Utility

The Merge Catalog Database utility merges the new catalog database with the
customized database already on the system. This maintains any custom entries
and modifications that you have made to your database while adding the new
catalog information.

Automatic Report Generation

Use the new Automatic Report Generation tool to generate multiple reports
with one command.

12 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

 Vault Integration

The Vault Explorer and Vault Server are now included with AutoCAD Electrical
to help manage your engineering data.

Enhanced Link to Autodesk Inventor Professional

The link to Autodesk Inventor Professional has been enhanced to support

cable information instead of simple discrete wires.

Enhanced Drawing Standards Support

Drawing standards have been expanded to cover the JIC, IEC, JIS, and GB
standards

What's New in 2006 Release

Merge Utility

Use the new Merge Utility tool to merge your existing manufacturer catalog
databases, PLC I/O libraries, footprint lookup databases, and corresponding
footprint symbols with your existing content in one simple operation. This
maintains custom entries and modifications that you have made to your
databases while adding the new database and library information.

Improved Page Management

Use the new Project Manager Enhanced Secondary Window (ESW) to manage
all drawing files in a project. You can manage entire projects or make
modifications to single drawings using the Project Manager ESW.

Vault Integration

Autodesk Vault Explorer and Vault Server now better handle AutoCAD
Electrical projects and support work group environments where multiple users
can be working on the same project at the same.

Starting designs with a panel layout drawing

You can now create a panel layout drawing, and then create the corresponding
logical control schematics. Once the panel creation phase is complete,
AutoCAD Electrical extracts a list of schematic components for placement

What's New in 2006 Release | 13

 into schematic drawings. You choose the component location and a physical
schematic representation of each device to be inserted into the layout and a
"link" is automatically created between the devices. Any changes to the either
schematic or panel representation updates the other.

MDI Aware

You can now have multiple drawings open at any one time. This allows you
to cut and paste design information between two open drawings without
closing one of them.

AutoCAD Data Migration

Use the new conversion tools to migrate existing electrical designs from
AutoCAD or AutoCAD LT into AutoCAD Electrical for further modification.
The existing tools have been greatly enhanced, making it even quicker and
easier to migrate from AutoCAD drawings to intelligent AutoCAD Electrical
designs.

promis.e Data Migration

Use the new promis.e data migration tools to easily migrate electrical designs
from promis·e into AutoCAD Electrical.

Additional PLC I/O Libraries

The PLC I/O libraries have been expanded to include more than 2,000 new
PLC I/O modules from industry's most popular manufacturers. Additional
connection devices and panel footprint symbols have also been created and
added to the lookup database.

Visual Sequence Indicators

A new option has been added to the configuration that allows you to
graphically indicate the proper wiring sequence of a circuit directly on the
schematic.

Printable Help

The AutoCAD Electrical Help system has been enhanced to allow you to print
all or portions of the Help for reference. In the Help system, click the Contents
tab, right-click on the section you would like to print (or click Print AutoCAD
Electrical Help to print the entire Help system), and Select Print. In the Print

14 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

 Topics dialog box, select Print the selected heading and all subtopics and press
OK.

AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad

Use the new AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad to quickly access the Getting
Started Manual, AutoCAD Electrical newsgroup, white papers, and more

What's New in 2007 Release

Connector Generation

Automatically generate a multi-pin parametric connector on the fly with the

new Insert Connector command. The parametric connector build process
allows you to select number of pins, spacing, and orientation to quickly create
connector definitions in active drawing files without having to build or
maintain a connector library of symbols. When you click Insert an outline of
the connector displays for placement on the drawing. The rounded corners
are the plug side of the connector, the x' indicates the connector insertion
point and the arrow indicates the plug side wire direction. You can change
the connector orientation before insertion using the Tab, V key, or X key on
your keyboard.
New connector editing commands add to the features versatility:

■ Scoot - (existing Scoot feature) moves the parametric connector horizontally

or vertically, relative to the wires that are connected to the connector.
Scoot also moves the wires and pins along the connector axis.

■ Reverse, Rotate, Stretch, Split Connector - allow you to reverse a connector

about its horizontal or vertical axis, rotate a connector about its insertion
point at increments of 90 degrees, increase or decrease the connector's
overall length or width, and split the connector into two separate block
definitions.

■ Add, Delete, Move, Swap Connector Pins - allow you to add, remove, or
move the pins found inside of the connector.

Parametric Twisted Pair Symbols

The icon menus have been enhanced to include parametric twisted pair
symbols. To insert a twisted pair symbol, select Components ➤ Insert

What's New in 2007 Release | 15

 Component. On the Insert Component icon menu, click Miscellaneous ➤
Shields ➤ Twisted Pair.

Wire Collision Avoidance

Instead of drawing each line segment between components on your point to

point drawings, simply select the two connection points and let AutoCAD
Electrical do the rest. Using the existing the Insert Wire command, select a
connection point on each component and your wire is automatically routed,
without running through your existing geometry.

Splices

The new Splice tool allows you create up to two wire to wire connections per
side while maintaining connectivity throughout your drawing and project.

Wire Number Placement

AutoCAD Electrical supports the automatic placement of new wire numbers

above, below, or directly in-line with the wire. You can set the wire number
placement for all new wires inserted.
You can use the new Toggle Wire Number In-Line tool to switch the wire
number between in-line and the drawing default (above or below the wire).
If the selected wire number is in-line, it toggles to above or below the wire
based on the default Wire Number Placement setting in the Drawing Properties
> Wire Numbers dialog box. If it starts as above or below, the selected wire
number toggles to in-line.

Wire Connection Improvements

Enhancements were made to the Insert Wire command to make generating

point to point drawings easier. These include:

■ Temporary wire graphics change color to indicate when an electrical

connection can be made.

■ Wire connection points display as a green 'x' at the wire connection point
attributes' insertion point.

■ Wires are drawn with an angled wire connection if a wire is already

connected to the selected wire connection point.

16 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

Bend Wires

Bend a wire into a right angle turn to avoid or add geometry using the new
Bend Wire tool. When a wire is defined at a right angle, you can modify the
wire and create a new right angle bend while maintaining the original wire
connections to the components.

Reposition Wire Number Leaders

When defining wire number leaders you can type "C" at the command prompt
to go into a wire leader collapse mode to collapse the wire leader back to the
wire number block. You can do this immediately after inserting a leader if you
determine that you don't want the leader or you can re run the Wire Number
Leader command if you want to remove the leader from existing wire numbers.

Link to Autodesk Inventor Professional - Cable & Harness

You can now communicate your electrical designs bi-directionally between

AutoCAD Electrical and Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness.
AutoCAD Electrical users can pass electrical intent information for cables and
conductors to Autodesk Inventor Professional for the automated creation of
a 3D harness design. Autodesk Inventor Professional users can now pass wire
connectivity information to AutoCAD Electrical for the automatic creation of
the corresponding 2D schematics. Employing the widely used XML language
format, you can transfer design data back and forth while maintaining structure
and organization.
From the XML import from Autodesk Inventor Professional into AutoCAD
Electrical, you can select from a list of connectors defined in the export and
then place the connectors onto a 2D drawing file. Once the connectors have
been inserted onto the drawing, you can place all wire connections to all
components on the drawing file. AutoCAD Electrical parses through the file
data to determine all wire From and To connections. Once the wiring
information is determined the wires are routed making sure to miss existing
geometry on the drawing. The wire insertion tool finds the best possible route
with the least amount of wire loops in between the connection and the wires
are connected in the appropriate position on the connector representation.

What's New in 2007 Release | 17

 Multi-discipline Symbol Libraries

AutoCAD Electrical now includes comprehensive symbol libraries for creating

pneumatic, hydraulic, and P & ID drawings.

■ Hydraulic Symbol Library: AutoCAD Electrical's hydraulic symbol library

includes filters, valves, cylinders, pressure switches, motors, pumps, meters,
restrictors, quick disconnects, flow arrows and more, all adhering to the
NFPA/T3.10.4R1-1990 and AS1101.1-1993 standards.

■ Pneumatic Symbol Library: AutoCAD Electrical's pneumatic symbol library

includes operators, valves, flow paths, filters, regulators, cylinders, meters,
motors, quick disconnects, mufflers, manifolds, flow arrows and more.

■ P & ID Symbol Library: AutoCAD Electrical's P&ID symbol library includes

equipment, tanks, nozzles, pumps, fittings, valves, actuators, logic
functions, instrumentation, flow, and flow arrows, all strictly adhering to
the ANSI/ISA's S5.1 Instrumentation Standard

Real-time Error Checking

AutoCAD Electrical monitors and alerts users to potential design errors as they
occur. You can locate the problem component automatically using the Surf
command.
Identify and clean up problems that might affect an AutoCAD Electrical
drawing using the improved Electrical Audit tool. This tool displays a report
of detected problems for the active project. You can save this file for reference
or surf the file to view and correct the errors.

Multiple Wire Bus

With a single command you can configure a new multiple wire bus that
automatically routes from an existing multi-contact component or bus or in
empty space. While you are defining the wires, temporary display graphics
appear on your cursor to indicate the direction and number of wires that will
be placed on the drawing file.

User Defined Attributes

Add and define your own attributes for existing AutoCAD Electrical symbols.
The newly defined metadata is easily customized and can be extracted for
various reports. The new User Defined Attribute List tool allows you to
selectively determine which non-AutoCAD Electrical attributes are allowed in
the AutoCAD Electrical report generators; otherwise only those attributes

18 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

defined inside of AutoCAD Electrical for each component category are
processed in the project database and subsequent reports.

Table style cross-referencing updates

Tabular cross-referencing styles now function at the same level as graphical

and text styles. Create customizable tables, updated your drawing in real-time
and benefit from increased flexibility with the way you display
cross-referencing information.

Cross-reference updates

Cross-reference settings are now supported at the project, drawing, and

component level. During normal operation of cross-referencing commands,
AutoCAD Electrical looks to the component for its settings information prior
to using the drawing settings. If the component has settings defined, those
are used. In the event that there are both component and drawing
cross-reference settings on the same drawing, the component settings are used
where applied and the drawing settings are used for the rest of the components.
Use the new Copy/Add Component Override tool to set display settings for
a specific component that are different than the drawing or use the new
Remove Component Override tool to remove component overrides so the
cross-referencing commands use the settings for the drawing.
Use the new Hide/Unhide Cross-Reference tool to change the visibility of
cross-references. In most cases the cross-referencing should be visible but there
are times when you may not want cross-referencing displayed on parent
symbols.

Wire Label Report

Use the new Wire Label report to list wire and cable labels that exist in your
drawing or project. The new preformatted wire label report is ready for export
and can be printed on any ASCII, Microsoft Excel, Access, CSV or
XML-compatible wire label printer. After the report is generated, you can still
edit the format or make changes to the data before exporting to your desired
file format.

Enhanced Drawing Audit Report

The Drawing Audit utility can be used to clean up certain problems that might
affect your design connectivity. The audit checks for wire gaps, bad wire
numbers or colors, zero length wires, wire number floaters, and visually verifies

What's New in 2007 Release | 19

 all wires in your display. This report can be exported as a script file for post
processing or sent directly to a printer.

Catalog Content Updates

AutoCAD Electrical ships with a manufacturer's catalog database that contains

over 45,000 components from the industry's most popular vendors. These
components provide a full spectrum of input and output devices including
switches, sensors, lights and numerous panel devices, such as wire way and
panel enclosures. In order to support our worldwide user base, the catalog
database now includes a greater number of Asia Pacific and European vendors.

Improved Performance

Improved memory management and script-based command reallocation have

dramatically improved the performance of AutoCAD Electrical 2007. Drawings
open more quickly, with enhanced editing and referencing speed.

New Project Command

Creating new projects and applying project properties is now easier using the
New Project tool. In a single dialog box you can define the minimum
requirements to create an AutoCAD Electrical project definition file (WDP),
the folder in which the project will be maintained, and the settings and options
defined within the project. The new project automatically becomes the active
project.

New Drawing Command

When you are faced with multiple customers or many one-off designs, the
New Drawing tool helps reduce the hassle of configuring new drawings to
specific standards. In a single dialog box you can apply a template, add drawing
name, border, drawing type, and descriptions, which are then stored and
available for future use. The new drawing then automatically becomes part
of the active project.

Simplified wire type selection

Managing wire properties from the Layer Manager is no longer necessary.

During wire insertion, the current wire type displays at the command prompt.
Now you can simply type in the hotkey "T" for immediate access to the Set

20 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

Wire Type dialog box where you can quickly assign the wire type. You can
use this hotkey with the following commands:

■ Wires > Insert Wire

■ Wires > Angle Wires > Insert 22.5 Degree Wire (also 45 or 67.5)

■ Wires > Multiple Wire Bus

■ Wires > Add Rung

■ Wires > Ladders > Insert Ladder

Use the new Create/Edit Wire Type tool to create new or edit existing wire
types or use the new Change/Convert Wire Type tool to convert lines to wires.

Simplified configuration settings

Configuration settings have been condensed into a centralized Properties

dialog box, where you can view and edit project settings, format styles and
select default drawing settings for the entire project or a single drawing.

Autodesk Productstream Integration

You can now use Autodesk Productstream to manage AutoCAD Electrical bill
of materials (BOMs) by controlling the release and change of a design using
the Change Order environment. Additional enhancements include:
Productstream now supports AutoCAD Electrical components, quantities,
catalog numbers and balloon numbers.
Productstream Explorer supports all Productstream and AutoCAD Electrical
data.
New controls in Productstream make it easier to navigate to and find AutoCAD
Electrical data.

Autodesk Vault Integration

Autodesk Vault integration provides tools for running Vault operations on

the entire project or individual drawing files listed within the project. It
supports a single-user environment where the Vault working folder is local to
the customer or a multiple-user environment where the Vault working folder
is shared by many users on a shared network resource. Additional
enhancements include:

What's New in 2007 Release | 21

 You can now check out individual files as they are needed rather than having
to check out the entire project at once while maintaining drawing file
versioning.
The multi-user environment in AutoCAD Electrical now provides drawing
status indicators and better control of project-wide commands when you are
logged into Autodesk Vault.
You can now get previous versions of the drawing or project file.

22 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New

Project Management
2
In this chapter
■ Overview of AutoCAD
Electrical Help
■ Overview of projects
■ About collaborative design
■ Create a new drawing
■ Change drawing display
options
■ Overview of project
related files
■ Overview of the project
file format
■ Archive a project
■ Work with Multiple Clients
■ Miscellaneous Reference
files

23
Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help
The AutoCAD Electrical Help system is a browser-based system available
through context-sensitive links or by accessing it through the Help menu or
icon. Key features of the Help system include:

■ The Help home page is designed for new users. It provides access to the
basic Procedure topics.

■ There is on-demand access from the F1 function key, menus, dialog boxes
and the menu bar.

■ Then navigation tabs in each topic link to related procedures, references,

and concepts.

■ The Help menu gives you access to Design Support System (DSS)
components: AutoCAD Electrical Help and AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad.

What are ways to gain access to Help?

You can get help about a command while you are using it.

Help Menu From the menu bar, select Help ➤ Electrical Help Topics
to view the AutoCAD Electrical Help home page.

Press F1 ■ At the command prompt, press F1 to open the Proced-

ure topic for the active tool.
■ In a dialog box, press F1 to open the Reference topic
for the active tool.

Help button In a dialog box, click Help to open the Reference topic for
the active tool.

How is Help organized?

Most of the subjects in the Help system have three topic types: Procedure,
Reference, and Concept. Every Help topic selected from a menu has a tab row

24 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 above the topic title. You can click a tab to go to the other available topic
types.

■ Procedure topics provide step-by-step procedures for accomplishing

AutoCAD Electrical tasks.

■ Reference topics offer detailed descriptions of elements in the dialog box.

■ Concept topics provide conceptual information about tools and tasks and
may explain related concepts.

There are See Also links at the bottom of the topic that display a list of related
topics.
The titles of Help topics are designed to tell you the kind of information they
contain:

■ Procedure topics start with an action word, for example, "Create projects."

■ Reference topics have the names of the dialog box as their titles.

■ Concept topics start with the words "Learn about."

How do I get around in the Help system?

When you start the Help system, the first thing you see is the AutoCAD
Electrical Help home page. This page is designed for new users and accesses
the basic Procedure topics. For a list of all the Procedure topics, you can access
the Site Map. There is an option to make the Site Map your home page.

Navigation bar At the top of every Help window is a navigation bar with
icons. The left-most icon is either Show or Hide, which
opens or closes the navigation pane of the Help window.
The navigation pane has tabs for Table of Contents, Index,
Search, and Favorites.

Table of Contents Presents an overview of the available documentation in a

list of topics and subtopics and provides a structure so you
can always see where you are in Help and quickly jump to
other topics. Click AutoCAD Electrical Command Listing
for an alphabetical list of AutoCAD Electrical tools found in
the menu and toolbars.

Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help | 25

Index You can enter a word in the box to locate the term in the
alphabetical index. Double-click the term to display the
topic, or if multiple topics, to open a list of topics found.

Search You can enter a search word in the box and click List Topics
to view a list of topics that contain the search word any-
where in their content. Click a title, and then click Display
(or double-click a title) to open the topic.

Favorites With a topic visible in the Help window, you can click the
Favorites tab, and then click Add to add the current topic
to a list of favorites. To remove a topic from the list, select
the topic in the list, and then click Remove.

How do I learn the product?

Training programs and products from Autodesk help you learn the key
technical features and improve your productivity. For the latest information
about Autodesk training, visit http://www.autodesk.com/training or contact your
local Autodesk office.
The Autodesk Authorized Training Center (ATC) network delivers
Autodesk-authorized, instructor-led training to design professionals who use
Autodesk software. Autodesk Authorized Training Centers use experienced
and knowledgeable instructors. More than 1,200 ATC sites are available
worldwide to meet your needs for discipline-specific, locally based training.
To find a training center near you, contact your local Autodesk office or visit
http://www.autodesk.com/atc.

Use AutoCAD Electrical Help

AutoCAD Electrical has a variety of learning tools to assist you, whether you
are a newcomer or an experienced CAD user.

To gain access to Help

Use any of the following methods to gain access to Help.

■ Select Help ➤ Electrical Help Topics from the menu bar, and then browse
to the desired topic. You can use the tabbed pane to access the Index,
Search, or Table of Contents. You can also navigate through the home
page and site map.

26 | Chapter 2 Project Management

■ Press F1 to open the Procedure or Reference Help topic for the active
command.

■ In an open dialog box, press F1 or click Help to open the Reference topic
for the active command.

To customize Help

Use any of the following methods to customize Help.

■ Click the Hide or Show button in the Help toolbar to control the visibility
of the tabbed pane beside the content window.

■ To add a topic to the Favorites tab, select a Help topic, click the Favorites
tab, and then click Add. To delete a topic from the Favorites tab, select the
topic in the list, and then click Delete.

To search Help

Another method for finding Help topics is to use the Search tab.

1 Click Show in the browser toolbar if the tabbed navigation pane is not
displayed.

2 Click the Search tab.

3 Enter text in the search text box, and then click List Topics. Use quotation
marks (" ") around the search criteria to search for a string. Use an asterisk
(*) before or after text as a wildcard.

4 Double-click a topic or select a topic, and then click Display to show the
topic.

5 You can also select one or more of the following Search options to limit
the results.
■ Search previous results

■ Match similar words

■ Search titles only

6 Use operators to further refine your Search criteria. Click the right arrow
next to the search text box, and then select one of the following operators.
■ AND Use AND to search for topics with more than one set of your
search criteria.

Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help | 27

 ■ OR Use OR to search for topics with at least one of your search criteria.

■ NEAR Use Near to search for specified text within close proximity to
each other.

■ NOT Use NOT to search for topics that do not include your search
criteria.

To print Help

You can print a single file or you can print sections of the Help.

1 In the Help Contents tab, right-click on a heading and select Print.

2 Select whether to print the selected topic or the selected heading and all
subheadings.

NOTE You can also print a single topic by right-clicking in the file and
selecting Print.

3 Click OK.

If you want to print the entire Help system, in the Contents tab, right-click
on AutoCAD Electrical Help and select Print. Select the option to print the
selected heading and all subheadings and click OK.

To find out What's New about AutoCAD Electrical

What's New topics describe the new functionality in the most recent AutoCAD
Electrical release.

1 Click Help ➤ AutoCAD Electrical Help. In the AutoCAD Electrical Help,

click What's New from the navigation bar.
You can also open the What's New by selecting Help ➤ Display
Launchpad. Click What's New on the AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad.

2 Browse to a feature you want to learn about.

3 Click More Information to learn more about the feature.

To get started with AutoCAD Electrical using Getting Started

1 Select Help ➤ Display Launchpad.

28 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 The AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad screen appears. The Launchpad has
two sections. The top section is for first-time users. It has links to white
papers, the Getting Started manual, the AutoCAD Electrical newsgroup,
and frequently asked questions. The bottom section has links to places
for additional information about AutoCAD Electrical. You can find out
what's new in the current release, link to the Advanced Productivity home
page, and find out more about additional Autodesk products.

2 Click Getting Started Manual on the AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad.

Overview of projects
A project is a set of interrelated wiring diagram drawings. An ASCII text file,
called the project file, lists the AutoCAD drawing file names that make up the
wiring diagram set. You can have as many projects as you wish, but only one
project can be active at a time.
An AutoCAD Electrical project file:

■ Is an ASCII text file with any path and any name followed by the .WDP
extension.

■ Lists the complete path to each wiring diagram drawing included in the
project.

■ Carries default settings that can be referenced when new drawings are
created and added to the project.

NOTE A project file is not needed if the project consists of a single wiring diagram
drawing.

Project files default to the directory pointed to by your project subdirectory

(given by the WD_PROJ setting in your environment file). This is not
mandatory. When you create a project file, you can save it to any subdirectory.
In some cases you may want to store them in client-specific subdirectories to
take advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to access client-specific catalog
files and library symbols.

Use recently opened projects

The Project Manager displays a list of recently opened projects so you can
easily select another project to open without having to browse for it. The
project list is dynamic with the last project you worked on appearing at the

Overview of projects | 29
 top of the list. The list of recent projects is saved in a text file called lastproj.fil
in the user subdirectory (\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support\User).
Each line in this file gives the information for one project. The last piece of
data in the line identifies what the project state will be when AutoCAD
Electrical is started: "2"=Active, "1"=listed as Open, "0"= not listed in window
but available from the Recent Projects dialog box. If you adjust this file, either
manually with a text editor or programmatically (see the AutoCAD Electrical
API Help), you can control what project will be active when AutoCAD Electrical
starts up and what other projects will be shown in the Project Manager window.

Work with projects

Use the Project Manager to create a new project, access an existing project,
add drawings to a project, or modify existing information associated with a
project.

30 | Chapter 2 Project Management

Create a new project

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 On the Project Manager, click the New Project button.

NOTE You can also create a new project by right-clicking at the

bottom of the tree inside the Project Manager and selecting New
Project or by clicking the arrow on the Project Selection menu
and selecting New Project.

3 In the Create New Project dialog box, enter the name for the
new project. The .WDP extension is automatically added to
the filename.

4 Select or create the directory where you want to save the pro-
ject.

5 (Optional) Specify the an existing project file (WDP) to use.

Use the default or click Browse to select a previously-defined
project definition file.

6 (Optional) Click Descriptions to enter descriptions for the

project. You can enter up to 12 description lines per page. You
can also select the checkboxes for the information to be in-
cluded in reports generated for the project.

7 (Optional) Click OK-Properties to modify your project default

settings for project settings, components, wire numbering,
cross-references, styles, and drawing formats. All information
defined in these tabs is saved to the project definition file as
project and drawing defaults.

8 Click OK.

Add a new drawing to the current project

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

Overview of projects | 31
 2 On the Project Manager, click the New Drawing button.

3 Create a new drawing (page 63) and click OK.

4 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name and select

Add Active Drawing. The drawing is added to the end of the
existing list.

Add existing drawings to the current project

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select

Add Drawings.

3 In the Select Files to Add dialog box, select the drawings to be

added to the current project. You can select multiple drawings
using the Shift or Control keyboard keys.

NOTE The order in which you select drawings determine how

they will be listed in the project drawing list.

4 Click Add.
The drawings are added to end of the project drawing list.

Copy a project
Copy a project file and create copies of one or more drawings in the project.

1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Copy
Project tool.

2 Click the Copy Project tool.

32 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 3 Enter the name of the project to copy.

NOTE All drawings must be closed before they can be copied to

a new project.

■ Click Copy active project to copy the current project.

■ Click Browse to select a project to copy.

4 Click OK.

5 Select the directory where you want to save the new project.

6 Enter the name for the new project. The .WDP extension is
automatically added to the filename.

7 Click Save.

8 Select one or more drawings to copy to the new project.

■ Do All: Selects all drawings from the project drawing list to be copied
to the new project.
■ Process: Selects one or more drawings from the project drawing list
to be copied to the new project.
■ Reset: Moves all selected drawings back to the project drawing list.
■ Un-select: Moves one or more drawings back to the project drawing
list.
■ by Section/sub-section: Selects drawings by sections and subsections.

9 Click OK.

10 Enter the directory path where the new project will be saved.
If the directory does not exist, it will be created.

11 Select the project-related files to be copied. (see list below)

12 Click OK.

13 Modify the new drawing file names if necessary.

14 Click OK. The new project becomes the current project.

Overview of projects | 33
 Project-related files to be copied

On the Copy Project: Step 4 -- Enter Base Path for Project Drawings dialog box
you can select the project-related files to be copied to the new path. Options
include:

■ Title block setup (.wdt)

■ Project line labels (.wdl)

■ Component description defaults (.wdd)

■ Catalog lookup database (cat.mdb)

■ Footprint lookup database (lookup.mdb)

■ Family code mapping (wd_fam.dat)

■ Wire color/gauge label (.wdw)

■ Schematic lookup database (schematic_lookup.mdb)

■ Location codes (.loc)

■ Installation codes (.inst)

■ Ratings defaults (.wdr)

■ Component tagging (.wdx)

■ Spreadsheet PLC I/O Utility settings (.wdi)

■ RSLogix import mapping (.wdf)

■ User defined attributes (.wda)

■ Terminal audit filter (.wdn)

Work with project drawings

Use the Project Manager to access an existing project and modify its associated
information.

Group drawings within a project

You can create groups of drawings within your project list by assigning sections
and subsection codes to each drawing. The AutoCAD Electrical project-wide
tagging, cross-referencing, and reporting functions can then operate on the

34 | Chapter 2 Project Management

whole project (default) or, using this section/subsection coding, on just a
portion of the drawing set.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and se-

lect Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.

3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Settings (page

114)tab.

4 In the Sheet Values section, enter a section or subsection code

for the drawing.

5 Click OK.
Repeat for each drawing you want to group together, making
sure to assign the same section or subsection code to each.

Change the order of drawings in the project

The order in which drawings appear in the project's drawing list is the order
in which AutoCAD Electrical processes them in project-wide tagging and

Overview of projects | 35
 cross-referencing operations. You can change the drawing order using the
Reorder Drawings tool.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select

Reorder Drawings.

3 Find and highlight the drawing you want to move in the list.

4 Click Move Up or Move Down repeatedly until the drawing

moves to the appropriate position in the list.

5 Click OK.

Remove a drawing from the active project

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and se-

lect Remove.
The drawing is instantly removed from the project but it is
not deleted.

NOTE You can remove all drawings from a project by right-clicking the project
name in the Project Manager, and selecting Remove Drawings. Select the drawings
to remove from the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, and click OK.

Assign a description to each drawing

You can assign a 3-line description to each drawing listed in your project. You
can then toggle the project drawing list back and forth between drawing
preview and drawing details. Flipping the drawing list to display the drawing

36 | Chapter 2 Project Management

details can make it easier to find a specific drawing among dozens or hundreds
in a project file.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and se-

lect Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.

3 In the Drawing Properties ➤ Settings (page 114) dialog box,

enter a description for the drawing.
Select from a list of predefined descriptions from the active
project by clicking the arrow.

4 Click OK.

TIP These descriptions can be linked to an attribute in the title block for automatic
update.

Preview a drawing

You can preview a drawing from the Project Manager.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, select a drawing from the list.

3 In the Details pane, click Preview.

An image of the highlighted drawing displays. Once selected,
the preview remains on. Each time you highlight another
drawing in the project list the display updates with an image
of the selected drawing.

4 Click Details to return to the drawing description for the

drawings.

Pick a different project

AutoCAD Electrical displays a list of recently opened projects so you can easily
select another project to open without having to browse for it. The project
list is dynamic with the last project you worked on appearing at the top of

Overview of projects | 37
 the list. The list of recent projects is saved in a text file called lastproj.fil in
the user subdirectory.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, click the arrow on the Project Selection

menu, and select Recent.

3 In the Recent Projects dialog box, select the project from the
list.

4 Click Drawings to see a list of the drawings in the selected

project.
In the Project Drawings dialog box, double-click a drawing
name to see a preview of that drawing. Click Pick Project, Open
Drawing to make the selected project the active project and
open the selected drawing or click Back to return to the Recent
Projects dialog box.

5 (Optional) Click Remove to remove a project from the project

list.

6 Click OK.
The selected project becomes the active project.

NOTE If you know the drawing name but you aren't sure what project the drawing
is in, click Find in the Recent Projects dialog box. In the Find Drawing in Recent
Projects dialog box, enter the name of the drawing (wildcards are accepted) and
click Find. Once a list of possible projects is presented, select the project name
and click Drawing List to see a list of the drawings contained in the project.
Double-click the drawing name in the list to preview the drawing. Click Pick Project,
Open Drawing to activate the project and open the selected drawing.

Project manager
This tool lists the drawing files associated with each open project. Use it to
add new drawings, reorder drawing files, and change project settings. You
cannot have two projects open in the Project Manager with the same project
name.
You can dock the Project Manager into a specific location on the screen or
hide it until you want to use the project tools. Right-click the properties icon

38 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 to display options to move, size, close, dock, hide, or set the transparency for
the Project Manager.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool.

Click Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager.

Right-click menu

You can right-click in empty space in the Project Manager to display the
following options:

New Project Creates a new project. Once created, the new project
automatically becomes the active project.

New Drawing Creates a new drawing file and adds it to the active project.
The new drawing displays at the bottom of the project
drawing list for the active project.

Project Selection menu

You can default to a predefined directory by adding an entry to your .env file.
Exit AutoCAD and open the .env file with any generic text editor (such as
Wordpad). Add this line:
WD_PICKPRJDLG, n:/{your directory}/, AutoCAD Electrical default pick proj

Recent Opens a different project from a list of recent projects or

from a file selection dialog box.

New Project Creates a new project. Once created, the new project
automatically becomes the active project.

Open Project Opens a different project from a file selection dialog box.
In the Select Project File dialog box, navigate to the project
to open and select it.

Overview of projects | 39
Open Project from Vault (you must be logged into the vault) Allows you to browse
to the vault to open a project and make it active inside of
the Project Manager. In the Select Project dialog box,
navigate to the project to open and select it. Click the arrow
next to the Open button and select one of the following
options: Open (Check Out), Open (Check Out All), or Open
Read-Only.

Buttons

New Project Creates a new project. Once created, the new

project automatically becomes the active project.

New Drawing Creates a new drawing file and adds it to the

active project.

Refresh Refreshes the drawing list inside of the Project

Manager.
For Vault: Checks for changes in external file
references and updates the Vault icons in the
Project Manager. Files that have changed and
are currently checked out to you are not up-
dated. Files that are checked out to another user
are updated to their current version. Files that
are checked out to another user are updated to
their current version on your local drive. If the
Vault version is newer, then the Vault icon indic-
ates that the file needs reloading (the Vault icon
turns red).

Project Task List Performs pending updates on any drawing files

inside of the active project that have been mod-
ified.

40 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 Project-Wide Update/Re- Updates the related line reference numbers,
tag cross-reference text, device tagging, and signal
reference updates on the selected drawing files
inside of the active project.

Drawing List Display Con- Configures the display options. There are 10
figuration values that can be associated with the drawings
listed so you can display the information based
on your requirements.

Publish/Plot Batch plots one or more drawings in the active

project.

Projects

Displays all the open projects in a list. You can have as many projects open as you need, but only
one project can be active at a time. The active project appears in bold text and is always found at
the top of the list. Right-click the project name to display the following project editing options:

Descriptions Edits the existing project descriptions. Displays unlimited lines describ-
ing the project. Descriptions can then be included in report headers
and title blocks.

Title Block Update Automates updating title block information for the active drawing or
for the entire project drawing set.

Drawing List Report Generates a report that lists project drawing information from the
title blocks such as drawing descriptions, section, and file names.
On the Drawing List Report dialog box, select to run a new report,
redisplay the previously-run report or select a format .set file to use
for the report.

New Drawing Creates a new drawing file and adds it to the active project.

Add Drawings Adds one or more drawings to the active project. When prompted,
specify whether to apply the project default values to the drawing
settings (in the WD_M block definition).

Overview of projects | 41
Add Active Drawing Adds an active drawing to the active project. The new drawing ap-
pears at the end of the project drawing list. When prompted, specify
whether to apply the project default values to the drawing settings
(in the WD_M block definition).

Reorder Drawings Moves drawings up or down in the project's drawing list. The order
determines how the drawings are processed for project-wide tagging
and cross-referencing operations.

Remove Drawings Removes one or more drawings from the current project.

NOTE The drawing file is not deleted, just the reference to the
drawing.

Task List Performs pending updates on any drawing files inside of the active
project that have been modified.

Publish Launches dialog boxes to plot the project, publish to the Web, publish
to DWF, or create a zip file of the project.

Settings Displays the project's settings and information about the AutoCAD
Electrical environment.

Exception List Displays a list of drawing file(s) that have different settings from the
project definition file (*.WDP). If all drawing files match the .wdp,
the dialog box indicates that there are no exceptions. You can then
use the Settings Compare tool to display the differences.

Properties Controls project-wide settings including tagging, component cross-

referencing options, and catalog lookup file preferences.

Activate Makes an open project the active project in the AutoCAD Electrical
session. This also sends the project list to the top of the dialog.

Close Closes an open project.

NOTE You cannot close the active project; you must first activate
another project in the list.

42 | Chapter 2 Project Management

Vault You must be logged into the vault to see this menu in the Project
Manager. The status of the selected object determines which vault
commands are available for selection.

Check In All Adds the project definition file (*.wdp)

along with its drawing files to the
vault. You can vault just the project
file using the Project Check In com-
mand or you can vault the project file
along with its drawing files using the
project Check In All command.

NOTE Files used to support the pro-

ject (such as *.wdl and *.wdt) appear
in the Vault Check In All dialog box if
they share the same file name as the
project.

Check Out All Reserves and locks the project defini-

tion file along with the associated
drawing files listed in the Project
Manager. If the project definition file
is unavailable for check out, you can
still check out the drawings available
for editing.

Check In Adds the project definition file to the

vault and creates a new version of the
file. Use this if you want to check in
only the project definition file and
none of its drawing file dependencies;
otherwise use Check In All.

NOTE Files used to support the pro-

ject (such as *.wdl and *.wdt) will ap-
pear in the Vault Check In dialog box
if they share the same file name as the
project.

Check Out Reserves and locks the master project

definition file. Retrieves an updated
copy, if necessary. Use this if you want

Overview of projects | 43
 to check out only the project definition
file and none of its drawing file de-
pendencies; otherwise use Check Out
All.

Undo Check Out/Undo Removes the reservation/lock from the

Check Out All master project definition file. The
master file is now available for others
to check out. Any modifications made
to the local copy are not checked back
into the vault.
Undo Check Out All removes the lock
from all of the checked out drawing
files and project definition file listed
inside of the Project Manager for the
selected project.

Get Latest/Get Latest All Retrieves the latest master copy from
the vault and copies it into your
working folder. Older files are indic-
ated by the status indicator displaying
a red background.

Project Drawing List

Displays the drawings associated with a project. You can select multiple drawings from the project
list to open, close, remove, apply project defaults, or paste properties all at once. You cannot select
multiple drawings from two or more projects.
The active drawing appears in bold text in the list. By default, the selected drawing highlights in the
project drawing list regardless if the Project Manager is active or not. You can turn this off by clicking
the Drawing List Display Configuration button and selecting Show selection highlight only when
active.

Indicates that the file is a drawing file.

44 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 Indicates that a drawing file is a reference drawing. To make
a drawing a reference drawing, right-click on the drawing
name and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.

Right-click the drawing name to display the following drawing editing options:

Open Opens the selected drawing in a new window. You can

also double-click a drawing name or select a drawing name
and press Enter to open the drawing.

Close Closes the selected drawing.

Copy To Copies the selected drawing into the same or another open
project. Select the folder to copy the drawing to, enter a
new file name and select the project to save the drawing
to. When prompted, specify whether to apply the project
default values to the drawing settings (in the WD_M block
definition).

Remove Removes the selected drawing from the current project.

Replace Replaces the selected drawing with one that you select
from a file selection dialog box.

Rename Renames the selected drawing directly in the drawing list.

Drawing Properties Assigns, edits, and removes section and subsection coding
for a drawing. Assigns drawing descriptions to the drawing
files.

Apply Project Defaults Applies project settings to new drawing files where the
project default settings for the drawing(s) were not applied
at creation time.

Copy Copies the drawing settings and options from one drawing
to be applied to one or more drawing(s).

Overview of projects | 45
 NOTE Drawing-specific information (found on the Drawing
Properties ➤ Drawing Settings tab) cannot be copied from
one drawing to another.

Paste Applies the copied drawing settings and options from one
drawing to the selected drawing(s).

Settings Compare Displays differences between all drawing settings and their
associated defaults in the project definition file.

Check In (you must be logged into the vault) Adds a file to the vault
and creates a new version of the file. For a first time check
in of a drawing file, the project definition file is forced to
be checked in at the same time since it needs to be vaulted
first to establish a location in the Vault database.

Check Out (you must be logged into the vault) Reserves and locks the
master drawing file. Retrieves an updated copy, if necessary.
Checks out the drawing files when the project file is under
Vault control.

Undo Check Out (you must be logged into the vault) Removes the reserva-
tion/lock from the master drawing file. The master file is
now available for others to check out. Any modifications
made to the local copy are not checked back into the vault.

Get Latest (you must be logged into the vault) Retrieves the latest
master copy from the vault and copies it into your working
folder. Older files are indicated by the status indicator dis-
playing a red background.

NOTE Two projects can reference the same drawing file, however doing so can
lead to conflicts if both projects try to modify the same drawing with a project-wide
tagging or cross-referencing function.

Details

Switches between displaying drawing previews and drawing descriptions. The

drawing details are updated when you highlight a drawing file and remain

46 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 visible until a new drawing file is selected. Use the up and down arrow keys
on your keyboard to switch drawings.

Details Displays project and drawing detail based on what is highlighted in

the Project pane. Information that is listed includes the status, file
name, file location, file size, last saved date, and the name of the last
user who modified the file.

Preview Displays the last saved thumbnail view for the highlighted drawing
in the drawing list.

Vault Status Icons

(you must be logged into the vault) The Vault Status Icons indicate the status
of your local copy of the files as compared against the master copy of those
same files in the vault.
The Vault Status indicate when the local copy is in sync with the master and
when it's not. The tooltips help guide you to the next logical steps - especially
when the local copy is no longer in sync with the master. These icons are
crucial to the overall understanding of how to work in a vaulted environment.

Icon Meaning

File is not in the vault.

File is in the vault in a checked-in state, and the version you are working on is
the same as in the vault. Also referred to as the Latest Version.

File is in the vault in a checked-in state, but the version you are working on is
newer than the master file in the vault. This typically means that your local file
was changed without checking it out. The blank icon indicates that the master
file is available for check out. If you want to save these changes, check the file
out, and then select the Don't get local copy option.

File is in the vault in a checked-in state, but the version you are working on is
older than the latest version in the vault. This typically means that another user
made changes since your last update. Use Reload to update to the latest available
version.

Overview of projects | 47
 The master file is checked out to you and the version you are working on is the
same as in the vault.

File is checked out to you, but the version you are working on is newer than
the latest version in the vault. This typically means that you made changes to
the model since the last time you checked out the file, but have not checked it
back in.

File is checked out to you, but the version you are working on is older than the
master file in the vault. This typically means that you started with a version for
the vault that was older than the latest, and checked it out to promote it to the
latest.

File is checked out to another user, and the version you are working on is the
same as in the vault. Also referred to as the Latest Version. This typically happens
if the other user did not check changes back into the vault.

File is checked out to another user, and the version you are working on is newer
than the file in the vault. This typically happens if the user checked in changes
to the vault, but kept the file checked out. Use Refresh from Vault to update to
the latest available version.

File is checked out to another user, but the version you are working on is older
than the latest version in the vault, and another user checked out this file. Use
Refresh from Vault to update to the latest available version.

File is locked and the local copy of the file is the same as the master file in the
vault.

File is locked and the local copy of the file is newer than the master file in the
vault.

File is locked and the local copy of the file is older than the master file in the
vault.

Create new project

48 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 Use this to define the minimum requirements to create an AutoCAD Electrical
project definition file (WDP), the folder in which the project is maintained,
and the settings and options defined within the project.

Access:

On the Project Manager, click the New Project button or select New Project
from the Project Selection menu.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. Click the New
Project button or select New Project from the Project Selection menu.

NOTE You can also create a new project by right-clicking at the bottom of the
tree inside the Project Manager, and selecting New Project.

Name Specifies the name for the new project. A name must
be entered in order to define any of the project
properties.

NOTE The .wdp extension is not required in the edit

box.

Location Specifies the location for a project definition file and

folder definition. If left blank, the project definition
file is created at the WD.ENV project location. Click
Browse to pick a folder where the new project
file/folder will be created.

NOTE You cannot have duplicate project names in

the same location.

Create Folder with Project Name Creates a folder with the same name as the project
where the drawing files and project definition are
stored. The folder is created following the path
defined in the project location edit box.

Copy Settings from Project File Specifies the project settings. You can select a previ-
ously-defined project setting and apply it to your
new project definition file. Click Browse to select a
previously defined project definition file to copy over
and apply settings to the new project being created.

Overview of projects | 49
Descriptions Specifies the project descriptions. Descriptions can
be included in report headers and title blocks

OK-Properties Creates the project definition file in the specified

location before opening the Project Properties dialog
box where you can define default settings and op-
tions for your project which are saved in the project
definition file.

Copy project: step 1 - select existing project to copy

Access:

Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Copy Project tool.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Copy Project.

NOTE If the active drawing is one of those to be copied to a new project, cancel
out of the dialog box, open a new drawing, and then restart the Copy Project
command.

Copy Active Project Copies the active project.

Browse Selects another project to copy.

About collaborative design

In a collaborative design environment, several people can work on a project
at the same time. The project file (.WDP) lists all the drawings that are part
of a project. You can use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical for drawing
management, version control, and revision labeling.
You must install Autodesk Vault to vault projects. Autodesk Vault prevents
engineers from working on the original version of a project in the vault. To
maintain the relationship between the drawing files that are defined in the
project file, you must check out all files specified in a project file when you
need to modify one or more files. When edits are complete, the project can
be checked back into the vault.

50 | Chapter 2 Project Management

AutoCAD Vault ARX adds vaulting functionality to the Project Manager. Upon
initial start-up of AutoCAD Electrical you are not logged into the vault. You
must log into Autodesk Vault using the File ➤ Vault menu to vault projects.
The vault commands are available by right-clicking a project or drawing within
the AutoCAD Electrical Project Manager. You can use the Project Manager to:

■ Check projects in and out of the vault

The most basic requirement of the vault is that you never work directly
on a file in the vault. The projects in the vault are the Masters and cannot
be edited. You must check out the project to the working folder on your
local drive to edit it. When you finish working on the project, you must
check the project back into the vault.

TIP If you want others to view updates you made to a project and you want
to continue modifying the project, select the Keep Checked Out option on the
Check In dialog box. This checks in the updates you made to the project and
keeps the project checked out to you.

NOTE You must have all references of a project file downloaded to your
working folder to edit the project file.

■ View the status of files in a design.

Vault status icons indicate the status of your local copy of the files as
compared against the master copy of those same files in the vault. The
vault status icons indicate when the local copy is in sync with the master
and when it is not. Tooltips provide descriptions of the icons. Pause the
cursor over a status icon to see a detailed description. The tooltips also
help guide you to the next logical steps, especially when the local copy is
no longer in sync with the master. The vault status icons are crucial to the
overall understanding of how to work in a vaulted environment.

NOTE The vault status icons are only available in the list view and only appear
when you are logged into the vault.

Key Concepts

■ The master files are stored and maintained in the file store on the Vault
server. The vault database is also located on the server. It can be on the
same or a different server from where the file store is located. The database
maintains the metadata for the files in the file store and the relationships
between those files.

About collaborative design | 51

 ■ The vault is referred to as the virtual location of the files. Users do not
work directly on the master files. A file must be checked out from the
virtual location in the vault to a physical location in the working folder
before it can be modified.

■ Each user must have a physical location on their disk mapped to the
corresponding vault location. A folder that has been mapped to the root
folder ("$") in a vault is called a working folder. Each Vault user can
optionally set a local working folder (physical location on disk) for the
root of the vault or just rely on the default one (C:\My Documents\Vault)
provided by Vault. Setting up a working folder creates a user-define
virtual-to-physical mapping that is maintained for as long as the user works
with the vault. The working folder can be changed, but the mapping itself
cannot be removed.

■ When you check out a project, that project is copied from the virtual
location in the vault to the physical location in the working folder. When
you are ready to check the project back in, the mapping tells the vault
where to check the files in from.

■ Opening a project from the vault checks all files out to the working folder
of the Vault user. In addition, you can open a file in a checked-in state as
read-only.

The essential rules to remember when working with AutoCAD Electrical Vault
ARX are:

■ The projects in the vault are the masters.

■ You can check a project or a single drawing out of the vault to modify it.

■ To check out a project for editing you must set up a working folder on the
disk.

Refer to the Managing Your Data book for more information on AutoCAD
Electrical Vault ARX.

Project manager
This tool lists the drawing files associated with each open project. Use it to
add new drawings, reorder drawing files, and change project settings. You
cannot have two projects open in the Project Manager with the same project
name.
You can dock the Project Manager into a specific location on the screen or
hide it until you want to use the project tools. Right-click the properties icon

52 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 to display options to move, size, close, dock, hide, or set the transparency for
the Project Manager.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool.

Click Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager.

Right-click menu

You can right-click in empty space in the Project Manager to display the
following options:

New Project Creates a new project. Once created, the new project
automatically becomes the active project.

New Drawing Creates a new drawing file and adds it to the active project.
The new drawing displays at the bottom of the project
drawing list for the active project.

Project Selection menu

You can default to a predefined directory by adding an entry to your .env file.
Exit AutoCAD and open the .env file with any generic text editor (such as
Wordpad). Add this line:
WD_PICKPRJDLG, n:/{your directory}/, AutoCAD Electrical default pick proj

Recent Opens a different project from a list of recent projects or

from a file selection dialog box.

New Project Creates a new project. Once created, the new project
automatically becomes the active project.

Open Project Opens a different project from a file selection dialog box.
In the Select Project File dialog box, navigate to the project
to open and select it.

About collaborative design | 53

Open Project from Vault (you must be logged into the vault) Allows you to browse
to the vault to open a project and make it active inside of
the Project Manager. In the Select Project dialog box,
navigate to the project to open and select it. Click the arrow
next to the Open button and select one of the following
options: Open (Check Out), Open (Check Out All), or Open
Read-Only.

Buttons

New Project Creates a new project. Once created, the new

project automatically becomes the active project.

New Drawing Creates a new drawing file and adds it to the

active project.

Refresh Refreshes the drawing list inside of the Project

Manager.
For Vault: Checks for changes in external file
references and updates the Vault icons in the
Project Manager. Files that have changed and
are currently checked out to you are not up-
dated. Files that are checked out to another user
are updated to their current version. Files that
are checked out to another user are updated to
their current version on your local drive. If the
Vault version is newer, then the Vault icon indic-
ates that the file needs reloading (the Vault icon
turns red).

Project Task List Performs pending updates on any drawing files

inside of the active project that have been mod-
ified.

54 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 Project-Wide Update/Re- Updates the related line reference numbers,
tag cross-reference text, device tagging, and signal
reference updates on the selected drawing files
inside of the active project.

Drawing List Display Con- Configures the display options. There are 10
figuration values that can be associated with the drawings
listed so you can display the information based
on your requirements.

Publish/Plot Batch plots one or more drawings in the active

project.

Projects

Displays all the open projects in a list. You can have as many projects open as you need, but only
one project can be active at a time. The active project appears in bold text and is always found at
the top of the list. Right-click the project name to display the following project editing options:

Descriptions Edits the existing project descriptions. Displays unlimited lines describ-
ing the project. Descriptions can then be included in report headers
and title blocks.

Title Block Update Automates updating title block information for the active drawing or
for the entire project drawing set.

Drawing List Report Generates a report that lists project drawing information from the
title blocks such as drawing descriptions, section, and file names.
On the Drawing List Report dialog box, select to run a new report,
redisplay the previously-run report or select a format .set file to use
for the report.

New Drawing Creates a new drawing file and adds it to the active project.

Add Drawings Adds one or more drawings to the active project. When prompted,
specify whether to apply the project default values to the drawing
settings (in the WD_M block definition).

About collaborative design | 55

Add Active Drawing Adds an active drawing to the active project. The new drawing ap-
pears at the end of the project drawing list. When prompted, specify
whether to apply the project default values to the drawing settings
(in the WD_M block definition).

Reorder Drawings Moves drawings up or down in the project's drawing list. The order
determines how the drawings are processed for project-wide tagging
and cross-referencing operations.

Remove Drawings Removes one or more drawings from the current project.

NOTE The drawing file is not deleted, just the reference to the
drawing.

Task List Performs pending updates on any drawing files inside of the active
project that have been modified.

Publish Launches dialog boxes to plot the project, publish to the Web, publish
to DWF, or create a zip file of the project.

Settings Displays the project's settings and information about the AutoCAD
Electrical environment.

Exception List Displays a list of drawing file(s) that have different settings from the
project definition file (*.WDP). If all drawing files match the .wdp,
the dialog box indicates that there are no exceptions. You can then
use the Settings Compare tool to display the differences.

Properties Controls project-wide settings including tagging, component cross-

referencing options, and catalog lookup file preferences.

Activate Makes an open project the active project in the AutoCAD Electrical
session. This also sends the project list to the top of the dialog.

Close Closes an open project.

NOTE You cannot close the active project; you must first activate
another project in the list.

56 | Chapter 2 Project Management

Vault You must be logged into the vault to see this menu in the Project
Manager. The status of the selected object determines which vault
commands are available for selection.

Check In All Adds the project definition file (*.wdp)

along with its drawing files to the
vault. You can vault just the project
file using the Project Check In com-
mand or you can vault the project file
along with its drawing files using the
project Check In All command.

NOTE Files used to support the pro-

ject (such as *.wdl and *.wdt) appear
in the Vault Check In All dialog box if
they share the same file name as the
project.

Check Out All Reserves and locks the project defini-

tion file along with the associated
drawing files listed in the Project
Manager. If the project definition file
is unavailable for check out, you can
still check out the drawings available
for editing.

Check In Adds the project definition file to the

vault and creates a new version of the
file. Use this if you want to check in
only the project definition file and
none of its drawing file dependencies;
otherwise use Check In All.

NOTE Files used to support the pro-

ject (such as *.wdl and *.wdt) will ap-
pear in the Vault Check In dialog box
if they share the same file name as the
project.

Check Out Reserves and locks the master project

definition file. Retrieves an updated
copy, if necessary. Use this if you want

About collaborative design | 57

 to check out only the project definition
file and none of its drawing file de-
pendencies; otherwise use Check Out
All.

Undo Check Out/Undo Removes the reservation/lock from the

Check Out All master project definition file. The
master file is now available for others
to check out. Any modifications made
to the local copy are not checked back
into the vault.
Undo Check Out All removes the lock
from all of the checked out drawing
files and project definition file listed
inside of the Project Manager for the
selected project.

Get Latest/Get Latest All Retrieves the latest master copy from
the vault and copies it into your
working folder. Older files are indic-
ated by the status indicator displaying
a red background.

Project Drawing List

Displays the drawings associated with a project. You can select multiple drawings from the project
list to open, close, remove, apply project defaults, or paste properties all at once. You cannot select
multiple drawings from two or more projects.
The active drawing appears in bold text in the list. By default, the selected drawing highlights in the
project drawing list regardless if the Project Manager is active or not. You can turn this off by clicking
the Drawing List Display Configuration button and selecting Show selection highlight only when
active.

Indicates that the file is a drawing file.

58 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 Indicates that a drawing file is a reference drawing. To make
a drawing a reference drawing, right-click on the drawing
name and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.

Right-click the drawing name to display the following drawing editing options:

Open Opens the selected drawing in a new window. You can

also double-click a drawing name or select a drawing name
and press Enter to open the drawing.

Close Closes the selected drawing.

Copy To Copies the selected drawing into the same or another open
project. Select the folder to copy the drawing to, enter a
new file name and select the project to save the drawing
to. When prompted, specify whether to apply the project
default values to the drawing settings (in the WD_M block
definition).

Remove Removes the selected drawing from the current project.

Replace Replaces the selected drawing with one that you select
from a file selection dialog box.

Rename Renames the selected drawing directly in the drawing list.

Drawing Properties Assigns, edits, and removes section and subsection coding
for a drawing. Assigns drawing descriptions to the drawing
files.

Apply Project Defaults Applies project settings to new drawing files where the
project default settings for the drawing(s) were not applied
at creation time.

Copy Copies the drawing settings and options from one drawing
to be applied to one or more drawing(s).

About collaborative design | 59

 NOTE Drawing-specific information (found on the Drawing
Properties ➤ Drawing Settings tab) cannot be copied from
one drawing to another.

Paste Applies the copied drawing settings and options from one
drawing to the selected drawing(s).

Settings Compare Displays differences between all drawing settings and their
associated defaults in the project definition file.

Check In (you must be logged into the vault) Adds a file to the vault
and creates a new version of the file. For a first time check
in of a drawing file, the project definition file is forced to
be checked in at the same time since it needs to be vaulted
first to establish a location in the Vault database.

Check Out (you must be logged into the vault) Reserves and locks the
master drawing file. Retrieves an updated copy, if necessary.
Checks out the drawing files when the project file is under
Vault control.

Undo Check Out (you must be logged into the vault) Removes the reserva-
tion/lock from the master drawing file. The master file is
now available for others to check out. Any modifications
made to the local copy are not checked back into the vault.

Get Latest (you must be logged into the vault) Retrieves the latest
master copy from the vault and copies it into your working
folder. Older files are indicated by the status indicator dis-
playing a red background.

NOTE Two projects can reference the same drawing file, however doing so can
lead to conflicts if both projects try to modify the same drawing with a project-wide
tagging or cross-referencing function.

Details

Switches between displaying drawing previews and drawing descriptions. The

drawing details are updated when you highlight a drawing file and remain

60 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 visible until a new drawing file is selected. Use the up and down arrow keys
on your keyboard to switch drawings.

Details Displays project and drawing detail based on what is highlighted in

the Project pane. Information that is listed includes the status, file
name, file location, file size, last saved date, and the name of the last
user who modified the file.

Preview Displays the last saved thumbnail view for the highlighted drawing
in the drawing list.

Vault Status Icons

(you must be logged into the vault) The Vault Status Icons indicate the status
of your local copy of the files as compared against the master copy of those
same files in the vault.
The Vault Status indicate when the local copy is in sync with the master and
when it's not. The tooltips help guide you to the next logical steps - especially
when the local copy is no longer in sync with the master. These icons are
crucial to the overall understanding of how to work in a vaulted environment.

Icon Meaning

File is not in the vault.

File is in the vault in a checked-in state, and the version you are working on is
the same as in the vault. Also referred to as the Latest Version.

File is in the vault in a checked-in state, but the version you are working on is
newer than the master file in the vault. This typically means that your local file
was changed without checking it out. The blank icon indicates that the master
file is available for check out. If you want to save these changes, check the file
out, and then select the Don't get local copy option.

File is in the vault in a checked-in state, but the version you are working on is
older than the latest version in the vault. This typically means that another user
made changes since your last update. Use Reload to update to the latest available
version.

About collaborative design | 61

 The master file is checked out to you and the version you are working on is the
same as in the vault.

File is checked out to you, but the version you are working on is newer than
the latest version in the vault. This typically means that you made changes to
the model since the last time you checked out the file, but have not checked it
back in.

File is checked out to you, but the version you are working on is older than the
master file in the vault. This typically means that you started with a version for
the vault that was older than the latest, and checked it out to promote it to the
latest.

File is checked out to another user, and the version you are working on is the
same as in the vault. Also referred to as the Latest Version. This typically happens
if the other user did not check changes back into the vault.

File is checked out to another user, and the version you are working on is newer
than the file in the vault. This typically happens if the user checked in changes
to the vault, but kept the file checked out. Use Refresh from Vault to update to
the latest available version.

File is checked out to another user, but the version you are working on is older
than the latest version in the vault, and another user checked out this file. Use
Refresh from Vault to update to the latest available version.

File is locked and the local copy of the file is the same as the master file in the
vault.

File is locked and the local copy of the file is newer than the master file in the
vault.

File is locked and the local copy of the file is older than the master file in the
vault.

62 | Chapter 2 Project Management

Create a new drawing
Use the Project Manager to create a new drawing.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, click the New Drawing tool.

NOTE You can also create a new drawing by right-clicking at the

bottom of the tree inside the Project Manager and selecting New
Drawing or by right-clicking on the active project name and se-
lecting New Drawing.

3 In the Create New Drawing dialog box, enter the name for the
new drawing. The .dwg extension is automatically added to
the file name.

4 Specify the template drawing to use for the creation of the

drawing file. If left blank, the default ACAD.DWT file is used.
Click Browse to select a template drawing or enter the path
and name of a template in the box.

5 Select or create the directory where you want to save the

drawing.

6 (Optional) Enter descriptions for the drawing. You can enter

up to 3 description lines for the drawing file. The description
displays in title block updates, custom drawing properties, and
drawing list reports. Select from a list of predefined descriptions
from the active project by clicking the arrow.

7 (Optional) Specify the IEC default values for the project, install-
ation, and location fields.

8 (Optional) Specify the sheet and drawing number value for

the WD_M block definition. Additionally, you can specify the
values to use for a section or subsection.

Create a new drawing | 63

 9 (Optional) Click OK-Properties to define settings and options
for your drawing. Changes you make through the Drawing
Properties dialog box are saved as attribute values on the
drawing's invisible WD_M block.

10 Click OK.

Create new drawing

Use this to create a drawing file to add to the active project.

Access:

On the Project Manager, click the New Drawing button.

Click Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. On the Project Manager, click
the New Drawing button.

NOTE You can also create a new drawing by right-clicking at the bottom of the
tree inside the Project Manager and selecting New Drawing or by right-clicking
on the active project name and selecting New Drawing.

Drawing File

Name Specifies the file name for the new drawing. A file
name must be entered to define any of the drawing
properties or to create a new drawing.

NOTE The .dwg extension is not required in the edit

box.

Template Specifies the path and filename for an AutoCAD

Electrical template drawing (.dwt) to use for the
creation of a new drawing file. If left blank, the de-
fault ACAD.DWT file is used. Click Browse to select
a template drawing or type in the path and name of
a template.

NOTE The previously used drawing template is re-

tained in the dialog box.

64 | Chapter 2 Project Management

For Reference Only Indicates that the drawing should not be included
in tagging, cross-referencing, and reporting func-
tions. If selected, the drawing is included in project-
wide plotting and title block operations.

Location Specifies the location for a drawing file. You can

override the default location for the drawing file and
create additional folders. If left blank, the drawing
file is created at the same location as the active pro-
ject's definition file. Click Browse to pick a folder
where the new drawing will be created.

NOTE You cannot have duplicate drawings in the

same location.

Description 1-3 Specifies up to 3 lines of description text for the

drawing file. The description displays in title block
updates and custom drawing properties. Select from
a list of predefined descriptions from the active pro-
ject by clicking the arrow.

NOTE Drawing descriptions are disabled when you

are modifying the properties of a drawing that is not
in a project or if the project file is unavailable for edit.

IEC-Style Designators

Specifies IEC default values for the drawing, such as Project (%P), Installation
(%I), and Location (%L) fields. When you insert a component, the %I and %L
default values are used if the Installation and/or Location values would
normally be blank.

Project Code Specifies a project code for the drawing settings on

all WD_M blocks. This value can be used as the re-
placeable parameter %P.

Installation Code Specifies the Installation code for the WD_M block
definition. This value can be used as the replaceable
parameter %I.

Create a new drawing | 65

Location Code Specifies the Location code for the WD_M block
definition. This value can be used as the replaceable
parameter %L.

Drawing Displays a list of Installation or Location codes to se-

lect from the active drawing.

Project Displays a list of previously defined Installation or

Location codes to select from the active project or
from the Default.INST or Default.LOC file.

Sheet Values

Component, wire, and cross-reference tagging use replaceable parameters in

their format. If you reference the drawing's sheet number or drawing number
in any of your tagging formats, then specify a default drawing-wide value to
use.

Sheet Specifies the sheet number value for the drawing settings. This
value can be used as the replaceable parameter %S.

Drawing Specifies the drawing number value for the drawing settings. This
value can be used as the replaceable parameter %D.

Section Specifies the section value for the drawing file saved in the project
definition file (.wdp). This value can be used as the replaceable
parameter %A.

Sub-Section Specifies the subsection value for the drawing file saved in the
project definition file (.wdp). This value can be used as the replace-
able parameter %B.

OK-Properties

Creates the drawing file in the specified location before opening the Drawing
Properties dialog box where you can define settings and options for your
drawing. Changes you make through this dialog box are saved as attribute
values on the drawing's invisible WD_M block. If your current drawing does
not have this required block present when any AutoCAD Electrical schematic

66 | Chapter 2 Project Management

command is invoked, AutoCAD Electrical automatically inserts this block at
0,0.

Create a new drawing | 67

Change drawing display options
You can use the Drawing List Display Configuration tool to change the way
your drawings are listed in the Project Manager. By default drawings are
identified by the drawing file name in the Project Drawing List.

1 On the Project Manager, click the Drawing List Display Con-

figuration tool.

2 Determine which display options to show in the drawing list.

Options include:
■ Installation Code (%I)
■ Location Code (%L)
■ Section
■ Sub Section
■ Sheet Number (%S)
■ Drawing Number (%D)
■ Drawing Description 1-3
■ File Name

3 Select the display option from the Display Options list and
click the >> button or add all of the options by clicking the
All >> button.
The display option you selected moves to the Current Display
Order list. To rearrange this list, select an option and click
Move Up or Move Down. To remove an option from the list,
select the option and click the << button.

4 (Optional) Change the character to use between the values in

the listing. The default separator value is a dash (-).

5 (Optional) Change the way the selection highlights in the

listing depending on whether the Project Manager is active or
not. By default the drawing file you select in the drawing list
is highlighted at all times; you can select to only highlight
your selection when the Project Manager drawing list is active.

6 Click OK.
The Project Drawing List automatically updates in the Project

68 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 Manager.

Drawing List Display Example

In this example, Sheet Number (%S) and Drawing Description 1 were selected
as the display options and the separator value is a dash.

Drawing List Before Drawing List After

demo01.dwg 1 - Flow and Interconnection diagram, I/O list

demo02.dwg 2 - 3-phase motor control, Control circuit
demo03.dwg 3 - Power supplies, I/O module feeds

Drawing list display configuration

Configures the display options. There are 10 values that can be associated
with a drawing listed and this allows you to display the information based on
your requirements.

Access:

On the Project Manager, click the Drawing List Display Configuration tool.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. On the Project
Manager, click the Drawing List Display Configuration tool.

Display Options Lists the values that you can associate to a drawing.

Arrow keys Moves the selected display option into or from the
Current Display Order. To add an option to the list,
select the display option from the Display Options
list and click the >> button or add all of the options
by clicking the All >> button. To remove an option
from the list, select the option and click the << but-
ton.

Current Display Order Lists the values to display in the listing. You must
have one entry specified.

Change drawing display options | 69

Separator Value Specifies which character to use between the values
in the listing. Type the character in the input box or
use the default (-).

Always show selection highlight/Show Changes the way the selection highlights in the list-
selection highlight only when active ing depending on whether the Project Manager is
active or not. By default the drawing file you select
in the drawing list is highlighted at all times; you can
select to only highlight your selection when the Pro-
ject Manager drawing list is active.

Move Up Moves the selected display option up one spot in the

Current Display Order list.

Move Down Moves the selected display option down one spot in
the Current Display Order list.

Overview of project related files

There are a number of optional project related files that AutoCAD Electrical
supports. These files provide various functions such as keeping a project
consistent, helping update custom title blocks across a project, or providing
custom settings for various tools such as the PLC I/O module insertion tool.
Optional AutoCAD Electrical project related files include:

Catalog lookup Database for choosing catalog part number assignments.

It is also referenced when automatically generating various
bill of materials reports.
This is an Access-format MDB file that is named <pro-
ject>_cat.mdb (project-specific version of a catalog lookup
file) or DEFAULT_CAT.MDB (default catalog lookup file). If
the project-specific .mdb file is used, it needs to be in the
same folder where the <project>.wdp file is located. If a
project-specific version is not found, then the DE-
FAULT_CAT.MDB is searched for in the same folder as the
active project file, and then in the paths defined in subdir-
ectory search sequence "C" below.

70 | Chapter 2 Project Management

Description defaults Lists various standard component description selections,
accessible by clicking Defaults on the Insert/Edit Compon-
ent and Panel Insert/Edit Component dialog boxes.
This file can be a family-specific ASCII text file with a .wdd
extension (for example, "PB.WDD" for family “PB” pushbut-
tons). If the family-specific file is not found, then it searches
for a file with the same path and name as the active project
with a .wdd extension (<project>.wdd). If neither a family-
specific or project-specific file is found, it defaults to
searching for a general description file WD_DESC.WDD in
the various AutoCAD Electrical search paths and AutoCAD
support paths (subdirectory search sequence “A” below).
If none are found, it prompts for browsing to a .wdd de-
scription file.
When you click Defaults on the Insert/Edit Component or
Panel Insert/Edit Component dialog box the contents of
the ASCII text file display in a dialog box where you can
select a line of text to use as the description text. The selec-
ted text, up to a “;” comment delimiter if any, then displays
in the description edit box on the Insert/Edit dialog box.
If the selected text has one or more “|” characters, it is in-
terpreted as having line breaks so the 2nd and 3rd descrip-
tion lines fill in as well.

External component Component tagging pick list data carried in an external

text file, accessed when you click External List on the In-
sert/Edit dialog box for schematic or panel layouts. The
data in this file can be comma-delimited or space-delimited
and can be in any order. When accessed, the contents of
the file display in a dialog box so you can select a line of
data. It is broken down and displays in a dialog box for
mapping to various attributes carried by the schematic
component or panel footprint symbol being edited.
The elements in the selected line of file data can be mapped
to the edited schematic or footprint symbol's attributes
such as tag, description, location, and catalog part number.
This text file can have a .txt, .csv or .wdx extension. If you
do not browse to and select a specific file, AutoCAD Elec-
trical searches for a file with the same path and name as
the project’s .wdp file but with a .wdx extension. On sub-
sequent command invocations, AutoCAD Electrical defaults
to the previously selected file name.

Overview of project related files | 71

Family tag code map Overrides the family tag code of the library symbols by
mapping the codes to new values. The tag code of a symbol
is used in generating the tag-ID of inserted components,
like the "PB" of tag-ID "PB101" or the "K" of tag-ID "-K25."
The file WD_FAM.DAT is searched for in the subdirectory
search sequence "A" below. This is an ASCII text file in the
format of <old>, <new>. For example, the default family
tag code for a JIC library pilot light is “LT” and generates
tags such as “LT101.” To override this tag code and substi-
tute a family code of “LITE” without editing the library
symbols, add this line to the wd_fam.dat: “LT, LITE.”

Footprint lookup Database for graphical footprint assignments based on the

catalog part number assignments.
A file with the same path and name as the project but with
a “_FOOTPRINT_LOOKUP.MDB” suffix and extension is
searched for first. If the file is not found, then the default
FOOTPRINT_LOOKUP.MDB file is searched for in the same
directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory
search sequence "B" below.

Schematic lookup Database for schematic components inserted from panel

footprints.
A file with the same path and name as the project but with
a “_SCHEMATIC_LOOKUP.MDB” suffix and extension is
searched for first. If the file is not found, then the default
SCHEMATIC_LOOKUP.MDB file is searched for in the same
directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory
search sequence "B" below.

Installation codes Lists the default installation codes for selections found in
the Insert/Edit Component and Panel Insert/Edit Compon-
ent dialog boxes (select Include external list from the install-
ation's Project list subdialog box).
A file with the same path and name as the project with an
.inst extension is searched for first. If the file is not found,
then the DEFAULT.INST file is searched for in the same
directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory
search sequence "A" below.

72 | Chapter 2 Project Management

Location codes Lists the default location codes for selections found in the
Insert/Edit Component and Panel Insert/Edit Component
dialog boxes (select Include external list from the location's
Project list subdialog box).
A file with the same path and name as the project with a
.loc extension is searched for first. If the file is not found,
then the DEFAULT.LOC file is searched for in the same dir-
ectory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search
sequence "A" below.

Group codes Lists the default group codes for selections found in the
Panel Insert/Edit Component dialog box (select Include
external list from the location's Project list subdialog box).
A file with the same path and name as the project with a
.grp extension is searched for first. If the file is not found,
then the DEFAULT.GRP file is searched for in the same dir-
ectory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search
sequence "A" below.

Mount codes Lists the default mount codes for selections found in the
Panel Insert/Edit Component dialog boxes (select Include
external list from the location's Project list subdialog box).
A file with the same path and name as the project with a
.mnt extension is searched for first. If the file is not found,
then the DEFAULT.MNT file is searched for in the same
directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory
search sequence "A" below.

Project labels Customizes the generic LINEx labels in the various title
block and project information dialog boxes.
A file with the same path and name as the project with a
.wdl extension is searched for first. If the file is not found,
then the DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL file is searched for in the
same directory as the project file and then in the subdirect-
ory search sequence "A" below.

Rating defaults Lists the default rating values found in the Insert/Edit
Component and Panel Insert/Edit Component dialog boxes.
The contents of this ASCII text file display in a dialog box.
The "|" character can be used to delimit consecutive RAT-
INGx value assignments. For example, picking an entry

Overview of project related files | 73

 "30A|60A" would put "30A" into the first RATINGx attribute
and "60A" into the RATING(x+1) attribute.
A file with the same path and name as the project but with
a .wdr extension is searched for first. If the file is not found,
then the default WD_RATINGS.WDR file is searched for in
the subdirectory search sequence "A" below. Alternately, a
family-specific file can be accessed (for example, PS.WDR
for pressure switches).

Real time error checking The .wdn file is a text file used specifically for auditing.
Terminal numbers listed in the .wdn file are not checked
for terminal number duplication. You can use wildcards to
exclude a range of terminals for duplication checking such
as all terminals with a tag name starting with "T" and with
terminal number "1." AutoCAD Electrical searches for the
<project_name>.wdn file in the same folder as the project
definition file (*.wdp). If <project_name>.wdn is not found,
AutoCAD Electrical looks for the DEFAULT.WDN file in the
project folder (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My
Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Proj).
The default .wdn file contains the terminal number filers
GND, PE, and E. These are ignored when checking for du-
plication and will not be listed in the Electrical Audit report.
Edit this file with an ASCII text editor, such as WordPad.

RSLogix import Defines the optional mapping of RSLogix codes to AutoCAD

Electrical symbol block names for an RSLogix file import.
A file with the same path and name as the project but with
a .wdf extension is searched for first. If the file is not found,
then the file DEFAULT_RSLOGIX.WDF file is searched for in
the subdirectory search sequence "A" below and, if not
found, file _DEFAULT_RSLOGIX.WDF is then searched for.

Spreadsheet to PLC tool Defines the settings for the AutoCAD Electrical Spreadsheet
to PLC I/O Utility.
You are prompted to browse to a file with a .wdi extension.
The default settings file is DEMOPLC.WDI.

Title block The attribute name mapping support file for the AutoCAD
Electrical title block update tool.

74 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 A file with the same path and name as the project but with
a .wdt extension is searched for first. If the file is not found,
then the DEFAULT.WDT file is searched for in the same
directory as the project file. If the file is not found, then the
file is searched for in the subdirectory search sequence "A"
below.

User defined attributes An attribute text file of user-defined attributes defined on

AutoCAD Electrical blocks. The User Defined Attribute List
is used by report tools to determine which additional attrib-
utes are listed in a report. The list file name can be the same
as the active project or named Default to be used by the
entire system. The DEFAULT.WDA file is saved in the base
project folder, while the <project_name>.wda file is saved
in the same folder as the project definition file (*.wdp).

Wire color and gauge labels Maps color and gauge wire descriptions based on wire
layers.
A file with the same path and name as the project but with
a .wdw extension is searched for first. If the file is not found,
then the DEFAULT.WDW file is searched for in the same
directory as the project file. If the file is not found, then the
file is searched for in the subdirectory search sequence "A"
below.

Subdirectory search sequence "A"

1 Full path (if full path name given)

2 User subdirectory (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application

Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country
code}\Support\User\)

3 Active project's .wdp file subdirectory

4 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Documents and

Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD
Electrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support\AeData\)

5 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Documents and

Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD
Electrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support\)

Overview of project related files | 75

 6 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade
{version}\Support\)

7 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade

{version}\)

8 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options ➤ Files ➤ Support Files

Search Path

Subdirectory search sequence "B"

1 Full path (if full path name given)

2 User subdirectory (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application

Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country
code}\Support\User\)

3 Catalog lookup subdirectory (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My

Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Catalogs\)

4 Panel footprint library base subdirectory (C:\Program Files

[(x86)]\autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\panel\)

5 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Documents and

Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD
Electrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support\AeData\)

6 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Documents and

Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD
Electrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support\)

7 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade

{version}\Support\)

8 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade

{version}\)

9 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options ➤ Files ➤ Support Files

Search Path

Subdirectory search sequence "C"

1 Full path (if full path name given)

76 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 2 User subdirectory (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release number}\{country
code}\Support\User\)

3 Catalog lookup subdirectory (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My

Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Catalogs\)

4 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Documents and

Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD
Electrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support\AeData\)

5 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Documents and

Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD
Electrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support\)

6 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade

{version}\Support\)

7 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade

{version}\)

8 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options ➤ Files ➤ Support Files

Search Path

NOTE If the environment file (wd.env) has setting WD_ACADPATHFIRST

uncommented and set to 1, then the last search item, the Options paths, are
searched between steps 1 and 2 above instead of at the very end.

NOTE If the environment file (wd.env) has setting WD_SUP_ALT uncommented

and set to a valid subdirectory path, then it is inserted into the search sequence
just after User.

Overview of the project file format

A “.wdp" project file is a text file that lists the drawing files that are to be
treated as a multi-drawing wiring diagram. AutoCAD Electrical manages this
file automatically. Here is a general breakdown of the .wdp file format:

Project description All lines of text marked with "*[n]" in columns 1-4 followed
by the line of project data (n=1 to xxx)

Overview of the project file format | 77

Project default settings About 75 entries marked with "?[n]" in columns 1-4. Most
of these values are mirrored on attributes carried by each
drawing's invisible WD_M block.

NOTE This current project "copy" of the drawing properties

settings can migrate to each new AutoCAD Electrical
drawing and overwrite the defaults carried on the
WD_M.dwg library symbol as it inserts. When the WD_M
block alert box pops up for permission to insert into a new
or non-AutoCAD Electrical drawing, the dialog's toggle
setting determines whether the drawing's settings are the
defaults carried on the WD_M.dwg library symbol (switch
OFF), or be overwritten to match the "?[n]" settings listed
here in the current project's ".wdp" file (switch ON).

For example, you have an active project that is set up for

a one-of-a-kind wire tagging format that is different from
all of your other projects and different from the default
carried on the symbol library’s WD_M.dwg block insert.
When you start a new drawing for the project, you want
to have this switch turned on so that the special settings
of your active project update the values on the inserted
WD_M block insert and cause it to match the project’s
special settings. This eliminates the need to go back into a
new drawing’s properties and adjust the wire tagging
format setting to match the drawing.

Default schematic library path Marked with "+[1]" in columns 1-4 followed by path or
semicolon delimited paths. If multiple paths, the search for
a given library symbol file name includes the sequence of
the paths listed here in the order given.

Schematic icon menu file Marked with "+[2]" in columns 1-4 followed by file. This
can be a full path or just the icon menu file name itself
(such as ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT or ACE_IEC_MENU.DAT).

Default panel library path Marked with "+[3]" in columns 1-4 followed by base panel
library path or semicolon delimited base paths. If multiple
paths, the search for a given footprint library symbol in-
cludes the sequence of paths listed here in the order given.

78 | Chapter 2 Project Management

Panel icon menu file Marked with "+[4]" in columns 1-4 followed by file. This
can be a full path or just the icon menu file name itself
(such as ACE_PANEL_MENU.DAT).

Real-time inter-drawing update Marked with "+[5]" followed by 1= automatic/real-time,

0= cross-reference command must be explicitly invoked.

Use MISC_CAT table Marked with "+[6]" followed by 1=always use MISC_CAT
for catalog lookup, 2= use MISC_CAT if component specific
table not found, 0 or entry omitted = use component-spe-
cific only.

LINEx entries for reports Marked with "+[9]" followed by comma-delimited list. This
gives a list of project properties ➤ description entries that
are included as a header for generated reports.

Combined Installation/Location/Tag Marked with "+[10]" followed by 0= Combined Installa-

tion/Location component tag mode is “off”, 1= mode is
“on”, 3= mode is “on” and include Installation/Location
as a tag prefix.

DESC case mode Marked with "+[11]" followed by 0= allow entered DESC1-
DESC3 to be upper/lower case, missing or 1= force all
entered DESC1-DESC3 values to uppercase.

Wire network mode Marked with "+[13]" followed by 0 or missing= wire tagging
normal mode (wires combined into one wire number as-
signment), 1=per wire basis mode (each connected wire
gets its own wire number assignment).

IEC style Installation/Location tag Marked with "+[14]" followed by 0 or missing= add prefix
to TAG when output to reports, 1=suppress adding the
prefix to TAG for reports, 3=suppress Installation/Location
tag prefix when match drawing-wide Installation/Location
default values for reports. This option is only used when
+[10] above is set to 1 or 3.

Auto-fill Installation/Location Marked with "+[15]" followed by 1= component insert to

auto-fill Installation/Location attributes with drawing de-

Overview of the project file format | 79

 faults, 0 or missing= normal mode (don't auto-fill attribute
values).

Schematic- ➤ Panel wire format Marked with "+[16]" for the format that is to deal with wire
connection entries when there is no existing terminal pin
number text on the panel wiring diagram device footprint,
meaning annotation ends up formatted into an Mtext en-
tity, and "+[17]" for format of data written onto target
TERMxx/WIRENOxx attributes carried on the panel wiring
diagram device footprint.

Auto-hide wire number Marked with "+[18]" followed by 1= auto-hide a wire

number on a wire network when a wire number terminal
is present on the network (so that the same wire number
does not display twice on the single wire network), 0=
normal mode (do not hide any wire number text).

Wire number offset Marked with "+[19]" followed by wire number offset value,
0 or blank or missing= normal centering of wire numbers
on the wire segment, value= offset from left or upper end
of wire segment.

Alternate WD.ENV Marked with "+[20]" followed by the file name. If this altern-
ative .env file does not exist or cannot be found, the default
wd.env file is used.

Wire number by layer Marked with "+[21]" followed by 0= wire number by layer
mode is “off”, 1= mode is “on”, and "+[22]" holds the layer
setup. Format of layer setup is semicolon delimited in re-
peating groups of four elements per layer definition. <layer
name>;<tag format>;<starting wire number>;<suffix list>;...

Alternate catalog lookup Marked with "+[23]" followed by 0= alternate catalog file
not defined, 1=defined and "+[24]" holds the alternate
catalog lookup file name.

Exclude wire number range Marked with "+[27]" followed by the wire number ranges
to exclude for sequential wire numbering. (blank or miss-
ing= no wire numbers excluded) For example, “100-
199,500-699.”

80 | Chapter 2 Project Management

Wire number terminal override Marked with "+[29]" followed by 0= normal wire numbering
mode or 1=calculate reference-based wire number based
on the location not the first terminal in the wire network
(or revert to normal wire numbering mode if no terminal
in the network).

Calculation of the "CLEN" column Marked with "+[30]" and set as a global variable (default
is 0.0) to aid in the calculation of the "CLEN" column (cal-
culated wire length) in a from/to report that is able to map
schematic wire connections to panel physical layouts. This
value is the extra amount to add to each end of a calculated
wire segment for connection purposes.

Tag/Wire number order Marked with "+[31]" and set in the Project Properties dialog
box. The value can be blank (no sort order override) or 0-
7 for the various horizontal/vertical sort orders listed in the
dialog box.

Real-time error checking Marked with "+[32]" followed by 0= real-time error checking
mode is “off”, 1= mode is “on.”

Grid column headers Marked with "+[33]" to indicate a string of column names
used in grid column headers in the Wire Type commands.

Suppress dash Marked with "+[34]" to suppress the dash (-) if it is the first
character of a tag when the Combined installation/location
component tag mode is “on.” See the [+10} entry.

Project drawing list All remaining entries give time relative path (relative to the
location of the project’s .wdp file itself) to each drawing
that is part of the project. The drawing name is given first.
Then, if special assignments or descriptions are defined for
the drawing, this information follows the drawing name in
subsequent lines. Each line is prefixed with a code. If special
"sec/sub" groupings are defined, then a drawing's "sec" is
preceded by a "=" entry and "sub" by a "==" entry. If one
to three lines of description are defined, each is preceded
by a "===" entry. If a drawing is marked "Ref only", it is
preceded by a "====REF" entry.

Overview of the project file format | 81

 NOTE The following options are no longer valid since they are now drawing
settings: Cross-reference fill format (+[7]), Cross-reference text between (+[8]) and
Cross-reference order (+[28]). Additionally Project scratch database (+[12]) has
been replaced by the PDS.

Archive a project
The zip utility creates a zip file of the current project's .wdp file and one or
more drawing files it references. The zip file can optionally include a copy of
the project's temporary database file to eliminate the need to rebuild the
database when the project is unzipped at a later date.
For the zip utility to function, a zip application must be installed on the system
running AutoCAD Electrical.
Initial Configuration

1 Edit the .env file to point to the zip utility.

2 Create an entry for the utility labeled WD_ZIP followed by a comma and
then the full path name to the executable zip program. For example,
WD_ZIP,c:\Program Files [(x86)]\winzip\winzip32.exe.

NOTE All drawings to be included in the zipped file must be closed prior to
running the zip utility.

This utility can also be accessed from within a number of AutoCAD Electrical
routines that access and modify multiple drawings.

Archive a drawing set

1 Select Projects ➤ Zip Project.

2 Select the drawings to process and click OK.

3 In the AutoCAD Electrical Project Zip dialog box, enter the zip name of
the file to create or update.

4 Indicate whether to include the project database.

5 Click OK.

This utility can also be accessed from within a number of AutoCAD Electrical
routines that access and modify multiple drawings.

82 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 Project zip
Creates a framework for zipping and archiving the current project's drawing
set. Your zip program may generate an error message if the active drawing is
one of the drawings to zip.

Access:

On the Project Manager, click the arrow on the Publish/Plot tool and select Zip
Project. Select the projects to zip and click OK.
From the Projects menu, select Zip Project. Select the projects to zip and click
OK.
Additionally, the utility can be accessed from within a number of AutoCAD
Electrical routines that access and modify multiple drawings.

Enter zip file name to create/update Lists the name and location for the zip file to create.
If you want to update a file, browse to the zip file.

Include project database file Specifies to include the project database file (.mdb)
in the zip file.

Overview of set up for multiple clients

You can set up AutoCAD Electrical to deal with multiple clients, each with its
own title block and library requirements. Client-specific drawing borders, title
blocks, parts libraries, and part number lookup files can be set up to be
automatically selected by AutoCAD Electrical when working on a specific
client's project.

Client subdirectory structure

Set up a subdirectory structure where each client is assigned their own

subdirectory. For example, it might look like this:
n:\campbell.nap\
n:\j-m\

Work with Multiple Clients | 83

 n:\jeep_toledo\

Set up title block mapping files for clients

Use the AutoCAD Electrical Title block setup tool to create a default.wdt file
for each client's title block. Store this default.wdt in the client's base
subdirectory. For example:
n:\campbell.nap\default.wdt
One way to do this:

1 Use AutoCAD Electrical to create a project in the client's base subdirectory

(ex: n:\campbell.nap\dummy.wdp).

2 Open the client's drawing border drawing or any existing drawing that
contains the client's title block (block with attributes).

3 Select Project ➤ Title Block Setup.

4 In the Title block link method dialog box, select the middle option listed
under "Method 1" -- the DEFAULT.WDT file for any project found in
subdirectory n:\campbell.nap.

5 Click OK.

6 Follow the dialog boxes and pick options to build the default.wdt file.

Customize labels for title blocks

Several title block-related dialog boxes in AutoCAD Electrical display generic
labels like "LINE1", "LINE2", and so on. You can change these labels so that
they match up with the actual link to the client's title block. For example, in
the ".wdt" mapping file, you might have linked the AutoCAD Electrical data
"LINE10" value to the "DRAWN_BY" attribute on the client's title block. What
you want to see when AutoCAD Electrical displays a title block-related dialog
box is not "LINE10" but "Drawn by."

1 Create a file called default_wdtitle.wdl in the client's subdirectory where

you store the project (.wdp) files. Use any generic text editor like the
Windows Notepad or Wordpad.

2 Edit the file as necessary.

The file should contain 1 line per label in the format LINEx=label. The
entries do not have to be in order and line numbers may be skipped.

3 Save and exit.

84 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 Try updating the Title Block from the Project Manager. Notice all of the
updated labels.

Specify client-specific library symbols

If the client has special symbols or text size settings that are different from
the default libraries provided with the AutoCAD Electrical product, create and
maintain a client-specific symbol library subdirectory with smart AutoCAD
Electrical symbols that have been adjusted to meet that client's standards.
When you start a new project for this client, set the AutoCAD Electrical Symbol
Library path to point at the client's library.

1 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Properties.

2 In the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box, click the plus
sign (+) next to Schematic Libraries. Click Add and enter the library's
path into the edit box. Make it the first or only path listed.
This causes AutoCAD Electrical to look in the client-specific symbol library
first before going to a default AutoCAD Electrical symbol library.

3 Click OK.

NOTE Make sure you also update the Panel Footprint Library path.

Start a project for a client

1 Create and save the AutoCAD Electrical project .wdp file to the client's
base subdirectory where the client's default.wdt and wdtitle.wdl files are
stored. Make sure that the new project also points at the client's symbol
library.
The actual drawings for the project can be stored anywhere but you might
want to store them in some kind of "job number" subdirectory under the
base client subdirectory. For example, let's say that for client "Campbell"
you have a new project, 12345. Under the N:\campbell.nap network
drive subdirectory, create subdirectory n:\campbell.nap\12345. This is
where to save the drawings for that project.

2 Create a new project and save it to the base subdirectory.

For example, create project P12345.wdp and save it to
n:\campbell.nap\P12345.wdp (along with any other Campbell projects
you've already created - they are all grouped together in this base
subdirectory but their drawing sets are isolated into unique job number
subdirectories).

Overview of set up for multiple clients | 85

 With the above setup, anytime you work on a Campbell project (project file
".wdp" stored in the n:\campbell.nap directory), AutoCAD Electrical
automatically uses the client-specific title block mapping file
(n:\campbell.nap\default.wdt) and the client-specific dialog box label file
(n:\campbell.nap\wdtitle.wdl).

Miscellaneous Reference files

Add new table to MDB

Access:

From the Projects menu, select Extras ➤ Add Table to Catalog Database. Select
the database to use and click Open.

MDB file to modify Specifies the file name of the Catalog Database file to
modify.

Existing tables Lists the existing tables found in the file.

Add new table Specifies the name of new table to add to the selected
catalog database. The new, blank table inserts with the
default fields defined (for example, the fields needed for
the catalog lookup function).

Project database table data -- project drawing files

update
AutoCAD Electrical maintains a scratch database for a project, stored in
Microsoft Access format that is used to speed up certain project-wide
operations. This file is for scratch use only; it is not part of the intelligence

86 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 stored in an AutoCAD Electrical project. If the scratch database file is missing
or corrupted, it is automatically generated from the project's drawing set. The
project's scratch database file can be used to write back to text data carried on
symbols on the drawings. With some care (described below), you can edit the
database directly and then import the information back to the drawings.
The file name is <project>.mdb where <project> matches the current project's
.wdp file name.

Access:

Click Projects ➤ Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Update from Project Scratch

Database.

Select the database table to update then select the drawings to process. Any
changes are written back to the appropriate objects. Alternately, save the
scratch database file with a new name, edit, and then reference this file when
the command starts.
Cautionary Note
AutoCAD Electrical 2006 and later introduced an automatic scratch database
"freshen" function, Project Database Service (PDS), which complicates use of
this command over previous versions of AutoCAD Electrical. The PDS
automatically updates the scratch project database without your intervention
(and without your knowledge). If you edit the scratch database with all of the
changes you want to write back to your project set, there is a chance that the
PDS will come in, without warning, and remove all of these edits (to match
the current state of the unmodified dwgs) before you have a chance to run
the command to update the drawings.
Even if you are careful not to update the drawings while doing the mdb edit
(so that the PDS will not update anything), you can still lose all your edits
when you launch the Update from Project Scratch Database command. This
is because the command, just before it begins the update, may ask you if it is
OK to Qsave the active drawing. If you select OK, then the PDS sees a change
and updates the database (for example, erases changes for current drawing),
just as the command is getting ready to process.
To prevent this, do not update the drawings while editing the scratch database
file and answer "NO" to the Qsave prompt when invoking the actual update
command.

Project database table data -- project drawing files update | 87

 Edit report
Access:

From the Projects menu, select Extras ➤ Settings List Utility. Click Edit Mode.

If you edit the information in the Configuration Report, you will have an
option to update the project and drawings with the new information. Re-order
the lines with the Move Up, Move Down, Move to Top, and Move to Bottom
buttons. If you re-order the lines, the order of the drawing list in the project
file (.WDP) can be updated to match.

Move Up Moves the currently selected line(s) up one place in the

report.

Move Down Moves the currently selected line(s) down one place in the
report.

Move to Top Moves the currently selected line(s) to the top of the report.

Move to Bottom Moves the currently selected line(s) to the bottom of the
report.

Edit

Edits the values of the currently selected line. Double click any line to go
directly into edit.

DWGNAM Specifies the drawing name.

SEC If you change any of the Sec data, the Section data held
in the project file (.WDP) can be updated to match.

SUBSEC If you change any of the Sub-Sec data, the Sub-Section

data held in the project file (.WDP) can be updated to
match.

88 | Chapter 2 Project Management

SH If you change any of the SH data, the Sheet (%S) field for
that drawing can be updated to match.

SHDWGNAM If you change any of the SHDWGNAM data, the Dwg no.
(%D) field for that drawing can be updated to match.

IEC_P If you change any of the IEC_P data, the IEC Project (%P)
field for that drawing can be updated to match.

IEC_I If you change any of the IEC_I data, the IEC Installation
(%I) field for that drawing can be updated to match.

IEC_L If you change any of the IEC_L data, the IEC Location (%L)
field for that drawing can be updated to match.

SH-DESC If you change any of the SH-DESC data, the Description

data held in the project file (.WDP) can be updated to
match.

IEC tag mode update

If a change to the IEC component tag mode format is detected, use this tool
to freshen the tag format. This makes sure that component tags are displayed
per the change.

Access:

From the Projects menu, select IEC Tag Mode - Update.

Freshen tags for Specifies to run a freshen on the entire project, the
active drawing only, or on selected components in
the active drawing.

Freshen parent/child cross-reference an- Reruns the cross-reference update.

notation

IEC tag mode update | 89

Remove any leading dash character from Indicates whether any leading "-" characters for
component tags component tags are suppressed (box checked) or
added (box unchecked). This is controlled from the
Project Properties ➤ Components dialog box.

Force Installation and Location attributes Switches the visibility of Installation and Location at-
to be visible or invisible tributes on each component.

Rebuild database file

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Projects tool to access the Rebuild Project
Database tool.
From the Projects menu, select Projects ➤ Rebuild/Freshen Project Database.

■ List: Lists the drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the project's wire
connection table. You can trigger an update when the dialog box is open
or you can defter to auto-update when a wire report is run.

■ Include wire connection processing: Indicates to process wire connections

when updating the database file or the wire connection table.

■ Freshen only: Updates the wire connection table with the out-of-date files.

■ Full rebuild: Performs a full rebuild of the project database file.

Select drawings to process

90 | Chapter 2 Project Management

 Lists the drawings available to update in the current project.

Access:

Select to run any of the project-wide commands.

Do All Selects all of the drawings from the project drawing list.

Process Selects one or more drawings from the project drawing

list.

Reset Moves all selected drawings back to the project drawing

list.

Un-select Moves one or more drawings back to the project drawing

list.

by Section/subsection Selects drawings by user-defined sections and subsections.

Task list
Make the changes to the drawing files that have been accumulated while
drawing files were unavailable for editing.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. On the Project Manager, click the Project Task
List tool or right-click the project name and select Task List. On the Update from
dialog box, select Update: Select from list of drawings and click OK.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. On the Project
Manager, click the Project Task List tool or right-click the project name, and
select Task List. On the Update from dialog box, select Update: Select from list
of drawings and click OK.

The tasks that still need to be performed on the selected drawings are listed
in the upper portion of the dialog box. The login name of the user creating
the task, file name, installation and location codes, component tag, type,

Task list | 91
 status, attribute, old value and new value are all displayed. The 'x' indicates
that the source of the change no longer matches the task list.

Sort Sorts the list of tasks to be performed. You can specify four sorts
to perform on the list.

Select All Selects all of the tasks in the list. When you click OK, all of the
pending tasks will be performed on the selected drawings.

Remove Removes the selected task from the list.

Files unavailable for processing

If some of the drawings selected for processing are unavailable (such as in a
read-only state) this dialog displays. The file name, status, and location of the
drawing is listed in the dialog for review.

Retry Now Tries to gain full write access to the entire list of drawing files
previously selected. If you gain full access, the files are locked out
by you and other users cannot make any modifications until the
project-wide command finishes.

Task Tasks (saves) all modifications in a task list to be run at a later

time. The task list is maintained inside of the Project Task List
database file (project_update.mdb). Not all commands can write
to the task list. See the list below of commands that can be tasked.

Cancel Cancels the update and returns to the Select Drawings to Process
dialog box. Select other files to update or try to gain write access
to the entire list of drawings to process.

Ignore Processes the command on the drawings that are available for
editing. Changes to unavailable drawings are not saved to the
task list for later updates.

92 | Chapter 2 Project Management

Commands that write to the project_udpate.mdb file

■ Edit Component

■ Retag Component

■ Insert or copy a circuit

■ Location box changes

■ Find/Edit/Replace

■ Set/Edit Wire Connection Sequence

■ Changing an IEC setting before running a Retag

■ Copy Location/Installation/Mount/Group

■ Copy BOM

■ Block Swap

■ Terminal Strip Editor

■ Insert Schematic from Panel

Files unavailable for processing | 93

94
Drawing and Project
Properties 3
In this chapter
■ Overview of project and
drawing properties
■ Use replaceable
parameters
■ Save settings to the project
file
■ Create a template drawing
■ Updating the WD_M Block
■ Using Layers

95
Overview of project and drawing properties
Use the Project Properties dialog box to define settings when creating a project
and then have those settings used for new drawings or those added to the
project.In the Project Properties dialog box, icons indicate whether the settings
apply to project settings or drawing defaults.

Settings that apply to project settings and are saved inside the project definition
file (*.wdp).

Settings that are saved in the project file as drawing defaults. Drawing related
data that should be added to the project when running the Add Drawing
command is saved as Drawing Custom Properties.

Use the Drawing Properties dialog box to define settings for a new or selected
drawing. These settings override the project properties set in the Project
Properties dialog box. If the drawing is part of a project, the project name
displays in the dialog box; otherwise text displays indicating that the drawing
is not part of a project and drawing-related edit fields that are saved in the
.wdp file are disabled.
You can specify settings for the project or drawing defaults, components, wire
numbers, cross-references, styles and the drawing format using either the
Project Properties or Drawing Properties dialog boxes. An overview of the
available options for each tab are listed below.

Settings

Project settings include:

■ Library and Icon Menu paths

■ Catalog lookup file preferences

■ Real time error checking options

Drawing settings include:

■ Drawing type and descriptions

■ IEC default values for the Project (%P), Installation (%I), and Location
(%L) fields

96 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

■ Sheet values for the sheet and drawing in addition to section or subsection
codes

Components

Use this tab to:

■ Specify the way new component tags are created.

■ Switch between sequential or line reference based tags.

■ Set component tag options such as using combined Installation/Location

tags or suppressing the Installation/Location tag on reports.

■ Display description text in uppercase.

Wire Numbers

Use this tab to:

■ Set the wire number format.

■ Switch between sequential or line reference based wire numbers.

■ Set wire number options such as hidden numbers, excluded numbers, or

displaying numbers on a per wire basis.

■ Set up wire number layer options.

■ Define wire number placement: above, below, or in-line.

■ Define wire number leaders.

Cross-References

Use this tab to:

■ Define the cross-reference annotation format.

■ Set cross-reference options such as suppressing Installation/Location codes

or using real time signal and contact cross-referencing between drawings.

■ Set component cross-reference display: text, graphical, or table. You can

also change the display format setup from this dialog box.

Overview of project and drawing properties | 97

 Styles

Use this tab to:

■ Change default styles for arrows, plcs, fan-in/out markers, and wiring.

■ Add or remove layers from the layer list.

Drawing Format

Use this tab to:

■ Set the default orientation, spacing and width values for any new ladders
inserted on the drawing.

■ Specify the format referencing style: X-Y Grid, X Zones, or Reference

Numbers.

■ Set the scale factor used when inserting new components or wire numbers
on the drawing.

■ Set the tag/wire number sort order.

■ Define and manage wire and component layers.

Set project or drawing properties

You can specify settings for the project or drawing defaults, components, wire
numbers, cross-references, styles, and the drawing format using either the
Project Properties or Drawing Properties dialog boxes. The steps below are for
setting project properties but you can set drawing properties by opening the
Project Manager, right-clicking on the drawing name and selecting Properties

98 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 ➤ Drawing Properties or by clicking the Drawing Properties tool on the
toolbar.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select

Properties.

NOTE You can also set project properties when you create a new
project. Create the new project and click OK -Properties in the
Create New Project dialog box.

3 In the Project Properties dialog box, select the tab to modify

properties for.

4 Click OK.

Project properties: project settings tab

Modify your project default settings for libraries, catalog lookup, and error
checking.All information defined in this tab is saved to the project definition
file as a project default.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project
name, and select Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the project name, and select Properties.

Library and Icon Menu Paths

Select which schematic library, panel library, and icon menus to use.

Libraries To modify existing input fields in the tree structure, double-click

the folder, (for example, Schematic Libraries) and highlight the
path to change then browse to the path of the schematic or base
footprint symbol library you want to use for the project. You can
also include a series of paths for AutoCAD Electrical to search in
order. You can include electrical, pneumatic, or other schematic
libraries in the path.

Overview of project and drawing properties | 99

 NOTE The symbol search path includes the User and Project
folders (and potentially the AutoCAD search paths) prior to the
paths listed here. In the Project Manager, right-click the project
name, and select Settings to view the active search path for the
project.

Icon Menu File If you want to use an icon menu for the project that is different
from the default, enter the file name. This menu reference is saved
in the project's .wdp file.

NOTE You can only specify one search path for the icon menu.

Add Adds a new entry into the libraries tree structure.

Browse Browses for a folder to select a symbol library or icon menu from.

Remove Removes the selected path from the libraries tree structure.

Move Up Moves the selected path up one spot in the libraries tree structure.

Move Down Moves the selected path down one spot in the libraries tree
structure.

Default Brings the default paths from the environment file (WD.ENV) into
the list box tree view for all search paths found underneath the
highlighted folder.

Catalog Lookup File Preference

Use component specific tables Searches for the component name as the catalog
table. If the component table is not found, the family
name table is searched. If neither table is found, use
the Catalog Lookup File dialog box to create a com-
ponent or family table or select a different table.

Other File Defines a secondary catalog lookup file.

100 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

Always use MISC_CAT table Searches only the MISC_CAT table. You can search
other component tables if the catalog number is not
found in the MISC_CAT table.

Use MISC_CAT table only if component Uses the MISC_CAT table if the component or family
specific table does not exist tables are not found in the catalog database.

Options

Real time error checking Performs real time error checking on the project to
determine if duplications of wire numbers or com-
ponent tags occur in the project.
An error log file is created for every project regardless
whether you chose to display the real time warning
dialog or not. The real time warning is saved in the
log file named "<project_name>_error.log"and is
saved in the User subdirectory. If a log file already
exists, the new content is added to the same file. A
blank line separates one error record from another.

Tag/Wire Number Sort Order Sets the default wire numbering and component tag
sort order for the project.

Catalog lookup file

This defines a secondary catalog lookup file to use.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. On the Project Manager, right-click on the
Project name and select Properties. In the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings
dialog box, Catalog Lookup File Preference section, click Other File.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. On the Project
Manager, right-click on the Project name and select Properties. In the Project

Overview of project and drawing properties | 101

Access:

Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box, Catalog Lookup File Preference section,
click Other File.

Single catalog lookup file Specifies to use only one catalog lookup file.The file
that is used depends on what was selected on the
Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box.

Optional: Define a secondary catalog Specifies to define a secondary lookup file for the
lookup file for this project project. Catalog lookup files provided with AutoCAD
Electrical include: default_cat.mdb, footprint_look-
up.mdb, schematic_lookup.mdb,wd_lang1.mdb and
wd_picklist.mdb.
Defines a secondary catalog lookup file that functions
as such:
■ For catalog part number selection, switches to a
secondary catalog lookup file.
■ For BOM report generation, queries the second-
ary catalog lookup file when the target part
number is not found in the default file.

Project properties: components tab

Modify your project default settings for components. All information defined
in this tab is saved to the project definition file as project defaults and settings.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project
name, and select Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click on the project name, and select Properties.

Component TAG Format

Tag Format Specifies the way new component tags are cre-
ated.The tag consists of a minimum of 2 pieces of
information: a family code and an alphanumeric ref-

102 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 erence number (for example, "CR" and "100" to yield
a tag like CR100 or 100CR). Optionally, a component
tag might contain a sheet number or some user-
specified separators. If your format includes the sheet
number %S parameter or the drawing number %D
parameter, you must enter the values in the edit
boxes in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings
dialog box.

NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides a predefined

format for you to use or you can enter your own
format using replaceable parameters. (page 126)

NOTE The %N parameter is mandatory in any

component tag format you define.

Search for PLC I/O address on insert Searches for a connected PLC I/O module's I/O point.
If found, the I/O address value is substituted for the
"%N" part of the default component tag.

NOTE This setting is saved in the MISC_FLAGS attrib-

ute on the drawing's WD_M block

Sequential Enter the beginning sequential number for the

drawing. Sequential tags can continue uninterrupted
from one drawing to the next if you assign the same
beginning sequential number to every drawing in
your project. As you insert components on any
drawing of the project set, AutoCAD Electrical starts
with the value you set and works its way up until it
finds the next unused sequential number tag for the
target component family.

NOTE If you finish a drawing and move to the next,

but return to the first drawing to add another com-
ponent and sequential tag, a gap appears in the
numbering sequence for that drawing. Use the
AutoCAD Electrical Project-wide Update/Retag tool
to retag the whole drawing set.

Line Reference Set up the unique format tag suffix list. This list is
used to create unique reference-based tags when
multiple components of the same family are located

Overview of project and drawing properties | 103

 at the same reference location (ex: 3 push buttons
on the same line reference "101" could be labeled
PB101, PB101A, and PB101B -- AutoCAD Electrical
does this using a suffix list of " ", "A", "B", and so on).

NOTE The component tag suffix is automatically

added to the end of the tag, but you can force
AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character
somewhere within the tag format. Use the Suffix
position parameter, %X, in the component tag
format (for example, %N%X - %F).

Suffix Setup Displays the suffix list. The individual items in the
suffix list are given in the row of edit boxes across
the top of the dialog. List suffix characters for duplic-
ate family components on the same line reference
or in the same zone (to keep tags unique). The suffix
is added to the end of the component tag. To add
it to the inside of the tag, use "%X" in the Tag
Format. Example:
%N-%F or %%N-%F%X = suffix at the end (such as
101-CRA)
%N%X-%F = add to number, before family code
(such as 101A-CR)
Select from the default lists or manually enter your
own suffix list in the row of edit boxes.

Component TAG Options

Combined Installation/Location tag mode Uses the combined installation/location tag for inter-
preting component tag names. For example, -100CR
relay contact marked with location code PNL1 is in-
terpreted as being associated with a different relay
coil than relay contact -100CR marked with location
code PNL2. If this setting is not selected, both con-
tacts are associated with the same parent relay coil,
-100CR.

Suppress dash when first character of tag Suppresses any single dash character prefix in an IEC
tag that does not have a leading Installation/Location

104 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 prefix(i.e. "-K101" dash is suppressed to "K101" but
"+LOC1-K101" remains unchanged).
When toggled OFF, it automatically adds a single
dash character to an IEC tag that does not already
have a single leading dash prefix and does not have
a leading Installation/Location prefix. For example,
tag "K101" becomes "-K101" but "+LOC1-K101" re-
mains unchanged.

NOTE This suppression takes place automatically in

reports; and takes place graphically only when a
component is inserted, edited, or retagged.

Format Installation/Location into tag Specifies to exclude the Installation and Location
code values as part of the tag when displaying. Ex-
ample, if this is not on a tag might show up as K16
in the Surf dialog box, but if selected the tag might
show up +AAA-K16 (where AAA is the location).

Suppress Installation/Location in tag when Suppresses Location and Installation values on com-
match drawing default ponents if they match the drawing default values.

NOTE Update cross-reference text using the Auto-

CAD Electrical Cross-reference command.

Suppress Installation/Location in tag on Specifies to exclude Installation and Location values

reports as part of the tag when displayed in reports.

Upon insert: automatic fill Installation/Loc- Fills the Installation and Location edit boxes on the
ation with drawing default or last used Insert/Edit component dialog box and the attributes
on the block with drawing default or last used values
(if no drawing default).If not selected, these edit
boxes and attributes are not filled in and are as-
sumed.

Component Options

Description text upper case Forces description text to upper case.

Project properties: wire numbers tab

Overview of project and drawing properties | 105

 Modify your project default settings for wire numbers. All information defined
in this tab is saved to the project definition file as project defaults and settings

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click on the project
name and select Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click on the project name and select Properties.

Wire Number Format

Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based.

Format Specifies the way new wire number tags are created. The
wire number tag format must include the %N parameter
that is the base sequential or reference-based value per the
selection above. If your format includes the sheet number
%S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter, you
must enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing
Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box.

NOTE For reference-based wire number tagging, individual

items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep
multiple wires in the same reference location unique. These
are added to the end of the tag, but you can force AutoCAD
Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within
the tag format. Use the Suffix position parameter, %X, in
the component tag format (for example, %X%N).

NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides a predefined format

for you to use or you can enter your own format using
replaceable parameters. (page 126)

Search for PLC I/O address on insert Specifies to use PLC I/O address values for wires that con-
nect to an addressed I/O point. This overrides both Sequen-
tial and Reference-based tagging. New wires or wire renum-
bering on the current drawing will show PLC I/O address-
based wire numbers automatically.

106 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 NOTE Like component tags, AutoCAD Electrical uses the
concept of a wire tag format string with replaceable para-
meters. The %N parameter must always be part of the wire
format string. A typical format string might be just this %N
parameter.

Sequential Enter the starting sequential number (alpha, numeric, or

alphanumeric) for the drawing. If you enter the same
starting sequential number for every drawing of your wiring
diagram set, AutoCAD Electrical confirms at insertion time
that a new sequential wire number tag is not repeated on
any other drawing.
If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200, the wire
numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and those on DEMO2
start at 200. If DEMO1 has more than 100 wire numbers
it starts using wire number 200 and above while DEMO2
would begin its wire numbers where DEMO1 left off
(making sure that duplicate wire numbers are not assigned).

Increment The default is "1". Setting it to "2" with a starting sequential

of "1" would yield wire numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, and so
on.

Line Reference Sets the wire number tag suffix. This list is used to create
unique reference-based wire number tags for multiple wire
networks beginning at the same reference location (such
as wire network beginning at a location per line reference
number, X-Y grid reference, or X-Zone reference).

Suffix Setup Displays a suffix list. List suffix characters for wire numbers
beginning on the same line reference or in the same zone
(to keep wire numbers unique). Select one of the 4 pre-
defined suffix lists or enter your own custom suffix list.

Wire Number Options

Based on Wire Layer Assigns a different wire number format based on the wire
layer.

Overview of project and drawing properties | 107

Layer Setup Overrides the default wire number format by using layer
defined formats. Change the wire layer name, wire number
format, starting wire sequence, and wire number suffix.

Based on Terminal Symbol Location Specifies to use a wire number terminal on a wire network
as the wire network's line reference value for calculating a
reference-based wire number. For example, a wire network
starts at line reference 100 and drops down and over on
line reference 103. If there is a schematic terminal symbol
that carries the WIRENO attribute located on line reference
103 and this option is enabled, AutoCAD Electrical calcu-
lates a reference-based wire number using 103 instead of
100. If there are multiple wire number terminals on this
network, the line reference value of the upper left-most
terminal is used.

Hidden on Wire Network with Ter- Specifies to automatically hide the wire number for a wire
minal Displaying Wire Number network that has a wire number-type terminal.

On per Wire Basis Specifies to assign a wire number for each wire rather than
the default one wire number per wire network.

Exclude Specifies the wire number ranges to exclude if using sequen-

tial wire numbers. (applied to the %N part of the wire
number tag format)
Syntax is <starting>-<ending> to show range (for example
1000-1499). Multiple ranges are allowed and must be
separated with a comma or semi-colon (for example, 1000-
1099;2500-2599;). You can also use 2;4;6 or 2,4,6 for val-
ues not in a range.

New Wire Number Placement

NOTE The Insert Wire Number tool does not take the current wire number setting
(in-line, above or below) into account when updating existing wire numbers; this
setting is used only when inserting new wire numbers. Use the Toggle Wire Number
In-Line tool for flipping existing wire numbers among the 3 modes.

Above Wire Places the wire number above the physical wire.

108 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

In-Line Places the wire number in line with the wire.

Gap Setup Defines spacing between the wire number and the wire itself.

Below Wire Places the wire number below the physical wire.

Centered Specifies to insert the wire number tags in the center of each wire
segment.

Offset Specifies to insert the wire number tags the specified offset dis-
tance.

Offset Distance Specifies a fixed, user-defined offset distance from the left or top
of the first wire segment found on the wire network.

Leaders (This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers) AutoCAD

Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that
the wire number text bumps into something (it does not check
if the leader itself overlays another object). Select the method for
inserting new wire numbers as leaders: As Required, Always, or
Never.

NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already
present on the drawing.

Wire Type

Displays the Rename User Columns dialog box that is used for renaming User1
to User20 header columns in the Set Wire Type, Create/Edit Wire Type, and
Change/Convert Wire Type dialog boxes.

Project properties: cross-references tab

Overview of project and drawing properties | 109

 Modify your project default settings for cross-referencing. Any new drawing
files created within the project are saved with the project default settings for
cross-referencing.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project
name, and select Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the project name, and select Properties.

Cross-Reference Format

Defines the cross-reference annotation format. One replaceable parameter,

%N, must always be part of the cross-reference format string. A typical format
string might be just the %N parameter. Use Same Drawing for on-drawing
references and Between Drawings for off-drawing references. You can use the
same format for both.

NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides some predefined formats for you to use or you
can enter your own format using replaceable parameters. (page 126)

Cross-Reference Options

Real time signal and contact cross-referen- Automatically updates relay and wire source and
cing between drawings destination symbols cross-referencing across multiple
drawings.

NOTE If this option is not selected, you are promp-

ted to authorize the update.The target drawing is
automatically opened and updated. You then return
to the active drawing. Any unauthorized update is
queued up in a Project Task List. To update the
pending updates, click Project Task List on the Project
Manager.

Peer to Peer Cross-references related components while using

pneumatic features. Example: schematic - ➤ pneu-
matic.

110 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

Suppress Installation/Location codes when Suppresses IEC prefixes.
matching the drawing defaults
NOTE You need to run the Component Cross-Refer-
ence command to update any existing cross-referen-
cing text.

Component Cross-Reference Display

There are different styles of cross referencing AutoCAD Electrical supports:

Text Format Displays cross-referencing as text with any string as a separator

between references on the same attribute.

Graphical Format Displays cross-referencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical

font or using contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each
reference on a new line.

Table Format Displays cross-referencing in a table object, that automatically

gets updated in real time, so you can define the columns to dis-
play.

Setup Displays a dialog box for setting the display defaults for each
component cross-reference display format.

Project properties: styles tab

Modify your project default settings for various component styles. All
information defined in this tab is saved to the project definition file as project
defaults and settings.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project
name, and select Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the project name, and select Properties.

Arrow Style Specifies the default wire signal arrow style. Select from
the 4 predefined styles or a user-defined style. You can
override the default style setting at insertion time.

Overview of project and drawing properties | 111

 TIP For instructions on how to add custom wire arrow
styles, see Add custom signal arrow styles. (page 536)

PLC Style Specifies the default PLC module style. Select from the 5
pre-defined styles or a user-defined style.

TIP For instructions on how to add custom PLC module

styles, see Add a new PLC style. (page 251)

Fan-In/Out Marker Style Defines the default Fan In/Out marker style and the layers
for wires going out of a Fan In/Out Source marker and
those coming into a Destination marker.

TIP For instructions on how to add custom Fan-In/Out

marker styles, see Add custom fan-in/out marker styles.
(page 548)

Layer List Lists the Fan In/Out layers.

Add Defines layer names as Fan In/Out layers.

Remove Removes the selected layer from the defined layer list.

Wire Cross Specifies the default mode of operation when wires cross
each other: insert gap with no loop, insert gap and loop,
or solid (no gap).

Wire Tee Specifies the default wire tee marker: none, dot, angle1 or
angle2.

Project properties: drawing format tab

Allows you to modify your project default settings for drawings. All information
defined in this tab is saved to the project definition file as a project default.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click on the project
name and select Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click on the project name and select Properties.

112 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 Ladder Defaults

Vertical/Horizontal Specifies whether to create ladders horizontally or

vertically.

Spacing Specifies the spacing between each rung.

Default: insert new ladders without refer- Sets the default for the Insert Ladder command.New
ences ladders you insert do not have line reference number-
ing, by default.

Width Specifies the width of the ladder.

Multi-wire Spacing Specifies the spacing between each rung in multi-

wire phases.

Format Referencing

Specifies the default referencing system. There are 3 modes:

X-Y Grid All referencing is tied to an X-Y grid system of numbers and letters
along the left-hand side and top of the drawing.Set your drawing's
vertical and horizontal index numbers and letters, spacing, and
origin in the X-Y grid setup dialog box.

TIP Use negative spacing values for Horizontal or Vertical if you

want to change the X-Y grid system's origin to be other than the
upper left-hand corner of the drawing.

X Zones Similar to X-Y Grid, but there isn't a Y-axis. Set your drawing's
horizontal labels, spacing, and origin on the X Zones setup dialog
box.

TIP Use a negative zone spacing value if you want the zone ref-
erence origin to be at the right side of the drawing.

Reference Numbers Each ladder column has a column of assigned reference numbers.

Setup Specifies how to display reference numbers -number only, num-

bers in a hexagon, the sheet and number values, and so on.

Overview of project and drawing properties | 113

 Scale

Feature Scale Multiplier Sets the scale factor used when inserting new com-
ponents or wire numbers on the drawing. To insert
everything 25% bigger than normal, change the edit
box value from 1.00 to 1.25.This change does not
affect components and wire numbers that are already
present on the drawing.

inch/inch scaled to mm/mm full size Select inch if your drawing is to use library symbols
from the JIC1/JIC125 libraries or mm full size for the
metric scaled symbol libraries. This adjusts the wire
connection trap distance that determines whether
closely spaced wire ends connector not.

Tag/Wire Number Order

Sets the default wire numbering and component tag sort order for the drawing.
Your selection overrides the project settings for sort order unless you select
No override.

Layers

Defines and manages wire and component layers.

NOTE No matter what layer is current, wires will always go to a wire layer and
components to component layers.

Drawing properties: drawing settings tab

Apply a drawing-specific settings that are maintained inside the drawing's
WD_M block and the project .wdp file.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing
name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties.

114 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 Drawing File

Project Specifies the project that the drawing is found in.

NOTE If the drawing is not in any of the currently open

projects, "Drawing not in open project" displays instead of
the project name. If the drawing is in an open project but
it cannot be edited, "Project not available for edit" displays
instead of the project name. This happens when a project
file is read-only, it is locked by someone else, it is not
checked out in Vault, or the folder where the project is
located is read-only. When the project is not open or
available for edit, you are unable to assign a description for
the drawing.

Description 1-3 Specifies up to 3 lines of description text for the drawing

file. The description displays in title block updates and
custom drawing properties. This is saved in the project
.wdp file. Select from a list of predefined descriptions from
the active project by clicking the arrow or select a descrip-
tion from the drawing by clicking Pick.

For Reference Only Indicates that the drawing should not be included in tag-
ging, cross-referencing, and reporting functions. If selected,
the drawing is included in project-wide plotting and title
block operations. This is saved in the project .wdp file.

IEC-Style Designators

Specifies IEC default values for the drawing, such as Project (%P), Installation
(%I), and Location (%L) fields. When you insert a component, the %I and %L
default values are used if the Installation and/or Location values would
normally be blank.

Project Code Specifies a project code for the WD_M block definition.
This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %P.

Installation Code Specifies the installation code for the WD_M block defini-
tion. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter
%I.

Overview of project and drawing properties | 115

Location Code Specifies the location code for the WD_M block definition.
This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %L.

Drawing Displays a list of Installation or Location codes from the

active drawing.

Project Displays a list of previously defined Installation or Location

codes in the active project or from the Default.INST or
Default.LOC file.

Sheet Values

Component, wire, and cross-reference tagging use replaceable parameters in

their format. If you reference the drawing's sheet number or drawing number
in any of your tagging formats, then specify a default drawing-wide value to
use.

Sheet Specifies the sheet number value for the drawing settings. This value
can be used as the replaceable parameter %S.

Drawing Specifies the drawing number value for the drawing settings. This
value can be used as the replaceable parameter %D.

Section Specifies the section value for the drawing file saved in the project
definition file (.wdp). This value can be used as the replaceable para-
meter %A.

Sub-Section Specifies the subsection value for the drawing file saved in the project
definition file (.wdp). This value can be used as the replaceable para-
meter %B.

Drawing properties: components tab

116 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 Apply a drawing-specific component settings that are maintained inside the
drawing's WD_M block.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing
name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties.

Tag Format Specifies the way new component tags are cre-
ated.The tag consists of a minimum of 2 pieces of
information: a family code and an alphanumeric ref-
erence number (for example, "CR" and "100" to yield
a tag like CR100 or 100CR). Optionally, a component
tag might contain a sheet number or some user-
specified separators. If your format includes the sheet
number %S parameter or the drawing number %D
parameter, you must enter the values in the edit
boxes in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings
dialog box.

NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides a predefined

format for you to use or you can enter your own
format using replaceable parameters. (page 126)

NOTE The %N parameter is mandatory in any

component tag format you define.

Search for PLC I/O address on insert Searches for a connected PLC I/O module's I/O point.
If found, the I/O address value is substituted for the
"%N" part of the default component tag.

NOTE This setting is saved in the MISC_FLAGS attrib-

ute on the drawing's WD_M block.

Sequential Enter the beginning sequential number for the

drawing. Sequential tags can continue uninterrupted
from one drawing to the next if you assign the same
beginning sequential number to every drawing in
your project. As you insert components on any

Overview of project and drawing properties | 117

 drawing of the project set, AutoCAD Electrical starts
with the value you set and works its way up until it
finds the next unused sequential number tag for the
target component family.

NOTE If you finish a drawing and move to the next,

but then later come back to the first drawing to add
another component and sequential tag, a gap ap-
pears in the numbering sequence for that drawing.
Use the AutoCAD Electrical Project-wide Update/Re-
tag tool to retag the whole drawing set.

Line Reference Set up the unique format tag suffix list. This list is
used to create unique reference-based tags when
multiple components of the same family are located
at the same reference location (ex: 3 push buttons
on the same line reference "101" could be labeled
PB101, PB101A, and PB101B -- AutoCAD Electrical
does this using a suffix list of " ", "A", "B", and so on).

NOTE The component tag suffix is automatically

added to the end of the tag, but you can force
AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character
somewhere within the tag format. Use the Suffix
position parameter, %X, in the component tag
format (for example, %N%X - %F).

Suffix Setup Displays the suffix list. The individual items in the
suffix list are given in the row of edit boxes across
the top of the dialog. List suffix characters for duplic-
ate family components on the same line reference
or in the same zone (to keep tags unique). The suffix
is added to the end of the component tag. To add
it to the inside of the tag, use "%X" in the Tag
Format. Example:
%N-%F or %%N-%F%X = suffix at the end (such as
101-CRA)
%N%X-%F = add to number, before family code
(such as 101A-CR)
Select from the default lists or manually enter your
own suffix list in the row of edit boxes.

Drawing properties: wire numbers tab

118 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 Apply a drawing-specific wire number settings that are maintained inside the
drawing's WD_M block.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing
name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties.

Wire Number Format

Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based.

Format Specifies the way new wire number tags are created. The
wire number tag format must include the %N parameter
that is the base sequential or reference-based value per the
selection above. If your format includes the sheet number
%S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter, you
must enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing
Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box.

NOTE For reference-based wire number tagging, individual

items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep
multiple wires in the same reference location unique. These
are added to the end of the tag, but you can force AutoCAD
Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within
the tag format. Use the Suffix position parameter, %X, in
the component tag format (for example, %X%N).

Search for PLC I/O address on insert Specifies to use PLC I/O address values for wires that con-
nect to an addressed I/O point. This overrides both Sequen-
tial and Reference-based tagging. New wires or wire renum-
bering on the current drawing shows PLC I/O address-based
wire numbers automatically.

NOTE Like component tags, AutoCAD Electrical uses the

concept of a wire tag format string with replaceable para-
meters. The %N parameter must always be part of the wire
format string. A typical format string might be just this %N
parameter.

Overview of project and drawing properties | 119

Sequential Enter the starting sequential number (alpha, numeric, or
alphanumeric) for the drawing. If you enter the same
starting sequential number for every drawing of your wiring
diagram set, AutoCAD Electrical confirms at insertion time
that a new sequential wire number tag is not repeated on
any other drawing.
If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200, the wire
numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and those on DEMO2
start at 200. If DEMO1 has more than 100 wire numbers
it starts using wire number 200 and above while DEMO2
would begin its wire numbers where DEMO1 left off
(making sure that duplicate wire numbers are not assigned).

Increment The default is "1." Setting it to "2" with a starting sequential

of "1" would yield wire numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, and so
on.

Line Reference Sets the wire number tag suffix. This list is used to create
unique reference-based wire number tags for multiple wire
networks beginning at the same reference location (such
as wire network beginning at a location per line reference
number, X-Y grid reference, or X-Zone reference).

Suffix Setup Displays a suffix list. List suffix characters for wire numbers
beginning on the same line reference or in the same zone
(to keep wire numbers unique). Select one of the 4 pre-
defined suffix lists or enter your own custom suffix list.

New Wire Number Placement

NOTE The Insert Wire Number tool does not take the current wire number setting
(in-line, above or below) into account when updating existing wire numbers; this
setting is used only when inserting new wire numbers. Use the Toggle Wire Number
In-Line tool for flipping existing wire numbers among the 3 modes.

Above Wire Places the wire number above the physical wire.

In-Line Places the wire number inline with the wire.

120 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

Gap Setup Defines spacing between the inline wire number and the wire it-
self.

Below Wire Places the wire number below the physical wire.

Offset Specifies to insert the wire number tags the specified offset dis-
tance.

Centered Specifies to insert the wire number tags in the center of each wire
segment.

Offset Distance Specifies a fixed, user-defined offset distance from the left or top
of the first wire segment found on the wire network.

Leaders (This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers.) AutoCAD

Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that
the wire number text bumps into something (it does not check
if the leader itself will overlay another object). Select the method
for inserting new wire numbers as leaders: As Required, Always,
or Never.

NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already
present on the drawing.

Drawing properties: cross-references tab

Apply a drawing-specific cross-reference settings that are maintained inside
the drawing’s WD_M block. This overrides the project settings since
cross-referencing commands look at the WD_M block as the definition for all
referencing on the drawing during run-time.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing
name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties.

Overview of project and drawing properties | 121

 Cross-Reference Format

Defines the cross-reference annotation format. One replaceable parameter,

%N, must always be part of the cross-reference format string. A typical format
string might be just the %N parameter. Use Same Drawing for on-drawing
references and Between Drawings for off-drawing references. You can use the
same format for both.

NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides some predefined formats for you to use or you
can enter your own format using replaceable parameters. (page 126)

Component Cross-Reference Display

There are different styles of cross referencing AutoCAD Electrical supports:

Text Format Displays cross-referencing as text with any string as a separator

between references on the same attribute.

Graphical Format Displays cross-referencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical

font or using contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each
reference on a new line.

Table Format Displays cross-referencing in a table object, that automatically

gets updated in real time. You can define the columns to display.

Setup Displays a dialog box for setting the display defaults for each
component cross-reference display format.

Drawing properties: styles tab

Apply a drawing-specific component styles settings that are maintained inside
the drawing's WD_M block.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing
name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.

122 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

Access:

From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties.

Arrow Style Specifies the default wire signal arrow style. Select from the 4
predefined styles or a user-defined style. You can override the
default style setting at insertion time.

TIP For instructions on how to add custom wire arrow styles, see
Add custom signal arrow styles. (page 536)

PLC Style Specifies the default PLC module style. Select from the 5 pre-
defined styles or a user-defined style.

TIP For instructions on how to add custom PLC module styles,

see Add a new PLC style. (page 251)

Fan-In/Out Marker Style Defines the default Fan In/Out marker style and the layers for
wires going out of a Fan In/Out Source marker and those coming
into a Destination marker.

TIP For instructions on how to add custom Fan-In/Out marker

styles, see Add custom fan-in/out marker styles. (page 548)

Layer List Lists the Fan In/Out layers.

Add Defines layer names as Fan In/Out layers.

Remove Removes the selected layer from the defined layer list.

Wire Cross Specifies the default mode of operation when wires cross each
other: insert gap with no loop, insert gap, and loop, or solid (no
gap).

Wire Tee Specifies the default wire tee marker: none, dot, angle1 or angle2.

Drawing properties: drawing format tab

Overview of project and drawing properties | 123

 Apply a drawing-specific format settings that are maintained inside the
drawing's WD_M block.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing
name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties.

Ladder Defaults

Vertical/Horizontal Specifies whether to create ladders horizontally or

vertically.

Spacing Specifies the spacing between each ladder rung.

Default: insert new ladders without refer- Sets the default for the Insert Ladder command.New
ences ladders you insert do not have line reference number-
ing, by default.

Width Specifies the width of the ladder.

Multi-wire Spacing Specifies the spacing between each wire in multi-wire

phases.

Format Referencing

Specifies the default referencing system. There are 3 modes:

X-Y Grid All referencing is tied to an X-Y grid system of numbers and letters
along the left-hand side and top of the drawing.Set your drawing's
vertical and horizontal index numbers and letters, spacing, and
origin in the X-Y grid setup dialog box.

TIP Use negative spacing values for Horizontal or Vertical if you

want to change the X-Y grid system's origin to be other than the
upper left-hand corner of the drawing.

124 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

X Zones Similar to X-Y Grid, but there isn't a Y-axis. Set your drawing's
horizontal labels, spacing, and origin on the X Zones setup dialog
box.

TIP Use a negative zone spacing value if you want the zone ref-
erence origin to be at the right side of the drawing.

Reference Numbers Each ladder column has a column of assigned reference numbers.

Setup Specifies how to display ladder line reference numbers - number

only, numbers in a hexagon, the sheet and number values, and
so on.

Scale

Feature Scale Multiplier Sets the scale factor used when inserting new com-
ponents or wire numbers on the drawing. To insert
everything 25% bigger than normal, change the edit
box value from 1.00 to 1.25.This change does not
affect components and wire numbers that are already
present on the drawing.

inch/inch scaled to mm/mm full size Select inch if your drawing is to use library symbols
from the JIC1/JIC125 libraries or mm full size for the
metric scaled symbol libraries. This adjusts the wire
connection trap distance that determines whether
closely spaced wire ends connector not.

Tag/Wire Number Order

Sort Order Sets the default wire numbering sort order for the active drawing.
You can set sorting on a per-drawing basis and override the project-
wide default setting defined in Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog
box. For example, you can set the wire numbers togo in a reverse
order from the I/O point on a PLC I/O drawing, but have the wire
numbers going from left to right for non-PLC I/O drawings.

Overview of project and drawing properties | 125

 Layers

Define Defines and manages wire and component layers.

NOTE No matter what layer is current, wires will always go to a wire

layer and components to component layers.

Use replaceable parameters

The Drawing Properties dialog box makes use of codes as replaceable parameters
that are encoded on to attributes of the drawing's invisible WD_M block.For
example, if you set your component tag format to be %F%N, this format is
encoded on to the TAGFMT attribute of the WD_M block. When AutoCAD
Electrical assigns a TAG to a component, this format is read and the codes are
replaced with the appropriate values.
Replaceable parameters are also used for device tagging, cross-referencing,
wire numbering, wire annotation and graphical terminal strips.

For device tagging, cross-referencing and wire numbering

These are defined in the Drawing Properties.

%F Component family code string (for example, "PB," "SS," "CR," "FLT,"
"MTR")

%S Drawing's sheet number (for example, "01" entered in upper right)

%D Drawing number

%G Wire layer name

%N Sequential or Reference-based number applied to the component

%X Suffix character position for reference-based tagging (not present =

end of tag)

%P IEC-style project code (default for drawing)

126 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

%I IEC-style installation code (default for drawing)

%L IEC-style location code (default for drawing)

%A Project drawing list's SEC value for active drawing

%B Project drawing list's SUB-SEC value for active drawing

The %L and %I values used for cross-referencing are the Drawing Default
Location and Installation values from the corresponding Parent or Child
drawing and not the Location and Installation values of the component itself.If
you have a Parent on a drawing that has a default Location of “M” and its
child is on a drawing that has a default Location value of “MC,” the
cross-referencing on the parent shows the “MC” (drawing default location
value of the drawing the child is on) and the child shows the “M” (drawing
default location value of the drawing the parent is on) no matter what the
location value is on either the parent or child.

NOTE If you include %I or %L in your component's Tag code, you are prompted
tore calculate the component's tag if you change the Installation or Location value
of the component once it has been inserted.

Example of Component Tags

(For relay number 50 on sheet 3)
%F%S%N = CR350
%F%N = CR50
%F-%S-%N = CR-3-50
(For 3 push buttons on line reference 101 using reference-based tagging)
%F%N = PB101, PB101A,PB101B
%N-%F = 101-PB, 101-PBA,101-PBB
%N%X%F = 101-PB, 101A-PB,101B-PB
Example of Wire Number Formats
(For wire number 50 on sheet 3)
%S/%N = 3/50
%N = 50

Use replaceable parameters | 127

 W-%S%N = W-350

For defining wire annotation and graphical terminal strips

%P Terminal pin text

%Q Terminal pin TERMDESC text

%I IEC-style installation code

%L IEC-style location code

%M Mount assignment (on panel footprint equivalent)

%U Group assignment (on panel footprint equivalent)

%W Wire number

%C Cable tag + conductor/core color combination (format is "tag-color")

%E Cable tag

%J Cable conductor/core color

%V Cable tag substituted for wire number if cable tag is non-blank.

The wire number is displayed when a cable ID doesn't exist.

%G Wire color/gauge (or wire layer name)

%H Cable wire color substituted for wire number if cable color is non-
blank.
The wire layer is displayed when a wire conductor in conjunction
with a cable ID doesn't exist.

%T Terminal strip terminal pin assignment

%K Terminal strip TERMDESC text - useful for multi-stack terminals

128 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

%1 Destination component tag ID. You can use only one of the (%num-
ber) parameters.

%2 Equivalent of "%1:%P" (comp tag:term)

%3 Equivalent of "%1:%P:%D" (comp tag:term:termdesc)

%4 Equivalent of "%L%1" (IEC comp tag)

%5 Equivalent of "%L%1:%P" (tag:term)

%6 Equivalent of "%L%1:%P:%D" (tag:term:termdesc)

%7 Equivalent of "%I%I%1" (INST prefix+IEC comp tag)

%8 Equivalent of "%I%L%1:%P" (tag:term)

%9 Equivalent of "%I%L%1:%P:%D" (tag:term:termdesc)

The part after the colon(:) is suppressed if the value is blank in %2 - %9

parameters (for example, %2=comp tag:term). The ":term" part is suppressed
if blank.

Save settings to the project file

The changes you make to the current drawing's configuration are saved on
the drawing’s invisible WD_M block. You can save a copy of these settings to
the project file. This makes the settings available as defaults for new drawings
that you might add later to the project. Alternately, you can retrieve selected

Save settings to the project file | 129

 settings previously saved in the project file and assign them to the current
drawing.

1 Click the arrow on the Drawing Properties tool to access the

Settings Compare tool.

2 Click the Settings Compare tool.

AutoCAD Electrical reads both the settings on the current
drawing's WD_M block and a copy of the settings maintained
in the current project's .wdp file. Any differences are displayed
in a three-column dialog.

3 Highlight the settings you want to copy over from the drawing
to the project or vice versa or click Select All to quickly change
all of the settings.

4 Click Match Project to make the drawing’s settings match the

project defaults or click Match Drawing to make the project's
settings match those of the current drawing.

5 Click OK.

NOTE Changing these settings does not automatically change components and
wiring already present in your drawing.

Compare drawing and project settings

This tool compares the general/schematic settings carried on the drawing's
invisible WD_M block with a copy of the settings saved in the project's .wdp
project list file. You can update selected drawing settings (multiple selection
is allowed) to make them match the values carried in the master project file
or vice versa.
If the Settings Description cell displays in light blue the project and drawing
settings don’t match. When one column is matched to the other, the cell
changes in color to indicate that the record has been changed. The dialog list
updates automatically when you make changes and then switch between
showing all settings or showing just the different settings.

130 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 NOTE Changing these settings does not automatically change components and
wiring already present in your drawing.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Drawing Properties tool to access the Settings Compare
tool.
From the Projects menu, select Settings Compare.

NOTE You can also access this dialog by right-clicking a drawing name in the
Project Manager and selecting Properties ➤ Settings Compare.

You can also right-click any row to access the Match Project or Match Drawing
options.

Show All Shows all of the settings in the drawing.

Show Differences Displays settings that are different between the WD_M
block and the .wdp file.

Select All Selects all of the settings in the list so you can quickly
change all settings to match either the project or the
drawing.

Match Project Changes the selected drawing setting to make it match

the project. Select the settings from the list, and then click
the button.

Match Drawing Changes the selected project default setting to make it

match the drawing. Select the settings from the list, and
then click the button.

Create a template drawing

Using a template, you can start a new drawing with the WD_M block inserted,
settings adjusted, and standard AutoCAD Electrical layers predefined. With

Create a template drawing | 131

 this template, AutoCAD Electrical won't have to pause and ask permission to
insert the block as you start each new wiring diagram drawing.

1 Open a new drawing or start with a copy of your standard drawing

border/title block drawing.

2 Select Projects ➤ Drawing Properties.

This triggers AutoCAD Electrical to insert the invisible WD_M block.

3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, modify any drawing settings (such
as layer naming conventions and tagging formats) and click OK.

4 Select Format ➤ Layer to create any layers you just referenced in the
Drawing Properties dialog box.

5 In the AutoCAD Layer Properties Manager dialog box, adjust layer colors
and click Apply.

6 Save the drawing as an AutoCAD Drawing Template file with a .DWT

extension.
This template appears in the list of saved templates the next time you
open a new AutoCAD Electrical drawing.

Drawing properties: drawing settings tab

Apply a drawing-specific settings that are maintained inside the drawing's
WD_M block and the project .wdp file.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing
name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties.

Drawing File

Project Specifies the project that the drawing is found in.

132 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 NOTE If the drawing is not in any of the currently open
projects, "Drawing not in open project" displays instead of
the project name. If the drawing is in an open project but
it cannot be edited, "Project not available for edit" displays
instead of the project name. This happens when a project
file is read-only, it is locked by someone else, it is not
checked out in Vault, or the folder where the project is
located is read-only. When the project is not open or
available for edit, you are unable to assign a description for
the drawing.

Description 1-3 Specifies up to 3 lines of description text for the drawing

file. The description displays in title block updates and
custom drawing properties. This is saved in the project
.wdp file. Select from a list of predefined descriptions from
the active project by clicking the arrow or select a descrip-
tion from the drawing by clicking Pick.

For Reference Only Indicates that the drawing should not be included in tag-
ging, cross-referencing, and reporting functions. If selected,
the drawing is included in project-wide plotting and title
block operations. This is saved in the project .wdp file.

IEC-Style Designators

Specifies IEC default values for the drawing, such as Project (%P), Installation
(%I), and Location (%L) fields. When you insert a component, the %I and %L
default values are used if the Installation and/or Location values would
normally be blank.

Project Code Specifies a project code for the WD_M block definition.
This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %P.

Installation Code Specifies the installation code for the WD_M block defini-
tion. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter
%I.

Location Code Specifies the location code for the WD_M block definition.
This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %L.

Create a template drawing | 133

Drawing Displays a list of Installation or Location codes from the
active drawing.

Project Displays a list of previously defined Installation or Location

codes in the active project or from the Default.INST or
Default.LOC file.

Sheet Values

Component, wire, and cross-reference tagging use replaceable parameters in

their format. If you reference the drawing's sheet number or drawing number
in any of your tagging formats, then specify a default drawing-wide value to
use.

Sheet Specifies the sheet number value for the drawing settings. This value
can be used as the replaceable parameter %S.

Drawing Specifies the drawing number value for the drawing settings. This
value can be used as the replaceable parameter %D.

Section Specifies the section value for the drawing file saved in the project
definition file (.wdp). This value can be used as the replaceable para-
meter %A.

Sub-Section Specifies the subsection value for the drawing file saved in the project
definition file (.wdp). This value can be used as the replaceable para-
meter %B.

Overview of the WD_M block

A special invisible block must be present on the drawing. The WD_M.dwg is
found in the default symbol library. Below is an attribute list of information
that is carried on the drawing's WD_M block, broken down by category:

134 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 Drawing layout

SHEET or SHEET_ sheet number for the drawing (%S)

SHEETDWGNAME optional drawing number for the drawing (%D)

IEC_PROJ optional IEC project code (%P)

IEC_INST optional IEC installation code (%I)

IEC_LOC optional IEC location code (%L)

UNIT_SCL units scaling factor (1.0 = inch, 1.0 = full size mm, 25.4 =
inch scaled up to mm)

FEATURE_SCL scaling adjustment (0 = default, 1.25=for 25% bigger)

Ladder defaults

RUNGHORV ladder orientation: "H" = horizontal rungs (vertical ladders);

"V" = vertical rungs (horizontal ladders)

REFNUMS reference numbering system: ladder line-reference based

or X-Y grid reference based
■ 1 = line reference numbers
■ 2 = numbers with ruling
■ 3 = user-defined line reference block
■ 4 = X-Y grid reference mode
■ 5 = X-Zone reference mode

RUNGDIST default rung spacing

DLADW default ladder width

RUNGINC default rung-to-rung line reference increment (default = 1)

Overview of the WD_M block | 135

DRWRUNG draw ladder rungs: 0 = none, 1 = draw all rungs for new
ladder, 2 = skip 1, 3 = skip 2, and so on.

PH3SPACE 3-phase bus spacing value

Component tagging

TAGMODE tag mode value: S = sequential, R = reference-based

TAG-START drawing's starting sequential number -for sequential tag-

ging only (i.e. "1")

TAG-RSUF comma-delimited component tag suffix list -for reference-

based tagging only (i.e. "A, B, C")

TAGFMT component tag format specifier (default=%F%N)

Wire number tagging

WIREMODE wire number format: S = sequential, R = reference-based

WIRE-START drawing's starting sequential number - for sequential tag-

ging only (i.e. "100")

WIRE-RSUF wire tag suffix list - for reference-based tagging only (i.e.
"A,B,C")

WIREFMT wire tag format specifier (default=%N)

WINC wire number increment

WLEADERS wire leaders: 0 = only as required, 1 = always insert wire

leaders, 2 = never insert leaders

GAP_STYLE wire gap style: 0 = wire gap, 1 = use loops across gaps, 2
= solid crossing
(no gap)

136 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

SORTMODE retag and wire numbering sort mode

WNUM_OFFSET wire number placement offset distance

(GBL_wd_wnum_offset); same as the project-wide +[19]
value in the .wdp file. 0.0 or missing= centered on wire
(default), >0.0 = offset from top or left end by given dis-
tance

WNUM_FLAGS ■ 1's bit set = (GBL_wd_inline_gap global) auto in line

wire gap adjust "ON" (see WNUM_GAP attribute for
settings list)
■ 2's +4's bits = 00 default wire number above wire
■ 01 = below wire

Layer names

TAG_LAY component tag layer

TAGFIXED_LAY fixed component tag layer

DESC_LAY parent component's description layer

CDESC_LAY child component's description layer

TERM_LAY component terminal pin numbers layer

XREF_LAY parent component's cross-reference layer

CXREF_LAY child contact's cross-reference layer

LOC_LAY component location code layer

POS_LAY component position code layer

MISC_LAY miscellaneous layer

Overview of the WD_M block | 137

COMP_LAY layer for schematic component graphics

LINK_LAY dashed link lines layer

LOCBOX_LAY location box layer

WIRELAYS valid wire layer names where "" = all valid (comma-delimited)

WIRENO_LAY valid wire number

WIRECOPY_LAY extra wire number layer

WIREFIXED_LAY fixed wire layer

WIREREF_LAY terminal and signal arrow wire number layer

Fan In/Out

FAN_INOUT_LAYS valid layer names for Fan In/Out, single-line wires (comma-
delimited)

FAN_INOUT_STYLE Fan In/Out symbol style number

Cross-reference

XREFFMT cross-reference format specifier (default=%N)

ALT_XREFFMT optional cross-reference format for inter-drawing references (i.e.

%S-%N)

XREF_STYLE cross-reference style: 0 = text, 1 = graphical, 2 = table

XREF_FLAGS 1's bit = include unused contacts, 2's bit (if table)= include parent
coil

XREF_UNUSEDSTYLE 0 = separate reference, 1 = contact count totals

138 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

XREF_FILLWITH cross-reference fill-with text

XREF_SORT 0 = sort by line reference, 1 = sort by pin list

XREF_TXTBTWN cross-reference text between references (text style cross-referen-

cing)

XREF_GRAPHIC 0 = contact mapping (text), 1 = graphic

XREF_GRAPHICSTYLE 0 = JIC, 1 = IEC

XREF_CONTACTMAP contact mapping list

XREF_TBLSTYLE table style name

XREF_TBLTITLE table title

XREF_TBLINDEX table fields to include

XREF_TBLFLDNAMS table available field names

XREF_TBLCOLJUST table fields justification

Referencing

DATUMX X coordinate origin for X-Y or X-zone

DATUMY Y coordinate origin for X-Y or X-zone

DISTH horizontal interval spacing for X-Y or X-zone

DISTV vertical interval spacing for X-Y referencing

CHAR_H horizontal starting character for X-Y or X-zone

CHAR_V vertical starting character for X-Y referencing

Overview of the WD_M block | 139

HOIRZ_FIRST X-Y referencing format: 0 = V-H, 1 = H-V

XY_DELIM X-Y delimiter character

Styles

PLC_STYLE PLC module style code (default = 1)

ARROW_STYLE default signal arrow style number

Miscellaneous

WNUM_GAP list of 3 in line wire number/label gap settings (see WNUM_FLAGS

bit 1 for toggle mode); value saved to GBL_wd_inline_gapas a
list. nil or "(num1 num2 num3)"

MISC_FLAGS miscellaneous flags

■ 0 = gap
■ 1 = loop
■ 2 = no gap
■ 1's bit = mm full size
■ 2's bit = ignore non lay0 lay vector
■ 4's bit = use plc wire numbers
■ 8's bit = insert new ladders without references
■ 16's bit = search for PLC address on component insert
■ 32+64 bit =
■ 10 = none
■ 01 = angle 1
■ 11 = angle 2
■ 00 = dot

140 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 Make changes to the WD_M block
You can make changes to the WD_M block so that your settings are always
the default.

1 Open an existing AutoCAD Electrical drawing and set the properties and
layer names.

2 Save the drawing.

3 Select Projects ➤ Swap WD_M or WD_PNLM Blocks ➤ Update Symbol

Library WD_M Block.

4 Select the WD_M - schematic settings to modify and click OK.

The settings and layer names are collected from the drawing and
appropriate adjustments are made to the WD_M block.

5 Save the modified WD_M drawing.

NOTE Update your template drawing’s version of the inserted WD_M block
if a template drawing exists for your project.

6 Open your template file.

7 Select Projects ➤ Swap WD_M or WD_PNLM Blocks ➤ Update to New

WD_M Block, Values, Layers.
The new version of the WD_M block replaces your existing one.

Add missing attributes to the WD_M block

As AutoCAD Electrical adds new features, new attributes are sometimes added
to the default WD_M block. However, if your drawing was created with an
older WD_M block it may not carry these attributes. AutoCAD Electrical
provides an easy way to swap older WD_M blocks with the new WD_M block.

1 Select Projects ➤ Swap WD_M or WD_PNLM Blocks. Select one of the

following options:

Update to New WD_M Block, Values, To swap and convert to new layers and values carried
Layers on the new WD_M.dwg.

Update to New WD_M Block, No Changes To swap but keep the drawing's existing layer names
and values.

Overview of the WD_M block | 141

Update to New WD_PNLM Block, Values, To swap and convert to new layers and values carried
Layers on the new WD_PNLM.dwg.

Update to New WD_PNLM Block, No To swap but keep the drawing's existing layer names
Changes and values.

2 Select the WD_M drawing to use as the new WD_M block in the drawing.

3 Click Open.

Copy active drawing settings to

The WD_M and WD_PNLM blocks carry attribute values that define the default
AutoCAD Electrical settings.

Access:

From the Projects menu, select Swap WD_M or WD_PNLM Blocks ➤ Update
Symbol Library WD_M Block.

WD_M Defines the default schematic settings.

WD_PNLM Defines the default panel settings.

Alert
A drawing needs an invisible block, WD_M.dwg, on the drawing to be
compatible with AutoCAD Electrical.
The WD_M.dwg block is located in the default symbol library. This block
carries about 50 attributes that define settings, layer names, and other default
settings that are referenced by AutoCAD Electrical commands.

NOTE If the drawing includes panel layout symbols, the block WD_PNLM.dwg is
also needed. The WD_M and WD_PNLM blocks can be present on the same
drawing.

To insert a WD_M or WD_PNLM block

■ If the WD_M block is not present in a new or existing drawing, click OK

to insert the block at location 0,0.

142 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 ■ If the WD_PNLM block is not present in a new or existing drawing when
using panel layout symbols, click OK to insert the block.

■ To force the drawing settings to match the project settings, select the check
box.

Using Layers

Manage layers
AutoCAD Electrical provides tools for managing and renaming panel and
schematic layers.You can use your own layer naming convention with
AutoCAD Electrical, as well as change the layer naming used on an existing
AutoCAD Electrical drawing using the tools below.

Manage panel layers

1 Click the Panel Configuration tool.

2 Click Layers Setup.

3 Specify information for the panel component layers, non-text

graphic layers, and nameplate layers.
When AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint, it is modified
on the fly to match the layering scheme set up in this dialog.

4 Click OK.

Rename panel layers

The Rename Panel Layers tool makes it easy to rename layers one by one, or
multiple layers at once by using the Find/Replace method. The advantage to
using the AutoCAD Electrical layer rename is that in addition to renaming
the layer, AutoCAD Electrical also updates the AutoCAD Electrical layer
assignment information carried on the drawing's WD_PNLM block. For
example, if DEMO-PNPG is currently assigned as the Name Plate graphics
layer and you rename it to PNPG using the AutoCAD Electrical rename layer

Using Layers | 143

 utility, the new layer name will be substituted for DEMO-PNP in the AutoCAD
Electrical Panel layer name list.

1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access

the Rename Panel Layers tool.

2 Click the Rename Panel Layers tool.

3 To edit an individual layer name, select the layer to edit from

the list and click Edit. Enter a new layer name and click OK.

4 To edit multiple layer names, click Find/Replace.Enter the text

to find and the text to replace it with in the edit boxes. Click
OK.

Manage schematic layers

1 Click the Drawing Properties tool.

2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Drawing Format

tab.

3 In the Layers section, click Define.

4 In the Define Layers dialog box, specify information for the

component layers and wire number layers.
The layer names you choose are what AutoCAD Electrical will
use as it inserts the parts and pieces of component symbols
and wire numbers. If the layer name you enter doesn't exist
when it comes time for AutoCAD Electrical to insert something
onto that layer, AutoCAD Electrical creates that layer on the
fly.

5 Click OK.

6 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click OK.

144 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 NOTE You can also change layer properties using the Project Manager tool.In the
Project Manager, right-click on the drawing name and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties (or to change the project default settings, right-click on the project
name and select Properties. The settings will be applied to new drawings). In the
Drawing Format tab, Layers section, click Define.

Rename schematic layers

The Rename Schematic Layers tool makes it easy to rename layers one by one,
or multiple layers at once by using the Find/Replace method.

1 Click the arrow on the Drawing Properties tool to access the

Rename Schematic Layers tool.

2 Click the Rename Schematic Layers tool.

3 To edit an individual layer name, select the layer to edit from

the list and click Edit. Enter a new layer name and click OK.

4 To edit multiple layer names, click Find/Replace.Enter the text

to find and the text to replace it with in the edit boxes. Click
OK.

NOTE You can also change layer properties using the Project Manager tool.In the
Project Manager, right-click on the drawing name and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties (or to change the project default settings, right-click on the project
name and select Properties. The settings will be applied to new drawings). In the
Drawing Format tab, Layers section, click Define.

Define layers
AutoCAD Electrical automatically manages the wire number and component
layers you setup in the drawing settings. No matter which layer is active, wires
always go to a wire layer and components go to component layers.

Access:

Click the Drawing Properties tool. In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click
the Drawing Format tab. In the Layers section, click Define.

Manage layers | 145

Access:

From the Projects menu, select Drawing Properties. In the Drawing Properties
dialog box, click the Drawing Format tab. In the Layers section, click Define.

NOTE You can also change layer properties using the Project Manager tool.In the
Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties. (To change the project default settings, right-click the project name
,and select Properties.The settings are applied to new drawings). In the Drawing
Format tab, Layers section, click Define.

The layer names you choose are what AutoCAD Electrical uses as it inserts the
parts and pieces of component symbols and wire numbers. It doesn't matter
what layer is current at the time. If the layer name you enter doesn’t exist
when it comes time for AutoCAD Electrical to insert something onto that
layer, AutoCAD Electrical creates that layer on the fly.

Component Block Layers

Displays layer names.Type layer names into the edit boxes. A blank entry
inserts that category on the current layer. Multiple categories can be tied to
the same layer name (enter the same layer name into multiple edit boxes).
When a schematic component is inserted, the block's graphics are inserted
onto the layer listed in the Non text Graphics box. The block's attribute text
is automatically moved to the layers listed in the other boxes, based upon
attribute function.

Non-Text Graphics Layer name for all non attribute graphics of a symbol

Component Tags Layer name for all parent and child component name tags
(for example, "CR101")

Fixed Tags Layer name for component tags that are fixed and are not
changed if processed by the RE-TAG command

Description Layer name for parent functional description text (for ex-
ample, "MASTER RELAY")

Description (Child) Layer name for child contact functional description text (a
copy of the parent's description)

146 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

Cross-Reference Layer name for parent cross-reference text

Cross-Reference (Child) Layer name for child cross-reference text

Pin Numbers Layer name for terminal pin number text

Installation/Location Layer name for optional location and installation code text

Positions Layer name for switch position text

Miscellaneous Text Layer name for all other component annotation

Dashed Link Lines Layer name for dashed lines that can be inserted to show
multiple components linked together

Location Box Layer name for Location Boxes

Freeze If a given layer name exists, this switch (Freeze/Thaw) can

be used to hide (freeze) all attributes on that layer. For ex-
ample, to hide all child cross-reference text, select Freeze
next to the Cross-reference (child) edit box. You can also
use the AutoCAD LAYER command to do the same thing.

Apply to entities on layer "0" only As AutoCAD Electrical inserts a component, it moves the
parts and pieces of the symbol to the category layers listed
in this dialog. If you do not want an attribute or the
graphics of a specific electrical symbol block to be moved
to the defined AutoCAD Electrical layers, create your symbol
with the entities on some layer other than 0, and then select
this switch.

Wire Number Layers

Displays wire number layers.

Wire Numbers Layer name for normal wire numbers

Wire Copies Layer name for extra wire number copies

Manage layers | 147

Fixed Numbers Layer name for fixed wire numbers that do not change
with a renumber

Terminal/Signal Layer name for wire number copies that are part of a ter-
minal or signal arrow symbol

Let's say your current layer is BORDER when you use the AutoCAD Electrical
icon menu to insert a 2-position selector switch. The lines and circles of the
switch symbol automatically go to layer SYMS, the component's tag to layer
TAGS, the description text to DESC, switch position text to POS, and soon. If
a new wire number inserts as a result of the switch breaking an existing
numbered wire, the wire number automatically goes to layer WIRENO. All of
this happens automatically, while your layer BORDER is current.

Rename schematic or panel layers

The Layer Rename and Panel Layer Rename utilities make it easy to rename
layers one by one, or multiple layers at once by using the Find/Replace
method.In addition to renaming the layer, this also updates the AutoCAD
Electrical layer assignment information carried on the drawing's WD_M
block.For example, if DEMO-WIRES is currently assigned as an AutoCAD
Electrical wire layer, and you rename it using this utility, the new layer name
is substituted for DEMO-WIRES in the AutoCAD Electrical wire layer name
list.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Rename
Panel Layers tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Miscellaneous Panel Tools ➤ Rename
Panel Layer.
Click the arrow on the Drawing Properties tool to access the Rename Schematic
Layers tool.
From the Projects menu, select Rename Schematic Layers.

Click the arrow on the Drawing Properties tool to access the Rename Schematic
Layers tool.
From the Projects menu, select Rename Schematic Layers.

Layer Name Lists the drawing layer names referenced in either the Drawing
Properties dialog box or the Panel Layout Configuration dialog
box.

148 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

Find/Replace Replaces a name or substring within a layer name.

Edit Edits the selected layer name.

Panel component layers

Use this to set the panel component layers, non-text graphic layers, and
nameplate layers.When AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint, it is modified
on the fly to match the layering scheme set up in this dialog.

Access:

Click the Panel Configuration tool. Click the Layers Setup button.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Panel Configuration. Click the Layers Setup
button.

Panel Component Layers Lists all of the component layers. Change the layer
name for a tag by entering a new name in the edit
box. If you do not want an attribute moved to a PNL
layer, place that attribute on some other layer than
"0" on the block. Then, click on the Ignore above for
symbol's non-lay 0 ents toggle.

Non-Text Graphic Layers When a panel component is inserted, the block will
be inserted on the first layer in the "Non-text
Graphics" layer list. Attributes will be moved to the
layer defined for its type.

Nameplate Layers Lists existing nameplate layers for the graphics, tags,
and descriptions.

F (Available if a layer exists already) Use this to freeze

or thaw any of the panel layers.

Find/Replace Performs a global find and replace on the layer

names.

Manage layers | 149

Use wire layers
The Set Wire Type tool is used for setting a wire type for new wires only. The
wire layer name and the associated wire properties (such as wire color and
size) are saved in the drawing file. The chosen wire layer for a new wire is
determined by the following:

■ When a wire is created from an existing wire, the new wire takes on the
same layer as the existing wire. It ignores the current layer and the current
wire type.

■ When the new wire is started in empty space but ends at an existing wire,
the new wire takes on the wire layer of the ending wire, ignoring the current
layer and current wire type.

■ When a new wire is started at an existing wire and ends at another existing
wire, the new wire takes on the layer of the beginning wire.

■ If there aren't any wire layers in the drawing, the new wire is drawn in the
WIRES layer.

■ When a wire starts in empty space and ends at the component wire
connection point (or vice versa), the new wire is drawn on the current wire
type instead of the layer of the wires already tied to the same component
connection points.

Use the Create/Edit Wire Type tool to create new or edit existing wire types
or use the Change/Convert Wire Type tool to convert lines to wires.

150 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

Create wire layers
Wire layer names for drawings are set up in the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog
box.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Create/Edit
Wire Type tool.

2 Click the Create/Edit Wire Type tool.

3 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, click inside the Wire
Color column for a blank row and specify a value for the new
wire layer.

4 Click inside the Size column and specify a value for the size.
The Layer Name is automatically created. If you specified Wire
Color: Red and Size: 20, the name RED_20 is assigned to the
wire layer you are creating.

5 Click Color, Linetype, or Lineweight to assign values for the

new layer.

NOTE If you want the new wire layer to be the default, click Mark
Selected as Default.

6 Click OK.

Add existing wire layers to the drawing

Wire layer names for drawings are set up in the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog
box.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Create/Edit
Wire Type tool.

2 Click the Create/Edit Wire Type tool.

3 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, click Add Existing

Layer.

Use wire layers | 151

 4 In the Layers for Line "Wires" dialog box, define the layer name
and click OK. You can either enter a name in the edit box or
click Pick to select a name from the existing layer list.
The layer displays in the wire type grid. If you selected the
wrong wire layer, highlight the layer in the dialog box and
click Remove Layer. You can then go back into the Layers for
Line "Wires" dialog box and select another layer to add.

5 In the Create/Edit dialog box, click Color, Linetype, or Line-

weight to assign new values for the layer.

6 Click OK.

Create/edit wire type

This tool creates and edits wire types. Use the grid control to sort and select
the wire types for easy modification.

TIP Use the Change/Convert Wire Type tool to convert lines to wires or type "T"
at the command prompt during wire insertion to use the Set Wire Type tool.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Create/Edit Wire Type tool.
From the Wires menu, select Create/Edit Wire Type.

Wire type grid

Displays the wire types used in the active drawing. The the wire layer name
and the wire properties like color, size, and user defined properties are listed
in the grid. An 'x' in the Used column indicates that the layer name is currently
used in the drawing; a blank value in this column indicates that the layer
name exists in the drawing but it is not currently being used. The current wire
type is highlighted with a gray background; selected wire types highlight in
blue.
To rename the User1- User 20 column headers, right-click the project name
in the Project Manager and select Properties. In the Project Properties ➤ Wire
Numbers dialog box, Wire Type section, click Rename User Columns. In the
Rename User Columns dialog box, specify a new column name and click OK.
Renaming of user-defined columns is project-specific. You cannot rename the

152 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 Color, Size, or Layer Name columns. All of the data corresponding to the
header column can be copied, cut, and pasted to another column.
All text fields are editable with the exception of the Layer Name cell; it cannot
be edited for existing layers. Left-click to edit the cell or right-click in a cell to
display options for modifying the cell contents. If you want to rename a layer,
right-click on a cell and select Rename Layer. Right-click options include:
Copy, Cut, Paste, Delete Layer and Rename Layer. You can not delete or remove
a layer if it is the default layer.
You can select multiple layers to edit or remove by using the Shift or Ctrl keys
on your keyboard while picking the wire layer in the wire type list.
You can move the wire type records inside the grid to whatever position you
want using drag and drop. Select the wire type record(s) you want to move
and drag to the new position in the grid.

Option

Make All Lines Valid Wires Makes all existing layers valid wire layers and displays
them in the wire type grid.
Once you select to make all of the layers valid wire
layers, you can deselect this option if you later decide
you want some layers to be wire layers and others
to be line layers.All of the layers are removed from
the wire type grid. You need to add layers again us-
ing the Add Existing Layer option.

Layer

Allows you to format the layer name, define or edit the layer color, line type,
and line weight.

Layer Name Format Allows you to format the layer name. The program
should fill the layer name automatically once you
enter a value in color, size based on the format. For
example if you enter BLK for color and 10AWG for
size, then the layer name will be filled in automatic-
ally as BLK_10AWG based on default %C_%S format.
Placeholders are supported at any place in the format
(i.e. "CUST%C-THIN%S).
Valid wire name format codes are:
■ %C = Wire Color

Use wire layers | 153

 ■ %S = Wire Size
■ %1-%5 = User 1 - User 5

Color Displays the AutoCAD dialog for Layer colors election.

The Select Color dialog box highlights the color
corresponding to the wire type record. The default
color for new records is white.Undefined colors for
layers use the default color while creating the layer.
Multiple selection is allowed. All wire layers that have
been selected can be changed to the desired color.

Linetype Displays the AutoCAD dialog for linetype selec-

tion.This Select Linetype dialog box highlights the
linetype corresponding to the wire type record. The
default linetype for new records is continuous. Un-
defined line types for layers use the default line type
while creating the layer. Multiple selection is allowed.
All wire layers that have been selected can be
changed to the desired linetype.

NOTE If you need special line types for constructing

P&ID or point to point diagrams, you need to load
the special line types from theacade.lin text file.

Lineweight Displays the AutoCAD dialog for lineweight selec-

tion.The Lineweight dialog box highlights the line-
weight corresponding to the wire type record. The
default lineweight for new records is default. Un-
defined lineweights for layers should use the default
lineweight while creating the layer. Multiple selection
is allowed. All wire layers that have been selected can
be changed to the desired lineweight.

Add Existing Layer Displays the Layers for Line Wires dialog box for
specifying a layer name. You can also click Pick to
select the layer name from the existing layer list that
consists of all the layers in the drawing inclusive of
the non-wire layers.
Only lines on pre-selected layers are processed as
wires. Enter a wire layer name in the dialog box. A
wildcard used in the name selects a group of layers

154 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 (for example, RED_* selects all layers that begin with
"RED_").

Remove Layer Removes the selected layer name from the wire type
grid. The layer is no longer a valid wire layer, however
the layer remains in the drawing as an AutoCAD line
layer.
If multiple layers of one color exist in the drawing,
you must select all layers of that color in the wire
type grid to activate this button. For example, if there
are multiple RED* layers such as RED_AWG18,
RED_AWG20,and RED_AWG25, you must select all
3 layers in the wire type grid to enable the button.

NOTE Only unused layers in the active drawing can

be deleted.

Mark Selected as Default Makes the selected layer the default layer for new
wire layers and displays the layer name in the dialog
box.

OK

NOTE This is available only when one wire type record is selected in the list.

Makes the selected wire type the current wire type. If the selected wire type
does not already exist on the drawing, the wire layer is created on the fly and
the wire layer name and properties are saved in the drawing file. In order for
the layer to be created the following rules apply:

■ The layer name must be unique

■ The layer name cannot be left blank

■ The layer name cannot contain special characters such as / \ " : ; ? * | , = '
><

Use wire layers | 155

Change wire types
You can change the wire type using the Change/Convert Wire Type tool or
by typing a "T" at the command prompt during wire insertion commands.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the

Change/Convert Wire Type tool.

2 Click the Change/Convert Wire Type tool.

Optionally, you can right-click on an existing wire and select
Change/Convert Wire Type.

3 In the Change/Convert Wire Type dialog box, select a wire

type record in the wire type list, or click Pick to select a wire
type record from the drawing.
If you right-clicked on a wire and selected Change/Convert
Wire Type, in the Change/Convert Wire Type dialog box, the
wire type corresponding to the selected wire layer is highlighted
in the list.

4 Make any selections in the dialog box.

If Change all wires in the wire network is selected, all wires in
the wire network are changed to the new wire type. If unselec-
ted, only the selected wire is changed.
If Convert Lines to Wires is selected, the selected lines are
changed to the new wire type. If unselected, the lines are ig-
nored.

5 Click OK.

6 Select the wires or lines in the drawing to change and press

Enter.

156 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 Override wire type at command prompt

During wire insertion, the current wire type displays at the command prompt.
You can override this by typing in the hot key "T" and selecting a new wire
type from the Set Wire Type dialog box. The new wire type becomes the current
wire type and the command continues with the wire insertion. Use the
following commands:

■ Wires ➤ Insert Wire

■ Wires ➤ Angle Wires ➤ Insert 22.5 Degree Wires (also 45 or 67.5)

■ Wires ➤ Multiple Wire Bus

■ Wires ➤ Add Rung

■ Wires ➤ Ladders ➤ Insert Ladder

NOTE If you select Another Bus (Multi-Wire) in the Multiple Wire Bus dialog box,
the wires are drawn on the same wire layer as that of the existing wire bus; you
do not have the ability to type "T" to change the wire type during wire insertion.

Change/convert wire type

This tool converts lines to wires. Use the grid control to sort and select the
wire types for easy modification.

TIP Use the Create/Edit Wire Type tool to create and edit wire types or type "T"
at the command prompt during wire insertion to use the Set Wire Type tool.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Change/Convert Wire Type
tool.
From the Wires menu, select Change/Convert Wire Type.
Right-click on an existing wire and select Change/Convert Wire Type.

Wire type grid

Displays the wire types used in the active drawing. The the wire layer name
and the wire properties like color, size, and user defined properties are listed
in the grid. An 'x' in the Used column indicates that the layer name is currently
used in the drawing; a blank value in this column indicates that the layer
name exists in the drawing but it is not currently being used.

Change wire types | 157

 To rename the User1- User 20 column headers, right-click the project name
in the Project Manager and select Properties. In the Project Properties ➤ Wire
Numbers dialog box, Wire Type section, click Rename User Columns. In the
Rename User Columns dialog box, specify a new column name and click OK.
Renaming of user-defined columns is project-specific. You cannot rename the
Color, Size, or Layer Name columns. All of the data corresponding to the
header column can be copied, cut, and pasted to another column.

Pick

Allows you to pick a wire or line in the active drawing. Once you pick a wire,
the corresponding wire type record is highlighted. If you pick a line in the
active drawing, you can add the layer where the line resides to the list of valid
wire layers. A new wire type record is created automatically.

Change/Convert

Change All Wire(s) in the Network Changes all the wires in the wire network to the se-
lected wire type record. If unselected, only a single
wire is changed to the selected wire type.

Convert Line(s) to Wire(s) Changes the lines to the selected wire type in the
wire type grid.

OK

NOTE This is available only when one wire type record is selected in the list.

Makes the selected wire type the current wire type. If the selected wire type
does not already exist on the drawing, the wire layer is created on the fly and
the wire layer name and properties are saved in the drawing file. In order for
the layer to be created the following rules apply:

■ The layer name must be unique

■ The layer name cannot be left blank

■ The layer name cannot contain special characters such as / \ " : ; ? * | , = '
➤ <

Set wire type

158 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

 This tool sets wire types for new wires. Use the grid control to sort and select
the wire types for easy modification.

TIP Use the Create/Edit Wire Type tool to create and edit wire types or the
Change/Convert Wire Type tool to convert lines to wires.

Access:

Type "T" at the command prompt during wire insertion.

Wire type grid

Displays the wire types used in the active drawing. The the wire layer name
and the wire properties like color, size, and user defined properties are listed
in the grid. An 'x' in the Used column indicates that the layer name is currently
used in the drawing; a blank value in this column indicates that the layer
name exists in the drawing but it is not currently being used.
To rename the User1- User 20 column headers, right-click the project name
in the Project Manager and select Properties. In the Project Properties ➤ Wire
Numbers dialog box, Wire Type section, click Rename User Columns. In the
Rename User Columns dialog box, specify a new column name and click OK.
Renaming of user-defined columns is project-specific. You cannot rename the
Color, Size, or Layer Name columns. All of the data corresponding to the
header column can be copied, cut, and pasted to another column.

OK

NOTE This is available only when one wire type record is selected in the list.

Makes the selected wire type the current wire type. If the selected wire type
does not already exist on the drawing, the wire layer is created on the fly and
the wire layer name and properties are saved in the drawing file. For the layer
to be created, the following rules apply:

■ The layer name must be unique.

■ The layer name cannot be left blank.

■ The layer name cannot contain special characters such as / \ " : ; ? * | , = '
> <.

Change wire types | 159

 Optional ENV file assignment for current project
You can create an alternate environment settings ENV file and assign it to the
active project. Customer-specific ENV files can be created to store customer
settings, paths, libraries, and menus. For a given project, you can assign the
appropriate ENV file to the project. The ENV file name reference is saved in
the project's WDP drawing list file. Whenever the project is selected, the
settings in the referenced ENV file are automatically restored.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. Right-click the drawing name and select Settings.
On the Current Settings dialog box, click Environment file.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the
drawing name and select Settings. On the Current Settings dialog box, click
Environment file.

160 | Chapter 3 Drawing and Project Properties

Symbol Libraries
4
In this chapter
■ Determine symbol block
names
■ Library Symbol Naming
Conventions
■ Split a tag name into two
pieces
■ Use multiple symbol
libraries
■ Overview of Hydraulic and
P&ID symbols
■ Attribute Requirements
■ Managing Library Symbols

161
Determine symbol block names
The default symbol subdirectory, jic1, and a companion 0.125 uniform text
height library, jic125, each contain hundreds of component symbols in
standard AutoCAD ".dwg" file format. These are referenced by AutoCAD
Electrical and its icon menuing system and are inserted as standard AutoCAD
blocks with attributes. There are two ways to determine the block name of an
existing symbol:

METHOD A

Insert the symbol from the AutoCAD Electrical icon menu and then use the
AutoCAD LIST command to display the block name. Add /Program
Files/Autodesk/Electrical/libs/jic1/ as a prefix to this block name to obtain the
path to the symbol's ".dwg" file (or /Program
Files/Autodesk/Electrical/libs/jic125/ as a prefix for the uniform 0.125 unit
text height version).

METHOD B

The file WD_MENU.dat lists the symbol descriptions and file names of all
components referenced in the AutoCAD Electrical icon menuing system. You
can pick the symbol names from this file. Here is an example of how the data
looks in this file.
"On delay coil | S2(SHTD1N) | HTD1N".
The "|" characters divide the entry into three sections. The first piece is the
description that appears in the menu's side bar, the second in a slide-library
reference, and the third is the actual symbol file name. In this example, the
file name of the library symbol is htd1n.dwg. The vertical version of this
symbol is vtd1n.dwg.
You can select a different name for a component family by creating or editing
the WD_FAM.dat file. For example, if you want limit switches to be tagged
"LIM" instead of "LS" and you want pilot lights to be "PL" instead of "LT", you
would add the following two lines to the file (or create the file if it does not
exist):
LS,LIM
LT,PL
The change takes effect when you exit and reload AutoCAD Electrical. New
limit switch components you insert will receive the "LIM" family code
annotation instead of the library default of "LS," and pilot lights will be tagged

162 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 with "PL" instead of "LT." Use the RETAG command to update previously
inserted components.

Overview of symbol naming conventions

AutoCAD Electrical depends on a specific naming convention to enable some
of its automation features to work. Though not mandatory, you are urged to
follow the naming convention outlined below if you create new AutoCAD
Electrical-smart symbols for use with AutoCAD Electrical. This will allow your
custom symbols to take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical features.
View the naming conventions for various AutoCAD Electrical symbols below.

Cable Marker Symbols

AutoCAD Electrical cable conductor marker symbols follow this convention:

■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion.

■ The next two characters are "W0." A zero (0) means that the symbol does
not trigger a wire number change through it.

■ The fourth character is either 1 or 2: "1" for parent marker or "2" for child
marker.

■ The remaining characters are not specified.

Examples:

HW01.dwg Parent cable conductor marker, horizontal wire insertion

HW02.dwg Child cable marker, horizontal wire insertion

VW01.dwg Parent cable conductor marker, vertical wire insertion

VW02.dwg Child cable marker, vertical wire insertion

Library Symbol Naming Conventions | 163

 Components - General

Schematic components such as relays, switches, pilot lights, and discrete motor
control devices (but not PLC I/O symbols) follow this naming convention:

■ 32-character block name maximum, first character is either "H" or "V" for
horizontal or vertical wire insertion.

■ The next two characters are reserved for family type (for example, PB for
push buttons, CR for control relays, LS for limit switches). A zero (0) as the
second character of the family type (for example, a 0 in the overall symbol
name) means that the symbol does not trigger a wire number change
through it (for example, T0 for terminals, W0 for cable markers, C0 for
connectors).

■ The fourth character is generally a 1 or a 2: 2 for child contacts and 1 for

everything else (parent or standalone component).

■ If the symbol is a contact, then the 5th character is a 1 for normally open,
2 for normally closed.

■ The remaining characters are not specified. They are used to keep names
unique.

Examples:

HCR1.dwg Control relay coil, horizontal rung insertion

VCR1.dwg Control relay coil, vertical rung insertion

HCR21.dwg Horizontal relay contact, N.O.

HCR22.dwg Horizontal relay contact, N.C.

HCR22T.dwg Horizontal relay contact, N.C., with in-line terminal numbers

VPB11.dwg Vertical push button, parent contact, N.O.

VPB21.dwg Vertical push button, child contact, N.O.

HLS11.dwg Horizontal limit switch, parent, N.O.

164 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

HLS11H.dwg Horizontal limit switch, parent, N.O. Held closed

VLT1RP.dwg Vertical pilot light, red, press-to-test

HW01.dwg Horizontal cable marker, no wire number change through it

Component Location Mark Symbols

AutoCAD Electrical expects the location symbol names to begin with the
characters "WDXX."

Configuration and Ladder Master Line Reference Symbols

AutoCAD Electrical expects to find these block inserts:

WD_M.dwg Block insert consisting of about 50 invisible attributes. These carry

the drawing's settings.

WD_PNLM.dwg Optional block insert consisting of several invisible attributes.

These carry the drawing's settings for panel layout functions.

WD_MLRH.dwg Block insert that carries a ladder's first line reference number and
additional information such as rung spacing and ladder length.

WD_MLRV.dwg Same as above but for a ladder that lies on its side.

WD_MLRHX.dwg Optional, user-defined alternative to WD_MLRH.dwg. This symbol

name is used by AutoCAD Electrical when you select 'User Block'
from the Line Reference Numbers subdialog box of the Drawing
Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box (on the Drawing
Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box, Format Referencing
section, select Reference Numbers and click Setup).

WD_MLRVX.dwg Same as above but for a ladder that lies on its side.

NOTE The ladder line reference block used by AutoCAD Electrical is determined
by the ladder reference configuration selected in the Format Referencing section
of the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.

Overview of symbol naming conventions | 165

 Connector Symbols

■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal or vertical orientation.

■ The next 2 characters are "CN" for connector.

■ The 4th character is either 1 or 2: 1 for parent or 2 for child.

■ The 5th character is "_"

■ The 6th character is 1-9 for the style number.

■ The 7th character:

(Combo) specifies the plug or jack ID: P = Plug, J = Jack (Receptacle)
(Only) specifies the wire direction: 1 = right, 2 = top, 4 = left; and 8 =
bottom.

■ The 8th character is either "P" or "J": P = Plug, J = Jack (Receptacle)

Examples:

HCN1_14P.dwg Horizontal parent - single (plug) wiring connects from left or

bottom

VCN2_18P.dwg Vertical child - single (plug) wiring connects from left or bottom

HCN1_11J.dwg Horizontal parent - single (receptacle) wiring connects from right

or top

VCN2_12P.dwg Vertical child - single (plug) wiring connects from right or top

Upon completion of the parametric build connector, a unique new block

definition is created. Each connector is labeled with a unique naming
convention within the same project.

HCN1_14P_nnn Horizontal connector; where 'nnn' is a random number for

uniqueness

VCN1_18P_nnn Vertical connector; where "nnn" is a random number for

uniqueness

166 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 Hydraulic Symbols

The maximum number of characters for the block name is 32.

■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical.

■ The next 2 characters are the first 2 letters of the family name (for example,
FI for filters, CY for cylinders, PM for pumps). See Overview of Hydraulic
and P&ID symbols (page 174)for a list of symbol family names.

■ The 4th character is "1" for hydraulic symbols - stand-alone component.

■ Use "_" and enter a meaningful name corresponding to the symbol.

Example:

HCYL1_plunger_cyl.dwg Horizontal standalone cylinder; plunger_cyl is the

meaningful name for the symbol

Inline Wire Marker Symbols

Dumb inline wire marker symbols must be constructed with a tiny piece of
"pigtail" line entity at each connection point. This can be very small but it
must be present for AutoCAD Electrical to correctly "see" the in-line inserted
block as it traces the wire network. Inline wire marker symbols follow this
naming convention:

■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion.

■ The next three characters are "T0_"

■ The remaining characters are undefined.

Example:

HT0_RED.dwg "RED" inline marker, horizontal wire insert

P&ID Symbols

The maximum number of characters for the block name is 32.

■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical.

Overview of symbol naming conventions | 167

 ■ The next 2 characters are the first 2 letters of the family name (for example,
GV for diaphragm valves, IN for instruments, N for nozzles). See Overview
of Hydraulic and P&ID symbols (page 174)for a list of symbol family names.

■ The 4th character is "1" for P&ID symbols - stand-alone component.

■ Use "_" and enter a meaningful name corresponding to the symbol.

Example:

VTK1_ver_tank.dwg Vertical standalone cyclone; ver_tank is the meaningful

name for the symbol

Panel Layout Footprint Symbols

There isn't a required naming convention to follow, but the name must adhere
to the AutoCAD 32-character block name limit.

Parametric Twisted Pair Symbols

A parametrically generated twisted pair representation consists to two instances

of the same symbol (there are no parent/child versions). This symbol must
carry attribute ACE_FLAG with a value of "3." Parametric twisted pair symbols
follow this naming convention:

■ The first 4 characters are "HT0_" or "VT0_" for horizontal or vertical

parametric symbols.

■ The remaining characters can be anything (default is set to "TW")

Examples:

HT0_TW.dwg Horizontal parametric connector symbol

VT0_TW.dwg Vertical parametric connector symbol

PLC I/O Parametric Build Symbols

These symbols begin with "HP" or "VP" (horizontal rung versus vertical)
followed by a digit 1 through 9. The digit corresponds to the selected PLC
module style or look (1 through 5 are provided in the AutoCAD Electrical
library, 6 through 9 can be user-defined).

168 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 Plug/Jack Connector Pin Symbols

AutoCAD Electrical connector symbols follow this convention:

■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion.

■ The next two characters are "C0" if the connector does not trigger a wire
number change through it (the "0" meaning that the wire number does
not change), or "CN" if the connector DOES trigger a wire number change.

■ The 4th character is either 1 or 2: 1 for parent marker or a 2 for child

marker.

■ The remaining characters are not specified.

Splice Symbols

Splices follow this naming convention:

■ The first 4 characters are "HSP1" or "VSP1" for horizontal or vertical splices.

■ The 5th through 7th characters are "001", "002", "003," and so on.

Examples:

HSP1001.dwg Horizontal splice #1

VSP1001.dwg Vertical splice #1

HSP1003.dwg Horizontal splice #3

Source/Destination Wire Signal Arrow Symbols

AutoCAD Electrical wire signal arrow symbols follow this convention:

■ The first four characters of these symbol names are either "HA?S" for source
signal arrows or "HA?D" for destination symbol arrows. The "?" character
is the arrow style digit (1 through 4 are provided in the AutoCAD Electrical
library and 5 through 9 can be user-defined).

■ Characters 5 through 11 can be user-defined.

You can create your own arrow styles using these unused digits (for example,
HA5S... and HA5D...). For example, copy Autodesk\Acade

Overview of symbol naming conventions | 169

 {version}\Libs\jic1\ha1s*.dwg to ha5s*.dwg and Autodesk\Acade
{version}\Libs\jic1\ha1d*.dwg to ha1d*.dwg. Access each copied arrow symbols
in AutoCAD and edit to suit. Then, to access your new arrow style, set the
default arrow style to "5" in the Drawing Properties ➤ Styles dialog box.
Standalone Cross-Reference Symbols:
Same naming convention as the Source/Destination Signal symbols (i.e. HA?S*
and HA?D*) but without a WIRENO attribute present on the symbol.

Stand-Alone PLC I/O Point Symbols

These symbols begin with "PLCIO" and can be up to 32 characters long. There
is no naming convention referenced by AutoCAD Electrical other than the
"PLCIO" prefix.
Examples:

PLCIO50E1761-L16AWA.dwg AB 1761 model L16-AWA with 0.5 unit rung spacing

PLCIOI1T.dwg Standalone input point, single wire connection

Standalone Terminal Symbols

Stand-alone terminals follow this naming convention:

■ The first two characters are "HT."

■ The third character is "0" if the wire number does not change through the
terminal, "1" if the terminal symbol should trigger a wire number change.

■ The 4th character is an underscore (_) if the terminal carries no attributes

for AutoCAD Electrical to process (such as a dumb, unannotated terminal
symbol). Otherwise, the 4th through 8th character positions of the symbol
file name are user-defined.

Examples:

HT0001.dwg Square terminal with annotation, wire number does not change

HT1001.dwg Same as above but wire number changes through the terminal

170 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

HT0_01.dwg Dumb, square terminal with no annotation, no wire number
change

User-Defined Symbols

AutoCAD Electrical user-defined symbols follow this convention:

■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion.

■ The next two characters are "ZA" through "ZZ."

■ The remaining characters can be user-defined.

Wire Dot Symbols

AutoCAD Electrical expects this symbol name to be "WDDOT.dwg."

Wire Number Symbols

An AutoCAD Electrical wire number is a block insert consisting of a single

wire number attribute. The origin of the block insert lies on its wire with the
wire number attribute floating above, below, or off to the side of the block's
insertion point.
Examples:

WD_WNH.dwg Wire number for horizontal wire insertion

WD_WNV.dwg Wire number for vertical wire insertion

WD_WCH.dwg Extra wire number copy for horizontal wire

WD_WCV.dwg Extra wire number copy for vertical wire

AutoCAD Electrical also supports inline wire numbers that follow the value
of the main wire number. An inline wire marker has a block name that follows
that of a terminal symbol that does not trigger a wire number change.
Examples:

HT0_W1.dwg Inline wire number marker, horizontal wire insertion, short wire
number

Overview of symbol naming conventions | 171

HT0_W3.dwg Inline wire number marker, horizontal wire insertion, longer wire
number

VT0_W1.dwg Inline wire number marker, vertical wire insertion, short wire
number

VT0_W2.dwg Inline wire number, vertical wire insertion, medium wire width,
vertical wire insertion

Split a tag name into two pieces

TAG1_PART1, TAG1_PART2, TAG1_PARTX (as well as TAG2_PART1,
TAG2_PART2, TAG2_PARTX) are alternatives to TAG1 and TAG2 that allow
you to split a tag name into two pieces and, for example, position one piece
above the other on the symbol. You can create drawings with a mix of both
symbols having split tags and other symbols carrying just the single TAG1 or
TAG2 attribute.

1 Open up the .dwg library symbol drawing that you want to modify.

2 Rename the TAG1 attribute definition to read TAG1_PART1.

3 Add a new attribute definition TAG1_PART2.

4 Position both attribute definitions inside of the symbol's circle graphics

(one above the other).
With this setup, AutoCAD Electrical will automatically split tags like
CR104 and 104CR into two pieces (where characters split from numbers
to letters) and apply the pieces to these attributes.

5 For instances where there might be a delimiter between the character

and number parts of a tag and you don't want the delimiter to be shown
on one part or the other of the visible tag, add attribute definition
TAG1_PARTX to the library symbol and mark it "invisible".
AutoCAD Electrical will store the split tag's delimiter in the attribute.

172 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 NOTE If a parent symbol has the single TAG1 attribute, related child symbols can
have split tag attributes and vice versa. If a parent symbol has split tag attributes,
related child symbols do NOT have to have split tag attributes. The symbol's default
value character string for the tag should be annotated as a default value on the
TAG1_PART1 attribute definition.

Use multiple symbol libraries

You can select the library you want to use for each project. One project might
require a JIC-style library, and another an IEC-style library. Each symbol library
set must be in its own subdirectory, but adhere to the AutoCAD Electrical file
naming convention. You cannot have duplicate symbols in the various symbol
libraries.
To set a symbol library to use for a particular project, right-click the project
name inside the Project Manager, and select Properties. In the Project Properties
➤ Project Settings dialog box, click the plus sign (+) next to Schematic
Libraries or Panel Footprint Libraries. Click Add and enter the library's path
into the edit box or click Default to use the default libraries.

NOTE You can include electrical, pneumatic, or other schematic libraries in the
path.

You can also include a series of library paths for AutoCAD Electrical to use.
To do this, enter the names of the libraries (in order) with a semicolon between
them. For example:
C:/Program Files/Autodesk/Acade {version}/Libs/;C:/{user path}/{user library}.

AutoCAD Electrical search sequence

AutoCAD Electrical runs through specific search sequences when looking for
your symbols.

1 Looks on the drawing for a copy of the requested symbol.

2 Checks for the specific file name if a full path name is provided.

3 Checks in your user subdirectory (given by the WD_USER setting in the

.env file).

4 Checks in the directory where the active project's .wdp file is located.

Use multiple symbol libraries | 173

 5 Checks in the selected library -- this is the library selected per the active
project.

6 Checks the directory containing AutoCAD Electrical support files.

7 Checks the current directory.

8 Checks the path given by the AutoCAD Electrical environment variable.

Set a symbol library as the default

1 Exit AutoCAD Electrical.

2 Make a back-up copy of your environment (.env) file. To find the full
name and path of your .env file, right-click inside the Project Manager,
and select Settings.

3 Open the .env file in a text editor such as Wordpad.

4 Look for a line in the environment file that begins with "WD_LIB."

5 Edit this line to reflect the path of your default library. For example if
the path to your new default library is now n:/elec/syms, change the line
to read:
WD_LIB,n:/elec/syms/,AutoCAD Electrical symbols

6 Save and close the file.

Another way to do this is to use an AutoCAD Electrical variable in the WD_LIB

line of the .env file. You could use %ACAD_SUP_LAST% or
%ACAD_SUP_FIRST% to point to the last (or first) path defined in your
AutoCAD Preferences ➤ Support file path.
WD_LIB,%ACAD_SUP_LAST%,AutoCAD Electrical symbols
WD_LIB,%ACAD_SUP_FIRST%,AutoCAD Electrical symbols

Overview of Hydraulic and P&ID symbols

The hydraulic symbol library consists of all the hydraulic symbols and is found
under C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\hyd_iso125.

174 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 Hydraulic family names

Family Name Description

FI Filter

CYL Cylinder

VAL Valves (directional, throttle valve, pressure valve)

FC Flow control valve

CK Check valve

MAN Manifolds

PS Pressure switch

MOT Motor

PMP Pump

ACC, CMP Accumulator, compensator

MTR Meter

FS Float switch

HE, HTR Heat exchanger, heaters

A Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) is a schematic illustration of

functional relationship of piping, instrumentation and system equipment.
P&ID shows all of piping including the physical sequence of branches, reducers,
valves, equipment, instrumentation and control interlocks. The P&ID are used
to operate the process system.
The P&ID symbol library consists of all the P&ID symbols and is found under
C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\pid.

Overview of Hydraulic and P&ID symbols | 175

 P&ID family names

Family Name Description

CT Equipment: Cooling tower

TK Equipment: Cyclone

E Equipment: Engine, exchanger

C Equipment: Turbine, compressors

F Equipment: Fans

M Equipment: Mixer, agitators

TK, V Tanks and vessels

N Nozzles

P Pumps

FIT Fittings

GVA Valves

ACT Actuators

LOG Logic Functions

INS Instrumentation

FLW, FE Flow

176 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

Attribute Requirements

Overview of schematic attributes

The following are attribute requirements for various categories of schematic
symbols. Note that some attributes are used in multiple categories.

Schematic parent and child components

Attribute Description

TAG1 (Parent only) Attribute for required component tag name (64 charac-
ters maximum). The default value you assign to this attribute definition
becomes the family code character string AutoCAD Electrical uses to
build the component's tag name when the block is inserted into your
schematic. This default value character string is used as the Family
Code (%F) portion of the drawing's tag format code you set up in
the Properties dialog box.
Example: the TAG1 attribute definition on the symbol carries a default
value of "MCR" and the drawing's tag format is "%F%N" where %N
is the placeholder for the line reference number or next sequential
number. As each instance of this symbol is inserted, it will automatic-
ally be assigned a tag name with an "MCR" prefix tacked on to the
reference or next sequential number.

NOTE When a component is marked with a fixed tag, this attribute

name is automatically changed with a "F" suffix (i.e. TAG1 ➤ TAG1F).

TAG2 (Child only) This is a copy of the parent component's tag name (64
characters maximum). If no parent tag is found then AutoCAD Elec-
trical displays the attribute definition's default value (ex: "MCR" or
"PB" or "X").

TAG1_PART1 (Parent only) Alternate to using a single TAG1 attribute (64 characters
TAG1_PART2 maximum). This allows the component tag name to be split into two
pieces (example: two lines - "MDOT" on first line and "123" on the

Attribute Requirements | 177

Attribute Description

second line for a full tag name of "MOT123"). AutoCAD Electrical

pastes the values on these two attributes together when it processes
the component. To include a delimiter character in the tag name but
not show it on the drawing (for example, "MOT-123" but just show
"MOT" and "123"), then a third attribute definition marked invisible,
"TAG1_PARTX" can be added to carry the dash delimiter.

NOTE The default for the %F tagging parameter, as described in

TAG1 above, is carried on the TAG1_PART1 piece of the attribute
pair. If a component with a split tag is marked as Fixed, the attribute
names are automatically changed to "TAG1F_PART1" and
"TAG1F_PART2."

TAG2_PART1 (Child only) Same as above but for child components (64 characters
TAG2_PART2 maximum).

COPYTAG Optional attribute that can carry a copy of whatever AutoCAD Elec-
trical assigns to the tag name attribute - TAG1 or the split tag attribute
combination (64 characters maximum).

MFG Attribute used to hold manufacturer name or code (24 characters

maximum). This attribute is generally marked as invisible.
MFG01 - MFG10: Optional invisible attributes for manufacturer name
or code for up to 10 additional "Multiple Catalog" part number as-
signments (24 characters maximum each). If these attributes are not
present and AutoCAD Electrical needs to store the additional part
number information, it is saved on the inserted symbol as Xdata.

NOTE MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE generally appear on parent com-

ponents only; not child contact symbols.

CAT Attribute used to hold catalog part number assignment (60 characters
maximum). This attribute is generally marked as invisible.
CAT01 - CAT10: Optional invisible attributes for catalog number code
for up to 10 additional "Multiple Catalog" part number assignments
(60 characters maximum each). If these attributes are not present
and AutoCAD Electrical needs to store the additional part number
information, it will be saved on the inserted symbol as Xdata.

178 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

Attribute Description

ASSYCODE Invisible attribute for optional subassembly code that causes AutoCAD
Electrical to look for subassembly items to extract into BOM reports
(60 characters maximum). These subassembly items must be defined
in the active catalog lookup file in the ASSYCODE and ASSYLIST fields.
The value for this attribute is generally set automatically when the
user makes a selection from the catalog lookup that carries sub-
assembly information.
ASSYCODE01 - ASSYCODE10: Optional invisible attributes for sub-
assembly code for up to 10 additional Multiple Catalog part number
assignments (24 characters maximum each). If these attributes are
not present and AutoCAD Electrical needs to store the additional part
number information, it will be saved on the inserted symbol as Xdata.

FAMILY Invisible attribute that carries the components family type (ex: "CR",
"TD", "M", "PB"; 8 characters maximum). Generally, the FAMILY at-
tribute definition's default value is the same as the default value for
the component's TAG1 or TAG2 attribute. It is used as a check at the
time child components are linked to a parent. On a family mismatch,
an alert dialog displays.
A generic child device can be linked to any type of parent symbol if
the child's Family attribute value is left blank. AutoCAD Electrical will
fill it in on the fly with the parent's FAMILY code when the link is
made.

DESC1 DESC1: Description, first or only line of description text (60 characters
DESC2 maximum).
DESC3 DESC2: 2nd line of description text.
DESC3: 3rd line of description text.

INST Optional component installation code (for example, "MACH1"; 24

characters maximum).

LOC Optional component location code (for example, "FIELD", "JBOX2" ;

16 characters maximum).

XREFNO (Parent only) Attributes to hold normally open and normally closed
XREFNC cross-reference annotation. These attributes automatically switch to
invisible if graphical cross-referencing is applied to the component
symbol.

Schematic Attributes | 179

Attribute Description

XREF This attribute can be used in two different ways. It can be used for a
combined list of normally open and normally closed contacts. Auto-
CAD Electrical underlines the closed contacts. If XREFNO and XREFNC
are present then this XREF attribute will be used to carry undefined,
non-NO/NC references.

NOTE If XREF is not present then non-NO/NC contacts are included

with the XREFNO annotation.

CONTACT Invisible attribute present when the symbol is a contact. The value of
this attribute is the contact's de-energized state (ex: "NO" or "NC" or
any text string with an embedded "NO" or "NC" such as "NO-TC".
Use "NULL" as the contact attribute's value if you want to exclude the
contact from being included in any AutoCAD Electrical cross-reference
text annotation.)

POSn Attribute to mark switch position text where "n" is the position number
digit (POS1 through POS12; 24 characters maximum). You can leave
the default value blank and then fill it in at component insertion time.

STATE Optional contact state character string to denote relationship between

switch positions and open/closed contact state. It is for display only.
You can leave the default value blank and then fill it in at component
insertion time.

RATINGn Optional rating / value attribute text where "n" is a digit starting with
"1" (60 characters maximum). AutoCAD Electrical supports up to 12
RATINGn attributes (for example, RATING1 through RATING12) on
the component symbol. These assignments can be pulled into various
AutoCAD Electrical reports.

X?LINK Optional invisible attribute that allows AutoCAD Electrical to automat-

ically tie in dashed link lines between related components (instead
of cross-reference annotation). The "?" is a digit that indicates the
preferred link line connection direction and follows the wire connec-
tion convention (see X?TERMn below).

PINLIST (Parent only) Optional invisible attribute carried on a parent symbol

for storing the allowed contact pin list for the parent's child contacts

180 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

Attribute Description

(no limit on characters). If this attribute is not present then any related
pin list data will be automatically stored on the symbol as Xdata.

PEER_PINLIST (Parent only) Similar to above but is used to temporarily hold a second
pin list that is later retrieved during insertion of a peer parent device.
For example, a reversing motor starter contactor might be a single
component with a single part number, but has a parent coil and a
peer reversing coil. Each is to receive its own unique pin list. The
catalog lookup assignment pulls both sets of pin lists to the parent.
Then, inserting the peer reversing coil and referencing the parent,
the peer's pin list is retrieved from this temporary storage attribute
(or Xdata) on the parent and pulled over to the peer.

WDTAGALT (Parent only) Optional attribute carried on a parent symbol used for
setting up a peer-to-peer relationship. It stores the cross-reference
tag name of a related symbol shown on a different drawing type (ex:
instrument drawing or pneumatic drawing vs. electrical schematic.
For example, an instrument drawing might be included in an AutoCAD
Electrical project drawing set with a valve marked "FY201". On the
electrical schematics, the solenoid for this instrument valve is tagged
"SV456". The WDTAGALT attribute carried on the schematic valve
symbol can be annotated with the "FY201" instrument tag name and
a WDTAGALT attribute on the instrument diagram's symbol carries
the "SV456" tag name pointing back at the schematic representation.
With this in place, AutoCAD Electrical can cross-reference between
them, do auto-update, and enable surfing from one drawing type to
the other.

NOTE For cross-referencing to include these peer references, make

sure that the Peer-to-peer toggle is turned on (under Project Properties
➤ Cross-Reference tab).

WDTYPE Optional attribute used in conjunction with WDTAGALT above. The

value of this attribute is displayed (for informational purposes only)
in the surf window description for peer items during a surf operation.
A typical attribute assignment might be "PID" for a peer symbol used
on an instrument drawing or "Hyd" for a peer symbol appearing on
a hydraulic schematic.

Schematic Attributes | 181

Attribute Description

WD_WEBLINK Attribute carried on a parent symbol for embedding Internet URL's,

".pdf", ".xls", or ".doc" links that can be surfed on. The attribute value
should be the URL, .pdf, .xls, or .doc document file name that should
be displayed when selected from the component's Surf dialog. Mul-
tiple weblink attributes can be assigned to a symbol. Use attribute
names with the WD_WEBLINK prefix, for example, WD_WEBLINK1
and WD_WEBLINK2.

Wire connection/terminal pin number pairs

Attribute Description

X?TERMn Invisible wire connection attributes where an external wire connects

to the attribute's origin point. The "n" character is an incremented
digit starting at "01" used to keep multiple wire connection point at-
tribute names unique. It also provides a link to an associated terminal
number (TERMn) and a terminal description (TERMDESCn) attribute.
The "?" character position is used to identify the preferred wire con-
nection direction:
■ 1: wire connects to the attribute from the right
■ 2: wire connects to the attribute from above
■ 4: wire connects to the attribute from the left
■ 8: wire connects to the attribute from below
■ 0: special for motor connections that radiate from a circle

If more than 99 terminals are present on a single symbol, the "n"

value can continue with double alpha letters/numbers such as "A0,"
"A1," "AZ," "B0" and so on.

NOTE X?TERMn attributes can be stand-alone, meaning there isn't

an associated TERMn attribute.

X?TERMDESCn Optional wire connection description attributes that match up with

X?TERMn wire connection attributes (128 characters maximum).
These value assigned to each termination description attribute can
be extracted into various wire connection reports or merged onto
panel wiring diagram representations of schematic symbols.

182 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

Attribute Description

These attributes can be used to define a terminal as an internal or

external connection.

TERMn Optional terminal pin number attribute where "n" is a two-digit

number (starting at 01) that is used to match up with the correspond-
ing X?TERMn wire connection attribute (10 characters maximum).
A single TERMn attribute can have 2,3, or 4 wire connection attributes
associated with it. For example, a round, stand-alone terminal symbol
having a single terminal in number attribute TERM01 can carry 4 wire
connection attributes to allow connection from any direction. All 4
wire number attribute names would end with 01 to link them all to
the common terminal pin number attribute.

WD_JUMPERS Optional internal wire jumpers attribute that can be encoded to link
sets of terminals together so AutoCAD Electrical will consider them
internally jumpered when calculating wire number assignments and
processing wire connection and from/to reports. For example, a
WD_JUMPERS attribute value of ((01 02)) will flag AutoCAD Electrical
to treat wire connection X?TERM01 as electrically jumpered to
XD?TERM02. WD_JUMPERS attribute value of ((01 04)(02 05 06))
means that wire connection X?TERM01 and X?TERM04 will be treated
as internally jumpered together and X?TERM02, X?TERM05, and
X?TERM06 are viewed as jumpered together.

NOTE You can keep jumpers from displaying in Wire From/To reports
by placing the jumpers on a layer that contains the substring "JUMP-
ER."

Schematic connector parametric build symbols

The parametric connector is made up of a series of master symbols; one parent

and multiple children (default library symbol names HCN1_1*.dwg,
VCN1_1*.dwg, HCN2_1*.dwg, VCN2_1*.dwg). Below is a list of attributes for
these symbol types.
Parent and Child Pin symbol attributes

Schematic Attributes | 183

 (parent symbol has "1" and child has "2" as 4th character of the symbol name)

Attribute Description

TAG1 (Parent only) Same as above.

TAG2 (Child only) Same as above.

INST Same as above.

LOC

MFG (Parent only) Same as above.

CAT
ASSYCODE

FAMILY Same as above.

GENDER Invisible attribute with blank value.

ACE_FLAG Invisible attribute with a value of "2" for all

parametric connector symbols and a value of "1"
for splice symbols (1 character maximum).

DESC1 Same as above.

DESC2
DESC3

X?LINK Same as above.

WDBLKNAM (Parent only) Invisible attribute with a value of

"HC0" (0 = zero; 32 characters maximum). This
is used to flag access of the "C0" connector table
in the catalog lookup database file.

Parametric Connector - Wire Connection attributes

Attribute Description

TERM01P Attribute for terminal pin number (for plug pin

number).

184 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

Attribute Description

TERM01J Attribute for terminal pin number (for receptacle

pin number).

X?TERM01P Invisible wire connection attributes for plug and

X?TERM01J receptacle side respectively. The "?" is the wire
connection direction digit (1,2,4, or 8).

X?TERMDESC01P Attribute for terminal pin description for plug

X?TERMDESC01J side and receptacle side respectively. The "?" digit
is same as above.

X?WIRE01P Attribute for wire connection annotation for plug

X?WIRE01J side and receptacle side respectively. The "?" digit
is same as above.

X?_TINY_DOT_DONT_REMOVE_01P Visible attribute, very small, single character value

X?_TINY_DOT_DONT_REMOVE_01J (a ".") that must remain visible and must be
placed at the exact insertion location of the Xn-
TERM01P and XnTERM01J attributes. This attrib-
ute is needed to maintain wire connection integ-
rity if a connector pin is moved beyond the end
of the connector shell. The "?" digit is same as
above.

Schematic terminal symbols

The following attributes can be used for terminal symbols or multi-connection

sequence terminal symbols (default library symbol block names HT00*.dwg,
VT00*.dwg, HT10*.dwg, VT10*.dwg, HT0W*.dwg, VT0W*.dwg).

Attribute Description

TAGSTRIP Attribute to carry terminal strip tag name (24 characters maximum).

X?TERM01 Attribute for wire connection (up to 4 attributes positioned at each

end of the symbol's horizontal and vertical axes with the "n" part
giving the wire connection direction digit as described above).

Schematic Attributes | 185

Attribute Description

X?TERMDESC01 Attributes used internally by the Terminal Strip Editor command.

X?PIN01
STRIPSEQ
LINKTERM

WIRENO Attribute to carry the terminal number assignment (24 characters

or TERM01 maximum). If the terminal is to automatically display the wire number
value of the wire network that it is inserted into, then WIRENO attrib-
ute must be present. Otherwise, if the attribute is to carry a terminal
pin assignment independent of the wire number, attribute TERM01
must be used.

INST Same as above.

LOC Same as above.

MFG Same as above.

CAT
ASSYCODE

WDBLKNAM Optional invisible attribute with value of "TRMS" to force access of

the TRMS table in catalog lookup (32 characters maximum).

Special Multiple Connection Sequence Terminal symbol

The following attributes can be used for this special type of terminal symbol.
This single symbol instance can be used to define a series of up to six terminal
strip inter-connections (example, a wire that passes through a series of shipping
split terminal strips). Default library symbol block names H--1_multi*.dwg,
V--1_multi*.dwg.

Attribute Description

WD_#_TAGSTRIP Attribute to carry terminal strip number (16 characters maximum).

Use WD_1_TAGSTRIP for the first terminal strip number and select
from WD_2_TAGSTRIP through WD_6_TAGSTRIP for the next terminal
number in the sequence.

186 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

Attribute Description

WD_#_TERMNO Attribute to carry optional terminal number. Use WD_1_TERMNO for

the first terminal strip number and select from WD_2_TERMNO
through WD_6_TERMNO for the next terminal number in the se-
quence.

WD_#_INFO Attribute to carry additional information such as installation, location,

catalog, and item number assignments; and any connected cable
information. Use WD_1_INFO for the first terminal strip number and
select from WD_2_INFO through WD_6_INFO for the next terminal
number in the sequence.

X?TERM01 Attribute for wire connections on each end of the symbol, the "?"
X?TERM02 character is the wire connection direction, same as above.

Source/Destination wire signal symbols

These symbols allow a wire to jump from one place to another, either within
a drawing or across multiple drawing. Default library symbol names are
HAxSn.dwg, HAxDn.dwg where "x" = style digit and "n" = orientation 1, 2, 3
or 4.

Attribute Description

SIGCODE Attribute carries unique signal code that is user defined as the symbol
is inserted (32 characters maximum). This value is used to match up
each source signal symbol with it one or more destination signal
symbols.

WIRENO Attribute carries a copy of the wire number that gets assigned to the
wire that the signal symbol is attached to (24 characters maximum).
This attribute can be hidden, if desired.

XREF Attribute carries the reference location for the matching source or
destination symbols. Updates automatically with the Update Signal
References tool or Auto Wire Numbers tool.

DESC1 Optional description attribute (60 characters maximum).

Schematic Attributes | 187

Attribute Description

SHEET Optional attribute for the SHEET (%S) value assigned in the Drawing
Settings (12 characters maximum). Updates automatically with the
Update Signal References tool or Auto Wire Numbers tool.

DWGNAM Optional attribute for the DWGNAM (%D) value assigned in the
Drawing Settings (40 characters maximum). Updates same as above.

X?TERM01 Attribute for wire connection where the "?" character is the wire
connection direction, same as above.

Stand-Alone Source/Destination cross-reference symbols

These symbols are similar to the above except there is no wire connection
attribute and no WIRENO attribute. Default library symbol names are
HAxS1_REF.dwg, HAxD1_REF.dwg where "x" = style digit.

In-line wire labels or wire numbers

These symbols insert into a wire, break the wire, and reconnect at each end.
They carry a text label or wire number in the gap between the connected wire
ends. They symbols can dynamically adjust their gap to accommodate the
width of the in-line text. Default library symbol block names are HT0_*.dwg,
VT0_*.dwg.

Attribute Description

COLOR Visible attribute for the text label (COLOR) or in-line wire text
or WIRENO (WIRENO) (24 characters maximum). This attribute is center or middle
justified and placed midway between the pair of wire connection at-
tributes listed below.

X?TERM01 Pair of invisible wire connection attributes where the wires connect.
Connection is made to each attribute's origin point. The "?" character
position in each attribute name identifies the wire connection direc-
tion:
■ 1: wire connects to the attribute from the right
■ 2: wire connects to the attribute from above
■ 4: wire connects to the attribute from the left

188 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

Attribute Description

■ 8: wire connects to the attribute from below

X?_TINY_DOT_DONT_RE- Visible attribute, very small, single character value (a ".") that must
MOVE remain visible and must be placed at the exact insertion location of
each of the XnTERM01 attributes. This attribute is needed to allow
the gap to auto-adjust to text width and to maintain connectivity
through the symbol if the in line label or wire number text is blanked
or grows small compared to the total gap width in the wire.

PLC single I/O point symbols

These attributes need to be present on single, stand-alone I/O symbols with

one or two wire connections. Default library symbol block names are
PLCIOI*.dwg and PLCIOO*.dwg.

Attribute Description

TAG1 Attribute for PLC I/O module tag name (parent / child) with the de-
TAG2 fault attribute definition value for the parent symbol becoming the
"%F" part of the tag name format (64 characters maximum).

TAGA01 Attribute for the I/O address (32 characters maximum).

INST Same as above.

LOC

XREF Same as above.

TERM01L Attribute for terminal pin number on each side (10 characters max-
TERM01R imum). If just a single wire connection then the attribute name is
TERM01.

X?TERM01L Attributes for wire connections on each side. If just a single wire
X?TERM01R connection then the attribute name is X?TERM01 where the "?"
character is the wire connection direction.

Schematic Attributes | 189

Attribute Description

TERMDESC01L Optional terminal pin description attribute on each side of the symbol
TERMDESC01R (128 characters maximum). If just a single wire connection then the
attribute name is TERMDESC01.

MFG (Parent only) Same as above.

CAT
ASSYCODE

DESCA01 - DESCE01 Attributes to hold up to five lines of description text (60 characters
maximum).

LINE1 Optional attributes to hold two lines of general text (example: "Rack"
LINE2 and "Slot" address numbers; 24 characters maximum).

DESC (Parent only) Optional attribute for general description purposes (60
characters maximum).

FAMILY Same as above - default value "PLC" (8 characters maximum).

Splices

Attribute Description

XnWIRE01 Attribute for wire annotation.

XnWIRE02 Attribute for wire annotation.

TERMDESCxx Attribute for wire connection description (128 characters maximum).

ACE_FLAG Invisible attribute (value set to "1" to identify a splice symbol) that's
used for export to Autodesk Inventor Professional (1 characters max-
imum).

190 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 Parametric Twisted Pair symbols

Attribute Description

X?TERM01 Pair of invisible wire connection attributes where the wires

connect. Connection is made to each attribute's origin
point. The "?" character position in each attribute name
identifies the wire connection direction:
■ 1: wire connects to the attribute from the right
■ 2: wire connects to the attribute from above
■ 4: wire connects to the attribute from the left
■ 8: wire connects to the attribute from below

X?_TINY_DOT_DONT_REMOVE Visible attribute, very small, single character value (a ".")

that must remain visible and must be placed at the exact
insertion location of each of the XnTERM01 attributes. This
attribute is needed to allow the gap to auto-adjust to text
width and to maintain connectivity through the symbol if
the in line label or wire number text is blanked or grows
small compared to the total gap width in the wire.

ACE_OFFSET Invisible attribute that carries the vertex offset distance

measured from the midpoint of the symbol's two wire
connection points. A positive value increases the total dis-
tance between the vertices (of the two symbols making up
the twisted pair symbol). A negative value decreases this
distance. A value of 0.0 means that the vertex location is
at the symbol's midpoint.

ACE_FLAG Invisible attribute set to a value of 3 to identify a twisted

pair symbol (1 characters maximum).

Schematic Attributes | 191

 Overview of non-schematic attributes
Terminal block footprint symbols

Terminal block footprint symbols require special attributes in their definitions

to help facilitate the Terminal Strip Editor graphical layout. AutoCAD Electrical
generates a physical layout of the terminal strips and annotates the terminal
number, wire number, and destination device of what is connected to the
terminal block from the attributes. To accomplish this annotation, attributes
are needed to accommodate the position of text relative to the terminal block
symbol.

Attribute Description

P_TAGSTRIP Invisible attribute to carry terminal strip number (24 character max-
imum) for terminal footprint.

LOC Invisible attribute for optional terminal location code (for example,
“JBOX1”; 16 characters maximum).

INST Invisible attribute for optional terminal installation code (for example,
“MACH1”; 24 characters maximum).

TERM Attribute to carry the terminal pin number assignment (10 characters
or WIRENO maximum). It can be related to the attached wire number or inde-
pendent of the wire number.

MFG Invisible attribute for optional manufacturer name or code (24 char-
acters maximum).

CAT Invisible attribute for optional catalog number (60 character maxim-
um).

ASSYCODE Invisible attribute for optional subassembly code that causes AutoCAD
Electrical to look for subassembly items to extract into BOM reports
(60 characters maximum). These subassembly items must be defined
in the active catalog lookup file in the ASSYCODE and ASSYLIST fields.

192 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

Attribute Description

The value for this attribute is generally set automatically when the
user makes a selection from the catalog "Lookup" that carries sub-
assembly information.

WDBLKNAM Invisible attribute that specifies the WD block name for catalog lookup
(32 characters maximum). Default for terminals is "TRMS."

FP Invisible attribute or Xdata. Identifies the block insert as a non-

schematic item (i.e a physical footprint representation).

FPT Invisible attribute or Xdata. Identifies the block insert as a panel ter-
minal footprint representation.

WIRENOR Optional attributes for schematic interconnection annotation (24

WIRENOL characters maximum).

TERMDESCR Optional attributes for schematic interconnection annotation (128

TERMDESCL characters maximum).

Hydraulic and P&ID symbols

Attribute Description

TAG1 Attribute for required component tag name (64 characters maximum).
The default value you assign becomes the family code character string
AutoCAD Electrical uses to build the component's tag name when
the block is inserted into your wiring diagram. This default value
character string is used as the Family Code (%F) portion of the
drawing's tag format code you set up in the Drawing Properties ➤
Components dialog box(example %F%N).

INST Optional attribute for component installation code (for example,

"MACH1"; 24 characters maximum).

LOC Optional attribute for component location code (for example, "FIELD",
"JBOX2"; 16 characters maximum).

Non-Schematic Attributes | 193

Attribute Description

FAMILY Invisible attribute that carries the components family type (for ex-
ample, "FI", "INS"; 8 characters maximum). Generally, the FAMILY
attribute definition's default value is the same as the default value for
the component's TAG1 or TAG2 attribute.
A generic child device can be linked to any type of parent symbol if
the child's Family attribute value is left blank. AutoCAD Electrical will
fill it in on the fly with the parent's FAMILY code when the link is
made.

CAT Invisible attribute for optional catalog number (60 characters maxim-
um).

MFG Invisible attribute for optional manufacturer name or code (24 char-
acters maximum).

ASSYCODE Invisible attribute for optional subassembly code that causes AutoCAD
Electrical to extract subassembly items into BOM reports (60 charac-
ters maximum). The value for this attribute is generally set by Auto-
CAD Electrical and not by the user.

RATING1 Optional attribute for rating/value text (60 characters maximum).

DESC1, DESC2, DESC3 DESC1: Description, first or only line of description text (60 characters
maximum).
DESC2: 2nd line of description text.
DESC3: 3rd line of description text.

WDTYPE Attribute used on non-electrical schematic symbols to identify them

as non-electrical (4 characters maximum). Values of the attribute
gives a generic type of symbol such as "HY" for hydraulic symbol or
"PID" for instrument symbol. This attribute value show up in several
pick list dialogs (such as Insert/Edit Component ➤ Tags used so far
dialog pick list).

WDTAGALT Attribute carried on a parent symbol used for setting up a "peer-to-

peer" relationship (64 characters maximum). It stores the cross-refer-
ence tag name of a related symbol shown on a different drawing type
(ex: instrument drawing or pneumatic drawing vs. electrical schem-

194 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

Attribute Description

atic). For example, an instrument drawing might be included in an

AutoCAD Electrical project drawing set with a valve marked "FY201".
On the electrical schematics, the solenoid for this instrument valve is
tagged "SV456". The WDTAGALT attribute carried on the schematic
valve symbol can be annotated with the "FY201" instrument tag name
and a WDTAGALT attribute on the instrument diagram's symbol carries
the "SV456" tag name pointing back at the schematic representation.
With this in place, AutoCAD Electrical can cross-reference between
them, do auto-update, and enable surfing from one drawing type to
the other.

XREF Attribute that be used for a combined list of normally open and nor-
mally closed contacts (if XFREFNO and XREFNC are present) or used
for non-NO/NC contacts (if XREFNO and XREFNC are not present).
AutoCAD Electrical underlines the closed contacts.

TERM Optional terminal pin number attribute (10 characters maximum).

Make sure to keep terminal pin number text paired with its wire
connection attributes.

X?TERMn Invisible wire connection attributes where an external wire connects

to the attribute's origin point. The 'n' character is an incremented digit
starting at "01" used to keep multiple wire connection point attribute
names unique. The "?" character position is used to identify the pre-
ferred wire connection direction:
■ 1: wire connects to the attribute from the right
■ 2: wire connects to the attribute from above
■ 4: wire connects to the attribute from the left
■ 8: wire connects to the attribute from below
■ 0: special for motor connections

If more than 99 terminals are present on a single symbol, the 'n' value
can continue with double alpha letters/numbers such as "A0," "A1,"
"AZ," "B0" and so on.

Non-Schematic Attributes | 195

Overview of parent and stand-alone component
attributes (TAG1)
AutoCAD Electrical puts the component's tag name on this attribute, names
like "PB101" or "CR-55" (24 characters maximum). The default value you assign
to this attribute definition at the library symbol level (i.e. symbol's ".dwg" file
opened and displayed in AutoCAD) becomes the family code character string
AutoCAD Electrical uses to build the component's tag name when the block
is inserted into your wiring diagram. This default value character string is used
as the Family Code (%F) portion of the drawing's tag format code you set up
in the Drawing Properties ➤ Components dialog box (example %F%N).
For example, use "PB" for a default value of the attribute definition TAG1 if
the family name you want AutoCAD Electrical to use is "PB" (examples:
"PB100", "100-PB", "PB4-100"). Note that this family name can be overridden
at component insertion time, a later edit, or automatically by use of the
"wd_fam.dat " mapping file.

NOTE If the TAG1 attribute carries no default value then AutoCAD Electrical will
use that symbol's FAMILY attribute value.

Overview of child component attributes (TAG2)

AutoCAD Electrical puts a copy of the parent component's tag name on the
child component attribute (TAG2). During the AutoCAD Electrical tagging
operation, AutoCAD Electrical takes the parent coil's tag name (carried on its
TAG1 attribute) and copies it to this contact's TAG2 attribute. If no parent tag
is found then AutoCAD Electrical displays the attribute definition's default
value.

Copy attributes
COPYTAG is the optional TAG copy attribute. When AutoCAD Electrical
updates a TAG1 of TAG2 attribute, it also looks for and updates any COPYTAG
attributes present on the symbol with a copy of the TAG text. A special
replaceable parameter, "%T", can be encoded onto the COPYTAG attribute
definition's prompt value. This allows for adding a suffix and/or prefix to the
TAG text. If you need more than one extra TAG copy on a symbol, name the
attributes COPYTAG01, COPYTAG02, etc. If there is no prompt value encoded

196 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 on the attribute definition, AutoCAD Electrical simply applies a copy of the
tag-ID to the COPYTAG* attribute(s).
For example, you create a large "drive" schematic symbol with a TAG1 attribute
for the drive's tag-ID. You want some other parts of this single symbol to carry
the TAG1 value plus a suffix like "-POT" and "-DBRES". On your library symbol,
insert an attribute definition "COPYTAG01" with a prompt value of "%T-POT"
near the symbol's potentiometer graphic and "COPYTAG02" with a prompt
value of "%T-DBRES" near the dynamic braking resistor graphic. When this
symbol is inserted on a schematic drawing, and a TAG is assigned, AutoCAD
Electrical will automatically update each COPYTAG* attribute accordingly.

Substitute symbols in the library

You can temporarily substitute an altered symbol for a symbol that is found
in the standard library. Put the altered symbol's .dwg file in your USER
subdirectory (right-click inside the Project Manager and select Settings to find
the full path). The AutoCAD Electrical component insertion command always
looks at this directory for the requested symbol prior to going to the selected
symbol library.

NOTE AutoCAD Electrical uses regular AutoCAD blocks. If you insert a block from
one library and then try to insert the same block name from a different library,
you'll get a copy of the original version of the block. Use AutoCAD Electrical's
Swap/Update Block command to make the change.

Change appearance of existing library symbols

The AutoCAD Electrical default symbol library is installed in the /Program

Files/Autodesk/Acade {release#}/libs/jic1 subdirectory (and /Program
Files/Autodesk/Acade {release#}/libs/jic125 for a uniform 0.125 text height
library). You can modify the ".dwg" version of each symbol to comply with
your specific standards or client requirements.

1 Open each symbol up in its native AutoCAD .dwg format (using File ➤
Open).

Managing Library Symbols | 197

 2 Move the tag, description, location, and cross-reference annotation
attribute definitions to different locations to satisfy your drafting standards
(attribute definitions look like text entities).

3 Adjust attribute definition text size to meet your requirements but avoid
deleting any of the existing attribute definitions.
Attributes are needed to give the symbol full compatibility with AutoCAD
Electrical features.

4 Insert additional non-AutoCAD Electrical attributes that your applications

might need.

5 Edit these attributes by clicking Show/edit miscellaneous on the AutoCAD

Electrical edit dialogs.

NOTE Before you spend a lot of time modifying each library symbol, you may
want to take a look at the AutoCAD Electrical Modify Symbol Library tool. This
tool provides a way to make mass changes to the library of symbols. It has a
number of options, including scaling each symbol, changing attribute height
based on AutoCAD Electrical attribute type, and picking a different text font for
the AutoCAD Electrical text style.

Tips and Hints

Leave all symbol attribute definitions and geometry on layer "0" and that
entity color assignments are by layer. Let AutoCAD Electrical manage what
layers the various parts and pieces of your symbol get put on at insertion time.
This layer naming scheme is set up in the Define Layers dialog box If you
want certain layer naming maintained on your inserted components, select
Apply to entities on layer "0" only. With this checked, non-layer "0" entities
maintain their existing layer names as the component inserts into the drawing.

Edit miscellaneous and non-AutoCAD Electrical

attributes
View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Access:

Click Show/edit miscellaneous on any of the Insert/Edit dialog boxes.

The attributes that can be modified depend on which Insert/Edit dialog box
you are working in.

198 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

Predefine symbol annotation

You can have certain symbols insert with switch position text, terminal pin
numbers, or BOM catalog numbers prefilled with default values.

1 Open the symbol's .dwg file in AutoCAD.

The default symbol library path is \Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade
{version}\Libs\jic1.

2 Use the DDEDIT or PROPERTIES command to change the symbol's default

attribute values.

For example, let's say that you always want your N.O. limit switch symbol to
insert showing the two terminal pin numbers labeled as "1" and "2." In
AutoCAD, call up and edit these symbol files: HLS11.DWG, VLS11.DWG,
HLS21.DWG, and VLS21.DWG (modify both the jic1 and jic125 versions). In
each case use DDEDIT to change the TERM01 and TERM02 attribute default
values to be "1" and "2" respectively. At insertion time, these values show up
as defaults.

NOTE You can override the default values at insertion time.

Create a new library symbol

AutoCAD Electrical uses stock AutoCAD blocks and attributes in its library
symbols. The symbols can be any size and width. You don't have to edit an
external support file or database to register a symbol for use in an AutoCAD
Electrical wiring diagram drawing.

NOTE You can also use the Symbol Builder tool, but the quickest way to create
a new symbol might be to start with an existing AutoCAD Electrical compatible
symbol. Start with a copy of a similar type and then modify to suit. Avoid deleting
the existing attribute definitions. Reposition and edit their default values as required.

1 Open a new drawing using the desired symbol name.

2 Insert an exploded copy of an existing AutoCAD Electrical symbol that

somewhat resembles what you need in the new symbol. Take into

Predefine symbol annotation | 199

 consideration the number of wire connection points, rating attributes,
and whether your new symbol is a parent symbol (attribute TAG1) or a
child symbol (attribute TAG2).

3 Clean up the graphics. Keep everything on layer 0.

4 Reuse attribute definitions from the exploded symbol. Reposition them

as required. Make sure that you keep terminal pin number text paired
with its wire connection attribute (the last two digits of each attribute
name must match, "X4TERM01" wire connection point attribute matched
with "TERM01" terminal pin number text attribute).

5 Use DDEDIT to change the TAG1 or TAG2 and the FAMILY attribute
values to the desired family code. Insert any pre-defined terminal pin,
description, or catalog number attribute values.

6 Delete unneeded attribute definitions and graphics.

7 Save your work to the jic1, jic125, or user subdirectory (right-click inside
the Project Manager and select Settings to find the full path). To test it,
call up a new or existing AutoCAD Electrical drawing. Try to insert your
new symbol into an existing piece of wire. You can manually enter your
new symbol's file name using Type it on the main icon menu page.

Tips and Hints

Pigtails
Avoid putting wire pigtails on your new symbols. Pigtails can defeat the
AutoCAD Electrical SCOOT command and automatic wire numbering when
two symbols with pigtails bump up against each other. A wire connection
pigtail is mandatory when you insert a very short pigtail at a wire connection
point that has no other visible symbol geometry nearby since AutoCAD
Electrical needs to see something tangible on a symbol at a wire connection
point.
Symbol origin
The AutoCAD Electrical library symbols generally have their origin points
centered between the first (or only) pair of wire connection point attributes.
Though this is not mandatory, it helps AutoCAD Electrical determine the
correct orientation for alignment with an underlying wire at insertion time.
Symbol width

200 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 There are no restrictions. Every symbol can have a different width. At insertion
time the symbol's width is determined by reading the locations of its wire
connection attributes (attributes with name X?TERMn).
Wire connection points
A symbol can have hundreds of connection points and a terminal pin number
attribute tied to each (use suffix codes beginning with "01" and ending with
"ZZ").
Component description text
You can insert three lines of description text up to 60 characters long. The
attribute names are DESC1, DESC2, and DESC3 and generally appear on both
parent/stand-alone and child contact symbols. You can insert additional
DESCn attributes on your symbol and edit them with any attribute editing
tool, but AutoCAD Electrical will not process them.

Overview of the Symbol Builder

Use this tool to convert existing symbols or create new, custom components
on the fly. It works nicely for quickly building power supplies, filters, drives,
controllers, and other custom devices or for converting existing non-AutoCAD
Electrical symbols to make them AutoCAD Electrical-smart. Schematic symbols
created or converted using the Symbol Builder are fully compatible with
AutoCAD Electrical, break wires upon insertion, and appear in the various
BOM, component, and wire connection reports.
You can exit the Symbol Builder command and re-enter it at any time. You
can also exit the command and use regular AutoCAD commands to edit or
finish the symbol you're creating and the AutoCAD Wblock command to write
it to disk. Each time you re-enter the Symbol Builder tool, make sure you
window your existing geometry at the builder's initial prompt. This allows
the tool to track what standard attributes and wire connection points you've
already inserted.
New symbols you create are inserted with the AutoCAD Electrical Insert
Component or Insert Panel Component commands. You can add your new
symbol to the icon menu or you can select it from the Type it or Browse
options in the bottom left-hand corner of the icon menu.

Convert or create library symbols

Use this tool to quickly pick and place attributes. You do not have to exit your
current drawing to build the symbol. You can do it in place or off to the side

Overview of the Symbol Builder | 201

 in an empty spot on your drawing. You can exit and restart the tool as many
times as necessary to set up the symbol.

1 Explode any existing blocks or draw new symbols from scratch.

2 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol

Builder tool.

3 Click the Symbol Builder tool.

4 Select any geometry that are to become part of the new or

converted symbol (or press Enter if you are starting from
scratch).

5 Pick which type of symbol you want to build. For example,

pick Parent for a schematic device.

NOTE Depending on the selected symbol category, the Symbol

Builder dialog choices and selections differ.

6 Select various options to insert required attributes, wire con-

nection points, terminal text, and so on.

7 When you finish, click Block to insert your new component

into your drawing or Wblock to first save a copy of your new
symbol. Try to retain the first 4 characters of the assigned block
name.

Symbol builder: choose symbol category

This tool converts existing symbols or creates new, custom components on
the fly. It works nicely for quickly building power supplies, filters, drives,
controllers, and other custom devices or for converting existing non-AutoCAD
Electrical symbols to make them "AutoCAD Electrical smart." Schematic
symbols created or converted using the Symbol Builder are fully compatible

202 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 with AutoCAD Electrical, break wires upon insertion, and appear in the various
BOM, component, and wire connection reports.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool.
From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder.

Parent Schematic symbol is used as a stand-alone symbol or a parent com-

ponent with related secondary contacts.

Child Schematic secondary symbol that is related to a parent component.

Terminal Schematic terminal with terminal number.

Terminal Schematic terminal that follows the wire number rather than having
a terminal number of its own.

Footprint Panel symbol that is not used as a terminal or nameplate.

Terminal Panel terminal symbol.

Nameplate Panel nameplate symbol.

NOTE Depending on the selected symbol category, the dialog box choices and
selections differ.

Component type: schematic parent, stand-alone,

or child
Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool.
Click Parent or Child, then click Standard.

Overview of the Symbol Builder | 203

Access:

From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder. Click
Parent or Child, then click Standard.

Missing attributes: Lists attributes you can insert for the symbol.

Height: Specifies the attribute height.

Justify: Specifies the attribute justification.

Family code: Specifies the default component family code.

TAG1 %F default: Specifies the default code for parent component tags. When
you insert the TAG1 attribute for a Parent schematic sym-
bol, you're prompted for a default value. This value is used
as the default family code for an automatically-generated
schematic component tag upon insertion into a drawing.
This defaults to "DV" unless you override it with another
value (such as "PB" or "CR" or "MOT").

TAG2 %F default: Specifies the default code for child component tags. This
value matches the code carried by the parent.

Pick text: Converts existing text to the target AutoCAD Electrical at-
tribute.

Insert attribute: Adds the correct attributes to make your new symbol
AutoCAD Electrical compatible. Different attributes display
depending on the selected symbol category.

Change: Changes the visibility, size, justification, rotation, and posi-

tion for the ATTDEF.

Symbol builder - schematic symbols

204 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 Use this tool to build a smart schematic symbol by adding AutoCAD Electrical
attributes to the symbol's geometry and converting text entities to AutoCAD
Electrical attributes.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool.
Click Parent, Child, Terminal, or Terminal.
From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder. Click
Parent, Child, Terminal, or Terminal.

The following options are available when building schematic parent or

stand-alone symbols, schematic child symbols, and schematic terminal symbols
(with terminal and wire numbers).

Rectangle

Hides the dialog box so you can draw a selection rectangle on the drawing.

Browse

Opens a dialog box for selecting the exploded block or drawing to include
with the symbol.

Standard

Opens a dialog box for selecting the missing attributes for the symbol. When
you insert the TAG1 attribute for a parent schematic symbol, you are prompted
for a default value. This value is used as the default family code for an
automatically-generated schematic component tag upon insertion into a
drawing. This defaults to "DV" unless you override it with another value (such
as "PB" or "CR" or "MOT").
Choose the text size and justification for the attribute from the menus (if the
desired text size is not shown, go to the bottom of the list and click "-add-").
In the Component type: Schematic Terminal dialog box, click Insert Attribute
to speed up the process of adding the correct attributes to make your new
symbol AutoCAD Electrical-compatible. Different attributes display depending
on the selected symbol category.

Overview of the Symbol Builder | 205

 Wire connection

Inserts wire connection points. For each wire connection point you need,
select the desired wire connection direction and then place the point on your
new symbol.

Terminal

This choice can only be used if you already have an AutoCAD Electrical wire
connection attribute defined, and you want to link terminal text to it. I is
useful to help make an existing symbol "AutoCAD Electrical smart."

NO/NC

If your symbol needs to show whether it is normally open or normally closed,

use this button to add the necessary attribute.

Dashed

In addition to using TAGS to link a parent symbol with a child symbol, you
can draw dashed lines between a parent symbol and its related child contact.
This method requires special attributes at the point where the dashed line
connects to the symbol.

Rating

You can add up to 12 optional rating attributes that can be used for anything
from amps to motor horsepower. Define an attribute prompt for each (such
as "Motor FLA" or "Voltage"). These prompts display in the AutoCAD Electrical
Insert/Edit Component dialog box when you insert or edit your new symbol.

Convert text

If you windowed existing geometry and text entities at the initial prompt of
the Symbol Builder, this converts the existing text entities to AutoCAD
Electrical attributes "in place." Select Convert to AutoCAD Electrical attributes
to map your text/attributes to the attribute names for the selected symbol
type.

Change

Specifies the text style, text line weight, and width factor for the new attributes.

206 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 Save and insert

Save and Insert: When you finish, click Block to insert your new component
into your circuit or Wblock to first save a copy of your new symbol (the default
save location is your user subdirectory).
Caution: AutoCAD Electrical provides a default name for your new symbol. If
you are creating a schematic parent or child contact symbol, avoid changing
the first 4 letters of the generated symbol file name and limit the total length
to 32 characters. AutoCAD Electrical uses the first 4 characters for parent/child
tagging operations.

Component type: panel footprint, terminal, or

nameplate
Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool.
Click Footprint, Terminal, or Nameplate, then click Standard.
From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder. Click
Footprint, Terminal, or Nameplate, then click Standard.

Missing attributes Lists attributes that you can insert for the symbol.

Height Specifies the attribute height.

Justification Specifies the attribute justification.

Visible Changes the visibility of the attribute.

Pick Text Converts existing text to the target AutoCAD Electrical at-
tribute.

Insert Attribute Adds the correct attributes to make your new symbol
AutoCAD Electrical compatible. Different attributes display
depending on the selected symbol category.

Change Changes the visibility, size, justification, rotation, and posi-

tion for the ATTDEF.

Panel symbol builder

Overview of the Symbol Builder | 207

 This tool is used to build a smart schematic symbol by adding AutoCAD
Electrical attributes to the symbol's geometry and converting text entities to
AutoCAD Electrical attributes.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool.
Click Footprint, Terminal, or Nameplate.
From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder. Click
Footprint, Terminal, or Nameplate.

The following options are available when building panel footprint symbols,
terminal symbols, and nameplate terminals.

Rectangle

Hides the dialog box so that you can draw a selection rectangle on the drawing.

Browse

Opens a dialog box for selecting the exploded block or drawing to include
with the symbol.

Standard

Opens a dialog box for selecting the missing attributes for the symbol.
Choose the text size and justification for the attribute from the menus (if the
desired text size is not shown, go to the bottom of the list and click "-add-").
On the Component type: Panel Footprint dialog box, click Insert Attribute to
speed up the process of adding the correct attributes to make your new symbol
fully AutoCAD Electrical compatible. Different attributes display depending
on the selected symbol category.

Rating

You can add up to 12 optional rating attributes that can be used for anything
from amps to motor horsepower. Define an attribute prompt for each (such
as "Motor FLA" or "Voltage"); these prompts display in the AutoCAD Electrical
Insert/Edit Component dialog box when you insert or edit your new symbol.

208 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 Term/Wire Numbers

Inserts wire numbers and terminal pin numbers. For each wire number you
need, select the desired wire number direction and then place the point on
your new symbol. Select one of the supplied wire number or terminal styles
from the menu. You can edit existing terminal styles or create your own. All
terminal symbols are saved in the /Program Files/Autodesk/Electrical/libs/jic1
subdirectory under file name "bb?*.dwg", where "?" is the style number.
You can also specify to insert multiple wire/terminal numbers and set the
scale for the numbers in this dialog box.

Convert text

If you windowed existing geometry and text entities at the initial prompt of
the Symbol Builder, this converts the existing text entities to AutoCAD
Electrical attributes "in place". Select Convert to AutoCAD Electrical attributes
to map your text/attributes to the attribute names for the selected symbol
type.

Change

Specifies the text style, text line weight, and width factor for the new attributes.

Save and insert

When you are finished, click Block to insert your new component into your
circuit or Wblock to first save a copy of your new symbol (the default save
location is your user subdirectory).

Swap blocks
The block swapper tool can operate in several different modes:

■ Swap Block: Exchanges one block for another, retaining the old block's
scale, rotation, wire connections, attribute values, and attribute positions
(if Retain is selected). For example, use the tool to swap out a red standard
pilot light with a green one, or drawing-wide, swap out all standard red
pilot lights with red press-test pilot lights.

■ Update: Updates all instances of a given block with an updated version of

the same block. Again, all attribute values and wire connections are
retained. For example, an old AutoCAD Electrical project set needs to be

Swap blocks | 209

 used on a new project but the client likes his limit switches drawn a bit
differently. Simply make client-specific versions of the limit switch symbols.
Then use the Update option; select any limit switch on the drawing, and
then reference the path to the new version of the symbol. AutoCAD
Electrical quickly replaces all instances of the symbol it finds on the
drawing(s) with the new version of the same symbol. The Library mode
works the same way as the Update mode, but will swap out all the blocks
on the drawing(s).

When you swap or update a block there may be times when you want the
values of certain attributes mapped to different attribute names. For example,
you may be doing a Library Update and the library symbols you are swapping
out do not use standard AutoCAD Electrical attribute names. You want a quick
way to update the library symbols, but you do not want to lose information
held on the current attributes.

210 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

Update or change blocks in place

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the

Swap/Update Block tool.

2 Click the Swap/Update Block tool.

3 Determine whether you want to exchange one block for anoth-

er (Option A) or update all instances of a given block with an
updated version of the same block (0ption B).
Option A: Select to swap a block one at a time, drawing-wide,
or project-wide.
■ Indicate whether to pick a new block from the icon menu, pick a new
block just like another block, or pick a new block from the File dialog
box.
■ Determine whether you want to retain old attribute locations, old
block scales, or retag if parent swap causes family changes.

Option B: Select to update a block by replacing it with a new

version or substitute new versions of all blocks.
■ Specify the file name of the block that will be substituted for all in-
stances of the selected block.
■ Determine whether you want to retain old attribute locations, old
block scales, or copy the old block's attribute values to new swapped
block.

4 Select whether to use the same attribute names or use an attrib-

ute mapping file.

5 Click OK.

6 If you selected to pick a new block from the icon menu, select
the icon from the Insert Component dialog box.

7 Select the component to swap out.

8 If you chose to do a project-wide swap, select the drawings to

process and click OK.

Swap blocks | 211

 The chosen component is replaced with the symbol selected
in the Insert Component dialog box.

Swap block/update block/library swap

This tool lets you update or change blocks in place. Attribute values are retained
during the swapping process. Wire connections are also maintained even if
the new symbol is slightly wider or narrower than the original.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Swap/Update Block
tool.
From the Components menu, select Component Miscellaneous ➤ Swap/Update
Block.

Swap Block (swap to different block name)

Swap a block - one at a time Exchanges one block for another one block at a
time.

Swap a block - drawing wide Exchanges one block for another throughout the
drawing.

Swap a block - project wid Exchanges one block for another throughout the
project.

Pick new block from icon menu Specifies to select a new block from the icon
menu.

Pick new block "just like" Specifies to select a new block similar to the ori-
ginal block.

Pick new block from file selection dialog Specifies to select a new block from the File ➤
Open dialog box.

Retain old attribute locations: Specifies to retain the attribute locations from
the original block.

212 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

Retain old block scale Specifies to retain the scale value from the origin-
al block.

Allow undefined Wire Type line reconnections Specifies to include non-wire LINEs for reconnec-
tion when the new block swaps in. The LINEs
then display in the Wire From/To and Cable
From/To reports. If unselected, the non-wire
LINEs are excluded and do not appear in reports.

Auto retag if parent swap causes family Automatically retags the component if the Family
change code of a component changed due to the swap.
Otherwise, the tag remains the same even if it
does not match the new component's Family
code.

Update block (revised or different version of same block name)

Update a block Updates all instances of a given block with an

updated version of the same block.

Library swap Updates all instances of a library symbol with an

updated version of the same symbol

Attribute mapping

Use same attribute names Uses the same attribute names from the original
block.

Use attribute mapping file Allows the values of certain attributes to be

mapped to different attribute names.

Mapping file Determines how AutoCAD Electrical should map

the attributes. The file should have two columns
of attribute names. The first column should
contain the current attribute name and the
second column the new attribute name. The
mapping file may be an Excel spreadsheet, a
comma-delimited file (.CSV), or a simple text file

Swap blocks | 213

 with a space separating the current attribute
name from the new attribute name.

Library swap -- all drawing

Updates all instances of a library symbol with an updated version of the same
symbol on the active drawing or in a project.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Swap/Update Block
tool. Select the Library Swap option and click OK.
From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤
Swap/Update Block. Select the Library Swap option and click OK.

Path to new block library

Specifies the path for the symbol library that is referenced for the block
substitution. To use a different library, enter its path or click Browse.

Insertion scale

Scale Specifies which scale factor to use. 1.0 = full scale;

Configuration Scale = the scale setting in the Drawing
Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box; 25.4 =
inch to millimeter scale factor; and 1/25.4 = milli-
meter to inch scale factor.

Retain old block scale Specifies to retain the scale value from the original
block.

Retain old attribute locations Specifies to retain the attribute locations from the
original block.

Copy old block's attribute values to new swapped block

Specifies whether to copy the attribute values to the new block, to discard all
old values, or to copy the old values only if the new value is blank.

Update block - new block's path\filename

214 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries

 Substitutes a new version of a component block for all inserted instances of
that block found on a drawing or in a project.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Swap/Update Block
tool. Select the Update a Block option and click OK.
From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤
Swap/Update Block. Select the Update a Block option and click OK.

Path\filename of new block

Specifies the path\filename of the block that will be substituted for all instances
of the selected block. Enter a file name or click Browse.

Insertion scale

Scale Specifies which scale factor to use. 1.0 = full scale;

Configuration Scale = the scale setting in the Drawing
Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box; 25.4 =
inch to millimeter scale factor; and 1/25.4 = milli-
meter to inch scale factor.

Retain old block scale Specifies to retain the scale value from the original
block.

Retain old attribute locations Specifies to retain the attribute locations from the
original block.

Copy old block's attribute values to new swapped block

Specifies whether to copy the attribute values to the new block, to discard all
old values, or to copy the old values only if the new value is blank.

Swap blocks | 215

216
PLC
5
In this chapter
■ Generate PLC layout
modules
■ Insert PLC modules
■ Overview of the PLC
database file
■ Single, Stand-Alone I/O
Points
■ Work with PLC styles
■ Create PLC I/O Drawings
from Spreadsheets

217
Generate PLC layout modules
AutoCAD Electrical can generate any of hundreds of different PLC I/O modules
on demand, in a variety of different graphical styles, all without a single,
complete I/O module library symbol resident on the system. Modules
automatically adapt to the underlying ladder rung spacing, whatever that
value might be, and can even be stretched or broken into two or more pieces
at insertion time. This is all possible because AutoCAD Electrical generates
PLC I/O modules through a parametric generation technique driven by a PLC
database (ACE_PLC.MDB).
The PLC database contains not just the stack sequence but also text values to
annotate onto each symbol in the stack. As AutoCAD Electrical builds the
module, it reads the underlying ladder rung spacing and spreads the stack out
or compresses it to match the rung spacing. During the insertion process, in
AutoCAD Electrical, you can interrupt it to break the module and then restart
it at a different location.

Parametric PLC symbols vs. Full Units

Parametric PLC symbols are stored in the \Program Files

[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic1\ subdirectory (or \Program Files
[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic125\ for 0.125 height version) along
with all of the other AutoCAD Electrical component symbols. Their file names
begin with the characters "HP" (Horizontal ladder rungs / PLC) or "VP" (Vertical
ladder rungs) followed by a digit that corresponds to a PLC I/O style number.
Each symbol is a building block with a different arrangement of attributes and
wire connection points. AutoCAD Electrical selects the appropriate symbols
to use, stacks them together in the order defined by the data file, and produces
a completed I/O module.
The PLC database file (ace_plc.mdb) is used to drive the PLC I/O module
generation process. You can modify the PLC database file manually or using
the PLC Database File Editor (page 232)(recommended method). The AutoCAD
Electrical PLC database file (ace_plc.mdb) is installed in the C:\Documents
and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Plc
subdirectory.
Each Parametric PLC symbol is a building block with a different arrangement
of attributes and wire connection points. AutoCAD Electrical selects the
appropriate symbols to use, stacks them together in the order defined by the
parametric data file, and produces a completed I/O module. AutoCAD Electrical
inserts the symbols based upon the underlying ladder's rung spacing, explodes

218 | Chapter 5 PLC

 them, draws a rectangular box around the entire assembly, creates a single
block out of the collection, and annotates the new module's attributes.
Some PLC units may not lend themselves very well to parametric generation.
If a PLC module symbol is built with the appropriate attributes in place and
the symbol name follows AutoCAD Electrical's naming convention (the block
name begins with "PLCIO"), it can be inserted as a single unit using the
Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Insert PLC (Full Units) command.
The selected unit inserts into the ladder, breaks the wires, and then reconnects.

PLC parametric selection

AutoCAD Electrical can generate PLC I/O modules on demand, in a variety
of different graphical styles via a parametric generation technique. It is driven
by a database file and a handful of library symbol blocks.

Access:

Click the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool.

From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ Insert PLC (Para-
metric).

Manufacturer Catalog tree

Provides a complete list of the PLC modules available to AutoCAD Electrical.

The Manufacturer Catalog tree is compiled from the database file,
"ace_plc.mdb."

Module List

Displays the defined modules. Once you select a module type or a specific
module from the Manufacturer Catalog tree, AutoCAD Electrical reads through
the information contained in the database. Select from this list to begin the
PLC module insertion process.

Graphics Style

Specifies the graphical appearance of the PLC module. Styles 1-5 are provided
with AutoCAD Electrical. Styles 6-9 may be user-defined. Select a style number
and a sample portion of a PLC module displays.
To create a user-defined style: There are about two dozen symbols associated
with each style. They are located in the \Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade
{version}\Libs subdirectory and carry the file name "HP?*.dwg" or "VP?*.dwg"

Generate PLC layout modules | 219

 where "?" is the style number. An easy way to create a new style is to copy an
existing style's symbols to one of the unused style numbers (6, 7, 8, or 9) and
edit each library symbol.

Scale

Specifies the scale for the PLC module. You can also specify to apply a border
to the PLC module upon insertion.

Module layout
Access:

Click the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool. Select the PLC module to insert, click OK,
and place the PLC in the drawing.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ Insert PLC (Para-
metric). Select the PLC module to insert, click OK, and place the PLC in the
drawing.

Spacing

Specifies the spacing for the module. The module will default to the underlying
rung spacing. If you wish to override this spacing, modify the number shown
in the spacing edit box. The arrows below this box increment the number by
the rung spacing. For example, if the rung spacing is 0.5 then each time you
click on ">" the number increases by 0.5.

I/O points

Specifies whether to include all of the points or break the module into many
pieces. You can break a module into as many pieces as you want at insertion
time. This is useful for a module that won't fit into a single ladder column.
You can also add extra space between adjacent I/O points. This allows for the
extra room needed for parallel components. Select Allow Spacers/Breaks and
after each I/O you have the opportunity to insert a space, break the module,
or insert the rest normally. If the module's definition (in the Attributes column
of the Module Terminal Information table of the ace_plc.mdb file or by
selecting the check box in the Break After column of the PLC Database File
Editor dialog box) carries a ";\SPECIAL=BREAK" flag, then the Note highlights
and the module automatically prompts you for permission to break at the
correct point during module insertion.

220 | Chapter 5 PLC

 Include unused/extra connections

Specifies to include all of the extra connections to the PLC. Some modules
may have terminals that are not used (i.e. dummy terminals with no electrical
connection). Unused terminals are skipped by default. This results in the most
compact representation of the module, but the PLC modules can be set up to
optionally show unused terminals. This is done by adding in
"\SPECIAL=INCLUDE" and "\SPECIAL=EXCLUDE" flags (in the Attributes
column of the Module Terminal Information table of the ace_plc.mdb file) or
by selecting "When Including Unused" or "When Excluding Unused" in the
Show column of the PLC Database File Editor dialog box.

Insert PLC modules

In AutoCAD Electrical, you can insert either PLC I/O points as independent
symbols or as a complete PLC module into your drawing.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access

the Insert PLC (Full Units) tool.

2 Click the Insert PLC (Full Units) tool.

3 In the PLC Fixed Units dialog box, select the PLC module to
insert.

4 Specify the insertion point on the drawing.

5 Add or edit any information in the Edit PLC Module dialog

box, and click OK.

Edit PLC module

Use this dialog box when inserting or editing a PLC module. Specify the values
you need and press OK. The values are then annotated onto the selected
module.

Insert PLC modules | 221

 NOTE Editing the first address, I/O point address, or catalog information for a plc
module that has been imported using the Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool
may result in problems when you export the data back to Unity Pro. An alert
displays to ask whether you want to proceed with the changes.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the Insert PLC (Full
Units) tool. Select the PLC module to insert and place it on the drawing.
ClickComponents ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Insert PLC (Full Units). Select the
PLC module to insert and place it on the drawing.

You can go back to any component at any time and make changes.

Addressing

First Address Specifies the 1st I/O address for the PLC module.

List Lists the available I/O addresses to select from. When you
select an I/O address from the list the I/O Point Description:
Address automatically updates.

Used: Drawing or Project Lists any I/O points already assigned to the drawing or
project. Select a tag from the list to copy, or to increment
for this new component.

Tag

Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each I/O point. The tag value can be
manually typed in the edit box.

Options

Substitutes a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format. Retag
Component can then use this override format value to calculate a new tag for
the PLC module. For example, a certain PLC module needs to always have an
"IO" family tag value instead of "PLC" so that re-tag, for example, will assign
IO-100 instead of PLC100. To achieve this tag override you would enter
"IO-%N" for the tag override format.

222 | Chapter 5 PLC

 Line1/Line2

Specifies optional description text for the module. May be used to identify
the module's relative location in the I/O assembly (example: Rack # and Slot
#).

Manufacturer

Lists the manufacturer number for the I/O point. Enter a value or select one
from the Catalog lookup.

Catalog

Lists the catalog number for the I/O point. Enter a value or select one from
the Catalog lookup.

Assembly

Lists the assembly code for the I/O point. The Assembly code is used to link
multiple part numbers together.

Catalog Lookup

Opens the I/O point's PLCIO table in the catalog database from which you
can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. Search the
database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected cable. Database
queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog with the database
hits listed in the dialog's main window.

Description

Optional line of description text. May be used to identify the module type
(for example, "16 Discrete Inputs - 24VDC")

I/O Point Description

Address Specifies the I/O address assignment.

Description 1-5 Optional description text. Up to 5 lines of description attrib-

ute text can be entered.

Next/Pick Selects a description from a module on the current drawing.

Insert PLC modules | 223

List descriptions Lists the I/O point descriptions currently assigned to each
I/O point on the module or connected, wired devices in a
pick list. Selecting one of the buttons next to this displays
a different list of description in the box below.

I/O Lists I/O point descriptions used so far on the module. Pick
to copy.

Wired Devices Lists descriptions of wired devices that are found to be

connected to the I/O module. Pick to copy the description.

External File Displays contents of an external comma-delimited ASCII

text file of I/O point descriptions. Pick an entry in the file
and then copy the values to edit boxes in the Edit dialog.

Installation/Location codes

Changes the installation or location code(s). You can search the current
drawing or entire project for installation and location codes. A quick read of
all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of codes used so far
is returned. Select from the list to automatically update the module with the
installation or location code.

Pins

Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the module.

Show/Edit Miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Ratings

Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings
attributes on a module. Select Defaults to display a list of default values.

NOTE If Ratings is grayed out, the module you are editing does not carry rating
attributes.

224 | Chapter 5 PLC

Overview of the PLC database file
You can modify the PLC database file manually or using the PLC Database
File Editor (page 232)(recommended method). The AutoCAD Electrical PLC
database file (ace_plc.mdb) is installed in the C:\Documents and
Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Plc subdirectory.
By default the AutoCAD Electrical PLC database file contains the are
"PLC_Manufacturer", "PLC_MSG" and "PLC_Styles" tables in addition to several
module specification and module terminal information tables.

NOTE PLC Parametric build symbols are best to be used on ANSI D-Size and IEC
A1 page sizes.

PLC_Manufacturer This table lists the Manufacturer, Series, Type and Table
Name.

PLC_MSG This table is for internal use only. It is recommended that

you do not edit this table.

PLC_Styles This table lists the box settings on a per-style basis.

There are two tables for each module type. The Module Specification table
contains information such as the model number, type, description, rating,
and rectangle offset values. The Module Terminal Information table (ends
with "_Data") contains terminal information such as code value, terminal
sequence number, block name, and terminal attributes.

Module Specification table

Example: "allen-bradley_1746_analog_input"
This file lists information that appears in the module's selection line listed in
the bottom half of the PLC Module Selection dialog box.

CODE Model number

TYPE Module type

POINTS Number of I/O points

Overview of the PLC database file | 225

DESCRIPTION Description displayed in selection dialog box

ADDRESS_BASE Base numbering value (octal, decimal, hex)

ADDRESS_FORMAT Reserved for future use; currently empty

OPTIONAL_BLOCK Optional block to insert at bottom of module

(i.e. DIP switches)

RATING Voltage rating

LISP AutoLISP file to run at module insertion time

BOX_RIGHT, BOX_LEFT, Offsets (right, left, top, and bottom) for the
BOX_TOP_BOX_BOTTOM rectangle that's drawn around the finished stack
BOX_SPLIT_BOTTOM, BOX_SPLIT_TOP of symbols to create an overall module.
METRIC_BOX_RIGHT, METRIC_BOX_LEFT,
NOTE You can suppress the rectangular box
METRIC_BOX_TOP, METRIC_BOX_BOTTOM
around the finished module by removing these
METRIC_BOX_SPLIT_BOTTOM, MET-
entries from a module's specification table.
RIC_BOX_SPLIT_TOP

The following are optional parameters for parametric build symbol placement:
Box color/linetype/layer
You can instruct AutoCAD Electrical to draw the rectangular box using
non-default line properties for color, layer, line type, or ltscale. Encode this
information as a series of keywords as if you were using AutoCAD's CHPROP
command to make the change. The keywords are encoded into the
"BOX_RIGHT", "BOX_LEFT", "BOX_TOP" and "BOX_BOTTOM" entries in a
module's specification table. For example, the following will make the left
and right-hand sides of the enclosing box cyan using line type 'Hidden2' and
the top and bottom blue using the default line type:
BOX_RIGHT=0.5 COLOR CYAN LTYPE HIDDEN2
BOX_LEFT=0.5 COLOR CYAN LTYPE HIDDEN2
BOX_TOP=0.5 COLOR BLUE
BOX_BOTTOM=0.375 COLOR BLUE

226 | Chapter 5 PLC

 Module Terminal Information table (ends with _Data)

Example: "allen-bradley_1746_analog_input_Data"
This file contains terminal information for the module type.

CODE Module's catalog number

SEQUENCE Terminal sequence number

BLOCK Block name used for insertion. The "?" gets filled in during inser-
tion and the block name uses either a "H" or "V" depending on
the selected orientation.

ATTRIBUTES Optional attributes for the terminal. These include user attributes,
%%x prompt values, address prefix or suffix, non-sequential ad-
dresses, breaks, re-prompt of I/O address, including unused ter-
minals and special spacing.

The following are optional parameters for parametric build symbol placement:
Use of %%x prompt values
After you're prompted to enter values such as rack, group or slot, the values
are available for use on any subsequent I/O point of the module. If you want
to use each I/O point's TERMDESC_ attribute to carry the I/O address in
Rack/Group, bit number format, do the following:

1 Prompt for Rack and Group values in the module's first entry.
%%1PROMPT=Rack number;%%2PROMPT=Group number.

2 Encode the TERMDESC_ value using %%1, %%2, and a bit number suffix.
TERMDESC_=1:%%1%%2/00 for the first I/O point
TERMDESC_=1:%%1%%2/01 for the 2nd I/O point

User Attributes
You can add and annotate your own attributes to the parametric symbols if
they are referenced in the Module Terminal Information table.
Address prefix or suffix
You can include a prefix or suffix to each address value that's inserted. For
example, if you want "IN-" to come in a as a prefix for inputs on a given module

Overview of the PLC database file | 227

 you would edit the database file and add ";TAGA_=IN-%%N" to each I/O
parametric data entry in the module's block of data. The %%N represents the
calculated I/O address and the "IN-" is the prefix that gets added.
Dealing with non-sequential addresses
Some modules may have I/O address assignments that do not sequentially
increment from one terminal to the next. Use the "%%A" flag to represent the
module's beginning address. In the example shown below, the address sequence
is non-sequential. Note the use of the "TAGA_=%%A+ <some value>" flags.

CODE BLOCK ATTRIBUTES

D2-08ND3 HP?--WLR TERM_=C,C;MFG=PLC-DIRECT;CAT=D2-

08ND3;...

D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DQ TERM_=0

D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DR TERM_=4;TAGA_=%%A+4

D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DQ TERM_=1;TAGA_=%%A+1

D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DR TERM_=5;TAGA_=%%A+5

D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DQ TERM_=2;TAGA_=%%A+2

D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DR TERM_=6;TAGA_=%%A+6

D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DQ TERM_=3;TAGA_=%%A+3

D2-08ND3 HP?WA-DR TERM_=7;TAGA_=%%A+7

Forcing a break
You can pre-define a module break point in the Module Terminal Information
table. Add "\SPECIAL=BREAK" on the line where you want the break to occur.
20 terminals are allowed on the parametric build symbols by default. If the
module exceeds 20 terminals the break is placed in a logical location; such as
after a grouping of I/O addressing. For example, a 32 I/O point card could
have 36 terminals on it, the module definition would run the break command
at 18 (after the first set of 16 I/O addresses). If you want to break the module

228 | Chapter 5 PLC

sooner you can use the PLC Database File Editor to add the break command
or do the following in the Module Terminal Information table.
HP?WA-D;TERM_07\SPECIAL=BREAK
Triggering for re-prompt of I/O address
Some modules include inputs and outputs. You can trigger AutoCAD Electrical
to prompt for a new beginning address number when the parametric build
flips from inputs to outputs or vice versa. Add "\SPECIAL=ADDR_OUT" on
the line where you want a re prompt for a new output address or add
"\SPECIAL=ADDR_IN" if you want a reprint for a new beginning input address.
Including unused terminals
Some modules may have terminals that are not used. Unused terminals are
skipped by default, resulting in a compact representation of the module. You
can set up the PLC database file to optionally show unused terminals by adding
"\SPECIAL_INCLUDE" and "\SPECIAL_EXCLUDE" in the Module Terminal
Information table.
Special spacing
Normally when AutoCAD Electrical generates a PLC module, it uses the current
rung spacing for I/O and wire connection point spacing. You can override
this by using the "\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR=<val> in the Module Terminal
Information table. When AutoCAD Electrical sees this on an I/O point or wire
connection entry line, it uses a factor of the rung spacing. For example, a
"\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR=0.5" for a given I/O or wire connection entry
flags AutoCAD Electrical to insert this point down 0.5 rung spacing instead
of a full rung spacing. A value of 1.5 inserts the point down an extra half run
spacing than normal while 0.0 inserts the I/O point at the same location as
the preceding one.
For example, the following four lines in a parametric data file inserts four
points spread out over four ladder rung spaces:
HP?WA-D;TERM_=01
HP?W--;TERM_=COM
HP?W--;TERM_=VDC
HP?WA-D;TERM_=02
If you want the two middle terminal symbols to be grouped together into one
rung space instead of taking up two spaces, edit the file to read:
HP?WA-D;TERM_=01
HP?W--;TERM_=COM;\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR=0.5

Overview of the PLC database file | 229

 HP?W--;TERM_=VDC;\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR=0.5
HP?WA-D;TERM_=02

230 | Chapter 5 PLC

Copy modules
You can copy an entire module into a new module using the PLC Database
File Editor.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access

the PLC Database File Editor tool.

2 Click the PLC Database File Editor tool.

3 In the PLC selection list, right-click on the module that you

want to copy from and select Copy.

4 Right-click the Type in the tree that you want to copy to.
For example, if you want to copy the new module to Allen-
Bradley, 1746, Discrete Input, you would find Discrete Input
under Allen Bradley ➤ 1746 in the tree.

5 Select Paste Module.

If you attempt to copy a PLC Module part number into a PLC
Type that already has a module with the same name, the PLC
Database File Editor prompts you to change the name of the
new module being copied.

6 To change the name for the module, right-click the module,

select Rename, and enter a new name.

Adjust the terminal information

When you highlight an exiting module part number in the PLC Database File
Editor tree structure, the terminal grid control becomes populated with the
terminal information previously defined for the module.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access

the PLC Database File Editor tool.

2 Click the PLC Database File Editor tool.

3 Select the module to modify from the tree structure.

Overview of the PLC database file | 231

 Inside the terminal grid control there are drop-down list boxes,
text boxes, and context menus that you can use to modify the
terminal information.

4 Select the terminal(s) to modify. You can select multiple fields

to edit at the same time by dragging your mouse across con-
tiguous fields or by holding down the Control key while select-
ing non-contiguous fields. You can also select multiple termin-
als if you want the terminals to carry the same information.
■ If you want to modify the terminals one at a time, either make your
changes on the PLC Database File Editor dialog box (using the drop-
down list boxes or text boxes) or select a single terminal (making sure
to select the entire row if you want to change more than one field),
click the right mouse button, and select Edit Terminal from the menu.
■ If you want to modify multiple terminals at the same time, select the
terminals, click the right mouse button, and select Edit Terminal from
the menu.

5 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box, make any

modifications to the selected terminal(s). Changes that you
make in this box will be applied to all of the selected terminals
in the terminal grid control.

6 Click OK to save your changes and return to the PLC Database

File Editor.

7 Click Done to save your changes and exit the dialog box or
click Done/Insert to save your changes and insert the PLC
module into your drawing.

PLC database file editor

232 | Chapter 5 PLC

 This tool creates and modifies PLC modules. All editing and creation of PLC
data is stored within the PLC Database File (ACE_PLC.MDB).

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the PLC Database
File Editor tool.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File
Editor.

PLC Selection List

Provides a complete list of the PLC data files available to AutoCAD Electrical.
The PLC Selection list uses an expandable and collapsible tree structure for
the PLC categories. These PLC categories are: Manufacturer, Series, Type, and
Part Number. The tree structure supports right-click controls for copying,
renaming, deleting, and creating PLC data.
The right-click controls for the selection list are:

New Manufacturer (available only for the PLC branch of the tree structure) Defines a new
manufacturer. The manufacturer then appears in the PLC Selection
tree structure in alphabetical order.

New Series (available only for the Manufacturer branch of the tree structure)
Defines a new PLC series underneath the respective Manufacturer.
The series then appears in the PLC Selection tree structure in alpha-
betical order.

New Type (available only for the Series branch of the tree structure) Defines a
new PLC type underneath the respective Manufacturer and Series.
The type then appears in the PLC Selection tree structure in alphabet-
ical order.

New Module (available only for the Type and Module/Code branches of the tree
structure) Defines a new PLC module underneath the respective
Manufacturer, Series, and Type. The module then appears in the PLC
Selection tree structure in alphabetical order.

Paste Module (available only for the Type branch of the tree structure) Copies the
PLC module to the highlighted PLC Type branch. This option becomes

Overview of the PLC database file | 233

 active after you copy or cut a PLC module inside the Module/Code
branch of the tree structure.

Delete Deletes an entire PLC module, type, series, or manufacturer from the
tree structure and the PLC database (ACE_PLC.MDB).

Rename Renames a PLC module, type, series, or manufacturer in the tree

structure. You cannot have duplicate names in the same branch of
the tree structure.

Cut (available only for the Module branch of the tree structure) Cuts the
highlighted module code from the tree structure. You can then paste
the code into the same PLC Type, or a new PLC Type category.

Copy (available only for the Module branch of the tree structure) Copies
the highlighted module code from the tree structure into the same
PLC Type, or a new PLC Type.

NOTE If you attempt to copy a PLC Module part number into a PLC Type that
already has a module with the same name, the PLC Database File Editor prompts
you to change the name of the new module being copied.

Terminal Grid Control

Highlight a module from the PLC Selection tree structure to populate the
Terminal Grid Control with the terminal information that was previously
defined for the module. When creating a new PLC module, the PLC Database
File Editor lists as many blank Terminal Type fields since are terminals defined
within the New Module dialog box.

Terminal Type Specifies the type for the terminal. Select from the various predeter-
mined types of addressable terminals and non-addressable terminals.

Show Shows terminals that are not used. If Include Unused/Extra Connec-
tions in the Module Layout dialog box is selected, all terminal entries
marked (in the PLC Database File Editor dialog box) with 'when ex-
cluding unused' are skipped and all terminal entries marked with
"when including unused" are shown.

234 | Chapter 5 PLC

Optional Re-prompt Prompts for a new beginning address number when the parametric
build flips from inputs to outputs or from outputs to inputs. On the
line where you want AutoCAD Electrical to reprint for a new output
address, select Output. If you want AutoCAD Electrical to reprint for
a new input address, select Input from the list.

Break After Specifies for the module to break automatically after a specific terminal
type. To activate the prompt for an automatic break in the PLC
module, select Break After.

Spacing Factor Overrides the current rung spacing for I/O and wire connection point
spacing. For example, a value of 2 inserts the point down two times
the rung spacing instead of a full rung spacing.

You can right-click any row in the grid control to activate a menu of commands
that allows you to edit the terminal, insert a new terminal before or after the
selected terminal in the grid control, or delete a terminal from the grid control.
You can select multiple fields to update at the same time by dragging your
mouse across contiguous fields or by holding down the Control key while
selecting non-contiguous fields.

Terminal Attributes

Displays attributes associated to the selected terminal. These attributes can

have predefined values, including some values that you specify at insertion
time.

New Module

Opens a dialog box for defining the module descriptions and parameters. A
series of boxes are used to type in or select the values required to define the
module.

NOTE If you right-click a type or module in the PLC Selection window and select
New Module, the New Module dialog box opens with data already specified for
the Manufacturer, Series, and Series Type.

Module Specifications

Opens a dialog box for modifying some of the specifications previously defined
during the creation of a new module.

Overview of the PLC database file | 235

 NOTE The Manufacturer, Series, Series Type, Code, and Terminals fields are not
active since they are under the control of the tree structure in the PLC Selection
window and the total number of terminals listed in the Terminal Type grid control.

Save Module

Saves the module to the PLC database file. If you exit the PLC Database File
Editor without clicking Save Module, you get a prompt asking whether or not
to save your changes.

Style Box Dimensions

Opens a dialog box for defining the module box dimensions (such as the offset
values and line properties) based upon the style number used when the PLC
was created.

NOTE The Module Box Dimensions override the style dimensions.

Settings

Opens a dialog box for adding or updating the symbols available to build a
module.

PLC selection
Use this to select a module to add to the terminal blocks from. Select the
module from the list and click OK.

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the
PLC Database File Editor tool. Click the Settings button, then click the Add
Blocks From Module button.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File
Editor. Click the Settings button, then click the Add Blocks From Module button.

The dialog box provides a complete list of the PLC modules available to
AutoCAD Electrical. The Manufacturer Catalog list is compiled from the
"ace_plc.mdb" file.

Module box dimensions

236 | Chapter 5 PLC

 Use this to define the outer box dimensions of the module. The box dimensions
are calculated from the insertion point of the parametrically-built PLC symbols.

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the
PLC Database File Editor tool. Click the New Module or Module Specifications
button, and then click the Module Box Dimensions button.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File
Editor. Click the New Module or Module Specifications button, and then click
the Module Box Dimensions button.

NOTE A value for the Split Top and Split Bottom dimensions must be set before
you can specify their line properties.

Module Box Dimensions

NOTE You must enter at least one of the Top, Bottom, Left or Right dimension
values in order to assign settings specific to this module.

Sets the right, left, top, and bottom offsets for the rectangle that surrounds
the module. The optional Split Top and Split Bottom specify the offsets for a
split module where Split Top specifies the offset for the top of a split module
and Split Bottom specifies the offset for the bottom of the split module. If left
blank, AutoCAD Electrical will use the rectangle Top and Bottom values.

Line Properties

Sets the properties for the lines that make up the box. You can set the color
and line type using the properties fields. To predefine the color, enter "COLOR
colorname" into the box. For line type, enter "LTYPE linetypename" into the
box. See the CHPROP command in the AutoCAD Help for more information
about the various properties you can set.

Select terminal information

Use this to add or modify the type of terminal being used. You can select
multiple fields to edit at the same time by dragging your mouse across

Overview of the PLC database file | 237

 contiguous fields or by holding down the Control key while selecting
non-contiguous fields.

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the
PLC Database File Editor tool. Right-click in the terminal grid control section of
the dialog box, and select Edit Terminal from the menu.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File
Editor. Right-click in the terminal grid control section of the dialog box, and
select Edit Terminal from the menu.

The dialog box options enable depending on the fields selected at the time
the dialog box was activated. For example, if you select the Show and Spacing
Factor fields for multiple terminal entries in the Terminal Grid Control section
of the PLC Database File Editor dialog box and then you activate this dialog
box, you can update both fields through this dialog box for the selected
terminals.

Category

Lists the terminal categories to select from. Top Input and Top Output are
addressable terminals, while the Top Terminal category consists of
non-addressable terminals. Other categories to select from are Input, Output,
and Terminal.

Types for Category

Displays the types for the terminal category. Browse the list of images to
determine which terminal type is appropriate for the terminal.

Recently Used

Shows an image of the terminals that were recently used.

Show

Specifies whether to show terminals that are not used. If the 'Include
unused/extra connections' option in the Module Layout dialog box is selected,
all terminal entries marked (in the PLC Database File Editor dialog box) with
'when excluding unused' are skipped.

238 | Chapter 5 PLC

 Optional Re-prompt Address

Specifies whether to prompt for a new beginning address number when the
parametric build flips from inputs to outputs or from outputs to inputs. On
the line where you want AutoCAD Electrical to re-prompt for a new output
address, select Output. If you want AutoCAD Electrical to re-prompt for a new
input address, select Input from the list.

Break After

Specifies for the module to break automatically after a specific terminal type.
To activate the prompt for an automatic break in the PLC module, check the
Break After check box.

Spacing Factor

Overrides the current rung spacing for I/O and wire connection point spacing.
For example, a value of 2 will cause AutoCAD Electrical to insert the point
down two times the rung spacing instead of a full rung spacing.

New module
Defines the module descriptions and parameters. A series of boxes are used to
type in or select the values required to define the module.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the PLC Database
File Editor tool. Click New Module.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File
Editor. Click New Module.

New Module Controls

Specifies the Manufacturer, Series, Series Type, and Code (Catalog Number)
for the new module. Select from the list or enter the name in the edit box.

NOTE If you right-click a type or module in the PLC Selection window and select
New Module, the New Module dialog box opens with data already specified for
the Manufacturer, Series, and Series Type.

Overview of the PLC database file | 239

 PLC Selection Expanded Description Listing Controls

These controls display as an expanded description when the module is

highlighted in the tree structure of the PLC Selection dialog box. These include:

Description Describes the PLC module being defined.

Module Type Gives an abbreviated type to the PLC module.

Base Addressing Specifies whether the PLC module addressing follows an industry
standard. Select from Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal, and Prompt.
Prompt asks you at module insertion time for Octal, Decimal, and
Hexadecimal.

Rating Specifies the power rating value for the PLC module.

Terminals Specifies the total number of terminals defined on the PLC mod-
ule.

NOTE This is not active since it is under the control of the total
number of terminals listed in the Terminal Type grid control.

Addressable Points Specifies the total number of termination points on the PLC
module that will receive the PLC address attributes.

AutoCAD Block to insert

Specifies an AutoCAD block file to insert directly below the last I/O point
inserted parametrically. These are typically used for block files that represent
DIP switch settings and notes on how to configure the PLC module.

Autolisp file to run at module insertion time

Specifies an AutoCAD Lisp routine to run after the program executes the
parametric build of the PLC module. These are typically used for inserting
groups of symbols and wires, or modifying attributes on symbols to
accommodate a more custom PLC module build.

240 | Chapter 5 PLC

 Module Box Dimensions

Opens a dialog box for defining the outer box dimensions of the module. The
box dimensions are calculated from the insertion point of the
parametrically-built PLC symbols.

Module Prompts

Opens a dialog box for defining up to nine prompts to be used at the time of
module insertion. You can specify the prompt number and the accompanying
text, or you can remove prompts from this dialog box.

Terminal block settings

Adds or updates the symbols available to build a module.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the PLC Database
File Editor tool. Click Settings.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File
Editor. Click Settings.

You can add a terminal to the list by clicking in any box in the last entry of
the list. A blank entry line is added to the bottom of the list. You must define
the block name, assign it to a terminal category for selection, give it a
description, and assign a bitmap to be used for dialog displays.

Block File Name

Defines the AutoCAD drawing file name that is inserted if this terminal is
included in your PLC module. These PLC symbols are stored in the symbol
library of the active project with the other AutoCAD Electrical component
symbols. Their file names begin with the characters "HP" (Horizontal ladder
rungs/PLC) or "VP" (Vertical ladder rungs/PLC) followed by a digit that
corresponds to a PLC I/O style number.

Category

Defines the category for the terminal. When you add a new terminal, you
select from a list of terminal categories and that group of terminals is displayed.
There are some categories by default (such as Input or Output) but you can
add your own by typing in the edit box. This new category is added to the
list.

Overview of the PLC database file | 241

 Unique Description

Specifies the description that appears underneath the terminal in the Select
Terminal Information dialog box.

Sample Bitmap File

Specifies the bitmap file for the terminal type. These are visible on the Select
Terminal Information dialog box. If you are adding your own terminals, you
can create corresponding bitmap files. Enter your bitmap name in the box or
Browse for it. The next time you select a terminal type, the bitmap will be
displayed.

Graphics Style

Specifies the graphical appearance of the PLC module. Styles 1-5 are predefined,
styles 6-9 may be user-defined. Select a style number - a sample portion of a
PLC module displays.
There are about two dozen symbols (with a file name "HP?*.dwg" where "?" is
the style number) associated with each style in the \Program Files
[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic1 subdirectory. To create a new style,
copy an existing style's symbols to one of the unused style numbers (6-9) and
edit each library symbol.

View Drawing or View Bitmap

Displays the AutoCAD .dwg or bitmap file for the selected terminal. You can
see the attributes of a specific terminal and the placement of each.

Add Blocks From Module

Opens a dialog box for selecting a module to add terminal blocks from. Select
the module from the list and click OK.

Style box dimensions

242 | Chapter 5 PLC

 Defines the module box dimensions (such as the offset values and line
properties) based upon the style number used when the PLC was created.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the PLC Database
File Editor tool. Click Style Box Dimensions.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File
Editor. Click Style Box Dimensions.

NOTE You must set a value for the Split Top and Split Bottom dimensions before
specifying their line properties.

Graphics Style

Specifies the graphical appearance of the PLC module. Styles 1-5 are predefined,
styles 6-9 may be user defined. Select a style number - a sample portion of a
PLC module displays.
There are about two dozen symbols (with a file name "HP?*.dwg" where "?" is
the style number) associated with each style in the \Program Files
[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic1 subdirectory. To create a new style,
copy an existing style's symbols to one of the unused style numbers (6-9) and
edit each library symbol.

Module Box Dimensions for Selected Style

Sets the right, left, top, and bottom offsets for the rectangle that surrounds
the module. The optional Split Top and Split Bottom specify the offsets for a
split module where Split Top specifies the offset for the top of a split module
and Split Bottom specifies the offset for the bottom of the split module. If left
blank, the rectangle Top and Bottom values are used.

Line Properties

Sets the properties for the lines that make up the box. You can set the color
and line type using the properties fields. To predefine the color, enter "COLOR
colorname" into the box. For line type, enter "LTYPE linetypename" in the
box.

Module specifications

Overview of the PLC database file | 243

 Modifies specifications previously defined during the creation of a new module.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the PLC Database
File Editor tool. Click Module Specifications.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File
Editor. Click Module Specifications.

Module Controls

Specifies the Manufacturer, Series, Series Type, and Code (Catalog Number)
for the module.

NOTE These fields are not active since they are under the control of the tree
structure in the PLC Selection window.

PLC Selection Expanded Description Listing Controls

These controls display as an expanded description when the module is

highlighted in the tree structure of the PLC Selection dialog box. These include:

Description Describes the PLC module being defined.

Module Type Gives an abbreviated type to the PLC module.

Base Addressing Specifies whether the PLC module addressing follows an industry
standard. Select from Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal, and Prompt.
Prompt asks you at module insertion time for Octal, Decimal, and
Hexadecimal.

Rating Specifies the power rating value for the PLC module.

Terminals Specifies the total number of terminals defined on the PLC mod-
ule.

NOTE This is not active since it is under the control of the total
number of terminals listed in the Terminal Type grid control.

Addressable Points Specifies the total number of termination points on the PLC
module that will receive the PLC address attributes.

244 | Chapter 5 PLC

 AutoCAD Block to insert

Specifies an AutoCAD block file to insert directly below the last I/O point
inserted parametrically. These are typically used for block files that represent
DIP switch settings and notes on how to configure the PLC module.

Autolisp file to run at module insertion time

Specifies an AutoCAD Lisp routine to run after the program executes the
parametric build of the PLC module. These are typically used for inserting
groups of symbols and wires, or modifying attributes on symbols to
accommodate a more custom PLC module build.

Module Box Dimensions

Opens a dialog box for defining the outer box dimensions of the module. The
box dimensions are calculated from the insertion point of the
parametrically-built PLC symbols.

Module Prompts

Opens a dialog box for defining up to nine prompts to be used at the time of
module insertion. You can specify the prompt number and the accompanying
text, or you can remove prompts from this dialog box.

Prompts at module insertion time

Use this to define up to nine prompts to be used at the time of module
insertion. You can specify the prompt number and the accompanying text,
or you can remove prompts from this dialog box.

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the
PLC Database File Editor tool. Click the New Module or Module Specifications
button, then click the Module Prompts button.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File
Editor. Click the New Module or Module Specifications button, then click the
Module Prompts button.

You can define up to nine different prompts at insertion time.

■ To assign a prompt, select the prompt number from the list, enter the
prompt text in the edit box, and click Change.

Overview of the PLC database file | 245

 ■ To modify a prompt, select the prompt number from the list, modify the
text in the edit box, and click Change.

■ To remove a prompt, select the prompt number from the list and click the
Remove Selected Prompt button.

Example

Let's say you assigned RACK NUMBER to the prompt %%1 and SLOT NUMBER
to the prompt %%2. At insertion time, the I/O Point dialog box will open so
that you can enter values for the RACK NUMBER and SLOT NUMBER fields
right before the module is built. The value you enter in the RACK NUMBER
edit box is temporarily saved in memory under the variable name %%1. The
SLOT NUMBER value is saved under the %%2 variable name.
These prompts can be used in the attribute grid to fill in attribute values or
partial attribute values at module insertion time.

Modify single, stand-alone PLC layout symbols

The single, stand-alone PLC I/O symbols are in the "\Program Files
[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic1\" library (or "\Program Files
[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic125\" library) but do not follow the
normal AutoCAD Electrical naming convention. Their file names must start
with "PLCIO" in order for AutoCAD Electrical to find and process them along
with the full PLC modules in the various BOM and PLC reports. The last three
characters need not follow any naming convention.
Open each in AutoCAD and modify the appearance to suit your needs. Here
are the file names of the default symbols (in the "\Program Files
[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic1\" subdirectory):

PLCIOI1T.dwg First input, single wire left

PLCIOI1.dwg 2+ input, single wire left

PLCIOI2T.dwg First input, wire left and right

246 | Chapter 5 PLC

PLCIOI2.dwg 2+ input, wire left and right

PLCIOO1T.dwg First output, wire right

PLCIOO1.dwg 2+ output, wire right

PLCIOO2T.dwg First output, wire left and right

PLCIOO2.dwg 2+ output, wire left and right

Modify single, stand-alone PLC layout symbols | 247

 Insert PLC layout points
PLC I/O points can be inserted as independent symbols spread out over your
drawing set. AutoCAD Electrical provides a small set of single I/O point library
symbols that you can expand and modify to suit your needs.

1 Click the Insert Component tool.

2 On the main icon menu select PLC I/O.

NOTE Single I/O points are selected from the second and third
rows of the sub dialog.

3 Select the component to insert and specify an insertion point.

NOTE Select from the upper row for the first I/O point of a
module. These symbols carry attributes for catalog BOM assign-
ment. Select from the bottom row for the 2nd through nth points
of a module (which are children symbols of the first symbol par-
ent).

4 Add or edit any information in the Edit PLC I/O Point dialog
box and click OK.

Annotate stand-alone I/O points

The Edit PLC I/O Point dialog displays when a stand-alone I/O point symbol
is inserted or edited. Use this dialog to make changes to your selected I/O
point.

1 Click the Insert Component tool.

2 Select to insert PLC I/O points (found on the second and third
rows of the sub dialog box) and specify an insertion point.
To edit an existing point, right-click on an I/O point and select
Edit Component from the context menu.

3 Make changes to the I/O point.

4 (Optional) To assign the I/O address, click Used: Drawing or

Used: Project to select an I/O address that has been used already
on a module.

248 | Chapter 5 PLC

 5 (Optional) To assign the description, click External File to select
the description from a comma-delimited ASCII text file of
available I/O point descriptions.

6 Click OK and the values are annotated onto the I/O point.

Edit PLC I/O point

Use this dialog box when inserting or editing a stand-alone I/O point symbol.
Specify the values you need and press OK. The values are then annotated onto
the selected I/O point.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Select to insert a PLC I/O point. Specify the
insertion point on the drawing.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component. Select to insert a PLC
I/O point. Specify the insertion point on the drawing.

Address

I/O Address Searches for a wire connection to a nearby PLC I/O address
and, if found, uses the PLC address number in the compon-
ent's tag name.

Used: Drawing or Project Lists any I/O addresses already assigned. Select a tag from
the list to copy, or to increment for this new component.

Parent/Sibling Transfers all information from the parent component to

the child component being inserted or edited. If the parent
is visible on the screen, click Parent/Sibling, and select the
parent (or another related contact).

Module Tag/Description

Tag Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each I/O point. The tag value
can be manually typed in the edit box.

Modify single, stand-alone PLC layout symbols | 249

Line1/ Line2 Optional description text for the I/O point. May be used to identify
the point's relative location in the I/O assembly (for example, Rack #
and Slot #).

Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the I/O point. Enter a value or select
one from the Catalog lookup.

Catalog Lists the catalog number for the I/O point. Enter a value or select one
from the Catalog lookup.

Assembly Lists the assembly code for the I/O point. The Assembly code is used
to link multiple part numbers together.

Catalog Lookup Opens the I/O point's catalog database from which you can manually
enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. Search the data-
base for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected cable. Data-
base queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog with
the database hits listed in the dialog's main window.

Options Substitutes a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format. Retag
Component can then use this override format value to calculate a
new tag for the PLC module. For example, a certain PLC module
needs to always have an "IO" family tag value instead of "PLC" so that
retag, for example, assigns IO-100 instead of PLC100. To achieve this
tag override, enter "IO-%N" for the tag override format.

Description Optional line of description text. May be used to identify the PLC
type (for example, "16 Discrete Inputs - 24VDC")

I/O Point Description

Description 1-5 Specifies optional description text. Up to 5 lines of

description attribute text can be entered.

Pick Selects a description from a module on the current

drawing.

250 | Chapter 5 PLC

List descriptions: External file Displays contents of an external comma-delimited
ASCII text file of I/O point descriptions. Pick an entry
in the file, and then copy the values to edit boxes in
the Edit dialog.

Installation/Location codes

Changes the installation or location codes. You can search the current drawing
or entire project for installation and location codes. A quick read of all the
current or selected drawing files is done and a list of codes used so far is
returned. Select from the list to automatically update the module with the
installation or location code.

Pins

Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the module.

Show/Edit Miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Ratings

Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings
attributes on a module. Select Defaults to display a list of default values.

NOTE If Ratings is grayed out, the module you are editing does not carry rating
attributes.

Work with PLC styles

Modify a PLC appearance style

There are 5 predefined PLC styles provided with AutoCAD Electrical, numbered
1 through 5. If one or more of these do not appeal to you or if you have a
client with specific requirements not met by any of the 5 styles, you can pick
one of the existing styles and modify it.

Work with PLC styles | 251

 There are about 3 dozen symbols associated with each style. They are located
in the jic1 subdirectory (or jic125 for the uniform 0.125 text height version).
They carry the file name "HP?*.dwg" where "?" is the style number.

Create a new PLC style

An easy way to create a new PLC style is to copy an existing PLC style's library
symbols to one of the unused style numbers (6, 7, 8, or 9) and then edit each
one to suit your needs.
For example, copy style 1 to style 6 by copying "\Program Files
[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic1\hp1*.dwg" to "\Program Files
[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic1\hp6*.dwg" (or, if you are using
the 0.125 uniform text height library, copy "\Program Files
[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic125\hp1*.dwg" to "\Program Files
[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic125\hp6*.dwg"). Open the hp6*.dwg
drawing files in AutoCAD and modify as required. To access your new style,
select "6" in the style sub dialog box when you prepare to select and insert a
new PLC module.

Add a new PLC style

The icon menu graphics that display for the various PLC styles are bitmap
files saved to your \Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Acade\
folder where AutoCAD Electrical's Insert PLC and Drawing Properties tools
can access them.

1 Create the new style in AutoCAD.

2 Zoom in to the new PLC style.

3 Save the file as a bitmap using the following name definition:

■ For the Drawing Properties dialog box: the graphic must have the
name P_STYLExH.bmp or P_STYLExV.bmp where 'x' is the PLC style
number (1-9) and H or V indicate the module orientation (horizontal
or vertical)

■ For the Insert PLC dialog box: the file name must be STYLExH.bmp
or STYLExV.bmp where 'x' is the PLC style number (1-9) and H or V
indicate the module orientation (horizontal or vertical)

NOTE If the resulting bitmap is too small or off-center, open the source
drawing in AutoCAD again. Resize your AutoCAD graphics window so that
it is more square. Center the image and resave. Repeat until you are satisfied
with the result.

252 | Chapter 5 PLC

Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format
The PLC information can be read from an Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, Access
database table, or a comma-delimited file. AutoCAD Electrical expects to find
certain columns containing the information needed to generate the drawings.
The columns can be in any order defined by your settings. All columns are
optional except the Module part number (Code) column. Three example PLC
data files are found in the User folder: DEMOPLC.XLS, DEMOPLC.CSV and
DEMOPLC_IEC.XLS. A settings file is also provided to run the Spreadsheet to
PLC I/O Utility: DEMOPLC_IEC.WDI.
Use the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool to assign spreadsheet or table
column numbers to the data categories below.

Module data

Module part numbers (Code) This can be the code for a parametrically generated module,
or for a full module's library symbol. It can even be a non-
PLC symbol such as a variable speed drive.

Address (ADDR) The I/O address for each I/O point. This value gets annot-
ated to the "TAGA_" attribute.

Rack numbers (R) The module's rack number, used for the attribute assigned
to the %%1 Prompt from the parametric data file.

Group numbers (G) The module's group number, used for the attribute assigned
to the %%2 Prompt from the parametric data file.

Slot numbers (S) The module's slot number, used for the attribute assigned
to the %%3 Prompt from the parametric data file.

Remote terminal panel (RTP) The module's remote terminal panel ID number, used for
the attribute assigned to the %%4 Prompt from the para-
metric data file.

Wire numbers The wire number used for each I/O point.

Create PLC I/O Drawings from Spreadsheets | 253

Module's tag The value assigned to the module's TAG attribute.

Module's Installation The value assigned to the module's installation attribute.

Module's Location The value assigned to the module's location attribute.

Description 1-5 (DESC1-DESC5) The values assigned to the module's 5 description attributes.

Voltage/Input/Output (VOLTAGE) The value used to determine if a module is an input or

output module if it cannot be determined from the para-
metric data file. For input modules, AutoCAD Electrical
looks for DI, AI, or IN as part of the text string. For output
modules, AutoCAD Electrical looks for DO, AO, or OUT as
part of the text string. For combination modules, it looks
for IO, Other, or both IN and OUT in the text string.

Special PLC values

There are some special values that can be placed in a row to direct special PLC
module features:

BREAK Insert this keyword in the ADDRESS column of the spreadsheet where
you want the PLC module to break and continue on the next ladder
column. There should not be any other data in the spreadsheet row;
only the word “BREAK” in the address column.

SPACER Insert this keyword in the ADDRESS column of the spreadsheet where
you want to add extra space between adjacent I/O points. There
should not be any other data in the spreadsheet row; only the word
“SPACER” in the address column.

SKIP Insert this keyword into the CODE module part number column right
after the end of the previous module's data on the spreadsheet. This
keyword triggers the utility to skip a ladder before it begins the next
module in the spreadsheet. There should not be any other data in
the spreadsheet row; only the word “SKIP” in the part number code
column.

254 | Chapter 5 PLC

* Place an asterisk (*) in front of a device block name to trigger an Insert
Circuit instead of an Insert Component. Any associated TAG, DESC,
MFG, and CAT column values for this entry are annotated onto the
first AutoCAD Electrical symbol found on the inserted circuit.

Inline component data

The PLC Generator supports up to 9 inline components. Replace the numeric

value “n” with the next incrementing number; the first component would
have a tag of D1TAG while the second component would have the tag of
D2TAG. The columns of data are as follows:

Tag (DnTAG) The value to be used for the component's TAG attribute. For terminals,
use this column to encode both the TAG and Terminal Number. Use
this format TAGSTRIP:TERM where the colon character separates the
terminal's TAG-ID value from the terminal number to be applied to
the TERM attribute. For example, "TB1:25" in the component tag
column puts "TB1" on the TAGSTRIP attribute and "25" on the TERM
attribute.

Description (DnDESC) The values assigned to the component's DESC attributes. Use the |
symbol to separate text and assign it to DESC1, DESC2, or DESC3.
For example, if you use "CYCLE|START" in the description field,
"CYCLE" is assigned to DESC1 and "START" to DESC2.

Block (DnBLK) The .dwg file name for the component you want to use.

Location (DnLOC) The value assigned to the component's location (LOC) attribute.

Installation The value assigned to the component's installation (INST) attribute.

Manufacturer The value assigned to the component's manufacturer (MFG) attribute.

Catalog The value assigned to the component's catalog (CAT) attribute.

Assembly The value assigned to the component's assembly code (ASSYCODE)

attribute.

Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 255

 You can predefine other attribute values using the format
"mainval;attrnam2=attrval2;attrnam3=attrval3,” and so on. Enter this in any
inline component column except the Block column defining the component's
block name.
Components for input modules are inserted left-to-right, while components
for output modules are inserted right-to-left. Note that the spacing between
devices (as defined in your settings) is maintained even if no component is
defined for a particular column.

Special wiring for inline components

Normally each inline component is wired in series connected from the bus
to the I/O point. AutoCAD Electrical also supports jumpers between adjacent
rungs. To direct AutoCAD Electrical to use a jumper, you encode the jumper
as one of the available inline devices. Use the "|" character as the symbol block
name for the jumper. To control removal of wire connections, follow the "|"
character with 4 characters to cover upper left, upper right, lower left, and
lower right connections. Use "W" to keep the wire connection and "X" to
remove. For example, a block name of "|WWXW" inserts a jumper and trims
the lower left wire connection. "|XWXW" trims away the left-hand wire
connections of both top and bottom. Just a "|" for the block name is the same
as "|WWWW", all wire connection retained.
Wiring to analog input or output modules might need to loop back to a return
terminal instead of going all the way across to a power bus. You can direct
the generator to pop in a vertical short wire to loop back around. For looping
back to the right, insert "|XWXW" as the first inline device. To loop back to
the left use "|WXWX".

256 | Chapter 5 PLC

Automatically generate I/O schematic drawings
A project's PLC I/O requirements, in spreadsheet or database format, can drive
automatic generation of the I/O schematic drawings.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access

the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool.

2 Click the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool.

3 Select the spreadsheet and click Open.

4 In the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box, enter a value

for the beginning line reference number for the first ladder of
the drawing. Specify any other options to use for the ladder
reference numbers.

5 Specify how you want the module to be placed in the drawing.

6 Click Start.
AutoCAD Electrical constructs a set of PLC I/O drawings based
on the information carried in the PLC spreadsheet. Ladders
and modules insert automatically, breaking at the bottom of
one ladder and continuing on the next.

Change and use PLC I/O settings

You have control over many aspects of how these drawings auto-generate.
You also can adapt this tool to an existing spreadsheet or database format that
is different from the example demoplc.xls file format. You can change these
settings each time you run the program or change them once and save your
settings for future use.

Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 257

 Change and save the settings

1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access

the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool.

2 Click the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool.

3 Select the spreadsheet and click Open.

4 In the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box, do one of

the following:
■ Click Setup to define how the drawings should be set up (based on
the defaut settings). This includes how many ladders you want inser-
ted, the type and orientation of the ladders, spacing, and number of
rungs. You can also define the module placement, style, scale, and
in-line device placement and spacing.
■ Click Browse to select an existing setting file that you can then edit
and save.
■ Click Setup then click Spreadsheet/Table Columns to define what
column in your spreadsheet or database table goes with what data
value in the utility. The first page of this dialog deals with the overall
module information. The sub-dialog box (accessed from clicking the
More button) identifies the column data for up to nine in-line connec-
ted devices for each I/O point.

5 Click Save to save the settings to a file for future use.

6 Enter a file name for the settings (the file extension will be
".WDI") and click Save.

258 | Chapter 5 PLC

 Read the settings

1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access

the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool.

2 Click the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool.

3 Select the spreadsheet and click Open.

4 In the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box, click Browse.

5 Select a previously created file (it has a ".WDI" file extension)

and click Open.
Your settings are now restored and are used for the drawings
generated from the selected spreadsheet or database table.

Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility

AutoCAD Electrical reads in your information (.xls, .mdb, or .csv format) and
then constructs a set of PLC I/O wiring diagrams directly from your data.
Ladders and modules insert automatically, breaking at the bottom of one
ladder and continuing on the next (or on to the next drawing).

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the Spreadsheet
PLC I/O Utility tool. Select the spreadsheet output file and click Open.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ Spreadsheet to
PLC I/O Utility. Select the spreadsheet output file and click Open.

Settings

Select a PLC settings file (.wdi) to use. The default is to use the settings in the
WDIO.LSP file. Specify the settings to use by entering a file name in the box
or clicking Browse to select a file. The path to the selected WDI file displays
underneath the edit box. If you enter the name of the .wdi file, AutoCAD

Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 259

 Electrical searches for the file in the standard search locations in the following
order:

1 User subdirectory (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application.

Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country
code}\Support\User\)

2 Active project's .wdp file subdirectory

3 Symbol library paths defined for the active project

4 AutoCAD Electrical lookup subdirectory (C:\Documents and

Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData

5 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade

{version}\Support\)

6 Current Directory

7 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options ➤ Files ➤ Support Files

Search Path

Click Setup to display the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Setup dialog box.
Use this to modify and save new setting configurations.

NOTE If you select the .wdi file to use after you make changes in the Spreadsheet
to PLC I/O Utility Setup dialog box, the settings in the .wdi file are used and the
setup changes are not applied.

Ladder Reference Numbering

Start Specifies the value for the beginning line reference number
for the first ladder of the first drawing. Leading zeros and
embedded alpha characters are supported for line reference
numbering.

Index Defines if you want your line reference numbers to se-

quence by 1 (default) or by some other amount.

Column to column Indicates whether to use the next sequential number for
the first ladder on each successive column or to use the
specified value to skip for the next column's first ladder
reference.

260 | Chapter 5 PLC

Drawing to drawing Indicates whether to use the next sequential number for
the first ladder on each successive drawing or to use the
specified value to skip for the next drawing's first ladder
reference.

Module Placement

There are 3 options related to module placement. This allows you to define if
you want each I/O module to start at the top of a ladder, if you want the
module built in a ladder with the previous module only if it fits completely,
or if you want the module to be built in the same ladder with the previous
module and split if necessary to fill the ladder.

Include unused/extra connections You may have PLC modules with terminal connec-
tions that are unused. Usually AutoCAD Electrical
leaves these out and the module is built without
showing these terminal connections. Select this to
include the connections in the PLC module.
If you select to place modules within the same ladder,
enter the number of rungs to skip between modules.

NOTE When a module is selected that contains some

of these terminals, they are included if you select this
option.

If you want to show these connections, include them

in the Attributes column of the Module Terminal In-
formation table of the ace_plc.mdb file with
";\\SPECIAL=INCLUDE" following the block informa-
tion or by selecting "When Including Unused" or
"When Excluding Unused" in the Show column of
the PLC Database File Editor dialog box.

Allow pre-defined breaks Your PLC modules automatically break at a given

point when a "\\SPECIAL=BREAK" code is en-
countered in the module's block of parametric data.

Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 261

 Drawing File Creation

Use active drawing Indicates to use the open and active drawing file to
begin the PLC placement process.

NOTE This is unavailable if a Starting file name is

specified.

Starting file name Specifies the drawing file to begin with for your PLC
drawings. Enter a name or click Browse to select a
file. The .dwg extension is not required and the file
is saved in the same folder as the active .wdp file.

Pause between drawings/Free run Your spreadsheet may contain enough information
to generate multiple drawings. Select Pause between
drawings to stop between each drawing or select
Free run if you want the program to run completely
to the end without stopping.

NOTE When you select Pause Between Drawings, a

single drawing is generated and then a dialog box
opens allowing you to adjust settings, select to do a
free run, or continue with a pause between drawings.
The Use active drawing option is disabled.

Sheet If your ladders use the AutoCAD Electrical Sheet

parameter you can enter a value for the optional
sheet number.

Add new drawing to active project Adds newly created drawings to the active project.
The new drawings are added to the end of the pro-
ject’s drawing list.

Save

Saves the setup information and settings in a .wdi file to be reused.

Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility setup

Use this to define how the drawings should be set up. This includes how many
ladders you want inserted, the type and orientation of the ladders, spacing,

262 | Chapter 5 PLC

 and number of rungs. You can also define the module placement, style, scale
, and inline device placement and spacing.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the Spreadsheet
PLC I/O Utility tool. Select the spreadsheet output file and click Open. In the
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box, click Setup.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ Spreadsheet to
PLC I/O Utility. Select the spreadsheet output file and click Open. In the
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box, click Setup.

NOTE New default values can be programmed into the source file. The program
source file name is "wdio.lsp." Open the file with any ASCII text editor and carefully
edit the values near the top of the file.

Ladder

Origin Specifies the insertion point for first (or only) ladder on the
drawing. This corresponds to the upper left-hand corner
of the ladder.

Orientation Specifies to create a vertical bus ladder (with horizontal

wires) or horizontal bus ladder (with vertical wires).

Reference numbers Specifies the default referencing system:

■ Numbers Only
■ Numbers Ruling
■ User Blocks
■ X-Y Grid: All referencing is tied to an X-Y grid system
of numbers and letters along the left-hand side and
top of the drawing. Set your drawing's vertical and
horizontal index numbers and letters, spacing, and
origin in the X-Y grid setup dialog box.

TIP Use negative spacing values for horizontal

or vertical if you want to change the XY grid
system's origin to be other than the upper left-
hand corner of the drawing.

Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 263

 ■ X Zones: Similar to X-Y Grid, but there isn't a Y-axis.
Set your drawing's horizontal labels, spacing, and origin
on the X Zones setup dialog box.

TIP Use a negative zone spacing value if you

want the zone reference origin to be at the right
side of the drawing.

Width Specifies the width of each ladder (offset distance between

the ladder's 2 bus wires) from left to right rail.

Distance between Specifies the offset distance from the insertion point of one
ladder to the insertion point of the next ladder.

Ladders per drawing Specifies the number of ladders to insert. Vertical ladders
insert left to right. Horizontal ladders insert top to bottom.

Rungs per ladder Specifies the quantity of line reference / wire rungs per
ladder. This value multiplied by the "Spacing - ladder rung
to rung" value determines the length of the inserted lad-
ders.

Rung spacing Specifies the distance from one rung to the next rung on
a ladder.

Rung count skip for I/O start Specifies the quantity of rungs to skip before inserting a
PLC module (0=no skip)

Suppression Indicates whether to include/exclude bus rails and rungs.

Signal arrow style Specifies the default wire signal arrow style. Select from
the 4 predefined styles or a user-defined style. You can
override the default style setting at insertion time.

264 | Chapter 5 PLC

 Module

PLC graphical style Specifies the default PLC module style. Select
from the 5 predefined styles or a user-defined
style.

Input offset from neutral Specifies the Input module insertion offset dis-
tance (vertical ladder orientation - measured in
+X direction from right-hand vertical bus; hori-
zontal ladder orientation - measured in +Y direc-
tion from lower horizontal bus).

Output offset from hot bus Specifies the Output module insertion offset dis-
tance (vertical ladder orientation - measured in
-X direction from the left-hand vertical bus; hori-
zontal ladder orientation - measured in the -Y
direction from the upper horizontal bus).

NOTE If module type cannot be determined or

if it is combination Input and Output, then the
module is inserted down the middle of the lad-
der.

Maximum I/O per ladder Specifies the maximum number of module I/O
points to insert into each ladder without breaking
the module and continuing it in the next ladder.

I/O point spacing Specifies the insertion point offset distance

between one in-line device and the next.

Scale Specifies the PLC module scale override value

(default = 1.0). This applies a scale factor to the
PLC module insertion except for the "Spacing -
I/O point to I/O point" value defined above. If
Apply this scale to module outline only is selec-
ted, then this scaling factor is applied only to the
module's outline.

Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format | 265

 In Line Devices

First input device from hot bus Specifies the starting offset distance from the
left-hand or upper bus for the first (or only) in-
line device defined for each Input module I/O
point.

First output device from neutral bus Specifies the starting offset distance from the
right-hand or lower bus for the first (or only) in-
line device defined for each Output module I/O
point.

Spacing between multiple devices Specifies the insertion point offset distance
between one in-line device and the next.

Spreadsheet/Table Columns

Displays the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Drawing Generator dialog box for
reviewing and mapping spreadsheet columns to attributes on the PLC module
symbol.

Drawing Template

You can force the tool to use a specific template for new drawings. Enter the
template drawing file name with the full path or click Browse to search for an
existing template (this looks in the AutoCAD template folder where all of the
user drawing templates are saved). For the current default template, leave the
value blank. If you do not want to use a template drawing, enter a single dot
in the edit box.

NOTE Make sure your template does not have any existing ladders.

Save

Saves the spreadsheet information in a .wdi file to be reused. Once you save
the new .wdi file, the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box redisplays and
the new .wdi file name displays in the Settings edit box.

266 | Chapter 5 PLC

Create PLC spreadsheets using RSLogix
RSLogix is a PLC programming software package for programming various
Allen-Bradley PLCs. This program has an output function that can write the
I/O information out to an ASCII file. AutoCAD Electrical imports this
information and creates a regular spreadsheet from the data that can then be
used to create PLC drawing files.
Using the RSLogix 500 Import dialog box, you can omit PLC cards, reserve
future locations for PLC cards in drawings, and browse to select a PLC code
from the PLC database. Once you modify the .eas file and apply the PLC data
to categories you can save the data into a PLC import spreadsheet that is used
to create the PLC drawing files.

Export I/O information using RSLogix

Use this to create a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file from a RSLogix file that
can be imported into AutoCAD Electrical using the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O
Utility tool.

1 In RSLogix, export your RSLogix 500 file into .EAS format.

Create PLC spreadsheets using RSLogix | 267

 2 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access
the RSLogix 500 Export to Spreadsheet tool.

3 Click the RSLogix 500 Export to Spreadsheet tool.

4 Select an .EAS or .CSV file and click Open.

5 In the RSLogix 500 Import dialog box, select whether the I/O
points should be displayed in 8, 16, or 32 point groupings.

6 Pick an I/O module for each set of I/O points. Enter it in the
edit box, select from the PLC dialog using Browse, or select
from the already used list once you have some modules selec-
ted.

7 Click OK to assign the module and move on to the next set of

points.

8 (Optional) To change a module assignment, select the module

assignment and click Change. In the RSLogix 500 Import
Change Module dialog box, change the selected module part
number by entering the new module name in the edit box,
selecting it from the PLC dialog using Browse, or selecting it
from the already used list once you have some modules selec-
ted. Click OK to assign the module and return to the Input
Module dialog box.

9 (Optional) Click Omit to skip a set of points, or click Future

to skip the points and add information so AutoCAD Electrical
will add a blank column when generating the drawing from
the spreadsheet.

10 Enter a name for the spreadsheet once a module has been as-
signed for each set of points. Click Save.
Use Microsoft Excel to modify your spreadsheet as needed.

11 Click Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Spreadsheet to

PLC I/O Utility to create the PLC drawing. (page 257)

RSLogix 500 import

268 | Chapter 5 PLC

 Use this tool to import I/O information from RSLogix and create a regular
spreadsheet from the data that can then be used for the Spreadsheet to PLC
I/O generator.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the RSLogix 500
Export to Spreadsheet tool. Select an .EAS or .CSV file and click Open.
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ RSLogix 500 Export
to Spreadsheet. Select an .EAS or .CSV file and click Open.

The text “Input Module x of x” displays underneath the dialog box title bar
to keep track of which module you are editing out of the total number of
modules found in the RSLogix import file.

8pt, 16pt, or 32 pt slot addressing Specifies whether the I/O points displayed should be
in 8pt, 16pt, or 32 pt groupings.

Default to Specifies to display the module in octal or decimal

format.

Module assignment so far Displays the I/O modules already picked for each set
of I/O points. Enter the module name in the edit box,
select it from the PLC dialog box using Browse, or
select it from the already used list once you have
some modules selected. Click OK to assign the
module and move on to the next set of points.

Omit Skips a set of points.

Future Skips the points and adds information so AutoCAD

Electrical adds a blank column when generating the
drawing from the spreadsheet.

RSLogix 500 import change module

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the RSLogix 500
Export to Spreadsheet tool. Select an .EAS or .CSV file and click Open. Select
one of the module assignments and click Change.

Create PLC spreadsheets using RSLogix | 269

Access:

From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ RSLogix 500 Export
to Spreadsheet. Select an .EAS or .CSV file and click Open. Select one of the
module assignments and click Change.

The text “Change Module x” displays underneath the dialog box title bar to
keep track of which module you are changing.

Select below for module part number as- Displays the I/O modules already picked for each set
signment of I/O points. Change the selected module part
number by entering the new module name in the
edit box, selecting it from the PLC dialog box using
Browse, or selecting it from the already used list once
you have some modules selected. Select OK to assign
the module and return to the RSLogix 500 Import
dialog box.

Omit Skips a set of points.

Future Skips the points and adds information so AutoCAD

Electrical will add a blank column when generating
the drawing from the spreadsheet.

Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro

AutoCAD Electrical imports Unity Pro XML files to aid in the creation of
various types of PLC and Panel Layout drawings in the active project. Unity
Pro supports numerous Schneider Electrical PLC cards, PLC racks, power
supplies, and various accessories.
Unity Pro exports two XML files (.xhw and .xsy) that can be used in the
automatic creation of AutoCAD Electrical PLC ladder-style drawings. The .xhw
file contains the PLC hardware information such as catalog numbers and
starting addressing information. The .xsy file contains the information about
the software such as variable types (input/output) and i/o addressing
information.
These files also contain catalog information that can be reformatted to generate
an equipment list to help in the creation of a rack layout drawing used in

270 | Chapter 5 PLC

 Panel Layouts or separate Rack Layout drawings using the Unity Pro Export
to Spreadsheet tool.

Data structure from the Unity Pro Hardware Configuration File

The tree structure data that displays in the Hardware File section of the Unity
Pro Import dialog box is as follows:

Project node The Project node is the topmost node defined in the tree structure.
The label given to the node is the file name of the hardware config-
uration (.xhw) file that was defined during the export from Unity Pro.
The name of the hardware configuration file can be different than
that of the I/O configuration file.

Bus Name node The Bus Name node consists of the Bus Name Description and the
Bus Number ID.
Example: Bus 1 Local Quantum Bus
■ Bus Name Description: displays the name of the bus and is spe-
cified in the busType element in the .xhw file. (i.e. Local Quantum
Bus)
■ Bus Number ID: displays the number of the bus and is specified
in the position element of the .xhw file. (i.e. Bus 1)

Rack Location and Catalog The Rack Location node consists of descriptions, location information
Number node and a catalog number.
Example: Rack \1.1\1 140XBP0600
■ Rack Description: displays the description of the rack and is spe-
cified in the family element of the .xhw file. (i.e. Rack)
■ Rack Location: displays the location of the rack and is specified
in the topoAddress element of the .xhw file. (i.e. \1.1\1)
■ Rack Catalog Number: displays the catalog number of the rack
and is specified in the partNumber element of the .xhw file. (i.e.
140XBP0600)

Module Location and The Module Location node consists of descriptions, location informa-
Catalog Number node tion and a catalog number.
Example: Supply \1.1\1.1 140CPS21400
■ Module Description: displays the description of the module and
is specified in the family element of the .xhw file. ( i.e. Supply)

Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro | 271

 ■ Module Location: displays the location of the module in the rack
and is specified in the topoAddress of the .xhw file. (i.e. 1.1\1.1)
■ Module Catalog Number: displays the catalog number of the
module and is specified in the partNumber element of the .xhw
file. (i.e. 140CPS21400)

Unity Pro to AutoCAD Electrical Mapping File

The Unity Pro to AutoCAD Electrical mapping file, DEFAULT_UNITY.MAP,

allows you to define the text strings to be placed in the custom field of the
Unity Pro Data Editor to map directly to an AutoCAD Electrical schematic
symbol name.
AutoCAD Electrical Symbol Mapping File Example:
;This file is to be used for mapping of Unity Pro custom strings
;for PLC I/O devices to AutoCAD Electrical schematic symbol names
;Syntax: Value in Custom Field,Symbol Block File Name
;Example: PBNO,HPB11
; PBNC,HPB12
PB NC,HPB12
*2POS*,HSS112
*3POS*,HSS113
The comment fields (marked with ;) at the top of the file are used for
information. The custom field supports spaces in the string and wild cards.

NOTE The distance the remote component is located from the PLC and hot bus
rail is determined by the PLC settings file.

Equipment List Structure and Data

When you click OK on the Unity Pro Import dialog box, a PLC Spreadsheet
file is created along with an Equipment List spreadsheet file. The Equipment
List file includes all of the catalog information in the .xhw file. The structure
of the Equipment List is:

■ Column 1 = CATALOG; partNumber variable from the .xhw file

■ Column 2 = MANUFACTURER; found in Default_cat.mdb (PLCIO table)

272 | Chapter 5 PLC

■ Column 3 = ASSYCODE; column defined (left blank)

■ Column 4 = TAG; column defined (left blank)

■ Column 5 = LOC; column defined (left blank)

■ Column 6 = INST; column defined (left blank)

■ Column 7 = DESC1; partFamily variable from the .xhw file

■ Column 8 = WDBLKNAM; PLCIO

Import Unity Pro files to a spreadsheet

1 In Unity Pro, right-click the configuration file in the project

browser and select Export.

2 Enter a file name for the .xhw file and click Export.

3 Right-click the Variables & FB Instances file in the project

browser and select Export.

4 Enter a file name for the .xsy file and click Export.

NOTE We recommend that you export the files into the same
location as the AutoCAD project (.wdp) file.

If the export was successful, the Unity Pro command window

states that the file was exported with 0 errors or warnings.

Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro | 273

 5 In AutoCAD Electrical, click the arrow on the Insert PLC
(Parametric) tool to access the Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet
tool.

6 Click the Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool.

7 Select the Unity Pro hardware configuration file (.xhw) and

click Open.

8 Select the Unity Pro I/O configuration file (.xsy) and click
Open.
Upon successful validation of the files selected for import, the
Unity Pro Import dialog box displays.

9 In the Unity Pro Import dialog box, modify the selected files
to create a spreadsheet for PLC import. You can right-click on
a module or rack in the tree structure and select to include or
exclude it from being saved into the spreadsheet file. Do any
of the following optional steps:
■ Indicate whether to display only modules in the .xhw file that contain
I/O addressing (PLCs).
■ Indicate whether to include inner or outer terminals. You then need
to select whether to place the terminal symbol names in every row or
only those that have a defined I/O point.
■ In the Hardware File section, select the module to modify. The data
relative to the I/O variable file for the selected module displays in the
I/O Variable File section of the dialog box. If you select a module that
does not have addresses (such as power supplies or CPUs) the grid
remains empty.
■ Change the symbol name or device tag for any of the I/O points using
the right-click menu options. The Select Symbol option displays the
icon menu from which you can select the symbol name.
■ Specify the symbol name to be inserted for inner and outer terminals
in the spreadsheet. The default symbol name is HT0001 (a terminal
that maintains the wire number potential, has a tag strip ID and ter-
minal number, and is square). Click the Select from Icon Menu button
to select a terminal to use from the icon menu

10 Click OK.

274 | Chapter 5 PLC

 11 Specify a file name and location for the PLC spreadsheet file
and click Save.

12 Specify a file name and location for the Equipment List file
and click Save.

13 Select Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Spreadsheet

to PLC I/O Utility to create the PLC drawing. (page 257)

Unity Pro import

This tool imports Unity Pro hardware (.xsy) and I/O variable (.xsy) files into
AutoCAD Electrical to reformat the data into a PLC import spreadsheet. After
the spreadsheet file is created use the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool to
automatically create PLC style drawing files.
When you click OK, you are prompted to enter a name for the PLC spreadsheet
file. You can save this file in .xls (preferred), .mdb or .csv format. Once you
enter a name (or accept the default) and click Save, you are then prompted
to create an equipment list spreadsheet file. You can save this file in .xls, .mdb
(preferred) or .csv format. The suggested file name is the name of the hardware
import file with the suffix ‘(Equipment).’

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the Unity Pro Export
to Spreadsheet tool. Select to open a Unity Pro hardware configuration (.xhw)
file and a Unity Pro I/O configuration file (.xsy).
From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ Unity Pro Export
to Spreadsheet. Select to open a Unity Pro hardware configuration (.xhw) file
and a Unity Pro I/O configuration file (.xsy).

Hardware File

The path and file name of the hardware file created from Unity Pro (.xhw)
displays at the top of this section of the dialog box.

Hardware file information Allows you to view and select the hardware configur-
ation from the Unity Pro export files. The tree struc-
ture has 4 nodes:
■ Unity Project (export file name)
■ Bus name

Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro | 275

 ■ Rack location and catalog number
■ Module location and catalog number

Right-click on a node to include or exclude modules

from being saved into the spreadsheet file. Upon
exclusion the module icon changes to indicate that
it has been excluded. You can exclude or include an
entire rack node. Multiple node selection is allowed.
Changed icons:

NOTE If you choose to include modules that do not

contain any I/O addressing, the module catalog
number appears in the Code column of the spread-
sheet.

Show only I/O modules Indicates to display only modules in the .xhw file that
contain I/O addressing (PLCs). If a rack node only
includes modules that are not PLC I/O modules, the
entire rack is removed from the tree structure. If a
rack node contains modules with and without I/O
addressing, those that don't have I/O addresses are
removed.

Include inner terminals Defines a terminal symbol to be placed into the

spreadsheet on the inner side of the in-line compon-
ent (between the I/O point and the in-line compon-
ent).
■ All I/O addresses: Places the terminal symbol
name into the row of every I/O address listed in
the import spreadsheet.
■ I/O addresses defined: Places the terminal symbol
name into every row where an I/O point is
defined from Unity Pro. The defined address from
Unity Pro is the topographical address coming
from the I/O variable file that contains a value
for the address string.

276 | Chapter 5 PLC

Include outer terminals Defines a terminal symbol to be placed into the
spreadsheet on the outer side of the in-line compon-
ent (between the I/O component and the wire con-
nected to the ladder rail).
■ All I/O addresses: Places the terminal symbol
name into the row of every I/O address listed in
the import spreadsheet.
■ I/O addresses defined: Places the terminal symbol
name into every row where an I/O point is
defined from Unity Pro. The defined address from
Unity Pro is the topographical address coming
from the I/O variable file that contains a value
for the address string.

I/O Variable File

Once you select a module node from the tree selection the data relative to the
I/O variable file displays for viewing and editing. The path and file name of
the I/O variable file created from Unity Pro (.xsy) displays at the top of this
section of the dialog box.

I/O variable file grid Displays a list of the I/O variables found inside of the
Unity Pro I/O Variable export file (.xsy). This remains
empty if the selected module does not have ad-
dresses (such as power supplies and CPUs).
All I/O points for the respective PLC card display in
the grid (including those that are undefined). The
total number of I/O points and the order of the data
is determined from the topological address in the
.xsy file in combination with the PLC definition inside
of the AutoCAD Electrical PLC database file
(ACE_PLC.MDB).

NOTE Single and multiple row selection is allowed.

■ Address: Displays the address string from the

Unity Pro I/O Variable export file. This field is not
editable in the dialog box.
■ Description: Displays the comment field string
associated to the address from the Unity Pro I/O

Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro | 277

 Variable export file. This field is not editable in
the dialog box.
■ Terminal: Defines the placement of a terminal
symbol in line with the PLC I/O point. Select the
check box to place a terminal symbol in the
spreadsheet and drawing file. Since this is not
defined in the Unity Pro export files, it must be
defined prior to creating the AutoCAD Electrical
import spreadsheet.
■ Symbol Name: Displays the AutoCAD Electrical
schematic symbol file name to be placed in line
with the PLC I/O points. If the symbol is not
found in the schematic symbol library or the
custom string is not mapped to a symbol name
in the mapping file, the name displays in red.
Right-click in this column to select a file name
from the icon menu or to clear the symbol name.
The symbol name is derived from the
value in the Custom field of the Unity
Pro data and the symbol file name that
it is mapped to in the mapping file.
■ Device Tag: Displays the tag value. If left blank,
the normal tagging method for parent compon-
ents is followed while children components re-
main untagged. Click in the column to enter a
value or right-click to copy, cut or paste a value
into the cell.

Inner terminal symbol Specifies the symbol name to be inserted for inner
terminals in the spreadsheet. The default symbol
name is HT0001 (a terminal that maintains the wire
number potential, has a tag strip ID and terminal
number, and is square). Click the Select from Icon
Menu button to select a terminal to use from the
icon menu.

Outer terminal symbol Specifies the symbol name to be inserted for outer
terminals in the spreadsheet. The default symbol
name is HT0001. Click the Select from Icon Menu

278 | Chapter 5 PLC

 button to select a terminal to use from the icon
menu.

I/O variable grid right-click options

Right-clicking in the I/O variable grid control allows you to edit the file prior
to creating the PLC I/O spreadsheet. Multiple selection is allowed.

Select Symbol Displays the icon menu for selection of symbol file
names. Selecting a symbol file name fills in an
empty grid cell or overwrites the existing text in a
cell.

Select All Selects every row in the grid control

Clear All Removes every row from selection.

Select All Defined I/O Makes a selection in the grid for the rows that are
defined with I/O addresses.

Cut (single selection only) Cuts the selected value (de-

scription, symbol name or device tag).

Copy Copies the selected value from one or more grid

cells.

Paste Pastes in the selected value from one or more grids

into the selected grid(s).

Apply Terminal Inner Selects all inner terminals in the grid.

Apply Terminal Outer Selects all outer terminals in the grid.

OK + Run

Displays the Write Unity Pro Data to PLC Spreadsheet dialog box where you
can quickly save the data to a spreadsheet and start the PLC drawing creation
automatically. The Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box then opens with
the saved spreadsheet already selected.

Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro | 279

Create XML files for export to Unity Pro
The Unity Pro Export command creates the Unity Pro I/O variable file (.xsy)
in the Unity Pro XML format. You can create the file for the active project or
active drawing. AutoCAD Electrical suggests naming the XML data file based
on whether you select to export for the project or a drawing. The default file
name is either “Projectname.xml” or “Drawing filename.xml.”
The Unity Pro export file is generated from the PLC drawings and their
respective PLC symbols. To ensure the proper importing and editing of the
I/O variable file in Unity Pro, the variable name and variable type are
maintained inside of the PLC drawings. Variable names and types are defined
inside of Unity Pro and are the required for bidirectional updates.

NOTE These values are maintained on the PLC module. If you delete the module
from the drawing, the variable name and type are also removed.

Variable names and types are created for new I/O addresses for import back
into Unity Pro. During the AutoCAD Electrical import process, the rest of the
addressing is filled in based on the available I/O points on the module. These
additional I/O points receive a variable name and type upon import into
AutoCAD Electrical.

Variable Name Takes on the address string as the value.

Variable Type Takes on the same type as the other defined I/O
addresses on the module. If I/O points are not
defined on the module then Boolean characters are
used.

Export a file in the Unity Pro XML format

The AutoCAD Electrical Unity Pro export file is generated from the PLC
drawings and their respective PLC symbols. The variable names and types are

280 | Chapter 5 PLC

 maintained on the PLC module so that the file can be imported back into
Unity Pro.

1 In AutoCAD Electrical, click the arrow on the Schematic Re-

ports tool to access the Unity Pro Export tool.

2 Click the Unity Pro Export tool.

3 In the Unity Pro Export dialog box, select to create an export

file (.xsy) for the project or the active drawing and click OK.

4 If you selected Project, select the drawings to process and click

OK.

5 In the Write PLC Data to Unity Pro Import File dialog box,
specify the file name and click Save.
By default the file is saved in the My Documents folder.
AutoCAD Electrical suggests a file name for the XML export
file depending on whether you are creating the file for the
project or the active drawing.

Unity Pro export

This tool creates the Unity Pro I/O variable file (.xsy) in the Unity Pro XML
format. The XML file contains the PLC I/O addresses and descriptions for
import into the Unity Pro software.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Unity Pro Export
tool.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Unity Pro Export.

Select whether to create an XML export file for the project or for the active
drawing.

Create XML files for export to Unity Pro | 281

282
Component Tools
6
In this chapter
■ Insert schematic
components
■ Insert a copy of a
component
■ Insert similar components
■ Insert from catalog lists
■ Use the schematic lookup
file
■ Insert from panel lists
■ Manipulate Components
■ Swap contact states
■ Check coil/contact count
■ Follow signals
■ Insert dashed link lines
■ Overview of DIN Rails
■ Edit schematic lookup files
■ Overview of user data
records
■ Component
Cross-References
■ Circuits
■ Wire Jumpers

283
Insert schematic components

Use the Insert Component tool to insert a component into the drawing.

1 Click the Insert Component tool.

2 In the Insert Component dialog box, select the starting orient-

ation for the component: horizontal or vertical.

3 (Optional) If you want to turn off the Insert/Edit Component

dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing select
No Edit dialog.

4 (Optional) If you want to insert the component, untagged (for

example, without assigning a unique Component Tag) select
No Tag. The untagged value that displays is the component's
TAG1/TAG2 default value.

5 Select the component to insert (such as Push Buttons ➤ Push

Button N.O.) Select an icon picture or the component type
from the left-hand list.
The menu's right-hand column is the Dyna-stack. It displays
the last six components inserted during the current editing
session. Click Previous to display the last submenu from which
a component was inserted or Used to display a list of recently
inserted components.

6 Specify the insertion point in the drawing.

The orientation of the symbol tries to match the underlying
wire. The wire breaks automatically if the symbol lands on it.

7 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, annotate the

component.

8 Click OK.

Insert component
This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom
menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon
Menu Paths section of the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box.
Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the project name

284 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 and select Properties. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu.
The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.env." Add entry
"WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout
icon menu.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component or Components ➤ Multiple Insert
➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).

NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or
P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable
markers; and saved circuits.

Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure.
The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just
above the menu tree structure.

Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.

■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the
current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the
main menu is selected in the Menu tree view.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview
window and Recently Used window. The current view option
is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with
text, Icon only or List view.

Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*.dat).
The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus
defined in the .dat file.

Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the
menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure.

Insert schematic components | 285

 Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions
based on the icon properties as defined by the *.dat file:
■ Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing
■ Executes a command
■ Displays a submenu

NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name
and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information.

Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing
session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list
follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window
(icon only, icon with text or list view) and the total number of
icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit
box.

Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list
box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10.

Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This is

opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation.

No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting
symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click
the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.

No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique

Component Tag). The untagged value that displays is the com-
ponent's TAG1/TAG2 default value. To add component detail
later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component
to edit.

Always display previously used Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open
menu the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a
push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you
open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu
displays by default.

286 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to
the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog
box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the
drawing editing session ends.

Scale panel Specifies the footprint insertion scale. This defaults to the value
set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.
Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing
editing session ends.

Type it Manually type in the component block to insert.

Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert.

Right-click menus

Options for the Menu tree structure view

Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view
to display the following options:

■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus.

■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or

submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the
Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.

Options for the Symbol Preview window

Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display
the following options:

■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and
Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check
mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view.

■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view
the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name, image, block names
and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties.

Insert schematic components | 287

 Pneumatic, Hydraulic and P&ID icon menus

The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type
(pneumatic, hydraulic or P&ID). The Insert Pneumatic Component, Insert
Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed on the
Extra Library toolbar.

Insert Pneumatic Component

Insert Hydraulic Component

Insert P&ID Component

Insert/edit component
NOTE While inserting a component for the first time, you establish its tag definition
inside the project. To edit this newly defined component that could potentially
reference other components found on different drawing files in the project, the
relationship must be established prior to editing. The steps to link the new
component with related components are: 1) Insert a new component and change
the component tag as needed; 2) Click OK and insert the component on the
drawing; 3) Right-click the component and select Edit Component; 4) Change
the description, catalog data and so on as needed; 5) Click OK. In the Update
Related Components dialog box, click Yes-Update to update the related
components with your changes or click Skip to just update the component you
edited.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and specify
the insertion point on the drawing.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component. Select the component type to insert
and specify the insertion point on the drawing.

288 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Access:

Click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit.
Click Components ➤ Edit Component and select the component to edit.

You can go back to any component at any time and make changes.

NOTE Some options may not be available depending on whether you are inserting
a single component or multiple components. To insert multiple components, click
Components ➤ Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).

Component Tag

Any existing tags appear in the edit box. To define the component tag, edit
the existing tag or type a specific tag in the edit box. Select Fixed if you don't
want this tag to be updated on a retag.
If you enter an existing component tag during the insert/edit process, a
warning dialog box displays. (Turn off the warning in the Project Properties
➤ Project Settings dialog box. This temporarily disables the warning dialog
box for the current session of AutoCAD Electrical). It alerts you of the
duplication and suggests alternative tag names based on the user-defined
format. You can select whether to use the duplicated tag or use a new tag that
is suggested (or you can type in a new tag).

NOTE An error log file is created for every project regardless of whether you chose
to display the real-time warning dialog or not. The real-time warning is saved in
the log file named "<project_name>_error.log" and is saved in the User
subdirectory.

Use PLC Address Searches for a wire connection to a nearby PLC I/O address and,
if found, uses the PLC address number in the component's tag
name.

Tags Used Lists any component (panel or schematic) tag names in the same
family as the current component. Select a tag from the list to
copy, or to increment for this new component.

Insert schematic components | 289

External List Assigns a tag from an external list file. You can reference an ASCII
text file in comma or space delimited format to help annotate
the component's description, tag, catalog, and other information.

Options Substitutes a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format.
Enter a tag format override in the edit box. Retag Component
uses this override format value to calculate a new tag for the se-
lected component.

Catalog Data

You can do a drawing-wide or project-wide listing of similar components with

their catalog assignments. During your editing session, the last MFG / CAT /
ASSYCODE assignment for each component type you insert into your wiring
diagram is remembered. When you insert another component of that type,
the previous component's catalog assignment is set as the default (assuming
a previous one was made during the current editing session).

Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the component. Enter a value
or select one from the Catalog lookup.

Catalog Lists the catalog number for the component. Enter a value or se-
lect one from the Catalog lookup.

Assembly Lists the assembly code for the component. The Assembly code
is used to link multiple part numbers together.

Item Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each component. The

tag value can be manually typed in the edit box.

Count Specifies the quantity number for the part number (blank=1).
This value gets inserted into a BOM report's "SUBQTY" column.

Lookup Opens the component's catalog database from which you can
manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values.
Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the
selected component. Database queries are set up in the 3 lists
across the top of the dialog with the database hits listed in the
dialog's main window.

290 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Previous Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected
component and returns the component values. You can then
make your catalog assignment by picking from the dialog list.

Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the current
drawing.

Project Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the project.
You can search in the active project, another project, or an extern-
al file.
■ Active project: All the drawings in the current project are
scanned and the results are listed in a dialog box. Select from
the list to assign your new component with a catalog number
that is consistent with other similar components in the pro-
ject.
■ Other project: Scans each listed drawing in a previous project
for the target component type and returns the catalog inform-
ation in a subdialog box. Make your catalog assignment by
picking from the dialog list.
■ External file: You can pull catalog assignments from a gen-
eric ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a
spreadsheet or database program. A dialog box displays the
contents of the selected text file. Find and highlight the ap-
propriate entry. AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from
the file and breaks it into its component parts. These are dis-
played in the left-hand dialog list. For each relevant item,
highlight it, and then pick the appropriate category button
in the center column. The highlighted item is transferred to
the corresponding category (and then to the Insert/Edit dialog
box once OK is clicked).

Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected
component. You can add up to 99 part numbers to any compon-
ent. These multiple BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly
part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various
BOM and component reports.

Catalog Check Displays what the selected item will look like in a Bill of Material
template.

Insert schematic components | 291

 Ratings

Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings
attributes on a component. Select Defaults to display a list of default values.

NOTE If Ratings is grayed out, the component you are editing does not carry
rating attributes.

Description

Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered.

Drawing Displays a list of descriptions found in the current drawing so you

can pick similar descriptions to edit.

Project Displays a list of descriptions found in the project so you can pick
similar descriptions to edit.

Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can select standard descrip-
tions.

Pick Picks a description from a component on the current drawing.

If a symbol does not have the DESC1-3 attributes, the description edit boxes
are dimmed. If you want to put descriptions on fuse symbols (or other symbols
without these attributes), open the fuse library symbols in AutoCAD Electrical
and add the DESC1, DESC2, and DESC3 attribute definitions. Fuse symbol file
names are HFU*.dwg and VFU*.dwg.

Cross-Reference

Component override Overrides the drawing's WD_M block settings with com-
ponent-specific cross-reference settings.
Click Setup to manually edit the component cross-reference
settings.

Reference NO/ Reference NC A pin list database table is consulted when a part number
is added or an existing part number is changed on a parent
symbol. If a match on the part number's Manufacturer,
Catalog, and Assembly values in the database table is found,

292 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 the associated contact count and pin number information
is retrieved and placed on the parent component.
Click NO/NC Setup to view or manually edit pin list data
values.

Installation Code

Changes the installation codes. You can search the current drawing or entire
project for installation codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
files is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned. Select from
the list to automatically update the component with the installation code.
Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you
can create location-specific BOM and component lists later.

Location Code

Changes the location code(s). You can search the current drawing or entire
project for location codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
file is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned. Select from the
list to automatically update the component with the location code.
Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can
extract cable from/to reports and location-specific BOM reports later. (For
example, BOM for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables.)

Show/Edit Miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Pins

Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the component.
For Connectors: Once a connector is inserted onto the drawing file's block
definition, you can edit the connector pins found inside of the connector.
Click List to display the Connector Pin Numbers in Use dialog box where you
can edit the pin numbers and descriptions.

Switch Positions

Labels the positions of a selector switch.

Insert schematic components | 293

 OK-Repeat

(not available when editing components) Inserts the new component onto
the drawing and then inserts another 'just like' component.

Insert/edit component: IEC

This Insert/Edit Component dialog box is for working in IEC mode. If you are
working in JIC mode, the dialog box displays differently.

NOTE While inserting a component for the first time you establish its tag definition
inside of the project. To edit this newly defined component that could potentially
reference other components found on different drawing files in the project, the
relationship must be established prior to editing. The steps to link the new
component with related components are: 1) Insert a new component and change
the component tag as desired; 2) Click OK and insert the component on the
drawing; 3) Right-click the component and select Edit Component; 4) Change
the description, catalog data and so on as needed; 5) Click OK. In the Update
Related Components dialog box, click Yes-Update to update the related
components with your changes or click Skip to just update the component you
edited.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and specify
the insertion point on the drawing.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component. Select the component type to insert
and specify the insertion point on the drawing.
Click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit.
Click Components ➤ Edit Component and select the component to edit.

You can go back to any component at any time and make changes.

NOTE Some options may not be available depending on whether you are inserting
a single component or multiple components. To insert multiple components,
select Components ➤ Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).

Installation

Changes the installation codes. You can search the current drawing or entire
project for installation codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing

294 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 file is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned. Select from
the list to automatically update the component with the installation code.
Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you
can create location-specific BOM and component lists later.

Location

Changes the location codes. You can search the current drawing or entire
project for location codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
files is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned. Select from
the list to automatically update the component with the location code.
Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can
extract cable from/to reports and location-specific BOM reports later. (For
example, BOM for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables.)

Component Tag

Any existing tags appear in the edit box. To define the component tag, edit
the existing tag or type a specific tag in the edit box. Select Fixed if you don't
want this tag to be updated on a retag.
If you enter an existing component tag during the insert/edit process, a
warning dialog box displays. This alerts you of the duplication and suggests
alternative tag names based on the user-defined format. You can select whether
to use the duplicated tag or use a new tag that is suggested (or you can type
in a new tag).

NOTE The combined value of the component tag, installation code and installation
code is used for error checking in IEC mode.

Use PLC Address Searches for a wire connection to a nearby PLC I/O address
and, if found, uses the PLC address number in the compon-
ent's tag name.

Tags Used Lists any component (panel or schematic) tag names in the
same family as the current component. Select a tag from
the list to copy, or to increment for this new component.

External List Assigns a tag from an external list file.

Insert schematic components | 295

Options Substitutes a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag
format. Enter a tag format override in the edit box. Retag
Component uses this override format value to calculate a
new tag for the selected component.

Description

Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered.

Drawing Displays a list of descriptions found in the current drawing so you

can pick similar descriptions to edit.

Project Displays a list of descriptions found in the project so you can pick
similar descriptions to edit.

Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can quickly pick standard
descriptions.

Pick Picks a description from a component on the current drawing.

Catalog Data

You can do a drawing-wide or project-wide listing of similar components with

their catalog assignments. During your editing session, the last MFG / CAT /
ASSYCODE assignment for each component type you insert into your wiring
diagram is remembered. When you insert another component of that type,
the previous component's catalog assignment is set as the default (assuming
a previous one was made during the current editing session).

Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the component. Enter

a value or select one from the Catalog lookup.

Catalog Lists the catalog number for the component. Enter a value
or select one from the Catalog lookup.

Assembly Lists the assembly code for the component. The Assembly
code is used to link multiple part numbers together.

296 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Item Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each component.
The tag value can be manually typed in the edit box.

Count Specifies the quantity number for the part number

(blank=1). This value gets inserted into a BOM report's
"SUBQTY" column.

Lookup Opens the component's catalog database from which you

can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog
values. Search the database for a specific catalog item to
assign to the selected component. Database queries are
set up in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog box with
the database hits listed in the dialog box's main window.

Previous Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selec-

ted component and returns the component values.

Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the
current drawing.

Project Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the
project.

Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selec-
ted component. You can add up to 10 part numbers to
any component. These multiple BOM part numbers appear
as subassembly part numbers to the main catalog part
number in the various BOM and component reports.

Catalog Check Displays what the selected item will look like in a Bill of
Material template.

Cross-Reference

Component override Overrides the drawing's WD_M block settings with com-
ponent-specific cross-reference settings.
Click Setup to manually edit the component cross-reference
settings.

Insert schematic components | 297

Reference NO/ Reference NC A pin list database table is consulted when a part number
is added or an existing part number is changed on a parent
symbol. If a match on the part number's Manufacturer,
Catalog, and Assembly values in the database table is found,
the associated contact count and pin number information
is retrieved and placed on the parent component.
Click NO/NC Setup to view or manually edit pin list data
values.

Ratings

Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings
attributes on a component. Select Defaults to display a list of default values.

NOTE If Ratings is unavailable, the component you are editing does not carry
rating attributes.

Show/Edit Miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Pins

Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the component.
For Connectors: Once a connector is inserted onto the drawing file's block
definition, you can edit the connector pins found inside of the connector.

Pins Displays pairs of pins in the first column, the plug pin values in the
second column, and the receptacle pin values in the last column.

Edit Enter a new pin number value in the edit boxes or click the arrows
to either increase or decrease both plug and receptacle values by one.

List Lists all of the pins previously used in the project and the next available
pin assignment that can be used.

Multiple bill of material information

This tool allows you to insert or edit extra catalog part numbers on to the
currently selected component or footprint. You can add up to 99 additional

298 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 part numbers to any schematic or panel component on-the-fly. These multiple
BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly part numbers to the main catalog
part number in the various BOM and component reports.

Access:

On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog

box, Catalog Data section, click Multiple Catalog.

NOTE You can also access this dialog by clicking Multiple Catalog on the Copy
Catalog Assignment dialog box (Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤
Copy Catalog Assignment)

The additional catalog part numbers are saved on the symbol as

MFGn/CATn/ASSYCODEn attribute values where "n" is the sequential code
value "01" through "10" selected in the top list box. If these attributes are not
present on the symbols, AutoCAD Electrical saves the information as Extended
Entity Data (Xdata) on the symbol's block insert.

Sequential code

Adds up to 99 extra part numbers (in addition to the main catalog part
number). Pick which one you want to add or inspect/edit. Click the list button
to show all extra part numbers carried on the component.

Catalog Data

Specifies the catalog part number information such as the manufacturer and
catalog number.

Count

Specifies the quantity number for the extra part number (blank=1). This value
gets inserted into a BOM report's "SUBQTY" column.

Unit

Specifies the unit of measure, which can be displayed in the component list
report.

Insert schematic components | 299

 Parts Catalog Lookup

Lists the catalog database table that is to be referenced for the description
information for the given Manufacturer/Catalog/Assembly combination. For
each catalog entry you must provide a name for the catalog look-up table. For
the main catalog entry this information is provided on the symbol itself but
may not be there for these catalog entries. Select List to pick from a list of
tables that are contained in your catalog database file or Misc to use the
MISC_CAT table.

Catalog Lookup

Checks for and displays catalog table information in the Parts Catalog dialog
box for the selected component type.

Catalog Check

Quickly performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result.

Multiple catalog part number assignments

This displays the order in which the extra part numbers will appear in the
various AutoCAD Electrical reports. You can add up to 99 additional part
number assignments to a component..

Access:

On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog

box, Catalog Data section, click Multiple Catalog. Click List Sequential Code on
the Multiple Bill of Material Information dialog box.

NOTE You can also access this dialog by clicking Multiple Catalog on the Copy
Catalog Assignment dialog box (Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤
Copy Catalog Assignment) and then clicking List Sequential Code.

To change the order, highlight the part number and click Move Up or Move
Down to move it in the list.

Tags in use

300 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Displays a listing of all component tags found on the schematic for the project.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and specify
the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box,
click Tags Used: Schematic.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component. Select the component
type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit
Component dialog box, click Tags Used: Schematic.

Sort Sorts the list by component tag, drawing sequence,

or description.

Show parent/stand-alone references Shows all parent components for related family codes
in the project. (Default)

Show child references Shows the children along with the parent for related
family codes in the project.

Show all components for all families Shows all devices from all families in the project.

Show all panel components Displays all panel components.

Freshen Makes changes on the current drawing visible in the

tag list and updates the data in the project database.

Copy Tag Applies the selected line to the edited component.

Calculate Next Provides the next available tag (sequence or line ref-
erence number) for the device type selected in the
dialog box.

Panel tag list

Insert schematic components | 301

 Displays a listing of all component tags found on the panel drawings for the
project.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and specify
the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box,
click Tags Used: Panel.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component. Select the component
type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit
Component dialog box, click Tags Used: Panel.

Sort Sorts the list by component tag, installation code, location code, or
sheet number.

Freshen Makes changes on the current drawing visible in the tag list and up-
dates the data in the project database.

Option: tag format "family" override

AutoCAD Electrical provides a way to override a component tag but still update
the reference number portion on a re-tag.

Access:

From the Components menu select, Edit Component and click the Options
button in the Component Tag area.

You can substitute a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format for a
component. Re-tag can then use the override format value to calculate a new
tag for the component. For example, a certain relay component needs to
always have an "MC-R" family tag value instead of "CR" so that re-tag, for
example, will assign MC-R100 instead of CR100. To achieve this tag override
you would enter "MC-R%N" for the tag format.

Component annotation from external file

This tool pulls information from a selected line in an external space or
comma-delimited text file and assigns its text to a specific attribute/xdata on

302 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 the component. The default extension for this file is ".wdx" but can also be
".csv" or ".txt." The file format is free-form.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and specify
the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box,
click External List. Select the .wdx, .csv, or .txt file to reference and click Open.
Select a line of data from the list and click OK.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component. Select the component
type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit
Component dialog box, click External List. Select the .wdx, .csv, or .txt file to
reference and click Open. Select a line of data from the list and click OK.

Select a value from the list of data elements on the left, then click one of the
buttons next to the attribute name to assign the value to.

Overwrite Overwrites the existing value in the edit box with the selected value.

Add Adds the selected value to the edit box. The value is appended to
any existing value.

Descriptions
Standard Description lists can be created in ASCII text files with a .WDD file
extension. You may create project related list, component family lists, a generic
list, or any type of description list.

Access:

Click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit. Click Defaults
in the Description section of the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.
From the Components menu, select Edit Component and select the component
to edit. Click Defaults in the Description section of the Insert/Edit Component
dialog box.

Highlight an entry from the list and click OK, or click Pick File to select a
different file and description list.

Descriptions panel Displays the values for the description file.

Insert schematic components | 303

Pick File Selects a different file and description list.

Language Displays the Language Database file (WD_LANG1.MDB) for the

AutoCAD Electrical Language Conversion tool.

Project Displays a project .wdd file (if not already displayed).

Family Displays a family .wdd file (if not already displayed). For example,
if the component has the family code “PB” for pushbuttons and
a file called PB.WDD exists, it displays when you click Family.

General Displays a generic file (WD_DESC.WDD) if not already displayed.

Add/Edit Opens a dialog box for adding or editing description text (DESC1,
DESC2, and DESC3) for the file. Enter a value or click Edit File to
edit the file using WordPad.

OK-Description 1 Inserts the selected text into line Description 1. Any existing text
in description lines 2 and 3 is left untouched (i.e. inserting dual
language descriptions).

OK-Description 2 Inserts the selected text into line Description 2. Any existing text
in description lines 1 and 3 is left untouched.

OK-Description 3 Inserts the selected text into line Description 3. Any existing text
in description lines 1 and 2 is left untouched.

Select description from AutoCAD Electrical

language table
Opens the current language table for review. The default table is wd_lang1.mdb

Access:

Click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit. Click the De-
faults button in the Description section of the Insert/Edit Component dialog
box, and click Language.
From the Components menu, select Edit Component and select the component
to edit. Click the Defaults button in the Description section of the Insert/Edit
Component dialog box, and click Language.

304 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 NOTE Use the Projects ➤ Language Conversion ➤ Edit Language Database File
tool to modify the language table.

Select language Selects a predefined language.

NOTE Language matches are not case sensitive, but phrase

substitutions are made exactly as entered in the language
table.

Phrase list in selected language Displays a phrase list for the selected language.

Pick language/Phrase to use Specifies which language to use for the selected phrase.

Pick File Selects a different file and description list.

Project Displays a project .wdd file (if not already displayed).

Family Displays a family .wdd file (if not already displayed). For
example, if the component has the family code “PB” for
pushbuttons and a file called PB.WDD exists, it displays
when you click Family.

Generic Displays a generic file (WD_DESC.WDD) if not already dis-

played.

Select description text format

Specifies how to handle description text in the selected language.

Access:

Click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit. In the In-
sert/Edit Component dialog box, Description section, click Defaults. In the De-
scriptions dialog box, click Language. Select the phrase and language to edit
and click OK.
From the Components menu, select Edit Component and select the component
to edit. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Description section, click

Insert schematic components | 305

Access:

Defaults. In the Descriptions dialog box, click Language. Select the phrase and
language to edit and click OK.

1 Line, 2 Lines, 3 Lines Specifies whether to display the selected description text
in one line or across multiple lines. Examples of what the
description will look like appear next to the options.

Manual edit/override Overrides the selected description text. You can use the
default text or type modifications in the edit box. The "|"
character forces a line break.

OK ➤ Description 1 Inserts selected description text into the component's first

description text line, leaving any existing text in lines 2 and
3 as is. However, if you selected 2 Lines above and click
OK ➤ Description 1, the description text displays in de-
scription lines 1 and 2 in the Insert/Edit Component dialog
box.

OK ➤ Description 2 Inserts selected description text into the component's

second description text line, leaving any existing text in
lines 1 and 3 as is.

OK ➤ Description 2,3 Inserts text starting at the component's second description

text line, leaving any existing text in the 1st line as is.

NOTE These are useful for inserting description text in dual languages.

Pin numbers in use

Lists all the pins previously used in the project and the available pins that can
be assigned to a component. The component tag displays below the title bar
in the dialog box.

Access:

Click the Edit Component tool. Select the component to edit. In the Insert/Edit
Component dialog box, Pins section, click List.

306 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Access:

From the Components menu, select Edit Component. Select the component
to edit. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Pins section, click List.

Pin List The three lists display all available pins to be assigned to the
component. The number in parenthesis () indicates the single or
pair of pins for the component. Pins can be Unused NO Pairs,
Unused Form-C contacts, and undefined.

Sheet, Reference Displays the sheet number and potential reference line number
where the connector definition is located in the project.

Type Displays the contact type (for example, "NO" or "NC"). This is
the value carried by the component's CONTACT attribute. If no
attribute is present or this attribute is blank, then this field will
be blank.

Pins Displays the pin numbers already in use in the project.

Wire Numbers Displays the wire numbers carried on wires attached to each of
the pins above. If no wire connection to the pin, or if the wire
does not carry a wire number assignment, then this field is blank.

Insert schematic components | 307

Insert a copy of a component

Use the Copy Component tool to insert a copy an existing component into
the drawing.

1 Click the Copy Component tool.

2 Select a component from the drawing just like the new one
you want to insert.

3 Select the insertion point.

This inserts a copy of the symbol you selected and then dis-
plays the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, so you can finish
annotating the component.

4 Click OK.

Insert similar components

Use the Multiple Insert tool to insert a series of similar components at fence
crossing points with underlying wires.

1 Click the Multiple Insert Component tool.

2 Select the component type from the Insert Component:

Schematic Symbols dialog box.

3 Select the component from the selection dialog box.

4 Select a point above the first wire that you want to process.

5 Select a point below the final wire for processing, and then
right-click to end the command.

6 With each possible insertion point (that is, fence crossing point
with a wire) a dialog box displays, prompting you to decide
whether to keep the insertion, keep all of the insertions, or
skip to the next one.

308 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 If you keep the insertion point, the regular Insert/Edit dialog
box is displayed, where you finish annotating the component.

7 Click OK to complete the operation.

Insert or edit child component

Access:

Click the Multiple Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert
and select the insertion point on the drawing.
From the Components menu, select Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon
Menu). Select Relay/Contact and select the insertion point on the drawing.
Click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit.
From the Components menu, select Edit Component and select the component
to edit.

You can go back to any component at any time and make changes.

Component Tag

The parent tag value can be manually typed into the edit box or selected from
a drawing-wide or project-wide list of similar components. If the parent is
visible on the screen, click Parent/Sibling and select the parent (or another
related contact). This transfers all information automatically to the child
contact being inserted or edited.

Ratings

Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings
attributes on a component. Select Defaults to display a list of default values.

NOTE If Ratings is grayed out, the component you are editing does not carry
rating attributes.

Description

Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. These lines are

automatically filled with a copy of the parent's description text if the parent
Tag name is picked using one of the methods above. You can enter descriptions
or select a description from a component on the current drawing.

Insert similar components | 309

 Cross-reference

AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross-reference text when the

cross-reference command is run.

Installation Code

Changes the installation code(s). You can search the current drawing or entire
project for installation codes. AutoCAD Electrical does a quick read of all the
current or selected drawing files and returns a list of all installation codes used
so far. Pick from the list to automatically update the component with the
installation code.
Assigning short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" allow
you to later create location-specific BOM and component lists.

Location Code

Changes the location code(s). You can search the current drawing or entire
project for location codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
files is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned. Pick from the
list to automatically update the component with the location code.
Assigning short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" allow
you to later extract cable from/to reports and location-specific BOM reports
(ex: BOM for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables).

Show/Edit Miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Pins

Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the component.

Insert or edit child component: IEC

310 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 This is Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box for working in IEC mode. If
you are working in JIC mode, the dialog box will display differently.

Access:

Click the Multiple Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert
and select the insertion point on the drawing.
ClickComponents ➤ Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu). Select
Relay/Contact and select the insertion point on the drawing.
Click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit.
Click Components ➤ Edit Component and select the component to edit.

You can go back to any component at any time and make changes.

Installation

Changes the installation codes. You can search the current drawing or entire
project for installation codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
files is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned. Select from
the list to automatically update the component with the installation code.
Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you
can create location-specific BOM and component lists later.

Location

Changes the location codes. You can search the current drawing or entire
project for location codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
files is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned. Select from
the list to automatically update the component with the location code.
Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can
extract cable from/to reports and location-specific BOM reports later. (For
example, BOM for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables.)

Component Tag

The parent tag value can be manually typed into the edit box or selected from
a drawing-wide or project-wide list of similar components. If the parent is
visible on the screen, Click Parent/Sibling and select the parent (or another
related contact). This transfers all information automatically to the child
contact being inserted or edited.

Insert similar components | 311

 Description

Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. These lines are

automatically filled with a copy of the parent's description text if the parent
Tag name is picked using one of the methods described previously. You can
enter descriptions or select a description from a component on the current
drawing.

Ratings

Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings
attributes on a component. Select Defaults to display a list of default values.

NOTE If Ratings is grayed out, the component you are editing does not carry any
rating attributes.

Show/Edit Miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Cross-reference

AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross-reference text when the

cross-reference command is run.

Pins

Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the component.

Insert from catalog lists

Use this to annotate the selected schematic (or panel) component with the
catalog number or a component description selected from a user-defined pick
list and insert it into the drawing.

312 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

NOTE This procedure uses schematic tools, but the same procedure can be done
using panel tools.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the

Insert Component (Catalog List) tool.

2 Click the Insert Component (Catalog List) tool.

3 Sort the component list by catalog, description, or manufac-

turer.

4 Select the component to insert.

5 (Optional) Click Edit to make any changes to the catalog re-

cord. Modify the record in the Edit Record dialog box and click
OK.

6 (Optional) Click Add to create a new record. If the new record

is similar to an existing record, highlight the existing record
before you click Add. Modify the record in the Add Record
dialog box and click OK.

7 Click OK.

8 Specify an insertion point in the active drawing.

9 Make any changes in the Insert/Edit Component dialog box

and click OK.

Schematic component or panel footprint

Inserts schematic or panel symbols by choosing a catalog number or a
component description from a user-defined pick list. The data displayed in
this pick list is stored in a database in generic Access format. The file name is
wd_picklist.mdb and can be edited with Access or from Add/Edit/Delete along

Insert from catalog lists | 313

 the bottom of the pick list's dialog box. The AutoCAD Electrical normal search
path sequence is used to locate this file.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component
(Catalog List) tool.
From the Component menu, select Insert Component (Lists) ➤ Insert Com-
ponent (Catalog List).
Click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint
(Catalog List) tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Lists) ➤ Insert Footprint
(Catalog List).

Both schematic and panel layout symbols can be included in the pick list
database but only schematic or panel entries are displayed at a time depending
on whether the routine is called from the AutoCAD Electrical or Panel Layout
toolbar.

Sort by Specifies how to sort the record list. You can sort by description,
catalog number, or manufacturer code.

Add Opens a dialog box for creating a new record. If the footprint block
is not in an AutoCAD or an AutoCAD Electrical search path, include
the part of the path that needs to be appended to one of these search
paths (or you can enter the full path). If the new record is similar to
an existing record, highlight the existing record before you click Add.

Edit Opens a dialog box for editing an existing record. Highlight the record
and click Edit. Modify the record in the displayed dialog box.

Delete Removes an existing record.

Add or edit record

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert
Component (Catalog List) tool. Click Add or Edit.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component (Catalog List).

314 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert
Footprint (Catalog List) tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Catalog List). Click Add
or Edit.

NOTE When you add a record you must indicate if the component or circuit is
Schematic or Panel and you need to indicate if it should be inserted as a block or
exploded upon insert (as you would for a circuit). Then, at a minimum, you need
to define the block name and either the catalog number or description.

Select Schematic or Panel Device

Specifies if the component (or circuit) is Schematic or Panel.

Single block or explode on insert

Specifies if it should be inserted as a block or exploded upon insert (as you

would for a circuit).

Minimum of Block Name and either Description or Catalog

■ Block/Assembly/Circuit: The Block value can be a symbol name or AutoLISP

expression. If the footprint block is not in an AutoCAD search path or an
AutoCAD Electrical search path, include the part of the path that needs
to be appended to one of these search paths (or enter the full path to the
footprint block). Use Browse to locate the block name or use Pick to capture
the block name if it already exists on the current drawing.

■ Description: Specifies the optional comment for the footprint record. This
is for reference in this file only. It does not get extracted into any AutoCAD
Electrical report

■ Catalog: (not used for exploded inserts) The Catalog value may contain
wildcards. Wild card characters include:
* = match any characters
? = match any single character
# = match any single numeric digit
@ = match any single alphabetic character

Insert from catalog lists | 315

 NOTE If the catalog number actually has a character in it like #, then precede
it with the ` char, example "F120#10" would be "F120`#10"

Optional Values

(These options are not available for exploded inserts) Options for specifying
the manufacturer code, assembly code, and text values. If the catalog
information includes an ASSYCODE value, include it in the record to ensure
a complete match. If the same footprint is used no matter what the ASSYCODE
value is (ex: different combinations of contact blocks on a base relay) then
use " * " wildcard character for the ASSYCODE value in the record.
The TEXTVALS value can be used to filter your pick list based on the
component's FAMILY code value. For this to work, the text substring
"FAMILY=<family code>" needs to be somewhere in each line of text to be
displayed. The TEXTVALS field can also be used to auto-fill attribute values
on insertion. For example, if the line includes the substring
"MFG=AB;CAT=1492;LOC=PNL1" then the MFG, CAT, and LOC edit boxes
will auto-fill with the values "AB", "1492", and "PNL1" respectively.

Use the schematic lookup file

The schematic lookup file maps catalog information from a panel component
or equipment list to a specific schematic component library symbol. AutoCAD
Electrical supplies a starter lookup file called schematic_lookup.mdb in Access
".mdb" file format. Within the database file are tables based on Manufacturer
codes. When you select a panel footprint from an AutoCAD Electrical extract
file or select a panel footprint from a catalog lookup file, it carries a
manufacturer code, on the MFG attribute. AutoCAD Electrical takes this MFG
code, goes to the matching table name in the schematic lookup database and
tries to find a match on the manufacturer, catalog number and assembly code
(if non-blank). If a match is found, AutoCAD Electrical retrieves the component
block path/name (or AutoCAD Electrical command list) from the matching
record and inserts the schematic component representation into the drawing.
You must expand and modify these tables to meet your specific schematic
needs. You can do this using tools provided with AutoCAD Electrical or
through the use of a database program that can read/write the Access file
format. You may use the MDB file (schematic_lookup.mdb) or a project-specific
schematic lookup file, called <project>_schematic_lookup.mdb. If the

316 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 project-specific .mdb file is used, it needs to be in the same subdirectory as
the <project>.wdp file.
Lookup file naming convention: AutoCAD Electrical takes the target footprint's
MFG code and looks for a table, in your Access schematic_lookup.mdb file
with that name. For example, if the footprint's MFG value is SQD, then
AutoCAD Electrical searches for a schematic lookup table called SQD;
manufacturer code of AB yields the table name AB.

Lookup file format

All fields contain characters except for RECNUM, which is automatically

numbered in the list for you. Fields may be blank and may use wildcards, with
the exception of SCHEMATIC_BLKNAM. Each record consists of these fields
(in this order):

MANUFACTURER Manufacturer name (same as attribute value)

CATALOG Catalog part number

ASSEMBLYCODE Assembly code part number link

FUNCTION_DESCRIPTION Assigned description text (DESC1-DESC3)

PANEL_BLKNAM Block name of the panel footprint insert

CATEGORY Blank for component queries, 'T' or 'W' for terminal

queries

WDBLKNAM Name used to tie into catalog lookup table (ex. PB11,
CR)

SCHEMATIC_BLKNAM Schematic symbol block name or special insert

command flag

COMMENTS Description of the schematic block name

RECNUM Record number (automatically numbered in the list)

Use the schematic lookup file | 317

 Table query sequence

Queries on this database can be multi-level until a hit is returned. The first
level is a query on the MFG/CAT/ASSYCODE fields. If 0 records are returned,
a second query is done on just the CATALOG field (or the CATEGORY field
if working with terminals). If 0 records are returned, a third query is done on
the WDBLKNAM field. If this fails to return any records, a final query is made
on keywords in the FUNCTION_DESCRIPTION field.

NOTE When querying panel terminals, the second query is on the CATEGORY
field, which contains a 'T' or 'W'. This query determines which symbols to display
in the Insert dialog box. The 'T' displays a list of terminal symbols for terminal
numbers, while the 'W' displays a list of terminal symbols for wire number terminals.

When multiple block name choices are returned, they are displayed in a pick
list along with any comments from each matching record. If a match is not
found or if matches are found and you choose not to use any of them, the
displayed Insert dialog box offers several other options. You can:

■ Pick from AutoCAD Electrical's icon menu

■ Browse to the symbol file (available from the icon menu)

■ Enter a symbol name into the edit box (available from the icon menu)

■ Pick a 'just like schematic component to get the schematic block name

Insert components from equipment lists

Use this to annotate the selected schematic (or panel) component with the
panel footprint or equipment list data and insert it into the drawing.

318 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

NOTE This procedure uses schematic tools, but the same procedure can be done
using panel tools.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the

Insert Component (Equipment List) tool.

2 Click the Insert Component (Equipment List) tool.

3 Select the spreadsheet file to use and click Open.

4 If multiple sheets/tables were found in the data file, select the

table to edit.

5 Click OK.

6 On the Settings dialog box, determine whether to use the de-

fault settings or select a file of previously saved settings.
■ Default Settings: The View/Edit Settings options become available
to modify the default settings. Modify the settings or click OK to
continue with the insert using the default settings.
■ Read Settings: Select the file (*.wde) to read the settings from and
click Open.

7 (Optional) Click Spreadsheet/Table columns to define the order

of the data in the selected equipment list file.
On the Equipment List Spreadsheet Settings dialog box, assign
column numbers to the data categories (such as Manufacturer,
Catalog, and Installation).

8 (Optional) Click Save Settings to save the settings to a file for

later recall.

9 On the Settings dialog box, click OK.

10 In the Schematic equipment in (or the Panel equipment in)

dialog box, review the components by sorting or performing
a catalog check.

11 Select the component to insert on the drawing.

Use the schematic lookup file | 319

 12 Make any changes to the component's scale, orientation, or
rotation angle.

13 Select the method for inserting the component into the

drawing:
■ Insert: Finds and inserts a schematic (or panel) component for the
highlighted equipment list component.
■ Pick File: Picks a file for the insert. Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical
extracted equipment list component list file or extract a fresh copy of
panel component data from the current project's database.
■ Convert Existing: (for Panel components only) Inserts selected entry's
data on an existing "dumb" block insert. This instantly converts the
block to a smart AutoCAD Electrical footprint.

14 In the Insert dialog box, select the block name to insert from
the list.

15 Click OK.

Settings
This spreadsheet organizes the selected user-created equipment list and presents
the list in a pick list. As you pick an item from the pick list, the appropriate
schematic symbol is found and inserted in the drawing at your pick point.
Your equipment list can be an AutoCAD Electrical-generated Component
report, or it can be a list of motors giving horsepower and starter type along
with motor ID and descriptions.

NOTE You can open a comma-delimited file, Excel spreadsheet, or Access database
file for input.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component
(Equipment List) or click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the
Insert Footprint (Equipment List) tool. Select the spreadsheet file to use and
click Open. Click the table to edit and click OK.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component (Lists) ➤ Insert Com-
ponent (Equipment List) or select Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Lists) ➤

320 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Access:

Insert Footprint (Equipment List). Select the spreadsheet file to use and click
Open. Click the table to edit and click OK.

Default settings Uses the default settings for managing equipment lists.

Read settings Reads and uses the settings for a previously saved file.

Spreadsheet/Table columns Defines the order of the data in the selected equipment list
file. Assign column numbers to data categories (such as
Manufacturer, Catalog, and Installation) in the Equipment
List Spreadsheet Settings dialog box.

Save settings Saves the column information in a text file to be reused.

The filename is user-defined with the extension WDE.

Schematic equipment in
This tool lists BOM data extracted from your equipment list and finds the
appropriate schematic symbol by querying the schematic_lookup.mdb. It
inserts the schematic components at your pick point. Each line or record in
the equipment list represents a single entry into the Equipment in dialog box
for schematic component selection. The quantity for a selected catalog number
is not considered when inserting schematic components.
You can select to insert a single schematic component or multiple components
from the equipment list.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component
(Equipment List) tool. Select the spreadsheet file to use and click Open. Specify
to use default or previously saved settings and click OK.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component (Lists) ➤ Insert Com-
ponent (Equipment List). Select the spreadsheet file to use and click Open.
Specify to use default or previously saved settings and click OK.

Sort List

Sorts the list of components. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list.

Use the schematic lookup file | 321

 Catalog Check

Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. This is enabled if the
selected equipment list item contains catalog data.

TAG Options

Specifies whether to use the component tag as listed in the equipment list or
recalculate the schematic tag based on the tagging settings of the drawing.
When a component that doesn't have a tag is selected from the list, this switch
is automatically set to Use auto-generated schematic TAG.

Use auto-generated schematic TAG Modifies the schematic component tag based
upon the drawing settings.

Use Equipment List TAG Maintains the tag as defined in the component
listing and sets the tag to fixed in the schematic.

Scale

Specifies the block insert scale. (1.0 = full)

Vertical

Changes the default drawing orientation.

Insert

Finds and inserts a schematic component for the highlighted equipment list
component. The query of the schematic_lookup.mdb file returns one or more
block names based on data that appears in the pick list. The results are
displayed in the Insert dialog box along with a short description of each choice.

Pick File

Picks a file for the insert. Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical extracted
equipment list component list file or extract a fresh copy of panel component
data from the current project's database.

Insert
This dialog box displays the result of a query on the schematic_lookup.mdb
file. Select the appropriate block to insert from the list and click OK. The

322 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 selected schematic component is then annotated with the panel footprint or
equipment list data and inserted into the drawing. You can also select one of
the methods below to insert an alternative symbol.

Access:

Click Insert on the Panel terminals, Panel components, or Schematic equipment

list in dialog boxes.

Icon Menu Displays the icon menu from which you can select the schematic
component to insert. This is different than the schematic symbols
in the list and should not be considered another way to select
the same components.

Copy Component Copies a "just like" components and annotates it with the panel
data.

Insert from panel lists

Insert components or terminals from panel lists
After the schematic component is selected and inserted in the drawing, all
panel-related information is copied to the schematic. Use the Insert/Edit

Insert from panel lists | 323

 Component dialog box to make any additional changes to the new schematic
component.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the

Insert Component (Panel List) tool.

2 Click the Insert Component (Panel List) tool.

NOTE Click the Insert Terminal (Panel List) tool to insert a panel
terminal.

3 Specify whether to extract the panel component/terminal list

for the active drawing or the active project.

4 Specify any installation or location codes to extract.

5 Click OK.

6 If you are extracting for the entire project, select which drawing
files to process, and click OK.

7 On the Panel Components (or Panel Terminals) dialog box,

select from the list of panel components/terminals to insert
the schematic symbol on the schematic drawing.
To modify the pick list so you can easily find the component
or terminal to select, click Sort List, Display, or Mark Existing.

8 Click Insert.

9 On the Insert dialog box, select which block name to insert

from the list.
If you want to insert an alternative block that is not in the list,
click Icon Menu to select a component from the icon menu
or click Copy Component to insert a component 'just like'
another existing component.

10 Click OK.

11 Select the insertion point on the drawing.

12 Make any changes to the inserted component in the Insert/Edit

Component dialog box and click OK.

324 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Panel layout list ➤ schematic components insert
This tool lists panel components extracted from your panel drawing, finds
the appropriate schematic symbol, and inserts the schematic components at
your pick point.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component
(Panel List) tool.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component (Panel List).

Extract component list for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing
or the entire active project.

Save list to external file Creates a comma-delimited file of the panel compon-
ent data. The extracted fie name is the same as the
project by default (project_name.WD4). You can
display this data in spreadsheet format (open it in
comma-delimited "CSV" format), edit, and then save.

Browse Uses a previous project's panel component list to

create a spreadsheet listing. After the initial extrac-
tion, a list of panel components displays for selection.

Installation Codes to extract Extracts only the information for components with
specific installation values. Once you pick Named
Installations, you can type the installation code in
the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select
from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for components with
specific location values. Once you pick Named Loca-
tion, you can type the location code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list
of used location codes.

Panel terminal list ➤ schematic terminals insert

This report provides error checking between the schematics and the panel
layout drawings. The program looks at the selected drawings, both schematic

Insert from panel lists | 325

 and panel, looking for a match. For each panel component, the routine tries
to find a matching schematic component based on tag, location, and
installation information. If a match is found, then it compares catalog
information looking for any discrepancies.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Terminal
(Panel List) tool.
From the Components menu, select Insert Terminal (Panel List).

Extract terminal list for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing
or multiple drawings in the active project.

Save list to external file Creates a comma-delimited file of the panel compon-
ent data. The extracted fie name is the same as the
project by default (project_name.WD4). You can
display this data in spreadsheet format (open it in
comma-delimited "CSV" format), edit, and then save.

Browse Uses a previous project's terminal list to create a

spreadsheet listing. After the initial extraction, a list
of terminals displays for selection.

Installation Codes to extract Extracts only the information for panel terminals with
specific installation values. Once you pick Named
Installation, you can type the installation code in the
box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select
from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for panel terminals with
specific location values. Once you pick Named Loca-
tion, you can type the location code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list
of used location codes.

Panel components
This presents a list of all panel components extracted from the project's panel
layout drawings. As you pick an item from the pick list, the appropriate
schematic symbol is found and inserted in the drawing at your pick point.

326 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 After the selection of the schematic component and the annotation of the
device tag, all panel-related information such as descriptions, installation, and
location codes are copied to the schematic.
You can select to insert a single schematic component or multiple components
from the panel list.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component
(Panel List) tool. Select Project and click OK. Select the files to process and click
OK.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component (Panel List). Select Project
and click OK. Select the files to process and click OK.

Sort List

Sorts the list of panel components. You can specify four sorts to perform on
the list.

Reload

Reopens the Panel Layout List ➤ Schematic Components Insert dialog box
so you can re-extract data or select a saved external file to use.

Mark Existing

Matches panel components extracted from the project database with schematic
components previously placed into the drawing and marks any existing
components. An "x" displays in left-hand column for any listed panel
component tag that already has its schematic component inserted on the
drawing and there is an exact match on catalog and manufacturer values
between the two. An "o" displays if the tags match but there is mismatch on
catalog and manufacturer values between the two.

Display

Specifies to show all extracted panel data or hide the panel data that has a
matching schematic component.

Insert from panel lists | 327

 Catalog Check

Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. This is enabled if the
selected panel item contains catalog data.

TAG Options

Specifies whether to use the panel tag as is, or recalculate the schematic tag
based on the tagging settings of the drawing. When a component that doesn't
have a tag is selected from the list, this switch is automatically set to Use
auto-generated schematic TAG.

Use auto-generated schematic TAG Modifies the schematic component tag based on the
drawing settings. If a new tag is generated when in-
serting the schematic component, the source panel
footprint is updated with the generated tag. The
active drawing is automatically updated, while up-
dates on other drawings are maintained inside of the
update task file (project_name.upd) for later modific-
ation of the panel drawings to match the new
schematic component tag.

Use panel footprint TAG Maintains the tag as defined in the panel component
listing and sets the tag to fixed in the schematic.

Scale

Specifies the block insert scale. (1.0 = full) The drawing scale is used as the
default.

Vertical

Changes the default drawing orientation.

Insert

Finds and inserts a schematic component for the highlighted panel component.
The query of the schematic_lookup.mdb file returns one or more block names
based on data that appears in the pick list. The results are displayed in the
Insert dialog box along with a short description of each choice.

328 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Pick File

Picks a file for the insert. Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical extracted panel
component list file or extract a fresh copy of panel component data from the
current project's database.

Panel terminals
This presents a list of all panel terminals extracted from the project's panel
layout drawings. As you pick an item from the pick list, the appropriate
schematic terminal is found and inserted in the drawing at your pick point.
After the selection of the schematic terminal and the annotation of the device
tag, all panel-related information such as descriptions, installation, and location
codes are copied to the schematic.
You can select to insert a single terminal block or multiple terminal blocks
from the panel list.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Terminal
(Panel List) tool. Select Project and click OK. Select the files to process and click
OK.
From the Components menu, select Insert Terminal (Panel List). Select Project
and click OK. Select the files to process and click OK.

Sort List Sorts the list of panel terminals. You can specify four sorts to perform
on the list.

Reload Reopens the Panel Terminal List ➤ Schematic Terminals Insert dialog
box so you can re-extract data or select a saved external file to use.

Mark Existing Matches schematic components extracted from the project database
with panel terminal components and marks any existing components.
An "x" displays in left-hand column for any listed panel component
tag that already has its schematic inserted on the drawing and there
is an exact match on catalog and manufacturer values between the
two. An "o" displays if the tags match but there is mismatch on
catalog and manufacturer values between the two.

Display Specifies to show all extracted panel data or hide the panel data that
has a matching schematic component.

Insert from panel lists | 329

Catalog Check Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. This is enabled
if the selected panel terminal contains catalog data.

Last symbol used Displays the last symbol selected through the insert process. You can
clear the selection and go back through the insert process to select
the schematic terminal symbol or you can automatically insert the
last symbol used by not making any changes.

Scale Specifies the block insert scale. (1.0 = full)

Rotate Changes the default drawing orientation.

Insert Finds and inserts a schematic terminal for the highlighted panel ter-
minal. A query of the schematic_lookup.mdb file returns one or more
block names based on data that appears in the pick list. The results
are displayed in the Insert dialog box along with a short description
of each choice.

Pick File Specifies to pick a file for the insert. Select an existing AutoCAD
Electrical extracted panel terminal list file or extract a fresh copy of
panel component data from the current project's database.

Manipulate components
You can manipulate components by moving, stretching, splitting, aligning,
or deleting them.

Delete components

The Delete Component command lets you remove the selected component.
The broken wires are repaired and any resulting instances of multiple wire
numbers now assigned to a single wire network are reconciled. In the case of
a child contact, AutoCAD Electrical looks for its parent on the current drawing
and removes the deleted contact from the parent's cross-reference annotation
(if the parent is on some other drawing then a separate run of the "X

330 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Cross-reference" command is required on the drawing set). If you erase a parent
schematic component you will have the option to search for related child
components, surf to them, and optionally delete them.

Scoot components/wire segments

The Scoot command lets you quickly reposition components and wire
segments. Components stay connected and existing wire numbers re-center.
Pick on the component to slide just the component along it's connected
wire(s). The component's scoot will be constrained along the wire segment.
Scoot works on wire numbers, components, terminals, PLC I\O modules, jogs
in dashed link lines, signal arrows, wires, and wires with wire-crossing loops.

NOTE Components constrained by connected wiring at right angles will not scoot.

Align components/wire numbers

The Align Components command aligns the selected component with a master
component that you select. All connected wires will be adjusted, and wire
numbers re-centered if necessary. You can align vertically or horizontally by
flipping the command with a V or H character and a [space] entered on the
command line.

NOTE The Align Component command can be used on panel layout symbols.

Move components

The Move Component command removes the selected component from its
current location/wire connection and inserts it into the new position you
pick. AutoCAD Electrical uses a rotated version of the symbol, if necessary, as
it breaks and reconnects any underlying wires. AutoCAD Electrical attempts
to repair the broken wires and reconcile multiple wire numbers left over in
the component's vacated position. If you use this command and select on a
panel footprint, AutoCAD Electrical issues the normal AutoCAD Move
command.

Move component attributes

The Move/Show Attributes command removes the selected attribute from its
current location and inserts it into the new position you pick. If you
accidentally pick on the block's graphics instead of an attribute, this move
command will kick into the attribute Display/Edit mode instead.

Manipulate components | 331

 Stretch PLC modules

The Stretch PLC Module command is a very handy feature, especially for PLC
modules. Let's say you have a PLC module and you need to add a couple
components in parallel on a particular rung and you did not leave enough
room between the I/O points. What do you do? You could erase everything
and rebuild the module and then reinsert the components, redo the wiring,
etc. or you could use the Stretch PLC Module command.

NOTE The block name itself is changed to make it unique.

Split PLC modules

The Split PLC Module command is especially handy for splitting PLC modules
once they have been built or inserted. Maybe you need to move the last few
I/O terminal points to another ladder to make room for some other devices.

Manipulate components
You can manipulate components by moving, stretching, splitting, aligning,
or deleting them.

332 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Delete components

1 Click the Delete Component tool.

2 Select the components to delete.

3 Press Enter.

NOTE If you erase a parent schematic component, you have the option to
search for related child components, surf to them, and delete them.

Scoot components/wire segments

1 Click the Scoot tool.

2 Select the component to scoot along its connected wires or

select the wire segment to scoot the entire wire, including
components, along the bus. A rectangle indicates the selected
items.

3 Move your cursor to the appropriate position and click. The

items scoot and reconnect.

NOTE You can run the Auto-Retag operation on the components if they move
to a new line reference, or update the child cross-references only.

Align components/wire numbers

1 Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Align Compon-
ents tool.

2 Click the Align Components tool.

3 Select the master component to align with. A temporary line

appears showing the alignment position.

4 Select the components to move into alignment with the selec-

ted master component. You can select the components indi-
vidually or by windowing.

Manipulate components | 333

 All connected wires are adjusted, and wire numbers recentered
if necessary. You can align vertically or horizontally by flipping
the command with a V or H character and a [space] entered
on the command line.

Move components

1 Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Move Compon-
ent tool.

2 Click the Move Component tool.

3 Select the component to move.

4 Select the insertion point for the move. The component

automatically moves to the selected position.

Stretch PLC modules

1 Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Stretch PLC
Module tool.

2 Click the Stretch PLC Module tool.

3 Select the blocks to stretch using a crossing window or crossing

polygon window.

4 Press Enter.

5 Select your base and second point of displacement.

The exploded blocks stretch and are then rebuilt (maintaining
all the original block information, including attributes).

Split PLC modules

334 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 1 Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Split PLC
Module tool.

2 Click the Split PLC Module tool.

3 Select the block to split. It explodes the block into individual

parts.

4 Select the objects for the new child component using a crossing
window or crossing polygon.
Keep windowing until all objects are selected. To cancel the
selection of any object, press U and select as usual.

5 Define the origin point for the new block. You can enter the
coordinates or click Pick Point and select the origin point on
the drawing.

6 Set the break type: no lines, straight lines, jagged lines, or draw
it.

7 (Optional) Select to reposition the child block to move it as

part of this command.

8 Click OK.

9 To reposition the child block, select a point on the screen to

place the block.

Split block
Use this tool to split blocks or parametric connectors into 2 separate block
definitions (for example, parent and a child or a child and another child).

Access:

Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Split Block tool. Select the block
to split and specify the split point.
From the Components menu, select Component Miscellaneous ➤ Split Block.
Select the block to split and specify the split point.
Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Split Connector tool.
Select the connector to split and specify the split point.

Manipulate components | 335

Access:

From the Components menu, select Insert Connector ➤ Split Connector. Select
the connector to split and specify the split point.

Child Base Point Specifies the origin point for the new block. The default is
in-line with the first set of pins on the split-off piece. If you
do not want to accept the default, enter the coordinates
or click Pick Point and select the origin point on the draw-
ing.

Break Type Specifies the break type: no lines, straight lines, jagged
lines, or draw it. The default is set to jagged lines. Click
Draw to manually draw the break type on the drawing.

Layer Specifies the layer for the child block. You can accept the
default or click List to select the layer from a list of existing
layers.

Reposition Child Block Specifies to reposition the child block to move it as part of
this command.

336 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Annotate ratings attributes

1 Click the Edit Components tool.

2 Click the Show All Ratings button in the Insert/Edit Compon-

ents dialog box.
The View/Edit Rating Value dialog box displays, letting you
enter values for each ratings attribute.

3 Click the Defaults button next to the edit box to display the
list of default values.

4 Select a line from the file to map its values to the available
ratings attributes.
Notice that a single line may carry multiple values with each
value separated by a "|" character. Any text that follows a semi-
colon is considered a comment and will be ignored.

5 Choose whether to select a different file or add a new file to

the ratings defaults file.

6 Click OK to finish the operation.

You may create multiple .WDR files. AutoCAD Electrical will look for a generic
defaults file called WD_RATINGS.WDR stored in the AutoCAD Electrical
support directory. You may also create a project specific file with the same
name and path as the project with the .WDR extension. You may also have
Family specific files named for the Family code of the component with the
.WDR extension. For example, if the component has the family code "PB" for
pushbuttons and a file called PB.WDR exists, it will display when you select
the "Family" button.

NOTE If the Show All Ratings button is disabled, the component you are editing
does not have a rating attribute.

Ratings defaults
AutoCAD Electrical allows up to 12 Ratings attributes on a component. To
help you annotate these attributes AutoCAD Electrical lets you pick from a
list of defaults. To take advantage of this feature you need to create/modify a

Annotate ratings attributes | 337

 text file with a .WDR extension. This file is a simple text file and can be edited
with any editor such as WordPad.

Access:

Click the Edit Component tool. Click the Show All Ratings button, and then
click Defaults.
From the Components menu, select Edit Component and click the Show All
Ratings button, and then click Defaults.

Ratings panel Displays the values for the rating attribute.

Pick File Selects a different file and description list.

Project Displays a project .WDD file (if it is not already displayed).

Family Displays family-specific files named for the Family code of the
component. For example, if the component has the family code
"PB" for pushbuttons and a file called PB.WDD exists, it will display
when you select the Family button.

Generic Displays a generic file (WD_DESC.WDD) if it is not already dis-

played.

Add/Edit Adds a new file to the rating defaults file. Enter a value in the
dialog box or click Edit File to edit the file using WordPad.

Reverse/flip components
Use this tool to reverse or flip selected component graphics and its associated
attributes.

338 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 NOTE This tool only operates on a component with 2-wire connections (for
example, limit switch contact symbol).

1 Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Reverse/Flip

Component tool.

2 Click the Reverse/Flip Component tool.

3 Select whether to reverse or flip the component.

NOTE Components are reversed perpendicular to the axis formed

by the two wire connections or flipped along the axis of the wire
connection.

4 (Optional) Select to reverse or flip the graphics only.

Reverse/flip component
This tool reverses or flips selected component graphics and its associated
attributes.

NOTE This tool only operates on a component with 2-wire connections (for
example, limit switch contact symbol).

Access:

Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Reverse/Flip Component tool.
From the Components menu, select Reverse/Flip Component.

Reverse Reverses the component graphics and the attributes perpendicular

to the axis formed by the two wire connections.

Flip Flips the component graphics and the attributes along the axis
of the wire connection (for example, from top-side of the wire
to the bottom and vice versa).

Reverse/flip components | 339

Graphics only Specifies to reverse or flip only the graphics; component attributes
are not modified.

Swap contact states

This tool flips a contact from one state (open or closed) to the other. It looks
at the picked contact, reads its block name, and checks the 5th character
position for either 1 or 2. It then substitutes 1 or 2 for the found character.

1 Click the Toggle NO/NC tool.

2 Select the component to toggle.

3 (Optional) Type Ctrl + Z to undo the contact swap if you selec-

ted the wrong component.
Existing attribute text is preserved on the flipped contact. If
the maximum contact counts are carried by the parent symbol,
the maximum counts are checked so that they are not exceeded
by the flip.

Check coil/contact count

Using the Cross-Reference Check tool (Components ➤ Cross-Reference ➤
Cross-Reference Check), AutoCAD Electrical first extracts a complete list of
components from the project drawing set. Then it prompts you to select a
component to check. AutoCAD Electrical reads the component's tag, finds all
associated components, and lists them in a dialog. It also displays the parent's
assigned catalog number (if one exists) where you can do a catalog check to
see if the item's description indicates that the quantity of contacts can be
accommodated.

Component reference listing

340 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 The Cross-Reference Check tool displays all associated and parent components
to the selected component.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Component Cross-Reference tool to access the Cross-
Reference Check tool.
From the Components menu, select Cross-Reference ➤ Cross-Reference Check.

A complete list of components is extracted from the project drawing set. The
component's tag is read, then all associated components are found and listed
in the dialog box. A bill of material check can be performed to see if the item's
description indicates that the quantity of contacts can be accommodated.

References

■ N.O. references: Lists the number of normally open contacts assigned to

the selected component.

■ N.C. references: Lists the number of normally closed contacts assigned to

the selected component.

■ Other references: Lists the number of child devices that are neither NO
or NC contacts. These may include pins of a connector, form C contacts,
or general devices that are being referenced.

■ Reference listing: Lists the type, number, location, installation, and

description text for the reference.

Parent Information

■ Manufacturer code: Lists the parent's associated manufacturing code (if

one exists).

■ Catalog number: Lists the parent's associated catalog number (if one exists).

■ Assembly code: Lists the parent's associated assembly code (if one exists).

■ Catalog Check: Creates a BOM description for the selected component

using the parent component's catalog number.
Comparing the description (2 available) with the contact count (3 required)
reveals a needed adjustment.

Check coil/contact count | 341

 ■ Catalog lookup: Opens the parts catalog in order to look up
component-specific catalog information.

Follow signals
Follow a signal for a source or destination signal
Use the List Signal Code tool to follow a signal from a specific source or
destination symbol.

1 Click the drop-down arrow on the Source/Destination Signals

tool to access the List Signal Code tool.

2 Click the List Signal Code tool.

3 Select the signal marker to list. The signal code dialog box ap-
pears. All source and destination references for the signal code
are listed in the three boxed groups.

4 Review the references for the signal code.

5 Click the Surf button to navigate to any of the references.

6 Click Cancel when you are finished reviewing the signal refer-
ences.

Signal code
Follows a signal from a specific source or destination symbol and lists the
signal code references.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the List Signal
Code tool.
From the Wires menu, select Signal Reference ➤ List Signal Code.

342 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 All source and destination references for the signal code are listed in the three
boxed groups:

Previous drawings (sheet/reference) Shows the references on upstream (previous)

drawings.

Current drawing Shows the references on the current drawing.

Downstream drawings (sheet/reference) Shows references on downstream (next) draw-

ings.

Surf Navigates to any of the references.

Follow signals | 343

Insert dashed link lines
This tool draws a dashed line from a component to a "To" or "From" arrow
symbol.

1 Click the arrow on the Link Components with Dashed Lines

tool to access the Insert Reference Arrow - To tool (or the Insert
Reference Arrow - From tool).

2 Click the Insert Reference Arrow - To tool.

3 Select the contact to draw the line from.

4 Select where the arrow endpoint should be on the drawing.

5 Insert a description for the dashed link line in the Description

dialog box and click OK.
The line is a polyline drawn on the layer name defined on the
Component Text and Line "Wire" Layers dialog box.

6 (Optional) Use the AutoCAD Layer command to assign a dif-

ferent line type to the layer.

7 (Optional) Use the Scoot command to reposition any jog in

the dashed link line.

8 (Optional) Use the AutoCAD Erase command to remove the

dashed link line.

Overview of DIN Rails

The Din Rail is generated based on data held in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet
called WDDINRL.XLS. Each row in the main worksheet, DIN_RAIL, represents
a rail type. The Manufacturer, Catalog, and Description fields are used to create
the drop-down list on the dialog box. In addition, each rail type has a
corresponding worksheet named to match the catalog number. This worksheet
defines some parameters based on the number of slots calculated from the
rail length.

344 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Spreadsheet fields

MFG Manufacturer.

CAT Catalog Number.

ASSYCODE Assembly code.

DESC Description used for dialog listing only.

RAILWID Din rail width; distance between the top and bottom rail
lines.

RAILCEN Distance between the din rail centerlines.

RAILCEN1 Distance between the din rail centerlines; used for nonsym-
metrical din rails.

RAILCEN2 Distance between bottom center line and the slot centers;
used for nonsymmetrical din rails.

RAIL2SLOTCEN Distance from the origin of the din rail to the center of the
slots; used for off-center din rails.

RAIL2ENDBASE Distance from the origin of the din rail to the din rail bot-
tom; used for off-center din rails.

RAILLENSTD Standard length of din rail.

RAILLENMIN Minimum length of rail piece.

SLOTOFS Distance from the beginning of the din rail to the center
of the first slot.

SLOTCEN2CEN Distance between slots measured from the center of each

slot.

Overview of DIN Rails | 345

SLOTLEN Length of each slot. Enter a SLOTLEN of 0.0 to generate a
block without slots.

SLOTWID Width of each slot.

CHANNEL Distance from channel line to the origin; repeated for each
channel line.

CHANNEL_END Distance from origin to channel end for each channel.

MIN_SHIFT Length of rail to shift from one piece of rail to the next to
make sure last piece is not less than the minimum length.

NCHOLE Name of AutoCAD block for the drill hole.

BRKT Allow standoff brackets, Yes or No. If No, then the button
is disabled on the dialog. If Yes, the button is enabled and
you can select standoff brackets.

BRKT_NAME Name of AutoCAD block for standoff bracket.

BRKT_MFG Manufacturer for standoff bracket. Added as Multi-BOM

on the created Din Rail block.

BRKT_CAT Catalog number for standoff bracket. Added as Multi-BOM

on the created Din Rail block.

BRKT_ASMB Assembly code for standoff bracket. Added as Multi-BOM

on the created Din Rail block.

WDBLKNAM Name used to tie into the catalog lookup table. Values are
either DIN or WW based on whether the spreadsheet record
is a din or wire way. This determines whether the DIN or
WW table (of the default_cat.mdb) displays when you click
Catalog Lookup on the Panel Layout - Component In-
sert/Edit dialog box.

346 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Parametric building of wire ways

You can create generic wire way records in the spreadsheet (wddinrl.xls) for
parametric building of wire ways. To do so, add the following records in the
spreadsheet:

■ MFG = PANDUIT

■ CAT = Generic

■ DESC = Wire duct, 3.25"x3.11" tall, slotted

■ RAILLENSTD = 72

■ WDBLKNAM = WW

■ MFG = PANDUIT

■ CAT = Generic

■ DESC = Wire duct, 3.92"x1.89" tall, slotted

■ RAILLENSTD = 78.72

■ WDBLKNAM = WW

In the Din Rail dialog box, select one of these records as the Rail Type and
click OK. In the Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box, Catalog
section, click Catalog Lookup. The Parts catalog dialog box now displays wire
ways with Manufacturer = PANDUIT and Type = Slotted. Select a suitable wire
way from the list.

Line properties

There may be times that you want to specify a Color, Linetype, or Layer for a
particular line entity that makes up the Din Rail. You can do this with a few
optional spreadsheet fields. For the 2 end lines, you add 2 columns in your
spreadsheet, each called END_PROP. The first one is for the left end, the second
is for the right end. The format is COLOR colorname LAYER layername LTYPE
linetype. For example, COLOR 9 LAYER MISC LTYPE HIDDEN2. It is expecting
a single space between the values. If you leave the field blank, or leave out
one of the properties, it draws the lines using the current defaults. For the
channel lines, it works similarly, but the columns should be called
CHANNEL_PROP. Put them in the same order as the CHANNEL values. For
example, you want the inner lines to be font HIDDEN2 and the CHANNEL

Overview of DIN Rails | 347

 columns are in this order, 0.69 0.49 -0.49 -0.69, this means the inner lines are
the second and third channel columns. So the CHANNEL_PROP columns are:

■ First column: leave blank

■ Second column LTYPE HIDDEN2

■ Third column: LTYPE HIDDEN2

■ Fourth column: blank

END_PROP Use this field to define the properties for the end lines.

CHANNEL_PROP Use this field to define the properties for the channel lines.

Din rail
Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint (Icon
Menu) tool. Select DIN Rail from the list.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Icon Menu). Select DIN
Rail from the list.

Once the information is entered and you click OK, the Din Rail is generated.
Each Din Rail section is created as a separate block. If you selected Standoff
brackets, each bracket is a separate block. Some AutoCAD Electrical information
is added to each block so it can be treated as an AutoCAD Electrical Panel
entity. The AutoCAD Electrical edit dialog appears for the first Din Rail section
and the first bracket, if applicable.

Rail Type Lists the rail types to select from.

Origin and length Specifies the origin and length of the component. Type
the information into each edit box or click Pick Rail Info to
pick the origin on your drawing and then drag the mouse
to define the rail length.

Orientation Specifies to orient the din rail horizontally or vertically.

Scale Specifies the scale to use for the din rail.

348 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Panel mounting Specifies to mount the panel at NC holes, standoffs, or
none.

Edit schematic lookup files

1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access

the Schematic Database File Editor tool.

2 Click the Schematic Database File Editor tool.

3 (Optional) Click Sort to sort the database fields so that you

can quickly find the record you are looking for.

4 (Optional) Click Find or Replace to jump to the next occur-

rence of the specified text or to replace the existing text.

5 (Optional) Click Filter to filter the listing based on certain

values in the table. After you define the values to filter, apply
the filter in the database editing window.

6 Decide if you want to edit an existing record or add a new one.

■ If you decide to edit an existing record, select the record to edit and
click Edit on the Edit dialog box or double-click the record in the list.
■ If you decide to add a new record, click Add New or Add Copy on
the Edit dialog box.

7 Add or edit the record values and click OK.

Your new record is added to the list. You can also immediately
see any changes you made to an existing record.

8 Click Save/Exit.

Edit

Edit schematic lookup files | 349

 Use this tool to add or modify records in the schematic_lookup.mdb file to
use for mapping panel footprints and terminal representations to the
equivalent schematic component block names.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Schematic
Database File Editor tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Database File Editor ➤ Schematic Database
File Editor.

This lookup database table is a catalog lookup Access .mdb file that can be
expanded as needed. Use either Microsoft Access or this dialog box to add
new entries, edit or delete entries from the table.

Sort Sorts the list of database records using either an alphanumeric sort
or number values. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list.

Find Specifies the value to find and then jumps to the next occurrence of
the specified text. This searches in a specific column or in the entire
table.

Replace Indicates to replace the find value with the new text string that you
specify.

Filter Filters the listing based on certain values in the table. Picking the
blank entry in the list removes the filter for that field. After you define
the values to filter, apply the filter in the database editing window.

Edit Displays the Edit Record dialog box for modifying the existing record
in the database.

Add New Displays the Edit New Record dialog box for entering a new record
into the database.

Add Copy Displays the Edit Copied Record dialog box for modifying and copying
the record to make a new record. You cannot have two duplicate
copies in the database.

Delete Removes the selected record from the database.

350 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Edit record
Edit new, existing, or copied records in the schematic_lookup.mdb database.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Schematic
Database File Editor tool. Click Add New, Add Copy, or Edit or double-click on
a record in the Edit dialog box.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Database File Editor ➤ Schematic Database
File Editor. Click Add New, Add Copy, or Edit or double-click on a record in the
Edit dialog box.

MANUFACTURER Manufacturer name (same as attribute value)

CATALOG Catalog part number

ASSEMBLYCODE Assembly code part number link

FUNCTION_DESCRIPTION (Optional) Assigned description text (DESC1-DESC3)

PANEL_BLKNAM Block name of the panel footprint insert

CATEGORY Blank for component queries, 'T' or 'W' for terminal queries

WDBLKNAM Name used to tie into catalog lookup table (ex. PB11, CR)

SCHEMATIC_BLKNAM Schematic symbol block name or special insert command

flag. Click Command List to add a command rather than
a single block name.

COMMENTS Description of the schematic block name

Overview of user data records

AutoCAD Electrical supports a user table in the project database. You can add
your own application data to any AutoCAD Electrical block insert (components,
footprints, wire numbers, terminals, wire jump arrows). A copy of this

Overview of user data records | 351

 information is extracted and maintained in a USER table in the project
database. This allows you to do queries on the project database file (in
Microsoft Access format) and access all of this user information carried on all
entities project-wide. This data is stored on the entities as invisible extended
entity data. You are free to use this data in any way you see fit.
Examples: storing explicit wire sequencing information, cable or wire lengths,
routing information, storing special parts information, descriptions, or MRP
data, storing engineering notes, setup, or maintenance information, and so
on.
Each application data record that you add to an entity can be up to 255
characters long. A single AutoCAD Electrical entity can carry several hundred
of these records. Each record is tracked on the entity by entity handle plus a
three digit record number beginning at "000". This same information is
automatically maintained, project-wide, by AutoCAD Electrical in the user
table of the project's database file.

Edit user table data

You can add, edit, or remove free-form user data records attached to the
selected block insert. These records are stored in a user database table in the
project database file.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Edit Component tool to access the Edit User Table Data
tool.
From the Components menu, select Component Miscellaneous ➤ Edit User
Table Data.

Record number Lists the record number for the selected block insert.

Data Lists the user data for the record number.

Edit Specifies the new data for the selected record number. Note that
there is a 255 character maximum per record.

Add new Adds a new user data record. A separate dialog box displays where
you can enter the record data and number.

352 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Delete record Removes the selected record number from the database. If no
user data records are found on the block insert, an alert is dis-
played in the dialog box prompting you to add a new record.

Use stand-alone cross-reference symbols

Cross-referencing is based on collecting and annotating groups of components
that carry the same TAG text string value (for example, 101CR). Components
do not have to be of the same family to be cross-referenced, but they must
have the same TAG1/TAG2/TAG_*/TAG attribute values.
Cross-reference data is annotated onto attributes REFNO and XREFNC for N.O
and N.C. references respectively. Alternately, if attribute XREF is present, both
N.O. and N.C. references are combined into a single cross-reference text string.

Insert stand-alone cross-reference symbols

You use stand-alone cross-reference symbols just as you would wire
source/destination arrow symbols but without the wires. Insert a source
reference symbol, and then tie one or more destination reference symbols to

Component Cross-References | 353

 it. These can be on the same drawing or scattered across the project drawing
set.

1 Click the arrow on the Parent/Child Cross-Reference tool to

access the Insert Stand-Alone Cross-Reference tool.

2 Click the Insert Stand-Alone Cross-Reference tool.

3 On the Insert Component dialog box, select the cross-reference

symbol to insert from the Symbol Preview window.
You can also enter the symbol to insert in the Type it edit box
or click Browse to select a symbol to insert.

4 Specify the insertion point on the drawing.

5 On the Stand-alone Source Cross-Reference Symbol dialog box,

specify the unique name for the source/destination pair. You
can select the code:
■ From a list of recently used codes.
■ From a list of codes on the active drawing.
■ From a list of codes in the active project.
■ From a destination cross-reference symbol
.

6 Click OK.

Create stand-alone cross-reference symbols

1 Create a blank drawing file and save it following the library symbol
naming conventions.

2 Copy an existing symbol's .dwg file to the new file.

3 Edit and save the file.

4 Add the file to the icon menu.

354 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Update stand-alone cross-reference symbol annotations

1 Click the arrow on the Parent/Child Cross-Reference tool to

access the Update Stand-Alone Cross-Reference tool.

2 Click the Update Stand-Alone Cross-Reference tool.

The Update Wire Signal and Stand-Alone Cross-Reference
dialog box displays.

3 Specify whether to update the cross-reference annotation

between pairs of stand-alone cross-reference symbols.

4 Specify to update the cross-references for the entire drawing

or one at a time.

5 Click OK.

Insert component
This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom
menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon
Menu Paths section of the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box.
Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the project name
and select Properties. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu.
The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.env." Add entry
"WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout
icon menu.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component or Components ➤ Multiple Insert
➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).

Use stand-alone cross-reference symbols | 355

 NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or
P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable
markers; and saved circuits.

Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure.
The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just
above the menu tree structure.

Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.

■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the
current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the
main menu is selected in the Menu tree view.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview
window and Recently Used window. The current view option
is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with
text, Icon only or List view.

Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*.dat).
The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus
defined in the .dat file.

Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the
menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure.
Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions
based on the icon properties as defined by the *.dat file:
■ Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing
■ Executes a command
■ Displays a submenu

NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name
and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information.

Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing
session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list
follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window
(icon only, icon with text or list view) and the total number of
icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit
box.

356 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list
box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10.

Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This is

opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation.

No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting
symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click
the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.

No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique

Component Tag). The untagged value that displays is the com-
ponent's TAG1/TAG2 default value. To add component detail
later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component
to edit.

Always display previously used Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open
menu the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a
push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you
open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu
displays by default.

Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to
the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog
box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the
drawing editing session ends.

Scale panel Specifies the footprint insertion scale. This defaults to the value
set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.
Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing
editing session ends.

Type it Manually type in the component block to insert.

Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert.

Right-click menus

Options for the Menu tree structure view

Use stand-alone cross-reference symbols | 357

 Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view
to display the following options:

■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus.

■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or

submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the
Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.

Options for the Symbol Preview window

Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display
the following options:

■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and
Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check
mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view.

■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view
the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name, image, block names
and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties.

Pneumatic, Hydraulic and P&ID icon menus

The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type
(pneumatic, hydraulic or P&ID). The Insert Pneumatic Component, Insert
Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed on the
Extra Library toolbar.

Insert Pneumatic Component

Insert Hydraulic Component

Insert P&ID Component

358 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Stand-alone source or destination cross-reference
symbol
You use stand-alone cross-reference symbols just as you would wire
source/destination arrow symbols but without the wires. Insert a source
reference symbol and then tie one or more destination reference symbols to
it. These can be on the same drawing or scattered across the project drawing
set.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Component Cross-Reference tool to access the Insert
Stand-Alone Cross-Reference tool. Select the cross-reference component to insert
and place it on the drawing.
From the Components menu, select Cross-Reference ➤ Insert Stand-Alone
Cross-Reference. Select the cross-reference component to insert and place it on
the drawing.

Code Specifies the unique name for the source/destination pair. This links
each source cross-reference symbol to its destination cross-reference
symbols.

Sheet (for Hexagon symbols only) Displays the sheet (Drawing Property)
value for the drawing the matching symbol.

Reference Displays the line reference value for the matching symbol.

Recent Provides a list of source or destination symbols inserted this AutoCAD

session.

Drawing Displays drawing-wide pick lists of all source/destination codes used

so far.

Project Displays project-wide pick lists of all source/destination codes used

so far.

Pick Picks the matching symbol from the active drawing.

OK+ Update Destination Saves changes and updates the related destination symbols with any
changes.

Use stand-alone cross-reference symbols | 359

 Update wire signal and stand-alone cross-reference
There may be times that you need to update your source or destination signals
singly, drawing-wide, or project-wide. This utility updates cross-reference
information for two types of cross-reference symbols: wire number signal
arrow symbols and stand-alone cross-reference symbols.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the Update
Signal References tool.
From the Wires menu, select Signal References ➤ Update Signal References.

Wire Signals

Update source/destination cross-refer- Updates the from/to cross-reference annotation on

ences each wire network source and destination arrow
symbol.

Update source/destination wire number Makes the wire number tags on the destination end
tags match the wire number carried on the source end
of each wire signal pair.

Stand-Alone Cross-Reference Symbols

Set up the desired cross-reference format in the Cross-Reference Format section

of the Drawing Properties ➤ Cross-Reference dialog box. This is on a
per-drawing basis.

Update stand-alone cross-reference sym- Updates the cross-reference annotation between

bols pairs of stand-alone cross-reference symbols. These
are wire number signal symbols, but without a
WIRENO attribute and do not attach to wires. They
can float. Insert these from the schematic Insert
Component ➤ Component Miscellaneous dialog
box.

360 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Change cross-reference visibility
This tool changes the visibility of the cross-reference XREF attribute. In most
cases the cross-referencing should be visible but there are times when you
may not want the cross-referencing displayed on parent symbols.

1 Click the arrow on the Component Cross-Referencing tool to

access the Hide/Unhide Cross-Reference tool.

2 Click the Hide/Unhide Cross-Referencing tool.

3 Select the objects whose cross-referencing you want to hide

or display. Single selection, window selection or multiple se-
lection is allowed.

4 Right-click to end the selection and apply the command.

Insert a dashed link line

This tool draws a smart dashed line between stacked contacts of a multicontact
component. When the dashed link line inserts, the TAG2 and DESC attributes
of the 2nd through nth components you select for linking automatically flip
to invisible. Use the Attribute Hide command to turn the visibility of the
selected attributes back on.

Change cross-reference visibility | 361

 NOTE This command will not work unless both members of a linked pair carry
X?LINK attributes. See Overview of schematic attributes (page 177)for more
information on X?LINK attributes.

1 Click the Link Components with Dashed Lines tool.

2 Select the contacts in the order you want the dashed link line
drawn.
AutoCAD Electrical changes the contact's annotation to invis-
ible and draws a dashed link line from the bottom of the upper
contact to the top of the new contact. The line is a polyline
drawn on the layer name defined on the Define Layers dialog
box.

3 (Optional) Use the AutoCAD Layer command to assign a dif-

ferent line type to the layer.

4 (Optional) Use the Scoot command to reposition any jog in

the dashed link line.

5 (Optional) To remove a dashed link line, run the command

again, selecting in the same order as before.
The dashed line toggles off and the hidden attribute annotation
reappears.

Overview of cross-reference settings

Cross-reference settings are supported at the project, drawing, and component
level.

Project Cross-Reference Settings Settings are maintained inside of the project defini-
tion file (.wdp). Once settings are created for the
project, AutoCAD Electrical applies those settings to
new, existing, and copied drawings inside of the
project. Ultimately cross-reference settings are written
to the drawing file's WD_M block to be used during
normal operations.

Drawing Cross-Reference Settings Settings are maintained on the drawing's WD_M

block. When the cross-reference command is run,

362 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 AutoCAD Electrical uses the drawing settings to de-
termine the cross-reference types. During program
run-time, the cross-reference command looks at the
WD_M block as the definition for all referencing on
the drawing.

Component Cross-Reference Settings Settings are maintained at the component to override

the drawing's WD_M block settings. During program
run-time the cross-reference command first looks to
the component definition prior to the WD_M block
as the definition for referencing the component on
the drawing.

During normal operation of cross-referencing commands, AutoCAD Electrical

looks to the component for its settings information prior to using the drawing
settings. If the component has settings defined, those are used. In the event
that there are both component and drawing cross-reference settings on the
same drawing, the component settings are used where applied and the drawing
settings are used for the rest of the components.

Set cross-referencing display

Cross-reference settings are supported at the project, drawing, and component
level. Changes you make to the settings are automatically updated in real
time.

Overview of cross-reference settings | 363

 TIP To set display settings for a specific component that are different than the
drawing, use the Copy/Add Component Override tool.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project or drawing

name, and select Properties.

NOTE Selecting the project applies changes to the project defin-

ition file and not the drawing. You must later apply the settings
to drawings to see display changes.

3 Click the Cross-References tab. In the Component Cross-Refer-

ence Display section, select Text, Graphical, or Table Format
and click Setup.
■ Text Format: Displays cross-referencing as text with any user-defined
string as a separator between references on the same attribute.
■ Graphical Format: Displays cross-referencing using the AutoCAD
Electrical graphical font or using contact mapping edit boxes while
displaying each reference on a new line.
■ Table Format: Displays cross-referencing in a table object so you can
define the columns to display.

4 Specify the format for the cross-reference display.

The Preview box displays an image that shows an example of
the cross-referencing format being defined.

5 Select the display options.

TIP See the Reference topics for each cross-reference display

format to learn about the various display options.

6 If you selected to use the Table Format style, specify the table
style and table title. Select a table style from the list. The list
initially displays table styles from the active drawing and from
the table styles drawing. Click Browse to select a drawing with
the desired table style. Once selected, the table style is applied
to the Table Styles drawing.

364 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 To set the table title, select the allowable replaceable parameter
entry from the selection list, enter the replaceable parameter
to use, or enter text for the table title.

7 Click OK.
If you selected to use the Table Format style, the table location
is based on the cross reference attribute position, but you can
move the table to any location on the drawing and the table
will remain in the new position for that symbol.

Cross-reference component override

You can define components to have different cross-referencing styles. The
settings specified using this tool override the drawing properties. Component
overrides are copied when the component is copied; similarly they are applied
to multiple inserts of the same component.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Component Cross-Reference tool to access the Copy/Add
Component Override tool.
From the Components menu, select Cross-Reference ➤ Copy/Add Component
Override.

NOTE You can also access this by selecting Components ➤ Insert Component.
Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing.
In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Cross-Reference section, select
Component override and click Setup.

Select the component with settings to copy or override.

Cross-Reference Format Defines the cross-reference annotation format. One

replaceable parameter, %N, must always be part of
the cross-reference format string. A typical format
string might be just the %N parameter. Use the up-
per section for on-drawing references and the bottom
section for off-drawing references. You can use the
same format for both.

Overview of cross-reference settings | 365

 NOTE If your format includes the sheet number %S
parameter or the drawing number %D parameter,
you must enter the values in the edit boxes in Sheet
Values section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing
Settings dialog box.

Component Cross-Reference Display There are different styles of cross referencing Auto-
CAD Electrical supports:
■ Text Format: Displays cross-referencing as text
with any user-defined string as a separator
between references on the same attribute.
■ Graphical Format: Displays cross-referencing
using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical font or
contact mapping edit boxes while displaying
each reference on a new line.
■ Table Format: Displays cross-referencing in a
table object, that automatically gets updated in
real time, while allowing you to define the
columns to display.

Click Setup to display a dialog box for setting the

display defaults for each component cross-reference
display format.

Remove component overrides

You can apply overrides to a component so its settings override those of the
drawing or project. Use this tool to remove the component overrides so the
cross-referencing commands use the settings for the drawing or project.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Component Cross-Reference tool to access the Remove
Component Override tool.
From the Components menu, select Cross-Reference ➤ Remove Component
Override.

Select to remove the component overrides on the project, active drawing, or

selected components on the drawing.

366 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Project and Active drawing (all) remove overrides on all components on the
drawings while Active drawing (pick) removes overrides for selected
components only.

Text cross-reference format setup

This format displays cross-referencing as text with any user-defined string as
a separator between references on the same cross-reference attribute.

NOTE Mtext cross-referencing can still be used on selected components that use
text cross-referencing.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project
or drawing name and select Properties. Click the Cross-References tab. In the
component Cross-Reference Display section, select Text Format, and click Setup.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the project or drawing name and select Properties. Click
the Cross-References tab. In the component Cross-Reference Display section,
select Text Format, and click Setup.

NOTE You can also access this by selecting Components ➤ Insert Component.
Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing.
In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Cross-Reference section, select
Component override and click Setup. In the Cross-reference component override
dialog box, select Text Format, and click Setup.

Format

The Reference Separator edit box allows you to define any string as a separator
between references on the same attribute. Spaces are allowed. The default
separator is a comma. Use "|" anywhere in the edit box to change the XREF
attribute to multi-line text and add a carriage return after each reference. The
separator value is applied to the drawing settings in the WD_M block definition
or the component to override the drawing settings.
When there are 2 or more references on the same cross-reference attribute
each reference is separated by the specified separator. If you use a comma as
the separator the references would look like this:
NO 412,633
NO 20.3,21.3

Overview of cross-reference settings | 367

 Preview

Displays an image that shows an example of the cross-referencing format

being defined.

Options

Display Unused Children (Contacts) Displays the child symbols that are not referenced
or being used in the project pin list.

Separate Reference Displays each unused child symbol in its own refer-
ence.

Contact Count Totals Displays the total count of all unused child symbols
in a single reference.

Fill Reference With Specifies what should be displayed in the unused

reference position for both Separate and Contact
Count options. If left empty, a space appears where
the referencing would be displayed. For example if
you enter the text "SP" for spares, "SP" displays in the
referencing.

Cross-Referencing Sorted by Line Refer- Displays the referencing in the order that the contacts
ence are found in the project's line reference.

Cross-Referencing Sorted by Pin List Order Displays the referencing in the order that the Pin List
is defined on the parent component. This is sorted
regardless if the pins are displayed as part of the ref-
erencing.

Overview of graphical cross-reference formats

When you select to use the graphical cross-reference format style, the preview
image changes to show you an example of what the cross-reference may look
like in the drawing. Below are examples of the graphical cross-reference format.
Graphic Font Format:

368 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font. Select to use the
JIC font or the IEC/GB/JIS font. The setting is applied to the graphical font
regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties. This setting
is taken from drawing properties if there are no cross-reference overrides
specified on the inserted component.

IEC
JIC

The following example displays cross-referencing next to the symbol in the

graphic font format while the unused children (contacts) are displayed as
separate references. The Fill Reference With value is “SP.”

JIC IEC

Contact Mapping Format:

Overview of graphical cross-reference formats | 369

 Displays the cross-reference format using cross-referencing type values (NO,
NC, NONC).

IEC
JIC

Graphical cross-reference format setup

This format displays cross-referencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical
font or using contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each reference on
a new line.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project
or drawing name and select Properties. Click the Cross-References tab. In the
component Cross-Reference Display section, select Graphical Format, and click
Setup.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the project or drawing name, and select Properties. Click
the Cross-References tab. In the component Cross-Reference Display section,
select Graphical Format, and click Setup.

NOTE You can also access this by selecting Components ➤ Insert Component.
Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing.
In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Cross-Reference section, select
Component override, and click Setup. In the Cross-reference component override
dialog box, select Graphical Format, and click Setup.

370 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Format

In the event where there are 2 or more references for the same component,
each reference is entered into a new line.

Graphic Font Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font.

Select to use the JIC font or the IEC font. The setting is ap-
plied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode
assigned in the project properties.

The JIC image font style displays the cross-referencing using

the JIC style normally open, normally close, and Form C
contact types.

The IEC/GB/JIS image font style displays the cross-referen-

cing using the IEC style normally open, normally close, and
Form C contact types.

Contact Mapping Displays the cross-reference format using cross-referencing

type values (NO, NC, NONC). Enter the format into the
edit boxes.

Preview

Displays an image that shows an example of the cross-referencing format

being defined.

Options

Display Unused Children (Contacts) Displays the child symbols that are not referenced
or being used in the project pin list.

Separate Reference Displays each unused child symbol in its own refer-
ence. This is dependent on pin list count.

Contact Count Totals Displays the total count of all unused child symbols
in a single reference.

Fill Reference With Specifies what should be displayed in the unused

reference position for both Separate and Contact

Overview of graphical cross-reference formats | 371

 Count options. If left empty, a space appears where
the referencing would be displayed. For example if
you enter the text "SP" for spares, "SP" displays in the
referencing.

Overview of table cross-reference formats

When you select to use the table cross-reference format style, the preview
image changes to show you an example of what the cross-reference may look
like in the drawing. Below are examples of the table cross-reference format.
Graphic Font Format:
Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font. Select to use the
JIC font or the IEC font. The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless
of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties.
The following examples display the table cross-referencing using the graphic
font format inside the table style. The Fill Reference With value is "SP" for
unused children (contacts).

JIC
IEC

Contact Mapping Format:

372 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Displays the cross-reference format using cross-referencing type values (NO,
NC, NONC).

JIC IEC

Form C contacts and tables

A typical type of contact is a Form C contact type which is comprised of 2

contacts; 1 open and 1 closed where they share a common terminal pin
number. You can choose to display both of the Form C contacts as 2 individual
symbols, or together as one symbol.
Example where 2 symbols make up the Form C contact
The common pin is on the right-hand side next to the referencing column
and displays in the P2 column of the table.

JIC IEC

Overview of table cross-reference formats | 373

 Example where a single symbol makes up the Form C contact
The common pin is on the right-hand side next to the referencing column
and displays in the P2 column of the table.

JIC IEC

Table cross-reference format setup

This format displays cross-referencing in a table object that automatically gets
updated in real time, so you can define the columns to display. To display
component cross-referencing in a table, you must select a predefined table
style and define the column labels to display.
If new contacts are added to the component, the cross-referencing table
automatically updates. The table location is based on cross-reference attributes,
but you can move the table to any location on the drawing and the table
remains in the new position.

NOTE If you change the table setup once a table has been inserted onto the
drawing, you must run the Component Cross-Reference tool to update the table.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project
or drawing name, and select Properties. Click the Cross-References tab. In the
component Cross-Reference Display section, select Table Format, and click
Setup.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the project or drawing name, and select Properties. Click

374 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Access:

the Cross-References tab. In the component Cross-Reference Display section,

select Table Format, and click Setup.

NOTE You can also access this by selecting Components ➤ Insert Component.
Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing.
In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Cross-Reference section, select
Component override, and click Setup. In the Cross-reference component override
dialog box, select Table Format, and click Setup.

Format

Graphic Font Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font. Select to
use the JIC font or the IEC/GB/JIS font. The setting is applied to the
graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project
properties.

The JIC image font style displays the cross-refer-

encing using the JIC style normally open, nor-
mally close, and Form C contact types.

The IEC/GB/JIS image font style displays the

cross-referencing using the IEC style normally
open, normally close, and Form C contact types.

Contact Mapping Displays the cross-reference format using cross-referencing type values
(NO, NC, NONC). Enter the format into the edit boxes.

See Learn about table cross-reference formats (page 368) for examples of the
format styles.

Preview

Displays an image that shows an example of the cross-referencing format

being defined.

Overview of table cross-reference formats | 375

 Options

Display Parent (Coil) Displays the parent component's reference informa-

tion inside the cross-reference format.

Display Unused Children (Contacts) Displays the child symbols that are not referenced
or being used in the project pin list.

Separate Reference Displays each unused child symbol in its own refer-
ence.

Contact Count Totals Displays the total count of all unused child symbols
in a single reference.

Fill Reference With Specifies what should be displayed in the unused

reference position for both Separate and Contact
Count options. If left empty, a space appears where
the referencing would be displayed. For example if
you enter the text "SP" for spares, "SP" displays in the
referencing.

Table Style

Table styles are defined within a drawing file to determine the size, shape,
style, and font of a table object. There is always a table style on a drawing.
The standard table style cannot be deleted. Various style drawing files that
determine the drawing-related settings are provided with AutoCAD Electrical.
The Table Styles drawing (TableStyle.dwg) defines a series of table objects that
are used in the selection process and then copied to the drawing files.
Select a table style from the list. The list initially displays table styles from the
active drawing and the TableStyle.dwg. Click Browse to select a drawing with
the desired table style. Once selected, the table style can be applied to the
Table Styles drawing. If the selected style does not exist on the TableStyle.dwg
it will be copied to it. When a drawing is referenced the style is then copied
from the TableStyle.dwg.
Click Define Columns to open the Cross-Reference Table Data Fields to Display
dialog box to define the columns to be used in the table cross-referencing.

376 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Table Title

Controls the replaceable parameters and carriage returns. Select the allowable
replaceable parameter entry from the selection list, enter the replaceable
parameter to use, or enter text for the table title. Add a carriage return inside
of the string by using "|" anywhere in the Table Title edit box.

NOTE If the replaceable parameter does not include a value from the drawing, a
blank space is displayed in the table title. If the title line is left blank, the table will
not show the title row.

Update cross-reference tables

The table style cross-referencing provides support for replaceable parameters
to be defined and displayed in the table title. Some AutoCAD Electrical
commands take this into account when modifications are made to the drawing
and the cross-reference table is subsequently updated.

Delete Component If a component with a cross-reference table is de-

leted, the table is also deleted from the drawing.

Component Retag If a component is retagged (retag, move component,

move circuit, edit component) the cross-reference
table updates if the tag is part of the title.

Edit Component If a replaceable parameter is modified for a compon-

ent that has a cross-reference table, the table title
updates to reflect the changes.

Copy Catalog Assignment When copying a different catalog number to a parent

symbol, the PINLIST and contact count may update
and the cross-reference table updates in real-time.

IEC Tagging Mode If IEC drawing-wide Location or Installation values

change, the cross-reference table title updates to re-
flect the changes.

Copy Circuit If a circuit with a cross-reference table is copied, the

table title updates with the new tag values.

Update cross-reference tables | 377

Insert Component If inserting a parent component with a cross-refer-
ence table, the table inserts at the cross-reference
attribute locations (XREF and XREFNO). If inserting
a child component, the cross-reference table updates
for the parent component.

Scoot If scooting a parent component with a cross-refer-

ence table, the table also scoots along the wire.

NOTE If you change the component catalog number or add a multiple BOM
catalog number to the component (both change the Pin List data) the
cross-reference table updates as soon as you exit out of the Insert/Edit Component
dialog box. Additionally, if you modify the Pin List manually on the parent
component, the cross-reference table updates with the new pin numbers and the
modified contact count once the Insert/Edit Component dialog box is exited.

Commands that do not support real-time cross-reference updates include:

■ Component Find and Replace

■ Spreadsheet Export and Import

Set cross-referencing display

Cross-reference settings are supported at the project, drawing, and component
level. Changes you make to the settings are automatically updated in real
time.

378 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

TIP To set display settings for a specific component that are different than the
drawing, use the Copy/Add Component Override tool.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project or drawing

name, and select Properties.

NOTE Selecting the project applies changes to the project defin-

ition file and not the drawing. You must later apply the settings
to drawings to see display changes.

3 Click the Cross-References tab. In the Component Cross-Refer-

ence Display section, select Text, Graphical, or Table Format
and click Setup.
■ Text Format: Displays cross-referencing as text with any user-defined
string as a separator between references on the same attribute.
■ Graphical Format: Displays cross-referencing using the AutoCAD
Electrical graphical font or using contact mapping edit boxes while
displaying each reference on a new line.
■ Table Format: Displays cross-referencing in a table object so you can
define the columns to display.

4 Specify the format for the cross-reference display.

The Preview box displays an image that shows an example of
the cross-referencing format being defined.

5 Select the display options.

TIP See the Reference topics for each cross-reference display

format to learn about the various display options.

6 If you selected to use the Table Format style, specify the table
style and table title. Select a table style from the list. The list
initially displays table styles from the active drawing and from
the table styles drawing. Click Browse to select a drawing with
the desired table style. Once selected, the table style is applied
to the Table Styles drawing.

Update cross-reference tables | 379

 To set the table title, select the allowable replaceable parameter
entry from the selection list, enter the replaceable parameter
to use, or enter text for the table title.

7 Click OK.
If you selected to use the Table Format style, the table location
is based on the cross reference attribute position, but you can
move the table to any location on the drawing and the table
will remain in the new position for that symbol.

Table cross-reference format setup

This format displays cross-referencing in a table object that automatically gets
updated in real time, so you can define the columns to display. To display
component cross-referencing in a table, you must select a predefined table
style and define the column labels to display.
If new contacts are added to the component, the cross-referencing table
automatically updates. The table location is based on cross-reference attributes,
but you can move the table to any location on the drawing and the table
remains in the new position.

NOTE If you change the table setup once a table has been inserted onto the
drawing, you must run the Component Cross-Reference tool to update the table.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project
or drawing name, and select Properties. Click the Cross-References tab. In the
component Cross-Reference Display section, select Table Format, and click
Setup.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the project or drawing name, and select Properties. Click
the Cross-References tab. In the component Cross-Reference Display section,
select Table Format, and click Setup.

NOTE You can also access this by selecting Components ➤ Insert Component.
Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing.
In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Cross-Reference section, select
Component override, and click Setup. In the Cross-reference component override
dialog box, select Table Format, and click Setup.

380 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Format

Graphic Font Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font. Select to
use the JIC font or the IEC/GB/JIS font. The setting is applied to the
graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project
properties.

The JIC image font style displays the cross-refer-

encing using the JIC style normally open, nor-
mally close, and Form C contact types.

The IEC/GB/JIS image font style displays the

cross-referencing using the IEC style normally
open, normally close, and Form C contact types.

Contact Mapping Displays the cross-reference format using cross-referencing type values
(NO, NC, NONC). Enter the format into the edit boxes.

See Learn about table cross-reference formats (page 368) for examples of the
format styles.

Preview

Displays an image that shows an example of the cross-referencing format

being defined.

Options

Display Parent (Coil) Displays the parent component's reference informa-

tion inside the cross-reference format.

Display Unused Children (Contacts) Displays the child symbols that are not referenced
or being used in the project pin list.

Separate Reference Displays each unused child symbol in its own refer-
ence.

Update cross-reference tables | 381

Contact Count Totals Displays the total count of all unused child symbols
in a single reference.

Fill Reference With Specifies what should be displayed in the unused

reference position for both Separate and Contact
Count options. If left empty, a space appears where
the referencing would be displayed. For example if
you enter the text "SP" for spares, "SP" displays in the
referencing.

Table Style

Table styles are defined within a drawing file to determine the size, shape,
style, and font of a table object. There is always a table style on a drawing.
The standard table style cannot be deleted. Various style drawing files that
determine the drawing-related settings are provided with AutoCAD Electrical.
The Table Styles drawing (TableStyle.dwg) defines a series of table objects that
are used in the selection process and then copied to the drawing files.
Select a table style from the list. The list initially displays table styles from the
active drawing and the TableStyle.dwg. Click Browse to select a drawing with
the desired table style. Once selected, the table style can be applied to the
Table Styles drawing. If the selected style does not exist on the TableStyle.dwg
it will be copied to it. When a drawing is referenced the style is then copied
from the TableStyle.dwg.
Click Define Columns to open the Cross-Reference Table Data Fields to Display
dialog box to define the columns to be used in the table cross-referencing.

Table Title

Controls the replaceable parameters and carriage returns. Select the allowable
replaceable parameter entry from the selection list, enter the replaceable
parameter to use, or enter text for the table title. Add a carriage return inside
of the string by using "|" anywhere in the Table Title edit box.

NOTE If the replaceable parameter does not include a value from the drawing, a
blank space is displayed in the table title. If the title line is left blank, the table will
not show the title row.

382 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Use cross-reference exception reports
The AutoCAD Electrical Component Cross-reference tool creates two text
reports in the process of annotating components with cross-reference
information. The Cross-reference report gives a listing of each component
and quantity and locations of child contacts. The Exception/Error report lists
the exceptions AutoCAD Electrical found as it processed the drawing or drawing
set. Exceptions include child contact with no parent and parent relay coil
with no child contacts found.
Surfing on Cross-Reference Exception reports
Click Surf on the Error/Exception Report dialog box. AutoCAD Electrical flips
into surfer mode. Double-click any listed error/exception entry in the Surf
dialog box. AutoCAD Electrical immediately surfs to the appropriate drawing
and zooms up on the offending contact. Click Edit to correct the error, and
then surf to the next one.

Component cross-reference
Cross-referencing is based upon collecting and annotating groups of
components that carry the same TAG text string value (such as "101CR").
Components do not have to be of the same family to be cross-referenced; they
just need to have the same TAG1/TAG2/TAG_*/TAG attribute values.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Parent/Child Cross-Reference tool to access the Compon-
ent Cross-Reference tool.
From the Components menu, select Cross-Reference ➤ Component Cross-
Reference.

Cross-reference data is annotated on to attributes "XREFNO" and "XREFNC"

for N.O and N.C. references respectively. Alternately, if attribute XREF is
present, both N.O. and N.C. references are combined into a single
cross-reference text string.

Run Cross-Reference on Specifies to run the report on selected components,

the current drawing, or the entire project.

Cross-reference Displays the last Cross-Reference report.

Exception Displays the last Exception/Error report.

Use cross-reference exception reports | 383

 Using other dialog boxes to set cross-reference options

■ The cross-reference format is set up on the Drawing Properties ➤

Cross-Reference dialog box. This is on a per-drawing basis and can include
sheet and drawing ID, line or grid-reference location, and fixed punctuation.

■ A project-wide option to fill unused contact references with a user defined

text string is available using the Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager
tool. Right-click the project name and select Properties. In the Project
Properties ➤ Cross-References dialog box, Component Cross-Reference
Display section, select Text Format and click Setup.

■ Real-time cross-reference update can be turned on or off on the Project

Properties ➤ Cross-References dialog box.

Use circuitry
You can save groupings of components, wires, ladders, and other entities as
circuits. Similar to blocks, saved circuits are inserted as a single object. Saved
circuits save time when your projects require common arrangements of
components, such as motor starters or control circuits.
When you use any of the AutoCAD Electrical Insert Circuit commands to
insert a circuit, the circuit explodes. Wire numbers and component tags are
updated according to the current drawing’s tag settings; however fixed tags
are not updated.

384 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Copy circuitry
This tool copies existing circuits and pastes the copied circuit to a specified
location. The components are automatically retagged based on their new line
reference locations.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Copy
Circuit tool.

2 Click the Copy Circuit tool.

3 Select the components and wires to copy. Carefully window

(from left to right) around the circuit, making sure to capture
the connection wires and dots that tie in to the vertical bus.

4 Press Enter.

5 (Optional) Press M to make multiple copies of the selected

circuit.

6 Select the base point and then the second point for the copy.

NOTE If the circuit you copied contains any fixed wire numbers
or component tags, specify to keep them, blank them out, retag
all of the found tags, or keep all orphan contacts.

Move circuitry
This tool moves the selected circuit to a specified location. The components
are automatically retagged based on their new line reference locations and
cross-references are updated.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Move
Circuit tool.

2 Click the Move Circuit tool.

3 Select the circuit to move. Carefully window (from left to right)

around the circuit, making sure to capture the connection

Use circuitry | 385

 wires and dots that tie in to the vertical bus.

4 Press Enter.

5 Select the base point, and then the second point for the move.

Save circuit portions for later use

Use this tool to save circuit portions for later use.

NOTE You can also use the AutoCAD WBLOCK command to save circuits to disk
and then use the Insert Wblocked Circuit tool to insert the circuit.

1 Zoom around the circuit to save so that it fills your screen.

386 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

2 Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Save
Circuit to Icon Menu tool.

3 Click the Save Circuit to Icon Menu tool.

4 On the Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog box, right-click in

the Symbol Preview window and select Add icon ➤ New cir-
cuit.

NOTE You can also click the arrow on the Add tab and select
New circuit.

5 On the Create New Circuit dialog box, specify:

■ Name of the icon.
■ Image file to use. Make sure to select Create PNG from current screen
image.
■ Circuit drawing file name.

NOTE If you didn’t zoom in on the circuit in Step 1 above,

you can click Zoom on the Create New Circuit dialog box to
zoom around the circuit to save.

6 Click OK.

7 Select the circuit's insertion base point.

8 Window around the circuit (from left to right), capturing all

of the appropriate components and wiring and press Enter.
AutoCAD Electrical processes the circuit and saves it to your
AutoCAD Electrical user subdirectory.

NOTE You can overwrite the user subdirectory using the

wd_usercktdir setting in the environment (.env) file. For example,
if wd_usercktdir is enabled and set to “N:\Electrical\Circuits”, the
new circuit and image file are saved to N:\Electrical\Circuits.

AutoCAD Electrical creates and adds a new circuit icon (.png)

of your circuit to the bottom of the symbol preview window.

Use circuitry | 387

 Add existing circuits to the icon menu
Use the Save Circuit to Icon Menu tool to add existing circuits to the icon
menu. You can then select the circuit from the Insert Component dialog box
for insertion into a drawing.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Save
Circuit to Icon Menu tool.

2 Click the Save Circuit to Icon Menu tool.

3 On the Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog box, right-click in

the Symbol Preview window and select Add icon ➤ Add cir-
cuit.

NOTE You can also click the arrow on the Add tab and select Add
circuit.

4 On the Add Existing Circuit dialog box, specify:

■ Name of the icon.
■ Image file to use. Make sure to select Create PNG from current screen
image.
■ Existing circuit name.

5 Click OK.
The existing circuit is added to the bottom of the symbol pre-
view window.

Insert circuits
You can insert circuits you saved using the Save Circuit to Icon Menu tool or
circuits that you saved using AutoCAD's WBLOCK command. After you specify
an insertion point, the circuit inserts and the component tags update. You
can then edit the component tags, run the wire numbering tool, or add or
delete components and wiring. This circuit behaves as if you had drawn it by
hand, one component and one wire at a time.

388 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Insert a saved circuit

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Insert
Saved Circuit tool.

2 Click the Insert Saved Circuit tool.

3 On the Insert Component dialog box, select the circuit you

want to insert into the drawing from the Symbol Preview
window.

4 Click OK.

5 On the Circuit Scale dialog box, click OK to use the defaults

or specify a scale and then click OK.

6 Specify the insertion point on the drawing.

Insert a WBlocked circuit

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Insert
WBlocked Circuit tool.

2 Click the Insert WBlocked Circuit tool.

3 On the Insert WBlocked Circuit dialog box, select the circuit

you want to insert into the drawing and click Open.

4 On the Circuit Scale dialog box, click OK to use the defaults

or specify a scale and then click OK.

5 Specify the insertion point on the drawing.

Insert component
This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom
menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon
Menu Paths section of the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box.

Use circuitry | 389

 Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the project name
and select Properties. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu.
The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.env." Add entry
"WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout
icon menu.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component or Components ➤ Multiple Insert
➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).

NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or
P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable
markers; and saved circuits.

Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure.
The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just
above the menu tree structure.

Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.

■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the
current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the
main menu is selected in the Menu tree view.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview
window and Recently Used window. The current view option
is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with
text, Icon only or List view.

Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*.dat).
The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus
defined in the .dat file.

Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the
menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure.

390 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions
based on the icon properties as defined by the *.dat file:
■ Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing
■ Executes a command
■ Displays a submenu

NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name
and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information.

Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing
session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list
follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window
(icon only, icon with text or list view) and the total number of
icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit
box.

Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list
box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10.

Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This is

opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation.

No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting
symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click
the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.

No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique

Component Tag). The untagged value that displays is the com-
ponent's TAG1/TAG2 default value. To add component detail
later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component
to edit.

Always display previously used Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open
menu the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a
push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you
open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu
displays by default.

Use circuitry | 391

Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to
the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog
box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the
drawing editing session ends.

Scale panel Specifies the footprint insertion scale. This defaults to the value
set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.
Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing
editing session ends.

Type it Manually type in the component block to insert.

Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert.

Right-click menus

Options for the Menu tree structure view

Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view
to display the following options:

■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus.

■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or

submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the
Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.

Options for the Symbol Preview window

Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display
the following options:

■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and
Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check
mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view.

■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view
the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name, image, block names
and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties.

392 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 Pneumatic, Hydraulic and P&ID icon menus

The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type
(pneumatic, hydraulic or P&ID). The Insert Pneumatic Component, Insert
Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed on the
Extra Library toolbar.

Insert Pneumatic Component

Insert Hydraulic Component

Insert P&ID Component

Save circuit to icon menu

You can save windowed portions of circuitry for later reuse. Up to 24 circuits
can be saved at any one time in this scratch menu. You can change the user
circuit menu number (default is 19) by editing this command in the CUI
editor.

TIP To get a good icon picture for the circuit button, zoom in close to the circuit
you plan to save so that it fills the screen.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Save Circuit to Icon Menu
tool.
Click Components ➤ Save Circuit to Icon Menu.

Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*.dat).
The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus
defined in the .dat file.

Use circuitry | 393

Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.
■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the
current menu in the Menu tree view.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview
window. The current view option is indicated with a check
mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view.
■ Add: Modifies the icon menu by adding icons for circuits or
a new submenu.

Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol images corresponding to the menu or the
sub-menu selected in the Menu section.
You can drag icons within the Symbol Preview window for re-
arrangement (multiple selection is allowed) such as placing
commonly used icons at the top and rarely used icons at the
bottom of the window.

Symbol Preview right-click menu

Right-click in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display the

following options:

■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window. The
current view option is marked with a checkmark. Options include: Icon
with text, Icon only or List view.

■ Add Icon: Adds new circuit icons or an existing circuit into the Symbol
Preview window.

■ New Submenu: Creates a new submenu in the Symbol Preview window

and the tree structure.

■ Cut: Removes the selected icon from the Symbol Preview window. You
can then paste the icon into the desired submenu.

■ Copy: Makes a copy of the highlighted icon and stores it in the Paste
clipboard. You can then paste the icon into the desired submenu.

■ Paste: Adds the copied or cut icon to the highlighted submenu.

■ Delete: Deletes the icon.

394 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to modify the existing symbol
icon properties like the icon name, image or block names. The existing
data in the *.dat file is overwritten with your changes.

Circuit scale
This tool allows you to specify the scale and options for circuit insertion.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Insert Saved Circuit or
the Insert WBlocked Circuit tool.
From the Components menu, select Insert Saved Circuit or Insert WBlocked
Circuit.

Custom scale Specifies the insertion scale.

Move all lines to wire layers Moves all non-layer "0" line entities to a valid wire
layer.

Keep all fixed wire numbers Indicates to not erase wire numbers if they are fixed.

Keep all source arrows Indicates to not erase the circuit's source arrows.

Update circuit's text layers as required Updates the circuit's layers per AutoCAD Electrical
assignment.

Don't blank out orphan contacts Leaves the tag ID alone if parent is not found.

Use circuitry | 395

Define wire jumpers

You can create internal jumpers on a selected component using the Add/Edit
Internal Jumper tool. When wire numbers are inserted using AutoCAD
Electrical, these internal jumpers are read and wire numbers are assigned
accordingly.
If you select to jumper two pins on a component together, an alert displays
indicating that internal jumpering will cause a conflict with the existing wire
number assignments. If you click Continue, an internal jumper inserts between
the two pins on the component; you need to rerun the Insert Wire Numbers
tool to reconcile these two different wire numbers now jumpered together. If
you click Cancel, the internal jumper data is not inserted.

NOTE You can keep jumpers from displaying in Wire From/To reports by placing
the jumpers on a layer that contains the substring "JUMPER."

Add wire jumpers from a list

1 Select Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Add/Edit Internal

Jumper.

2 Select terminals from the list.

Drag your mouse to select contiguous terminals or use the CTRL button
to select noncontiguous terminals.

3 Click Add.

Add wire jumpers by picking

1 Select Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Add/Edit Internal

Jumper.

2 Click Pick. The dialog closes. You can select as many terminals as you
want.
Try to select as near the terminal as you can since AutoCAD Electrical
finds the closest connection terminal to your selected point.

396 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

 3 After you select the terminals, press Enter and the dialog displays.
Notice that the selected terminals are highlighted in the list.

4 Click Add to finish defining the jumper.

Change an existing jumper assignment

1 Select Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Add/Edit Internal

Jumper.

2 Select the terminal from the list on the right.

Once selected, the terminals that are part of this jumper assignment are
highlighted on the terminal list.

3 Reselect the terminals to be jumpered, using the Shift and CTRL keys as
needed.

4 Click Update once the appropriate terminals are highlighted.

Wire jumpers
You can add, change, or delete internal jumpers on a selected component.
When wire numbers are inserted, these internal jumpers are read and wire
numbers are assigned accordingly.
If you select to jumper two pins on a component together, an alert displays
indicating that internal jumpering will cause a conflict with the existing wire
number assignments. If you click Continue, an internal jumper inserts between
the two pins on the component; you need to rerun the Insert Wire Numbers
tool to reconcile these two different wire numbers now jumpered together. If
you click Cancel, the internal jumper data is not inserted.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Edit Component tool to access the Add/Edit Internal
Jumper tool.
Click Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Add/Edit Internal Jumper.

Add Adds an internal jumper assignment.

Update Changes an existing jumper assignment.

Define wire jumpers | 397

Delete Removes the selected jumper assignment from the list.

Pick Selects the terminals to add to a jumper assignment. Try

to select as close to the terminal as you can. AutoCAD
Electrical finds the closest connection terminal to your se-
lected point.

Show Jumpers Displays the current jumper assignments. AutoCAD Electric-

al draws temporary lines between the jumpered terminals.
These graphics disappear the next time you do a Regen.

398 | Chapter 6 Component Tools

Component Attribute
Tools 7
In this chapter
■ Edit attribute values
■ Force attributes to layers
■ Manipulate component text
■ Manipulate terminal text
■ Move description values
■ Manipulate Attributes
■ Set tags to fixed
■ Retag components
■ Change to multi-line text
■ Add location codes
■ Update child codes
■ Location Mark Symbols
■ Location box
■ Change attribute
justification
■ Change attribute text style
■ Change attribute text size
■ Modify library symbols
■ Add attributes to blocks

399
Edit attribute values

You can use three different tools to edit a component's information.

Using the Edit Component tool

The standard way is to use the regular Edit Component command and edit
the tag value from the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.

1 Click the Edit Component tool.

2 Select the component to edit.

3 Edit the tag value in the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.

4 Click OK to complete the edit.

Using the Edit Selected Attribute tool

Lets you pick right on the attribute. This tool also works on invisible attributes.
It finds and displays the closest attribute to your pick point on a block insert.

1 Click the arrow on the Edit Component tool to access the Edit
Selected Attribute tool.

2 Click the Edit Selected Attribute tool.

3 Select the attribute to edit.

A dialog box displays and lets you type in a new attribute value.

4 Enter a new attribute value in the Edit Attribute dialog box.

Click Pick to select another attribute whose text you want to
use for the selected attribute. You can also click on the arrow
keys to increment or decrement the attribute value.

5 Click OK.

To edit an invisible attribute: pick on the block insert near where the invisible
attribute is located. AutoCAD Electrical finds and displays your pick point's
nearest attribute. AutoCAD Electrical displays an "x" at the attribute's origin.

400 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

Using the Move/Show Attribute tool

You can use the AutoCAD Electrical Move/Show Attribute command to edit
a component's attribute text.

1 Click the Move/Show Attribute tool.

2 Pick on the component's graphics (not on the attribute text

itself; otherwise it flips into Attribute Move mode). If there are
no graphics to pick on (such as wire number block/attribute
or ladder line reference block/attribute), type "B" and space
and then pick on any attribute on the block insert. This forces
the command into attribute display mode.
The Show/Hide Attributes dialog box opens, listing all of the
component's attributes and their values.

3 Check the Edit Attributes box in the upper right-hand corner

of the dialog box.

4 Select the attribute you want to edit from the list.

A dialog box opens and lets you type in a new attribute value.

5 Type in a new attribute value in the Edit Attribute dialog box.

You can click on the arrow keys to increment or decrement
the attribute value.

6 Click OK.

NOTE You can also use any attribute editing command to edit an AutoCAD
Electrical component's attribute values. For example, use the AutoCAD DDATTE
command.

Edit attribute
This tool lets you edit an attribute's text by picking right on the attribute. A
dialog box pops up and you type in a new attribute value. This tool also works

Edit attribute values | 401

 on invisible attributes. It will find and display the closest attribute to your
pick point on a block insert.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Edit Component tool to access the Edit Selected Attribute
tool.
From the Components menu, select Attributes ➤ Edit Selected Attribute.

Attribute value Specifies the attribute text. You can click on the arrow keys
to increment or decrement the attribute value.

Pick Selects another attribute whose text you want to use for
the selected attribute.

402 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

Force attributes to layers
This tool changes the layer assignment for selected attributes.

1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the

Change Attribute Layer tool.

2 Click the Change Attribute Layer tool.

3 Specify the target layer:

■ Type the name in the box.
■ Click List to select from a list of layers in the active drawing.
■ Click Wires to change to the layer used for wire numbers on wires.
The default layer is WIRENO; this is defined on the WD_M block’s
WIRENO_LAY attribute.
■ Click Terminals to change to the layer used for wire numbers on ter-
minals and source or destination signal arrows. The default latyer is
WIREREF; this is defined on the WD_M block’s WIREREF_LAY attribute.

4 Click OK.

5 Select the attributes to change to the target layer.

NOTE Windowing of attributes is not supported. You must pick

them individually.

Force attribute/text to a different layer

This tool changes the layer assignment for selected attributes.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the Change Attribute
Layer tool.

Force attributes to layers | 403

Access:

From the Components menu, select Attributes ➤ Change Attribute Layer.

Change to Layer Specifies the target layer.

List Lists the layers in the active drawing. Select a layer from
this list or enter the layer name in the Change to Layer box.

Wires Forces the tool to change to the layer used for wire number
text placed on wires. The default layer is WIRENO; this is
defined on the WD_M block’s WIRENO_LAY attribute

Terminals Forces the tool to change to the layer used for wire number
text placed on terminals and source or destination signal
arrows. The default latyer is WIREREF; this is defined on the
WD_M block’s WIREREF_LAY attribute

404 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

Find, edit, or replace component text

1 Click the arrow on the Retag Components tool to access the

Find/Edit/Replace Component Text tool.

2 Click the Find/Edit/Replace Component Text tool.

3 Choose to process either the current drawing or the project

and click OK.
The drawing or project set is scanned to find all the AutoCAD
Electrical components and the current attribute text values.
■ If you chose to process the project, select the drawings to process and
add them to the Drawings to Process list. Click OK to continue the
operation.
■ If you chose to process the drawing by picks, select the components
to process and press Enter.
The Find/Edit/Replace dialog box displays, allowing you
to define your search and replace parameters.

4 Click the Find check box next to the attribute you want to
find.

5 Enter the attribute value or click the List button to select the
value from a list of current text values.

6 Click the Replace check box for the selected attribute and type
a new text string in the edit box.

7 Select to find and replace the exact text value or sub-strings

within the attribute value.

8 Click Start Search to begin the find and replace operation. Each
found match is displayed in a separate dialog box. You can
edit, replace, skip to the next, or replace all of the found values.

An example of search criteria

To change all of the Location Codes marked "PNL1" to "PNL2A" you would:

Manipulate component text | 405

 ■ Set the Location Code find value to "PNL1."

■ Set the Location Code replace value to "PNL2A."

■ Click All so the text will only be replaced if the entire text value matches
the find value.

Find/edit/replace (drawing or project)

This tool finds and replaces component and terminal text values or sub-strings
within those values. You can do this on the current drawing or across the
project drawing set.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Retag Components tool to access the Find/Edit/Replace
Component Text tool. Select to process the drawing or project and click OK.
From the Components menu, select Component Tagging ➤ Find/Edit/Replace
Component Text. Select to process the drawing or project and click OK.

Find Specifies the value to find. Initially, only the Find (F) toggles are
enabled.

Replace Replaces the find value with the new text string that you specify.

List Displays a list of the current text values for the selected attribute.
Select from this list to define your find parameter.

All Replaces the text only if the entire text value matches the find
value.

Part Replaces the text if any part of the text value matches the find
value.

Start search Starts the search in the drawing or project for the find values that
are specified. Each found match is displayed. You can edit, re-
place, skip to the next, or replace all of the values with the spe-
cified replace value.

NOTE This tool does not support wildcard characters.

406 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

 Find/edit/replace component text
Use this tool to find and replace component and terminal text values or find
and replace substrings within those values. You can do this on the active
drawing or across the project drawing set.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Retag Components tool to access the Find/Edit/Replace
Component Text tool.
From the Components menu, select Component Tagging ➤ Find/Edit/Replace
Component Text.

Decide if you want to run the component retag across selected components,
the active drawing, or the entire project.

Manipulate component text | 407

Find or replace terminal text

1 Click the arrow on the Retag Components tool to access the

Find/Replace Terminal Text tool.

2 Click the Find/Replace Terminal Text tool.

3 Select to replace the Full, exact match or a substring match.

4 If you chose to perform a substring match, select whether only

the first occurrence within the text value should be replaced.

5 Define your find and replace with values.

6 Click OK to begin the find and replace operation.

7 Choose to process either the current drawing or the project

and click OK.
■ If you chose to process the project, select the drawings to process and
add them to the Drawings to Process list. Click OK to continue the
operation.
■ If you chose to process the drawing by picks, select the components
to process and press Enter.

8 The drawing or project set is scanned to find all the terminals

and the current terminal text values. The find value is replaced
with the specified replace value.

Find/replace terminal text

This tool lets you find and replace terminal number text values or find and
replace sub-strings within those values. You can do this on a selection from

408 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

 the active drawing, the entire active drawing, or across the project drawing
set.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Retag Components tool to access the Find/Replace Ter-
minal Text tool.
From the Components menu, select Component Miscellaneous ➤ Find/Replace
Terminal Text.

Full,exact match Specifies to replace the text only if the entire text value matches
the find value.

Substring match Specifies to replace the text if any part of the text value matches
the find value.

First occurrence only Specifies that only the first occurrence within the text value should
be replaced.

Find Specifies the value you wish to find.

Replace with Specifies the text string to replace the find value with.

Move description values

AutoCAD Electrical supports 3 lines of description text on schematic
components. If some only have 1 or 2 lines of description, the description
may seem to float too high above the device. You can use these tools to move
the description attribute values up or down to another position.

1 Select Components ➤ Attributes ➤ Push Description Up or Push

Description Down.

2 Select the schematic components to process.

■ Push Description Up: DESC2 and DESC3 are pushed up to the DESC1
and DESC2 attribute positions when blanks are found.

Move description values | 409

 ■ Push Description Down: DESC1 and DESC2 are pushed up to the
DESC2 and DESC3 attribute positions when blanks are found.

Manipulate component attributes

Move component attributes

1 Click the Move/Show Attribute tool.

2 Select the attributes to move and press Enter.

You can pick the components individually or by windowing.
The attributes highlight with a rectangular box drawn around
them.

3 Select the base and insertion points for the move. The attribute
follows your cursor and is automatically moved to the selected
position.
The attributes remain tied to the block inserts.

Hide attributes

Pick on the graphic of a target block insert to display a listing of all attribute
names and values. You can toggle attributes between hidden and visible or
you can edit individual attribute values.

1 Select Components ➤ Attributes ➤ Hide/Unhide Attribute ➤ Hide

Attribute (Single Picks) or Hide Attribute (Window/Multiple).

2 Select the attributes to hide or pick on block graphics to display a list of

attributes. The attribute is hidden immediately after it is selected.
You can window attributes to hide by typing W and [space]. Do a crossing
window (right to left) to capture the attributes you want to hide.

3 (Optional) Type U and [space] to unhide the attribute.

410 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

 Show attributes

1 Select Components ➤ Attributes ➤ Hide/Unhide Attribute ➤ Unhide

Attribute (Window/Multiple).

2 Select the attributes to display by drawing a crossing window around the

attributes on the drawing.

3 Press Enter.

4 Select one or more attribute to flip to visible from the list.

5 Click OK.

Rotate component attributes

1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the

Rotate Attribute tool.

2 Click the Rotate Attribute tool.

3 Select the attribute text, text, or MTEXT string to rotate 90

degrees from its current orientation.
After rotation, press M and [space] to flip into the Move Attrib-
ute mode.

Set tags to fixed

Fix selected tags

Set tags to fixed | 411

 NOTE To unfix a component tag, in the Fixed/Unfixed Component Tag Marking
dialog box, select Force selected tags to unfixed (normal), click OK, and select the
tag to unfix.

1 Click the arrow on the Edit Component tool to access the

Fix/UnFix Component Tag tool.

2 Click the Fix/UnFix Component Tag tool.

3 In the Fixed/Unfixed Component Tag Marking dialog box,

select whether to force selected tags to fixed or switch a tag
between being fixed or unfixed and click OK.
■ Force selected tags to fixed: Select the component to fix. Right-click
to accept the selection.
■ Single edit switch fixed/unfixed: Select the component to fix. In the
Fix/Unfix Component Tag dialog box, select Make it Fixed and click
OK.

Fix tags project-wide

1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the

Project-Wide Utilities tool.

2 Click the Project-Wide Utilities tool.

3 In the Project-Wide Utilities dialog, Component Tags section,

select Set all Parent Component Tags to fixed.
To unfix tags project-wide, select Set all Parent Component
Tags to normal.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Batch Process Drawings dialog, select to process the

project, and click OK.

6 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog, select the drawings

to process, and click OK.

412 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

 Fixed/unfix component tag
Use this tool to mark a component tag as fixed. The tag is unaffected if the
drawing is later reprocessed by a Retag command.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Edit Component tool to access the Fix/UnFix Component
Tag tool.
From the Components menu, select Component Tagging ➤ Fix/UnFix Com-
ponent Tag.

Select whether to force selected tags to fixed, force selected tags to unfixed,
or switch a tag between being fixed or unfixed.
AutoCAD Electrical changes the component's attribute to a fixed layer as
defined in the Define Layers dialog box.

Retag components
Run the AutoCAD Electrical Retag when something changes on your drawing
or project that affects the component tags. This can include revising the ladder
line reference numbers or changing the tag format. Retag redoes each selected
primary component tag, and then updates the related secondary components.
You can select to update a single component, a group of components, a
drawing, drawings within your project, or the entire project. The Tag format
is set up on the Project Properties ➤ Components or Drawing Properties ➤
Components dialog box.

Access:

Click the Retag Components tool.

From the Components menu, select Component Tagging ➤ Retag Compon-
ents.

Decide if you want to run the component retag across selected components,
the active drawing, or the entire project.

Retag components | 413

Change to multi-line text

This tool converts a long string of relay coil or source/destination

cross-reference text to a multiline text entity (MTEXT). The underlying attribute
value is maintained, but flipped to visible. The MTEXT entity is created at the
same XY location as the underlying attribute. The MTEXT entity updates,
scoots, and behaves as if it is an attribute tied to the component block.

1 Click the arrow on the Component Cross-Reference tool to

access the Change Cross-Reference to Multiple Line Text tool.

2 Click the Change Cross-Reference to Multiple Line Text tool.

3 Select the text string to change.

4 Type a new text string for the selected text.

Use the Text Formatting dialog box to change the text style
and size. You can also right-click and select from the context
menu options.

5 Use the grips or double-click on the text to bring up text

formatting options to reformat the reference string into mul-
tiple lines.

6 Click OK.

Add location codes to components

You can add Location codes to components after they have been created or
you can set a default Location code to use for all components that are inserted
into a drawing.
Add Location codes on a per-drawing basis

414 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

First, set your project to use automatic fill for Location values, and then set
the default for the drawing. You have a default Location value for each new
component that you insert (whether field or panel) on the same drawing.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select

Properties.

3 In the Project Properties ➤ Components dialog box, Compon-

ent TAG Options section, select Upon insert: automatic fill
Installation/Location with drawing default or last used. Click
OK.

4 Open the drawing to set the default location value for.

5 Select Projects ➤ Drawing Properties.

6 In the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box,

IEC - Style Designators section, enter a default Location value.
Click OK.

TIP You can click Drawing or Project to select a Location value

that has already been used in either the active drawing or project.

The next time you insert a new component on this drawing,

the Location code are prefilled with the drawing default.

Add a Location code to a saved component

1 Open a saved symbol's .dwg file in AutoCAD.

2 Use the ATTDEF command to add the new attribute or copy an attribute
definition and rename it.

3 Save the drawing file.

The symbol now contains an AutoCAD Electrical Location value attribute.

Add location codes | 415

Update child location codes

A child contact should carry the same location code that is present on its
parent component. If relay coil CR101 is marked "PNL1," then all CR101
contacts should also carry this location code. In addition, if a child component
carries MFG and CAT attributes, they should carry the same information as
the parent.

1 Click the arrow on the Component Cross-Reference tool to

access the Child Location/Description Update tool.

2 Click the Child Location/Description Update tool.

3 Select the values to match to those carried on the schematic

parent component.

4 Click OK.

5 Select the components to update in your drawing and right-

click or type "ALL" to process the entire drawing.
AutoCAD Electrical quickly extracts a listing of all parent
components and pertinent codes from all drawings listed in
the current project and applies these to the child contacts you
selected on the active drawing.

Child contact and panel update from schematic

parent
This tool updates child and panel components with installation, location, and
description values carried by the associated parent schematic component.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Component Cross-Reference tool to access the Child
Location/Description Update tool.
From the Components menu, select Cross-Reference ➤ Child Location/Descrip-
tion Update.

416 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

 Installation/Location Attributes

Installation codes Specifies to update the child and panel components

with the parent installation code.

Location codes Specifies to update the child and panel components

with the parent location code.

Description text Specifies to udpate the child and panel components

with the parent description text.

Description to always match parent Specifies that the description should always match
the parent description text.

Description update only if child blank Specifies that the description should only be up-
dated to match the parent description text if the
child description values are blank.

Rating values Specifies to update the child and panel components

with the parent rating values.

Manufacturer/Catalog part number values

Manufacturer/Catalog part number values Specifies to update the child and panel components
with the parent Manufacturer/Catalog part number
values.

Manufacturer/Catalog to always match schematic Specifies that the Manufacturer/Catalog should al-
parent ways match the parent Manufacturer/Catalog val-
ues.

Manufacturer/Catalog update only if child is blank Specifies that the Manufacturer/Catalog should
only be updated to match the parent Manufac-
turer/Catalog text if the child Manufacturer/Catalog
values are blank.

NOTE If you choose to update the Manufacturer/Catalog, it will not carry to the
children unless they carry the Manufacturer and Catalog attributes.

Update child codes | 417

Substitute location mark symbols for text location
codes

You can insert location marks on symbols that are identified with location
code in text form.

Add a location code to a component

If you try to insert a location mark symbol on a component with a blank

location code, you are prompted to enter the location code before selecting a

418 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

marker. Once you insert a location code, a location mark symbol can be
associated to it and the component.

1 Click the Location Symbols tool.

2 Select a component to add the symbol to and press Enter.

If a location code is not associated to the component, the Add
Location to Component dialog box displays.

3 Specify the location code by typing it, clicking on component

that carries the location value, or by selecting from a list of
location codes used on the drawing or in the project.

4 Click OK.

Insert a location mark symbol

1 Click the Location Symbols tool.

2 Select a component to add the symbol to and press Enter.

3 From the Location Symbols dialog box, select the symbol to

associate with the component and click OK.
The attribute text turns to invisible and the location symbol
inserts at its location.

You can reposition the location marks with the AutoCAD Move command.
If you scoot the symbol, the mark moves with it.

NOTE You cannot assign the same mark to two different locations.

Substitute location mark symbols for text location codes | 419

 Remove a location mark symbol

■ Click the Location Symbols tool.

■ Select a component to remove the symbol from and press Enter.
The location mark symbols are removed and the original loca-
tion attribute is visible again.

Add a new symbol to the menu

The Location Symbols menu is driven by a text file (wd_locs.dat) that you can
modify.

1 Create the mark symbol, save it to the \Program Files

[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\jic1\ subdirectory with a file
name that begins with "WDXX" (for example, "WDXXSQ1.DWG").
Create an AutoCAD slide of the symbol and save the resulting .sld file.

2 Open the drawing in AutoCAD and center it on the screen.

3 Type MSLIDE at the command prompt.

4 Enter \Documents and Settings\{username}\Application

Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\wdxxsq1.sld as the file
name to create.

5 Click Save.

6 Make a backup copy of \Documents and Settings\{username}\Application

Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country
code}\Support\wd_locs.dat.

7 Edit wd_locs.dat with a text file editor (such as Wordpad).

8 Add the reference to the new mark symbol (for example, "Special Square
| WDXXSQ1.SLD | WDXXSQ1").

NOTE You can also do this using the AutoCAD Electrical Icon Menu Wizard.

Location symbols
Location mark symbols are block inserts with block names that begin with
"WDXX". Default symbols are included in the AutoCAD Electrical symbol
library (ex: in JIC1 subdirectory). You can edit the symbol appearance by just
calling up in AutoCAD and modifying to suit. You can substitute "smart"

420 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

 geometric symbols for text "location" code values. The location text is hidden
and replaced by a geometric shape. These are smart in that they update if the
underlying component location code changes.

Access:

Click the Location Symbols tool. Select a component to add the symbol to and
press Enter.
From the Components menu, select Component Tagging ➤ Location Symbols.
Select a component to add the symbol to and press Enter.

Some location symbol options include: Filled Triangle, Filled Square, Filled
Diamond, Filled Circle, 1/2 Filled Triangle, 1/2 Filled Square, 1/2 Filled
Diamond, and 1/2 Filled Circle.

Adding custom symbols to menu

You can create additional symbols if you wish. Follow the WDXX... naming
convention and add to the icon menu as illustrated below. The icon menu is
driven by an ASCII text file, wd_locs.dat. Edit this file to add references for
your own location mark symbols. You can also add additional submenu pages
to the menu in a manner similar to that of the Insert Component icon menu
file.
Example WD_LOCS.DAT file with user added submenus 100 and 101:
**M0
L4
LOCATIONSYMBOLS
Filled Triangle | loc2(s_wdxxt) | wdxxt
Filled Square | loc2(s_wdxxs) | wdxxs
Filled Diamond | loc2(s_wdxxd) | wdxxd
Filled Circle | loc2(s_wdxxc) | wdxxc
Remote station syms | remote.sld | $S=M100
Customer symbols | cust.sld | $S=M101
**M100
L4W
REMOTESTATIONSYMBOLS

Substitute location mark symbols for text location codes | 421

 Main Operator sta | wdxx_mos | wdxx_mos
Wash-down sta | wdxx_wds | wdxx_wds
**M101
L2
CUSTOMERSYMBOLS
Customer power | wdxx_cp | wdxx_cp
Customer furnished | wdxx_cf | wdxx_cf

NOTE You only need to define the L*W row if you plan on using this .dat file in
a version of AutoCAD Electrical prior to AutoCAD Electrical 2008.

Location box
The Location Box tool will draw a dashed box around selected components.
A description can be assigned to the box, and components within the box
can have their location and installation code(s) changed.

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Location Symbols tool to access the Location
Box tool.
From the Components menu, select Component Tagging ➤ Location Box.

Installation/Location Codes

Location Specifies the location code.

Installation Specifies the installation code.

Drawing Searches active drawing for location codes.

Project Searches active project for location codes.

422 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

Pick Like Picks the loation code from a component in the
active drawing.

Dashed Box Information

Description Height Specifies the description height. Description height

can be entered in the edit box or picked from an
existing device from the active drawing.

Box Description Specifies the description text.

Description Insert Point Specifies the description insertion point: top, bot-
tom, left or right.

Drawing Searches the active drawing for location box descrip-

tions.

Use Location/Installation Indicates for the description to use the location and
installation values.

Pick Like Picks a description from a component in the active

drawing.

NOTE Use the AutoCAD Electrical Edit Component to change the Location Box
values.

Location box | 423

Change attribute justification

Use this tool to change the justification of wire number text, component
description text, or any attribute.

1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the

Change Attribute Justification tool.

2 Click the Change Attribute Justification tool.

3 Select the appropriate justification from the list, or click Pick

Master to select an attribute on the drawing that has the justi-
fication you want to use.

4 Select the attributes or text objects one at a time, or enter W,

and then window your objects.

5 Click OK.

Change attribute/text justification

Use this tool to change the justification of wire number text, component
description text, or attributes.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the Change Attribute
Justification tool.
From the Components menu, select Attributes ➤ Change Attribute Justification.

Select Justification Lists the justification choices to choose from.

Pick Master Selects an attribute or text entity on the drawing whose justifica-
tion you want to use.

Once you select your attributes or text objects, each object updates to match
the selected justification.

424 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

Change attribute text style

Use this tool to adjust the font assignment (either project-wide or

drawing-wide) to the text style “WD” or “WD_IEC.”

1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the

Project-Wide Utilities tool.

2 Click the Project-Wide Utilities tool.

3 In the Project-Wide Utilities dialog box, Change Attribute

section, select Change Style and click Setup.

4 In the Project-Wide AutoCAD Electrical Style Change dialog

box, select the font name to apply to text style WD or WD_IEC
and click OK.

5 In the Project-Wide Utilities dialog box, click OK.

6 In the Batch Process Drawings dialog box, select to process the

project and click OK.

7 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, select to process

specific files or click Do All to process all of the drawings in
the active project. Click OK.
AutoCAD Electrical processes the selected drawings and adjusts
the text style WD or WD_IEC to the specified font name.

Change attribute text size

To make permanent changes to the symbol text heights, you should adjust
the attribute definitions on the library symbols themselves.

Change attribute text style | 425

 Use the change attribute size utility

1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the

Change Attribute Size tool.

2 Click the Change Attribute Size tool.

3 Select your new attribute size by either picking on a similar

text or attribute entity or by manually entering the size value
into the edit box.

4 Enter the new width factor into the edit box. Make sure you
click to apply the width.

5 Select to change the attribute name by picking individual at-

tributes, by type, or by typing a specific attribute name.
■ If you chose to select one attribute at a time, select the attribute(s) in
the drawing. The attribute text automatically changes to the new at-
tribute size.
■ If you chose to change all attributes of a certain type, select an ex-
ample attribute and window the entire drawing. This finds and adjusts
all attributes of the same name to your specified size.
■ If you chose to type in an attribute name, type the name in the edit
box. (Wildcards are allowed.) You can include a series of attribute
names to match by separating each attribute name with a semicolon.

6 Press OK and window the entire drawing.

7 Press Enter.

Use the project-wide utilities

1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the

Project-Wide Utilities tool.

2 Click the Project-Wide Utilities tool.

426 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

 3 In the Project-Wide Utilities dialog box, Change Attribute
section, select Change Attribute Size and click Setup.

4 In the Project-Wide Attribute Size Change dialog box, select

the attribute types to change.

5 Enter the text height and optional width factor and click OK.

6 In the Project-Wide Utilities dialog box, click OK.

7 In the Batch Process Drawings dialog box, select to process the

project and click OK.

8 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, select the draw-

ings to process and click OK.
AutoCAD Electrical processes the selected drawings and adjusts
the target attributes to the value you've specified.

Use the squeeze and stretch text utilities

Use the Squeeze attribute tool to compress an attribute to make it fit into a
tight spot (such as between closely spaced components). Use the Stretch

Change attribute text size | 427

 attribute tool to expand an attribute. Each click on the attribute dynamically
changes the attribute's width factor by 5%.

1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the

Squeeze Attribute/Text tool.

2 Click the Squeeze Attribute/Text tool.

3 Select the attribute text to change.

The text is automatically compressed.

1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the

Stretch Attribute/Text tool.

2 Click the Stretch Attribute/Text tool.

3 Select the attribute text to change.

The text automatically stretches.

Change attribute size

Use this tool to quickly change attribute text size when components or wire
numbers have already been inserted onto your drawings.

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the
Change Attribute Size tool.
From the Components menu, select Attributes ➤ Change Attribute Size.

Pick Selects the new attribute size by picking a similar text or attribute.

Size Specifies the attribute size value.

428 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

Width Specifies the attribute width value.

Apply Applies the new size or width values to the selected attributes.

Single Changes the size of the attributes as you select them.

By name Changes all attributes of a certain type. Select an example attrib-

ute for AutoCAD Electrical to determine the attribute's name. All
attributes of the same name are found and adjusted to your
specified size.

Type it Specifies an attribute name for AutoCAD Electrical to match,

wildcard characters are allowed. Window an area containing the
attributes you want changed. All attributes that match the typed
name are found and adjusted to the specified size.
For example, you want to change all the description attributes
on all the PLC modules on your drawing. Select "Type it," and
then enter "DESC*" for the attribute name. Window the entire
drawing. You can include a series of attribute names to match
by separating each attribute name with a semi-colon. (Example:
"DESC*;TAG*")

Modify library symbols

Change library symbol attribute size
Use the Modify Symbol Library tool to change the attribute description size
for library symbols.

NOTE Make a backup copy of the library you plan to modify (such as the \Program
Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic1 library). If the conversion doesn't
give you the results you expect you can restore the symbols, adjust the settings,
and then re-run.

1 Select Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Modify Symbol Library.

2 Select the folder containing the library symbols you wish to convert and
press OK.

Modify library symbols | 429

 The Symbol Library Attribute Text/Scale Resize dialog box displays. You
can change the attribute size based on the AutoCAD Electrical attribute
type.

3 Select the attributes to change. Notice that you can change the attributes
for parent/stand-alone symbols separate from the child/contact symbols.

4 Enter the new value and click Start.

The first library symbol is immediately opened, the changes are made to
the selected attributes, the drawing is saved, and the operation moves on
to the next symbol. This continues until each symbol has been updated.

NOTE You can also use this tool to change the default text width or the text font
used for AutoCAD Electrical's text style.

Symbol library attribute text/scale resize

Access:

From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Modify Symbol Library.
Select the folder and click OK.

Re-scale symbol Specifies the new scale for the symbol. A value of
1.0 = no change.

Run AutoLISP “(command...)” expression Specifies which command to run using AutoCAD
Electrical’s build-in AutoLISP programming. Enter
the AutoLISP code in the edit box.

Force attributes to fixed text width Specifies the new width for the attribute text.

Change “WD” style Specifies the default text width and font used for
AutoCAD Electrical’s text style. Choose the desired
style from the list.

Do a save even if no change Specifies to performa save even if you didn’t make
modifications to the symbol library.

Force attributes to fixed text heights Specifies the text height for the following attributes:
parent or child components, installation and loca-

430 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

 tion codes, position, state, component terminal
pins, parent and child descriptions and cross-refer-
ences.

Add attributes to blocks

Use this toolto add an attribute to one insert instance of a block. The block
does not need to be an AutoCAD Electrical block.

1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the

Add Attribute tool.

2 Click the Add Attribute tool.

3 Select the block.

4 Define the attribute name, value, height, justification, and

visibility.

5 Click OK to create the attribute.

6 Select the attribute location on the drawing.

NOTE Added attributes do not become part of the block definition. They disappear
during the Explode command and when inserting another instance of the same
block.

Add attribute

Add attributes to blocks | 431

 Adds a new attribute to an instance of an AutoCAD Electrical block already
inserted into the drawing file. The attribute can be user-defined or an AutoCAD
Electrical-specific attribute.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the Add Attribute
tool.
From the Components menu, select Attributes ➤ Add Attribute.

Name Specifies text used to identify the attribute (attribute tag).

Value Specifies the attribute text. This value is displayed on the drawing
and used in reports.

NOTE This can be left blank.

Height Specifies the height for the attribute value.

Justification Specifies the justification for the attribute value.

Invisible Indicates whether the attribute will be visible on the drawing.

432 | Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools

Wire/Wire Number
Tools 8
In this chapter
■ Overview of wires
■ Insert 3-phase bus wiring
■ Insert wires
■ Trim wires
■ Stretch wires
■ Overview of wire
color/gauge labels
■ Insert cable markers into
wires
■ Insert shield symbols
■ Insert in-line wire markers
■ Wire Gaps
■ Ladder Tools
■ Wire Numbers
■ Wire Sequencing
■ Source and Destination
Markers

433
Overview of wires
AutoCAD Electrical treats line entities as wires when the lines are found on
an AutoCAD Electrical-defined wire layer. You can have many wire layers set
up on your drawing. Each wire layer has a descriptive name like "RED_16" or
"BLK_14_THW" and is assigned a screen color to visually mimic the wire color.
Wires do not have to begin or end at snap points, and they do not have to be
orthogonal (they can be skewed at any angle).
A wire network is one or more wire line segments and optional branches that
interconnect and form an electrically unbroken conductor. Wire segments of
the network may contain in-line terminals and wire crossing gaps. All segments
of a wire network receive the same wire number unless you select On per Wire
Basis in the Wire Number Options section of the Project Properties ➤ Wire
Numbers dialog box (on the Project Manager, right-click the project name
and select Properties). When multiple wires are tied to a common wire
connection point, each wire is treated as an independent wire network and
receives its own unique wire number assignment by AutoCAD Electrical.

434 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Insert 3-phase bus wiring

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Insert
Multiple Wires tool.

2 Click the Insert Multiple Wires tool.

3 Set the horizontal and vertical spacing for the wires.

4 Specify where to start the wires.

5 Set the number of wires to 3, and click OK.

During wire insertion, the current wire type displays at the
command prompt. The current wire type indicates the layer
name in which the new wires are drawn. You can override this
by typing "T" and selecting a new wire type from the Set/Edit
Wire Type dialog box. The new wire type becomes the current
wire type and the command continues with the wire insertion.

6 If starting at a component or bus, select the component. Drag

the cursor slowly to the right as the second and third phases

Insert 3-phase bus wiring | 435

 latch on to their appropriate vertical wires. You can see the 3
wires stretch straight across the screen.
As you pull the 3-phase wire out, you can turn a corner by
moving your cursor out of line with the bus. To reverse the
turn's phase sequence, press F.

7 Right-click to terminate the wires. The wires and wire connec-

tion dots insert, and loops are automatically inserted at wire
crossing points.

NOTE If the distance between two horizontal wires is relatively

small the vertical wire crossing them avoids inserting loop gaps
since the wire trap distance setting is used to see whether wire
loop gaps are possible or not. Reduce the scale factor or increase
the distance between two wires to insert gap loops..

To tie the new 3-phase wire to an existing bus, but with re-
versed sequence, start the new 3-phase wire connected at the
last wire on the existing bus. Move the cursor backward across
the other wires until the connections are made, and then move
the cursor forward again. This results in a reversed sequence
connection.

TIP If you have trouble connecting a new 3-phase wire to an existing bus, start
the command and select the starting point on the existing bus. Move the cursor
slowly across the other wires of the bus so AutoCAD Electrical has a better chance
of finding them and correctly connecting the new wiring.

Multiple wire bus

Inserts vertical or horizontal bus wiring. Bus spacing defaults to the default
ladder rung spacing for horizontal bus. For a vertical bus, the spacing is the
default value defined in the Ladder Defaults section in the Drawing Properties
➤ Drawing Format dialog box. Multiple bus wiring automatically breaks and
reconnects to any underlying components that it finds in its path. If it crosses

436 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 any existing wiring, wire-crossing gaps automatically insert (if the drawing is
so configured).

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Multiple Wire Bus tool.
From the Wires menu, select Multiple Wire Bus.

NOTE You can use the Scoot command to adjust bus spacing after insertion.

Horizontal Specifies the horizontal spacing between the wires.

Vertical Specifies the vertical spacing between the wires.

Insert wires
You can insert single or angled (22.5, 45, or 67.5 degree) line wire segments
on a wire layer (the wire layer does not have to be the current layer). AutoCAD
Electrical supports scooting components along angled wires.

Insert wires | 437

 NOTE The AutoCAD Insert Line command can also be used to insert AutoCAD
Electrical wires on a valid wire layer.

1 Click the Insert Wire tool (or click the arrow on the Insert Wire
tool to access the Insert 22.5, 45, or 67.5 Degree Wire tools).

2 Select the starting point of the wire. You can start a wire seg-
ment in empty space, from an existing wire segment, or from
an existing component. If you start from a component, the
wire segment is started at the nearest wire connection terminal
to your pick point on that symbol.
During wire insertion, the current wire type displays at the
command prompt. You can override this by typing in the
hotkey "T" and selecting a new wire type from the Set/Edit
Wire Type dialog box. The new wire type becomes the current
wire type and the command continues with the wire insertion.
You can also type "X" during wire insertion to show the wire
connection points in the drawing.

3 Select the ending point of the wire. You can end the wire seg-
ment or angled segment in empty space, from an existing wire
segment, or from an existing component. If it ends at a wire
segment, a dot (wddot.dwg) is applied, if appropriate. If it ends
at another component, the nearest wire connection terminal
is found and connected to your pick point on that symbol.

NOTE If the distance between 2 horizontal wires is relatively small,

the vertical wire crossing them avoids inserting loop gaps since
the wire trap distance setting is used to see whether wire loop
gaps are possible or not. Reduce the scale factor or increase the
distance between two wires to insert gap loops..

If the wire was an angled wire, press “9” to switch to normal

90-degree wire mode. If the wire was an angled wire, press “N”
to switch to normal 90-degree wire mode. The wire picks up
at the end of the angled wire segment and defaults to horizont-
al or vertical. To view wire connection terminal locations pos-
ition the cursor near the target component, press "S" followed
by a [space]. Green Xs appear on the screen at the wire connec-
tion point locations.

438 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 NOTE A wire connection point should only have up to 3 wire connections tied to
it. Adding more wires to a single point prevents the angled wire connection to tie
uniquely to the wire connection point.

Trim wires
Use this tool to remove a wire segment and dots as required. You can pick on
a single wire or draw a fence through multiple wires to trim.

1 Click the Trim Wire tool.

2 Select the wire segment to remove on the drawing or type F

followed by a [space] to remove multiple wires at once.

3 If you are removing multiple wires, draw a fence through the

wires to trim.

A Zoom Extents is triggered when a wire runs off the screen. If this zooming
back and forth becomes annoying during multiple trims then zoom back so
that all of the circuitry is completely shown on the screen, or press Z and
[space] at the trim prompt. This triggers a Zoom Extents that will persist
through the rest of the trimming edits.

NOTE You can use the AutoCAD Erase command to remove wires, but the wire
connection dots will not be automatically removed.

Trim wires | 439

Stretch wires
Use this tool to lengthen a wire until it meets another wire or an AutoCAD
Electrical component.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Stretch
Wire tool.

2 Click the Stretch Wire tool.

3 Select the end of the wire to stretch.

Overview of wire color/gauge labels

When you select a wire to label, AutoCAD Electrical reads the wire's layer
name, retrieves the matching text label, and inserts it as a label/leader on the
drawing. The resulting wire color/gauge label is automatically revised if you
change the wire layer of a labeled wire.
The mapping file is an ASCII text file with a ".wdw" extension. The default
mapping file, default.wdw, is referenced if a project-specific .wdw file is not
found. The mapping file lists each wire layer name followed by the wire
color/gauge label text that is to be assigned to that wire layer.
You can easily set up or edit these labels. Select the wire color/gauge tool and
select Setup to display the setup dialog. All of the current drawing's valid layer
names are listed in the upper dialog list along with any matching labels found
in the ".wdw" file (if it exists). Highlight any layer name and type in the label
you want to associate with it. Use the "|" character to trigger a line break within
your label text. For example, "RED_14_THHN:RED|AWG#14" will cause wire
labels for layer "RED_14_THHN" to display as two-line "RED" and "AWG#14"
labels. Your entries are saved to the ".wdw" file for instant reference as you
insert wire color/gauge labels.

440 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

About automatic wire leaders

AutoCAD Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that

the wire number text bumps into something (it does not check if the leader
itself will collide with something). AutoCAD Electrical first makes 15 tiny step
checks in the "up" direction. If this fails it checks 15 steps in the down
direction. If this fails, it tries at approximately 60-degree angles. If all checks
fail, it leaves the wire number where it originally was going to put it. This
entire process takes just a split second.
Leader checks are triggered when wire numbers are inserted or they re-center
due to an adjacent SCOOT operation. If a component is scooted and the result
is enough room for a wire number on a leader to do without the leader,
AutoCAD Electrical automatically removes the leader and positions the wire
number just above the wire.

Overview of wire color/gauge labels | 441

 Map wire type labels to each wire layer
This tool maps a wire color/gauge/wire type label to each wire layer.

1 Click the arrow on the Wire Number Leader tool to access the
Wire Color/Gauge Labels tool.

2 Click the Wire Color/Gauge Labels tool.

3 Click Setup to change the text size, arrow style, and layers for
the label.
■ Select the layer name to add/modify the default color/gauge text
string for wire labels and leaders.
To add or modify the default color/gauge text string, select
the layer name from the list in the Wire label color/gauge
setup dialog box. To add new wire layer names, use the
Wires ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box.
■ Set the text size, arrow size, arrow type, and gap size for the leader.
The label text size follows the current AutoCAD DIMTXT
setting and the arrow size defaults to the current AutoCAD
DIMASZ setting.
■ Specify the leader layer and text layer.
■ Click OK to apply the changes to the wire labels. The specified leader
and text layers are displayed in the dialog box under the Setup button.

4 Select how to place the label in the drawing: automatic place-

ment by AutoCAD Electrical, by picking the leader location
point, or by picking the location for the text label with no
leader. If you picked Auto placement, AutoCAD Electrical will
look for a clear spot and insert the leader/label automatically.

Insert wire color/gauge labels

This tool inserts labels on your drawing's wiring.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Wire Number Leader tool to access the Wire Color/Gauge
Labels tool.

442 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Access:

From the Wires menu, select Wire Numbers Miscellaneous ➤ Wire Color/Gauge
Labels.

Setup Sets the default color/gauge text string, text size, arrow
size, gap size, and arrow type for the wire label/leaders.
To add or modify the default color/gauge text string, select
the layer name from the list in the Wire label color/gauge
setup dialog box. To add new wire layer names, use the
Wires ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box.

Manual/No Leader Places the text label (with no leader) at the location you
pick.

Auto Placement Places the label on the drawing automatically. AutoCAD

Electrical looks for a good spot to place the label and the
label is automatically placed without any picking on your
part.

Manual Places the label at the leader location point you pick.

Insert cable markers into wires

You can insert parent and child cable markers into wires. These markers carry
a cable TAG value, just like any parent/child device combination.

Insert cable markers into wires | 443

 Insert cable markers

1 Click the Cable Markers tool.

2 In the Insert Component dialog box, select the cable marker

to insert and pick the insertion point on the drawing.
The Insert/Edit Cable Marker dialog box displays.

3 Set the cable tag by keeping the default, using the buttons, or
typing in a new tag.
Make sure you select Fixed if you want this tag to be marked
so that it won't be updated on a future re-tag.

4 Define the wire color by selecting it from a list or typing the

color id in the edit box.
Subsequent insertions of child cable markers, tied back to the
parent through any of the normal methods (Parent/sibling or
drawing/project-wide pick list) will cause AutoCAD Electrical
to offer the cable's next conductor color as a default.

5 Assign the catalog information, description, location and in-

stallation codes, and references for the tag.

6 Click OK.
If a parent cable marker was inserted, the Insert Some Child
Components dialog box displays, allowing you to automatically
insert child cable markers that are tied to the parent.

7 If you want to insert child markers, make any changes to the

dialog box and click Ok insert Child. If you don't want any
child markers to be associated with the parent marker, click
Close.

NOTE You can use the Dashed Link Line command to insert linked lines between
the symbols.

444 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Insert multiple cable markers

AutoCAD Electrical provides a way to insert all the markers for a particular
cable from one dialog. In addition, you can edit existing cable marker sets, or
even delete cable markers from a single dialog.

1 Click the arrow on the Cable Markers tool to access the Mul-
tiple Cable Markers tool.

2 Click the Multiple Cable Markers tool.

3 Select to run a report for the project or drawing and click OK.
AutoCAD Electrical processes the drawing or project before
the Location Code Selection for From/To Reporting dialog box
displays.

4 Pick the location codes from the left and right-hand lists.

NOTE Components that have no assigned location code are

grouped under a generic "(??)" code.

5 Make any necessary changes in the From/To combination box

and click OK when you are ready to run the report.
The Cable Insert/Edit dialog box displays.

6 Define which wires are part of the cable by using the Include,
Include All, Remove, and Remove All buttons.
The wires for the cable are listed in the Wires Included in Cable
portion of the dialog box.

7 Set the cable tag by keeping the default, using the buttons, or
typing in a new tag. Make sure you select Fixed if you want
this tag to be marked so that it won't be updated on a future
re-tag.

8 Set the wire color by selecting it from a list or typing the color
id in the edit box.
Subsequent insertions of child cable markers, tied back to the
parent through any of the normal methods (Parent/sibling or
drawing/project-wide pick list) will cause AutoCAD Electrical
to offer the cable's next conductor color as a default.

Insert cable markers into wires | 445

 9 Assign the catalog information, description, location and in-
stallation codes, and references for the tag.

10 Click Insert/Update Now to insert the cable or click Insert/Up-

date Later to save the changes for later.
If you chose Now, any affected drawings are opened and the
cable markers are inserted or updated. If you chose to insert/up-
date later, your changes are saved in a file called 'projnam_cblm-
rkin.upd' in the same directory path as your project file. When
you are ready to insert the cable(s), select Wires ➤ Cables ➤
Multiple Cable Markers Update from the menu.

Insert component
This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom
menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon
Menu Paths section of the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box.
Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the project name
and select Properties. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu.
The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.env." Add entry
"WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout
icon menu.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component or Components ➤ Multiple Insert
➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).

NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or
P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable
markers; and saved circuits.

446 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure.
The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just
above the menu tree structure.

Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.

■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the
current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the
main menu is selected in the Menu tree view.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview
window and Recently Used window. The current view option
is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with
text, Icon only or List view.

Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*.dat).
The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus
defined in the .dat file.

Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the
menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure.
Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions
based on the icon properties as defined by the *.dat file:
■ Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing
■ Executes a command
■ Displays a submenu

NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name
and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information.

Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing
session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list
follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window
(icon only, icon with text or list view) and the total number of
icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit
box.

Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list
box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10.

Insert cable markers into wires | 447

Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This is
opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation.

No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting
symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click
the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.

No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique

Component Tag). The untagged value that displays is the com-
ponent's TAG1/TAG2 default value. To add component detail
later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component
to edit.

Always display previously used Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open
menu the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a
push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you
open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu
displays by default.

Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to
the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog
box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the
drawing editing session ends.

Scale panel Specifies the footprint insertion scale. This defaults to the value
set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.
Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing
editing session ends.

Type it Manually type in the component block to insert.

Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert.

Right-click menus

Options for the Menu tree structure view

448 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view
to display the following options:

■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus.

■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or

submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the
Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.

Options for the Symbol Preview window

Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display
the following options:

■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and
Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check
mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view.

■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view
the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name, image, block names
and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties.

Pneumatic, Hydraulic and P&ID icon menus

The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type
(pneumatic, hydraulic or P&ID). The Insert Pneumatic Component, Insert
Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed on the
Extra Library toolbar.

Insert Pneumatic Component

Insert Hydraulic Component

Insert P&ID Component

Insert or edit cable marker (parent wire)

Insert cable markers into wires | 449

 Cable markers carry a cable TAG value, just like any parent/child device
combination. They can also carry a conductor color value (carried as a
RATING1 attribute value on the marker block symbol). The parent symbol
has provision to carry MFG/CAT part number information and, if the particular
cable is referenced in the AutoCAD Electrical cable conductor database table
(_W0_CBLWIRES within your Access catalog file), then AutoCAD Electrical
can track conductors used versus conductors available.

Access:

Click the Cable Markers tool. In the Insert Component dialog box, select the
marker to insert from the Symbol Preview window and specify the insertion
point.
From the Wires menu, select Cables ➤ Cable Markers. In the Insert Component
dialog box, seIect the marker to insert from the Symbol Preview window and
specify the insertion point.

Cable Tag

There are a few ways to define the tag for this cable. If there is an existing tag,
it appears in the edit box. If not, you can type a specific tag in the edit box.
Make sure you select Fixed if you want AutoCAD Electrical to mark this tag
so it won't be updated on a re-tag.

Use PLC Address Searches for a wire connection to a nearby PLC I/O address
and, if found, uses the PLC address number in the compon-
ent's tag name.

Use End Locations Uses the location codes of the connecting components.

Tags: Used so far Lists any cable tag names in the same family as the current
cable. Select a tag from the list to copy, or to increment
for this new cable marker.

External List Assigns a tag from an external list file. You can reference
an ASCII text file in comma or space delimited format to
help annotate the component's description, tag, catalog,
and other information.

450 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 Wire Color/ID

Sets the conductor color code by manually entering it in the edit box or select
from a generic color pick list.

Drawing Lists the wire colors used for similar cable markers in the current
drawing.

Project Lists the wire colors used for similar cable markers in the project.

Catalog Data

You can instruct AutoCAD Electrical to do a drawing-wide or project-wide

listing of similar cable markers with their catalog assignments. During your
editing session, the last MFG / CAT / ASSYCODE assignment for each
component type you insert into your wiring diagram is remembered. When
you insert another component of that type, the previous component's catalog
assignment is set as the default (assuming a previous one was made during
the current editing session).

Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the cable marker. Enter a value or
select one from the Catalog lookup.

Catalog Lists the catalog number for the cable marker. Enter a value or select
one from the Catalog lookup.

Assembly Lists the assembly code for the cable marker. The Assembly code is
used to link multiple part numbers together.

Item Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each cable marker. The tag
value can be manually typed in the edit box.

Count Specifies the quantity number for the part number (blank=1). This
value gets inserted into a BOM report's "SUBQTY" column.

Lookup Opens the cable marker's catalog database from which you can
manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. Search
the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected cable
marker. Database queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of
the dialog with the database hits listed in the dialog's main window.

Insert cable markers into wires | 451

Previous Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected cable
marker and returns the marker values. You can then make your catalog
assignment by picking from the dialog list.

Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar cable markers in the current
drawing.

Project Lists the part numbers used for similar cable markers in the project.
You can search in the active project, another project, or in an external
file.
■ Active project: All the drawings in the current project are scanned
and the results are listed in a dialog box. Select from the list to
assign your new cable marker with a catalog number that is
consistent with other similar cable markers in the project.
■ Other project: Scans each listed drawing in a previous project
for the target cable marker type and returns the catalog informa-
tion in a sub-dialog box. Make your catalog assignment by picking
from the dialog list.
■ External file: You can pull catalog assignments from a generic
ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a spread-
sheet or database program. A dialog box displays the contents
of the selected text file. Find and highlight the desired entry.
AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the file and breaks
it into its component parts. These are displayed in the left-hand
dialog list. For each relevant item, highlight it and then pick the
appropriate category button in the center column. The high-
lighted item is transferred to the corresponding category (and
then to the Insert/Edit dialog box once OK is clicked).

Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected cable
markers. You can add up to 10 part numbers to any cable markers.
These multiple BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly part
numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and
component reports.

Catalog Check Displays what the selected item will look like in a Bill of Material
template.

452 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 Description

One, two, or three lines of description attribute text can be entered.

Drawing Displays a list of descriptions found in the current drawing so you

can pick similar descriptions to edit.

Project Displays a list of descriptions found in the project so you can pick
similar descriptions to edit.

Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can select standard descrip-
tions.

Pick Picks a description from a cable marker on the current drawing.

Child conductor references

Component override Overrides the drawing's WD_M block settings with com-
ponent-specific cross-reference settings.
Click Setup to manually edit the component cross-reference
settings.

Cross Reference AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross-reference text

when the cross-reference command is run.

Installation Code

Changes the installation code(s). You can search the current drawing or entire
project for installation codes. AutoCAD Electrical does a quick read of all the
current or selected drawing files and returns a list of all installation codes used
so far. Pick from the list to automatically update the component with the
installation code.
Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you
can later take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to create
location-specific BOM and component lists.

Location Code

Changes the location codes. You can search the current drawing or entire
project for location codes. AutoCAD Electrical does a quick read of all the

Insert cable markers into wires | 453

 current or selected drawing files and returns a list of all location codes used
so far. Pick from the list to automatically update the component with the
location code.
Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can
later take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to extract wire and
cable from/to reports, and location-specific BOM reports (for example, BOM
for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables).

Show/edit miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Insert or edit cable marker (parent wire): IEC

Cable markers carry a cable TAG value, just like any parent/child device
combination. They can also carry a conductor color value (carried as a
RATING1 attribute value on the marker block symbol). The parent symbol
has provision to carry MFG/CAT part number information and, if the particular
cable is referenced in the AutoCAD Electrical cable conductor database table
(_W0_CBLWIRES within your Access catalog file) AutoCAD Electrical can track
conductors used versus conductors available.

Access:

Click the Cable Markers tool. Select Cable Marker from the list.
From the Wires menu, select Cables ➤ Cable Markers. Select Cable Marker
from the list.

This is Insert/Edit Cable Marker (Parent wire) dialog box for working in IEC
mode. If you work in JIC mode, the dialog box displays differently.

Installation

Changes the installation code(s). You can search the current drawing or entire
project for installation codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
files is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned. Select from
the list to automatically update the component with the installation code.
Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you
can create location-specific BOM and component lists later.

454 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 Location

Changes the location codes. You can search the current drawing or entire
project for location codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
files is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned. Select from
the list to automatically update the component with the location code.
Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can
extract cable from/to reports and location-specific BOM reports later (for
example, BOM for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables).

Cable Tag

Any existing tags appear in the edit box. To define the cable tag, edit the
existing tag or type a specific tag in the edit box. Select Fixed if you don't want
this tag to be updated on a re-tag.

Use PLC address Searches for a wire connection to a nearby PLC I/O address
and, if found, uses the PLC address number in the compon-
ent's tag name.

Use end locations Uses the location codes of the connecting components.

Tags: Used so far Lists any cable tag names in the same family as the current
cable. Select a tag from the list to copy, or to increment
for this new cable marker.

External list file Assigns a tag from an external list file.

Description

Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. These lines are

automatically filled with a copy of the parent's description text if the parent
TAG name is picked using one of the methods above.

Drawing Displays a list of descriptions found in the current drawing so you

can pick similar descriptions to edit.

Project Displays a list of descriptions found in the project so you can pick
similar descriptions to edit.

Insert cable markers into wires | 455

Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can select standard descrip-
tions.

Pick Picks a description from a component on the current drawing.

Catalog Data

You can instruct AutoCAD Electrical to do a drawing-wide or project-wide

listing of similar cable markers with their catalog assignments. During your
editing session, the last MFG / CAT / ASSYCODE assignment for each
component type you insert into your wiring diagram is remembered. When
you insert another component of that type, the previous component's catalog
assignment is set as the default (assuming a previous one was made during
the current editing session).

Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the cable marker. Enter a value or
select one from the Catalog lookup.

Catalog Lists the catalog number for the cable marker. Enter a value or select
one from the Catalog lookup.

Assembly Lists the assembly code for the cable marker. The Assembly code is
used to link multiple part numbers together.

Item Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each cable marker. The tag
value can be manually typed in the edit box.

Count Specifies the quantity number for the part number (blank=1). This
value gets inserted into a BOM report's "SUBQTY" column.

Lookup Opens the cable marker's catalog database from which you can
manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. Search
the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected cable
marker. Database queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of
the dialog with the database hits listed in the dialog's main window.

Previous Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected cable
marker and returns the marker values. You can then make your catalog
assignment by picking from the dialog list.

456 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar cable markers in the current
drawing.

Project Lists the part numbers used for similar cable markers in the project.
You can search in the active project, another project, or in an external
file.
■ Active project: All the drawings in the current project are scanned
and the results are listed in a dialog box. Select from the list to
assign your new cable marker with a catalog number that is
consistent with other similar cable markers in the project.
■ Other project: Scans each listed drawing in a previous project
for the target cable marker type and returns the catalog informa-
tion in a sub-dialog box. Make your catalog assignment by picking
from the dialog list.
■ External file: You can pull catalog assignments from a generic
ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a spread-
sheet or database program. A dialog box displays the contents
of the selected text file. Find and highlight the desired entry.
AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the file and breaks
it into its component parts. These are displayed in the left-hand
dialog list. For each relevant item, highlight it and then pick the
appropriate category button in the center column. The high-
lighted item is transferred to the corresponding category (and
then to the Insert/Edit dialog box once OK is clicked).

Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected cable
markers. You can add up to 10 part numbers to any cable markers.
These multiple BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly part
numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and
component reports.

Catalog Check Displays what the selected item will look like in a Bill of Material
template.

Wire Color/ID

The conductor color code can be manually entered into the edit box or selected
from a generic color pick list.

Insert cable markers into wires | 457

 Child conductor references

AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross-reference text when the

cross-reference command is run.

Show/edit miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Insert or edit cable marker (2nd+ wire of cable)

Cable markers carry a cable TAG value, just like any parent/child device
combination. They can also carry a conductor color value (carried as a
RATING1 attribute value on the marker block symbol).

Access:

Click the Cable Markers tool. Select 2+ Child Marker from the list.
From the Wires menu, select Cables ➤ Cable Markers. Select 2+ Child Marker
from the list.

Component Tag

If the parent is visible on screen, click Parent/Sibling and select the parent (or
another related marker). This automatically transfers all information to the
child marker being inserted/edited.

Tag The parent cable tag value can be manually typed in the
edit box or selected from a drawing-wide or project-wide
list of existing cables.

Drawing Lists the component tags used for similar cable markers in
the current drawing.

Project Lists the component tags used for similar cable markers in
the project.

Parent/Sibling Transfers all information from the parent cable marker to

the child cable marker being inserted or edited. If the parent
is visible on the screen, click Parent/Sibling and select the
parent (or another related contact).

458 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 Wire Color/ID

The conductor color code can be manually entered into the edit box or selected
from a generic color pick list. If the parent marker carries a part number, you
can select the next unused color from a used/unused pick list.

Drawing Lists the wire colors used for similar cable markers in the current
drawing.

Project Lists the wire colors used for similar cable markers in the project.

Description

Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. These lines are

automatically filled with a copy of the parent's description text if the parent
TAG name is picked using one of the methods above.
Click Pick to copy a description from a cable marker on the current drawing.

Parent cable marker cross-reference

AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross-reference text when the

cross-reference command is run.

Installation Code

Changes the installation codes. You can search the current drawing or entire
project for installation codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
files is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned. Select from
the list to automatically update the component with the installation code.
Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you
can take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to create
location-specific BOM and component lists later.

Location Code

Changes the location codes. You can search the current drawing or entire
project for location codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
files is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned. Select from
the list to automatically update the component with the location code.
Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can
take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to extract wire and cable

Insert cable markers into wires | 459

 from/to reports, and location-specific BOM reports later (for example, BOM
for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables).

Show/edit miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Insert or edit cable marker (2nd+ wire of cable):

IEC
Cable markers carry a cable TAG value, just like any parent/child device
combination. They can also carry a conductor color value (carried as a
RATING1 attribute value on the marker block symbol).

Access:

Click the Cable Markers tool. Select 2+ Child Marker from the list.
From the Wires menu, select Cables ➤ Cable Markers. Select 2+ Child Marker
from the list.

This is Insert/Edit Cable Marker (2nd+ wire of cable)dialog box for working
in IEC mode. If you work in JIC mode, the dialog box displays differently.

Installation

Changes the installation codes. You can search the current drawing or entire
project for installation codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
files is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned. Select from
the list to automatically update the component with the installation code.
Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you
can create location-specific BOM and component lists later.

Location

Changes the location codes. You can search the current drawing or entire
project for location codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
files is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned. Select from
the list to automatically update the component with the location code.
Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can
extract cable from/to reports and location-specific BOM reports later (for
example, BOM for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables).

460 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Component Tag

The parent cable tag value can be manually typed into the edit box or selected
from a drawing-wide or project-wide list of existing cables. If the parent is
visible on screen, click Parent/Sibling and select the parent or another related
marker. This automatically transfers all information to the child marker being
inserted/edited.

Description

Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. These lines are

automatically filled with a copy of the parent's description text if the parent
TAG name is picked using one of the methods above.

Wire Color/ID

The conductor color code can be manually entered into the edit box or selected
from a generic color pick list. If the parent marker carries a part number you
can select the next unused color from a used/unused pick list.

Parent cable marker cross-reference

AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross-reference text when the

cross-reference command is run.

Show/edit miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Multiple cable markers

This tool first extracts components and wiring. Then you select "From" and
"To" location code combinations to report. AutoCAD Electrical filters and
formats the wiring and connected component data and reports each wire and
what is connected at each end. Components that have no assigned location
code are grouped under a generic "(??)" code. Component wiring that
daisy-chains along a common bus (for example, hot or neutral bus) may not
report in the connected sequence you expect. (You can use the AutoCAD

Insert cable markers into wires | 461

 Electrical Wire Sequence command to define wire connection sequencing for
wire networks that have three or more interconnected components).

Access:

Click the arrow on the Cable Markers tool to access the Multiple Cable Markers
tool.
From the Wires menu, select Cables ➤ Multiple Cable Markers.

From/To report for Specifies to process the report for the project, the
entire drawing, or picked components in the draw-
ing.

List Lists drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the

project's wire connection table.

Freshen wire connection table Updates the wire connection table to include the
drawings that are out-of-date.

Format Displays a listing of report settings files that have a

prefix equal to the report type shown in the dialog
box.

Cable insert or edit

Cable markers carry a cable TAG value and a conductor color value (carried
as a RATING1 attribute value on the marker block symbol).

Access:

Click the arrow on the Cable Markers tool to access the Multiple Cable Markers
tool. Make your selections and click OK on the Wire From/To Report and the
Location Code Selection for From/To Reporting dialog boxes.
From the Wires menu, select Cables ➤ Multiple Cable Markers. Make your
selections and click OK on the Wire From/To Report and the Location Code
Selection for From/To Reporting dialog boxes.

462 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 Wires from extract

Lists the wires that match the From/To locations (from the Wire From/To
Report) and aren't part of a cable yet (meaning that no cable marker has been
inserted on this wire). Use Add All, Add, Remove All, and Remove to define
which wires are part of the cable. Sort the lists to make it easier to find the
wires. Click Change Format to define which fields of information to show in
the list to facilitate finding the wires to include in your cable.

Cable(s)

Lists any existing cables and the wires that belong to each cable. If there are
no existing cables, then the only item in Cable(s) is "newCBL1." Select New
anytime you want to define a new cable. Otherwise, to edit an existing cable,
select its tag from this list.

Cable Tag

There are a few ways to define the tag for the cable. If there is an existing tag,
it appears in the edit box. If not, you can type a tag in the edit box. Make sure
you select Fixed if you want AutoCAD Electrical to mark this tag so it is no
updated on a retag.

Cable End Locations Uses the location codes of the connecting components.

Tags: Used so far Lists any cable tags already assigned. Select a tag from the
list to copy, or to increment for this new cable.

External List File Assigns a tag from an external list file.

Description

Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. Use List Drawing

and List Project to pick similar descriptions to edit. Defaults opens an ASCII
text file from which you can quickly pick standard descriptions.

Installation Code

Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you
can take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to create
location-specific BOM and component lists later.

Insert cable markers into wires | 463

 Location Code

Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can
take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to extract wire and cable
from/to reports, and location-specific BOM reports later (for example, BOM
for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables).

Catalog Data

MFG and CAT numbers can be manually entered or picked from Catalog
lookup. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together.
Use Drawing and Project to quickly list of part numbers used for like
components. If the part number you select has a color conductor list associated
with it, the available conductor colors and a list of used ones is tracked.

Lookup Opens the cable's catalog database from which you can manually
enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. Search the data-
base for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected cable. Data-
base queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog with
the database hits listed in the dialog's main window.

Previous Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected cable
and returns the cable values. You can then make your catalog assign-
ment by picking from the dialog list.

Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar cables in the current drawing.

Project Lists the part numbers used for similar cables in the project. You can
search in the active project, another project, or in an external file.
■ Active project: All of the drawings in the current project are
scanned and the results are listed in a sub-dialog box. Select from
the list to assign your new cable with a catalog number that is
consistent with other similar cables in the project.
■ Other project: Scans each listed drawing in a previous project
for the target cable type and returns the catalog information in
a sub-dialog box. Make your catalog assignment by picking from
the dialog list.
■ External file: You can pull catalog assignments from a generic
ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a spread-
sheet or database program. A dialog box displays the contents
of the selected text file. Find and highlight the desired entry.

464 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the file and breaks
it into its component parts. These are displayed in the left-hand
dialog list. For each relevant item, highlight it and then pick the
appropriate category button in the center column. The high-
lighted item is transferred to the corresponding category (and
then to the Insert/Edit dialog box once OK is clicked).

Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected cable.
You can add up to 10 part numbers to any cable. These multiple
BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly part numbers to the main
catalog part number in the various BOM and component reports.

Catalog Check Displays what the selected item will look like in a Bill of Material
template.

Wire Colors

Set the conductor color code by manually entering it in the edit box or by
picking from a color list. The list displays the wire colors for the cable. If you
have already selected catalog information, the colors in the list correspond to
the specific cable type. If you haven't assigned catalog information, the list is
a generic set of colors.
To assign a color to a particular wire, select the wire in the list of wires for the
cable. Assign the color by selecting it from the list or type it in the edit box.
You can assign a color to all wires at one time by selecting Follow Color List.
This assigns a color to each wire of the selected cable even if the wire already
has a color assigned to it.

Setup

Opens a dialog box for setting the parent cable marker symbol, the cable
marker placement on the wire, and options for hiding children attributes.

Insert/Update Now

Opens any affected drawings and automatically inserts or updates any cable
markers.

Insert cable markers into wires | 465

 Insert/Update Later

Saves your changes in a file called 'projnam_cblmrkin.upd' in the same

directory path as your project file. The changes are accumulated in this file
until you are ready for them. Select Wires ➤ Cables ➤ Multiple Cable
Markers Update from the menu to insert or update the cable markers that
were saved.

Insert shield symbols

AutoCAD Electrical provides a few special Shield symbols that graphically
represent the cable shield type. There are "dumb" shields that do not carry an
AutoCAD Electrical tag and there are cable marker/shields that carry an
AutoCAD Electrical tag. You can have parent and child shields. You can insert
them one at a time and relate them as you would any other component or
insert a group at a time.

1 Click the Insert Component tool.

2 On the Insert Component dialog box, click the Miscellaneous

button.

3 Click the Shields button.

4 Select the type of shield to insert into the drawing.

5 Pick the points on each wire for the shield/cable marker and
right-click to end the selection. The shield inserts into the
drawing.
If you chose to insert a cable marker with a shield, the standard
Insert/Edit Cable Marker dialog box displays.

NOTE Each successive symbol is automatically related to the parent (the

top/left-most wire) as it is inserted.

466 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 Add a second shield to a cable/shield represenation

You can add a second shield representation to an existing set of cable/shield

markers.

1 Using the Cable Markers tool, select to insert a 2nd shield.

2 Select an existing shield marker (either select the first or last

cable/marker shield symbol).

3 Specify the insertion point and right-click to end the selection.

Insert in-line wire markers

You can insert a special in-line marker into any wire. This marker can be used
to identify a special signal name or conductor color. These reference-only
markers are ignored for wire numbering and reporting.

Insert in-line wire markers | 467

 NOTE The wire breaks around the inline marker.

1 Click the arrow on the Wire Leaders tool to access the In-Line
Wire Label tool.

2 Click the In-Line Wire Labels tool.

The Insert Component dialog displays with a selection of
predefined in-line markers and user-defined markers.

3 Select a marker and place it on a wire.

NOTE If the label is too wide, use the Squeeze Attribute/Text tool.
You can also use the Adjust In-Line Wire/Label Gap tool to adjust
the gap width rather than squeezing the attribute to fit the gap.

4 Press ESC to exit the command.

TIP You can also create wider marker symbols by following the block naming
convention for terminal symbols (page 170). For example, the horizontal Red
marker's file name is C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Acade
2007\Libs\Jic1\jic1\HTO_RED.dwg and the vertical version is C:\Program
Files\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\Jic1\jic1\VTO_RED.dwg. AutoCAD Electrical
keys off of the first four characters of the block/drawing name.

Insert component
This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom
menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon
Menu Paths section of the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box.
Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the project name
and select Properties. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu.
The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.env." Add entry

468 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 "WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout
icon menu.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component or Components ➤ Multiple Insert
➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).

NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or
P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable
markers; and saved circuits.

Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure.
The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just
above the menu tree structure.

Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.

■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the
current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the
main menu is selected in the Menu tree view.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview
window and Recently Used window. The current view option
is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with
text, Icon only or List view.

Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*.dat).
The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus
defined in the .dat file.

Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the
menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure.
Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions
based on the icon properties as defined by the *.dat file:
■ Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing

Insert in-line wire markers | 469

 ■ Executes a command
■ Displays a submenu

NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name
and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information.

Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing
session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list
follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window
(icon only, icon with text or list view) and the total number of
icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit
box.

Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list
box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10.

Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This is

opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation.

No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting
symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click
the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.

No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique

Component Tag). The untagged value that displays is the com-
ponent's TAG1/TAG2 default value. To add component detail
later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component
to edit.

Always display previously used Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open
menu the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a
push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you
open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu
displays by default.

Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to
the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog
box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the
drawing editing session ends.

470 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Scale panel Specifies the footprint insertion scale. This defaults to the value
set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.
Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing
editing session ends.

Type it Manually type in the component block to insert.

Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert.

Right-click menus

Options for the Menu tree structure view

Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view
to display the following options:

■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus.

■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or

submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the
Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.

Options for the Symbol Preview window

Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display
the following options:

■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and
Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check
mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view.

■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view
the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name, image, block names
and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties.

Pneumatic, Hydraulic and P&ID icon menus

The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type
(pneumatic, hydraulic or P&ID). The Insert Pneumatic Component, Insert

Insert in-line wire markers | 471

 Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed on the
Extra Library toolbar.

Insert Pneumatic Component

Insert Hydraulic Component

Insert P&ID Component

472 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Manipulate wire gaps
Insert wire gaps

AutoCAD Electrical automatically inserts a gap/loop when a new wire crosses

another. Under some conditions you may need to manually add a loop gap
at the point of two crossing lines.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Insert
Wire Gap tool.

2 Click the Insert Wire Gap tool.

3 Select the wire to remain solid.

4 Select the crossing wire to have the gap.

The gap inserts into the second wire.

NOTE You can turn off the automatic gap/loop feature by selecting Solid in the
Wiring Style section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Style dialog box.

Wire Gaps | 473

 Remove wire gaps

Use the Delete Wire Gap command if a gap/loop is no longer needed in an

existing wire.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Delete
Wire Gap tool.

2 Click the Delete Wire Gap tool.

3 Select the wire segments near the unneeded gaps.

The gap is removed from the second wire.

Flip wire gaps

Use the Flip Gap command to flip the gap to the other wire.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Flip Wire
Gap tool.

2 Click the Flip Wire Gap tool.

3 Select the wire that has the gap/loops to flip. You can also
window the wires containing the gaps to flip by pressing a W,
then windowing the wires.
AutoCAD Electrical makes the gapped wire solid and flips the
gap/loop to the crossing wires.

Define and insert new ladders

Insert new ladder

474 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

There is no limit to the number of ladders that can be inserted into a drawing,
but ladders may not overlap each other. You can insert a new ladder at any
time. Multiple ladder fragments in the same vertical column need to be

Define and insert new ladders | 475

 vertically aligned along their left-hand side. Note that these limitations do
not apply when X-Y Grid or X-Zone referencing is selected.

1 Click the Insert Ladder tool.

2 Specify the width and spacing of the ladder.

3 Specify the 1st reference, index and rungs.

Index is the increment number for line reference numbering
(default = 1). If you don't want every line reference number to
show up then you can use the AutoCAD Erase command to
get rid of the extras. Do not erase the top-most line reference
number. This is the ladder's MLR block and carries the ladder's
intelligence.

NOTE You don't need to enter a value for the length since it is
calculated once the 1st reference, index and rung values are set.

4 Specify whether to create a one-phase or three-phase ladder.

If you select to create a three-phase ladder, the Width and
Draw Rungs options are grayed out.

5 Specify how to draw the rungs.

No Bus just draws the line reference numbers, while No Rungs
just draws the hot and neutral bus with rungs. Add rungs with
the AutoCAD Electrical Add Rung command or the Insert Wire
tool. Select Yes to automatically include a rung at every refer-
ence location (skip = 0) or every other line reference position
(skip = 1). You can specify whether to skip rungs; specifying a
value of Skip = 4 means that four rungs will be skipped for
every one that is drawn.

6 Click OK.

7 Specify the start position of the ladder. Enter a start and end
value or pick a point on the drawing.
During ladder insertion, the current wire type displays at the
command prompt. You can override this by typing in the
hotkey "T" and selecting a new wire type from the Set Wire
Type dialog box. The new wire type becomes the current wire
type and the command continues with the ladder insertion.

476 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 8 Specify the last reference number for the ladder. If you entered
values in the step above, this step is not necessary.

9 Left mouse click to insert the ladder.

NOTE Use AutoCAD Move to relocate an entire ladder. Make sure you that get
the entire ladder including the very first line reference number (the MLR block
insert). Select the Revise Ladder button and then click Cancel on the dialog. Using
this command forces AutoCAD Electrical to re-read and update its internal ladder
location list.

Set ladder defaults

You can set the new ladder width and spacing defaults by modifying a template
or the attribute definitions. These default values are carried on the invisible
WD_M block.

Using a template

Use these steps if you are using a template drawing with a pre-inserted WD_M
block.

1 Open the template drawing in AutoCAD Electrical (it has a ".dwt"

extension).

2 Select Projects ➤ Drawing Properties.

3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Drawing Format tab.

4 In the Ladder Defaults section, make the appropriate changes and click
OK.

5 Save and exit the template drawing.

Changing attribute values

1 Open the WD_M drawing (found at: \Program Files

[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic1\WD_M.dwg).

2 Change the default values of the attribute definitions.

■ DLADW: default ladder width

■ RUNGDIST: default ladder rung spacing

Define and insert new ladders | 477

 ■ PH3SPACE: default 3-phase spacing

3 Save and exit the drawing.

You can permanently change the relative position of line reference numbers
and text size by modifying the RUNGFIRST attribute definition.

1 Display the MLR block's drawing. The file names (found at: \Program
Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic1\) are:
■ WD_MLRH.dwg: for horizontal rung / vertical ladders

■ WD_MLRV.dwg: for vertical rung / horizontal ladders

■ WD_MLRHX.dwg: hexagon-shaped user block (horizontal rung /

vertical ladders)

■ WD_MLRVX.dwg: hexagon-shaped user block (vertical rung /

horizontal ladders)

2 Change the default values as desired, but do not delete any of the
attributes you find.

3 Move or change the text size of the RUNGFIRST attribute definition.

4 Save and exit the drawing.

Insert ladder
There is no limit to the number of ladders that can be inserted into a drawing,
but ladders can not overlap each other. You can insert a new ladder at any
time. Multiple ladder fragments in the same vertical column must be vertically
aligned along their left-hand side. Note that these limitations do not apply
when X-Y Grid or X-Zone referencing is selected.

Access:

Click the Insert Ladder tool.

From the Wires menu, select Ladders ➤ Insert Ladder.

During ladder insertion, the current wire type displays at the command
prompt. You can override this by typing in the hotkey "T" and selecting a new

478 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 wire type from the Set/Edit Wire Type dialog box. The new wire type becomes
the current wire type and the command continues with the ladder insertion.

Width Specifies the width of the ladder.

Spacing Specifies the spacing between each rung.

Length Specifies both the length of the ladder and the number of rungs.
You can enter the total ladder length, the number of ladder rungs,
or leave both blank and manually pick the beginning and ending
points of the ladder.

1st reference Specifies the beginning line reference for the ladder. Index is the
increment number for line reference numbering (default = 1). If
you don't want every line reference number to show up then you
can use the AutoCAD Erase command to get rid of the extras.
Do not erase the top-most line reference number. This is the
ladder's MLR block and carries the ladder's intelligence.

Phase Specifies whether to create a one-phase or three-phase ladder. If

you select to create a three-phase ladder, the Width and Draw
Rungs options are grayed out.

Draw rungs Specifies how to draw the rungs. No Bus just draws the line refer-
ence numbers, while No Rungs just draws the hot and neutral
bus with rungs. Add rungs with the AutoCAD Electrical Add Rung
command or the Insert Wire tool. Select Yes to automatically in-
clude a rung at every reference location (skip = 0) or every other
line reference position (skip = 1). You can specify whether to skip
rungs; specifying a value of Skip = 4 means that four rungs will
be skipped for every one that is drawn.

Define and insert new ladders | 479

Modify an existing ladder
Renumber an existing ladder

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Ladder tool to access the Revise
Ladder tool.

2 Click the Revise Ladder tool.

3 Enter the new beginning line reference number and click OK.

NOTE This does not update existing components or wire numbers.

4 Select Components ➤ Component Tagging ➤ Retag Com-

ponents to update component tags to match the new line ref-
erence number.

5 Select Wires ➤ Insert Wire Numbers to update the wire

numbers. Select Tag/retag ALL.
If off-page wire connections are involved, make sure that you
click Cross-reference Signals on the Wire Tagging dialog box.

6 Click Pick Individual Wires and select the wires to retag.

Change the size of a ladder

You can use the Revise Ladder tool to shorten, lengthen, widen, or compress
an existing ladder.

480 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

To lengthen or shorten the ladder:

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Ladder tool to access the Revise
Ladder tool.

2 Click the Revise Ladder tool.

3 Change the column of line reference numbers to match the

appropriate ladder length and click OK.

4 Select the AutoCAD Stretch command from the menu to

lengthen or shorten the ladder.

To widen or compress the ladder:

1 Click the Scoot tool.

2 Select the ladder's vertical rail and pull it out or push it in.

3 Select Components ➤ Align to put components back into

neat columns.

4 Select the components to align and press Enter.

Reposition a ladder
You can reposition an existing ladder on your drawing using the AutoCAD
Move command.

1 Select the AutoCAD Move command from the menu.

2 Select the ladder, making sure to include the very first line
reference number.

3 Select Wires ➤ Ladders ➤ Revise Ladder.

4 Click Cancel.
This forces AutoCAD Electrical to reread and update its internal
ladder location list.

Modify an existing ladder | 481

 Change rung spacing

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Ladder tool to access the Revise
Ladder tool.

2 Click the Revise Ladder tool.

3 Change the column of line reference numbers to the desired

rung spacing and ladder length.

4 Select Components ➤ Scoot (or the AutoCAD Stretch com-

mand) to move the existing rungs to their new rung locations.

Insert rungs
AutoCAD Electrical finds the nearest line reference location and places a ladder
rung at that reference position (both bus wires must be visible on the screen
for this to work).

1 Click the Add Rung tool.

2 Select a blank space anywhere between the hot and neutral

bus wires to add the rung.
During rung insertion, the current wire type displays at the
command prompt. You can override this by typing in the
hotkey "T" and selecting a new wire type from the Set/Edit
Wire Type dialog box. The new wire type becomes the current
wire type and the command continues with the rung insertion.
If the new rung encounters a schematic device floating in
space, it tries to break the wire across the device.

Convert line reference numbers

Use this to convert the upper-most line reference number on a non-intelligent
ladder to be aware of AutoCAD Electrical.

1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the Convert Ladder tool.

482 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 2 Select the top line reference number and press Enter.
The Modify Line Reference Numbers dialog box displays.

3 Specify the desired rung spacing, ladder length, and starting

reference number.

4 Click OK.

Modify line reference numbers

This tool adjusts the line reference numbering along the side of the ladders,;
however it doesn't change existing ladder rung spacing. When converting line
reference numbering using the Convert Ladder tool, select only the first line
reference number to determine location, size, and justification of the new line
reference numbers being converted. Once OK is pressed, existing ladder
information is erased and the new smart ladder is inserted.

NOTE Updating the ladder's reference numbers does not update existing
components or wire numbers.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Ladder tool to access the Revise Ladder tool.
From the Wires menu, select Ladders ➤ Revise Ladder.
On the Conversion toolbar, click the Convert Ladder tool. Select the top line
reference number and press Enter.
From the Projects menu, select Conversion Tools ➤ Convert Drawing ➤
Convert Ladder. Select the top line reference number and press Enter.

Rung spacing Specifies the spacing between each rung.

Rung count Specifies the number of rungs for each ladder.

Reference numbers Specifies the length of the ladder by adjusting the

begin and end reference numbers. The very first line
reference number on each ladder is a smart AutoCAD
block and attributes. All the rest of the numbers are
just text entities (that can be erased, if desired, but
do not erase the top or first line reference number).

Modify an existing ladder | 483

Index Specifies the line reference number increment value
(default=1). Selecting Redo forces a refresh of line
reference numbering.

Wire number format Specifies the format for placing wire numbers. (de-
fault = configure wire number format value) You can
specify a unique automatic wire numbering format
on a per ladder basis (ex: one ladder of 24 volt wiring
requiring wire numbers with a unique prefix or suffix,
ex: %NVDC).

Overview of wire numbers

Wire numbers are blocks or attributes inserted on a line wire entity. AutoCAD
Electrical assigns each wire number type to its own layer. You can assign a
different color to each of these layers so you can easily tell them apart. There
are 4 types of wire numbers: Normal, Fixed, Extra, and Signal.

Normal Wire numbers that are free to update when you rerun the Insert
Wire Numbers command.

Fixed Wire numbers that are fixed to their current value. They do not
update with subsequent runs of the Insert Wire Numbers com-
mand.

Extra Extra copies of the Normal or Fixed wire number that are assigned
to a given wire network. A single wire network has one Normal
or one Fixed wire number (but not both) and may have many
extra copies of the wire number inserted at various locations on
the network.

Terminal/Signal Wire numbers for terminals and signal arrows.

484 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 Wire tag formats

The origin of a wire number block must lie on the wire segment, though the
text attribute may be moved away from the wire. AutoCAD Electrical uses the
concept of a wire tag format string with replaceable parameters. One
replaceable parameter, %N, must always be part of the wire format string. A
typical format string might be just this %N parameter.
Replaceable parameters for defining a default wire number tag format are:

%S Drawing's sheet number

%D Drawing number

%N Sequential or reference-based number applied to the component

%X Suffix character position for reference-based tagging (not present =

end of tag)

%P IEC-style project code (default for drawing)

%I IEC-style "installation" code (default for drawing)

%L IEC-style "location" code (default for drawing)

Examples: Wire beginning on line reference "100" of sheet "02" yields these
wire number tags for the following formats:

%N wire number = 100

W%N wire number = W100

%S-%N wire number = 02-100

%S%N wire number = 02100

%S : %N wire number = 02:100

Overview of wire numbers | 485

 Check line entities
Some problems with wire numbering (or lack thereof) can be traced to line
wires not being on a valid wire layer. Use the Show Wires tool to make a quick
check of what is a wire and what is not. The solution to the problem may be
as simple as moving some line entities to a valid AutoCAD Electrical wire layer
(per the drawing's property setting for wire layer names).
Show Wires highlights every line entity in bright red that is found to be on a
valid AutoCAD Electrical wire layer. Select the AutoCAD Redraw command
to remove the highlights.

1 Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access

the Show Wires tool.

2 Click the Show Wires tool.

3 Select whether to show the wires. All lines (wires) on wire

layers are highlighted in bright red.

4 Select whether to show the origin point for each wire number
attribute text entity. The origin of a wire number block must
lie on the wire segment, though the text attribute may be
moved away from the wire.

NOTE Do not use the AutoCAD Move command to move the

attribute.

5 Select whether to highlight the wire number attribute text

pointed to by each Xdata pointer. Xdata pointers identify
which wire number insert goes with which wire segment.

Insert special wire numbering

This tool speeds up the process of inserting special wire numbering generally
associated with 3-phase bus and motor circuits. It can also be used in a

486 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

continuous mode. You can insert a long series of incrementing wire numbers
and assign each, in turn, to the wires you pick.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire Numbers tool to access the
3 Phase Wire Numbers tool.

2 Click the 3 Phase Wire Numbers tool.

3 Enter a base starting number in the edit box or click Pick to

select an existing attribute value on the active drawing.
If the picked text carries a numeric substring, this is extracted
and inserted into the Base edit box.

4 Enter an optional Prefix and/or Suffix value or choose from a

default pick list by clicking List.
The prefix or suffix value can be a comma-delimited string
with each entry applied in sequence to the Wire Numbers
section shown at the right-hand side of the dialog box.

5 Set the hold and increment options for each of the edit box
values as required. Pay attention to the proposed generated
wire numbers in the right-hand side of the dialog box.

6 Set the number of wire numbers needed in the bottom right-

hand side of the dialog box.

TIP Select None to potentially generate a continuous list of incre-

menting wire numbers.

7 Select OK.

8 Select the wires for the wire numbers, either single picks or
using the Fence selection.
Fence selection inserts the wire numbers at the crossing points
while single selections uses the drawing's default wire number
placement (for example, centered on the wire segment).

Tips and Hints

■ Tab out of an edit box to start the Wire Numbers listing to update.

Overview of wire numbers | 487

 ■ You can add to the default prefix and suffix list display. Create an ASCII
text file and list each prefix/suffix entry, one per line in the file. Name the
file <projectname>.3ph (where "projectname" is the name of your active
project) or default.3ph and put the file in any folder that is part of AutoCAD
Electrical's search path list.

■ The wire number assignments go in as Fixed (they will hold the values
that you have assigned and will not retag with a subsequent run of the
Insert Wire Numbers command).

NOTE If this tool does not meet your needs, use the Edit Wire Number tool to
assign fixed wire numbers one at a time.

Automatically insert wire numbers

This tool quickly processes and tags wires on the current drawing, wires in
the project, or individually picked wires.

1 Click the Insert Wire Numbers tool.

2 Select to tag all wires or only new wires.

3 Select to process and tag wires with sequential wire numbers

or with wire numbers based upon the wire network's line ref-
erence location.

4 (Optional) Set other tagging options such as:

■ specify the wire tag format to use
■ specify the wire layer format
■ force all wire numbers to be fixed
■ update cross-reference text on wire signal source and destination
symbols
■ update the database for wire signal source and destination symbols

5 Select to tag the selected wires, wires on a drawing, or wires

in a project.

Wire tagging

488 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 AutoCAD Electrical processes wire line entities into wire networks, and inserts
or updates wire numbers associated with them.

Access:

Click the Insert Wire Numbers tool.

From the Wires menu, select Insert Wire Numbers.

To do Specifies to process all the wiring or just the un-

tagged (new) wires.

Wire tag mode Specifies to use the sequential or line-reference based

setting for the drawing.

Format override Specifies the wire tag format to use for overriding
the format set in the Drawing Properties dialog box.

Use wire layer format overrides Overrides the default wire number format (set in the
Layers section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing
Format dialog box) by using layer-defined formats.

Insert as fixed Forces all wire numbers to be fixed (they do not up-
date if wire number retagging is run again at a later
date).

Cross-reference Signals Updates cross-reference text on wire signal source

and destination symbols.

Freshen database (for Signals) Updates the database for wire signal source and
destination symbols.

Project-wide Tags or retags wiring project-wide.

Pick individual wires Tags or retags the selected wiring on the current
drawing only.

Drawing-wide Tags or retags wiring on the current drawing.

Overview of wire numbers | 489

 Wire tagging (project-wide)
AutoCAD Electrical processes wire line entities into wire networks, and inserts
or updates wire numbers associated with them across a project.

Access:

Click the Insert Wire Numbers tool. Select Sequential and click Project-Wide.
From the Wires menu, select Insert Wire Numbers. Select Sequential and click
Project-Wide.

Wire tag mode Specifies to use the sequential or line-reference based setting for the
drawing.

Sequential (1st tag Starts at the wire number specified for

defined for each drawing) that drawing (as set in the Drawing
Properties > Wire Numbers (page
493)dialog box). A starting wire num-
ber must be assigned for each draw-
ing.

Sequential (consecutive Allows you to type in a starting wire

drawing to drawing) number and increments from there,
ignoring the defined setting of the
starting wire number.

Reference-based tags Sets the wire number based on the

line-reference value.

To do Specifies to process all the wiring or just the untagged (new) wires.

Cross-reference Signals Updates cross-reference text on wire signal source and destination
symbols.

Freshen database (for Sig- Updates the database for wire signal source and destination symbols.
nals)

Format override Specifies the wire tag format to use for overriding the format set in
the Drawing Properties dialog box.

490 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Use wire layer format Overrides the default wire number format (set in the Layers section
overrides of the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box) by using
layer-defined formats.

Insert as fixed Forces all wire numbers to be fixed (they do not update if wire number
retagging is run again at a later date).

3 phase wire numbering

This tool speeds up the process of inserting special wire numbering generally
associated with 3-phase bus and motor circuits. It can also be used in a
continuous mode. You can insert a long series of incrementing wire numbers
and assign each, in turn, to the wires you pick.
You can add to the default prefix and suffix list display. Create an ASCII text
file and list each prefix/suffix entry, one per line in the file. Name the file
<projectname>.3ph (where "projectname" is the name of your active project)
or default.3ph and put the file in any folder that is part of AutoCAD Electrical's
search path list.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Wire Numbers tool to access the 3 Phase Wire
Numbers tool.
From the Wires menu, select Wire Numbers Miscellaneous ➤ 3 Phase Wire
Numbers.

Prefix Specifies the prefix value for the wire numbers. Enter a value or click
List to choose from a default pick list.

Base Specifies the base starting number for the wire numbers. Enter a value
or click Pick to select an existing attribute value on the active drawing.

Suffix Specifies the suffix value for the wire numbers. Enter a value or click
List to choose from a default pick list.

Hold/Increment Specifies whether to hold or increment the prefix, base, and suffix
values for all wire numbers that are entered onto the drawing. For
example, if you set Base = 100/Increment and Suffix = L1/Hold, the
wire numbers will be 100L1, 101L1, 102L1.

Overview of wire numbers | 491

Wire Numbers Displays a preview of the wire numbers to be inserted onto the
drawing.

TIP Tab out of an edit box to trigger the Wire Numbers listing to
update.

Maximum Specifies the maximum number of wire numbers. When you select a
new option (3, 4, or None) the Wire Numbers section automatically
updates with a preview based on the value selected in relation to the
options specified for the prefix, base, and suffix values.

TIP Select None to potentially generate a continuous list of increment-

ing wire numbers

Set wire number placement

You can set the wire number placement for new wires inserted in a single
drawing or for the entire project. This does not update existing wire numbers.

492 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

TIP Change the position of an existing wire number using the Toggle Wire Number
In-Line tool.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, right-click on the project

name and select Properties (or click the drawing name,
and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties).
If you change this setting in the project properties,
the drawings already in the project do not get this
setting.

NOTE You can also automatically set wire number

placement using the Drawing Properties tool. Follow the
steps below.

3 In the Project or Drawing Properties dialog box, click

the Wire Numbers tab.

4 In the Wire Number Placement section, select how

you want to automatically place new wire numbers:
above, below, or inline of the wire.
■ Above Wire: Places the wire number above the physical
wire.
■ In-Line: Places the wire number in line with the wire. Click
Gap Setup to define the spacing between the wire number
and the wire itself.
■ Below Wire: Places the wire number below the physical
wire.

5 Click OK.

NOTE Use the Copy Wire Number (In-Line) tool to insert individual wire numbers
inline with the wire rather than above or below the wire in the active drawing.

Drawing properties: wire numbers tab

Set wire number placement | 493

 Apply a drawing-specific wire number settings that are maintained inside the
drawing's WD_M block.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing
name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties.

Wire Number Format

Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based.

Format Specifies the way new wire number tags are created. The
wire number tag format must include the %N parameter
that is the base sequential or reference-based value per the
selection above. If your format includes the sheet number
%S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter, you
must enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing
Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box.

NOTE For reference-based wire number tagging, individual

items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep
multiple wires in the same reference location unique. These
are added to the end of the tag, but you can force AutoCAD
Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within
the tag format. Use the Suffix position parameter, %X, in
the component tag format (for example, %X%N).

Search for PLC I/O address on insert Specifies to use PLC I/O address values for wires that con-
nect to an addressed I/O point. This overrides both Sequen-
tial and Reference-based tagging. New wires or wire renum-
bering on the current drawing shows PLC I/O address-based
wire numbers automatically.

NOTE Like component tags, AutoCAD Electrical uses the

concept of a wire tag format string with replaceable para-
meters. The %N parameter must always be part of the wire
format string. A typical format string might be just this %N
parameter.

494 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Sequential Enter the starting sequential number (alpha, numeric, or
alphanumeric) for the drawing. If you enter the same
starting sequential number for every drawing of your wiring
diagram set, AutoCAD Electrical confirms at insertion time
that a new sequential wire number tag is not repeated on
any other drawing.
If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200, the wire
numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and those on DEMO2
start at 200. If DEMO1 has more than 100 wire numbers
it starts using wire number 200 and above while DEMO2
would begin its wire numbers where DEMO1 left off
(making sure that duplicate wire numbers are not assigned).

Increment The default is "1." Setting it to "2" with a starting sequential

of "1" would yield wire numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, and so
on.

Line Reference Sets the wire number tag suffix. This list is used to create
unique reference-based wire number tags for multiple wire
networks beginning at the same reference location (such
as wire network beginning at a location per line reference
number, X-Y grid reference, or X-Zone reference).

Suffix Setup Displays a suffix list. List suffix characters for wire numbers
beginning on the same line reference or in the same zone
(to keep wire numbers unique). Select one of the 4 pre-
defined suffix lists or enter your own custom suffix list.

New Wire Number Placement

NOTE The Insert Wire Number tool does not take the current wire number setting
(in-line, above or below) into account when updating existing wire numbers; this
setting is used only when inserting new wire numbers. Use the Toggle Wire Number
In-Line tool for flipping existing wire numbers among the 3 modes.

Above Wire Places the wire number above the physical wire.

In-Line Places the wire number inline with the wire.

Set wire number placement | 495

Gap Setup Defines spacing between the inline wire number and the wire it-
self.

Below Wire Places the wire number below the physical wire.

Offset Specifies to insert the wire number tags the specified offset dis-
tance.

Centered Specifies to insert the wire number tags in the center of each wire
segment.

Offset Distance Specifies a fixed, user-defined offset distance from the left or top
of the first wire segment found on the wire network.

Leaders (This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers.) AutoCAD

Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that
the wire number text bumps into something (it does not check
if the leader itself will overlay another object). Select the method
for inserting new wire numbers as leaders: As Required, Always,
or Never.

NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already
present on the drawing.

Project properties: wire numbers tab

Modify your project default settings for wire numbers. All information defined
in this tab is saved to the project definition file as project defaults and settings

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click on the project
name and select Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click on the project name and select Properties.

496 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 Wire Number Format

Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based.

Format Specifies the way new wire number tags are created. The
wire number tag format must include the %N parameter
that is the base sequential or reference-based value per the
selection above. If your format includes the sheet number
%S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter, you
must enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing
Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box.

NOTE For reference-based wire number tagging, individual

items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep
multiple wires in the same reference location unique. These
are added to the end of the tag, but you can force AutoCAD
Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within
the tag format. Use the Suffix position parameter, %X, in
the component tag format (for example, %X%N).

NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides a predefined format

for you to use or you can enter your own format using
replaceable parameters. (page 126)

Search for PLC I/O address on insert Specifies to use PLC I/O address values for wires that con-
nect to an addressed I/O point. This overrides both Sequen-
tial and Reference-based tagging. New wires or wire renum-
bering on the current drawing will show PLC I/O address-
based wire numbers automatically.

NOTE Like component tags, AutoCAD Electrical uses the

concept of a wire tag format string with replaceable para-
meters. The %N parameter must always be part of the wire
format string. A typical format string might be just this %N
parameter.

Sequential Enter the starting sequential number (alpha, numeric, or

alphanumeric) for the drawing. If you enter the same
starting sequential number for every drawing of your wiring
diagram set, AutoCAD Electrical confirms at insertion time
that a new sequential wire number tag is not repeated on
any other drawing.

Set wire number placement | 497

 If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200, the wire
numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and those on DEMO2
start at 200. If DEMO1 has more than 100 wire numbers
it starts using wire number 200 and above while DEMO2
would begin its wire numbers where DEMO1 left off
(making sure that duplicate wire numbers are not assigned).

Increment The default is "1". Setting it to "2" with a starting sequential

of "1" would yield wire numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, and so
on.

Line Reference Sets the wire number tag suffix. This list is used to create
unique reference-based wire number tags for multiple wire
networks beginning at the same reference location (such
as wire network beginning at a location per line reference
number, X-Y grid reference, or X-Zone reference).

Suffix Setup Displays a suffix list. List suffix characters for wire numbers
beginning on the same line reference or in the same zone
(to keep wire numbers unique). Select one of the 4 pre-
defined suffix lists or enter your own custom suffix list.

Wire Number Options

Based on Wire Layer Assigns a different wire number format based on the wire
layer.

Layer Setup Overrides the default wire number format by using layer
defined formats. Change the wire layer name, wire number
format, starting wire sequence, and wire number suffix.

Based on Terminal Symbol Location Specifies to use a wire number terminal on a wire network
as the wire network's line reference value for calculating a
reference-based wire number. For example, a wire network
starts at line reference 100 and drops down and over on
line reference 103. If there is a schematic terminal symbol
that carries the WIRENO attribute located on line reference
103 and this option is enabled, AutoCAD Electrical calcu-
lates a reference-based wire number using 103 instead of
100. If there are multiple wire number terminals on this

498 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 network, the line reference value of the upper left-most
terminal is used.

Hidden on Wire Network with Ter- Specifies to automatically hide the wire number for a wire
minal Displaying Wire Number network that has a wire number-type terminal.

On per Wire Basis Specifies to assign a wire number for each wire rather than
the default one wire number per wire network.

Exclude Specifies the wire number ranges to exclude if using sequen-

tial wire numbers. (applied to the %N part of the wire
number tag format)
Syntax is <starting>-<ending> to show range (for example
1000-1499). Multiple ranges are allowed and must be
separated with a comma or semi-colon (for example, 1000-
1099;2500-2599;). You can also use 2;4;6 or 2,4,6 for val-
ues not in a range.

New Wire Number Placement

NOTE The Insert Wire Number tool does not take the current wire number setting
(in-line, above or below) into account when updating existing wire numbers; this
setting is used only when inserting new wire numbers. Use the Toggle Wire Number
In-Line tool for flipping existing wire numbers among the 3 modes.

Above Wire Places the wire number above the physical wire.

In-Line Places the wire number in line with the wire.

Gap Setup Defines spacing between the wire number and the wire itself.

Below Wire Places the wire number below the physical wire.

Centered Specifies to insert the wire number tags in the center of each wire
segment.

Offset Specifies to insert the wire number tags the specified offset dis-
tance.

Set wire number placement | 499

Offset Distance Specifies a fixed, user-defined offset distance from the left or top
of the first wire segment found on the wire network.

Leaders (This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers) AutoCAD

Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that
the wire number text bumps into something (it does not check
if the leader itself overlays another object). Select the method for
inserting new wire numbers as leaders: As Required, Always, or
Never.

NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already
present on the drawing.

Wire Type

Displays the Rename User Columns dialog box that is used for renaming User1
to User20 header columns in the Set Wire Type, Create/Edit Wire Type, and
Change/Convert Wire Type dialog boxes.

500 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Find or replace wire number text
This tool lets you find and replace wire number text values or find and replace
sub-strings within those values. You can do this on the current drawing or
across the project drawing set.

1 Click the drop-down arrow on the Edit Wire Number tool to

access the Find/Replace Wire Numbers tool.

2 Click the Find/Replace Wire Numbers tool.

3 Specify whether to replace the text only if the entire wire

number text string matches the Replace value or to replace the
text anywhere within the wire number text string.

4 Enter up to three different Find/Replace values, and then click

Go.

5 Choose to process the project, the current drawing, or selected

wire numbers on the current drawing.
AutoCAD Electrical scans the selection looking for all the
AutoCAD Electrical wire number text values and replacing text
as instructed.

Find or replace wire numbers

Use this tool to find and replace wire number text values, or find and replace
substrings within those values. You can do this on the active drawing or across
the project drawing set.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Edit Wire Number tool to access the Find/Replace Wire
Numbers tool.

Find or replace wire number text | 501

Access:

From the Wires menu, select Wire Number Miscellaneous ➤ Find/Replace Wire
Numbers.

Full, exact match Specifies to replace the text only if the entire text value
matches the find value.

Substring match Specifies to replace the text if any part of the text value
matches the find value.

First occurrence only Specifies that only the first occurrence within the text value
should be replaced.

Find Specifies the value you wish to find.

Replace Specifies the text string to replace the find value with.

Encode wire color/gauge information into wire

numbers
Use the Wire Layer/Format Overrides tool to have wire numbering
automatically insert with wire color, gauge, and type information encoded

502 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

into the wire number itself. For example, you can have wire numbers like
123-RD-14 or 124-BLK-10 instead of 123 or 124.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select

Properties.

3 In the Project Properties dialog box, click the Wire Numbers

tab.

4 In the Wire Number Options section, select Based on Wire

Layer and then click Layer Setup.
The Assign Wire Numbering Formats by Wire Layers dialog
box opens. This is where you enter each wire layer name and
the wire number format that you want to see for wire numbers
on that wire layer. For example, let's say you routinely use wire
layers "RED_14_THHN" and "BLK_10_XHHN" in drawings in
your project. Whenever you have a wire number on the red
wire, you want AutoCAD Electrical to automatically append
a "-RD-14" suffix to the wire number. For wire numbers gener-
ated on wires drawn on layer BLK_10_XHHN you want Auto-
CAD Electrical to automatically append a "-BLK-10" suffix to
the wire number.

5 In the Assign Wire Numbering Formats by Wire Layers dialog

box, enter RED_14_THHN in the Wire Layer Name box and
enter %N-RD-14 in the Wire Number Format For Layer box.

6 Click Add.

7 Enter BLK_10_XHHN in the Wire Layer Name box and enter

%N-BLK-10 in the Wire Number Format For Layer box. Click
Add.

8 Repeat until you have all possible wire layers set up.
This information is stored in the project's .wdp file and is ap-
plied across all drawings listed in your project.

9 Click OK.

Now when you run the Insert Wire Numbers command on any drawing in
your project, nonfixed wire numbers update if they are associated with wires
that are tagged in your override list.

Encode wire color/gauge information into wire numbers | 503

 Assign wire numbering formats by wire layers
The default format of a wire number is defined in the AutoCAD Electrical
Project Properties dialog box. This format is used for all wire numbers inserted
on a drawing. However, there may be times when you want certain types of
wires to be numbered in a different way (i.e. to carry a different format).
AutoCAD Electrical allows you to override the default wire number format by
using layer defined formats. For example, your default wire number format is
%N, meaning it takes on the line reference number (in Reference Mode) or
the sequential number (in Sequential Mode). If there are multiple wire numbers
on a particular line reference a suffix is used from the defined suffix list to
make the wire number unique.

Access:

Click the Insert Wire Numbers tool. Click Use Wire Layer Format Overrides Setup.
From the Wires menu, select Insert Wire Numbers. Click Use Wire Layer Format
Overrides Setup.

NOTE You can also access this dialog box by selecting Based on Wire Layer and
then clicking Layer Setup in the Wire Number Options section of the Project
Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box.

Wire list Lists all defined wire layer formats.

Add Adds the new wire layer format to the list.

Update Updates the selected wire layer format with the changes
you've specified in the dialog box.

Delete Removes the new wire layer format from the list.

Wire layer name Specifies the name for the wire layer to modify. You may
type the layer name or select from the list of valid wire
layers. Wild cards are allowed.

List Displays a list of valid wire layers.

Default Automatically enters the default value for the format, se-
quence start, and suffix list fields.

504 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Wire number format for layer Defines the format override.

Starting wire sequence Specifies the sequential start number for the layer. Use this
if you are using Sequential Mode.

Wire number suffix list for layer Specifies a unique suffix list. The suffix list must be a comma
delimited string. Use this if you are using Reference Mode.

Replaceable parameters for device tagging and wire numbering

%F Component family code string (ex: "PB", "SS", "CR", "FLT", "MTR")

%S Drawing's sheet number (ex: "01" entered in upper right)

%D Drawing number

%G Drawing's wire layer name

%N Sequential or Reference-based number applied to the component

%X Suffix character position for reference-based tagging (not present =

end of tag)

%P IEC-style project code (default for drawing)

%I IEC-style installation code (default for drawing)

%L IEC-style location code (default for drawing)

%A Project drawing list's SEC value for active drawing

%B Project drawing list's SUB-SEC value for active drawing

NOTE If you include %I or %L in your component's Tag code, you will be

prompted to recalculate the component's tag if you change the Installation or
Location value of the component once it has been inserted.

Encode wire color/gauge information into wire numbers | 505

Fix Wire Numbering
Fix a wire number
In some cases, you may find that certain wire numbers must be preassigned.
These might include motor wiring that needs to include special suffix values
or other wiring, such as instrumentation, that might not follow the default
numbering convention. Manually edit the wire number and flip it to fixed.

506 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Fixing a wire number means that the wire number tag is left unchanged if
later processed or reprocessed by the automatic wire numbering utility.

1 Click the Edit Wire Number tool.

2 Select a wire or select an existing wire number. If a wire number

exists, the Modify/Fix/Unfix dialog box displays. However, if
a wire number doesn't exist on the selected wire, the Insert
Wire Number dialog box displays.

3 Edit the wire number or enter a new wire number. If you are
inserting a wire number, use the arrows or click Pick to select
the appropriate wire number. Pick speeds up the task if you
have a number of special wire numbers to manually edit.

4 Select to make the wire number visible or hidden.

5 If you want the wire number to be fixed, select Fixed and click
OK. If the wire number is already fixed and you want to turn
it back into a regular wire number, clear the check box and
click OK.

Fix all wire numbers

There may be times when you want to fix all or many wire numbers on a
drawing at their current values. Use the Fix Wire Numbers tool and identify
all of the wiring you want AutoCAD Electrical to mark as fixed.

1 Click the arrow on the Edit Wire Number tool to access the
Fix Wire Numbers tool.

2 Click the Fix Wire Numbers tool.

3 Select a wire number or component to fix.

4 Right-click when you are done selecting the wires. You can
check whether the wire is fixed by clicking the Edit Wire
Number tool, selecting the wire, and reviewing the dialog box.

Fix/unfix all wire numbers project-wide

Fix Wire Numbering | 507

 You can quickly fix or unfix all wire numbers across the active project using
the Project-Wide Utilities tool.

1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the

Project-Wide Utilities tool.

2 Click the Project-Wide Utilities tool.

3 In the Project-Wide Utilities dialog box, Wire Numbers section,

select Set all wire numbers to fixed or Set all wire numbers to
normal, and click OK.

4 Select the drawings to process and click OK.

Modify/fix/unfix
When a wire number is fixed, the wire number attribute is renamed and moved
to a special fixed wire number layer. Assigning a different color to this layer
makes it easy to identify which wire numbers are fixed and which are normal.
The layer name for fixed wire numbers is entered in the Define Layers dialog
box (from the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box).

Access:

Click the Edit Wire Number tool.

From the Wires menu, select Edit Wire Number.

Wire Number Specifies the wire number to edit. Use the arrows to scroll
through possible wire numbers.
If you enter an existing wire number during the insert/edit
process, a warning dialog displays (turn off the warning in
the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box. This
temporarily disables the warning dialog box for the current
session of AutoCAD Electrical). This alerts you of the duplic-
ation and suggests alternative wire number based on the
user-defined format. You can select whether to use the
duplicated wire number, use a new wire number that is
suggested, or you can type in a wire number.

508 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 NOTE An error log file is created for every project regard-
less whether you chose to display the real time warning
dialog or not. The real time warning is saved in the log file
named "<project_name>_error.log" and is saved in the User
subdirectory.

Pick Prefills the wire number edit box with the text entity you
select. Use Up or Down to quickly increment or decrement
the wire number.

Make it Fixed Fixes the wire number so that it does not change if later
processed by the automatic wire numbering utility.

Visible/Hidden Displays or hides the wire number on the drawing. Hidden

wire numbers are still present and appear in wire reports.

Zoom Restores the previous screen view (a zoom extents may be

done to follow an untagged wire that travels off screen).

Project-wide utilities
You can have multiple drawings open at any time. However, in order to
maximize performance and memory usage you may want to minimize the
number of open drawings when running project-wide commands.

Access:

Click the Project-Wide Utilities button.

From the Projects menu, select Project-Wide Utilities.

Wire Numbers

Select to keep wire numbers the same, erase specified wire numbers, reset
specified wire numbers, or set wire numbers to fixed or normal.

Signal Arrow Cross-reference text

Select to maintain the signal arrow cross-reference text or to remove all signal
arrow cross-reference text across the current project.

Fix Wire Numbering | 509

 Component Tags

Select to maintain the component tags or to set all parent component tags to
fixed or normal across the current project.

For each drawing

Enter the name or browse to a command script file to be used for each drawing
in the current project or to purge all blocks.

Change Attribute

Change Attribute Size Click Setup to select the attributes to change, and then
enter the height and width definitions for the selected at-
tributes.

NOTE If you do not want the attribute height or width to

change, do not enter a value definition.

Change Style Click Setup to select a text font to apply to the text style
used on component attributes.

510 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Reposition Wire Numbers
Scoot wire numbers
If you want to move a wire number along its wire segment, use Scoot and pick
right on the wire number.

1 Click the Scoot tool.

2 Select the wire number to slide along its connected wires or

select the wire segment itself to scoot the entire wire, including
the components, along the bus. You can scoot an entire rung
up or down. A rectangle drawn in temporary graphics indicates
the selected items.

3 Move your cursor to the desired position and click your mouse
button.
The items scoot and reconnect.

Move a wire number

If you want to move an existing wire number from one segment of the network
to another, use the Move Wire Number command.

1 Click the arrow on the Edit Wire Number tool to access the
Move Wire Number tool.

2 Click the Move Wire Number tool.

3 Select the wire segment where you want the wire number re-
positioned (you don't have to first pick on the existing wire
number).
The wire number automatically moves to the selected position.

Rotate a wire number

Reposition Wire Numbers | 511

 1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the
Rotate Attribute tool.

2 Click the Rotate Attribute tool.

3 Select the wire number text to rotate 90 degrees from its current
orientation.
Each click on the wire number text rotates it another 90 degrees
counter-clockwise.

Reposition the wire number text with an attached leader

If you want to reposition the wire number text with an attached leader, use
the Wire Number Leader command.

1 Click the Wire Number Leader tool.

2 Select the wire number text.

3 Select the new position for the wire number. Right-click or

press Enter to position the wire number.

NOTE You can type "C" at the command prompt to collapse the
wire leader back to the wire number block. You can do this imme-
diately after inserting a leader if you determine that you don't
want the leader or you can rerun the command if you want to
remove the leader from existing wire numbers.

Move the wire number without use of a leader

If you want to reposition the wire number without use of a leader, use the
Move Attribute utility.

1 Click the Move/Show Attribute tool.

2 Select the attribute(s) to move and press Enter.

You can pick the components individually or by windowing.
Each attribute highlights with a rectangular box drawn around

512 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 it.

3 Select the base and insertion points for the move. The attribute
follows your cursor and is automatically moved to the selected
position.
The attributes remain tied to the parent block inserts.

NOTE Avoid using the AutoCAD MOVE command to reposition a wire number.
An AutoCAD Electrical smart wire number is an invisible block with one visible
wire number attribute associated with it. The block's X-Y insertion point needs to
physically lie on the wire segment. If it is forced off of the segment during an
AutoCAD MOVE command, then AutoCAD Electrical no longer sees it linked to
the wire. If you want to use straight AutoCAD commands to reposition a wire
number, use GRIPS to move the wire number attribute or any other attribute
position editing command so that you reposition the wire number attribute but
not its underlying block insertion point.

Swap wire numbers

Swap wire numbers between two wire networks by selecting the Swap Wire
Numbers tool. Select on the "From" and the "To" wire networks or pick right
on the existing wire number text.

1 Click the arrow on the Edit Wire Number tool to access the
Swap Wire Numbers tool.

2 Click the Swap Wire Numbers tool.

3 Select the first wire or number and then select the second wire
or number.
The wire numbers automatically switch positions.

Position extra wire numbers

Extra wire numbers can be positioned anywhere on a wire network. These
copies follow the network's main wire number attribute. If AutoCAD Electrical
modifies it, then any wire number copies on the network also update. Extra
wire numbers go on their own layer that is defined in the Define Layers dialog

Reposition Wire Numbers | 513

 box. If you assign a color to this layer that is different than the normal wire
number and fixed wire number layers, then it is easy to tell them apart from
the network's main wire number.

1 Click the Copy Wire Numbers tool.

2 Select the wire location where you want the extra wire number
to insert.

Position wire numbers in-line with the wire

514 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

You may want some wire numbers to appear in-line with the wire rather than
above or below the wire.

1 Click the arrow on the Copy Wire Numbers tool to access the
Copy Wire Number (In-Line) tool.

2 Click the Copy Wire Number (In-Line) tool.

3 Specify the insertion point for the wire number.

4 In the Insert Wire Number dialog box, enter the wire number,
use Pick to select similar text from the drawing, or click the
arrows to increment or decrement the wire number.

5 Click OK. The wire number is automatically inserted in-line

with the wire.
If the gap between the wire and the wire number text isn't
quite large enough you can change the gap setup.

6 Click the arrow on the Copy Wire Numbers tool to access the
Adjust In-Line Wire/Label Gap tool.

7 Click the Adjust In-Line Wire/Label Gap tool.

8 Type S and press Enter to open the In-Line Wire Label Gap
Setup dialog box.

9 Adjust the values as necessary to define the adjustment for the

gap size.
■ A: Specifies the width between the end of the wire and the text. The
second option for setting "A" is the snap setting for the width. The
width stays constant until the text grows to a point where the Text +
A + A gets past the current gap width in the wire. The gap width then
jumps up to the next snap width increment. If this 2nd value is set to
0.25, the gaps in the wires are always going to be at 0.25 increments
(0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.0). If this middle value is left at 0.0, then the snap
distance is 0 and the gap in the wire grows or shrinks smoothly as the
wire text grows or shrinks.
■ C: Specifies the minimum gap width by setting a fixed size value. If
you want fixed spacing for the in-line wire number gap, enter a size
value in the C edit box. A non-blank C value gives the minimum gap

Reposition Wire Numbers | 515

 width even if the wire number is a single character or has been blanked
out.

The gap is adjusted for the selected wire number.

Mirror a wire number

1 Click the Flip Wire Number tool.

2 Select the wire number to mirror.

Each wire number selected is mirrored across its associated
wire.

TIP Use the Toggle Wire Number In-Line tool to move a wire number from
above/below the wire to in-line, and vice-versa.

Toggle wire number position

Use the Toggle Wire Number In-Line tool to switch the wire number between
above or below and inline. If the selected wire number is inline, it switches
to above or below based on the default Wire Number Placement setting in the
Drawing Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box. If it starts as above or below,
the selected wire number toggles to in-line.

NOTE If there isn't room for a wire number to become an inline wire number, it
remains an above or below line wire number.

TIP Use the Flip Wire Number tool to switch a wire number between above and
below the wire.

1 Click the Toggle Wire Number In-Line tool.

2 Select the wire number to toggle. You can select on the wire
number or on the wire itself.

3 Right-click to exit the command.

Drawing properties: wire numbers tab

516 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 Apply a drawing-specific wire number settings that are maintained inside the
drawing's WD_M block.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing
name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties.

Wire Number Format

Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based.

Format Specifies the way new wire number tags are created. The
wire number tag format must include the %N parameter
that is the base sequential or reference-based value per the
selection above. If your format includes the sheet number
%S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter, you
must enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing
Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box.

NOTE For reference-based wire number tagging, individual

items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep
multiple wires in the same reference location unique. These
are added to the end of the tag, but you can force AutoCAD
Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within
the tag format. Use the Suffix position parameter, %X, in
the component tag format (for example, %X%N).

Search for PLC I/O address on insert Specifies to use PLC I/O address values for wires that con-
nect to an addressed I/O point. This overrides both Sequen-
tial and Reference-based tagging. New wires or wire renum-
bering on the current drawing shows PLC I/O address-based
wire numbers automatically.

NOTE Like component tags, AutoCAD Electrical uses the

concept of a wire tag format string with replaceable para-
meters. The %N parameter must always be part of the wire
format string. A typical format string might be just this %N
parameter.

Reposition Wire Numbers | 517

Sequential Enter the starting sequential number (alpha, numeric, or
alphanumeric) for the drawing. If you enter the same
starting sequential number for every drawing of your wiring
diagram set, AutoCAD Electrical confirms at insertion time
that a new sequential wire number tag is not repeated on
any other drawing.
If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200, the wire
numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and those on DEMO2
start at 200. If DEMO1 has more than 100 wire numbers
it starts using wire number 200 and above while DEMO2
would begin its wire numbers where DEMO1 left off
(making sure that duplicate wire numbers are not assigned).

Increment The default is "1." Setting it to "2" with a starting sequential

of "1" would yield wire numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, and so
on.

Line Reference Sets the wire number tag suffix. This list is used to create
unique reference-based wire number tags for multiple wire
networks beginning at the same reference location (such
as wire network beginning at a location per line reference
number, X-Y grid reference, or X-Zone reference).

Suffix Setup Displays a suffix list. List suffix characters for wire numbers
beginning on the same line reference or in the same zone
(to keep wire numbers unique). Select one of the 4 pre-
defined suffix lists or enter your own custom suffix list.

New Wire Number Placement

NOTE The Insert Wire Number tool does not take the current wire number setting
(in-line, above or below) into account when updating existing wire numbers; this
setting is used only when inserting new wire numbers. Use the Toggle Wire Number
In-Line tool for flipping existing wire numbers among the 3 modes.

Above Wire Places the wire number above the physical wire.

In-Line Places the wire number inline with the wire.

518 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Gap Setup Defines spacing between the inline wire number and the wire it-
self.

Below Wire Places the wire number below the physical wire.

Offset Specifies to insert the wire number tags the specified offset dis-
tance.

Centered Specifies to insert the wire number tags in the center of each wire
segment.

Offset Distance Specifies a fixed, user-defined offset distance from the left or top
of the first wire segment found on the wire network.

Leaders (This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers.) AutoCAD

Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that
the wire number text bumps into something (it does not check
if the leader itself will overlay another object). Select the method
for inserting new wire numbers as leaders: As Required, Always,
or Never.

NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already
present on the drawing.

Modify Wire Numbers

Increment wire numbers
You can force new incremental wire numbers (as opposed to line referenced
numbers) to increment by more than one during insertion.
In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Wire Numbers tab. In the Wire
Number Format section, select Sequential and set the increment value. If you
want this increment value to be your standard for all new drawings, follow
the same procedure in the Project Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box.

Modify Wire Numbers | 519

 NOTE You can also do this by creating an electrical template drawing with the
wd_m block pre-inserted and the increment value pre-assigned.

Change the default wire number size

You will need to change several block inserts in each of the symbol libraries
you use. The wire number block drawings you need to adjust are: wd_wnh.dwg
(horizontal wire number), wd_wnv.dwg (vertical wire number), wd_wch.dwg
(horizontal extra wire number copy), and wd_wcv.dwg (vertical extra wire
number copy). You can find these in your AutoCAD Electrical symbol library
(C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\jic1, jic125, iec2,
iec4, and so on).

1 Determine which schematic symbol library is in use and open drawing

"wd_wnh.dwg" in AutoCAD.

2 Change the text size of the WIRENO attribute definition.

3 Save the drawing.

4 Open drawings "wd_wnv.dwg", "wd_wch.dwg", and "wd_wcv.dwg."

5 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each.

NOTE You won't see these new, resized wire numbers on existing drawings unless
you erase all of the wire numbers and purge the drawing of the old block inserts.

Make wire numbers on vertical wires come in rotated 90

degrees
You can make wire numbers for vertical wires come in automatically rotated
90 degrees so the wire number lays along the wire.

1 Determine which schematic symbol library is in use and open drawing

"wd_wnv.dwg" in AutoCAD.

2 Rotate the WIRENO attribute 90 degrees using the AutoCAD Rotate

command.

3 Save the drawing.

4 Open drawing "wd_wcv.dwg."

5 Repeat steps 2 and 3.

520 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Erase or Hide Wire Numbers

Erase a wire number

If you erase a wire number and select right on an extra wire number copy,
AutoCAD Electrical will erase just that copy but leave the networks main wire
number and any other copies in place.

1 Select Wires ➤ Delete Wire Numbers.

2 Select the wire number or pick on any wire in the network.

3 Press Enter. The wire number is automatically deleted.

Extra wire number copies can also be deleted.

Erase all wire numbers project-wide

1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the

Project-Wide Utilities tool.

2 Click the Project-Wide Utilities tool.

3 Select to remove all wire numbers or keep fixed wire numbers

and click OK.

4 Select which drawings you want to process and click OK.

The selected drawings are processed and the wire numbers
change across the project.

Hide wire numbers

Erase or Hide Wire Numbers | 521

 AutoCAD Electrical automatically hides wire numbers when the wire number
is on the same network as a terminal symbol that carries a copy of the wire
number (WIRENO attribute). There may be times when you want to manually
hide or unhide wire number(s).

1 Click the arrow on the Edit Wire Number tool to access the
Hide Wire Numbers tool.

2 Click the Hide Wire Numbers tool.

3 Select a wire number or the wire it is associated to. AutoCAD

Electrical moves the wire number to a special hide layer and
the number is no longer visible on the screen.
The new hide layer is created from the wire number layer name
with a "_HIDE" suffix. For example, if the wire number text
layer is called WIRENO then the hide layer name is called
"WIRENO_HIDE". The layer is created automatically when
needed and you are asked if you want to freeze this layer.

Unhide wire numbers

1 Click the arrow on the Edit Wire Number tool to access the
Unhide Wire Numbers tool.

2 Click the Unhide Wire Numbers tool.

3 Select a wire number or the wire the hidden number is associ-

ated to.
AutoCAD Electrical moves the wire number out of the hide
layer and the number is visible on the screen.

X zones setup

522 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 Use this tool to insert the X grid labels for drawings that use X Zones for the
Format Referencing. You can also change other settings from here (such as
origin) instead of going back into the Drawing Properties dialog box.

NOTE Your drawing must be configured for X Zones. Set the Format Referencing
in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box to X Zones.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Ladder tool to access the X Zone tool.

NOTE You can also access this dialog from the Project Properties or Drawing
Properties dialog boxes. Some options are not available when you access the dialog
box through the properties dialog boxes.

Origin Specifies the origin for the X Zone grid. Click pick to select
the origin on the drawing or enter X and Y values.

NOTE The Pick button is not available when accessed

through the properties dialog box.

Spacing Specifies the spacing between the grid columns. Enter the
horizontal value.

Zone labels (only available when accessed from the toolbar or menu)
Specifies the labels for the grid columns. Enter the horizont-
al value. You can enter the first value only or a complete
list. If you enter a list, separate the values with commas -
such as "A, B, C, D."

Insert zone labels (only available when accessed from the toolbar or menu)
Specifies whether to insert the grid labels. If you select to
insert the labels, enter the column counts.

X-Y grid setup

X-Y grid setup | 523

 Use this tool to insert the X-Y grid labels for drawings that use X-Y Grid for
the Format Referencing. You can also change other settings from here (such
as origin) instead of going back into the Drawing Properties dialog box.

NOTE Your drawing must be configured for X-Y Grids. Set the Format Referencing
in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box to X-Y Grid.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Ladder tool to access the XY Grid tool.

NOTE You can also access this dialog from the Project Properties or Drawing
Properties dialog boxes. Some options are not available when you access the dialog
box through the properties dialog boxes.

Origin Specifies the origin for the XY grid. Click pick to select the origin on
the drawing or enter X and Y values.

NOTE The Pick button is not available when accessed through the
properties dialog box.

Spacing Specifies the spacing between the grid columns. Enter the horizontal
and vertical values.

X-Y Format Specifies the order that is used from the X-Y grid in determining the
%N part of the tag. If this is set to Horizontal, the horizontal values
of the grid are used as the first part, and the vertical value as the
second. If Vertical is selected then the vertical values are used for the
first part and the horizontal values used for the second. Example: if
you have Horizontal values of A - F and Vertical values of 1 - 9 and
this is set to Horizontal, you might get a %N value of "B2"; if this is
set to Vertical you might get a %N value of "2B."

Grid labels (only available when accessed from the toolbar or menu) Specifies
the labels for the grid columns. Enter the horizontal and vertical values.
You can enter the first value only or a complete list. If you enter a list,
separate the values with commas - such as "A, B, C, D."

524 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Insert X-Y grid labels (only available when accessed from the toolbar or menu) Specifies
whether to insert the grid labels. If you select to insert the labels,
enter the horizontal and vertical column counts.

PLC I/O wire numbers

This tool inserts wire numbers based upon the I/O address that each PLC
connected wire touches. Wire numbers go in as FIXED which means that they
do not change if a wire number retag is run later on.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Wire Numbers tool to access the PLC I/O Wire
Numbers tool.
From the Wires menu, select Wire Numbers Miscellaneous ➤ PLC I/O Wire
Numbers.

I/O Wire Tag Format: Specifies the wire tag format for the plc wire.

Predefined: Uses an exact wire number match on the address. The

options are I:%n or O:%n.

NOTE For automatic wire numbering based strictly on the actual I/O address,
open the Drawing Properties dialog box, and click the Wire Number tab. In the
Wire Numbering section, select Search for I/O address on insert.

Control from/to report connection sequencing

A wire network consisting of three or more interconnected components
introduces potential unknowns into a from/to connection report. Does A
connect to B and then jumper to C or does C connect to A and jumper to B?
By default, AutoCAD Electrical reports from/to connections on a single network

PLC I/O wire numbers | 525

 by first grouping devices by common Location codes and sequentially reports
each group’s inter-wiring. It then ties each common Location group together
with a single from/to wire connection. For wire connections with the same
Location group (or if all devices have the same Location value or no Location
value), AutoCAD Electrical attempts to sort the wire connections by physical
location on the drawing and report the from/to connections in that order.

NOTE You can keep jumpers from displaying in Wire From/To reports by placing
the jumpers on a layer that contains the substring "JUMPER."

AutoCAD Electrical provides several methods to more specifically define wire

connection sequencing.

NOTE You can run one or more sequencing methods simultaneously, even in the
same wire network, since there is a hierarchy of which methods takes precedence
over others.

Angled Tee Wire Connection Method

The use of angled tee wire connections can influence the wire connection
sequence reporting. Sequencing is defined by the tee symbol’s orientation (a
three-digit attribute value named WDWSEQ carried on the symbol). The 90
degree turn or the straight-through section (depending on the style of the
angled tee symbol) indicates the beginning of the sequence, while the 45
degree turn is the secondary connection. AutoCAD Electrical reports each wire
connection as it is shown.
This method of influencing from/to reporting may fail to give expected results
if the orientation and arrangement of multiple angled tee connection symbols
in a given network is ambiguous or if it defines more than two connected
wires to a given device’s wire connection point.
Set the automatic angled wire tee insert mode (instead of tee intersection dots)
in the Project Properties ➤ Styles dialog box.

NOTE Schematic wire sequencing and Direct-to-Terminal wire sequencing, if

present, overrides the Angled Tee connection sequencing.

Schematic Wire Connection Sequence Method

This involves touching the connection sequence for each wire network
containing three or more interconnected components. AutoCAD Electrical
places an incrementing connection sequence value on each wire connection
point (saved as a three-digit Xdata value, starting with “001” on the wire

526 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

connection attribute). When any of the AutoCAD Electrical From/To reports
processes wire networks containing this incrementing sequencing data, the
from/to wire connections order accordingly.

NOTE Schematic wire connection and Direct-to-Terminal sequencing methods

on a given wire network take precedence over all other sequencing methods. For
example, if a wire network is sequenced with the Edit Wire Sequence tool, the
sequencing influence normally provided by angled tee marker symbols used in
the wire network is overridden.

Direct-to-Terminal Wire Connection Sequence Method

This defines additional Direct-to-Terminal wire connection sequences. For

example, one side of a schematic terminal might be connected to three devices.
A specific wire connection sequence (using the Schematic Wire Connection
sequence method above) can be defined to force the connection reporting
but it is limited to reporting the terminal as a common connection point
between only two of the three devices. The third device would default to being
reported as jumpered to one of the other two devices. Additional secondary
Direct-to-Terminal sequences can be defined so that the third device can be
sequenced directly to the terminal (you can also directly sequence two
terminals together). The result is that the From/To connection reporting shows
all three devices tied directly to the terminal.

NOTE The limit of Direct-to-Terminal sequences that you can define in a single
wire network is 50.

Level/Routing Method

This brings the panel layout into play to affect the reporting sequence in the
various From/To reports. The panel layout or panel wiring diagram layout
representations are assigned level/routing codes consisting of a four-level
hierarchy plus a sequence number. As schematic wire networks are processed
for the From/To reports, the existence of panel layout representations that are
marked with level/routing values is checked. If this information is found for
all the devices of the network being processed, the network's connections are
sorted by this hierarchy and sequence information. The result is a set of
From/To reported connections that follow the level/routing data carried by
the layout.

NOTE Schematic wire sequencing and Direct-to-Terminal wire sequencing, if

present, override the influence of Level/Routing sequencing.

Control from/to report connection sequencing | 527

 Edit a wire network's connection sequence

You can explicitly define the wire connection sequence of any wire networks
consisting of three or more interconnected devices. Doing this gives you
control over how AutoCAD Electrical analyzes the circuits (such as the order
of the contents in the WFRM2ALL table in the project’s scratch database file)
and how from/to connection information is output to various reports or
annotated on to physical footprint representations (using the Panel Layout
➤ Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint tool).

NOTE The * next to a wire in the Wire Connection Sequence portion of the Edit
Wire Connection Sequence dialog box indicates that the device wire connection
is on another drawing. A “t” indicates that the device is a schematic terminal and
is a candidate for Direct-to-Terminal sequencing.

528 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Edit a wire sequence

This tool predefines a wire network's connection sequence. The network can
be either fully contained on the active drawing or pass across multiple drawings
using signal source/destination symbols.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Edit Wire
Sequence tool.

2 Click the Edit Wire Sequence tool.

NOTE You can also access this tool by right-clicking on any wire
segment in the wire network.

3 Select any wire segment on the wire network you want to

process.

4 On the Edit Wire Connection Sequence dialog box, adjust the

connection to connection sequencing in the list by clicking
Move Up or Move Down or click Pick Mode to define the se-
quencing by actual picks at each wire connection point.

NOTE Pick Mode is unavailable when you are working with a wire
network that crosses multiple drawing files. If you are working
with wire networks that jump to one or more additional drawings,
click Freshen to update the wire connectivity database with any
out-of-date files.

5 (Optional) To directly connect additional components to a

given terminal, select the components and the terminal
(marked with a “t” in the left-hand column) in the Wire
Connection Sequence list and click Add.
A copy of the terminal and the actual component move to the
Direct-to-Terminal Secondary Sequences list at the bottom of
the dialog box. You can then click Move Up or Move Down
to change the order of the sequence (if you’ve selected two or
more devices plus a terminal) or remove a sequence by selecting
the sequence and clicking Reset.

6 Click OK-new.
This writes the sequence information back to the component

Control from/to report connection sequencing | 529

 wire connections (as Xdata on the wire connection attributes
and optionally to terminal symbols in the case of Direct-to-
Terminal Secondary sequencing).

7 (Optional) Right-click on a wire on the wire network and select

Wire Sequence ➤ Show Wire Sequence. Press the spacebar to
advance through the sequence.
You can also view the results of your sequencing by running
the Wire From/To report.

Show a defined wire sequence

This tool shows the wire sequence defined using the Edit Wire Sequence tool.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Show
Wire Sequence tool.

2 Click the Show Wire Sequence tool.

NOTE You can also access this tool by right-clicking on any wire
segment in the wire network.

3 Press the Space bar to step through the defined wire sequence.

NOTE If the wire sequence crosses multiple drawings and you try to view the
sequence as an animation, a dialog box listing the off-drawing wire connection
information displays so that you can indicate to go to the other drawing(s) to
continue viewing the sequence.

Insert wire tee markers

Use the tee marker tools to insert dot tee markers or angled tee markers at
existing wire tee intersections or to flip existing markers from dot to angled
and vice versa. This dot and angled tee insertion happens automatically when
you use the Insert Wire tool and the drawing is set up (in the Drawing
Properties ➤ Styles dialog box) for dots or angled tee symbols at insersections.

530 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

You cannot insert a tee connection symbol into empty space. A valid line wire
ending (not crossing) at a tee intersection somewhere along the length of
another line wire is needed. This means that it does not insert a tee connection
symbol at a simple 90-degree wire turn. You can right-click on any of your
inserted tee markers for access to editing tools such as Toggle Angled Tee
Markers, Delete Component, Scoot, or Insert Wire.

Insert dot tee markers

Use this tool to insert a dot tee connection symbol at a manually drawn wire
intersection. If present, this replaces an existing angled wire connection symbol
with a dot connection symbol.

NOTE For these dot or angled tee markers to insert automatically as each wire
tee intersection is created, set the default Wire Tee connection in the Wiring Style
section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Styles dialog box.

1 Click the arrow on the Wire Tee Markers tool to access the
Insert Dot Tee Markers tool.

2 Click the Insert Dot Tee Markers tool.

3 Select at or near the intersection point.

NOTE If you want to change the tee symbol's orientation after

insertion, right-click on the marker and select Insert Angled Tee
Marker or Toggle Angled Tee Markers (or select the tool from the
toolbar). If you want to customize the appearance of this symbol,
edit the symbol stored in the selected schematic symbol library.
Note that angled tee symbols carry attribute WDWSEQ with a
three-digit value that defines preferred wire sequence order. The
dot symbol name is WDDOT.dwg.

Right-click on the marker and select Delete Component to re-

move an inserted tee connection symbol and heal the wires.

Insert angled tee markers

This inserts an angled tee connection symbol at an existing wire intersection.

Control from/to report connection sequencing | 531

 NOTE For these dot and angled tee markers to insert automatically as each wire
tee intersection is created, set the default Wire Tee connection in the Wiring Style
section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Styles dialog box.

1 Click the arrow on the Wire Tee Markers tool to access the
Insert Angled Tee Markers tool.

2 Click the Insert Angled Tee Markers tool.

3 Select at or near the intersection point.

If a dot marker is present, it is deleted and replaced by the
angled tee symbol.

4 After the symbol inserts and reconnects to the wiring, press

the spacebar or Enter to switch the inserted tee through 4 dif-
ferent orientations. Press Esc when the appropriate orientation
displays.

NOTE If you want to change the tee symbol's orientation after

insertion, right-click on the marker and select Toggle Angled Tee
Markers (or select the tool from the toolbar). To customize the
appearance of these symbols, edit the tee symbols stored in the
selected schematic symbol library. These tee symbol names are
HT0_###.dwg and VT0_###.dwg where # = combinations of
1,2,4, and 8. Be aware that each symbol carries attribute WDWSEQ
with a three-digit value indicating wire connection sequence pri-
ority for the three wire connection points of the symbol.

Right-click on the marker and select Delete Component to re-

move an inserted tee connection symbol and heal the wires.

Toggle angled tee markers

This toggles an existing angled tee connection symbol (or windowed symbols)
through a total of 4 possible orientations.

1 Click the arrow on the Wire Tee Markers tool to access the
Toggle Angled Tee Markers tool.

532 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 2 Click the Toggle Angled Tee Markers tool.

3 Select or window the tee connections to change.

4 Right-click or press the spacebar to toggle through the various

tee connection orientations, and press Esc when the desired
one displays. This replaces any dot tee symbols with angled
tee symbols and then toggles through the 4 possible orienta-
tions for each.

Edit wire connection sequence

This tool defines the wire connection sequence of any wire networks containing
three or more interconnected devices. Doing this gives you control over how
AutoCAD Electrical analyzes the circuits (such as the order of the contents in
the WFRM2ALL table in the project’s scratch database file) and how from/to
connection information is output to various reports or annotated on physical
footprint representations (using the Panel Layout ➤ Wire Annotation of
Panel Footprint tool).

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Edit Wire Sequence tool.
Click Wires ➤ Wire Miscellaneous ➤ Edit Wire Sequence.

NOTE You can also access this by right-clicking on any segment of a wire network
and selecting Wire Sequence ➤ Edit Wire Sequence.

Provides tools to define the desired sequence order, such as sorting the
components by physical location, moving the components up or down in the
listing, and going into a pick mode (in the active drawing only) where you
can pick the wire connection points in order to define the connection
sequence.
Once you specify the sequencing, you can use the Show Wire Sequences tool
to view the sequence or use the Wire From/To reporting tool to see how the
sequencing is reported.

Control from/to report connection sequencing | 533

 NOTE Your dialog box differs depending on whether you selected to modify the
sequence of a wire network that is connected to a terminal. When a terminal is
part of the selected wire network, you have an option to define secondary
Direct-to-Terminal wire connection sequences.

Wire Connection Sequence Lists the wires and terminals found in the circuit.
The * indicates that the wire is on another drawing
and the “t” indicates that the entry is a terminal
and a candidate for a direct-to-terminal secondary
sequence definition.

NOTE Components connected on the far side of

a terminal (on a side opposite of the picked wire
network) are not displayed in the list, even if the
terminal is one that does not change the wire
number through it.

Pick Mode Defines the sequence by actual picks at or very near

each wire connection point. Pick near each wire
connection in the order of how you want the wiring
sequence to proceed from component to compon-
ent.

NOTE Pick Mode is unavailable when you are

working with a wire network that crosses multiple
drawing files.

Sort Location Automatically sorts the wire connection display by

the installation and location values. If previously
sorted, the sort is reversed.

Move Up Moves the selected wire connection up one space

in the wire order list.

Move Down Moves the selected wire connection down one

space in the wire order list.

Direct-to-Terminal Secondary Sequences Lists additional sequences where a component

connection (or terminal connection) is to be repor-
ted as being directly wired to a selected terminal.

534 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Add Moves the selected components to the Direct-to-
Terminal Secondary Sequences list along with a
copy of the selected terminal. You must select the
components and terminal to sequence together for
this button to be available.
If you select multiple components to daisy-chain
to the terminal (by holding CTRL key down), the
first selected component displays ties directly to
the terminal.

Reset (available only when an entry in the sequence is

highlighted) Removes the selected sequencing from
the Direct-to-Terminal Secondary Sequences list.
The component is moved back to the Wire Connec-
tion Sequence list.

Connection Indicates whether the component is undefined (-),

reported on the internal side of the terminal (I) or
reported on the external side of the terminal (E). If
selected, an I or E displays in the PD1 or PD2
column (Point Description) of the Wire From/To
report.

Freshen Updates the wire connectivity database (the

WFRM2ALL table) with wire connection information
from any out-of-date files.

NOTE If all drawings are up-to-date, this button is

disabled. If not, the button is enabled and the count
of out-of-date drawings displays next to the button.

Remove All Removes the wire connection sequence information

from a wire network. This consists of Xdata assign-
ments on component wire connection attributes
and optional Xdata assignments on terminal sym-
bols if any Direct-to-Terminal sequences are
defined.

OK-new Applies the dialog’s wire connection sequence in-

formation in the form of Xdata to the wire connec-
tion points and terminals of the selected wire net-

Control from/to report connection sequencing | 535

 work. This sequence data is then maintained inside
of the drawing file and subsequently extracted into
the project scratch database file to control the
format of wire connections listed in the WFRM2ALL
table.

Add custom signal arrow styles

The icon menu graphics that display for the various signal styles are bitmap
files saved to your C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Acade\
folder where AutoCAD Electrical's Insert Signal utilities and Drawing Properties
tool can access them.

1 Create the new style in AutoCAD.

2 Zoom in to the new arrow style.

3 Save the file as a bitmap using the following name definition:

A_STYLExh.bmp where "x" is the arrow style 1-9.

NOTE If the resulting bitmap is too small or off-center, open the source
drawing in AutoCAD again. Resize your AutoCAD graphics window so that
it is more square. Center the image and resave. Repeat until you are satisfied
with the result.

Insert destination code

The wire number for a destination-arrowed wire network is retrieved from its
associated source-arrowed wire network. Enter the same number/word/phrase
that is carried on the source arrow to make the link to it.

NOTE A Destination signal arrow cannot be tied to a wire network that carries a
pre-assigned fixed wire number.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the Destination
Signal Arrow tool.

536 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Access:

From the Wires menu, select Signal References ➤ Destination Signal Arrow.

Code Specifies the code for the destination signal. Enter a unique
number/word/phrase, 32-character maximum, for AutoCAD
Electrical to use to internally link the destination wire net-
work to any/all source wire networks.

Description (optional) Specifies the description for the destination sig-

nal.

Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can quickly pick
standard descriptions.

Recent Picks from recently inserted codes.

Drawing Displays drawing-wide pick lists of all source/destination

codes used so far.

Project Displays project-wide pick lists of all source/destination

codes used so far.

Pick Picks on an existing wire network. AutoCAD Electrical

searches it for an existing source arrow and retrieves its
signal code for use on this new destination arrow.

Signal Arrow Style Specifies the arrow style to use for the destination signal.
There are currently 9 styles to choose from.

Ok + Update Source Finishes the destination arrow insert and updates the source
arrow with this destination arrow.

Signal - source code

The wire number from a source-arrowed wire network is copied to any/all
associated destination-arrowed wire networks. Enter a unique

Add custom signal arrow styles | 537

 number/word/phrase, 32-char maximum, for AutoCAD Electrical to use to
internally link the source wire network to any/all destination wire networks.

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the
Source Signal Arrow tool
From the Wires menu, select Signal References ➤ Source Signal Arrow.

Code Specifies the code for the source signal. Enter a

unique number/word/phrase, 32-character maxim-
um, for AutoCAD Electrical to use to internally link
the source wire network to any/all destination wire
networks.

Use Places the specified value into the code box. This
is useful for using the next number in a sequence.

Description (optional) Specifies the description for the source

signal.

Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can quickly
pick standard descriptions.

Recent Picks from recently inserted codes.

Drawing Displays drawing-wide pick lists of all source/destin-

ation codes used so far.

Project Displays project-wide pick lists of all source/destin-

ation codes used so far.

Search Follows the selected wire network looking for a

destination arrow at the other end. If found, repeat
its signal code for this new source arrow.

Pick Picks on an existing wire network. AutoCAD Elec-

trical searches it for an existing destination arrow

538 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 and retrieves its signal code for use on this new
source arrow.

Signal Arrow Style Specifies the arrow style to use for the source signal.
Select from the 4 pre-defined styles or a user-
defined style.

OK + Update Destination Finishes the source arrow insert and updates the
destination arrow with this source arrow.

Project properties: styles tab

Modify your project default settings for various component styles. All
information defined in this tab is saved to the project definition file as project
defaults and settings.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project
name, and select Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the project name, and select Properties.

Arrow Style Specifies the default wire signal arrow style. Select from
the 4 predefined styles or a user-defined style. You can
override the default style setting at insertion time.

TIP For instructions on how to add custom wire arrow

styles, see Add custom signal arrow styles. (page 536)

PLC Style Specifies the default PLC module style. Select from the 5
pre-defined styles or a user-defined style.

TIP For instructions on how to add custom PLC module

styles, see Add a new PLC style. (page 251)

Fan-In/Out Marker Style Defines the default Fan In/Out marker style and the layers
for wires going out of a Fan In/Out Source marker and
those coming into a Destination marker.

Add custom signal arrow styles | 539

 TIP For instructions on how to add custom Fan-In/Out
marker styles, see Add custom fan-in/out marker styles.
(page 548)

Layer List Lists the Fan In/Out layers.

Add Defines layer names as Fan In/Out layers.

Remove Removes the selected layer from the defined layer list.

Wire Cross Specifies the default mode of operation when wires cross
each other: insert gap with no loop, insert gap and loop,
or solid (no gap).

Wire Tee Specifies the default wire tee marker: none, dot, angle1 or
angle2.

Drawing properties: styles tab

Apply a drawing-specific component styles settings that are maintained inside
the drawing's WD_M block.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing
name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing
Properties.

Arrow Style Specifies the default wire signal arrow style. Select from the 4
predefined styles or a user-defined style. You can override the
default style setting at insertion time.

TIP For instructions on how to add custom wire arrow styles, see
Add custom signal arrow styles. (page 536)

PLC Style Specifies the default PLC module style. Select from the 5 pre-
defined styles or a user-defined style.

540 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 TIP For instructions on how to add custom PLC module styles,
see Add a new PLC style. (page 251)

Fan-In/Out Marker Style Defines the default Fan In/Out marker style and the layers for
wires going out of a Fan In/Out Source marker and those coming
into a Destination marker.

TIP For instructions on how to add custom Fan-In/Out marker

styles, see Add custom fan-in/out marker styles. (page 548)

Layer List Lists the Fan In/Out layers.

Add Defines layer names as Fan In/Out layers.

Remove Removes the selected layer from the defined layer list.

Wire Cross Specifies the default mode of operation when wires cross each
other: insert gap with no loop, insert gap, and loop, or solid (no
gap).

Wire Tee Specifies the default wire tee marker: none, dot, angle1 or angle2.

Wire signal or stand-alone reference report

There are 2 types of reports that can be generated: one on wire signal
source/destination codes and one on stand-alone reference codes.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the Signal Er-
ror/List Report tool.
From the Wires menu, select Signal References ➤ Signal Error/List Report.

Wire Signal Source/Destination codes re- Runs a report that lists all of the signal source and
port destinations used on the project drawing set or an

Wire signal or stand-alone reference report | 541

 exception report that lists problem areas such as a
destination signal with no source found or a source
signal that doesn't tie to a destination.
Click Format on the subdialog box to select from a
listing of report settings files found that have a prefix
equal to the selected report type.

Stand-alone Reference Source/Destination Runs a report that lists all the stand-alone source and
codes report destinations used on the project drawing set or an
exception report that lists problem areas such as a
destination reference with no source found or a
source reference that doesn't tie to a destination.
Click Format on the subdialog to select from a listing
of report settings files found that have a prefix equal
to the selected report type.

Surf Continues surfing on problems related to the selected

report.

Edit the cable conductor database

You can edit the cable conductor database table (_W0_CBLWIRES in the
default_cat.mdb file) just like any other AutoCAD Electrical catalog table. The
main Access database catalog file can be named either default_cat.mdb or
<project> _cat.mdb. You can open it in Microsoft Access or you can edit it
from within AutoCAD Electrical. To do so, right-click a cable marker and select
Edit Component from the context menu. In the Insert/Edit Cable Marker
dialog box, Catalog Data section, click Lookup. In the Parts Catalog dialog
box, click Cable Conductor List View/Edit.

Cable conductor database “_WO_CBLWIRES” table structure

The records in the cable conductor database table are structured as follows:

Field name Width Description

Catalog 60 Catalog number of cable

Manufacturer 24 Manufacturer code

542 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Conductor 24 Conductor color or ID code

Gauge 24 Conductor gauge description

Recnum N/A Auto number field (used internally)

For a given cable part number there is a record for each conductor within that
cable. For example, a 15-conductor Belden type 8486 cable has 15 records;
one for each conductor in that cable type. The Manufacturer and Catalog
fields for all 15 records are marked "BELDEN" and "8486." The Conductor field
carries each conductor's unique color id.

Show source and destination markers on wires

There may be times when you want to show source and destination markers
on the individual wires of a cable, but you want to show the wires coming
together to form the cable.

Source and Destination Markers | 543

 When a Fan In/Out marker is inserted, AutoCAD Electrical breaks the wire
and changes the layer of one side of the wire to a special layer. If you are
inserting a source marker, then the wire coming out of the marker is changed.
If it is a destination marker, the wire coming into the marker is changed. You
can use the AutoCAD Electrical Fan In/Out - Single Line Layer command to
change a wire to one of these layers.

544 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Add source markers

1 Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access

the Fan In/Out Source tool.

2 Click the Fan In/Out Source tool.

3 Select the style and orientation for the markers and click OK.

4 Select the insertion point on the screen for the marker.

The Signal-Source Code dialog box displays.

5 Enter a source code for the marker and optionally a description.

Enter a unique number/word/phrase, 32-character maximum,
for AutoCAD Electrical to use to internally link the source wire
network to any/all destination wire networks.

6 Select how you want to view the signal codes used so far:
■ Display drawing-wide or project-wide pick lists of all source/destination
codes used so far
■ Follow the selected wire network looking for a destination arrow at
the other end. If found, repeat its signal code for this new source ar-
row.
■ Pick on an existing wire network. AutoCAD Electrical searches it for
an existing destination arrow and retrieves its signal code for use on
this new source arrow.

7 Specify the arrow style to use for the destination signal.

8 Click OK.
The Source/Destination Signal Markers (for Fan In/Out) dialog
box displays. You have a few options for inserting the matching
destination marker:
■ Do not insert the matching destination marker.
■ Do not insert the matching destination marker after each source.
■ Insert the matching destination marker.
■ Automatically insert the matching destination markers for each source.

Show source and destination markers on wires | 545

 NOTE If the destination wires are nearby it may be easiest to insert them right
away. If they are on another drawing you can wait until later to insert them.

546 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Add destination markers

1 Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access

the Fan In/Out Destination tool.

2 Click the Fan In/Out Destination tool.

3 Select the style and orientation for the markers and click OK.

4 Select the wire for the destination marker.

The Insert Destination Code dialog box displays.

5 Enter the code or select Recent to see a list of the recent

markers inserted.

6 Specify the arrow style to use for the destination signal.

7 Continue selecting wires until all destination markers have

been inserted.

Set marker styles and layers

The AutoCAD Electrical Fan In/Out feature relies on layering to work. You
can select the default Fan In/Out marker style here along with defining the
layers for the wires.

1 Click the Drawing Properties tool.

2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Style tab.

If you have an older drawing, you may be warned about an
older version of the WD_M block. If that happens, go ahead
and swap the WD_M block and try again.

3 In the Fan-In/Out Marker Style section, set the default marker

style.

4 Define the layers for the wires. Click Add to define layer names
as Fan In/Out layers.

5 Click OK.

Show source and destination markers on wires | 547

 Define fan-in/out layers

A special layer or set of layers can be defined for the wires going out of a Fan
In/Out Source marker and the wires coming into a Destination marker.

1 Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access

the Fan In/Out - Single Line Layer tool.

2 Click the Fan In/Out - Single Line Layer tool.

The list displays only layers that are already assigned as Fan
In/Out Layers as defined in the drawing properties setup.

3 Use Pick if you aren't sure of the layer you want, but you have
a line on your drawing on that layer. You can also use this if
the line's layer isn't defined as a Fan In/Out layer and you want
to add it on the fly.

4 Select whether to make the layer current.

5 Check the box to change the existing fan in/out lines only if
you want to make sure that you only change the layers of wires
that are already defined as Fan In/Out wires. Otherwise Auto-
CAD Electrical can convert any selected lines to the Fan In/Out
layer.

Add custom fan-in/out marker styles

The icon menu graphics that display for the various Fan In/Out marker styles
are bitmap files saved to your C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade
{version}\Acade\ folder where AutoCAD Electrical's Fan In/Out utilities and
Drawing Properties tool can access them.

1 Create the new style in AutoCAD.

2 Zoom in to the new Fan In/Out marker style.

3 Save the file as a bitmap using the following name definition:

StylexVI.bmp and StylexVO.bmp where "x" is the fan-in/out marker style
1-9.

548 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

 NOTE If the resulting bitmap is too small or off-center, open the source
drawing in AutoCAD again. Resize your AutoCAD graphics window so that
it is more square. Center the image and resave. Repeat until you are satisfied
with the result.

Fan-in/fan-out signal source

Uses set of in-line source/destination symbols that follow the naming format
of ha#s?_inline.dwg and ha#d?_inline.dwg where # = style number and ? =
1,2,3,4 orientation number (just like with existing source/destination arrows).
Running new commands inserts in-line source marker symbols and changes
the connected wire on the fan-in side to be on a non-wire layer. Putting
matching destination in-line markers at the fan-out end does the same. It
changes the connected common wires on the fan-out side to a non-wire layer
but leaves the individual segments on the opposite side of marker on the
original wire layer. The AutoCAD Electrical source/destination update or Auto
Wire Number command then makes the match-up annotation, whether the
fan-in/fan-out are on the same or different drawings.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the Fan In/Out
Source tool.
From the Wires menu, select Signal References ➤ Fan In/Out Source.

Source marker style Specifies the style for the source marker. Some op-
tions are: Solid (wire num/desc), Break (wire num -
small gap/desc), Break (medium gap/desc), and Break
(wide gap/desc).

Wire connection orientation Specifies the orientation for the markers. Options
are: above, below, right, or left.

Fan-in/fan-out signal destination

Uses set of in-line source/destination symbols that follow the naming format
of ha#s?_inline.dwg and ha#d?_inline.dwg where # = style number and ? =
1,2,3,4 orientation number (just like with existing source/destination arrows).
Running new commands inserts in-line source marker symbols and changes
connected wire on the fan-in side to be on a non-wire layer. Putting matching
destination in-line markers at the fan-out end does the same. It changes the

Show source and destination markers on wires | 549

 connected common wires on the fan-out side to non-wire layer but leaves the
individual segments on the opposite side of marker on the original wire layer.
The AutoCAD Electrical source/destination update or Automatic Wire Number
command then makes the match-up annotation, whether the fan-in/fan-out
are on the same or different drawings.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the Fan In/Out
Destination tool.
From the Wires menu, select Signal References ➤ Fan In/Out Destination.

Destination marker style Specifies the style for the destination marker. Some
options are: Solid (wire num/desc), Break (wire num
- small gap/desc), Break (medium gap/desc), and
Break (wide gap/desc).

Wire connection orientation Specifies the orientation for the markers. Options
are: above, below, right, or left.

Fan-in/out - single line layer

A special layer or set of layers can be defined for the wires going out of a Fan
In/Out source marker and the wires coming into a destination marker.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the Fan In/Out
- Single Line Layer tool.
From the Wires menu, select Signal References ➤ Fan In/Out - Single Line
Layer.

Fan-In/Out Line Layers Displays only layers that are already assigned as Fan
In/Out Layers as defined in the drawing properties
setup.

Pick Picks similar fan-in/out lines from the drawing. You

can use this if the line's layer isn't defined as a Fan
In/Out layer and you want to add it on the fly.

550 | Chapter 8 Wire/Wire Number Tools

Change existing wires only (no convert) Changes only the layers of wires that are already
defined as Fan In/Out wires. Otherwise AutoCAD
Electrical can convert any selected lines to the Fan
In/Out layer.

One pick gets all connected wires Changes all of the wires to the selected layer that is
associated with the selected wire network. If this
option is not selected, only the selected wire changes.

Make selected layer current Makes the selected layer the current layer.

Show source and destination markers on wires | 551

552
Terminal Tools
9
In this chapter
■ Overview of connection
sequencing
■ Insert terminals and
connectors
■ Multi-Level Terminals
■ Edit terminal jumpers
■ Resequence terminal
numbers
■ View terminal wire
connections
■ Terminal Strips
■ Terminal Properties
Lookup

553
Overview of connection sequencing
The Multi-Connection Sequence Terminal symbol allows a single in-line
schematic symbol to represent a sequence of wire connections passing through
two or more (up to six) terminal strips. For example, a wire connection that
must pass through a series of shipping split terminal strips can be represented
by a single in-line wire schematic symbol (instead of having to show each
individual terminal in the sequence).
Two sample symbols are provided. Their appearance may be edited or new
ones created as required. They are inserted using the AutoCAD Electrical Insert
Component tool. Browse to insert. The symbol names are
H - - 1_MULTI_CONN.dwgwire number changes through the symbol
H - - 1_MULTI_CONN_NOCHG.dwg wire number does not change through
it
A dialog interface lets you encode multiple connection sequence information
on to six sets of attribute groups carried on the symbol:
WD_1_TAGSTRIP Attribute to carry first terminal strip number (16 character
maximum)
WD_1_TERMNO Attribute to carry optional terminal number
WD_1_INFO Attribute to carry additional information such as installation,
location, catalog and item number assignments, and any connected cable
information
WD_2_TAGSTRIP Same as above but for second terminal in the sequence
WD_2_TERMNO Same as above but for second terminal in the sequence
WD_2_INFO Same as above but for second terminal in the sequence
through maximum of
WD_6_TAGSTRIPSame as above but for sixth terminal in the sequence
WD_6_TERMNO Same as above but for sixth terminal in the sequence
WD_6_INFO Same as above but for sixth terminal in the sequence
Click on the entry you wish to edit and select the Edit button.

NOTE For AutoCAD Electrical to recognize this symbol as a multi-connection

sequence terminal symbol, at a minimum it must carry attribute named
WD_1_TAGSTRIP. Multi-connection sequence terminal symbols do not support
some AutoCAD Electrical auto-update and surfing features.

554 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 Edit multi-connection sequence terminal symbol
Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Enter "H--1_MULTI_CONN_NOCHG" in the

Type It box and click OK. Specify the insertion point on the drawing.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component. Enter "H--
1_MULTI_CONN_NOCHG" in the Type It box and click OK. Specify the insertion
point on the drawing.

Select any entry within a group to view/edit that group.

Edit Opens the Edit entry dialog box so you can make changes to
values such as the tag-ID, terminal number, or Installation code.

Save Changes Saves your changes by writing the data to attributes on the
symbol (most of these attributes are set as invisible).

Edit entry
Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Enter "H--1_MULTI_CONN_NOCHG" in the

Type It box and click OK. Specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Edit
Multi-Connection Sequence Terminal Symbol dialog box, select one of the six
series-connected entries and click Edit.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component. Enter "H--
1_MULTI_CONN_NOCHG" in the Type It box and click OK. Specify the insertion
point on the drawing. In the Edit Multi-Connection Sequence Terminal Symbol
dialog box, select one of the six series-connected entries and click Edit.

This in-line component lets you manually define a connection sequence of

up to 6 series-connected terminal strip points. All are embedded in this single
graphical component but are fully reported in the various wire connection
reports.
For example, you might have a wire that connects from a pushbutton and
goes out to a field device. But to get to the field device, the wire connection
must pass through a local terminal strip, then a shipping split terminal strip,
on to a field connection terminal strip, and finally a terminal strip near the
field device. Instead of showing all four series-connected terminals in the wire,

Overview of connection sequencing | 555

 you can substitute this single "multi-connection sequence" terminal
representation and manually define the connection sequence.

Tag - ID

Terminal strip tag-ID

Terminal Number

Terminal strip terminal number

Miscellaneous

Edit box shows saved data values defined by selections below.

Installation Code

Changes the installation code assignment. You can search the current drawing
or entire project for installation codes. A quick read of all the current or selected
drawing file is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned.
Select from the list to automatically update the component with the
installation code.
Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you
can create location-specific BOM and component lists later.

Location Code

Changes the location codes. You can search the current drawing or entire
project for location codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
file is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned. Select from the
list to automatically update the component with the location code.
Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can
extract cable from/to reports and location-specific BOM reports later. (For
example, BOM for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables.)

Catalog Data

You can do a drawing-wide or project-wide listing of similar components with

their catalog assignments. During your editing session, the last MFG / CAT /
ASSYCODE assignment for each component type you insert into your wiring
diagram is remembered. When you insert another component of that type,

556 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 the previous component's catalog assignment is set as the default (assuming
a previous one was made during the current editing session).

Find Scans each drawing for the target component type and returns
a list of what was found. You can make your catalog assignment
by selecting from the list.

Catalog Lookup Opens the component's catalog database from which you can
manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values.
Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the
selected component. Database queries are set up in the 3 lists
across the top of the dialog with the database hits listed in the
dialog's main window.

Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the current
drawing.

Project Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the project.
You can search in the active project, another project, or in an
external file.
■ Active project: All the drawings in the current project are
scanned and the results are listed in a dialog box. Select from
the list to assign your new component with a catalog number
that is consistent with other similar components in the pro-
ject.
■ Other project: Scans each listed drawing in a previous project
for the target component type and returns the catalog inform-
ation in a sub-dialog box. Make your catalog assignment by
picking from the dialog list.
■ External file: You can pull catalog assignments from a gen-
eric ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a
spreadsheet or database program. A dialog box displays the
contents of the selected text file. Find and highlight the de-
sired entry. AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the
file and breaks it into its component parts. These are displayed
in the left-hand dialog list. For each relevant item, highlight
it and then pick the appropriate category button in the center
column. The highlighted item is transferred to the correspond-
ing category (and then to the Insert/Edit dialog box once OK
is clicked).

Overview of connection sequencing | 557

Catalog Check Displays what the selected item will look like in a Bill of Material
template.

Wire entering this connection

Click Internal, External, or Both to change the Connection Code (I=Internal,

E=External). The code changes the Miscellaneous value as follows:
LEFT_TERMDESC=I (for Internal), LEFT_TERMDESC=E (for External).

Wire leaving this connection

Click Internal, External, or Both to change the Connection Code (I=Internal,

E=External). The code changes the Miscellaneous value as follows:
RIGHT_TERMDESC=I (for Internal), RIGHT_TERMDESC=E (for External).

Wire number Manually define the wire number that leaves this terminal con-
nection and goes to the next. If this is the last terminal in the se-
quence, this wire number assignment is ignored and the actual
wire number connecting the right-hand side of the symbol is
used.

Wire layer Manually define the wire layer assignment. If this is the last ter-
minal in the sequence, this value is ignored.

Cable Manually define the cable marker tag-ID. If this is the last terminal
in the sequence, this value is ignored.

Conductor Manually define a cable marker conductor color value. If this is

the last terminal in the sequence, this value is ignored.

Delete this entry

Removes the displayed terminal sequence from the overall list and moves any
following entry positions up to fill in the gap.

Insert new before this one

Moves the current display terminal sequence down one position and creates
a new, empty entry ahead of it. There is a maximum of 6 total positions.

558 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 Insert new after this one

Pushes all of the following sequences down one position and creates a new,
empty entry just after the displayed entry. There is a maximum of 6 total
positions.

Insert terminals and connectors

Terminal symbols on the schematic are a representation of wire connection
points. The terminal symbol representation on the schematic can have
associations with the physical terminal block on the panel drawing. To insert
a terminal, select the Insert Component toolbar icon to display AutoCAD
Electrical's icon menu, and then select Terminals/Connectors.
There are four types of terminal behavior that you can select from and five
main terminal styles (square, round, hexagon, diamond and triangle). Each
type of terminal behavior is controlled by the terminal block name.

Non-intelligent terminals. These do not show up in reports.

Terminals that take on a terminal number that matches the wire number passing
through or connected to the terminal.

Terminals that carry a user-defined terminal number.

Terminals that force a new wire number to generate as a wire passes through
the terminal.

Insert terminals and connectors | 559

 Insert terminals
You can select from five main terminal styles (square, round, hexagon,
diamond and triangle). Each type of terminal behavior is controlled by the
terminal block name.

1 Click the Insert Component tool.

2 Click the Terminals/Connectors button.

3 Select a terminal symbol to insert.

4 Specify the insertion point.

5 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, annotate the

terminal symbol including (but not limited to) the terminal
number, tag strip value, and catalog information.

Insert/edit terminal symbol

Annotates the terminal by tracking which terminal numbers and terminal
strip ID names have been used so far.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Select Terminals and Connectors, select the
terminal to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component. Select Terminals and Connectors ,
select the terminal to insert, and specify the insertion point on the drawing.
Click the Edit Component tool and select the terminal to edit.
Click Components ➤ Edit Component and select the terminal to edit.

Terminal

These controls determine the overall tagging of the terminal block in the
project. The Installation, Location and Tag Strip values define which strip the
terminal belongs to. The symbol block file name displays at the top of the
Terminal group.

560 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 NOTE Assign short installation or location codes to components like "PNL" and
"FIELD" to later take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to create
installation or location-specific Bill of Materials and component lists.

Installation Changes the installation codes. Click Browse to

search the active drawing, entire project and an
external list (default.inst) for installation codes. Pick
from the list to automatically update the compon-
ent with the installation code.

Location Changes the location codes. Click Browse to search

the active drawing, entire project and an external
list (default.loc) for location codes. Pick from the
list to automatically update the component with
the location code.

Tag Strip Specifies the Tag ID given to the terminal strip. If

there is an existing name, it appears in the edit box;
if not, you can enter a specific ID name.
Click the < and > buttons to increment or decre-
ment the last digit/character in the Tag Strip value.

Number Specifies the terminal number. If there isn’t PINLIST

information, the < and > buttons increment or
decrement the terminal number. You can also click
Pick to select a text object or an attribute on the
active drawing to use for the terminal number.
When inserting a new terminal, the highest terminal
number in the strip is identified and the default
terminal number for the new terminal increments
by 1.

NOTE This is unavailable when the terminal symbol

does not have a TERM01 attribute or when the
terminal number is the same as the wire number.

Modify Properties/Associations

These controls support associations between schematic terminal symbols and

their panel terminal footprint or between multiple schematic terminal symbols.

Insert terminals and connectors | 561

 NOTE You cannot associate terminals using the Add/Modify or Break Out options
when you insert a terminal using the Insert Terminal (Panel List) tool. However,
once the terminal is inserted onto the drawing, you can modify the associations
using these tools..

Add/Modify Displays the Add/Modify Associations dialog box

where you can select terminal strips and their re-
spective blocks to make an association to the ter-
minal symbol being inserted or edited.

NOTE This is disabled if the active drawing is not

part of the active project.

Pick Selects another terminal symbol on the active

drawing to associate to. You can select only one
terminal symbol to make the association.

NOTE While in selection mode, you can use Pan

or Zoom to find the terminal symbol to select.

Break Out Removes the terminal being edited out of the

defined association. The properties from the original
association and the terminal’s levels are maintained.

Block Properties Displays the Block Properties dialog box where you
can define and maintain terminal block properties.

NOTE This is disabled if the active drawing is not

part of the active project.

Properties/Associations

The list box displays the current status of the edited terminals association. It
lists all associated terminal symbols from the schematic and terminal panel
footprints. If the terminal symbol is being inserted for the first time, the list
box only displays the reference for itself. The number of levels defined in the
block properties displays at the top of the Properties/Associations group. The
terminal being edited is highlighted in the list box.

562 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 You can double-click in the list to modify the terminal association in the
Add/Modify Associations dialog box.

Label Lists the level description defined in the terminal

block properties. This data is entered into the
LnnLABEL attribute if present; otherwise, it is placed
into xdata.

Number Lists the terminal numbers defined in the associ-

ation. Only one terminal number is allowed per
level and each level displays its respective terminal
number or text. Panel terminal symbols do not
display terminal numbers.

PinL Lists the pin numbers defined on the left side of the
terminal block. This data is entered into the
LnnPINL attribute if present; otherwise, it is placed
into xdata.

PinR Lists the pin numbers defined on the right side of

the terminal block. This data is entered into the
LnnPINR attribute if present; otherwise, it is placed
into xdata

Reference Lists the terminal symbol’s reference location in the

project. The syntax is ‘Sheet,Reference’ based on
the drawing configuration.

Project List

These controls allow for quick selection of terminal strips and terminal
numbers used throughout the active project.

Project List Shows all the previously defined terminal strips in

the active project.
When inserting a new terminal, this list is populated
with the previously inserted terminal’s Installation,
Location and TAGSTRIP values.

Insert terminals and connectors | 563

Numbers Used Lists all terminal numbers found, either drawing-
wide or project-wide, whose Tag Strip value
matches the highlighted Tag Strip value.

Catalog Data

You can do a drawing-wide or project-wide listing of similar terminals with

their catalog assignments. During your editing session, the last MFG / CAT /
ASSYCODE assignment for each terminal type you insert into your wiring
diagram is remembered. When you insert another terminal of that type, the
previous terminal’s catalog assignment is set as the default (assuming a previous
one was made during the current editing session).

Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer name for the terminal. Enter a value or
select one from the Catalog lookup.

Catalog Lists the catalog number for the terminal. Enter a value or select
one from the Catalog lookup.

Assembly Lists the assembly code for the terminal. The Assembly code is
used to link multiple part numbers together.

Item Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each terminal. The value

can be manually typed in the edit box.

Catalog Lookup Opens the terminal’s catalog database from which you can select
the Manufacturer and Catalog values. Search the database for a
specific catalog item to assign to the selected terminal. Database
queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog with
the database hits listed in the dialog's main window.

Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar terminals in the active
drawing.

Project Lists the part numbers used for similar terminals in the project.
You can search in the active project, another project, or in an
external file.
■ Active project: All the drawings in the active project are
scanned and the results are listed in a dialog box. Select from

564 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 the list to assign your new terminal with a catalog number
that is consistent with other similar terminals in the project.
■ Other project: Scans each listed drawing in a previous project
for the target terminal type and returns the catalog informa-
tion in a sub-dialog box. Make your catalog assignment by
picking from the dialog list.
■ External file: You can pull catalog assignments from a gen-
eric ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a
spreadsheet or database program. A dialog box displays the
contents of the selected text file. Find and highlight the de-
sired entry. AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the
file and breaks it into its component parts. These are displayed
in the left-hand dialog list. For each relevant item, highlight
it and then pick the appropriate category button in the center
column. The highlighted item is transferred to the correspond-
ing category (and then to the Insert/Edit dialog box once OK
is clicked).

Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected
terminal. You can add up to 10 part numbers to any terminal.
These multiple BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly part
numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM
and terminal reports.

Catalog Check Extracts the details from the catalog database to display what the
selected item will look like in a Bill of Material template.

Descriptions

Specifies the optional description attribute text to assign to the terminal block
(up to 3 lines of text can be specified). Click Browse to search for all terminal
descriptions in the project or active drawing. Select the description you want
to copy to the edited terminal block by selecting it in the list and clicking OK.

NOTE These edit boxes are disabled if the terminal does not carry the attributes
(such as ratings).

Defaults Opens an ASCII text file (wd_desc.wdd or <pro-

ject>.wdd) from which you can select standard
descriptions.

Insert terminals and connectors | 565

Pick Picks a description from a component on the cur-
rent drawing.

Ratings

You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a component. The View/Edit

Rating Values dialog box lets you enter values for each ratings attribute. Select
the Defaults button next to the edit box to display a list of default values.

NOTE If this button is grayed out, the component you are editing does not carry
any rating attributes.

Show/Edit Miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Terminal block properties

Use this dialog box to control the number of levels assigned to a multiple level
terminal block. You can control the level description, number of wires per
connection, pins right and pins left. The terminal block properties are
maintained on every terminal symbol in its association.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Select Terminals and Connectors from the
dialog box and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit
Terminal Symbol dialog box, click Block Properties.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component. Select Terminals and Connectors
from the dialog box and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the In-
sert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click Block Properties.
Click the Edit Component tool and select the terminal to edit. In the Insert/Edit
Terminal Symbol dialog box, click Block Properties.
Click Components ➤ Edit Component and select the terminal to edit. In the
Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click Block Properties.

NOTE You can also access this dialog box by clicking Edit Terminal Block Properties
on the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box.

566 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 The default level for any terminal symbol that is placed into the project that
is not associated to another is 0.

Manufacturer Displays the Manufacturer value that is currently

assigned to the terminal being edited.

Catalog Number Displays the Catalog Number value that is currently

assigned to the terminal being edited.

Assembly Code Displays the Assembly Code value that is currently

assigned to the terminal being edited.

Levels Specifies the number of levels for the terminal. The

grid expands for editing based on the number of
levels specified. You can then define the level de-
scription, wires per connection and pins.

Terminal Block Property Definition grid Displays the terminal levels. You can edit and
maintain properties of the terminal block here.
■ Level Description: Specifies the description for
the levels of the terminal block. Text you enter
here displays in the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol
and Multiple Level dialog boxes. This is a ter-
minal property that is maintained on every
symbol in its association.
■ Wires per Connection: Specifies the number
of wires allowed per connection for the terminal
connection point.

NOTE These properties do not limit the

number of connections allowed on the
schematic.

■ Pin Left/Pin Right: Specifies labels for pin

numbers associated to the terminal destina-
tions. These fill in the LnnPINL and LnnPINR
attributes on the terminal block when its level
is selected. This is a terminal property that is
maintained on every symbol in its association.

Insert terminals and connectors | 567

 Terminal block property attributes

The values in the grid are stored as follows, where “nn” represents the level
number and is always stored as two digits (i.e. 01, 02, and so on):

Data Attribute

Level Description (60 characters maximum) LnnLABEL

Wires Per Connection (3 characters maximum) LnnWIREPERC

Pin Left (12 characters maximum) LnnPINL

Pin Right (12 characters maximum) LnnPINR

NOTE If thse attributes are not present, the data is placed into Xdata with the
same name, only wth a “VIA_WD_” prefix.

Overview of terminal relationships

AutoCAD Electrical supports two types of relationships for terminals:
schematic-to-schematic and schematic-to-panel.

Schematic-to-Schematic

The schematic-to-schematic relationship defines separate schematic terminal

symbols as one multi-level (also referred to as multi-tier or multi-stack) terminal
block. On the schematic drawing, each schematic terminal symbol represents
one level of the multi-level terminal block.

NOTE Multiple terminal symbols for one level is not currently supported.

The number of levels for the block is defined as a block property. Each level
carries certain characteristics, such as a label, wires per connection, left pin,
and right pin. Each schematic terminal symbol carries all of the block properties
for each level so that removing one terminal symbol does not remove the

568 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

block properties. If a block property is modified, all of the terminal symbols
update.
The terminal symbols are associated by an ID value held on the LINKTERM
attribute or xdata. When a terminal symbol is inserted, by default it is seen
as a standalone terminal (it has no associations) and receives a new LINKTERM
value. When the terminal is associated to another, the LINKTERM value
updates so that each terminal carries the same LINKTERM value. Changing
or removing the LINKTERM value breaks any associations that terminal may
have.
To associate schematic terminals, you first need to add block properties. The
number of terminals you can associate is limited to the number of levels
defined in the block properties. Once block properties are established you can
associate schematic terminals to build a multi-level terminal block by:

■ Clicking the Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Associate Terminals tool. You

select a master terminal and then select each terminal symbol to associate
to the master.

■ Clicking Pick on the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box. This adds
the edited symbol into an association with the picked terminal.

■ Clicking Add/Modify on the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box. This

adds the edited symbol into an association with any schematic terminal
in the project.

Prebuilt circuits may contain associated terminals. These relationships are

maintained when the circuit is inserted. Copying a circuit also maintains these
relationships within the copied circuit.
When the Bill of Materials report is run, these separate terminal symbols that
make up one multi-level terminal, are counted as one in the quantity.

Schematic-to-Panel

The schematic-to-panel relationship is used mainly for updating. If the

schematic or panel is modified, the other updates to reflect the changes. This
relationship is similar to component relationships, which are based on the
TAG value. The TAGSTRIP, Installation and Location values need to match
for the terminals to associate together and the association number on the
LINKTERM is also taken into account when creating a relationship between
the schematic terminal and its panel representation. Block properties are not
required to associate a schematic to panel terminal. Once they are associated,
modifications on one results in modifications on the other.

Overview of terminal relationships | 569

 You can associate a schematic and panel terminal automatically using either
the Insert Panel Terminal from Schematic tool or the Insert Schematic Terminal
from Panel tool. In the case of multi-level terminals, the Insert Panel Terminal
from Schematic tool shows only one terminal for insertion regardless of how
many schematic terminal symbols/levels there are for that multi-level block.
The Insert Schematic Terminal from Panel tool shows one terminal for each
level for insertion.

NOTE Panel terminals inserted by the Terminal Strip Editor are automatically
associated to the schematic representation.

Additionally, you can click the Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Associate

Terminals tool to select terminals to associate or click Add/Modify on the
Panel Layout - Terminal Insert/Edit dialog box to add the panel terminal to
an association with a schematic terminal on any drawing in the project.

Associate terminals
Use the Associate Terminals tool to associate two ore more terminal symbols
together. Associating schematic terminals combines the terminals into a single
terminal block property definition. The number of schematic terminals that
can be combined is limited to the number of levels defined for the block
properties.

570 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

Associating a panel terminal provides a way to define a particular panel
footprint to represent a schematic block property definition.

1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Associ-

ate Terminals tool.

2 Click the Associate Terminals tool.

3 Select a terminal symbol to use as the master. This is used as

the basis for any terminal property definition.

NOTE Your terminal symbol must have block properties defined.

To define block properties, right-click on the symbol and select
Edit Component. In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box,
click Block Properties.

4 Select additional terminal symbols to add to the association.

5 Press Enter to associate the terminals.

The catalog data, block properties, Tagstrip value, Installation
code and Location code are copied from the master terminal
and added to the terminals in the association.

NOTE If the number of selected terminals exceeds the total number of levels
defined in the block properties, an alert displays and the extra terminals are not
added to the association.

Tips and Hints

■ This tool works on terminal symbols on the same drawing only.

■ If the master terminal is already part of another association, the existing

association is maintained and the newly selected terminal symbols join
the association.

■ If the selected terminals are part of their own association, they are removed
from the association and added to the new association with the selected
master terminal.

■ Terminals placed onto the drawing using the Terminal Strip Editor cannot
be added to an association using this tool.

Overview of terminal relationships | 571

 Show terminal associations
Use the Show Terminal Associations tool to display the current associations
for the selected terminals. AutoCAD Electrical draws temporary lines between
the associated terminals. These graphics disappear the next time you do a
Regen.

1 Select Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Show Terminal Associations.

2 Select the terminals you want to view the associations of.

Red dashed lines are drawn between the terminals that are associated to
the selected terminal. A list of the associated terminals also displays at
the command prompt.

Break apart terminal associations

Use the Break Apart Terminal Associations tool to break a terminal symbol
out of an existing association. Schematic terminals are removed from any
multi-tier relationship and any schematic-panel relationships. Panel terminals
are removed from any schematic-panel relationships.

NOTE The properties of the existing terminal association are maintained on each
symbol.

1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Break

Apart Terminal Associations tool.

2 Click the Break Apart Terminal Associations tool.

3 Select the terminal to remove from the association. Repeat for

each terminal you want to break out of its associations.

4 Press Enter.

Copy terminal block properties

Use the Copy Terminal Block Properties tool to copy terminal properties from
one terminal symbol to another. If the application of the terminal properties
reduces the number of levels and the number of schematic terminal symbols

572 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 in the association exceeds the total allowed, an alert displays and the properties
are not copied.

1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Copy

Terminal Block Properties tool.

2 Click the Copy Terminal Block Properties tool.

3 Select the master terminal to copy properties from.

4 Select the terminals to apply the properties to.

5 Press Enter.

Edit terminal jumpers

Use the Edit Jumper tool to jumper two or more terminals together in a
schematic diagram. The terminals to be jumpered can be on the same drawing
or span multiple drawings within the same project. Choose one of the
following workflows for editing terminal jumpers:
Workflow 1:

1 Select Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Edit Jumper.

2 Select the primary terminal.

3 Do one of the following:

■ Select the secondary terminal on the drawing to create a jumper to
the primary terminal. You cannot select a terminal that is part of
another jumper.

■ Enter Browse (B) at the command line to browse to and select the
secondary terminal in the Select Terminals to Jumper dialog box.

4 (Optional) Continue selecting any terminals to add to the jumper.

5 Press Enter to create the jumper or enter Edit (E) to edit the existing
jumpers.

Edit terminal jumpers | 573

 6 (Optional) If you selected to edit the jumpers, make modifications in the
Edit Terminal Jumpers dialog box and click OK.

7 (Optional) Enter Show s at the command line to draw temporary broken

lines between the primary terminal and secondary terminals within the
same drawing.

Workflow 2:

1 Select Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Edit Jumper.

2 Enter Browse (B) at the command line.

3 Select the terminals to be jumpered (from the left tree view) and copied
to the right tree view.

4 Do one of the following:

■ Click Edit to create the jumper or edit the jumpers on the selected
terminal.

■ Click Close to return to the command prompt and:

■ (Optional) Select additional terminals in the drawing to add to

the jumper.

■ Press Enter to create the jumper or enter Edit (E) to edit the existing
jumpers.

■ (Optional) If you selected to edit the jumpers, make modifications

in the Edit Terminal Jumpers dialog box and click OK.

■ (Optional) Enter Show s at the command line to draw temporary

broken lines between the primary terminal and secondary terminals
within the same drawing.

5 Click Cancel to cancel the operation.

Select terminals to jumper

Use this to select a terminal from a list of all the terminals in the active project.

Access:

Click Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Edit Jumper. Enter Browse (B) at the

command line or first select a terminal and then enter Browse (B) to select ad-
ditional terminals.

574 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 As you select a terminal, the drawing in which that terminal resides displays
under the tree views or under the terminal preview window.

Schematic Terminals Lists all of the terminal strips and terminals in the
active project. Select the terminals to jumper togeth-
er; as you make your selection, the terminals are
bolded in the left tree and added to the Jumper
Terminals list.
Terminal nodes have a graphic on the left side to
indicate whether the terminal has a jumper at-
tached to it. An empty circle indicates that there
isn’t a jumper and the filled circle means a jumper
exists.

Jumper Terminals Lists the terminals that will be jumpered into a

single jumper group, including any terminals selec-
ted at the command prompt.

< or > The > button copies the selected terminals to the
Jumper Terminals list; the selected terminals are
then bolded in the Schematic Terminals list.
The < button removes the selected terminals from
the Jumper Terminals list and unbolds the terminal
in the Schematic Terminals list.

Edit Creates a jumper across the selected terminals and

displays the Edit Terminal Jumpers dialog box.

View Displays the selected terminal in a preview window

at the bottom of the dialog box.

NOTE You can select to view a schematic terminal

or tabular view of the entire terminal strip. If you
select a terminal strip from the Schematic Terminal
list and click View, a tabular view of the terminal
strip displays, showing a layout of the connected
terminals.

By default the preview window is hidden. This can

be toggled using Show and Hide once a terminal
has been viewed.

Edit terminal jumpers | 575

Hide/Show Switches the visibility of the preview window at the
bottom of the dialog box.

Preview window Shows a graphical representation of the selected

terminals. You can pan the image using the left
mouse button or the Pan tool. You can zoom the
image using the mouse wheel or the various zoom
tools.

Edit terminal jumpers

Use this to edit the jumper information (such as adding catalog data) or delete
the jumper.

Access:

Click Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Edit Jumper. Enter Edit (E) at the command
line or first select a terminal and then enter Edit (E).

Jumpers to Terminals Lists all of the jumpers (grouped by Jumper ID) at-
tached to the selected terminal.

Catalog Data Specifies the catalog data for the jumper between
the primary terminal and the selected terminal. If
the selected terminal is not jumpered these options
are disabled.
■ Manufacturer: Specifies the manufacturer
name.
■ Catalog: Specifies the catalog name.
■ Assembly: Specifies the assembly code.
■ Item: Specifies the item value.
■ Count: Specifies how the catalog data is used
in the Bill of Materials. When multiple terminals
are jumpered together, you can have a single
catalog item represent a jumper bar that spans
the selection, or single jumpers between each
terminal.

576 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 ■ Lookup: Displays the catalog database from
which you can select the Manufacturer and
Catalog values.
■ Drawing: Lists the part numbers used for sim-
ilar components in the active drawing.
■ Project: Lists the part numbers used for similar
components in the active project.

Delete Select the jumper label, terminal strip or a single

terminal to perform one of the following actions:
■ Jumper label: Deletes the jumper from all of
the terminals.
■ Terminal strip: Deletes the terminals in that
group from the jumper. If there are no remain-
ing terminals in the group, the jumper is de-
leted.
■ Single terminal: Deletes the terminal from the
jumper. If this is the last terminal to be deleted,
the entire jumper is deleted.

View Displays the selected terminal in a preview window

at the bottom of the dialog box.
By default the preview window is hidden. This can
be switched using Show and Hide once a terminal
has been viewed.

Hide/Show Switches the visibility of the preview window at the

bottom of the dialog box.

Preview window Shows a graphical representation of the selected

terminals. You can pan the image using the left
mouse button or Pan tool. You can zoom the image
using the mouse wheel or the various zoom tools.

Edit terminal jumpers | 577

Resequence terminal numbers
AutoCAD Electrical provides utilities to make it easy to resequence the terminal
numbers across one or many drawings. These utilities do not resequence
terminals that carry a wire number as the terminal number.

1 Select Components ➤ Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal Strip

Utilities.

2 Select a method to use for resequencing the terminal strips.

■ Terminal Renumber (Pick Mode): Enter the first terminal number to
use and press Enter. Select each terminal in order on the screen. The
terminal number updates automatically, incrementing with each pick.
Right-click to exit the command.

■ Terminal Renumber (Project-Wide): The Project-wide Schematic

Terminal Resequence dialog box displays. Follow these steps.

3 Enter the terminal strip tag ID and the starting terminal number.

4 If you want to refine the search, enter an installation or location code to

use when searching the drawings.
Click Project or Drawing to select an installation or location code from
existing terminal numbers.

5 Click OK.

6 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, select the drawings to search
through, and click OK.

Project-wide schematic terminal renumber

This resequences the terminal numbers across one or many drawings.

Access:

From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal

Strip Utilities ➤ Terminal Resequence (project-wide).

578 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 NOTE This utility does not resequence terminals that carry a wire number as the
terminal number.

Tag-ID Specifies the terminal strip ID to use when searching

each drawing for terminals. Only terminals with this
ID are updated.

Include Installation/Location in terminal Updates a terminal only if it matches the Terminal

strip Tag-ID match Strip ID, Location, and Installation values specified.

Installation code Refines the search by including an installation value.

Location code Refines the search by including a location value.

Starting terminal number Specifies the number to begin the terminal strip with;
you can use alphanumeric values. The default value
is 1.

After you click OK, select the drawings to process from the active project.

View terminal wire connections

Schematic and panel layout/wiring diagram terminal symbols can carry
TERMDESC attribute values used to control which side of a terminal is to
receive internal or external wire connections. Schematic terminals use attributes
X1TERMDESC01 for the right wire connection, X2TERMDESC01 for the top,
X4TERMDESC01 for the left, and X8TERMDESC01 for bottom wire
connections.

View terminal wire connections | 579

 Show terminal internal/external connections

This tool shows the state of the invisible attribute values for selected objects.
The values are shown with red and green arrows.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Terminal:
Show Internal/External Connections tool.

2 Click the Terminal: Show Internal/External Connections tool.

3 Select the objects to show the connection codes for. You can
pick on individual objects or select a group of objects using a
boundary box.

Mark internal connections

This tool marks attributes with an 'I' for internal wiring.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Terminal:
Show Internal/External Connections tool.

2 Click the arrow on the Show Terminal Connection Codes tool

to access the Terminal: Mark Internal Connections tool.

3 Click the Terminal: Mark Internal Connections tool.

4 Select near a terminal's wire connection point. The attribute

will be marked with an arrow to indicate whether it is an in-
ternal.

Mark external connections

This tool marks attributes with an 'E' for external wiring.

580 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Terminal:
Show Internal/External Connections tool.

2 Click the arrow on the Terminal: Show Internal/External

Connections tool to access the Terminal: Mark External Con-
nections tool.

3 Click the Terminal: Mark External Connections tool.

4 Select near a terminal's wire connection point. The attribute

will be marked with an arrow to indicate whether it is an ex-
ternal value.

Erase connection codes

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Terminal:
Show Internal/External Connections tool.

2 Click the arrow on the Terminal: Show Internal/External

Connections tool to access the Terminal: Erase Internal/Extern-
al Connections tool.

3 Click the Terminal: Erase Internal/External Connections tool.

4 Select near a terminal's wire connection point to erase the

connection code. (I= internal, E= external)

Terminal Strips | 581

 Create terminal strips
Use the Terminal Strip utility to create non-intelligent terminal strips. The
terminal numbers can be imported from a file, windowed on one or more
drawings, individually picked, typed in by hand, or all of the above.

1 Select Components ➤ Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal Strip

Utilities.

2 Select a method to use for creating the terminal strips.

■ Terminal List (Manual Picks): Select to pick or window the text and/or
attribute values you want to import into the terminal strip generator
utility.

■ Terminal List (From File): Select the file containing the terminal text.

3 Press Enter to end the selection.

The Terminal Strip Representation dialog box displays.

4 In the Terminal Strip Representation dialog box, sort, add, remove, and
re-arrange the terminal strip layout.

5 Click OK.
The Terminal Strip Representation Setup dialog box displays. Set the text
size, terminal height and width sizes, and terminal strip orientation.

6 Make your selections and click OK.

7 Select the insertion point for your terminal strip.

Modify an existing terminal strip

1 Re-invoke the command, window the existing terminal strip to capture
the existing terminal numbers.

2 Cancel the command.

3 Delete the old terminal strip.

4 Re-invoke the terminal strip utility.

5 Make any edits and re-insert the terminal strip.

Terminal strip representation

582 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

Access:

From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal

Strip Utilities ➤ Terminal List (Manual Picks).
From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal
Strip Utilities ➤ Terminal List (From File).

You can sort, add, remove, and re-arrange the terminal strip layout. You can
even go to other schematic drawings and add more to the list (just click Cancel,
go to the next drawing, and re-invoke the utility - it remembers what you
have accumulated so far).

Define spare Defines the label for the spare terminals.

Sort Sorts the list of terminals in ascending order.

Reverse sort Rearranges the list of terminals in descending order.

Move up Moves the selected terminal up one spot in the terminal list.

Move down Moves the selected terminal down one spot in the terminal list.

Insert new Creates a new terminal to add to the terminal strip. Specify the
terminal name/number, the number of terminals to insert, and
indicate whether to make the new terminal the spare terminal.

Edit Opens the Edit dialog box so you can change the terminal text
or count.

Cut Removes the selected terminal from the terminal list.

Copy Makes a copy of the selected terminal and stores it in the Paste
clipboard.

Paste Adds the copied terminal into the terminal list from the clipboard.

Pick Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and allows you to select
more terminals for the list.

Create terminal strips | 583

 Terminal strip representation - setup
Annotates the text size, height and width sizes, and orientation of the terminal
strip.

Access:

From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal

Strip Utilities ➤ Terminal List (Manual Picks). Select the terminal to modify
and click OK.
From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal
Strip Utilities ➤ Terminal List (From File). Select the terminal to modify and
click OK.

Terminal Text

Text Specifies to align the text to the left, center, or right side of the ter-
minal strip.

Height Sets the height of the terminal strip.

Width Sets the width of the terminal strip.

Layer Specifies the layer for the table text. The selected layer is displayed
next to the button on the dialog box.

Terminal pitch and Terminal width

Terminal pitch (spacing) Sets the spacing between entries in the terminal strip.

Terminal width Sets the width for the terminal strip.

Use .750 Changes the terminal width value to .750 if selected.

Terminal Ruling

Box Around Creates a single box around the terminal strip.

584 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

Between Entries Creates lines between entries in the terminal strip.

Start Line Specifies which line the terminal strip will start at.

End Specifies which line the terminal strip will end at.

Layer Specifies the layer for the table ruling lines. The selected layer is dis-
played next to the button on the dialog box.

Terminal Strip Orientation

Vertical Specifies to vertically display the terminal strip.

Rotate 90 degrees (counter-clockwise) Specifies to rotate the terminal strip 90 degrees in a

counter-clockwise direction.

Rotate -90 degrees (clockwise) Specifies to rotate the terminal strip 90 degrees in a
clockwise direction.

Use the terminal strip editor

Terminal blocks are used to connect devices that require quick disconnect or
disassembly during product shipment, while at other times they can be used
to distribute power to other devices. The Terminal Strip Editor defines the
locations for these connected devices during the system design process.
Terminal strip editing is primarily used towards the end of the control system
design cycle to expedite the labeling, numbering, and rearranging of terminals
on a terminal strip.
A document that is created to facilitate the construction of a terminal strip
and all of its wiring is a terminal strip layout drawing. These drawings display
the general arrangement of all the terminal blocks that belong to a specific
terminal strip. You can also display the wiring and device connection
information next to the terminal block symbol using the Terminal Strip Editor.
You can rely on the terminal strip layout drawing for all information regarding
the terminal strip without having to reference the schematic drawings.

Use the terminal strip editor | 585

 The Installation (INST), Location (LOC) and Tag Strip (TAG_STRIP) values are
used to determine a terminal strip’s uniqueness no matter which standard is
used in the active project (such as IEC or JIC).
After changes have been made with the Terminal Strip Editor, the changes
are written back to the schematic drawing for future updates, and a graphical
or tabular drawing of a terminal strip layout is created. Your drawing must be
part of the active project in order to perform updates.

NOTE If you make changes to an existing graphical terminal strip, the Terminal
Strip Editor requires that the terminal strip is refreshed or placed on a drawing in
the active project so the information is saved.

If the Terminal Strip Editor encounters an error and is unable to start, a log
file (named TSE_Error_<date and time>.log) is created in the same location as
the project file. The log information includes details about the event, the user
name, project name, date and time.

Wiring Constraints

The Terminal Strip Editor can add or remove extra terminals based on the
assigned wiring constraints. Wiring constraints is the limitation of the number
of wires that can be connected to a particular device (for example, terminal).
When modifying terminals, you can assign the number of wires allowed for
each side of the terminal in the Wires Per Connection section of the Terminal
Block Properties dialog box.
Extra terminals get placed only when editing a terminal using the Terminal
Strip Editor. Once you define the Wires Per Connection value, the Terminal
Strip Editor checks to see if there are more wires/devices connected to a side
of the terminal than what is allowed. If it finds the defined constraint to be
exceeded, the Terminal Strip Editor adds an additional terminal and moves
the destination that is exceeding the constraint to the new terminal. The new
terminal has the same destination, property, and catalog assignment as the
original terminal. The moved destination is placed in the same level of the
new terminal as it was in the original terminal. The extra terminals are reflected
in the Bill of Materials.
When a terminal strip is edited with the Terminal Strip Editor, the need for
extra terminals is re-evaluated and they are removed if the constraints are no
longer exceeded. If the main footprint terminal is removed from the
association, the extras are removed.

586 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

Insert a terminal strip using the Terminal Strip Editor

1 On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor

tool.

2 On the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box, click New.

NOTE If you want to use the Installation, Location, and Tag Strip
values from an existing terminal, select the terminal before you
click New.

3 On the Terminal Strip Definition dialog box, specify the Install-

ation code, Location code, Tag Strip value, and number of
terminal blocks to be defined on the terminal strip.

4 Click OK.

5 Select the tab to edit: Terminal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment,

Cable Information or Layout Preview.
■ Terminal Strip tab: Modify the terminal block properties, spare ter-
minals, accessories, multi-level terminals, and destination locations.
■ Catalog Code Assignment tab: In addition to what can be done in
the Terminal Strip tab, you can assign, delete, copy, or paste catalog
part numbers to terminal blocks.
■ Cable Information tab: View the terminal destination locations based
on the cable assignments. Modify the terminal block properties, spare
terminals, and terminal tag or number.
■ Layout Preview tab: Create graphical table blocks or table object
drawings of the selected terminal strip. You can preview the terminal
in the Preview window before inserting the terminal strip onto the
current drawing.

6 On the Preview Layout tab, click Insert Terminal Strip.

7 Specify the terminal strip insertion point on the drawing.

Select a terminal strip to edit

1 On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor

tool.

Use the terminal strip editor | 587

 2 Select which terminal strip to edit on the Terminal Strip Selec-
tion dialog box and click Edit.

3 Select the tab to edit: Terminal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment,

Cable Information or Layout Preview.
■ Terminal Strip tab: Modify the terminal block properties, spare ter-
minals, accessories, multi-level terminals, and destination locations.
■ Catalog Code Assignment tab: In addition to what can be done in
the Terminal Strip tab, you can assign, delete, copy, or paste catalog
part numbers to terminal blocks.
■ Cable Information tab: View the terminal destination locations based
on the cable assignments. Modify the terminal block properties, spare
terminals, and terminal tag or number.
■ Layout Preview tab: Create graphical table blocks or table object
drawings of the selected terminal strip. You can preview the terminal
in the Preview window before inserting or updating the terminal strip
in the current drawing.

4 Modify the terminal strip and click OK.

To place the terminal strip on the current drawing, click Insert
Terminal Strip on the Preview Layout tab. You can also click
Rebuild or Refresh to update the edited graphical or table object
terminal strip in place.

Terminal strip selection

Displays terminal strips inside of the active project. The combination of
Installation, Location, and Terminal Strip values make a complete unique
record for selection in the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor.

NOTE Empty fields from the schematic display empty boxes in the selection
window to indicate that no value was defined by the user in the schematic drawing.

588 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 Sort the entire table by selecting the individual column headers. Do any of
the following:

■ To edit an existing terminal strip, select the terminal strip and click Edit.

■ To create a new terminal strip, click New.

■ To create a new terminal strip based on an existing one, select the terminal
strip and click New.

Terminal strip definition

This dialog box controls the naming of the terminal strip, Installation and
Location codes, and default options for the terminal blocks being created.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. On the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box, click New.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. On the Terminal Strip Selection
dialog box, click New.

Use the following options to create a new terminal strip definition that has
not been placed into the schematic. Some of the properties are written to each
terminal symbol on the graphical terminal strip layout drawing.

Installation Specifies the Installation code value for the new

terminal strip. Click Browse to display a list of exist-
ing installation values found in the active drawing,
entire project or an external list (default.inst). Pick
from the list to automatically update the compon-
ent with the installation code.

Location Specifies the Location code value for the new ter-
minal strip. Click Browse to display a list of existing
location values found in the active drawing, entire
project or an external list (default.inst). Pick from
the list to automatically update the component
with the location code.

Terminal Strip Specifies the strip tag name for the new terminal
strip. You cannot have duplicate terminal strip
names in the active project.

Use the terminal strip editor | 589

Number of Terminal Blocks Specifies the number of blocks the terminal strip is
made up of. This value is not maintained on any of
the terminal symbols in the graphical terminal strip
layout.

If the Installation and Location values are left blank, the terminal strip is
created using only the strip tag name. The Installation (INST), Location (LOC)
and Tag Strip (TAG_STRIP) values are used to determine a terminal strip’s
uniquness no matter which standard is used in the active project (such as IEC
or JIC).

Terminal strip editor: terminal strip tab

Modifies terminal numbering, sorting, and destination settings. The terminals
display in the center of the list box, with the destinations on both sides.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New. Click
the Terminal Strip tab.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New. Click the Terminal Strip tab.

You can sort the terminal blocks inside of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog
box by selecting the column headers. The first click on the header sorts the
column in ascending order. The second click sorts in descending order. The
sort criteria applies to all tabs inside of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box
so you do not have to sort again if you switch between tabs.

Terminal Listing

There are three sections to the grid: Internal Destination, Terminal Block
Information, and External Destination. The bold vertical grid lines make it
easier to determine the differences in these sections. The horizontal grid lines
delineate between wires connected to the terminal blocks. Each row indicates
one wire per side. The bold horizontal grid lines make it easier to distinguish
separations between terminal blocks on the strip.
Select the terminal blocks for editing. Multiple blocks can be selected using
either the Shift or Control key while highlighting rows, or by clicking and
dragging the mouse. If you select a single row that is part of a multi-line
terminal entry, all associated rows highlight.

590 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 NOTE You can right-click any row in the terminal listing to access any of the
editing tools found in the button groupings at the bottom of the dialog box. You
can also right-click to select or deselect all of the terminals in the strip.

Internal Destination Displays the devices on the left side of the terminal strip.

Terminal Block Information Displays the terminal block number and terminal device
pin connection descriptions. These values display in the
Terminal Listing with a blue background indicating that
they are associated to the terminal block.

External Destination Displays the devices on the right side of the terminal strip.

A single line entry terminal block has only two wires connected with its
destinations on opposing sides (left/right). Use the terminal block properties
to connect more wires to the terminal block, which changes the block into a
multiple-line terminal entry.

Properties

Edit Terminal Block Properties Defines or edits terminal block properties. When a
multi-level terminal block is selected, the properties
are edited for all levels of the terminal. The defined
properties are assigned to every terminal symbol in
its association.
You can define up to 99 terminal levels in the block
properties.

Copy Terminal Block Properties Copies terminal block properties from one terminal
to be pasted into another terminals.

Paste Terminal Block Properties Pastes the previously copied terminal block properties
into the selected terminals.

Use the terminal strip editor | 591

 Terminal

Edit Terminal Modifies the selected terminal block. Any modifica-

tions to the ID (Installation, Location, Terminal Strip)
removes the terminal block from its current terminal
strip into the modified or newly defined terminal strip.
You can perform a search of the project for current
installation and location codes.

Reassign Terminal Moves the highlighted terminal blocks from the active
terminal strip to the terminal strip defined in the Reas-
sign Terminal dialog box. You can perform a search
of the project for current installation and location
codes.

Renumber Terminals Renumbers all, or a partial list, of terminal blocks from

the active terminal strip. On the Renumber Terminal
Strip dialog box, specify the new starting number and
other options for renumbering the terminal.

NOTE You cannot renumber a terminal that uses a

wire number as its terminal number. Additionally,
duplicate terminal numbers are not restricted.

Move Terminal Moves an entire terminal (including all levels and any
extra terminals created due to wiring constraints) on
the terminal strip. You can move the terminal block
up or down one row in the listing or manually pick a
new position on the terminal strip listing.

Spare

Insert Spare Terminal Inserts spare terminal blocks on the active terminal
strip. Use the Insert Spare Terminal dialog box to
define a terminal block number or name, specify the
number of spares to be inserted, and to insert the
spare terminals above or below the highlighted ter-
minal. You can add up to 10,000 spare terminals into
the terminal block.

592 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 NOTE Spare terminal assignments are temporary for
the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor. Place
the graphical terminal strip layout on the drawing
during the current session if you want to keep the
spare terminal assignments.

Insert Accessory Inserts one or more accessories (such as terminal end

barriers or partitions) into the terminal strip.

NOTE Accessory terminal assignments are temporary

for the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor.
Place the graphical terminal strip layout on the draw-
ing during the current session if you want to keep the
accessory terminal assignments.

Delete Spare Terminals/Accessories Deletes the spare terminal block or accessory on the
terminal strip listing.

Destinations

Toggle Location Toggles an entire location code from an Internal des-

tination to an External destination or from an External
destination to an Internal destination. You don't have
to select any terminal blocks from the terminal listing.

Toggle Installation Toggles an entire installation code from an Internal

destination to an External destination or from an Ex-
ternal destination to an Internal destination. You don't
have to select any terminal blocks from the terminal
listing.

Toggle Terminal Destinations Changes the destination from Internal (left) to External
(right) or from External to Internal.

Switch Terminal Destinations Switches both destination values for the highlighted
terminal block. The Internal destinations switch to the
External (right) destinations, while all External destin-
ations switch to Internal destinations.

Use the terminal strip editor | 593

 Move Destination Moves the destinations within the terminal/level
definition. All the selected destinations are moved up
or down within the level they belong to. Only the
destinations for cloned blocks due to wire constraints
can cross the boundary of the level they originally
belong to.

Multi-Level

Associate Terminals Combines two or more terminal blocks from any

drawing into a single multiple-level terminal block.
You are alerted if you select too many levels to associ-
ate. You can then decrease the number of selected
levels or use the Break Apart Terminal Associations
tool to separate out one of the levels in the new asso-
ciation.

Break Apart Terminal Associations Separates one or more levels from the multiple level
terminal block into separate terminal blocks. When
the new terminal definitions are created, they retain
the same properties as the original terminal.
■ One terminal: Breaks the selected levels from
their original association and adds them into a
new association together.
■ Separate terminals: Breaks the selected levels
from their original association and adds each level
into a new individual association. These levels
occupy the same level in their new terminal
definition, and new terminals are assigned the
same properties as the original definition from
which they were originally associated in.

Terminal strip editor: catalog code assignment tab

594 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 Modifies terminal catalog numbers. The terminals display in the center of the
list box, with associated catalog number information and destinations on
both sides.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New. Click
the Catalog Code Assignment tab.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New. Click the Catalog Code Assign-
ment tab.

You can sort the terminal blocks inside of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog
box by selecting the column headers. The first click on the header sorts the
column in ascending order. The second click sorts in descending order. The
sort criteria applies to all tabs inside of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box
so you do not have to sort again if you switch between tabs.

Terminal Listing

There are three sections to the grid: Internal Destination, Terminal Block
Information, and External Destination. The bold vertical grid lines make it
easier to determine the differences in these sections. The horizontal grid lines
delineate between wires connected to the terminal blocks; each row indicates
one wire per side. The bold horizontal grid lines make it easier to distinguish
separations between terminal blocks on the strip.
Select the terminal blocks for editing. Multiple blocks can be selected using
either the Shift or Control key while highlighting rows, or by clicking and
dragging the mouse. If you select a single row that is part of a multi-line
terminal entry, all associated rows highlight.

NOTE You can right-click on any row in the terminal listing to access any of the
editing tools found in the button groupings at the bottom of the dialog box. You
can also right-click to select or deselect all of the terminals in the strip.

Internal Destination Displays the devices on the left side of the terminal strip.

Terminal Block Information Displays the terminal block number, terminal device pin
connection descriptions, and catalog data. These values

Use the terminal strip editor | 595

 display in the Terminal Listing with a blue background in-
dicating that they are associated to the terminal block.

External Destination Displays the devices on the right side of the terminal strip.

A single line entry terminal block has only two wires connected with its
destinations on opposing sides (left/right). Use the terminal block properties
to connect more wires to the terminal block, which changes the block into a
multiple-line terminal entry.

Properties

Edit Terminal Block Properties Defines or edits terminal block properties. When a
multi-level terminal block is selected, the properties
are edited for all levels of the terminal. The defined
properties are assigned to every terminal symbol in
its association.
You can define up to 99 terminal levels in the block
properties.

Copy Terminal Block Properties Copies terminal block properties from one terminal
to be pasted into another terminals.

Paste Terminal Block Properties Pastes the previously copied terminal block properties
into the selected terminals.

Terminal

Edit Terminal Modifies the selected terminal block. Any modifica-

tions to the ID (Installation, Location, Terminal Strip)
removes the terminal block from its current terminal
strip into the modified or newly defined terminal strip.
You can perform a search of the project for current
installation and location codes.

Reassign Terminal Moves the highlighted terminal blocks from the active
terminal strip to the terminal strip defined in the Reas-
sign Terminal dialog box.

596 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

Renumber Terminals Renumbers all, or a partial list, of terminal blocks from
the active terminal strip. On the Renumber Terminal
Strip dialog box, specify the new starting number and
other options for renumbering the terminal.

NOTE You cannot renumber a terminal that uses a

wire number as its terminal number. Additionally,
duplicate terminal numbers are not restricted.

Move Terminal Moves an entire terminal (including all levels and any
extra terminals created due to wiring constraints) on
the terminal strip. You can move the terminal block
up or down one row in the listing or manually pick a
new position on the terminal strip listing.

Spare

Insert Spare Terminal Inserts spare terminal blocks on the active terminal
strip. Use the Insert Spare Terminal dialog box to
define a terminal block number or name, specify the
number of spares to be inserted, and to insert the
spare terminals above or below the highlighted ter-
minal. You can add up to 10,000 spare terminals into
the terminal block.

NOTE Spare terminal assignments are temporary for

the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor. Place
the graphical terminal strip layout on the drawing
during the current session if you want to keep the
spare terminal assignments.

Insert Accessory Inserts one or more accessories (such as terminal end

barriers or partitions) into the terminal strip.

NOTE Accessory terminal assignments are temporary

for the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor.
Place the graphical terminal strip layout on the draw-
ing during the current session if you want to keep the
accessory terminal assignments.

Use the terminal strip editor | 597

 Delete Spare Terminals/Accessories Deletes the spare terminal block or accessory on the
terminal strip listing.

Destinations

Toggle Location Toggles an entire location code from an Internal des-

tination to an External destination or from an External
destination to an Internal destination. You don't have
to select any terminal blocks from the terminal listing.

Toggle Installation Toggles an entire installation code from an Internal

destination to an External destination or from an Ex-
ternal destination to an Internal destination. You don't
have to select any terminal blocks from the terminal
listing.

Toggle Terminal Destinations Changes the destination from Internal (left) to External
(right) or from External to Internal.

Switch Terminal Destinations Switches both destination values for the highlighted
terminal block. The Internal destinations switch to the
External (right) destinations, while all External destin-
ations switch to Internal destinations.

Move Destination Moves the destinations within the terminal/level

definition. All the selected destinations are moved up
or down within the level they belong to. Only the
destinations for cloned blocks due to wire constraints
can cross the boundary of the level they originally
belong to.

Multi-Level

Associate Terminals Combines two or more terminal blocks from any

drawing into a single multiple-level terminal block.
You are alerted if you select too many levels to associ-
ate. You can then decrease the number of selected

598 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 levels or use the Break Apart Terminal Associations
tool to separate out one of the levels in the new asso-
ciation.

Break Apart Terminal Associations Separates one or more levels from the multiple level
terminal block into separate terminal blocks. When
the new terminal definitions are created, they retain
the same properties as the original terminal.
■ One terminal: Breaks the selected levels from
their original association and adds them into a
new association together.
■ Separate terminals: Breaks the selected levels
from their original association and adds each level
into a new individual association. These levels
occupy the same level in their new terminal
definition, and new terminals are assigned the
same properties as the original definition from
which they were originally associated in.

Catalog

Assign Catalog Number Assigns catalog part numbers to the selected terminal
blocks, spare terminals, or accessories. The catalog
number assignments are written back to the schematic
and panel drawings. This displays the Parts Catalog
dialog box. Once the catalog number is selected from
the Parts Catalog dialog box, the Catalog Manufac-
turer and Part Number are entered into the Terminal
Strip Editor dialog box.

Delete Catalog Number Removes the catalog part numbers previously assigned
to terminal block, spare terminal, or accessory (either
within the Terminal Strip Editor or the schematic
drawing).

Copy Catalog Number Copies one terminal's catalog part numbers to be

pasted to other terminal blocks within the Terminal
Strip Editor.

Use the terminal strip editor | 599

 Paste Catalog Number Pastes one terminal's catalog part numbers (and ter-
minal block properties) to another single terminal or
multiple terminal blocks within the Terminal Strip
Editor.

Terminal strip editor: cable information tab

Displays cable previews for terminal blocks. The terminals are displayed in
the center of the list box with the cable name, wire conductor information,
and device destination information on both sides.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New. Click
the Cable Preview tab.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New. Click the Cable Preview tab.

You can sort the terminal blocks inside of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog
box by selecting the column headers. The first click on the header sorts the
column in ascending order. The second click sorts in descending order. The
sort criteria applies to all tabs inside of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box
so you do not have to sort again if you switch between tabs.

Terminal Listing

There are three sections to the grid: Internal Destination, Terminal Block
Information, and External Destination. The bold vertical grid lines make it
easier to determine the differences in these sections. The horizontal grid lines
delineate between wires connected to the terminal blocks; each row indicates
one wire per side. The bold horizontal grid lines make it easier to distinguish
separations between terminal blocks on the strip.
Select the terminal blocks for editing. Multiple blocks can be selected using
either the Shift or Control key while highlighting rows, or by clicking and
dragging the mouse. If you select a single row that is part of a multi-line
terminal entry, all associated rows highlight.

600 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 NOTE You can right-click on any row in the terminal listing to access any of the
editing tools found in the button groupings at the bottom of the dialog box. You
can also right-click to select or deselect all of the terminals in the strip.

Internal Destination Displays the devices on the left side of the terminal strip.

Terminal Block Information Displays the terminal block number, terminal device pin
connection descriptions, and cable information. These
values display in the Terminal Listing with a blue back-
ground indicating that they are associated to the terminal
block.

External Destination Displays the devices on the right side of the terminal strip.

A single line entry terminal block has only two wires connected with its
destinations on opposing sides (left/right). Use the terminal block properties
to connect more wires to the terminal block, which changes the block into a
multiple-line terminal entry.

Properties

Edit Terminal Block Properties Defines or edits terminal block properties. When a
multi-level terminal block is selected, the properties
are edited for all levels of the terminal. The defined
properties are assigned to every terminal symbol in
its association.
You can define up to 99 terminal levels in the block
properties.

Copy Terminal Block Properties Copies terminal block properties from one terminal
to be pasted into another terminal.

Paste Terminal Block Properties Pastes the previously copied terminal block properties
into the selected terminals.

Use the terminal strip editor | 601

 Terminal

Edit Terminal Modifies the selected terminal block. Any modifica-

tions to the ID (Installation, Location, Terminal Strip)
removes the terminal block from its current terminal
strip into the modified or newly defined terminal strip.
You can perform a search of the project for current
installation and location codes.

Reassign Terminal Moves the highlighted terminal blocks from the active
terminal strip to the terminal strip defined in the Reas-
sign Terminal dialog box.

Renumber Terminals Renumbers all, or a partial list, of terminal blocks from

the active terminal strip. On the Renumber Terminal
Strip dialog box, specify the new starting number and
other options for renumbering the terminal.

NOTE You cannot renumber a terminal that uses a

wire number as its terminal number. Additionally,
duplicate terminal numbers are not restricted.

Move Terminal Moves an entire terminal (including all levels and any
extra terminals created due to wiring constraints) on
the terminal strip. You can move the terminal block
up or down one row in the listing or manually pick a
new position on the terminal strip listing.

Spare

Insert Spare Terminal Inserts spare terminal blocks on the active terminal
strip. Use the Insert Spare Terminal dialog box to
define a terminal block number or name, specify the
number of spares to be inserted, and to insert the
spare terminals above or below the highlighted ter-
minal. You can add up to 10,000 spare terminals into
the terminal block.

602 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 NOTE Spare terminal assignments are temporary for
the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor. Place
the graphical terminal strip layout on the drawing
during the current session if you want to keep the
spare terminal assignments.

Insert Accessory Inserts one or more accessories (such as terminal end

barriers or partitions) into the terminal strip.

NOTE Accessory terminal assignments are temporary

for the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor.
Place the graphical terminal strip layout on the draw-
ing during the current session if you want to keep the
accessory terminal assignments.

Delete Spare Terminals/Accessories Deletes the spare terminal block or accessory on the
terminal strip listing.

Destinations

Toggle Location Toggles an entire location code from an Internal des-

tination to an External destination or from an External
destination to an Internal destination. You don't have
to select any terminal blocks from the terminal listing.

Toggle Installation Toggles an entire installation code from an Internal

destination to an External destination or from an Ex-
ternal destination to an Internal destination. You don't
have to select any terminal blocks from the terminal
listing.

Toggle Terminal Destinations Changes the destination from Internal (left) to External
(right) or from External to Internal.

Switch Terminal Destinations Switches both destination values for the highlighted
terminal block. The Internal destinations switch to the
External (right) destinations, while all External destin-
ations switch to Internal destinations.

Use the terminal strip editor | 603

 Move Destination Moves the destinations within the terminal/level
definition. All the selected destinations are moved up
or down within the level they belong to. Only the
destinations for cloned blocks due to wire constraints
can cross the boundary of the level they originally
belong to.

Terminal strip editor: layout preview tab

Controls a preview display of the terminal strip in graphical or tabular layout.
This helps determine the best way to generate a terminal layout prior to placing
the image on the drawing file.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New. Click
the Layout Preview tab.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New. Click the Layout Preview tab.

Graphical Terminal Strip/Tabular Terminal Strip/Table Object

Terminal Strip

Specifies the type of terminal strip to generate. The dialog box options change
depending on whether you are creating a graphical or tabular terminal strip.
You can insert an AutoCAD table object as a tabular terminal strip. This allows
for more accurate representations of what is in the Terminal Strip Editor, more
flexibility with the look and style, and provides a means of automatic updating.

Graphical Layout

Generates a graphical representation including terminal footprints, terminal

numbers, wiring information, and terminal destination information.

Total Terminals Displays the total number of terminal block symbols needed
to create the terminal strip layout.

Overall Distance Displays the overall distance the terminal strip footprint
takes up when placed on the active drawing.

604 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

Default pick list for Annotation Lists some common formatting types. You are not limited
format to the selections provided by the default pick list. The re-
placeable parameter variables can be displayed in any
combination including hard-coded characters such as
dashes, brackets, and parenthesis.

Annotation Format Determines the formatting of the wiring information asso-

ciated with the terminal destination. You can define variable
information to display the contents of the Terminal Strip
Editor. One field is for the left-hand side, while the other
is for the right-hand side of the terminal footprint.

NOTE You can leave this field blank if you do not want the
annotation format added to the preview.

Scale on Insert Specifies the scale to use when inserting the graphical
representation onto the drawing file.

Angle on Insert Specifies the angle to use when inserting the graphical
representation onto the drawing file. Select from the list of
pre-defined angles.

Tabular Layout

Generates a tabular representation including terminal numbers, wiring

information, and terminal destination information. The table created is a
grouping of AutoCAD block files with specific attributes to display the terminal
and destination information.

Total Row Displays the total number of rows needed to create

the tabular terminal strip layout. For example, even
though the terminal strip contains only 86 terminal
block symbols, the tabular format may present
more rows in a multi-line terminal situation.

Terminal Table Header Block Defines columns in the table and display the termin-
al strip identification. The default name for the
Terminal Table Header Block is TERMLAY_HEAD-
ER.DWG. Click Browse to search for a header block
to be used in this tabular terminal strip layout. You

Use the terminal strip editor | 605

 can leave this field blank if you do not want a
header added to the preview.

Terminal Table Row Block Defines the individual terminal block rows in the
table and displays the terminal, wiring, cabling,
and terminal destination information. The default
name for the Terminal Table Row Block is TERM-
LAY_ROW.DWG. You can create your own terminal
row symbols by modifying the attribute require-
ments, and then click Browse to search for the new
row block to be used in this tabular terminal strip
layout.

NOTE We do not recommend leaving this option

blank because the table will be empty.

Tabular layout AutoCAD block files insertion points

are required to be in-line with one another in the
Y-axis. AutoCAD Electrical places each symbol in
the drawing at a relative distance based upon the
height of the geometry in the block file.

Rows Per Section Specifies the number of rows per section. Dividing
the total number of rows by the rows per section,
with the excess falling into the last section, determ-
ines the total number of sections.

Section Specifies which section to display in the preview

window and then inserts it onto the drawing file.
You can also use the slide control, which breaks the
number of sections into the slide. Slide the arrow
to the appropriate position to change the number
in the input box while updating the preview win-
dow.

Annotation Format Specifies the device tag destination format to be

displayed on either side of the terminal block.

Default Format Updates the Annotation Format fields to reflect the

default allowed replaceable parameters (page 126).

606 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

Scale on Insert Specifies the scale to use when inserting the
graphical representation onto the drawing file.

Angle on Insert Specifies the angle to use when inserting the

graphical representation onto the drawing file. Se-
lect from the list of predefined angles.

Tabular Layout for a Table Object

The following options are available if you selected to create a Tabular Terminal
Strip (Table Object).

Table Rows Displays the total number of rows needed to create

the tabular terminal strip layout. For example, even
though the terminal strip contains only 86 terminal
block symbols, the tabular format may present
more rows in a multi-line terminal situation

Table Style Specifies the table style to use for the tabular report.
Select from the list or click Browse to browse to and
select another drawing file whose table styles you
want to use.

NOTE If the selected table style is not in the

TableStyle.dwg file, it is added.

Define Columns Defines the columns for the tabular report. The se-
lections are stored in the table when it is inserted
and the next time the terminal strip is edited, the
settings are read back in.

Row Styles Defines specific row styles to use for the selected
table style. On the Select Row Cell Styles dialog
box, select the table style and row cell styles to use
and click OK. The selections are stored in the table
when it is inserted and the next time the terminal
is edited, the settings are read back in.

Layer Defines the specific layer for the tabular terminal

strip to be placed on when inserted. On the Select

Use the terminal strip editor | 607

 Table Layer dialog box, select the layer name from
the list of layers on the active drawing and click OK.
The selections are stored in the table when it is in-
serted and the next time the terminal is edited, the
settings are read back in.

Table Title Defines a title for the table. Enter a title, select from
a list of variables or use a combination of both.
When selecting from the list, the selection is added
to the end of the string if one exists in the edit box.

Browse Browses for any saved settings (in a *.tsl file) that
you previously created.

Save As Saves the settings to an external file (with extension

*.tsl) that you can later reuse. The default folder
location is the User folder in the Documents and
Settings location.

Default Uses the default settings for creating the tabular

report.

Update Preview

Refreshes the preview window with any changes made with the preview
controls or the Terminal Strip Editor. If you modify the total number of sections
in the terminal strip or change the number of terminals per section, you can
refresh the preview.
Use icons or the right-click menu to zoom and pan inside of the preview
window.

Insert Terminal Strip

Places the terminal strip on the active drawing.

Rebuild

(Not available for tabular terminal strips.) Updates an existing terminal strip
that was previously inserted by the Terminal Strip Editor in place. If the
terminal strip exists in the project, the terminal strip is located, deleted and
rebuilt in place without prompting you to select a new insertion point.

608 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 Refresh

(Available for tabular terminal strips created from table objects only.) Refreshes
the data within an existing tabular terminal strip; a new table is not inserted.

Terminal block properties

Use this dialog box to control the number of levels assigned to a multiple level
terminal block. You can control the level description, number of wires per
connection, pins right and pins left. The terminal block properties are
maintained on every terminal symbol in its association.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Select Terminals and Connectors from the
dialog box and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit
Terminal Symbol dialog box, click Block Properties.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component. Select Terminals and Connectors
from the dialog box and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the In-
sert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click Block Properties.
Click the Edit Component tool and select the terminal to edit. In the Insert/Edit
Terminal Symbol dialog box, click Block Properties.
Click Components ➤ Edit Component and select the terminal to edit. In the
Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click Block Properties.

NOTE You can also access this dialog box by clicking Edit Terminal Block Properties
on the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box.

The default level for any terminal symbol that is placed into the project that
is not associated to another is 0.

Manufacturer Displays the Manufacturer value that is currently

assigned to the terminal being edited.

Catalog Number Displays the Catalog Number value that is currently

assigned to the terminal being edited.

Assembly Code Displays the Assembly Code value that is currently

assigned to the terminal being edited.

Levels Specifies the number of levels for the terminal. The

grid expands for editing based on the number of

Use the terminal strip editor | 609

 levels specified. You can then define the level de-
scription, wires per connection and pins.

Terminal Block Property Definition grid Displays the terminal levels. You can edit and
maintain properties of the terminal block here.
■ Level Description: Specifies the description for
the levels of the terminal block. Text you enter
here displays in the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol
and Multiple Level dialog boxes. This is a ter-
minal property that is maintained on every
symbol in its association.
■ Wires per Connection: Specifies the number
of wires allowed per connection for the terminal
connection point.

NOTE These properties do not limit the

number of connections allowed on the
schematic.

■ Pin Left/Pin Right: Specifies labels for pin

numbers associated to the terminal destina-
tions. These fill in the LnnPINL and LnnPINR
attributes on the terminal block when its level
is selected. This is a terminal property that is
maintained on every symbol in its association.

Terminal block property attributes

The values in the grid are stored as follows, where “nn” represents the level
number and is always stored as two digits (i.e. 01, 02, and so on):

Data Attribute

Level Description (60 characters maximum) LnnLABEL

Wires Per Connection (3 characters maximum) LnnWIREPERC

Pin Left (12 characters maximum) LnnPINL

Pin Right (12 characters maximum) LnnPINR

610 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 NOTE If thse attributes are not present, the data is placed into Xdata with the
same name, only wth a “VIA_WD_” prefix.

Edit terminal
Edits individual terminals/levels.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Ter-
minal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select the level
to modify. In the Terminals section, click Edit Terminal.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip, Catalog Code
Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select the level to modify. In the Terminals
section, click Edit Terminal.

Installation Code Changes the installation codes. Click Browse to

display a list of existing installation values found in
the active drawing, entire project or an external list
(default.inst). Pick from the list to automatically
update the component with the installation code.

Location Code Changes the location codes. Click Browse to display

a list of existing location values found in the active
drawing, entire project or an external list (de-
fault.inst). Pick from the list to automatically update
the component with the location code.

Terminal Strip Specifies the Tag ID given to the terminal strip. If

there is an existing name, it appears in the edit box.
If not, you can enter a specific ID name or click the
< and > buttons to increment or decrement the last
digit/character in the Tag Strip value.

Number Specifies the ID number for the terminal. If the ter-

minal’s catalog values carry PINLIST information,
you can step through the available pin numbers
using < or >. If there isn’t PINLIST information,
these buttons just increment or decrement the ter-

Use the terminal strip editor | 611

 minal number. You can also click Pick to select a
text object or an attribute on the active drawing to
use for the terminal number.
When inserting a new terminal, the highest terminal
number in the strip is identified and the default
terminal number for the new terminal increments
by 1.

NOTE This is unavailable when the terminal symbol

does not have a TERM01 attribute or when the
terminal number is the same as the wire number.

Reassign terminal
Reassigns the selected terminals to another terminal strip within the active
project. Multiple selection is allowed.

NOTE Any terminal strips that have terminals added or removed using the Reassign
Terminal tool need to be inserted on the drawing or rebuilt. If you did not update
the graphical terminal strip layout for the edited strip, you are prompted to select
the appropriate action from the alert dialog box.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Ter-
minal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select the
terminal to modify. In the Terminals section, click Reassign Terminal.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip, Catalog Code
Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select the terminal to modify. In the
Terminals section, click Reassign Terminal.

The default values are representative of the current terminal strip assignment.
As you select terminal strips in the grid, the values in the text boxes update
to reflect your selection. If you enter your own values and a matching terminal
strip does not currently exist, a new one is created.

Installation Code Specifies the Installation code for the selected ter-
minal. If there is an existing name, it appears in the
edit box. If not, you can enter a new value. Click
Browse to display a list of existing installation values

612 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 found in the active drawing, entire project or an
external list (default.inst). Pick from the list to
automatically update the component with the in-
stallation code.

Location Code Specifies the Location code for the selected termin-
al. If there is an existing name, it appears in the edit
box. If not, you can enter a new value. Click Browse
to display a list of existing location values found in
the active drawing, entire project or an external list
(default.inst). Pick from the list to automatically
update the component with the location code.

Terminal Strip Specifies the Tag ID given to the terminal strip. If

there is an existing name, it appears in the edit box.
If not, you can enter a new value.

Renumber terminal strip

Renumbers terminals within a terminal strip. You are prompted to insert the
graphical terminal strip if you renumber a terminal that has one or more levels
still available.

NOTE You cannot renumber a terminal that uses a wire number as its terminal
number. Additionally, duplicate terminal numbers are not restricted.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Ter-
minal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select the level
to modify. In the Terminals section, click Renumber Terminals.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip, Catalog Code
Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select the level to modify. In the Terminals
section, click Renumber Terminals.

Starting number Defines the starting value for the terminal numbers.
This value can be alpha, numeric or a combination
of both. The default value is the lowest value of the
selected terminals.

Use the terminal strip editor | 613

Start with bottom level Indicates to process the terminals starting with the
last level and work its way back to 1, in order
(5,4,3,2,1). If unselected, the tool starts with level
1 and moves forward (1,2,3,4,5).

Ignore non-numeric terminal numbers Indicates to process only the terminals that are a
numeric value, all terminals containing an alpha
character are ignored and are not renumbered.

Ignore accessories Indicates to ignore any accessories in the terminal

strip during the renumber command.

Renumber Specifies whether to renumber the terminal based

on terminal or level. Per Terminal processes the
entire terminal at a time while Per Level processes
each level at a time.

Insert spare terminal

Adds spare terminals to the edited terminal strip.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Ter-
minal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select a ter-
minal from the list. In the Spare section, click Insert Spare Terminal.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip, Catalog Code
Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select a terminal in the list. In the Spare
section, click Insert Spare Terminal.

Number Defines the starting terminal number for inserting

spares. The default value is “SPARE.” Select Incre-
ment if you want to increment the terminal ID
when the spare terminal is inserted. If the quantity
is set to less than 2, you cannot increment the ID.
If you are inserting multi-level terminals as defined
by the catalog assignment, each level of a terminal
receives the same number assignment if you select

614 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 Increment. For example, if you insert 3 spare ter-
minals and they are defined as 3 level terminals, all
three levels on terminal 1 are designated as 1, 2 as
2, and 3 as 3. If you want to modify these, edit the
spare terminal or use the Renumber Terminals tool
to get the numbering format you want.

Quantity Specifies a numeric value for the number of spare

terminals to insert. The default value is 1. Use < or
> to increment the value by a single step.

Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the spare termin-

al. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog
lookup.

Catalog Lists the catalog number for the spare terminal.

Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup.

Assembly Lists the assembly code for the spare terminal. The
Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers
together.

Catalog Lookup Opens the spare terminal’s catalog database from

which you can manually enter or select the Manu-
facturer or Catalog values. Search the database for
a specific catalog item to assign to the selected
spare terminal. Database queries are set up in the
3 lists across the top of the dialog box with the
database hits listed in the dialog's main window.

Insert Above/Insert Below Once you define the starting number and the
number of spare terminals to insert, click Insert
Above to insert the defined spare terminals above
the selected terminal in the grid, or Insert Below to
insert the spares below the selected terminal.

Insert accessory

Use the terminal strip editor | 615

 Inserts terminal accessories such as end barriers and dividers, into the terminal
strip.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Ter-
minal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select the a
terminal in the list. In the Spare section, click Insert Accessory.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip, Catalog Code
Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select a terminal in the list. In the Spare
section, click Insert Accessory.

Number Defines the starting terminal number for inserting

accessories. Select Increment if you want to incre-
ment the terminal ID when the accessory is inserted.
If the quantity is set to less than 2, you cannot in-
crement the ID.

Quantity Specifies a numeric value for the number of accessor-

ies to insert. The default value is 1. Use < or > to
increment the value by a single step.

Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the accessory.

Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup.

Catalog Lists the catalog number for the accessory. Enter a

value or select one from the Catalog lookup.

Assembly Lists the assembly code for the accessory. The As-
sembly code is used to link multiple part numbers
together.

Catalog Lookup Opens the accessory’s catalog database from which

you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer
or Catalog values. Search the database for a specific
catalog item to assign to the selected accessory.
Database queries are set up in the 3 lists across the

616 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 top of the dialog box with the database hits listed
in the dialog's main window.

Insert Above/Insert Below Once you define the starting number and the
number of accessories to insert, click Insert Above
to insert the defined accessories above the selected
terminal in the grid, or Insert Below to insert the
accessories below the selected terminal.

Toggle location codes

Toggles destinations based on their location codes from one side of the terminal
to the other.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Ter-
minal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, Destinations
section, click Toggle Location.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip, Catalog Code
Assignment, or Cable Information tab, Destinations section, click Toggle Loca-
tion.

NOTE If components are present that have a blank value for the location code,
question marks (??) display in the dialog box.

Internal Destination Lists connections to the terminal that reside in the

same location as the terminal.

External Destination Lists connections to the terminal that reside in a

different location than the terminal.

Toggle External to Internal/Toggle Internal to Toggles/moves locations from one side of the ter-
External minal to the other. Select the location value to
move in either list and click the appropriate button.

Toggle installation code

Use the terminal strip editor | 617

 Toggles destinations based on their installation codes from one side of the
terminal to the other.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Ter-
minal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, Destinations
section, click Toggle Installation.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection
on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip,
Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, Destinations section, click
Toggle Installation.

NOTE If components are present that have a blank value for the installation code,
questions marks (??) displays in the dialog box.

Internal Destination Lists connections to the terminal that reside in the

same location as the terminal.

External Destination Lists connections to the terminal that reside in a

different location than the terminal.

Toggle External to Internal/Toggle Internal to Toggles/moves locations from one side of the ter-
External minal to the other. Select the installation value to
move in either list and click the appropriate button.

Associate terminals
Use this tool to combine two or more terminal blocks from any drawing into
a single multiple-level terminal block. You are alerted if you select too many
levels to associate. You can then decrease the number of selected levels or use
the Break Apart Terminal Associations tool to separate out one of the levels
in the new association.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Ter-
minal Strip or Catalog Code Assignment tab, select the level to modify. In the
Multi-Level section, click Associate Terminals.

618 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

Access:

Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip or Catalog Code
Assignment tab, select the level to modify. In the Multi-Level section, click Asso-
ciate Terminals.

The number of levels you selected to add to the association displays at the
top of the dialog box.

Terminals Lists only the terminals that have enough available

levels that can accommodate the number of levels
you chose to associate.

Terminal grid Displays the terminal information for the terminal

selected in the tree control.
■ Level numbering: Displays a level number for
each level that is defined in the terminal prop-
erties. The panel symbol’s level numbering is
a pound symbol (#).
■ Label: Lists the level description defined in the
terminal block properties.
■ Number: Lists the terminal numbers defined in
the association. Only one terminal number is
allowed per level and each level displays its re-
spective terminal number or text. Panel termin-
al symbols do not display terminal numbers.
Terminal levels with an assignment and a ter-
minal that has not been assigned a terminal
number display question marks (???) in this
column.
■ PinL: Lists the pin numbers defined on the left
side of the terminal block. This data is entered
into the L0nPINL attribute if present; otherwise,
it is placed into xdata.
■ PinR: Lists the pin numbers defined on the right
side of the terminal block. This data is entered
into the L0nPINR attribute if present; otherwise,
it is placed into xdata

Use the terminal strip editor | 619

 Pin numbering is related to the terminal
level and not the terminal tag number
instance.
■ Reference: Lists the terminal symbol’s reference
location in the project. The syntax is
“Sheet,Reference” based on the drawing con-
figuration.

Associate Adds the selected terminal symbol to the terminal

association selected on the Terminal Strip Editor
dialog box. The selections are processed from top
to bottom in the Terminal Strip Editor grid and
populate the available levels in the new association
from the first available once you click OK.

NOTE The grid row must be selected before you

can perform the association.

Move Up/Move Down Moves the selected terminal up or down one level
within the terminal definition.

Select row cell styles

Defines row styles to be used in the table style. The selections are stored in
the table when it is inserted and the next time the terminal strip is edited, the
settings are read back in.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Layout
Preview tab, select Tabular Terminal Strip (Table Object). Click Row Styles.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal
Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Layout Preview tab, select
Tabular Terminal Strip (Table Object). Click Row Styles.

Table Style Selects a table style from the active drawing to use.
This overrides what is defined in the Terminal Strip
Editor dialog box.

620 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

Terminal Lists available row cell styles from the selected table
style. Select a specific row style to be used for ter-
minals, spare terminals and extra terminals that are
inserted due to wiring constraints.

Accessory Lists available row cell styles from the selected table
style. Select a specific row style to be used for ac-
cessories.

Terminal strip table data fields to include

Defines the columns for your tabular terminal report. The selections are stored
in the table when it is inserted and the next time the terminal strip is edited,
all of the settings are read back in.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your
selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Layout
Preview tab, select Tabular Terminal Strip (Table Object). Click Define Columns.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection
on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Layout Preview
tab, select Tabular Terminal Strip (Table Object). Click Define Columns.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Use the terminal strip editor | 621

Cell Style Specifies the cell style for the table. Within the table styles,
you can define different cell styles to use. These give the
added flexibility to customize how the terminal strip ap-
pears. As you select one of the fields to report you can as-
sign a cell style to the selection.

Name Displays the name for the field that is selected in the Fields
to Report section of the dialog box. Use the default name
or enter a new name in the edit box.

Width Specifies the column width to se for the selected Field to

Report. Enter a positive numeric value in the edit box.

Available Fields

Installation1 Left Installation column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Location1 Left Location column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Device1 Left Device column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Pin1 Left Pin column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Wire1 Left Wire column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Type1 Left Type column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Cable1 Left Cable column in the Terminal Strip Editor Cable Information
grid.

Conductor1 Left Conductor column in the Terminal Strip Editor Cable Inform-
ation grid.

T1 Left T column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Number Number column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

622 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

T2 Right T column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Manufacturer Manufacturer column in the Terminal Strip Editor Catalog Code

Assignment grid.

Catalog Catalog column in the Terminal Strip Editor Catalog Code Assign-
ment grid.

Conductor2 Right Conductor column in the Terminal Strip Editor Cable In-
formation grid.

Cable2 Right Cable column in the Terminal Strip Editor Cable Information
grid.

Type2 Right Type column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Wire2 Right Wire column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Pin2 Right Pin column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Device2 Right Device column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Location2 Right Location column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Installation2 Right Installation column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.

Jumper Column for displaying defined jumpers.

Use the terminal strip editor | 623

Generate terminal strip tables
Insert terminal strip tables onto drawings
Use the Terminal Strip Table Generator tool to insert terminal tables onto
drawings. A new drawing file is created with each section break and
automatically added to the active project.

1 Click the arrow on the Terminal Strip Editor to access the

Terminal Strip Table Generator tool.

2 Click the Terminal Strip Table Generator tool.

3 Select the terminal strips to create tables from.

4 Specify the file name for the first drawing. It is recommended

to add a numeric suffix to the file name since the last character
of the file name is incremented for each new drawing.

5 (Optional) Specify a template file to use.

6 Select whether to create the table as blocks or an AutoCAD

table object.

7 Specify the table layout settings:

■ If you selected Table Blocks, specify the header block, row block, an-
notation format, scale, angle and rows per section.
■ If you selected Table Object, specify the table style, row style, table
title and layer. Select whether to insert the tables in a new drawing,
rebuild an existing terminal strip in an existing drawing or refresh an
existing terminal strip in an existing drawing.

8 Specify the X and Y section placement values for the tables.

9 Click OK.

Terminal strip table generator

This tool controls the Tabular Terminal layout format automatically for any
number of terminal strips. A new drawing file is created with each section
break and automatically added to the active project. The terminal strip's

624 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 installation code, location code, and tag are written to the Drawing Description
Field inside of the project file (*.wdp).

Access:

Click the arrow on the Terminal Strip Editor tool to access the Terminal Strip
Table Generator tool.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Table Generator.

NOTE You can create only one section per drawing file. Each new terminal strip
selected creates a new section and a new drawing.

Terminal Strip Selection

Lists all terminal strips in the active project. Select the terminal strips to use
for automatically creating the drawing files. You can select a single terminal
strip or multiple strips. Multiple strips can be selected using either the Shift
or Control keys while highlighting rows, or by clicking and dragging the
mouse.

Drawing Information for Table Output

First Drawing Name Specifies a starting drawing file location and file
name to use for the automatic creation of the
drawing files. The drawings are automatically added
to the active project and display at the end of the
drawing list in the Project Manager.

NOTE Since the last character of the drawing file

name is incremented for each drawing that is cre-
ated, it is recommended to start the first drawing
file name with a numeric suffix.

Template Specifies the template file to use for the table. Enter
a template file name or click Browse to search for
and select a template file.

NOTE You cannot select an existing file name for the first drawing.

Generate terminal strip tables | 625

 Table Blocks/Table Object

Specifies the type of table to generate. The dialog box options change
depending on whether you are creating a table as blocks or as an AutoCAD
table object.

Table Layout (for Table Blocks)

Terminal Table Header Block Defines columns in the table and display the terminal
strip identification. The default name for the Terminal
Table Header Block is TERMLAY_HEADER.DWG. Click
Browse to search for a header block to be used in
this tabular terminal strip layout. You can leave this
field blank if you do not want a header added to the
drawing.

Terminal Table Row Block Defines the individual terminal block rows in the table
and displays the terminal, wiring, cabling, and ter-
minal destination information. The default name for
the Terminal Table Row Block is TERM-
LAY_ROW.DWG. Click Browse to search for a row
block to be used in this tabular terminal strip layout.

NOTE You can leave this field blank if you do not

want the table rows added to the drawing. However
we do not recommend it because the table will be
empty.

Tabular layout AutoCAD block files insertion points

are required to be in line with one another in the Y-
axis. AutoCAD Electrical places each symbol in the
drawing at a relative distance based upon the height
of the geometry contained in the block file.

Section Placement Specifies the exact location of the terminal strip

header block for each drawing being created. The
row blocks come in relative to the header location.
You can also specify the angle and scale for the ter-
minal strip header block. Select from the list of pre-
defined angles and scale values.

Annotation Format Specifies the device tag destination format displayed

on either side of the terminal block. One field is for

626 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 the left-hand side, while the other is for the right-
hand side of the terminal footprint.

Default Format Updates the Annotation Format fields to reflect the

default allowed replaceable parameters (page 126).
You are not limited to the selections provided by the
default pick list. The replaceable parameter variables
can be displayed in any combination including hard-
coded characters such as dashes, brackets, and par-
enthesis

Rows Per Section Specifies the number of rows per section. The num-
ber of rows per section controls the section sizes and
subsequently the number of drawing files created.
For example, if there are 115 rows and the Rows Per
Section is set to 40, then 3 sections/drawing files are
created.

Table Layout (for Table Objects)

Table Style Specifies the table style to use for the table. Select
from the list or click Browse to browse to and select
another drawing file whose table styles you want
to use.

NOTE If the selected table style is not in the

TableStyle.dwg file, it is added.

Define Columns Defines the columns for the table. The selections
are stored in the table when it is inserted and the
next time the terminal strip is edited, the settings
are read back in.

Row Styles Defines specific row styles to use for the selected
table style. On the Select Row Cell Styles dialog
box, select the table style and row cell styles to use
and click OK. The selections are stored in the table
when it is inserted and the next time the terminal
is edited, the settings are read back in.

Generate terminal strip tables | 627

Layer Defines the specific layer for the table to be placed
on when inserted. On the Select Table Layer dialog
box, select the layer name from the list of layers on
the active drawing and click OK. The selections are
stored in the table when it is inserted and the next
time the terminal is edited, the settings are read
back in.

Table Title Defines a title for the table. Enter a title, select from
a list of variables or use a combination of both.
When selecting from the list, the selection is added
to the end of the string if one exists in the edit box.

Browse Browses for any saved settings (in a *.tsl file) that
you previously created.

Save As Saves the settings to an external file (with extension

*.tsl) that you can later reuse. The default folder
location is the User folder in the Documents and
Settings location.

Default Uses the default settings for creating the table.

Section Placement Specifies the exact location of the table for each
drawing being created.

Insert in New Drawing Creates a new drawing for each table and adds the
drawings to the active project.

Rebuild in Existing Drawing Updates an existing table that was already placed
on a drawing in place. If the terminal strip exists in
the project, it is located, deleted, and rebuilt in
place without prompting you to select a new inser-
tion point.

628 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 NOTE If the selected terminal strip is not found in
the project, an alert displays asking if you want to
insert the missing strip in a new drawing. If you
click Yes, the terminal strip is inserted. If you click
No, the terminal strip is not inserted. The terminal
strips that were found are updated.

Refresh in Existing Drawing Refreshes the data within an existing tabular termin-
al strip; a new table is not inserted.

NOTE If the selected terminal strip is not found in

the project, an alert displays asking if you want to
insert the missing strip in a new drawing. If you
click Yes, the terminal strip is inserted. If you click
No, the terminal strip is not inserted. The terminal
strips that were found are updated.

Overview of terminal properties database

The terminal properties database file (_TERMPROPS table in the
default_cat.mdb) can be viewed, edited, and expanded using the Terminal
Properties Database Editor tool. The terminal properties table holds the
terminal properties based on the manufacturer, catalog, and assembly code
entries. When a catalog assignment is made to a terminal, it looks to the
terminal properties table for a matching entry and pulls out and assigns the
properties when a match is found. The following wild cards are supported in
the catalog field:

■ * = matches any characters

■ ? = matches a single character

■ # = matches a single numeric digit

■ @ = matches a single alphabetic character

Terminal Properties Lookup | 629

 Structure of the terminal properties database table

RECNUM (Microsoft Access internal use)

MANUFACTURER Manufacturer code (value must be consistent with

the catalog lookup files; 24 characters maximum)

CATALOG Catalog number (use wild cards as much as pos-

sible; 60 characters maximum)

ASSEMBLYCODE AutoCAD Electrical internal assembly code (must

be consistent with the catalog lookup files; 60
characters maximum)

LEVELS Number of levels for the terminal

LEVELDESCRIPTION Levels description/level definition (255 characters

maximum)

TPINL Pin label definition for the left side of the terminal
(255 characters maximum)

TPINR Pin label definition for the right side of the terminal
(255 characters maximum)

WIRESPERCONNECTION Definition of the wiring constraints (255 characters

maximum)

NOTE When dealing with a multi-tier terminal, a comma (,) is used as a delimiter
for the LevelDescription, WiresPerConnection, TPINR and TPINL fields. For example,
the LevelDescription may be “UPPER,LOWER” and the WiresPerConnection may
be “2,2.”

Edit terminal properties database

Use the Terminal Properties Database Editor tool to edit the terminal properties
database, located in the catalog database.

1 Click Component ➤ Terminals ➤ Terminal Properties Database Editor.

630 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

 2 In the Select Terminal Properties Table dialog box, select the table to edit
and click Edit.

NOTE You can also create a new table by entering the manufacturer name
in the edit box and clicking Create.

3 In the Edit dialog box:

■ To edit an existing record, click Sort, Filter, or Find to search for the
record to edit. Select the record from the list and click Edit.

■ To create a new record, click Add New, or select an existing record

and click Add Copy to create a new record based on an existing one.

■ To delete an existing record, select the record in the list and click
Delete.

4 To edit or create a new record, in the Edit Record dialog box, specify the
values to assign to the record and click OK.

5 In the Edit dialog box, click Save/Exit.

Select terminal properties table

Use this tool to select the relevant _TERMPROPS table to edit or create a new
one.

Access:

Click Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Terminal Properties Database Editor.

Select or Type Manufacturer Lists all of the TERMPROPS tables that are in the
catalog database. The “(Default)” manufacturer is
used to edit the generic _TERMPROPS table.
Select the table to edit or enter a name for a new
one.

Table Displays the proper table name in the catalog

database. This text changes depending on which
manufacturer is selected. For example, if you select
SQD, then _TERMPROPS_SQD displays.

Overview of terminal properties database | 631

Create (Available only when you enter the name of a
manufacturer.) Creates a new table in the catalog
database with the specified name and adds the
table to the list of manufacturers. Once a table is
created, the Edit (Table: _TERMPROPS_manufac-
turer) dialog box displays so you can edit the new
table.

NOTE The following characters are not allowed in

the table name: ~ @ # $ % ^ & * - + = \ { } “ ‘ ; : ?
/ < > , ! [ ] |. These characters are replaced with an
underscore (_) if entered in the edit box.

Edit (available only after a manufacturer is selected from

the list) Opens the Edit (Table: _TERMPROPS_man-
ufacturer) dialog box so you can edit the selected
TERMPROPS table.

Edit
AutoCAD Electrical consults a terminal properties database table when a catalog
assignment is made to a terminal. Use this to edit the terminal properties
database.

Access:

Click Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Terminal Properties Database Editor. Specify

the table to create and click Create or select the table to edit and click Edit.

This lookup database table is a table within the catalog lookup Access .mdb
file. The default file name is default_cat.mdb, table _TERMPROPS, and comes
populated with a sample of vendor data. You can expand this table as needed.
Use your own copy of Microsoft Access or use this dialog box to add new
entries, add entries based on existing entries, edit, and delete entries from the
table.

Sort Sorts the list of database records using either an alphanumeric sort
or number values. You can specify 4 sorts to perform on the list.

Find Sorts the list of database records using either an alphanumeric sort
or number values. You can specify 4 sorts to perform on the list.

632 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

Replace Indicates to replace the find value with the new text string that you
specify.

Filter Filters the listing based on certain values in the table. Picking the
blank entry in the list removes the filter for that field. After you define
the values to filter, apply the filter in the database editing window.

Edit Displays the Edit Record dialog box for modifying the existing record
in the database.

Add New Displays the Edit New Record dialog box for entering a new record
into the database.

Add Copy Displays the Edit Copied Record dialog box for modifying and copying
the record to make a new record. You cannot have two duplicate
copies in the database.

Delete Removes the selected record from the database.

Edit record
Access:

Click Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Terminal Properties Database Editor. Specify

the table to create and click Create or select the table to edit and click Edit. In
the Edit dialog box, click Add New, Add Copy, or Edit.

RECNUM (Microsoft Access internal use)

MANUFACTURER Manufacturer code (value must be consistent with

the catalog lookup files; 24 characters maximum)

CATALOG Catalog number (use wild cards as much as pos-

sible; 60 characters maximum).

ASSEMBLYCODE AutoCAD Electrical internal assembly code (must

be consistent with the catalog lookup files; 60
characters maximum)

Overview of terminal properties database | 633

LEVELS Number of levels for the terminal

LEVELDESCRIPTION Levels description/level definition (255 characters

maximum)

TPINL Pin label definition for the left side of the terminal
(255 characters maximum)

TPINR Pin label definition for the right side of the terminal
(255 characters maximum)

WIRESPERCONNECTION Definition of the wiring constraints (255 characters

maximum)

When dealing with a multi-tier terminal, a comma (,) is used as a delimiter

for the LevelDescription, TPINL, TPINR and WiresPerConnection fields. For
example, the LevelDescription may be “UPPER, LOWER” and the
WiresPerConnection may be “2,2.”

634 | Chapter 9 Terminal Tools

Point-to-Point Wiring
Tools 10
In this chapter
■ Working with Connectors
■ Bend wires at right angles
■ Insert multiple bus wiring
■ Import data from Autodesk
Inventor Professional Cable
& Harness
■ Overview of the
spreadsheet import file
structure
■ Insert splices

635
Use point-to-point wiring tools
The Point-to-Point wiring tools help you more easily create and work with
point-to-point style wiring schematics (as opposed to ladder-style schematics).
Though you may find some of these tools and enhancements useful for
ladder-style schematics, these tools are tuned to work well with drawings that
are heavy on inter-wired, multiple-pin connectors.
Instead of creating and maintaining a large library of schematic connector
symbols, each is generated parametrically, on the fly, per user input and at
user-defined orientation. The Insert Connector toolbar contains connector
insertion and editing tools.

Point-to-Point Style Schematic Ladder Style Schematic

In addition to the tools specifically related to connectors found on the

Connector toolbar, you can utilize other AutoCAD Electrical tools for editing
your point-to-point wiring diagrams.

Edit Pin Numbers Use the Edit Component tool to edit the pin assign-
ments on the parametrically generated connectors.

Connector Dash Link Lines Use the Link Components (Dashed Line) tool to insert
dash linked lines between parent and split-off child
parametric connector symbols.

Scoot Connector Use the Scoot tool to reposition the parametric con-
nector along the same direction as the connected
wiring.

636 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

Scoot Wire Use the Scoot tool to move wires attached to pins
on the connectors. The wire scoots and the connector
pin along with it while the overall connector shell
stays fixed.

Insert Wires Use the Insert Wires tool to route single-wire connec-
tions. Use the Multiple Wire Bus tool, Component
mode, to insert and route multiple wires in one tool.

NOTE A wire connection point should only have up

to 3 wire connections tied to it. Adding more wires
to a single point prevents the angled wire connection
to tie uniquely to the wire connection point.

Use point-to-point wiring tools | 637

 Insert connectors
Use this tool to insert a parametrically generated connector symbols.

1 Click the Insert Connector tool.

2 In the Insert connector dialog box, specify the pin spacing and
pin count.
(Optional) For pin count, click Pick and draw a fence showing
the length of the appropriate connector.

3 Specify whether to build the connector using fixed pin spacing

or to have it compress or expand to match the pins up with
underlying wire crossings.

4 Specify whether to insert the entire connector all at once or

to insert it manually, pin by pin, with an option to insert
spacers or to break the connector into 2 or more pieces.

5 Click the Rotate or Flip buttons to change the display of the

connector symbol.
The preview image updates to reflect your changes to the
connector display options.

6 (Optional) Click Details for more options to define settings for

the size, shape and display of the parametrically built connect-
or symbols.

7 Click Insert.
A preview outline of the connector displays for placement on
the drawing. It shows rounded corners for the plug side of the
connector. An 'x' indicates the insertion point of the connector
and the arrow indicates the plug side wire connection direc-
tion.

8 Specify the insertion point on the drawing or enter Z (zoom),

P (pan), X, V, or Tab at the command prompt to change the
connector orientation before insertion. Review the sections
below to see how Tab, V key, or X key changes your connector
orientation.
If you selected to allow spacers/breaks, in the Custom Pin
Spaces/Breaks dialog box, click Break Symbol Now to break
the connector and display the Connector Layout dialog box
for defining how you want the rest of the pins inserted on the

638 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 drawing.

Reverse connector using the Tab key

Prior to committing the connector outline to the drawing, you can press Tab
to reverse the connector either about its long axis or end for end. If the
connector is vertical, a series of TAB keystrokes cycles the image through these
4 orientations:

Start point TAB 1 TAB 2 TAB 3

Rotate connector using the V key

Press "V" at the command prompt to switch between vertical and horizontal
orientations. Based on where the outline is in the flip process, the Tab keystroke
reverses the connector either about its long axis or end for end. When in its
horizontal orientation, a series of Tabs cycles the image through these four
orientations

Start point TAB 1 TAB 2 TAB 3

Switch layout using the X key

Press "X" at the command prompt to toggle between "Fixed Spacing" and "At
Wire Crossings." Press the X key, and then move the connector preview over

Use point-to-point wiring tools | 639

 the wires so the connector stretches to align each pin with the underlying
wire spacing. The connector stretches only to meet the underlying spacing
when the first pin lands on a wire. If the size of the connector exceeds the
total number of wires underlying the connector, the remaining pins follow
the specified fixed spacing value.

Rotate connectors
Use this tool to rotate the connector about its insertion point in 90-degree
increments. The wire connections do not reroute with each rotation of the
connector. You must resolve wiring using the wire editing tools.

640 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 NOTE This command differs from the standard ROTATE command in that it
renames the wire connection attributes to maintain full compatibility with the
Insert Wire command, and it can hold the terminal pin text and tag-ID attributes
in their current orientation.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the

Rotate Connector tool.

2 Click the Rotate Connector tool.

3 Specify whether to hold the current attribute orientation.

If you select Yes (default), the attribute text orientation does
not rotate as the connector rotates.

4 Select the connector to rotate.

The connector automatically rotates 90 degrees.

5 Keep clicking on the connector until the appropriate position

is reached.

6 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command.

Example: Hold attribute orientation = yes

Original First Rotate Second Rotate Third Rotate

Use point-to-point wiring tools | 641

 Example: Hold attribute orientation = no

Original First Rotate Second Rotate Third Rotate

Reverse connectors

Use this tool to reverse the orientation of the connector about its horizontal
or vertical axis. Any existing wire connections don't automatically reroute to

642 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

the reverse side of the connector and you will have to resolve wiring using
the wire editing tools.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Re-
verse Connector tool.

2 Click the Reverse Connector tool.

3 Select the connector to reverse.

The connector automatically reverses depending on its original
orientation.

NOTE For a single receptacle connector with no rounded corners,

the appearance of the graphics appears unchanged, but the wire
connection attributes actually move to the other side of the con-
nector.

4 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command.

Stretch connectors

Use this tool to increase or decrease the connector's overall shell length. You
might do this to make room for new pins or to capture previously added pins

Use point-to-point wiring tools | 643

 that fell beyond the connector shell. You identify which end of the connector
is to be altered and the measurement of displacement.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the

Stretch Connector tool.

2 Click the Stretch Connector tool.

3 Specify the end of the connector to stretch.

4 Specify where you want the connector to end (second point

of displacement). Either drag your mouse to the appropriate
location or enter coordinates.

NOTE You can press TAB during the stretch to change the visibility
of the connector attributes. See the Tips and Hints below for more
information.

5 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command.

Tips and Hints

■ Stretch Connector does not support window selection.

■ Turn Snap ON.

■ The stretch begins at the end of the connector. There is not a first point
of displacement.

■ If the stretched connector end runs over the top of the connector's tag-ID
attribute (attribute name TAG1 or TAG2), then this attribute along with
attributes INST, LOC, DESC1, DESC2, and DESC3 relocate with the stretch.
Pressing TAB during the stretch changes the visibility of these attributes.
If turned ON, the attributes display as temporary graphics that move with
the stretch cursor; if turned OFF, the temporary graphics are not visible.

■ Avoid stretching one end of a connector all the way to the other end of
the connector.

644 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

Split connector
Use this tool to split the parametric connector into 2 separate block definitions
(for example, parent and a child or a child and another child).

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Split
Connector tool.

2 Click the Split Connector tool.

3 Select the connector block to split.

4 Specify the split point (i.e. pick between two sets of pins).

5 (Optional) Define the origin point for the new block. The de-
fault is preset to be in-line with the first set of pins on the split-
off piece. If you do not want to accept the default, you can
enter the coordinates or click Pick Point, and then select the
origin point on the drawing.

6 (Optional) Set the break type: no lines, straight lines, jagged

lines, or draw it. The default is set to jagged lines.

7 (Optional) Select to reposition the child block to move it as

part of this command.

8 Click OK.

9 To reposition the child block, select a point on the screen to

place the block.

10 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command.

Add pins to a connector

Use point-to-point wiring tools | 645

 Once the connector is inserted onto the drawing you can edit the connector
pins found inside of the connector shell. You may need to make room for the
insertion of new pins by either stretching the connector shell (Stretch
Connector), moving existing pins (Move Connector Pin), or scooting wires
with attached pins (Scoot) to make room for your new pins.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Add
Connector Pins tool.

2 Click the Add Connector Pins tool.

3 Select the connector.

4 Specify where to insert the next available pin number (dis-

played on the command line) or press R+space to manually
define the new starting pin number.
The next available pin numbering is based on the existing pins
and an optional pin list associated to the selected connector.
The PINLIST values defined on the parent symbol are queried
in the project database to determine the next available pin
number on the connector component. This checks across the
entire project to find the pin numbers used on both parent
and any child connector symbols. If a PINLIST value is not
defined, then the next available sequential pin number (based
on existing pins) is used. Pin assignments can be numbers or
letters or combinations of both.

5 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command.

Tips and Hints

■ Turn Snap ON.

■ Pins can be added inside the shell or beyond either end of the connector
shell.

■ Pins are inserted along the connector's centerline axis, even if your pick
point is far off to one side of the connector.

■ Connectors can be stretched later to accommodate new pins added beyond

either end of the connector.

646 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

■ Pins can be added between the original pins; pins can then be moved or
scooted to accommodate spacing.

■ Pins can be lined up with a pin on another connector. After selecting the
Add Connector Pins tool, select the connector to add the pin to, press Shift
+ right-click to display the Object Snaps options, select Insert and click the
pin to align the new pin to. The new pin is inserted onto the selected
component and is lined up with the pin on the other connector.

Delete pins from connectors

Once the connector is inserted onto the drawing you can edit the connector
pins found inside of the connector. Use this tool to remove a pin from an
existing connector and, if the connector has a defined pin list, free this deleted

Use point-to-point wiring tools | 647

 pin to be re-inserted later on this connector or on a related child of this
connector.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the

Delete Connector Pins tool.

2 Click the Delete Connector Pins tool.

3 Pick the pins to delete from the connectors.

The pin number attribute on the connector block disappears.
This attribute along with associated wire connection and de-
scription attributes are not immediately removed from the
connector. They are renamed so that they are effectively ig-
nored. If the connector is subsequently stretched or split, then
these deleted pin attributes are purged from the connector
block instance.

4 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command.

Tips and Hints

■ Deleting a pin that has a connected wire does not remove the wire. In this
case, the wire no longer is connected to the connector. It appears to be a
wire that is unconnected at the connector end.

Swap pin numbers

This tool exchanges one set of connector pin numbers for another on an
existing connector or between connectors on the drawing.

648 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

NOTE You cannot swap a combination connector with a single plug or receptacle
connector. Additionally, you cannot use this tool to swap pins from one side of a
connector to the other.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the

Swap Connector Pins tool.

2 Click the Swap Connector Pins tool.

3 Select the connector pin to swap.

Temporary graphics are drawn around the selected pin number
indicating that it has been included in the "swap" list.

4 Select the pin that you want to swap with the selected pin.
The connector pins are swapped between the two selections.

5 Select another set of pins to swap or press Enter or Esc to exit

the command.

Move pins
Use this tool to reposition pins within an existing connector.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the

Move Pins tool.

2 Click the Move Pins tool.

3 Select the connector pin to move.

4 Specify the new location for the pin.

The pin relocates along the connector's centerline axis, even
if your pick point is far off to one side of the connector. You
can also specify a location beyond either end of the current
connector shell, and then use the Stretch Connector tool to
extend the shell to enclose these pins.

5 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command.

Use point-to-point wiring tools | 649

 Edit connector pin numbers
Once the connector is inserted onto the drawing file's block definition, you
can edit the connector pins found inside of the connector. Use the Connector
Pin Numbers in Use dialog box to edit the pins defined on the parametric
connector. Connector symbols have attributes to define Installation and
Location codes, manufacturing data, component tagging and descriptions,
and pin assignments.

1 Click the Edit Component tool.

2 Select the connector.

3 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Pins section, click

List.

4 In the Connector Pin Numbers in Use dialog box, select a pair

of pins to modify.

5 In the Pin Number section, enter a new pin number value in

the edit boxes or click the arrows to either increase or decrease
both plug and receptacle values by one.

6 (Optional) Enter a description for the plug or receptacle termin-

al.

7 Click OK.

Insert connector
Use this tool to generate a connector symbol from user-defined parameters.
The symbol is created on the fly and inserted as a block insert into your active
drawing file. Since these are created on an as-needed based, it eliminates the
need for you to create and maintain a library of connector symbols.

Access:

Click the Insert Connector tool.

From the Components menu, select Insert Connector ➤ Insert Connector.

Click Details to expand the dialog box to provide more options to define
settings for the size, shape, and display of the parametrically built connector
symbols.

650 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 Layout

Determines the overall appearance of the parametric connector, including

pin spacing and pin count.

Pin Spacing Specifies the distance between the pin wire connections.
This value initially defaults to the Rung Spacing defined
Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format ➤ Ladder Defaults
- Spacing setting for the drawing file.

Pin Count Specifies the number of pins associated with the connector.
This is required to parametrically build the connector.

Pick This is an alternate Pick method for determining the Pin

Count for the new connector. You can do a fence selection
of crossed wires or you can define a starting point and
ending point in empty space. For the fence selection, a pin
exists for every wire intersection with the AutoCAD fence
line. For example, if you cross 5 wires with the fence pick
points, the pin count value will be 5. On the other hand,
if you select endpoints in empty space, the total number
of pins is based upon dividing the distance between the
two pick points by the Pin Spacing value.

Fixed Spacing Generates the connector with a fixed spacing from one pin
to the next. This is the Pin Spacing value. If the Pin Spacing
edit box is left blank, the fixed spacing value defaults to
the drawing's ladder default spacing value.

At Wire Crossings Modifies the pin placement to have the pins coincide with
underlying wires. The connector stretches or compresses
to match up with underlying wires as it inserts on to the
drawing.
If the connector has more pins than underlying wires, the
excess pins are added at the end of the connector using
the default fixed spacing value.

Pin List Specifies either the starting pin number for an incrementing
series of pin numbers or the actual comma-delimited list
of pin numbers to be used on the connector. For example,
a pin list entry of "1" for a connector with the Pin Count

Use point-to-point wiring tools | 651

 set to 8 generates a connector with pins labeled "1" through
"8." On the other hand, a pin list entry of
"1,2,3,4,A,B,C,GND" generates an 8-pin connector with
pins labeled "1", "2", "3", "4", "A", "B", "C", "GND."
If the Pin List edit box is left blank, the connector number-
ing starts at 1 and continues up through the Pin Count
value. If you define more pin list data than pin count, the
pins are used in the order they are defined. The entire list
is saved on the connector as PINLIST xdata. This can be
later referenced to add missing pins (Add Connector Pin
tool) or to assign unused pins to a child instance of the
parent connector.

Insert All Creates the connector without further prompts (i.e. no

option for inserting spacers or for breaking the connector
into 2 or more pieces).

Allow Spacers/Breaks Gives you manual control over the insertion of the connect-
or. Displays the Custom Pin Spaces/Breaks dialog box that
prompts you for the insertion of each connector pin prior
to committing the connector block definition to the draw-
ing file. The running count of pins inserted versus total pins
defined for the connector is listed at the top of the dialog
box. Select an option for inserting the other pins:
■ Insert Next Connection: Continues building the con-
nector by inserting the next pin (repeated prompting
until all pins are inserted).
■ Add Spacer: Adds a spacer in place of a pin on the
connector in order to leave room for a future pin or to
skip over a wire that is not to be broken by the connect-
or. The connector stretches its length to account for
this extra blank space.
■ Break Symbol Now: Breaks connector and begins
prompt back at the connector layout dialog box. If you
terminate the command without inserting the re-
mainder of the connector, you can go to another
drawing and restart the command. You can continue
with the previous connector or discard the saved data
and start with a new one.

652 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 NOTE This insert of a continued, broken connect-
or must be done during the current AutoCAD
Electrical session.

■ Cancel Custom: Inserts the remaining pins into the

connector without any further prompts.

Start Connector As Child Defines the new connector block definition as a child of a
parent connector. This means that after it is created it needs
to be linked to a parent connector through a common tag-
ID value (select Edit Component and link to parent using
any of the normal methods).

Start with Break Creates the child symbol with a jagged or broken top. If
unselected, the child symbol has a rounded corner determ-
ined by the radius dimension defined in the Size section of
the dialog box.

Orientation

Use to quickly change the connector's orientation prior to placing it into the
drawing file. This orientation change also modifies the preview to reflect the
selection.

Rotate Switches the orientation of the parametric con-

nector insertion between horizontal and vertical.

Flip Flips the connector about its long axis.

Use point-to-point wiring tools | 653

 Type

Determines the type of connector to be built as to whether it includes the

plug/receptacle combination or if it will display either the plug side or the
receptacle side.

Plug/Receptacle Combination Creates the connector as a single block file showing

both the plug and receptacle.

Wire Number Change Sets the property of the connector symbol to change
the wire number through a plug/receptacle connect-
or symbol. By default, the wire numbers are main-
tained through a plug/receptacle connector.

Add Divider Line Creates a plug/receptacle combination connector

with a line down the middle of the block to indicate
the separation of the plug and receptacle. This line
becomes part of the block definition for the connect-
or.

Plug Only Creates the connector as a single block file showing

the plug representation only.

Receptacle Only Creates the connector as a single block file showing

the receptacle representation only.

Display

Use to define the connector's placement on the drawing relative to other

connectors and the drawing border. This controls which side of the connector
the plug will be displayed, whether the connector goes in vertically or
horizontally, and whether the pins are visible.

Connector Specifies whether the connector inserts vertically or horizontally.

Plug Specifies which direction the plug portion of the connector comes
in relative to the overall plug/receptacle parametric build. The
plug representation is displayed with rounded corners.

654 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 Options include vertical with the plug to the left, vertical with
the plug to the right, horizontal with the plug to the bottom, or
horizontal with the plug to the top.

Pins Specifies which pin numbers are visible or hidden on the connect-
or. In the case of a plug/receptacle combination, options include
showing both sides, showing the plug only, showing the recept-
acle only, or hiding both.
If you select to make the pins on the plug or receptacle invisible,
the attribute and its value are still defined in the block definition
on the drawing file.
If you selected Plug Only or Receptacle Only for the Type, the
pin display options are show or hide only. These show or hide
the pin numbers on a single plug or receptacle symbol.
Hidden pins are still present on the symbol, they are just marked
invisible. Values assigned to the hidden pins will still show up in
various wire connection from/to reports. You can unhide hidden
attributes using the Move/Show Attribute tool.

Size

The values in the edit boxes define the parameters used to build the graphical
outline that represents the shell of the connector.

Receptacle Specifies the width of the receptacle side of the connector. This
value can be the same as the plug side.

Plug Specifies the width of the plug side of the connector.

Top Specifies the distance from the first pin of the connector to the
top end of the connector.

Bottom Specifies the distance from the last pin of the connector to the
bottom end of the connector.

Radius Specifies the fillet radius for the rounded portion of the plug
representation. If left blank or if you enter a 0.0 value, then the
corner is drawn without a fillet. If the radius value exceeds the
Plug width value, the radius value will be internally set back to
be equal to the plug width value.

Use point-to-point wiring tools | 655

 Insert

Inserts the connector symbol on the drawing. If a pin count was not defined,
an error message appears indicating that you must define a pin count before
proceeding. A preview outline of the connector displays for placement on the
drawing. It shows angled corners for the plug side of the connector. An 'x'
indicates the insertion point of the connector. An arrow indicates the plug
side wire connection direction for plug/receptacle or plug-only connector
inserts or shows the wire connection direction for a receptacle-only connector
insert
Prior to committing the connector outline to the drawing, you can press TAB
on your keyboard to flip the connector through 4 different orientations or
press the "V" key to switch between vertical and horizontal orientations.

Connector layout
Access:

Click the Insert Connector tool. In the Insert Connector dialog box, select Allow
Spacers/Breaks and click Insert. In the Custom Pin Spaces/Breaks dialog box,
click Break Symbol Now.
From the Components menu, select Insert Connector ➤ Insert Connector. In
the Insert Connector dialog box, select Allow Spacers/Breaks and click Insert.
In the Custom Pin Spaces/Breaks dialog box, click Break Symbol Now.

Selecting Break Symbol Now on the Custom Pin Spaces/Breaks dialog box
breaks the connector and displays this dialog box for defining how you want
the rest of the pins inserted on the drawing.

Pin Spacing

Specifies the distance between the pin wire connections. This value initially
defaults to the Rung Spacing defined Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format
➤ Ladder Defaults - Spacing setting for the for the drawing file.

Fixed Spacing Creates the connector pin spacing as fixed. The spacing is driven
by the Pin Spacing value. If the Pin Spacing edit box is left blank,
the fixed spacing value is determined from the drawing's ladder
defaults spacing value.

656 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

At Wire Crossings Modifies the connector to have the pins coincide with underlying
wires. The connector stretches or compresses to match up with
underlying wires as it inserts on to the drawing.
If the connector has more pins than underlying wires, the excess
pins are added at the end of the connector using the default fixed
spacing value.

Pin Insertion

Insert All Creates the connector without further prompts (for example, no
option for inserting spacers or for breaking the connector into 2
or more pieces). When you click OK on the Connector Layout
dialog box, the block definition is committed to the drawing and
the command is complete.

Allow Spacers/Breaks Gives you manual control over the insertion of the connector.
Displays the Custom Pin Spaces/Breaks dialog box that prompts
you for the insertion of each connector pin prior to committing
the connector block definition to the drawing file. The running
count of pins inserted versus total pins defined for the connector
is listed at the top of the dialog box. Select an option for inserting
the other pins:
■ Insert Next Connection: Continues building the connector
by inserting the next pin (repeated prompting until all pins
are inserted).
■ Add Spacer: Adds a spacer in place of a pin on the connector
in order to leave room for a future pin or to skip over a wire
that is not to be broken by the connector. The connector
stretches its length to account for this extra blank space.
■ Break Symbol Now: Breaks connector and begins prompt
back at the Connector Layout dialog box. If you terminate
the command without inserting the remainder of the connect-
or, you can go to another drawing and restart the command.
You can continue with the previous connector or discard the
saved data and start with a new one.

NOTE This insert of a continued, broken connector

must be done during the current AutoCAD Electrical
session.

Use point-to-point wiring tools | 657

 ■ Cancel Custom: Inserts the remaining pins into the connector
without any further prompts.

Connector pin numbers in use

Lists all of the pins previously used in the project and the available pins that
can be assigned to a connector. The connector tag and pin count displays
below the title bar in the dialog box.

Access:

Click the Edit Component tool. Select the connector to edit. In the Insert/Edit
Component dialog box, Pins section, click List.
From the Components menu, select Edit Component. Select the connector to
edit. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Pins section, click List.

NOTE You can edit pin numbers when a row is selected in the grid.

Pin List Displays all available pins to be assigned to the parametrically-built

connector. The number in parenthesis () indicates the single or pair
of pins for the connector. The first column is the value assigned to
TERM01 or TERM01P while the second column assigns its number to
TERM02 or TERM02J. Select the pin from the list to populate the grid.
The Pin list table in the catalog database (default_cat.mdb) supports
connectors drawn in the ladder diagram or connector diagram
schematics.

x Displays an 'x' for all pins that are displayed since they are part of the
connector and not selected on the block being edited (the pins may
be on a different drawing or part of another symbol). Only the pin
numbers associated to the block selected are editable; the controls
at the bottom of the dialog box are disabled if a pin with an 'x' is se-
lected from the list.

Sheet, Reference Displays the sheet number and potential reference line number where
the connector definition is located in the project.

Plug Displays the plug pin number. The value changes automatically if you
edit it in the Pin Numbers section of the dialog box.

658 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

Description Displays the terminal descriptions that are associated to the wire
connection point. The first Description column displays the description
for the plug; the second displays the description for the receptacle.

Receptacle Displays the receptacle pin number. The value changes automatically
if you edit it in the Pin Numbers section of the dialog box.

Wire Numbers Displays the wire numbers on either side of the combination connector
or a single wire number based on whether or not the connector is a
simple plug or jack.

Pin Numbers Displays the plug and receptacle pin numbers for the selected row.
Enter a new value in the edit box or click the arrows to increment or
decrement both numbers on the plug and receptacle.

NOTE If you replace pin numbers through editing, the replaced pin
numbers may go back into the Pin List if they were originally defined
in the Pin List range.

Pin Descriptions Edits the plug and receptacle terminal descriptions. The value you
enter in the edit box displays in the Description column of the grid.

Bend wires at right angles

Use this tool to bend a wire in a right angle and make 3 right angle turns to
avoid or add geometry. When a wire is defined at a right angle, you can modify
the wire and create a new right angle bend while maintaining the original
wire connections to the components.

Bend wires at right angles | 659

 NOTE This tool terminates if the bend attempts to connect two different wire
networks or if the bend bypasses more than a single right-angle turn.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Bend
Wire tool.

2 Click the Bend Wire tool.

3 Select one of the two wires that make up a right-angle turn.

4 Select the opposing wire that makes up the right-angle turn.

The additional wire segments are added based on the right-
angle direction.

5 Right-click to exit the command.

Insert multiple bus wiring

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Multiple
Wire Bus tool.

2 Click the Multiple Wire Bus tool.

3 Set the horizontal and vertical spacing for the wires.

4 Select the mode for defining the "starting at" position.

■ Starting at component wire connection points: Select the radio
button and click OK. Select or window-select the wire connection
points on the component.
■ Starting from another bus: Select the number of wires (using the
buttons or type in the edit box) and click OK. Specify the connection
point on the existing wire bus for the first wire of the new bus. Slowly
move the cursor over the other existing wires of the bus to allow the
new bus wires to connect.

660 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 ■ Starting in empty space: Select the starting direction (Horizontal or
Vertical), select the number of wires (using the buttons or type in the
edit box), and click OK. Specify the starting point in space for the first
wire of the new bus.

During wire insertion, the current wire type displays at the

command prompt. If starting at a component or in empty
space, you can override this by typing in the hotkey "T" and
selecting a new wire type from the Set/Edit Wire Type dialog
box. The new wire type becomes the current wire type and the
command continues with the wire insertion.
As you pull the wires out, phantom wires display on your
cursor indicating the direction and number of wires to be
placed on the drawing. You can turn a corner by moving your
cursor out of line with the bus. To reverse or flip the turn's
phase sequence, press "F" + Enter. The phantom wire display
displays in red when it detects that the routing approaches
within a wire connection trap distance of another wire.

5 Click a point on the screen to set the endpoint of the wires or

press "C" + Enter to lock down the current routing and contin-
ue to draw multiple wires. If the bus approaches a multi-con-
nection device, such as a connector, it attempts to align the
spacing of the bus wires to match with the wire connections.

6 Right-click to create the wires. The wires and wire connection

dots insert, and loops or gaps (if configured) automatically
insert at wire crossing points.

Insert multiple bus wiring | 661

Import data from Autodesk Inventor
Professional Cable & Harness

From the XML export from Autodesk Inventor Professional (AIP) into AutoCAD
Electrical, you can select from a list of connectors defined in the export, and
then place the connectors onto a 2D drawing file. After the connectors are
inserted onto the drawing, click Wire on the Connector Selection dialog box
to place all wire connections to all components on the drawing file. AutoCAD
Electrical parses the file data to determine all wire From and To connections.
Once the wiring information is determined, the wires are routed making sure
to miss existing geometry on the drawing. The wire insertion tool finds the
best possible route with the fewest amount of wire loops in between the
connection reducing the requirement on gap pointers. The wires are connected
in the appropriate position on the connector representation.
As the wires are inserted, the wire types in the XML file are applied to the
Wire Layer in the AutoCAD Electrical drawing. Additionally, wire numbers
and cable marker symbols are inserted onto the drawing. The wire numbers
are inserted following the drawing's wire number setting (above wire, in-line
with wire, or below wire). The first cable marker listed in the XML file is
inserted as the parent and the subsequent markers of the same reference
designator (Cable Tag) are inserted as children.
Certain Autodesk Inventor Professional wire property names need to be
maintained inside of AutoCAD Electrical. You must make sure that your
column header names (set in the Rename User Columns dialog box) match
the property names coming out of the Autodesk Inventor Professional XML
export (set in the Autodesk Inventor Custom Properties dialog box). For
example, the property CORE SIZE maps to a user column of the Create/Edit
Wire Type dialog box if there is a column header defined as "CORE SIZE." If
mapping does not exist then the data is not maintained inside of your
AutoCAD Electrical drawing file.

662 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 Autodesk Inventor Professional properties mapped to AutoCAD
Electrical attributes

There are 4 Autodesk Inventor Professional assembly entity types that get
general and custom properties: component occurrences, Wire (From/To)
occurrences, cable occurrences, and splice occurrences.

Property Name AIP Property Type Description

Component Properties

Connector REF DES Occurrence Component RefDes - TAG1 attribute

in AutoCAD Electrical

PART NUMBER Definition Autodesk Inventor part number -

Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical

VENDOR Definition Manufacturer - Xdata in AutoCAD

Electrical

STRIP LENGTH Definition, Custom Save on component - Xdata in Auto-

CAD Electrical

Various user-defined * Definition, Custom Defined in the component library

definition (part editing) - Xdata in
AutoCAD Electrical

Various user-defined * Occurrence, Custom Defined in the harness occurrence

level - Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical

Wire Properties

Wire ID Occurrence Unique wire number ID (occurrence

name) - AutoCAD Electrical wire
number; WIRENO attribute in Auto-
CAD Electrical

Wire Definition Definition Wire library definition data saved in

Cable & Harness library XML - wire
layer name in AutoCAD Electrical

Import data from Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness | 663
Various user-defined * Definition, Custom Defined in the wire library definition
(part editing) - Xdata in AutoCAD
Electrical

Various user defined * Occurrence, Custom Defined in the harness occurrence

level - Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical

Cable Properties

Cable ID Occurrence Unique cable ID - TAG 1 attribute in

AutoCAD Electrical

Cable Definition Definition Cable library definition data saved in

Cable & Harness library XML - Xdata
in AutoCAD Electrical

Cable Wire Name Definition Cable conductor ID - RATING1 attrib-

ute in AutoCAD Electrical

Various user-defined * Definition, Custom Defined in the cable library definition

(part editing) - Xdata in AutoCAD
Electrical

Various user defined * Occurrence, Custom Defined in the harness occurrence

level - Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical

Splice Properties

Splice ID Occurrence Unique splice ID - TAG1 attribute in

AutoCAD Electrical

Splice Definition Definition Splice library definition data saved in

Cable & Harness Library XML - Xdata
in AutoCAD Electrical

Various user defined * Definition, Custom Defined in the splice library definition
(part editing) - Xdata in AutoCAD
Electrical

664 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

Various user-defined * Occurrence, Custom Defined in the harness occurrence
level - Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical

* Properties that are not defined in Autodesk Inventor Professional but are
still usable in AutoCAD Electrical.

Import connector wire lists

Use the Insert Connector from List tool to import a connector wire list from
another application, such as Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness.

NOTE If the AutoCAD Electrical drawing is missing one end of the connector or
if a connection was not found, wiring information is displayed next to the pin and
the information is written into a log file so you know AutoCAD Electrical was unable
to resolve the wire connections in the drawing. The log file name is {drawing file
name.LOG} and is found in the same folder as the drawing file.

1 In Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness, define

wire names and connections for your assembly file.

2 Define cable tags and conductor IDs and their connections in

the assembly file.

3 Select the harness ID in the model browser and select Export

Harness Data from the Cable and Harness panel.
You are prompted to select a file name and location for the
export of harness component and wiring data. An XML file is
created for import into AutoCAD Electrical.

4 In AutoCAD Electrical, create a new drawing file.

Import data from Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness | 665
 5 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the In-
sert Connector from List tool.

6 Click the Insert Connector from List tool.

7 In the Connector List File Selection dialog box, select a con-

nector list file to import into AutoCAD Electrical and click
Open.

8 In the Connector Selection dialog box, define the connectors

to be inserted onto the drawing.
An 'x' in the Placed column indicates if the connector is placed
or was previously placed into the project.
■ (Optional) Specify whether to build the connector using fixed pin
spacing or to have it compress or expand to match the pins up with
underlying wire crossings.
■ (Optional) Specify whether to insert the entire connector all at once
or to insert it manually, pin by pin, with an option to insert spacers
or to break the connector into 2 or more pieces.
■ (Optional) Click the Rotate or Flip buttons to change the display of
the connector symbol.
■ (Optional) Click Details for more options to define settings for the
size, shape and display of the parametrically built connector symbols.

9 Select the connectors to insert from the list and click Insert.

10 Click the insertion point in the drawing for each connector.

11 In the Connector Selection dialog box, continue selecting the

connectors to insert and place them onto the drawing.

12 When all connectors are placed on the drawing, click Wire It.
Wires are generated in the drawing. Layers and XRECORDS
are defined in the drawing and applied to the lines. Wire
numbers are also placed in the drawing based on wire place-
ment settings.

666 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 NOTE You can place the connectors on the drawing and add wires at a later time.
To do so, follow steps 1 - 9. When you want to add wires, open the Connector
Selection dialog box, and click Wire It.

Connector selection
From the XML export from Autodesk Inventor Professional into AutoCAD
Electrical, you can select from a list of connectors defined in the export, and
then place the connectors onto a 2D drawing file.

Access:

On the Insert Connector toolbar, click the Insert Connectors from List tool.
From the Components menu, select Insert Connector ➤ Insert Connector from
List.

The first time you run this tool, you must select the connector list file (.xml,
.xls, .mdb, and.csv) in the Connector List File Selection dialog box and click
Open. The connector list file is retained in memory for subsequent selections
of this tool.

NOTE If you select to open a spreadsheet or database that contains multiple sheets
or tables, the Select Input Source dialog box displays where you can select the
sheet or table to open.

Connector List

Columns are not editable. You can perform an alphanumeric sort of the
connector details by clicking the column headers.

Placed Displays an "x" if the connector is placed or was previously placed

into the project.

Installation Displays the component's Installation code if defined in the XML

import file.

Location Displays the component's Location code if defined in the XML

import file.

Import data from Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness | 667
Tag Displays the connector's reference designation (RefDes) from the
Autodesk Inventor Professional (AIP) assembly or tags found in
the XML import file.

Total Pins Displays the total pin count for the tag.

Wired Pins Displays the number of pins wired inside of the AIP assembly
found in the import file.

Description Displays the occurrence name of the part defined in the AIP
browser. The occurrence name is typically the part number of
the component, however you can overwrite the name.

Show All/Hide Placed Show All displays all connectors in the grid whether they have
been placed or not while Hide Placed removes previously placed
connectors from the grid list.

Connectors Displays all connectors found in the import file in the grid display.
The static text shows the total number of connector components
listed in the grid control.

Splices Displays all splices found in the import file in the grid display.
The static text shows the total number of splices listed in the grid
control.

NOTE If there is a selection active when filtering the list and one or more of the
selected rows drops out of the display, a warning message displays where you
decide whether to proceed or not.

Layout

Pin Spacing Specifies the spacing for the distance between pin connections
on their parametrically built connector symbol. The default spa-
cing is defined from the drawing's Rung Spacing setting. The
edited value is persistent for the ACADE session and reverts to
the default upon every start up of the application

Fixed Spacing Creates the connector pin spacing as fixed. The fixed spacing
value is driven from the Pin Spacing setting.

668 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

At Wire Crossings Modifies the connector to have the pins meet the underlying
wires. AutoCAD Electrical searches the wires and stretches the
connector before adding the block definition to the drawing
If there are more pins associated to the connector than there are
wires, AutoCAD Electrical finds the wires first, then continues the
connector definition at the fixed spacing

Wired Pins Creates the connector using the number of pins wired in the AIP
assembly and found in the import file. This reduces the size of
the overall connector based upon pins used and not library
definition. If this is not selected, the connector is created using
the total pins on the connector as defined in the export/import
file.

Insert All Creates the connector without inserting spacers or breaking the
connector. When you click Insert the block definition is committed
to the drawing and the command is complete.

Allow Spacers/Breaks Displays the Custom Pin/Spaces dialog box that prompts you for
the insertion of each connector pin prior to committing the
connector block definition to the drawing file. The number of
pins inserted in the block definition out of the total number of
pins defined in the connector is indicated at the top of the dialog
box. Select an option for inserting the other pins:
■ Insert Next Connection: Continues adding pins to the con-
nector until all are defined
■ Add Spacer: Adds a spacer in place of a pin on the connector;
connector stretches its definition.
■ Break Symbol Now: Breaks connector and begins prompt
back at the connector layout dialog box.
■ Cancel Custom: Places connector in as if you selected Insert
all on the portion it is working on. Does not remove preceding
break commands.

Splice Symbol Name Defines a symbol to be used to display a splice in the wire. Type
in a symbol name to use when inserting splices or click Browse
to select the symbol name to use. If left blank, once you click In-
sert, an error message displays since you must select a Splice
Symbol Name to insert the splice onto the drawing.

Import data from Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness | 669
 Orientation

Quickly change the connectors orientation prior to placing it into the drawing
file. This orientation change also modifies the preview to reflect the selection.

Rotate Switches the orientation of the parametric con-

nector insertion between horizontal and vertical.

Flip Flips the connector insertion about its long axis.

Type

Determines the overall style of the connector.

Plug/Receptacle Combination Creates the connector as one AutoCAD Electrical

block file with both the plug and receptacle.

Wire Number Change Sets the property of the connector symbol to change
the wire number through the connector symbol. By
default, the wire numbering is the same on both
sides of the connector.

Add Divider Line Creates the connector with a line down the middle
of the block to indicate the separation of the plug
and receptacle. This line becomes part of the block
definition for the connector.

Plug Only Creates the connector as a single block file with the
plug representation only.

Receptacle Only Creates the connector as a single block file with the
receptacle representation only.

Display

Defines the connector's placement on the drawing relative to other connectors

and the drawing border. This controls which side of the connector the plug

670 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 will be displayed, whether the connector goes in vertically or horizontally,
and whether the pins are visible.

Connector Specifies whether the connector comes into the drawing vertically or
horizontally relative to other connectors and the drawing border.

Plug Specifies which direction the plug portion of the connector comes in
relative to the overall plug/receptacle parametric build. The plug
representation is displayed with rounded corners.
Options include vertical with the plug to the left, vertical with the
plug to the right, horizontal with the plug to the bottom, or horizontal
with the plug to the top.

Pins Specifies which pin numbers are visible or hidden on the connector.
Options include showing both sides, showing the plug only, showing
the receptacle only, or hiding both.
If you select to make the pins on the plug or receptacle invisible, the
attribute and its value are still defined in the block definition on the
drawing file.
If you selected Plug Only or Receptacle Only for the Type, the pin
display options are show or hide only. These show or hide the pin
numbers on a single plug or receptacle symbol.

Size

Defines the outside shell size for the connector. The values in the edit boxes
build the graphical shell that represents the connector on the point to point
diagram.

Receptacle Specifies the overall thickness of the receptacle side of the con-
nector. This value can be the same as the plug side.
When the connector is built, the receptacle side wire connection
attribute is moved from the insertion point on the divider line to
the outside line representing the receptacle. The associated ter-
minal pin attribute (TERM01_) travels half the distance as the
wire connection attribute placing itself in the middle between
the dimension on the divider line.

Plug Specifies the overall thickness of the plug side of the connector.
This value can be the same as the receptacle side.

Import data from Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness | 671
 When the connector is built, the plug side wire connection attrib-
ute is moved from the insertion point on the divider line to the
outside line representing the plug. The associated terminal pin
attribute (TERM01_) travels half the distance as the wire connec-
tion attribute placing itself in the middle between the dimension
on the divider line.

Top Specifies the distance from the top or breaking point of the con-
nector to the first or next wire connection point. This determines
where the top line is drawn relative to the first master symbol
insertion point. The distance is used for the entire connector or
breaking the connector.

Bottom Specifies the distance from the bottom or breaking point of the
connector to the last or previous wire connection point. This de-
termines where the bottom line is drawn relative to the last
master symbol insertion point. The distance is used for the entire
connector or breaking the connector.

Radius Specifies the radial dimension of the rounded portion of the plug
representation. If left blank, a radius is not created on the plug
connector. If you enter a value that exceeds the overall plug side
distance, the radius value is erased and the radius is not created
on the plug connector.

Pick File

Displays the Connector List File Selection dialog box to select a new file for
import.

Wire It

Reviews connectors placed on the active drawing and runs the wiring
commands to make connections between the connectors.

■ When both ends of the wire connections are found on the active drawing,
the wires are generated between the two points and wire numbering is
added based on current configurations.

■ When only one end of the wire connection is found on the active drawing,
text is placed next to the connector in the X?WIREnn wire annotation
attribute on the connector symbol. This text is overwritten when the second

672 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 end of the wire is placed on the drawing and the Wire It command is run
again.

■ When neither connection for a wire are on the active drawing, the wiring
command is ignored until you add the connectors into the drawing file.

NOTE If the AutoCAD Electrical drawing is missing one end of the connector or
if a connection was not found, wiring information is displayed next to the pin and
the information is written into a log file so you know AutoCAD Electrical was unable
to resolve the wire connections in the drawing. The log file name is {drawing
filename.LOG} and is found in the same folder as the drawing file.

Insert

Upon selection of one or more rows in the grid display, this button is enabled.
Once selected, the parametric connector program launches to create a
connector image in the drawing.

Single row selection Places one connector at a time and returns to the Connect-
or Selection dialog box with the connector row marked as
'x.'

Multiple row selection Places the selected connectors in consecutive order. Steps
through the list of connectors previously selected in the
dialog box, placing them in the drawing one at a time.
After the connectors are created the Connector Selection
dialog box displays with the connector rows marked as 'x.'

Overview of the spreadsheet import file

structure
You can select various file types (including XLS, CSV, MDB, and XML) to
import into AutoCAD Electrical. For the Insert Connector from List tool to
work, the spreadsheet and CSV import file must have the following structure.
The spreadsheet for import allows 27 columns per record. The first row in the
CSV or XLS file is treated as a header row, and is skipped in the import. All
columns must exist and the required fields (bolded) determine the connector
to be used in the Connector Selection dialog box.

Overview of the spreadsheet import file structure | 673

 NOTE The structure of this file does not apply to an XML import.

Position Field Purpose Column Type

1 TYPE1 CMP1: C = Connector/ S = Splice Text

2 INST1 Installation Code of CMP1 Text

3 LOC1 Location Code of CMP1 Text

4 CMP1 Component 1 Text

5 PIN1 Connected pin on CMP1 Text

6 DESC1 Description of CMP1 Text

7 CAT1 Catalog number for CMP1 Text

8 MFG1 Manufacturer of CAT1 Text

9 ASM1 Assembly code for CMP1 Text

10 TYPE2 CMP2: C = Connector/S = Splice Text

11 INST2 Installation Code of CMP2 Text

12 LOC2 Location Code of CMP2 Text

13 CMP2 Component 2 Text

14 PIN2 Connected pin on CMP2 Text

15 DESC2 Description of CMP2 Text

16 CAT2 Catalog number of CMP2 Text

17 MFG2 Manufacturer of CAT2 Text

674 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

18 ASM2 Assembly code for CMP2 Text

19 WIRENO Wire number (may be blank) Text

20 WIRELAY Wire layer name Text

21 CBLINST Cable Installation Code Text

22 CBLLOC Cable Location Code Text

23 CBL Cable tag name Text

24 CBLWCLR Cable wire (conductor) color Text

25 CBLCAT Cable catalog item Text

26 CBLMFG Cable catalog manufacturer Text

27 CBLASM Cable assembly code Text

The MDB file must contain a table with the abovementioned 27 columns.
Each column should be defined using the VARCHAR data type of an
appropriate size to suit the data. The names of the columns in the table are
not important, but the position is.

Import connector wire lists

Use the Insert Connector from List tool to import a connector wire list from
another application, such as Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness.

NOTE If the AutoCAD Electrical drawing is missing one end of the connector or
if a connection was not found, wiring information is displayed next to the pin and
the information is written into a log file so you know AutoCAD Electrical was unable
to resolve the wire connections in the drawing. The log file name is {drawing file
name.LOG} and is found in the same folder as the drawing file.

1 In Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness, define

wire names and connections for your assembly file.

Overview of the spreadsheet import file structure | 675

 2 Define cable tags and conductor IDs and their connections in
the assembly file.

3 Select the harness ID in the model browser and select Export

Harness Data from the Cable and Harness panel.
You are prompted to select a file name and location for the
export of harness component and wiring data. An XML file is
created for import into AutoCAD Electrical.

4 In AutoCAD Electrical, create a new drawing file.

676 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 5 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the In-
sert Connector from List tool.

6 Click the Insert Connector from List tool.

7 In the Connector List File Selection dialog box, select a con-

nector list file to import into AutoCAD Electrical and click
Open.

8 In the Connector Selection dialog box, define the connectors

to be inserted onto the drawing.
An 'x' in the Placed column indicates if the connector is placed
or was previously placed into the project.
■ (Optional) Specify whether to build the connector using fixed pin
spacing or to have it compress or expand to match the pins up with
underlying wire crossings.
■ (Optional) Specify whether to insert the entire connector all at once
or to insert it manually, pin by pin, with an option to insert spacers
or to break the connector into 2 or more pieces.
■ (Optional) Click the Rotate or Flip buttons to change the display of
the connector symbol.
■ (Optional) Click Details for more options to define settings for the
size, shape and display of the parametrically built connector symbols.

9 Select the connectors to insert from the list and click Insert.

10 Click the insertion point in the drawing for each connector.

11 In the Connector Selection dialog box, continue selecting the

connectors to insert and place them onto the drawing.

12 When all connectors are placed on the drawing, click Wire It.
Wires are generated in the drawing. Layers and XRECORDS
are defined in the drawing and applied to the lines. Wire
numbers are also placed in the drawing based on wire place-
ment settings.

Overview of the spreadsheet import file structure | 677

 NOTE You can place the connectors on the drawing and add wires at a later time.
To do so, follow steps 1 - 9. When you want to add wires, open the Connector
Selection dialog box, and click Wire It.

Connector selection
From the XML export from Autodesk Inventor Professional into AutoCAD
Electrical, you can select from a list of connectors defined in the export, and
then place the connectors onto a 2D drawing file.

Access:

On the Insert Connector toolbar, click the Insert Connectors from List tool.
From the Components menu, select Insert Connector ➤ Insert Connector from
List.

The first time you run this tool, you must select the connector list file (.xml,
.xls, .mdb, and.csv) in the Connector List File Selection dialog box and click
Open. The connector list file is retained in memory for subsequent selections
of this tool.

NOTE If you select to open a spreadsheet or database that contains multiple sheets
or tables, the Select Input Source dialog box displays where you can select the
sheet or table to open.

Connector List

Columns are not editable. You can perform an alphanumeric sort of the
connector details by clicking the column headers.

Placed Displays an "x" if the connector is placed or was previously placed

into the project.

Installation Displays the component's Installation code if defined in the XML

import file.

Location Displays the component's Location code if defined in the XML

import file.

678 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

Tag Displays the connector's reference designation (RefDes) from the
Autodesk Inventor Professional (AIP) assembly or tags found in
the XML import file.

Total Pins Displays the total pin count for the tag.

Wired Pins Displays the number of pins wired inside of the AIP assembly
found in the import file.

Description Displays the occurrence name of the part defined in the AIP
browser. The occurrence name is typically the part number of
the component, however you can overwrite the name.

Show All/Hide Placed Show All displays all connectors in the grid whether they have
been placed or not while Hide Placed removes previously placed
connectors from the grid list.

Connectors Displays all connectors found in the import file in the grid display.
The static text shows the total number of connector components
listed in the grid control.

Splices Displays all splices found in the import file in the grid display.
The static text shows the total number of splices listed in the grid
control.

NOTE If there is a selection active when filtering the list and one or more of the
selected rows drops out of the display, a warning message displays where you
decide whether to proceed or not.

Layout

Pin Spacing Specifies the spacing for the distance between pin connections
on their parametrically built connector symbol. The default spa-
cing is defined from the drawing's Rung Spacing setting. The
edited value is persistent for the ACADE session and reverts to
the default upon every start up of the application

Fixed Spacing Creates the connector pin spacing as fixed. The fixed spacing
value is driven from the Pin Spacing setting.

Overview of the spreadsheet import file structure | 679

At Wire Crossings Modifies the connector to have the pins meet the underlying
wires. AutoCAD Electrical searches the wires and stretches the
connector before adding the block definition to the drawing
If there are more pins associated to the connector than there are
wires, AutoCAD Electrical finds the wires first, then continues the
connector definition at the fixed spacing

Wired Pins Creates the connector using the number of pins wired in the AIP
assembly and found in the import file. This reduces the size of
the overall connector based upon pins used and not library
definition. If this is not selected, the connector is created using
the total pins on the connector as defined in the export/import
file.

Insert All Creates the connector without inserting spacers or breaking the
connector. When you click Insert the block definition is committed
to the drawing and the command is complete.

Allow Spacers/Breaks Displays the Custom Pin/Spaces dialog box that prompts you for
the insertion of each connector pin prior to committing the
connector block definition to the drawing file. The number of
pins inserted in the block definition out of the total number of
pins defined in the connector is indicated at the top of the dialog
box. Select an option for inserting the other pins:
■ Insert Next Connection: Continues adding pins to the con-
nector until all are defined
■ Add Spacer: Adds a spacer in place of a pin on the connector;
connector stretches its definition.
■ Break Symbol Now: Breaks connector and begins prompt
back at the connector layout dialog box.
■ Cancel Custom: Places connector in as if you selected Insert
all on the portion it is working on. Does not remove preceding
break commands.

Splice Symbol Name Defines a symbol to be used to display a splice in the wire. Type
in a symbol name to use when inserting splices or click Browse
to select the symbol name to use. If left blank, once you click In-
sert, an error message displays since you must select a Splice
Symbol Name to insert the splice onto the drawing.

680 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 Orientation

Quickly change the connectors orientation prior to placing it into the drawing
file. This orientation change also modifies the preview to reflect the selection.

Rotate Switches the orientation of the parametric con-

nector insertion between horizontal and vertical.

Flip Flips the connector insertion about its long axis.

Type

Determines the overall style of the connector.

Plug/Receptacle Combination Creates the connector as one AutoCAD Electrical

block file with both the plug and receptacle.

Wire Number Change Sets the property of the connector symbol to change
the wire number through the connector symbol. By
default, the wire numbering is the same on both
sides of the connector.

Add Divider Line Creates the connector with a line down the middle
of the block to indicate the separation of the plug
and receptacle. This line becomes part of the block
definition for the connector.

Plug Only Creates the connector as a single block file with the
plug representation only.

Receptacle Only Creates the connector as a single block file with the
receptacle representation only.

Display

Defines the connector's placement on the drawing relative to other connectors

and the drawing border. This controls which side of the connector the plug

Overview of the spreadsheet import file structure | 681

 will be displayed, whether the connector goes in vertically or horizontally,
and whether the pins are visible.

Connector Specifies whether the connector comes into the drawing vertically or
horizontally relative to other connectors and the drawing border.

Plug Specifies which direction the plug portion of the connector comes in
relative to the overall plug/receptacle parametric build. The plug
representation is displayed with rounded corners.
Options include vertical with the plug to the left, vertical with the
plug to the right, horizontal with the plug to the bottom, or horizontal
with the plug to the top.

Pins Specifies which pin numbers are visible or hidden on the connector.
Options include showing both sides, showing the plug only, showing
the receptacle only, or hiding both.
If you select to make the pins on the plug or receptacle invisible, the
attribute and its value are still defined in the block definition on the
drawing file.
If you selected Plug Only or Receptacle Only for the Type, the pin
display options are show or hide only. These show or hide the pin
numbers on a single plug or receptacle symbol.

Size

Defines the outside shell size for the connector. The values in the edit boxes
build the graphical shell that represents the connector on the point to point
diagram.

Receptacle Specifies the overall thickness of the receptacle side of the con-
nector. This value can be the same as the plug side.
When the connector is built, the receptacle side wire connection
attribute is moved from the insertion point on the divider line to
the outside line representing the receptacle. The associated ter-
minal pin attribute (TERM01_) travels half the distance as the
wire connection attribute placing itself in the middle between
the dimension on the divider line.

Plug Specifies the overall thickness of the plug side of the connector.
This value can be the same as the receptacle side.

682 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

 When the connector is built, the plug side wire connection attrib-
ute is moved from the insertion point on the divider line to the
outside line representing the plug. The associated terminal pin
attribute (TERM01_) travels half the distance as the wire connec-
tion attribute placing itself in the middle between the dimension
on the divider line.

Top Specifies the distance from the top or breaking point of the con-
nector to the first or next wire connection point. This determines
where the top line is drawn relative to the first master symbol
insertion point. The distance is used for the entire connector or
breaking the connector.

Bottom Specifies the distance from the bottom or breaking point of the
connector to the last or previous wire connection point. This de-
termines where the bottom line is drawn relative to the last
master symbol insertion point. The distance is used for the entire
connector or breaking the connector.

Radius Specifies the radial dimension of the rounded portion of the plug
representation. If left blank, a radius is not created on the plug
connector. If you enter a value that exceeds the overall plug side
distance, the radius value is erased and the radius is not created
on the plug connector.

Pick File

Displays the Connector List File Selection dialog box to select a new file for
import.

Wire It

Reviews connectors placed on the active drawing and runs the wiring
commands to make connections between the connectors.

■ When both ends of the wire connections are found on the active drawing,
the wires are generated between the two points and wire numbering is
added based on current configurations.

■ When only one end of the wire connection is found on the active drawing,
text is placed next to the connector in the X?WIREnn wire annotation
attribute on the connector symbol. This text is overwritten when the second

Overview of the spreadsheet import file structure | 683

 end of the wire is placed on the drawing and the Wire It command is run
again.

■ When neither connection for a wire are on the active drawing, the wiring
command is ignored until you add the connectors into the drawing file.

NOTE If the AutoCAD Electrical drawing is missing one end of the connector or
if a connection was not found, wiring information is displayed next to the pin and
the information is written into a log file so you know AutoCAD Electrical was unable
to resolve the wire connections in the drawing. The log file name is {drawing
filename.LOG} and is found in the same folder as the drawing file.

Insert

Upon selection of one or more rows in the grid display, this button is enabled.
Once selected, the parametric connector program launches to create a
connector image in the drawing.

Single row selection Places one connector at a time and returns to the Connect-
or Selection dialog box with the connector row marked as
'x.'

Multiple row selection Places the selected connectors in consecutive order. Steps
through the list of connectors previously selected in the
dialog box, placing them in the drawing one at a time.
After the connectors are created the Connector Selection
dialog box displays with the connector rows marked as 'x.'

684 | Chapter 10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools

Insert splices
The splice symbol is an in-line connection symbol allowing one or more wires
to connect at each end. The default splice symbol is set up to trigger a wire
number change through the symbol.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the In-
sert Splice tool.

2 Click the Insert Splice tool.

The Splice Symbols dialog box displays.

3 Select the splice to insert from the icon menu, enter the splice
name in the Type it box, or click Browse to browse to and select
the symbol from another location.

4 Click OK.

5 Pick the insertion point on the drawing. Place the symbol on

an existing wire, causing the symbol to break the wire or place
it in empty space (where you can later draw a wire through
the symbol or connect one or more wires to each end of it).
The Insert/Edit Component dialog box displays.

6 Assign the catalog information, description, and other inform-

ation as required.

7 Click OK.

Insert splices | 685

686
Project-Wide Tools
11
In this chapter
■ Move from reference to
reference
■ Move between drawings
■ Plot one or more drawings
■ Create a project-wide
script file
■ Project-wide update or
retag
■ Track drawing changes
■ Translate description text
■ Publish to the web
■ Title Block Utility

687
Move from reference to reference
Use the Surfer tool to move from reference to reference across the project
drawing set. A new window opens and the original window closes when Surf
is selected unless you hold the Shift key while running the command.

688 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

Start the Surfer

1 Click the Surfer tool.

2 Select a component tag, catalog number, or wire number on

the current drawing, or press Enter to use the Type it to Surf
it dialog box to enter the component tag, catalog number, or
wire number.

NOTE You can also select a report table cell containing any of
these to surf on. If the selected cell does not contain any of the
surf-able fields, AutoCAD Electrical looks in the selected row for
a surf-able field. If the report is the Wire From/To or Component
Wire List report, it looks for the Wire Number field first, then a
Tag field, and finally a Catalog Number field. If the report is a Bill
of Materials report, it looks for a Catalog Number field first, then
the Tag field. For all other reports, AutoCAD Electrical looks for
the Tag field first, then the Catalog Number field. If a non-surfable
cell is selected, it looks for the component tag, then a wire num-
ber, and finally a catalog number.

All references relating to the component, including panel

layout and panel nameplate references, display in the Surf
dialog box

3 Double-click any reference listed in the Surf dialog box to zoom

in on the selected reference. If the reference is on one or more
drawings, each drawing opens automatically.

TIP Use the Type column to easily select the object to surf to. The
codes are as follows:

■ C - Component Symbol
■ P - Parent or Standalone Schematic Symbol
■ T - Terminal
■ W - Wire Number
■ # - Panel Layout Symbol
■ # np - Panel Layout nameplate reference

4 Using the Surf dialog box, edit the component, display a BOM
listing for each reference or select a different component refer-
ence.

Move from reference to reference | 689

 5 Click Close.

Continue a previous surf session

At any time, a previous surf session can be continued from the point where
it left off.

1 Click the Continue Surfer tool.

From the Projects menu, select Project > Continue Surfer.
All references relating to the component, including panel
layout and panel nameplate references, are displayed in the
Surf dialog box.

2 Double-click any reference listed in the Surf dialog box to zoom

in on the selected reference.
If the reference is on one or more drawings, each drawing is
opened automatically.

3 Using the Surf dialog box, edit the component, display a BOM
listing for each reference or select a different component refer-
ence.

4 Click Close.

Surf
Move from reference to reference across the project drawing set.
In addition to surfing on a component tag, catalog number, or wire number
on the current drawing, you can surf on a report table cell containing any of
these. When surfing on a table inserted by the Terminal Strip Editor, you can
select the title cell to surf on the Tagstrip value even if the Tagstrip is not
included in the title. If you select a cell that is not surf-able (such as the Tag,

690 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

 Catalog or Wire Number cell) the Tagstrip value is surfed for the terminal
strip.

Access:

Click the Surfer tool on the Main toolbar.

From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Surfer.

NOTE Your dialog box may differ depending on whether you're moving from
reference to reference across the project drawing set or looking for problems
related to wire signal source or destination codes.

When surfing for source or destination signals, the Surf dialog box displays
the type (Src or Dst), sheet/reference value and description.

Show more Displays the extra non-Installation/Location

matching references when in IEC tagging mode. If
unselected, only the exact surf matches display in
the list.

NOTE This is unavailable if there aren’t any non-

Installation/Location matching references or if you
are not in IEC tagging mode.

Freshen Makes changes on the active drawing visible to the

surfing tool.

Edit Edits a reference using the Insert/Edit Component

dialog box.

Catalog Check Displays a BOM listing of the highlighted reference.

NOTE The reference must have catalog and man-

ufacturer values.

Pan Moves the view in the active viewport.

Zoom Save Saves the current zoom factor on the WD_M block.

Move from reference to reference | 691

Zoom In Increases the apparent magnification of the drawing
area. The zoom factor is related to the smaller of
the active drawing’s default dimension text size
(DIMTXT) and text size (TEXTSIZE). The smaller this
value is, the closer the zoom is on the reference.

Delete Delete the instance that is currently displayed.

NOTE Child and other related devices will not be

deleted.

Pick New List Changes the component terminal or signal refer-

ence you want to surf.

Zoom Out Reduces the apparent magnification of the drawing

area.

Go to Goes directly to the reference of the highlighted

entry.

Special codes in the surf list box

c Component symbol

p Parent or standalone schematic symbol

t Terminal

w Wire number

# Panel layout symbol

# np Panel layout nameplate reference

692 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

Move between drawings
Use Next and Previous to move among the drawings inside of the active
project. A new window is opened and the original window is closed when

Move between drawings | 693

 Next or Previous are selected unless you hold the Shift key while running the
commands.

1 Open a drawing file from the active project.

2 Click Next or Previous on the Main Electrical toolbar to move

to another drawing file within the project.

3 Continue moving among the drawings until the file you are
looking for is opened.

4 Select Window ➤ {drawing file name} to close the drawing

after you make any modifications.
You can also close a drawing file by right-clicking the file name
in the Project Manager and selecting Close from the context
menu.

Plot one or more drawings

Batch plot the full drawing set or a subsection of the drawing set.

1 On the Project Manager, click the arrow on the Publish/Plot

tool, and select Plot Project.

2 Select one or more drawings to plot.

3 Click OK.

4 In the Batch Plotting Options and Order dialog box, select the
layout tab to plot.

5 Select the output device.

■ Use plot config (.pc3): Click to use an existing plotter
configuration file (.pc3), enter the file name or click Browse
to select the file.
A plotter configuration file contains information such as
the device driver and model, the output port to which the

694 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

 device is connected, and various device specific settings.
■ Use layout tab's default: Click to use the default plotter
configuration.

6 Click Detailed Plot Configuration mode to turn on or turn off

the options set within the Detailed Plot Configuration Option
dialog box.

7 Click ON or OFF.

8 Select the order in which the plot will be out:

■ OK: Output plots in the selected order.
■ OK-Reverse: Output plots in the reverse order.

9 Click OK to save any open drawings.

10 Click OK Project.

Batch plotting options and order

Batch plot the full drawing set or a subsection of the drawing set.

Access:

On the Project Manager, click the arrow on the Publish/Plot tool, and select
Plot Project. Select the drawings to process and click OK.

Layout tab to plot

Selects the layout tab to plot. Change the tab by selecting from the pick list.

(Optional) For each drawing

Run a pre-plot command script file Run an optional script file containing a list of com-
mands to execute BEFORE the plot command is is-
sued.
The default script file name is preplot.scr, located in
AutoCAD Electrical user subdirectory.

Plot one or more drawings | 695

Run a post-plot command script file Run an optional script file containing a list of com-
mands to execute AFTER the plot command is issued.
The default script file name is postplot.scr, located
in AutoCAD Electrical user subdirectory.

NOTE Changes to drawings are not saved during

the plotting process. Additionally, the plot time and
date stamp text is discarded after the plot is com-
plete. To preserve changes made during the plotting
process, add the QSAVE command into the pre- or
post-plot script file.

Output device name

A plotter configuration file contains information such as the device driver and model, the output
port to which the device is connected, and various device specific settings.

Use plot config (.pc3) Use an existing plotter configuration file (.pc3).

Use layout tab's default Use the default plotter configuration.

Detailed plot configuration mode

Turns detailed plot configuration options on or off.

Optional page setup name Enter an optional page setup name when plot
configuration options are turned off.

Pick list (from current drawing) Select an option for the pick list when plot con-
figuration options are turned off.

Plot to file

Enter a subdirectory to plot to or leave blank to plot to the subdirectory where

the drawings are located.

696 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

 Order

OK Outputs plots in the selected order

OK-Reverse Outputs plots in the reverse order.

Create a project-wide script file

An AutoCAD script file can be run against one or more drawings in the current
project.
For example, to ensure all drawings are set to model space and zoomed extents:

1 Create an ASCII text script file called model_ext.scr.

2 Add the following AutoCAD commands and AutoLISP functions:

(setvar "TILEMODE" 0)
ZOOM EXT
(load "c:\\myprograms\\chktitle.lsp")

NOTE Double backslashes must be used.

CHKTITLE
QSAVE

3 Test the script for proper operation.

■ On the current drawing, issue the SCRIPT command, followed by the
script file name.

■ If the script runs properly, it is ready for project-wide use.

Project-wide update or retag

Create a project-wide script file | 697

Access:

Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Project-Wide Up-
date/Retag tool.
From the Projects menu, select Project-Wide Update/Retag.

Component Retag

Retag all nonfixed components.

NOTE If Ladder References Resequence selected, the component retag process is

performed after the ladder resequencing is complete.

Component Cross-Reference Update

Updates the cross-referencing for components on selected drawings.

NOTE Cross-references are updated after other options such as component retag
or ladder resequencing is performed.

Wire Number and Signal Tag/Retag

Sets options for wire number retagging.

Click Setup to display the Wire Tagging (project-wide) dialog box. Here you
can insert or update wire numbers associated with wire line networks across
a project

Ladder References

Renumbers each ladder sequentially.

Resequence Setup Defines options for starting reference numbers and

how to sequence ladders from drawing to drawing.

Renumber Ladders dialog box Renumbers the ladder for the selected drawings from
the active project.
1 Enter the ladder reference number for
the first drawing.

698 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

 2 For all subsequent drawings:
■ Select to use the next sequential
reference.
■ Select Skip, drawing to drawing
count to enter an amount to skip for
the next drawing's first ladder refer-
ence.

Bump Up or Down Moves ladder references up if drawings have been

added to the middle of a project or moves ladder
references down if drawings have been removed
from the project.

NOTE Enter a negative number to move ladder ref-

erences down.

Sheet (%S value)

Automates resequencing the sheet value on consecutive drawings.

Resequence - Start with Enter a number to start the resequencing.

Bump-Up/Down by Select to move the current sheet value up or down

by a given count.

Drawing (%D value)

Performs a project-wide update of the drawing's %D “DWG NAME” parameter.

Other Configuration Settings

Updates the drawing parameters related to component, cross-reference and

wire tagging modes and format project-wide.

Title Block Update

Automates updating title block information for the active drawing or the
entire project drawing set.

Project-wide update or retag | 699

Track drawing changes
The Mark/Verify tool can help you track changes made to a project drawing
set during any phase in the engineering process. Before you send your drawings
out for review, use the Mark option. Each AutoCAD Electrical component,
wire number, and beginning ladder reference is invisibly marked and referenced
in a table in the current project's scratch database file. When the drawings are
returned, you can use the Verify option to generate a report of changes. The
report includes a list of all added, changed, copied, and deleted components
and wire numbers. Changes made using AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT or AutoCAD
Electrical are all detected.
For AutoCAD Electrical to detect if a component or wire number is deleted,
it must reference the MARKVERIFY table that is saved in the project's database
file. If the project database file is erased after the Mark option is run, then a
subsequent Verify command cannot report deleted items since it is limited to
reporting only changes involving new inserts, copies, and edited components
and wire numbers.
The Verify command detects and reports changes to the following:

■ Component TAG name (such as CR101 changed to CR101A)

■ Description text

■ Switch position text, rating values

■ Beginning PLC module address value

■ Terminal pin numbers (both stand-alone terminals and component pin

numbers)

■ Catalog number, manufacturer, assembly code value

■ Location/Installation code values

■ Wire numbers

■ Beginning ladder reference number

■ Wire Source/Destination codes

■ Deleted items - Project database maintained

700 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

Track changes made to a drawing set
Use this tool to insert comments in your drawings before sending them for
review. Once the drawings are returned to you, run this tool again to see any
changes that were made to the drawing set.

1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the

Mark/Verify Drawings tool.

2 Click the Mark/Verify Drawings tool.

3 Specify to mark either the project or the current drawing.

4 Specify to mark AutoCAD Electrical components. You can also

select:
■ Include non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks to mark all blocks
even if they do not carry AutoCAD Electrical intelligence.
■ Select Include wires/lines to detect changes to any lines or
wires in the drawings.

5 Click OK.

6 Enter your initials and any comments about the drawing set,
and then click OK. This information (along with the current
time and date) is included in later reporting.
Invisible flags are placed on the wire numbers and component
tags. These flags do not change the appearance or functioning
of the drawings. However, they may increase the drawing size
by a small amount.

7 After you make edits to the drawings or receive the drawings

back from your client, reopen the drawings in AutoCAD Elec-
trical so you can verify the changes.

8 Use the Mark/Verify Drawings command to report the accu-

mulated changes made to the drawing set.

9 Specify to verify the drawings and click OK.

A list of the detected changes is displayed in a report dialog
box.

Track drawing changes | 701

 10 Specify to display the data in the AutoCAD Electrical report
format, save the report, or print the changes. You can also se-
lect to surf through the list to examine each detected change
in context.

Mark and verify

This tool places an invisible mark on each component before sending the
drawings to a client. When the drawings are returned, a list is generated that
includes any components or wire numbers that have been modified, edited,
or copied.

NOTE This command writes information to the project database file that is used
to check for deleted components. Your drawings must be named and part of the
active project to use this command.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Mark/Verify Drawings
tool.
From the Projects menu, select Mark/Verify Drawings.

Mark/verify drawing or project Specifies to mark or verify the active drawing or

process all drawings in the current project.

Mark Places invisible information on all AutoCAD Electrical

components including blocks not created in AutoCAD
Electrical, lines, and wires.

Verify Generates a list of changes since the drawings have

been marked.

Remove Removes all invisible mark data.

Previous Redisplays the last check mark exception report.

Surf Continues surfing on exceptions generated the last

time the mark/verify command was used.

702 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

Current drawing statistics Displays any mark data found on the drawing.

Translate description text

Use this to convert description or switch position component text from one
language to another. When AutoCAD Electrical finishes it displays a report
listing what was successfully translated and what was not. You can use this
report to surf to the problem areas (where a phrase could not be translated)
and make manual edits one by one.

1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the

Language Conversion tool.

2 Click the Language Conversion tool.

3 Select to run the command on the entire project, the active

drawing, selected drawings, or on selected objects in the
drawing.

4 Select the "From" and "To" languages to use.

5 Specify if multiple lines of the component description text are

translated based on exact or partial matches.
By default, the conversion will look for exact matches on the
description labels you select with partial match as an option.

6 Click OK and the components or drawings you want to process.

TIP You can add more phrases to the translation table using the Edit Language
Database File tool (Projects ➤ Language Conversion ➤ Edit Language Database
File) and re-run the language swap to obtain more satisfactory results.

Language conversion

Translate description text | 703

 Translates component description text from one language to another.
Description text and switch position text is processed on schematic and panel
components.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Language Conversion
tool.
From the Projects menu, select Language Conversion ➤ Language Conversion.

Run language swap on Performs language translation on the entire project, the
active drawing, selected drawings, or on selected objects
in the drawing.

From To Translates from the current language to another language.

What to do Translates the selected item.

Translation on Determines if multiple lines of the component description

text is translated based on exact or partial matches.

NOTE By default, translation is performed on exact matches only.

Edit: language lookup file

Opens the current language table for review and modification. The default
table is wd_lang1.mdb

Access:

Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Edit Language Data-
base File tool.
From the Projects menu, select Language Conversion ➤ Edit Language Database
File.

Select language Selects a predefined language.

NOTE Language matches are NOT case sensitive,

but phrase substitutions are made exactly as entered
in the language table.

704 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

Add a Language Adds a new column to the database with a blank
entry for each existing phrase associated with the
new language name.

Delete Language Deletes a language from the predefined language

table.

Phrase list in selected language Displays a phrase list for the selected language.

New phrase Adds a blank entry to the end of each language list
and the translations for phrase list at the bottom of
the dialog box.

Copy phrase Adds a copy of each translation of the selected phrase

to the end of each language list.

Delete phrase Deletes all translations of the selected phrase from

the database.

Translations for phrase above - Select to Displays phrases from the selected language. Double-
edit click a phrase to edit.

Publish to the web

Create a web page of selected drawings in the current project.

1 Select Projects ➤ Publish to Web.

2 In the Publish to Web dialog box, select a location to store the drawing
files.

3 Select an image format.

■ DWF: Design web format files are vector-based representations of
drawing (.DWG) files.

NOTE DWF is the recommended image format as it supports intra-drawing

surfing from a component tag or component description list.

Publish to the web | 705

 ■ JPEG: Joint Photographics Experts Group files are raster-based. This
format is not recommended for large files that contain text.

■ PNG: Portable Network Graphics files are raster-based like JPEG images,
but PNG provides a higher quality output.

4 Click OK.

5 Select one or more drawing to publish to the web.

■ Do All: Selects all drawings from the project drawing list to be copied
to the new project.

■ Process: Selects one or more drawings from the project drawing list
to be copied to the new project.

■ Reset: Moves all selected drawings back to the project drawing list.

■ Un-select: Moves one or more drawings back to the project drawing

list.

■ by Section/sub-section: Selects drawings by sections and subsections.

6 Click OK.

7 Enter a name for the project banner for the web page.

8 Enter one or more project titles for the web page.

9 Select the method to output drawing images to the web page.

10 Click OK.

11 Enter an output device name.

12 Press ENTER to select no as the default when prompted to select to write

the plot to a file [Yes/No]

13 Press ENTER to select no as the default when prompted to save change

to page setup [Yes/No]

14 Press ENTER to select yes as the default when prompted proceed with
plot [Yes/No]
The progress of the plot job is displayed. When complete, you will be
notified that the plot and publish job is complete.

Publish to web - temporary folder for build

706 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

 Creates a Web page of selected drawings in the current project. The Web pages
and associated support files are saved in the specified folder, enabling preview
and testing prior to posting to the Web. If the folder does not exist, one is
created.

Access:

On the Project Manager, click the arrow on the Publish/Plot tool, and select
Publish to Web.
From the Projects menu, select Publish to Web.

DWF Design Web format files are vector-based representations of drawing

(.DWG) files.

NOTE DWF is the recommended image format as it supports intra-

drawing surfing from a component tag or component description
list.

JPEG Joint Photographics Experts Group files are raster-based. This format
is not recommended for large files that contain text.

PNG Portable Network Graphics files are raster-based like JPEG images, but
PNG provides a higher quality output.

AutoCAD Electrical publish to web - banner, title

text, options
Access:

On the Project Manager, click the arrow on the Publish/Plot tool and select
Publish to Web. Specify or create a folder location for the files to be saved and
click OK. Select the drawings to process and click OK.
From the Projects menu, select Publish to Web. Specify or create a folder location
for the files to be saved and click OK. Select the drawings to process and click
OK.

Banner Creates the text string that forms the banner for the web
page. The default is the .WDP file name and its path for
the current project.

Publish to the web | 707

Title Text Creates the text that appears below the banner. The default
is the current project's first four project description LINEx
values.

Layout to output Creates the drawing images using the AutoCAD Plot to
DWF function. The plot mode can be Model, Layout1, or
As Saved.

Configuration name Uses the plot configuration file for generating the .DWF
drawing images.

NOTE To override, set WD_DWF_PC3 in the wd.env envir-

onment settings file.

Build intra-drawing surf pick lists Automates the surf and zoom capabilities on components
on the drawing image displayed on the Web. Intra-drawing
surfing is available once the page creation process is com-
plete.

NOTE This option slows the .DWF plotting process.

Allow drag and drop Copies the .DWG files or creates .DXF file copies of the
drawings and posts them on the Web page. You can drag
these files from the Web page into an AutoCAD session.

Use drawing title blocks

If your existing drawing title block consists of an AutoCAD block with
attributes, AutoCAD Electrical can be linked into it for automated, project-wide
title block updates. The AutoCAD Electrical project-wide information lines
and the AutoCAD Electrical per-drawing values can be mapped to attributes
on your existing title block. You can create project-specific mapping files.
AutoCAD Electrical always looks for a mapping file that matches the current
project's .wdp file name before it defaults to DEFAULT.WDT. For example, if
the active project is ACME99.WDP and you instruct AutoCAD Electrical to do
a title block update, AutoCAD Electrical looks for mapping file ACME99.WDT.

708 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

 If not found, AutoCAD Electrical then looks for DEFAULT.WDT (if not found,
AutoCAD Electrical aborts the command).

Title block attributes

When you instruct AutoCAD Electrical to do a project-wide title block update,

AutoCAD Electrical reads this attribute mapping file. Attributes on title block
are mapped to AutoCAD Electrical project data lines and several AutoCAD
Electrical settings values. Each one of the drawing values has a code that is
entered into your title block setup which assigns that value to a specific
attribute. The form of each mapping line below is either <attribute name> =
LINEx, where "x" is a project data line number (for example, LINE1) or
<attribute name> = xx where "xx" can be any of these:

SHEET sheet number value (the %S value)

SHEETMAX number of drawings in the active project (the "N"

value in title block "SHEET x of "N")

DWGNAM drawing name value (the %D value)

DD1 (or DWGDESC), DD2, DD3 the drawing descriptions assigned in the Project De-
scription dialog box

DWGSEC optional section code assigned in the Project Descrip-

tion dialog box

DWGSUB optional Subsection code assigned in the Project

Description dialog box

FILENAME filename without path or extension

FULLFILENAME filename with path and extension

FILENAMEEXT file name with .dwg extension only

IEC_P drawing's IEC Project value

IEC_I drawing's installation value

Use drawing title blocks | 709

IEC_L drawing's location value

PLOTTIME current time (24hr military format)

PLOTTIME12 current time (12hr am/pm format)

PLOTDATE current date (MM:DD:YYYY format)

PLOTDATEMMDDYY current date (MM:DD:YY format)

PLOTDATEYYMMDD current date (YY:MM:DD format)

PLOTDATEYYYYMMDD current date (YYYY:MM:DD format)

Example: your title block has attributes SH for the sheet number and DSTAMP
for a plot date stamp and TSTAMP for a plot time stamp value. It also has
attributes T1 and T2 for title lines and attribute CUSTOMER for the customer
text, all of which come from the project's first 3 defined description lines.
Include these mapping entries:
T1 = LINE1
T2 = LINE2
CUSTOMER = LINE3
SH = SHEET
DSTAMP = PLOTDATE
TSTAMP = PLOTTIME
This "xx" value can also be any fixed text within quotes, such as DRAWNBY
= "Joe Engineer"

NOTE If the title block's target attribute tag name contains one or more wild card
characters (# @ . * ? ~ [ ] - ) the name must be preceded by a backwards
apostrophe char (Example: '[REV] = LINE5, where title block attribute name is
[REV])

Use multiple title blocks

If your title block/revision block consists of multiple blocks, you can encode
2 or more block names into the ".wdt" file. You can even encode wildcards

710 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

into the block name that AutoCAD Electrical searches for. For example, the
following line encoded in the ".wdt" file triggers AutoCAD Electrical to look
for and update not only a block called "TB" but also two other blocks.
BLOCK = TB,TB-REV,TB-ISSUE
You can also use wild-cards to define title blocks. Your drawing could have
any of 3 different title block sizes, perhaps named TITLE-SIZEB, TITLE-SIZEC,
or TITLE-SIZED. The following line encoded in the ".wdt" file triggers AutoCAD
Electrical to find and update the title block no matter what size is used on the
drawing.
BLOCK = TITLE-SIZE*

Set up multiple descriptions

Prior to AutoCAD Electrical 2007 only one description line was allowed per
drawing in the project file. One method to map this information to multiple
attributes is to set up the "attrname=DWGDESC" entry in the .wdt file to be
in this form: attrname1|attrname2|attrname3=DWGDESC using the "|"
character between the target attribute names. Then, in the DWGDESC value
in the Project Description dialog box, delimit the DWGDESC value with "|"
at the break points.
For example, if your title block has 3 description attributes, TITLE-1, TITLE-2,
and TITLE-3 and you want the text entered into the AutoCAD Electrical project
DWGDESC entry split across these three attributes. Set up your .wdt title block
mapping file with this entry: TITLE-1|TITLE-2|TITLE-3=DWGDESC. Now, in
the AutoCAD Electrical Project Descriptions dialog box, split the drawing's
DWGDESC description text into 3 pieces using "|" delimiters (for example,
"Main cabinet|120VAC|PLC I/O"). The AutoCAD Electrical Update Title Block
command then splits this string of text across the three title block attributes.

NOTE The Title Block Setup command does not support this method. You will
need to use a text editor, such as Notepad, to manually edit your .wdt file.

As of AutoCAD Electrical 2007, 3 description lines are supported per drawing

in the project file. An easier way to map multiple descriptions (up to 3) to
multiple attributes is to use the Title Block Setup command (Projects > Title
Block Setup). In the Setup Title Block Update dialog box, specify the title block
link method, enter a block name, and click OK. In the Title Block Setup dialog
box, click Drawing Values. Select an attribute to use for Drawing Description
1 through 3 and click OK.

Use drawing title blocks | 711

 Update the title block project-wide

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select

Descriptions.
A list of the current values for the project-wide LINEx values
displays.

3 Change values for the title, job number, date, scale, or other
description attributes.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select

Title Block Update.
The Update Title Block dialog box displays. You can identify
the data lines you want to write out to each title block in your
project.

6 Select the values that need to be updated on the title block,

along with SHEET and SHEETMAX if new drawings have been
added to your project.

NOTE If you want to save these selections, click Save. The settings
are stored in the default.wdu file.

7 (Optional) Select Resequence sheet %S value.

This renumbers the sheet values and changes the sheet max
value. This is commonly used when drawings are added to the
project drawing set.

8 Click OK Project-Wide.

9 Select to process all of the drawings in the project and click

OK.
AutoCAD Electrical calls up each drawing, finds the drawing's
title block, and makes the changes to the attribute names
mapped to the values you selected, SHEET, and SHEETMAX.
It also resequences the SHEET values as it goes.

Update title block

712 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

 Automates updating title block information for the current drawing or the
entire project drawing set. Project and drawing specific settings are linked to
one or more attributes contained in the title block.
This tool assumes that you have a border with mapped attributes using the
.wdt file or a mapping attribute file (WD_TB) inside of the border. This specifies
which attribute on the border should be updated with text from the Update
Title Block dialog box. The text in this dialog box comes from right-clicking
on the project name in the Project Manager and selecting Descriptions.
The prompt text for each line is controlled by the default_wdtitle.wdl file or
_wdtitle.wdl file if you placed one in the project folder. If AutoCAD Electrical
can’t find a _wdtitle.wdl file in the project folder, it looks for the
default_wdtitle.wdl file in the User folder.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. Right-click the project name and select Title
Block Update.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the
project name and select Title Block Update.

Select Lines to Update (Project Description Lines)

Lists project-wide LINE1 through LINExx values.

LINE1-LINE9 values are as follows:

LINE1 Title 1

LINE2 Title 2

LINE3 Title 3

LINE4 Job Number

LINE5 Date

LINE6 Engineer

LINE7 Drawn By

Use drawing title blocks | 713

LINE8 Checked By

LINE9 Scale

Select Lines to Update (these are per-drawing values)

Lists drawing-specific values.

Drawing Description The drawing descriptions in the project. Up to 3

drawing descriptions can be added to a drawing.
The drawing description codes DD1(or DWGDESC),
DD2 and DD3 are used for the 3 description lines.

Drawing Section The drawing sections in the project.

Drawing Sub-section The drawing subsections in the project.

Filename The file name without an extension.

File/extension The file name with the appropriate extension.

Full Filename The full file name and the pathname where the file
is located.

P The project value for the drawing.

I The installation value for the drawing.

L The location value for the drawing.

Drawing (%D value) The %D value of the drawing settings.

Sheet (%S value) The %S value of the drawing settings.

Sheet maximum The maximum count of drawings in the project.

714 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

Resequence sheet %S values Renumbers the sheet number for each drawing in
the project set or for a selected portion of the project
drawing set.

Activate each drawing to process

Specifies to activate every drawing so you can update the title block lines on
selected drawings in the project.

OK Active Drawing Only

Updates the text for the selected lines on the active drawing only.

OK Project-wide

Updates the text for the selected lines on the selected drawings in the project.

Setup title block update

Automates updating title block information for the active drawing or the
entire project drawing set. Project and drawing-specific property settings are
linked to one or more attributes contained in the title block.
The link between AutoCAD Electrical and the title block is defined by either
an external text file (.wdt) or by an invisible WD_TB attribute added to your
existing title block. If the WDT method is used, you can use a project-specific
file or the Default.wdt file. In either case, the title block attribute names are
mapped to the project-wide LINEx values and to several drawing-specific
setting values.

Access:

From the Projects menu, select Title Block Setup.

Method 1

Project.wdt Create a project-specific mapping file that only references for

drawings in the current project. The file name is the same as the
project name with a .wdt extension.

Use drawing title blocks | 715

DEFAULT.WDT Create a default mapping file in the project's subdirectory that is
referenced if a project-specific file is not found and if a WD_TB
attribute is not present in the title block.

DEFAULT.WDT Create a default mapping file in the default AutoCAD Electrical

subdirectory that is referenced if a project-specific file is not found
and if a WD_TB attribute is not present in the title block.

Method 2

The title block contains an invisible attribute with a value that defines the
mapping between the title block and AutoCAD Electrical. No external WDT
file is required because the mapping information is self-contained on the title
block.
The attribute name = WD_CODE mapping information is encoded on the
WD_TB attribute on the title block of the drawing. The attribute's value gives
the mapping information in the format of a semi-colon delimited text string.
For example:
TITLE-1=LINE1;TITLE-2=LINE2;SH=SHEET;SH_TOTAL=SHEET_MAX
where project wide values for LINE1 and LINE2 codes update attributes TITLE-1
and TITLE-2. The %S sheet value is copied to the title block attribute SH, and
the number of drawing files in the project is written out to attribute SH_TOTAL.

Title block setup

Defines attribute mappings. The lines that follow the title block name list the
attribute names on that block and what pieces of AutoCAD Electrical project
data or drawing specific data that AutoCAD Electrical should copy to that
attribute.

Access:

From the Project menu, select Title Block Setup. Specify the title block link
method, enter a block name, and click OK.

Title block name Lists the available title block names.

716 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

Add New Adds new title blocks to the project. Enter a block name.
For multiple blocks, separate with a comma. For example,
DEMOTBLK,DEMOTBLK2,DEMOTBLK3

Edit Edits the selected title block.

Remove Removes the selected title block.

Pick on Selects an attribute directly on the drawing if you do not

know the name of attribute.

Attribute Specifies the attribute to use for the drawing, project, or

plotting value. Select an attribute from the list.

Project Values / Drawing Values / Displays the project, drawing-specific and plotting values.
Plotting Values

User Defined Maps attributes to text constants or AutoLISP values.

Title block setup (user-defined)

Assigns text constants and AutoLISP expressions to a title block attribute.

Access:

From the Project menu, select Title Block Setup. Specify the title block link
method, enter a block name, and click OK. Click User Defined on the Title Block
Setup dialog box.

Current User-Defined Assignments Lists the attributes and assigned text constant or
AutoLISP expression.

Attributes Modify an existing link by selecting it from the attrib-

ute list. To clear an existing link, select -none- from
the attribute list.

Text constant or AutoLISP expression Enter a text constant or an AutoLISP expression to

assign to the attribute. For example, you can assign

Use drawing title blocks | 717

 (getvar LOGINNAME) to attribute DWGBY, or you
can assign YourName to DWGBY.

Update list Adds the text constant or AutoLISP expression to the

user-defined list.

Link information to the title block

You can link some AutoCAD Electrical project description data entries and
some of the AutoCAD Electrical drawing values to the attributes that appear
in the drawing title blocks. There are 2 methods to do this: using an attribute
mapping file and mapping information embedded on the title block.

Link values using an attribute mapping file

A text file, DEFAULT.WDT, defines what AutoCAD Electrical values are mapped
to the drawing title block attributes. Use any text editor to create or edit file
default.wdt:
BLOCK = TITLE
PROJ_TITLE = LINE1
DRAW_TITLE1 = LINE2
DRAW_TITLE2 = DWGDESC
PROJ_NUM = LINE4
STATUS = LINE5
STATUS_DATE = LINE6
REV = LINE7
SX = SHEETMAX
SH = SHEET
PLOTTIME = PLOTTIME
PLOTDATE = PLOTDATE
When you instruct AutoCAD Electrical to do a project-wide title block update,
AutoCAD Electrical reads this mapping file. The "BLOCK = " entry tells
AutoCAD Electrical the AutoCAD block name of the title block. The lines that
follow list the attribute names on that block and what pieces of AutoCAD

718 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

Electrical project data or drawing specific data that AutoCAD Electrical should
copy to that attribute. The PLOTTIME and PLOTDATE entries also appear in
this file but they are used only by the AutoCAD Electrical batch plotting
routine.
You can include other non-AutoCAD Electrical-mapped attributes as well in
this mapping file. For example, the line
DRAWN_BY = "Joe Doe"
This triggers AutoCAD Electrical to look for an attribute named "DRAWN_BY"
and, if found, insert a value of "Joe Doe." If your target attribute name contains
an AutoLISP wild-card character such as #, ?, [, ], -, @, ~, ., or * then you'll need
to precede that character with the ` character. For example, if your target
attribute name is SHT# and you want to map the AutoCAD Electrical SHEET
parameter to it, you would set up the mapping with
SHT'# = SHEET
You can create project-specific mapping files. AutoCAD Electrical always looks
for a mapping file that matches the current project's .wdp file name before it
defaults to DEFAULT.WDT. For example, if the current, active project is
ACME99.WDP and you instruct AutoCAD Electrical to do a title block update,
AutoCAD Electrical looks for mapping file ACME99.WDT. If not found,
AutoCAD Electrical then looks for DEFAULT.WDT (and if not found, AutoCAD
Electrical aborts the command).

Map information embedded on the title block

An invisible attribute on your drawing's title bock, named "WD_TB," can be

encoded with the mapping information. This method eliminates the need for
an external mapping text file. When you instruct AutoCAD Electrical to do a
project-wide title bock update, AutoCAD Electrical first searches each drawing
for any block that carries an attribute named WD_TB. If found, AutoCAD
Electrical assumes that is has found the drawing's title block and skips any
search for a .wdt file. AutoCAD Electrical extracts the WD_TB attribute value
where the mapping information is stored. The format is <attribute
name>=<LINEx>;<attribute name>=<LINEx>. Here is an example of what the
WD_TB attribute value would be:
PROJ_TITLE=LINE1;DRAW_TITLE1=LINE2;DRAW_TITLE2=DWGDESC;PROJ_NUM=LINE4

Link information to the title block | 719

 Customize LINEx labels
The generic LINEx labels that display in the various title block and project
description dialog boxes can be customized to match the field names in your
title block.

1 Create a file called either projname_wdtitle.wdl or default_wdtitle.wdl

in the project subdirectory. Use any generic text editor like Notepad or
Wordpad.

2 The file should contain one line per label in the format LINEx=label. The
entries do not have to be in order and line numbers may be skipped.
LINE1 = Project Title 1
LINE2 =Title 2
LINE3 = Title 3
LINE4 = Project Number
LINE5 = Date
LINE6 = Engineer
LINE7 = Drawn By
LINE8 = Checked By
LINE9 = Scale

3 Save and exit the ASCII text file.

4 Open AutoCAD and test.

Search sequence for .wdl files

You may create different .wdl files for different projects. The search sequence
is as follows:

1 Look in the same directory as the project's .WDP file for a file called
PROJNAM_WDTITLE.WDL

2 Look in the same directory as the project's .WDP file for a file called
DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL

3 If WD_ACADPATHFIRST flag is present in wd.env file, look for

DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in ACAD paths

4 Look for DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in the AutoCAD Electrical USER

directory

720 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

 5 If WD_SUP_ALT is defined in the wd.env file, look for
DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in the specified path

6 Look for DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in base AutoCAD Electrical directory

7 Look for DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in ACAD paths (if

WD_ACADPATHFIRST flag isn't set in wd.env)

Map a title block

Create a mapping for the title block.

1 From the Projects menu, select Title Block Setup.

2 Select the title block link method:

■ Method 1: Text mapping file with .WDT extension.

■ Method 2: Mapping is defined by an invisible attribute contained in

the title block.

3 Click OK.
If the .WDT file exists:
■ Click View to view and edit the file.

■ Click Overwrite to create a new file.

■ Click Edit to modify the existing file.

NOTE If no existing file is found, you must identify the title block's AutoCAD
block name.

4 In the Title Block Setup dialog box, select the attribute from each list to
map to its corresponding AutoCAD Electrical value.

5 Click Drawing Values to assign drawing specific and plotting values.

6 Click User Defined to map attributes to text constants or AutoLISP values.

7 Click OK.

Setup title block update

Automates updating title block information for the active drawing or the
entire project drawing set. Project and drawing-specific property settings are
linked to one or more attributes contained in the title block.

Link information to the title block | 721

 The link between AutoCAD Electrical and the title block is defined by either
an external text file (.wdt) or by an invisible WD_TB attribute added to your
existing title block. If the WDT method is used, you can use a project-specific
file or the Default.wdt file. In either case, the title block attribute names are
mapped to the project-wide LINEx values and to several drawing-specific
setting values.

Access:

From the Projects menu, select Title Block Setup.

Method 1

Project.wdt Create a project-specific mapping file that only references for

drawings in the current project. The file name is the same as the
project name with a .wdt extension.

DEFAULT.WDT Create a default mapping file in the project's subdirectory that is

referenced if a project-specific file is not found and if a WD_TB
attribute is not present in the title block.

DEFAULT.WDT Create a default mapping file in the default AutoCAD Electrical

subdirectory that is referenced if a project-specific file is not found
and if a WD_TB attribute is not present in the title block.

Method 2

The title block contains an invisible attribute with a value that defines the
mapping between the title block and AutoCAD Electrical. No external WDT
file is required because the mapping information is self-contained on the title
block.
The attribute name = WD_CODE mapping information is encoded on the
WD_TB attribute on the title block of the drawing. The attribute's value gives
the mapping information in the format of a semi-colon delimited text string.
For example:
TITLE-1=LINE1;TITLE-2=LINE2;SH=SHEET;SH_TOTAL=SHEET_MAX
where project wide values for LINE1 and LINE2 codes update attributes TITLE-1
and TITLE-2. The %S sheet value is copied to the title block attribute SH, and
the number of drawing files in the project is written out to attribute SH_TOTAL.

722 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

 Title block setup
Defines attribute mappings. The lines that follow the title block name list the
attribute names on that block and what pieces of AutoCAD Electrical project
data or drawing specific data that AutoCAD Electrical should copy to that
attribute.

Access:

From the Project menu, select Title Block Setup. Specify the title block link
method, enter a block name, and click OK.

Title block name Lists the available title block names.

Add New Adds new title blocks to the project. Enter a block name.
For multiple blocks, separate with a comma. For example,
DEMOTBLK,DEMOTBLK2,DEMOTBLK3

Edit Edits the selected title block.

Remove Removes the selected title block.

Pick on Selects an attribute directly on the drawing if you do not

know the name of attribute.

Attribute Specifies the attribute to use for the drawing, project, or

plotting value. Select an attribute from the list.

Project Values / Drawing Values / Displays the project, drawing-specific and plotting values.
Plotting Values

User Defined Maps attributes to text constants or AutoLISP values.

Title block setup (user-defined)

Link information to the title block | 723

 Assigns text constants and AutoLISP expressions to a title block attribute.

Access:

From the Project menu, select Title Block Setup. Specify the title block link
method, enter a block name, and click OK. Click User Defined on the Title Block
Setup dialog box.

Current User-Defined Assignments Lists the attributes and assigned text constant or
AutoLISP expression.

Attributes Modify an existing link by selecting it from the attrib-

ute list. To clear an existing link, select -none- from
the attribute list.

Text constant or AutoLISP expression Enter a text constant or an AutoLISP expression to

assign to the attribute. For example, you can assign
(getvar LOGINNAME) to attribute DWGBY, or you
can assign YourName to DWGBY.

Update list Adds the text constant or AutoLISP expression to the

user-defined list.

Map AutoLISP values to the title block

You can vector to the title block system variable values or values extracted by
AutoLISP programs. For example, let's say that your system's environment
variable "USERNAME" contains a value that must show up on the drawing
title block. You set up your default.wdt file to map the AutoCAD Electrical
"LINE12" value to attribute "DWGBY" on your standard title block. Now you
want to automatically have LINE12 point at the USERNAME environment
variable so that, during title block update, the USERNAME value goes to LINE12
which, in turn, sends it on to the "DWGBY" attribute on the title block. Encode
the AutoLISP (getenv " ") function into the LINE12 value for your current
project description data.
Now when you run the Title Block update, make sure that LINE12 is selected.
During the update AutoCAD Electrical evaluates the expression (getenv
"USERNAME"), retrieves the environment value, and writes that value out to

724 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

 the attribute that is mapped to LINE12 (mapped in the .wdt file or on the
WD_TB attribute value carried by the title block).

NOTE If the expression is a full AutoLISP function, it must return a string value
(not an integer, real, list, or nil value). The program must be encoded into the
project description data as "(load 'filename.lsp')." It must be self-starting upon
load.

Setup title block update

Automates updating title block information for the active drawing or the
entire project drawing set. Project and drawing-specific property settings are
linked to one or more attributes contained in the title block.
The link between AutoCAD Electrical and the title block is defined by either
an external text file (.wdt) or by an invisible WD_TB attribute added to your
existing title block. If the WDT method is used, you can use a project-specific
file or the Default.wdt file. In either case, the title block attribute names are
mapped to the project-wide LINEx values and to several drawing-specific
setting values.

Access:

From the Projects menu, select Title Block Setup.

Method 1

Project.wdt Create a project-specific mapping file that only references for

drawings in the current project. The file name is the same as the
project name with a .wdt extension.

DEFAULT.WDT Create a default mapping file in the project's subdirectory that is

referenced if a project-specific file is not found and if a WD_TB
attribute is not present in the title block.

DEFAULT.WDT Create a default mapping file in the default AutoCAD Electrical

subdirectory that is referenced if a project-specific file is not found
and if a WD_TB attribute is not present in the title block.

Map AutoLISP values to the title block | 725

 Method 2

The title block contains an invisible attribute with a value that defines the
mapping between the title block and AutoCAD Electrical. No external WDT
file is required because the mapping information is self-contained on the title
block.
The attribute name = WD_CODE mapping information is encoded on the
WD_TB attribute on the title block of the drawing. The attribute's value gives
the mapping information in the format of a semi-colon delimited text string.
For example:
TITLE-1=LINE1;TITLE-2=LINE2;SH=SHEET;SH_TOTAL=SHEET_MAX
where project wide values for LINE1 and LINE2 codes update attributes TITLE-1
and TITLE-2. The %S sheet value is copied to the title block attribute SH, and
the number of drawing files in the project is written out to attribute SH_TOTAL.

Title block setup

Defines attribute mappings. The lines that follow the title block name list the
attribute names on that block and what pieces of AutoCAD Electrical project
data or drawing specific data that AutoCAD Electrical should copy to that
attribute.

Access:

From the Project menu, select Title Block Setup. Specify the title block link
method, enter a block name, and click OK.

Title block name Lists the available title block names.

Add New Adds new title blocks to the project. Enter a block name.
For multiple blocks, separate with a comma. For example,
DEMOTBLK,DEMOTBLK2,DEMOTBLK3

Edit Edits the selected title block.

Remove Removes the selected title block.

Pick on Selects an attribute directly on the drawing if you do not

know the name of attribute.

726 | Chapter 11 Project-Wide Tools

Attribute Specifies the attribute to use for the drawing, project, or
plotting value. Select an attribute from the list.

Project Values / Drawing Values / Displays the project, drawing-specific and plotting values.
Plotting Values

User Defined Maps attributes to text constants or AutoLISP values.

Title block setup (user-defined)

Assigns text constants and AutoLISP expressions to a title block attribute.

Access:

From the Project menu, select Title Block Setup. Specify the title block link
method, enter a block name, and click OK. Click User Defined on the Title Block
Setup dialog box.

Current User-Defined Assignments Lists the attributes and assigned text constant or
AutoLISP expression.

Attributes Modify an existing link by selecting it from the attrib-

ute list. To clear an existing link, select -none- from
the attribute list.

Text constant or AutoLISP expression Enter a text constant or an AutoLISP expression to

assign to the attribute. For example, you can assign
(getvar LOGINNAME) to attribute DWGBY, or you
can assign YourName to DWGBY.

Update list Adds the text constant or AutoLISP expression to the

user-defined list.

Map AutoLISP values to the title block | 727

728
Icon Menus
12
In this chapter
■ Overview of the Icon Menu
Wizard
■ Use alternate icon menus
■ Modify Icon Menu File
Directly

729
Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard
Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily customize the icon menus. You can copy,
cut, and paste icons from one submenu into another, drag icons within the
Symbol Preview window to place those that are commonly used at the top
and those that are used less frequently at the bottom of the window, and
create new icons to use when inserting components.
Once you click OK in any of the Add Icon dialog boxes, the following happens:

■ The new icon is created and saved depending on the status of the WD_SLB
code in the environment file (.env).
If WD_SLB is disabled in the environment file, the Images folder of the
corresponding icon menu .dat file is created (if it does not already exist)
and new images are saved here. (C:\Documents and
Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD
Electrical\{release number}\{country code}\Support\Images). If you
browsed to an existing image, the image is copied to the Images folder.
If WD_SLB is enabled, the Images folder corresponding to the folder defined
by the WD_SLB is created (if it does not already exist) and new images are
saved here. If the WD_SLB value is “N:\Electrical\Menu” then the folder
N:\Electrical\Menu\Images is created and used. If you browsed to an
existing image, the image is copied to the Images folder.

NOTE You can enclose the image path within quotation marks if you do not
want the images copied to the Images folder. The .dat file saves the absolute
path instead. For example, if the image file edit box contains
“C:\Desktop\push_button.png,” then the push_button.png is not copied to
the Image folder.

■ The new icon is added to the end of the existing icon images in the Symbol
Preview window of the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box.

■ The relative path of the new icon information is written to the .dat file
once you click OK in the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box. However, the
complete path of the block or circuit is saved in the .dat file if the Block
Name edit box or the File name edit box contains the complete path of
the drawing file.

Add or modify icons using the icon menu wizard

The Icon Menu Wizard can be used to add or modify icons for both the
schematic and panel symbol libraries. You can add new menu pages to the

730 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

AutoCAD Electrical icon menu, and then populate them with your own custom
symbols. Each new page can have icon selections that cascade down to other
new menu pages.
Use this dialog box to add an icon that is then used for inserting components
or circuits onto the drawing, running an AutoCAD Electrical command, or
opening a submenu page to the icon menu. You can also change the properties
of existing icons.

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 731

 Add a new icon to the menu

1 Create your new AutoCAD Electrical compatible library symbol.

For schematic symbols, follow the guidelines regarding the
symbol ".dwg" file naming convention and required attributes.

2 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon

Menu Wizard tool.

3 Click the Icon Menu Wizard tool.

4 On the Select Menu File dialog box, select the menu file (.dat)
to modify and click OK.

5 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, select Add ➤ Compon-

ent to add a new icon to the menu.
You can alternately select Command, New Circuit, Add Circuit
or New Submenu depending on which type of icon you want
to add.
■ Component: Adds an icon that inserts a component into the drawing.
■ Command: Adds an icon that runs an AutoCAD Electrical command
when selected.
■ New Circuit: Creates a new circuit and adds the icon (that is created
from a new circuit) that inserts the circuit into the drawing.
■ Add Circuit: Adds an icon (created from an existing circuit) that inserts
the circuit into the drawing.
■ New Submenu: Adds an icon that opens a submenu page when selec-
ted. You can then select an icon from the submenu to insert the spe-
cified component into the drawing or run an AutoCAD Electrical
command.

6 On the Add Icon - Component dialog box, define the required

information (such as symbol file name, image file, and block
name) for the icon menu button. To select the icon’s image
file, enter text, click Browse to select an existing image file,
click Pick to select a block from the active drawing (the block
name then appears in the Image File edit box), or click Active
to select the active drawing to use as the icon image file name.

732 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 The icon options to define differ depending on which type of
icon you are adding to the menu file (.dat).

7 Click OK.
The new icon displays at the bottom of the Symbol Preview
window.

8 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, click OK.

9 Click Components ➤ Insert Component. On the Insert

Component dialog box, select the new icon.

Edit the properties of an existing icon in the menu

1 Create your new AutoCAD Electrical compatible library symbol.

For schematic symbols, follow the guidelines regarding the
symbol ".dwg" file naming convention and required attributes.

2 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon

Menu Wizard tool.

3 Click the Icon Menu Wizard tool.

4 On the Select Menu File dialog box, select the menu file to
modify and click OK.

5 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, right-click the icon to

edit and select Properties.

6 On the Properties - Component (Command, Circuit or Sub-

menu) dialog box, edit the required information (such as
symbol file name, image file, and block name) for the icon
menu button.To select the icon’s image file, enter text, click
Browse to select an existing image file, click Pick to select a
block from the active drawing (the block name then appears
in the Image File edit box), or click Active to select the active
drawing to use as the icon image file.
The icon options to define differ depending on which type of
icon you are editing.

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 733

 7 Click OK.

Icon menu wizard

Use this to modify the icon menu. You can rearrange icons using drag and
drop in the Symbol Preview window, add icons, create new submenus, delete
icons, cut/copy/paste icons, and modify icon properties.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool.
Click Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard.

NOTE You can lock the icon menu (.dat) file using the Windows File Properties
dialog box so unauthorized users cannot make modifications to the .dat file. In
the Windows File Properties dialog box, set the file attributes to Read-only.

Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (.dat).
The displayed nodes are based on the order of arrangement of
submenus defined in the .dat file.

Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.

■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the
current menu in the Menu tree view.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview
window. The current view option is indicated with a check
mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view.
■ Add: Modifies the icon menu by adding icons for commands,
components or circuits or add a new sub-menu.

Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol images corresponding to the menu or the
submenu selected in the Menu section.
You can drag icons within the Symbol Preview window for re-
arrangement (multiple selection is allowed) such as placing
commonly used icons at the top and rarely used icons at the
bottom of the window.

734 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 NOTE Whn you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name
and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information.

Right-click menus

Options for the Menu tree structure view

Right-click a menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the
following options:

■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus.

■ New submenu: Creates a new submenu in the tree structure and the Symbol
Preview window.

■ Cut: (available for submenus only) Removes the selected submenu and it’s
contents from the list. You can then paste the submenu into another
submenu or a main menu.

NOTE The menu number does not change during a Cut and Paste. For
example, if you cut menu number 100 and paste it into another submenu
page, the pasted menu page is still menu number 100.

■ Copy: (available for submenus only) Makes a copy of the highlighted

submenu and stores it in the Paste clipboard. You can then paste the
submenu and its contents into another submenu or a main menu.

NOTE A new menu number is created for the pasted submenu. The next
available menu number (greater than 99) is assigned.

■ Paste: Adds the copied or cut submenu to the highlighted menu or

submenu.

■ Delete: (available for submenus only) Deletes the submenu and all related
content.

■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to modify the existing menu or

submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. The
existing data in the *.dat file is overwritten with your changes once you
click OK.

Options for the Symbol Preview window

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 735

 Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display
the following options:

■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window. The
current view option is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon
with text, Icon only or List view.

■ Add icon: Adds new icons (component, command, or circuit) or adds an

existing circuit into the Symbol Preview window.

■ New submenu: Creates a new submenu in the Symbol Preview window

and the tree structure.

■ Cut: Removes the selected icon from the Symbol Preview window. You
can then paste the icon into the desired submenu.

■ Copy: Makes a copy of the highlighted icon and stores it in the Paste
clipboard. You can then paste the icon into the appropriate submenu.

■ Paste: Adds the copied or cut icon to the highlighted submenu.

■ Delete: Deletes the icon.

■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to modify the existing symbol

icon properties like the icon name, image or block names. The existing
data in the *.dat file is overwritten with your changes once you click OK.

Add icon - component

The icon name and symbol block name are saved in the active *.dat file (such
as ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT) once you click OK on the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box. The icon then displays at the end of the existing icon images in the
Symbol Preview window of the Insert Component dialog box.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box click Add and then select Component.
Click Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard. Select the menu
file to modify and click OK. On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box click Add and
then select Component.

You can also access this dialog box by right-clicking in the Symbol Preview
window of the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box and selecting Add Icon ➤
Component.

736 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box,
Project Settings tab, Library and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic
Icon Menu File option. This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file.

Icon Details

Defines the icon name and image.

Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image

file.

Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the descrip-

tion text and the tool tip for the icon.

Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You
can enter the image file name (or complete path) or
select it using one of the following methods:
■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the
icon. You can browse for .sld or .png images.
■ Pick: Selects an existing block name on the cur-
rent drawing to use as the image file name. For
example, if you select block HPB11, the image
file name edit box displays “HPB11.”
■ Active: (This is unavailable if the drawing is a new
drawing and has not been saved) Selects the
active drawing name to use as the Image file.
For example, if the active drawing name is
“demo005,” then the image file edit box has
“demo005” listed as the file name.

The browsed image is copied to the Images folder

and saved as a relative path in the .dat file. However,
you can enclose the image path in quotation marks
if you do not want the image copied to the Images
folder and to save the complete path instead of the
relative path in the .dat file. The entered image file
name can be names like "PB1" or "CONTROL RELAY,"
file names with an extension such as “pb1.png,” or
it can follow the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide
or .png)}. For example, "S2(pb)" or "S7(control_re-
lay)."

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 737

 NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid
characters such as \ / : " ? < > | and only .png and
.sld image files are supported.

Create PNG from current screen image Creates the .png image file from the current screen
image. If the specified image file does not exist, this
option is selected by default. If you do not want to
create the icon from the current drawing's displayed
image, deselect the check box.

NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an im-

age file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file
(slide or .png)}” For example, “S2(pb)” or “S7(con-
trol_relay)”. It is also unavailable if the Image File edit
box contains the image file path instead of the image
file name.

Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen

image is selected.) Zooms in on the current screen
image using the AutoCAD Pan command. Once you
exit Pan mode and press Enter, the dialog box redis-
plays so you can finish defining the new icon.

Location (This appears once the Image file is specified.) Indic-

ates the full path of the image file location where the
new images are created or the browsed images are
copied to. If you entered a file name with the syntax
{slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image
file, the path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder
displays here.

738 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 Block Name to Insert

Defines the symbol block that is inserted when you click the icon in the Insert
Component dialog box.

Block Name Specifies the symbol block name. The symbol's file name
can be typed into the edit box or you can enter it using
one of the following methods:
■ Browse: Finds an existing WBlocked drawing (*.dwg)
file to assign to the icon. In this case the complete path
of the drawing file is inserted in the edit box.
■ Pick: Selects an existing block on the current drawing
(for example, block recently created with Symbol
Builder). WBlocked version (.dwg) needs to exist.
■ Active: Inserts the active drawing as a block.

Add icon - command

An icon can be configured to trigger an AutoCAD command, trigger an
AutoCAD Electrical command, or run a script file. The icons that trigger
insertion of multi-pole schematic symbol assemblies and panel footprints are
examples that require encoding of special AutoCAD Electrical commands.
The icon name and symbol block name are saved in the active *.dat file (such
as ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT) once you click OK on the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box. The icon then displays at the end of the existing icon images in the
Symbol Preview window of the Insert Component dialog box.

NOTE If you are modifying the panel menu file, use this option for inserting panel
symbols. Also, use this for inserting 3-pole schematic symbols.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box click Add, and then select Command.
Click Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard. Select the menu
file to modify and click OK. On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box click Add,
and then select Command.

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 739

 You can also access this dialog box by right-clicking in the Symbol Preview
window of the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box and selecting Add Icon ➤
Command.

TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box,
Project Settings tab, Library and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic
Icon Menu File option. This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file.

Icon Details

Defines the icon name and image.

Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file.

Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text and
the tool tip for the icon.

Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can enter the
image file name (or complete path) or select it using one of the fol-
lowing methods:
■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon. You can
browse for .sld or .png images.
■ Pick: Selects an existing block name on the current drawing to
use as the image file name. For example, if you select block
HPB11, the image file name edit box displays “HPB11.”
■ Active: (This is unavailable if the drawing is a new drawing and
has not been saved) Selects the active drawing name to use as
the Image file. For example, if the active drawing name is
“demo005,” then the image file edit box has “demo005” listed
as the file name.

The browsed image is copied to the Images folder and saved as a

relative path in the .dat file. However, you can enclose the image
path in quotation marks if you do not want the image copied to the
Images folder and to save the complete path instead of the relative
path in the .dat file. The entered image file name can be names like
"PB1" or "CONTROL RELAY," file names with an extension such as
“pb1.png,” or it can follow the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide
or .png)}. For example, "S2(pb)" or "S7(control_relay)."

NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid characters such
as \ / : " ? < > | and only .png and .sld image files are supported.

740 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

Create PNG from current Creates the .png image file from the current screen image. If the
screen image specified image file does not exist, this option is selected by default.
If you do not want to create the icon from the current drawing's dis-
played image, deselect the check box.

NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file name with
the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}” For example,
“S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”. It is also unavailable if the Image File
edit box contains the image file path instead of the image file name.

Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen image is selec-
ted.) Zooms in on the current screen image using AutoCAD Pan
command. Once you exit Pan mode and press Enter, the dialog box
redisplays so you can finish defining the new icon.

Location (This appears once the Image file is specified) Indicates the full path
of the image file location where the new images are created or the
browsed images are copied to. If you entered a file name with the
syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image file, the
path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here.

Command to Execute

NOTE If you select an AutoCAD Electrical command, you must manually enter
the additional parameters as indicated.

Command Specifies to start an AutoCAD command or AutoCAD Electrical routine.

You can enter the command name to execute with arguments.
Click List to select from a list of AutoCAD Electrical commands for
panel and schematic multi-pole symbol inserts. This makes it easier
for you to build the appropriate command to insert a symbol.

Parameters Displays the command parameters for a specific AutoCAD Electrical

command. If the command does not have any parameters, the value
“none” displays.

Create new circuit

The icon name and symbol block name are saved in the active *.dat file (such
as ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT) once you click OK on the Icon Menu Wizard dialog

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 741

 box. The icon then displays at the end of the existing icon images in the
Symbol Preview window of the Insert Component dialog box.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box click Add, and then select New Circuit.
Click Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard. Select the menu
file to modify and click OK. On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box click Add,
and then select New Circuit.

You can also access this dialog box by right-clicking in the Symbol Preview
window of the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box and selecting Add Icon ➤ New
Circuit.

TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box,
Project Settings tab, Library and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic
Icon Menu File option. This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file.

Icon Details

Defines the icon name and image.

Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file.

Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description

text and the tool tip for the icon.

Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can
enter the image file name (or complete path) or select it
using one of the following methods:
■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon.
You can browse for .sld or .png images.
■ Pick: Selects an existing block name on the current
drawing to use as the image file name. For example,
if you select block HPB11, the image file name edit box
displays “HPB11.”
■ Active: (This is unavailable if the drawing is a new
drawing and has not been saved) Selects the active
drawing name to use as the Image file. For example,

742 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 if the active drawing name is “demo005,” then the
image file edit box has “demo005” listed as the file
name.

The browsed image is copied to the User folder if

wd_userckt_dir is disabled in the .env file.

NOTE The User folder can be overridden by the wd_user-

ckt_dir defined folder if the environment code is enabled
in the .env file.

However, you can enclose the image path in quotation

marks if you do not want the image copied to the User
folder and to save the complete path instead of the relative
path in the .dat file. The entered image file name can be
names like "PB1" or "CONTROL RELAY," file names with an
extension such as “pb1.png,” or it can follow the syntax
{slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}. For example,
"S2(pb)" or "S7(control_relay)."

NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid charac-

ters such as \ / : " ? < > | and only .png and .sld image files
are supported.

Create PNG from current screen Creates the .png image file from the current screen image.
image If the specified image file does not exist, this option is selec-
ted by default. If you do not want to create the icon from
the current drawing's displayed image, deselect the check
box.

NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file

name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or
.png)}” For example, “S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”. It is
also unavailable if the Image File edit box contains the im-
age file path instead of the image file name.

Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen image
is selected) Zooms in on the current screen image using
AutoCAD Pan command. Once you exit Pan mode and
press Enter, the dialog box redisplays so you can finish de-
fining the new icon.

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 743

Location (This appears once the Image file is specified) Indicates the
full path of the image file location where the new images
are created or the browsed images are copied to. If you
entered a file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file
(slide or .png)} for the image file, the path of the .dat file
or the WD_SLB folder displays here.

Circuit Drawing File

Defines the circuit file name that is created.

File Name Specifies the file name for the circuit. Enter a drawing file name to
use.

Location Displays the complete path of the new drawing file that is created.
The default user circuit folder is the User folder if the wd_usercktdir
code is disabled in the environment file. If wd_usercktdir is enabled,
the folder defined by this code is used as the user circuit folder.

Add existing circuit

The icon name and circuit drawing name are saved in the active *.dat file
(such as ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT) once you click OK on the Icon Menu Wizard
dialog box. The icon then displays at the end of the existing icon images in
the Symbol Preview window of the Insert Component dialog box.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box click Add, and then select Add Circuit.
From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box click Add, and then select Add Circuit.

You can also access this dialog box by right-clicking in the Symbol Preview
window of the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box and selecting Add Icon ➤ Add
Circuit.

744 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box,
Project Settings tab, Library and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic
Icon Menu File option. This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file.

Icon Details

Defines the icon name and image.

Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file.

Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text and
the tool tip for the icon.

Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can enter the
image file name (or complete path) or select it using one of the fol-
lowing methods:
■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon. You can
browse for .sld or .png images.
■ Pick: Selects an existing block name on the current drawing to
use as the image file name. For example, if you select block
HPB11, the image file name edit box displays “HPB11.”
■ Active: (This is unavailable if the drawing is a new drawing and
has not been saved) Selects the active drawing name to use as
the Image file. For example, if the active drawing name is
“demo005,” then the image file edit box has “demo005” listed
as the file name.

If the circuit drawing file name contains the path of the drawing file
referring to the User folder or the wd_userckt_dir defined folder, the
browsed image is copied to the User folder if wd_userckt_dir is dis-
abled in the .env file or the wd_userckt_dir defined folder if
wd_userckt_dir is enabled in the .env file.
If the circuit drawing file name contains the path of the drawing file
that doesn’t refer to the User or wd_userckt_dir defined folder, the
browsed image is copied to the Images folder and saved as a relative
path in the .dat file. However, you can enclose the image path in
quotation marks if you do not want the image copied to the Images
folder and to save the complete path instead of the relative path in
the .dat file. The entered image file name can be names like "PB1" or
"CONTROL RELAY," file names with an extension such as “pb1.png,”

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 745

 or it can follow the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}. For
example, "S2(pb)" or "S7(control_relay)."

NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid characters such
as \ / : " ? < > | and only .png and .sld image files are supported.

Create PNG from current Creates the .png image file from the current screen image. If the
screen image specified image file does not exist, this option is selected by default.
If you do not want to create the icon from the current drawing's dis-
played image, deselect the check box.

NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file name with
the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}” For example,
“S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”. It is also unavailable if the Image File
edit box contains the image file path instead of the image file name.

Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen image is selec-
ted) Zooms in on the current screen image using AutoCAD Pan
command. Once you exit Pan mode and press Enter, the dialog box
redisplays so you can finish defining the new icon.

Location (This appears once the Image file is specified) Indicates the full path
of the image file location where the new images are created or the
browsed images are copied to. If you entered a file name with the
syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image file, the
path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here.

Circuit Name to Insert

Defines the circuit to insert when you click the icon.

File Name Specifies the file name for the circuit. Enter a drawing file
name to use, click Browse to select a drawing, or click
Active to use the active drawing name as the circuit name.

Create new submenu

The icon name and symbol block name are saved in the active *.dat file (such
as ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT) once you click OK on the Icon Menu Wizard dialog

746 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 box. The icon then displays at the end of the existing icon images in the
Symbol Preview window of the Insert Component dialog box.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box click Add, and then select New Submenu.
From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box click Add, and then select New Submenu.

You can also access this dialog box by right-clicking in the Symbol Preview
window of the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box and selecting New Sub Menu.

TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box,
Project Settings tab, Library and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic
Icon Menu File option. This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file.

Icon Details

Defines the icon name and image.

Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file.

Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text and
the tool tip for the icon.

Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can enter the
image file name (or complete path) or select it using one of the fol-
lowing methods:
■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon. You can
browse for .sld or .png images.
■ Pick: Selects an existing block name on the current drawing to
use as the image file name. For example, if you select block
HPB11, the image file name edit box displays “HPB11.”
■ Active: (This is unavailable if the drawing is a new drawing and
has not been saved) Selects the active drawing name to use as
the Image file. For example, if the active drawing name is
“demo005,” then the image file edit box has “demo005” listed
as the file name.

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 747

 The browsed image is copied to the Images folder and saved as a
relative path in the .dat file. However, you can enclose the image
path in quotation marks if you do not want the image copied to the
Images folder and to save the complete path instead of the relative
path in the .dat file. The entered image file name can be names like
"PB1" or "CONTROL RELAY," file names with an extension such as
“pb1.png,” or it can follow the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide
or .png)}. For example, "S2(pb)" or "S7(control_relay)."

NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid characters such
as \ / : " ? < > | and only .png and .sld image files are supported.

Create PNG from current Creates the .png image file from the current screen image. If the
screen image specified image file does not exist, this option is selected by default.
If you do not want to create the icon from the current drawing's dis-
played image, deselect the check box.

NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file name with
the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}” For example,
“S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”. It is also unavailable if the Image File
edit box contains the image file path instead of the image file name.

Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen image is selec-
ted) Zooms in on the current screen image using AutoCAD Pan
command. Once you exit Pan mode and press Enter, the dialog box
redisplays so you can finish defining the new icon.

Location (This appears once the Image file is specified) Indicates the full path
of the image file location where the new images are created or the
browsed images are copied to. If you entered a file name with the
syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image file, the
path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here.

Submenu

This section displays the menu number of the submenu page and allows you
to define the submenu title.

Menu Number Displays the menu number of the submenu page for refer-
ence.

748 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

Menu Title Specifies the submenu title that is used in the Insert Com-
ponent dialog box. This is automatically specified but you
can edit the title if desired.

NOTE The submenu icon name and the menu title can be
different. For example, the icon name is Cable Markers but
the submenu title is Special Cable Markers.

Properties - main menu

Use this tool to modify the existing menu properties such as changing the
menu name. Your changes overwrite the information in the .dat file

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box right-click the menu file to modify (for example, JIC Symbols) and select
Properties.
From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box right-click the menu file to modify (for example, JIC Symbols) and select
Properties.

Name Specifies the name of the main menu. The default

changes depending on which menu you are work-
ing with (for example, JIC Symbols).

Menu File Displays the file name and full path of the menu
file. (for example, ace_jic_menu.dat).

Properties - component

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 749

 Use this tool to modify the existing symbol icon properties such as changing
the icon name, image or block name. Your changes overwrite the information
in the .dat file.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box right-click on the component icon to modify and select Properties.
From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box right-click on the component icon to modify and select Properties.

TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box,
Project Settings tab, Library and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic
Icon Menu File option. This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file.

Icon Details

Defines the icon name and image.

Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image

file.

Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the descrip-

tion text and the tool tip for the icon.

Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You
can enter the image file name (or complete path) or
select it using one of the following methods:
■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the
icon. You can browse for .sld or .png images.
■ Pick: Selects an existing block name on the cur-
rent drawing to use as the image file name. For
example, if you select block HPB11, the image
file name edit box displays “HPB11.”
■ Active: (This is unavailable if the drawing is a new
drawing and has not been saved) Selects the
active drawing name to use as the Image file.
For example, if the active drawing name is

750 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 “demo005,” then the image file edit box has
“demo005” listed as the file name.

The browsed image is copied to the Images folder

and saved as a relative path in the .dat file. However,
you can enclose the image path in quotation marks
if you do not want the image copied to the Images
folder and to save the complete path instead of the
relative path in the .dat file. The entered image file
name can be names like "PB1" or "CONTROL RELAY,"
file names with an extension such as “pb1.png,” or
it can follow the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide
or .png)}. For example, "S2(pb)" or "S7(control_re-
lay)."

NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid

characters such as \ / : " ? < > | and only .png and
.sld image files are supported.

Create PNG from current screen image (Available only when you edit the image file) Creates
the .png image file from the current screen image.
If the specified image file does not exist, this option
is selected by default. If you do not want to create
the icon from the current drawing's displayed image,
deselect the check box.

NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an im-

age file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file
(slide or .png)}” For example, “S2(pb)” or “S7(con-
trol_relay)”. It is also unavailable if the Image File edit
box contains the image file path instead of the image
file name.

Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen

image is selected) Zooms in on the current screen
image using AutoCAD Pan command. Once you exit
Pan mode and press Enter, the dialog box redisplays
so you can finish defining the new icon.

Location (This appears once the Image file is specified) Indic-

ates the full path of the image file location where the
new images are created or the browsed images are

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 751

 copied to. If you entered a file name with the syntax
{slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image
file, the path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder
displays here.

Block Name to Insert

Defines the symbol block that is inserted when you click the icon in the Insert
Component dialog box.

Block Name Specifies the symbol block name. The symbol's file name
can be typed into the edit box or you can enter it using
one of the following methods:
■ Browse: Finds an existing WBlocked drawing (*.dwg)
file to assign to the icon. In this case the complete path
of the drawing file is inserted in the edit box.
■ Pick: Selects an existing block on the current drawing
(for example, block recently created with Symbol
Builder). WBlocked version (.dwg) needs to exist.
■ Active: Inserts the active drawing as a block.

Properties - command
Use this tool to modify the existing symbol icon properties such as changing
the icon name, image or block name. Your changes overwrite the information
in the .dat file.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box right-click on the command icon to modify and select Properties.
From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box right-click on the command icon to modify and select Properties

TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box,
Project Settings tab, Library and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic
Icon Menu File option. This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file.

752 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 Icon Details

Defines the icon name and image.

Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file.

Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text and
the tool tip for the icon.

Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can enter the
image file name (or complete path) or select it using one of the fol-
lowing methods:
■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon. You can
browse for .sld or .png images.
■ Pick: Selects an existing block name on the current drawing to
use as the image file name. For example, if you select block
HPB11, the image file name edit box displays “HPB11.”
■ Active: (This is unavailable if the drawing is a new drawing and
has not been saved) Selects the active drawing name to use as
the Image file. For example, if the active drawing name is
“demo005,” then the image file edit box has “demo005” listed
as the file name.

The browsed image is copied to the Images folder and saved as a

relative path in the .dat file. However, you can enclose the image
path in quotation marks if you do not want the image copied to the
Images folder and to save the complete path instead of the relative
path in the .dat file. The entered image file name can be names like
"PB1" or "CONTROL RELAY," file names with an extension such as
“pb1.png,” or it can follow the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide
or .png)}. For example, "S2(pb)" or "S7(control_relay)."

NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid characters such
as \ / : " ? < > | and only .png and .sld image files are supported.

Create PNG from current (Available only when you edit the image file) Creates the .png image
screen image file from the current screen image. If the specified image file does not
exist, this option is selected by default. If you do not want to create
the icon from the current drawing's displayed image, deselect the
check box.

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 753

 NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file name with
the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}” For example,
“S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”. It is also unavailable if the Image File
edit box contains the image file path instead of the image file name.

Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen image is selec-
ted) Zooms in on the current screen image using AutoCAD Pan
command. Once you exit Pan mode and press Enter, the dialog box
redisplays so you can finish defining the new icon.

Location (This appears once the Image file is specified) Indicates the full path
of the image file location where the new images are created or the
browsed images are copied to. If you entered a file name with the
syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image file, the
path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here.

Command to Execute

Defines the command to execute when you click the icon.

NOTE If you select an AutoCAD Electrical command you must manually enter the
additional parameters as indicated.

Command Specifies to execute an AutoCAD command or AutoCAD Electrical

routine. You can enter the command name to execute with argu-
ments.
Click List to select from a list of AutoCAD Electrical commands for
panel and schematic multi-pole symbol inserts. This makes it easier
for you to build the appropriate command to insert a symbol.

Parameters Displays the command parameters for a specific AutoCAD Electrical

command. If the command does not have any parameters, the value
“none” displays.

Properties - circuit

754 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 Use this tool to modify the existing symbol icon properties such as changing
the icon name, image or block name. Your changes overwrite the information
in the .dat file.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box right-click on the circuit icon to modify and select Properties.
From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box right-click on the circuit icon to modify and select Properties.

TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box,
Project Settings tab, Library and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic
Icon Menu File option. This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file.

Icon Details

Defines the icon name and image.

Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file.

Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description

text and the tool tip for the icon.

Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can
enter the image file name (or complete path) or select it
using one of the following methods:
■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon.
You can browse for .sld or .png images.
■ Pick: Selects an existing block name on the current
drawing to use as the image file name. For example,
if you select block HPB11, the image file name edit box
displays “HPB11.”
■ Active: (This is unavailable if the drawing is a new
drawing and has not been saved) Selects the active
drawing name to use as the Image file. For example,
if the active drawing name is “demo005,” then the
image file edit box has “demo005” listed as the file
name.

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 755

 If the circuit drawing file name contains the path of the
drawing file referring to the User folder or the wd_user-
ckt_dir defined folder, the browsed image is copied to the
User folder if wd_userckt_dir is disabled in the .env file or
the wd_userckt_dir defined folder if wd_userckt_dir is en-
abled in the .env file. If the file does not exist, the Create
Circuit alert dialog box displays asking you if you want to
create the circuit.
If the circuit drawing file name contains the path of the
drawing file that doesn’t refer to the User or wd_userckt_dir
defined folder, the browsed image is copied to the Images
folder and saved as a relative path in the .dat file. However,
you can enclose the image path in quotation marks if you
do not want the image copied to the Images folder and to
save the complete path instead of the relative path in the
.dat file. The entered image file name can be names like
"PB1" or "CONTROL RELAY," file names with an extension
such as “pb1.png,” or it can follow the syntax {slide_library
or dll file (slide or .png)}. For example, "S2(pb)" or
"S7(control_relay)."

NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid charac-

ters such as \ / : " ? < > | and only .png and .sld image files
are supported.

Create PNG from current screen (Available only when you edit the image file) Creates the
image .png image file from the current screen image. If the spe-
cified image file does not exist, this option is selected by
default. If you do not want to create the icon from the
current drawing's displayed image, deselect the check box.

NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file

name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or
.png)}” For example, “S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”. It is
also unavailable if the Image File edit box contains the im-
age file path instead of the image file name.

Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen image
is selected) Zooms in on the current screen image using
AutoCAD Pan command. Once you exit Pan mode and
press Enter, the dialog box redisplays so you can finish de-
fining the new icon.

756 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

Location (This appears once the Image file is specified) Indicates the
full path of the image file location where the new images
are created or the browsed images are copied to. If you
entered a file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file
(slide or .png)} for the image file, the path of the .dat file
or the WD_SLB folder displays here.

Circuit Drawing File

Defines the circuit file name that is created.

File Name Specifies the file name for the circuit. Enter a drawing file name to
use.

Location Displays the complete path of the new drawing file that is created.
The default user circuit folder is the User folder if the wd_usercktdir
code is disabled in the environment file. If wd_usercktdir is enabled,
the folder defined by this code is used as the user circuit folder.

Properties - submenu
Use this tool to modify the existing symbol icon properties such as changing
the icon name, image or block name. Your changes overwrite the information
in the .dat file.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box right-click on the submenu to modify and select Properties
From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard.
Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog
box right-click on the submenu to modify and select Properties.

TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box,
Project Settings tab, Library and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic
Icon Menu File option. This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file.

Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard | 757

 Icon Details

Defines the icon name and image.

Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file.

Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text and
the tool tip for the icon.

Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can enter the
image file name (or complete path) or select it using one of the fol-
lowing methods:
■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon. You can
browse for .sld or .png images.
■ Pick: Selects an existing block name on the current drawing to
use as the image file name. For example, if you select block
HPB11, the image file name edit box displays “HPB11.”
■ Active: (This is unavailable if the drawing is a new drawing and
has not been saved) Selects the active drawing name to use as
the Image file. For example, if the active drawing name is
“demo005,” then the image file edit box has “demo005” listed
as the file name.

The browsed image is copied to the Images folder and saved as a

relative path in the .dat file. However, you can enclose the image
path in quotation marks if you do not want the image copied to the
Images folder and to save the complete path instead of the relative
path in the .dat file. The entered image file name can be names like
"PB1" or "CONTROL RELAY," file names with an extension such as
“pb1.png,” or it can follow the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide
or .png)}. For example, "S2(pb)" or "S7(control_relay)."

NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid characters such
as \ / : " ? < > | and only .png and .sld image files are supported.

Create PNG from current (Available only when you edit the image file) Creates the .png image
screen image file from the current screen image. If the specified image file does not
exist, this option is selected by default. If you do not want to create
the icon from the current drawing's displayed image, deselect the
check box.

758 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file name with
the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}” For example,
“S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”. It is also unavailable if the Image File
edit box contains the image file path instead of the image file name.

Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen image is selec-
ted) Zooms in on the current screen image using AutoCAD Pan
command. Once you exit Pan mode and press Enter, the dialog box
redisplays so you can finish defining the new icon.

Location (This appears once the Image file is specified) Indicates the full path
of the image file location where the new images are created or the
browsed images are copied to. If you entered a file name with the
syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image file, the
path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here.

Submenu

This section displays the menu number of the submenu page and allows you
to define the submenu title.

Menu Number Displays the menu number of the submenu page for refer-
ence.

Menu Title Specifies the submenu title that is used in the Insert Com-
ponent dialog box. This is automatically specified but you
can edit the title if desired.

NOTE The submenu icon name and the menu title can be
different. For example, the icon name is Cable Markers but
the submenu title is Special Cable Markers.

Use alternate icon menus

AutoCAD Electrical defaults to icon menu ACE_<standard>_MENU.DAT (where
<standard>= JIC, IEC, AS, GB, HYD, JIS, PID, or PNEU) for schematic symbols
and ACE_PANEL_MENU.DAT for panel symbols. These menu files are found
in the C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCADElectrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support

Use alternate icon menus | 759

 subdirectory. You can create alternate or project-specific icon menus and have
AutoCAD Electrical automatically use them instead of these defaults.
An icon menu can be tied to a project so that when the project is active,
AutoCAD Electrical references that special icon menu instead of the AutoCAD
Electrical normal menu. The alternate menu's full path and file name is saved
in the project's .wdp file. You can save an alternate menu for schematic symbols
and one for panel symbols.
Assign specific icon menu files to a project

1 Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager.

2 Make sure the desired project is the active project, right-click on the
project name, and select Properties.

3 In the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box, click the plus
sign (+) next to Schematic Icon Menu File or Panel Icon Menu File. Click
inside the edit box to change the icon menu's path, click Browse to search
for and select an icon menu, or click Default to use the default icon menu.

4 Click OK.

NOTE If you make custom images or libraries for the menu, copy them to the
same subdirectory as the menu file since AutoCAD Electrical looks for menu images
in the active icon menu file's directory.

Overview of the icon menu file

AutoCAD Electrical supplies several default icon (.dat) menus for schematic
symbols and one for panel symbols. For example, the JIC schematic icon menu
is defined by the contents of file ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT file and the panel menu
is ACE_PANEL_MENU.DAT. These menu files are found in the \Documents
and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical
200x\{release number}\{country code}\Support subdirectory. The other icon
menu files include: ACE_AS_MENU, ACE_GB_MENU, ACE_JIS_MENU,
ACE_IEC_MENU, ACE_HYD_MENU, ACE_PID_MENU, ACE_PNEU_MENU
and WD_ABECAD.
There may be times when you want to bypass the Icon Menu Wizard and edit
the .dat text file directly using any text editor (such as Microsoft Notepad). It

760 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 is important to maintain the menu file structure, otherwise your menu may
not activate properly.
Here are the first few lines of the first page and a submenu (JIC: Push Buttons)
of the ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT file. Refer to this in the following sections.
**M0
D0
JIC: Schemaitc Symbols
Push Buttons |s2(s_pb)|$S=M3
Selector Switches |s2(s_ss)|$S=M6
Limit Switches |s2(s_zs)|$S=M8
**M3
D5W
JIC: Push Buttons
Push Button NO |s2(shpB11)|HPB11
Push Button NC |s2(shpB12)|HPB12

NOTE You can have an unlimited number of icons on each menu page. Prior to
AutoCAD Electrical 2008, you were limited to 24 icons per page.

Icon menu's page structure

Each menu page starts with a menu number line preceded by two asterisks
(**). The next line is an AutoCAD Electrical code, which defines the menu
page format (such as how many rows, how many icon buttons per row). This
is used for .dat files that are used prior to AutoCAD Electrical 2008. The next
line is the title, with optional column labels, for the menu page. The rest of
the lines define the information for each icon button on the menu page. These
icons can either launch a command, insert a component or open a submenu.

**M0 Menu number

JIC Symbols Main menu title. In the Insert Component dialog

box, this is the main menu title in the Menu tree
selection view and is also displayed above the
Symbol Preview window of the dialog box.

Overview of the icon menu file | 761

Push Buttons Description text of the icon. This is also the tooltip
for the submenu page, command, or component
to insert. In this example, clicking Push Buttons in
the Insert Component dialog box opens a submenu.

s2(s_pb) Image information with the syntax: slide_lib-

rary_name(slide or .png). In this example the slide
library (or resource dll library) is “s2” and the slide
file (or .png image) is “s_pb.”

NOTE If both s_pb.png and s_pb.sld exist, Auto-

CAD Electrical searches for the .png file first. If not
found, looks for the s_pb.sld file.

$S=M3 Submenu trigger. The syntax is: $S=menu number.

In this example, menu 3 is used for push buttons.
This is used to develop the Menu tree structure in
the Insert Component dialog box.

Icon function - submenu trigger

**M3 Submenu number

D5W (Used for .dat files prior to AutoCAD Electrical 2008)

Indicates the number of rows in the menu. In
AutoCAD Electrical 2008, you can have any number
of rows or columns in your menu. This value is only
used to structure .dat files in older versions of
AutoCAD Electrical.

JIC: Push Buttons Submenu page title. This displays below the main
menu (JIC Symbols) in the Menu tree structure view
of the Insert Component dialog box.

Add submenu pages

Enter the definition for any new submenu pages at the bottom of the .dat file.
A new Special Symbols submenu page added using the Icon Menu Wizard will
add the following lines of text:
**M101

762 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

 SPECIALSYMBOLS
Explanation:

**M101 Menu page number. User-created menu pages

should begin at 100 since AutoCAD Electrical uses
1-99 for its own use.

SPECIALSYMBOLS Menu page title

Icon function - insert component

Push Button N.O. Description text of the icon. This is also the tool tip
for the component to insert. In this example, click-
ing Push Button N.O. in the Insert Component
dialog box inserts the component in the drawing.

s2(shpB11) Image information with the syntax: slide_lib-

rary_name(slide or .png). In this example the slide
library (or resource dll library) is “s2” and the slide
file (or .png image) is “shpB11.”

HPB11 Specifies the block name. The block name is

searched in the symbol library search path as
defined by the Project Properties dialog box and is
inserted into the drawing.

Each entry consists of three parts separated by "|" characters. The first part will
be the text that is displayed in the Menu tree structure view or as a tool tip in
the Symbol Preview window. The second part is the slide (or .png) name. You
should include the path to the .SLD. If the slide is contained within a slide
library (or resource dll library) the format here is library_name (slide_name).
The third part is the actual icon function.The function can be a symbol name
to insert, a sub-menu trigger, or a command. A line that looks like this can be
added by the menu wizard to insert a special switch:
Special Switch | hzs11.sld| HZS11

Icon function - execute command

Clicking on an icon in the icon menu can also execute an AutoCAD Electrical
command. The following example shows the syntax for commands:

Overview of the icon menu file | 763

 3 Pole Disconnect |s1(shds13)|$c=wd_3unit HDS11

3 Pole Disconnect Description text of the icon. This is also the tool tip
for the command. In this example, clicking 3 Pole
Disconnect in the Insert Component dialog box
runs a command.

s1(shds13) Image information with the syntax: slide_lib-

rary_name(slide or .png). In this example the slide
library (or resource dll library) is “s1” and the slide
file (or .png image) is “shds13.”

$C=wd_3unit Code that executes a command. The syntax is:

$C=command name {command parameters}. In
this example, the command wd_3unit is run when
the icon is clicked.

HDS11 Specifies the command parameters.

764 | Chapter 12 Icon Menus

BOM and Catalogs
13
In this chapter
■ Use catalog tables
■ Overview of the catalog
database table structure
■ Use the merge utility
■ Catalog Assignment
■ Contact Quantity/Pin List
Lookup

765
Use catalog tables
Sample catalog information is furnished with the default AutoCAD Electrical
installation. The information is held in tables in an Microsoft Access Database
file (.mdb) which are populated with sample vendor data. You must expand
and modify these tables to meet your specific BOM reporting needs. Use tools
provided with AutoCAD Electrical or through the use of a database program
that can read/write the Access file format.
The .mdb file is a single file that is named <project>_cat.mdb or
default_cat.mdb. If the project-specific.mdb file is used, it must be in the same
subdirectory as the <project>.wdp file is located. Here is the AutoCAD Electrical
search sequence:

■ 1st choice -- <project>_cat.mdb (in project's subdirectory)

■ 2nd choice -- default_cat.mdb (in project's subdirectory)

■ 3rd choice -- default_cat.mdb (in user subdirectory)

■ 4th choice -- default_cat.mdb (in catalog's subdirectory)

Catalog information can be carried on parent or stand-alone components that

have MANUFACTURER, CATALOG, and optional ASSEMBLYCODE attributes.
Assigning catalog information to a component's attributes can be done at
component insertion time or any time later during an edit of the component.

Catalog table naming conventions

Each primary or stand-alone component type can have an associated table in

your Access mdb file. This approach is taken for both performance reasons
and to exclude invalid choices (for example, you can't assign a blue press-test
pilot part number to a standard red pilot light symbol). This means that there
can be multiple catalog tables for the same component family. Alternately,
all master test and all neon pilot lights (of all colors) might be combined into
a single catalog table named LT. AutoCAD Electrical determines what the
default catalog lookup table name should be based on the WDBLKNAM
attribute.
The following example references a custom master control relay with block
name “HCR1_MC_PWR.”

766 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

If your symbol does not carry the WDBLKNAM attribute:

1 The symbol is checked for the WDBLKNAM attribute (or Xdata). It is not
found.

2 The block name is read (“HCR1_MC_PWR”) minus its first character (the
orientation character “H” or “V”). The default_cat.mdb file is searched
for a table named “CR1_MC_PWR.”

3 If this table exists, it is used. If this table does not exist and the block
name is 8 characters or more, AutoCAD Electrical starts removing
characters from the block name until there are only 7 characters left,
looking for a table name match with each character removed. Table names
that it would look for in sequence would be “CR1_MC_PW”, “CR1_MC_P”,
“CR1_MC_.”

4 If there isn’t a match on the last table name, AutoCAD Electrical checks
for the family-specific table (CR). This is the second and third character
of the block name.

5 If this table exists, it is used. If it does not exist, a MISC_CAT table is

looked for if the active project’s properties are set up to use this catch-all
table.

6 If all of these items fail, AutoCAD Electrical stops looking (if running a
report) or prompts you to add a table to the default_cat.mdb file (if you
are inserting or editing a component).

If your symbol includes the invisible WDBLKNAM attribute with a value of

“HCRM”:

1 The symbol is checked for the WDBLKNAM attribute (or Xdata). It is

found. The attribute’s value of “HCRM” is used instead of the block name
and proceeds to step 2.

2 The leading “H” or “V” character is removed. The default_cat.mdb file

searches for a table named “CRM.”

3 If this table exists, it is used. If the table does not exist and the attribute
value is 8 characters or more, AutoCAD Electrical starts removing
characters from the attribute value until there are only 7 characters left,
looking for a table name match with each character removed. (In this
case, characters are not removed.)

4 If there isn’t a match on the last table name, AutoCAD Electrical checks
for a family-specific table (CR). This is the second and third character of
the original WDBLKNAM value (HCRM).

Use catalog tables | 767

 5 If this table exists, it is used. If it does not exist, a MISC_CAT table is
looked for if the active project’s properties are set up to use this catch-all
table.

6 If all of these items fail, AutoCAD Electrical stops looking (if running a
report) or prompts you to add a table to the default_cat.mdb file (if you
are inserting or editing a component).

If you want your custom symbol to go to table “CRM” in the catalog database
file instead of the existing table “CR” you must:

1 Add the WDBLKNAM attribute to your master control relay coil library
symbols with a value of “HCRM” or “VCRM” (the orientation does not
matter).

2 Manually add the CRM table in your catalog lookup database file using
Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Add Table to Catalog Database or Microsoft Access.

NOTE AutoCAD Electrical lways goes to the fixed table names for PLC I/O modules
(PLCIO), terminals (TRMS) and cable markers (W0). Panel layout symbols must
always use the WDBLKNAM attribute or Xdata without the leading H or V character.

Family tables in the default_cat.mdb

The list of tables available in the default_cat.mdb is shown in the following

table. All tables are family-specific and 1 table is created for each family.

Family Code/Table Description

Name

_LISTBOX_DEF Allows starting MFG/TYPE/RATING combinations to be predefined

for each catalog lookup table when AutoCAD Electrical would normally
default to the values given in the first record of the selected catalog
lookup table. See Overview of the LISTBOX_DEF catalog database
table (page 788).

_PINLIST Default pin list data table. AutoCAD Electrical also contains manufac-
turer-specific pin list tables that have the same format as the _PINLIST
table. The naming convention for manufacturer-specific tables is:
_PINLIST_AB or _PINLIST_AROMAT. AutoCAD Electrical first searches
manufacturer-specific tables; if not found, it then searches the default
_PINLIST table. See Use pin lists. (page 793)

768 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

Family Code/Table Description
Name

_TERMPROPS Default terminal properties data table. AutoCAD Electrical also contains
manufacturer-specific terminal properties tables that have the same
format as the _TERMPROPS table. The naming convention for manu-
facturer-specific tables is: _TERMPROPS_AB or _TERMPROPS_AROMAT.
AutoCAD Electrical first searches manufacturer-specific tables; if not
found, it then searches the default _TERMPROPS table. See Edit ter-
minal properties database. (page 630)

_W0_CBLWIRES Cable conductors. See Edit the cable conductor database (page 542).

AM Ammeters

AN Buzzers, horns, bells

CB Circuit breakers

C0 Connectors/pins

CR Control relays

DN Device networks

DR Drives

DS Disconnect switches

EN Enclosures/hardware

FM Frequency meters

FU Fuses

LR Latching relays

LS Limit switches

Use catalog tables | 769

Family Code/Table Description
Name

LT Lights, pilot lights

MISC Miscellaneous

MO Motors

MS Motor starters/contactors

NP Nameplates

OL Overloads

PB Push buttons

PE Photo switches

PLCIO Programmable logic controllers

PM Power meters

PS Pressure switches

PW Power supplies

PX Proximity switches

RE Resistors

SS Selector switches

SU Surge suppressors

SW Toggle switches

770 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

Family Code/Table Description
Name

TD Timer relays

TRMS Terminal blocks

TS Temperature switches

VM Volt meters

WO Cables, multi-conductor cables

WW Wire ways

XF Transformers

Modify or expand catalog tables

You can edit entries in a catalog table or even add new catalog items on-the-fly
using AutoCAD Electrical.

1 Force AutoCAD Electrical to reference the desired catalog table. Do this

by either inserting a new component related to the catalog table you
want to edit or by picking an existing component of that type to edit
(using the Edit Component tool).
For example, if you want to add some new components to the catalog
table for standard red pilot lights (LT1R) then either use AutoCAD
Electrical to insert a new red pilot light symbol or Edit an existing red
pilot light symbol.

2 From the Insert/Edit dialog box, select Catalog lookup. Now you have
triggered AutoCAD Electrical to open the desired catalog table.

3 Select Add New to add a new item or select Edit to edit the selected item's
database record. AutoCAD Electrical displays the new or existing catalog
record in a dialog.

4 Make the necessary changes and click OK to exit the Edit dialog box.

To add a new table to the catalog file, you can either insert a new component
that will trigger AutoCAD Electrical to ask permission to create the table or

Use catalog tables | 771

 you can do it from the Electrical pulldown menu. Select Projects ➤ Reports
➤ Insert Spreadsheet Data to Table.

Move the catalog database file

Click Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the project name
and select Settings to find the location of the default_cat.mdb file. If you want
to move this file to some other directory, such as a shared network drive, then
you must edit a small text file to tell AutoCAD Electrical where to look.

1 Move the file to your new drive:directory.

2 Exit AutoCAD. Edit the ".env" file (use the Settings option on the Project
Manager to find the full path) with a text editor like WordPad or Notepad.

3 Find the WD_CAT entry. Change the line to point to the new location
for the catalog file. Let's say that you've moved them to
n:/electric/catalogs/ on your network drive. Change this line to:
WD_CAT,n:/electric/catalogs/,AutoCAD Electrical catalog file.

4 Save and exit the file.

NOTE AutoCAD Electrical looks for a project specific MDB file first, called
<project>_cat.mdb, in the project's subdirectory.

Parts catalog
Opens the component's catalog database from which you can manually enter
or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. Search the database for a specific
catalog item to assign to the selected component. Database queries are set up
in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog with the database hits listed in the
dialog's main window.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and specify
the insertion point on the drawing. Click Catalog Data: Lookup.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component. Select the component
type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. Click Catalog
Data: Lookup.
Click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit. Click Catalog
Data: Lookup.
From the Components menu, select Edit Component and select the component
to edit. Click Catalog Data: Lookup.

772 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

 You can sort the catalog database information by clicking on the column
headings.

Manufacturer/Type/Style Sorts the catalog database by manufacturer type,

component type, and style.

Show list ordered by catalog part number Sorts the catalog entries by catalog number. By de-
fault, the entries are shown in the order they appear
in the catalog database.

Subassembly values in pulldowns Displays subassemblies in the catalog display. If there

are any unique items in the list, they are added to
the pull-down choices at the top of the dialog box.

Symbol name filtering ON Filters the symbol names using the WDBLKNAM
(page 780)value. If this is selected, records containing
a WDBLKNAM value that does not match the symbol
block name do not appear in the catalog list. If this
option is not selected, the query ignores the check
on the WDBLKNAM field and returns all catalog in-
formation.

Web/View Displays more information about your component

than can be held in the catalog database such as
pictures or specifications. Use the 15th field in the
catalog database to set up the WEBLINK. If the
WEBLINK field for the selected part is a Web URL,
your Internet browser launches and displays it. If it
is an image file, pdf, spreadsheet, or some other
document type, the application associated with that
file's extension (for example, "Open With...") launches
and displays the file's contents.

Catalog Check Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the

result. This is enabled if the selected component
contains catalog data.

Cable Conductor List View/Edit (Available for cable markers only) Opens the Edit
Catalog Conductor List dialog box. Edit the cable
conductor database table (_W0_CBLWIRES) for the
selected Manufacturer and Catalog combination.

Use catalog tables | 773

 You can delete or change existing cables or add new
ones to the list.

Add Provides a template, prefilled with default values, for

a new catalog item that is added to the catalog
database file.

Edit Edits an existing catalog record. Select the catalog

record to edit from the Parts Catalog dialog box and
make any changes in the Edit Catalog Record dialog
box.

Component Creates a component-specific catalog table. The

name of this catalog table matches the component's
block name (minus the "H" or "V" first letter). For
example, both horizontal and vertical versions of a
standard, N.O. push-button ("HPB11" and "VPB11")
reference the same component-specific catalog look
up table "PB11".

NOTE If you select to create a component-specific

catalog table, and then cancel out of the dialog box
before adding any data to the table, the blank table
is deleted.

Miscellaneous References a table called "MISC_CAT." This general

catalog table is set up in the .mdb file with all com-
ponent types in it. If found, this catalog information
displays in the dialog for component catalog number
selection.

Other Assigns a different lookup table to use. Pick from the

list of existing tables or manually enter the table
name. You can also enter a catalog number (wild-
cards are accepted) and find the table that references
the catalog number.

Add or edit catalog record

774 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

 Provides a template, prefilled with default values, for a new catalog item that
is added to the catalog database file. You can also edit an existing catalog
record.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and specify
the insertion point on the drawing. Click Catalog Data: Lookup. In the Parts
Catalog dialog box, click Add or Edit.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component. Select the component
type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. Click Catalog
Data: Lookup. In the Parts Catalog dialog box, click Add or Edit.
Click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit. Click Catalog
Data: Lookup. In the Parts Catalog dialog box, click Add or Edit.
From the Components menu, select Edit Component and select the component
to edit. Click Catalog Data: Lookup. In the Parts Catalog dialog box, click Add
or Edit.

AutoCAD Electrical uses the first 10 fields for its own use plus reserves an
additional 3 user fields for your use. You can insert additional fields, but
AutoCAD Electrical ignores them when it constructs various reports. Below
are the character fields accessed by AutoCAD Electrical (they must appear in
this order in the database records).

Catalog Specifies the catalog number. You can also specify the
number of parts to add to the database file. A blank Count
field indicates a quantity of 1.

Description Specifies the optional description text for the catalog part.

Query Fields Specifies the manufacturer, type, and color for the part.

Contacts Specifies the contacts assigned to the part.

Miscellaneous Specifies miscellaneous text to assign to the part.

User 1,2,3 Specifies user information. AutoCAD Electrical provides 3

blank user fields for your use. Each can be a maximum of
24 characters wide and are extracted into BOM reports
along with all of the other fields.

Use catalog tables | 775

Assembly Code Specifies the code to flag that this item has subassembly
items. "As main- ➤ subassembly" activates the Assembly
Code edit box. Use a unique name code to link this main
catalog item with other subassembly items. This code can
be up to 60 characters. Spaces are allowed.

Assembly List Specifies the code to flag this is a subassembly item of a

main item. To enter the ASSEMBLYLIST value, select "As
subassembly" and enter the exact name of the ASSEMBLY-
CODE value carried by its main component. You can select
the ASSEMBLYCODE list switch to speed up the process.

Text Value Specifies optional user-defined RATING/misc attribute val-

ues. This field is used to vector text values to specific attrib-
utes on the edited component.

Weblink Specifies the .pdf file or Web URL to associate to the com-
ponent. If the Weblink entry is a Web URL, your Internet
browser displays it. If it is an image file, .pdf, spreadsheet,
or some other document type, then the application associ-
ated with that file's extension (for example, "Open With...")
displays the file.

NOTE For ".pdf" display, you can include the page number
to display upon document open. Add a space and the page
number after the .pdf file name in the WEBLINK field value
(for example, c:\\rockwell\\700series.pdf 13).

WDBLKNAM Specifies the schematic block name (used for catalog

lookup - i.e. PB11, CR) of the catalog record. This serves
as a filtration of the catalog records based on the schematic
block name. This field is used as the first filter when opening
up the catalog lookup window for the selection of catalog
numbers. This filter provides the mechanism to remove
invalid selections from the catalog lookup window, much
like the component-specific tables. Use a comma to separ-
ate the symbol block names.

List Lists existing values for each option. AutoCAD Electrical

catalog lookups work most efficiently when field values that
are meant to be the same are exactly the same, both in

776 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

 spelling and capitalization. The list box beside each field
helps maintain consistency as you add new catalog items.
AutoCAD Electrical does a quick scan of the existing catalog
file, collects and then displays a listing of all of the different
field values it finds in the catalog. If one of the displayed
values works for your new catalog item, then select it from
this list (instead of typing in a brand new value).

All upper case Displays all of the specified values in all upper case.

Overview of the catalog database table

structure
AutoCAD Electrical uses the first 10 fields for its own plus reserves an additional
3 user fields for your use. You can insert additional fields beyond the fourteenth
one if you want, but they are ignored when generating reports. Here are the
15 fields accessed by AutoCAD Electrical. (They must appear in this order in
the database records.)

Field Name Width Description

CATALOG 60 Catalog number

.

MANUFACTURER 24 First query field - manufacturer code; abbrevi-

ations are allowed.

DESCRIPTION 150 Generic description.

TYPE 100 Second query field (field name varies based on

table name).

RATING 100 Third query field (field name varies based on

table name).

MISCELLANEOUS1 100 First miscellaneous text field (header cell is based

on the component family).

Overview of the catalog database table structure | 777

Field Name Width Description

MISCELLANEOUS2 100 Second miscellaneous text field (header cell is

based on the component family).

ASSEMBLYCODE 60 Code to flag that this item has subassembly

items. Use a unique name code to link this main
catalog item with other subassembly items.
Spaces are allowed.

ASSEMBLYLIST 24 Code to flag this is a subassembly item of a main

item.

ASSEMBLYQUANTITY 8 Subassembly quantity (blank = quantity of 1).

USER1 100 Field #1 for user's use.

USER2 100 Field #2 for user's use.

USER3 100 Field #3 for user's use.

TEXTVALUES 255 Optional user-defined RATING/miscellaneous

attribute values.

WEBLINK 255 Associate .pdf files or Web URL to component.

WDBLKNAM 60 AutoCAD Electrical block name minus the first

character of the block name since the first char-
acter is the orientation of block (H= Horizontal,
V= Vertical).

TEXTVALUES rating and miscellaneous attribute value assignment

An optional fourteenth field named TEXTVALUES can be added to any catalog

lookup table. This field can be used to vector text values to specific attributes
on the edited component. The format for the text data encoded into this field
is:
<attribute tag name1>=<text value>;<attribute tag name2>=<text value>

778 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

For example, a current catalog entry needs to annotate the component block
attributes RATING1 and RATING2 with "ON DELAY" and "5-30 sec"
respectively. Insert the following text string into the TEXTVALUES edit box:
RATING1=ON DELAY;RATING2=5-30 sec

TIP The Rating attributes should be common among all component types to make
the population of the catalog database easier.

During component insertion or edit, if you make a catalog selection that comes
with a non-blank TEXTVALUES, AutoCAD Electrical breaks apart the field
value and searches for the target attributes on the edited symbol. If found,
the component's target attributes are updated with the encoded data pulled
from the user-selected catalog lookup record. To use this value:

1 Add this field to any catalog database table if it doesn't already exist.

2 Trigger AutoCAD Electrical to display the target catalog lookup table.

(Insert a component and then select Catalog Lookup on the Insert/Edit
Component dialog box.)

3 On the Parts Catalog dialog box, pick the appropriate part number and
click Edit.

4 On the Edit Record dialog box, type a value into the TEXTVALUES edit
box and click OK.
If the TEXTVALUES field did not exist in the selected catalog table, it is
added to each record in the database. If it did exist, your new value is
saved in the TEXTVALUES field for the selected catalog number's record.

WEBLINK assignment

Sometimes you may want to see more information about your component
than can be held in the catalog database. For example, you may want to see
a picture of the item or get its specifications. Use the fifteenth field in the
catalog database to set up the WEBLINK to do this. If the WEBLINK field for
the selected part is a web URL, your Internet browser launches and displays
it. If it is an image file, pdf, spreadsheet, or some other document type, the
application associated with that file's extension (for example, "Open With...")
starts and displays the file's contents.

NOTE For PDF display, you can include the page number to display upon
document open. Add a space and the page number after the pdf filename in the
WEBLINK field value (for example, C:\\rockwell\\700series.pdf 13). This does
not work for PDF files loaded across the web.

Overview of the catalog database table structure | 779

 A dimmed WEBLINK edit box in the Edit Record dialog box means that the
catalog lookup table does not have a WEBLINK field defined as the fifteenth
field. If dimmed, you can add this field by manually adding it to your own
copy of Microsoft Access.
A Weblink assignment can show up in the Surf dialog box. If you select a
parent component to surf on and it carries a catalog assignment that references
a Weblink value, it displays in the surf selection dialog box along with the
other related component references. Double-clicking the Weblink reference
launches your browser or appropriate application.

NOTE Picking on a child component to initialize in the Surf dialog box will not
display a Weblink referenced by a related parent. You must pick on the parent
carrying the catalog assignment.

WDBLKNAM assignment

The WDBLKNAM value filters the symbol names that display in the Parts
catalog dialog box. The Symbol Name Filtering option on the Parts Catalog
dialog box suppresses what data displays when a catalog lookup is run for a
particular component. If you perform a catalog lookup on a symbol with block
name “HTD1_xxx” and the Symbol Name Filtering option is selected, the only
records that display are those listed in the TD table of the catalog database
file that have a blank WDBLKNAM value or a value in the WDBLKNAM field
that matches your symbol’s block name. For example, performing a catalog
lookup on an on-delay coil (HTD1N.dwg or VTD1N.dwg) displays all blank
WDBLKNAM entries and all entries that include “TD1N” somewhere in the
WDBLKNAM field. If this option is not selected, the query ignores the check
on the WDBLKNAM field and returns all catalog information.
You can do one of the following to determine how your catalog content is
filtered:

1 Add your block name to all of the WDBLKNAM fields in the catalog table.
Using the example above, you would add the block name to the TD table.

2 Add an invisible WDBLKNAM attribute to your symbol. Using the example

above, name your symbol “HTD1F” for an off-delay coil or “HTD1N” for
an on-delay coil.

3 Rename your block with the appropriate prefix (for example, “VTD1F”)
followed by a substring “$$” and any other suffix to make the block name
unique. AutoCAD Electrical’s catalog lookup sees the “$$” and assumes
that this and anything after it is ignored. It treats your symbol as if the
block name were just the basic name of “VTD1F.”

780 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

 TIP Option 2 or 3 is preferred.

Use the merge utility

Use the Merge Utility to migrate database and panel symbol data from previous
versions of AutoCAD Electrical to a newer version. You can merge PLC, catalog,
and footprint databases, or panel drawing files. A backup of the destination
database is created before merging, however backup files are not created during
panel content (folder) merges. The backup database file is created in the same
directory as the original file and its name is the same as the original, but with
the extension ".bak." Each run of this utility with the same destination database
creates a new backup file, which does not overwrite any existing backup files.
After the comparison of the two databases/folders is complete, the data is
copied to the destination database/folder. Records remain in their respective
tables in the destination database, unless otherwise specified in the catalog
mapping file. After the merge is complete, a Merge Report dialog box displays,
showing the full path of the report files. The report files contain detailed
information about the merge. These report files are saved in the same directory
as the destination database/ panel folder and are overwritten for each
subsequent merge.
If the selected databases/folders are not compatible for merging, the following
is displayed:

The file does not exist This displays if the specified source or destination
database file does not exist.

Invalid file format The selected file must be a database file (.mdb).

Invalid tables found in the source/destin- This displays if the source or destination database is
ation database not a compatible database.

Destination database/folder is the same The specified source and destination data-
as source database/folder bases/folders cannot be the same. You must select
another database/folder if you get this alert.

No drawing files found in source folder The specified source panel folder must exist and
contain drawing files before the merge can take
place.

Use the merge utility | 781

Folder cannot be written to, might be The destination folder cannot be in the read-only
Read-Only state.

Table mapping file for catalog merges

You can choose to impose an input mapping file to direct where the data will
be placed inside of the catalog destination database. The mapping file (named
ACEDBMergeUtil.map) is located in the same directory as the main executable
program.

NOTE There are additional mappings for vendors, catalog numbers, and fields.
See the mapping file for information on these mappings.

To consolidate all the timer relay (TD) tables into one table, use the mapping
file. It controls which tables to take from the source database and place into
the destination database under a single table.
[Table map]
; <SRC_TABLE>=<DEST_TABLE>
TD1N=TD
TD1NT=TD
TD1NF=TD
TD1FT=TD
Wildcard mapping for catalog database tables is allowed on the source (left)
database side of the mapping file. For example, TD*=TD. When the table or
wildcard mapping is used and the source database table is component-specific,
the merge utility places the table name into the WDBLKNAM field of the
destination database. This provides the symbol name for the initial filter used
in the catalog lookup window.

782 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

Merge files
Upon installation, you should run this utility to merge old database and/or
symbol content into your newer version.

1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Merge

Utility tool.

2 Click the Merge Utility tool.

3 Select the content to merge (multiple selections are allowed).

4 Click Next.

5 Select the database from which to copy files. Click Browse to

browse for a previous version of an AutoCAD Electrical data-
base.

6 Select the database that the information will be copied to.

7 Select to merge only new records/drawings (which will keep

duplicate records in the destination database) or to merge all
of the database/folder information.
If you select to merge all of the database/folder information
for Catalog databases, you can also specify to maintain user
fields, the text value field, or the Web link field.

8 Click Next (if you selected to merge multiple databases) or

click Finish.
A status window opens listing the tables or folders that are
being merged, how many records are being added or copied,
and the number of records to still be processed.

9 Review the Merge Report and click OK.

Merge utility
Copies database/folder data listed in the Source into the Destination. A backup
of the destination database is created before merging, however backup files
are not created during panel content (folder) merges. The backup database
file is created in the same directory as the original file and is named the same
as the original, except that it has the extension ".bak." Each run of this utility

Use the merge utility | 783

 with the same destination database creates a new backup file, which will not
overwrite any existing backup files.

NOTE The specified source and destination databases/folders cannot be the same.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Merge Utility tool.
From the Projects menu, select Extras ➤ Merge Utility.

Select items to merge

Specifies the content to merge (multiple selections are allowed).

PLC Content merges the PLC database (ace_plc.mdb)

Catalog Content merges the catalog database (default_cat.mdb)

Footprint Content merges the footprint database (footprint_look-

up.mdb)

Panel Content merges the panel symbol content (inside the panel
folder)

Next is disabled until you select content to merge. The subsequent dialogs
appear in the order of this list, depending on what content was selected for
the merge.

Source

Specifies the database/folder from which to copy the data. This is generally
database or symbol content from previous versions of AutoCAD Electrical.
You can browse for the database/folder or type the location and filename in
the box.

Destination

Specifies the current working database/folder, to which the source content is

merged. The default working path to the database/folder (in the folders

784 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

 specified for the database or panel symbol content) is automatically filled in.
You can browse for alternative databases/folders to copy the records into.

Keep Duplicate Records in Destination Database/Folder (Merge New

Only)

Copies only new records from the source database/folder into the destination
database/folder when duplicate items are found in the destination
database/folder.

Allow Duplicate Records to Overwrite Destination Database/Folder

Copies all records from the source database/folder into the destination
database/folder, overwriting all records. You can indicate to maintain the user
fields, text value field, and web hyperlink field in overwritten records when
merging catalog databases.

Assign catalog information to components

Catalog information is carried on a parent or stand-alone component. Each
component can carry up to 10 different catalog assignments allowing for
subassemblies. You can define exactly where AutoCAD Electrical should look
to get this catalog information, allowing great flexibility in how you keep
your catalog information. There are a number of ways to assign your catalog
information to a component:

Use the Component Insert/Edit dialog box

The AutoCAD Electrical Insert/Edit dialog is the common dialog you see
whether you insert a new component or edit an existing one. Click Catalog
lookup to view the component's catalog database file. This is where you can
search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected
component.

Use a project-specific catalog file

You can set up a project catalog file with all of the project's component types
in it. The file must reside in the project's subdirectory. The file may be called

Catalog Assignment | 785

 either default_cat.mdb or<project>_cat.mdb. AutoCAD Electrical references
this file first before looking in the user subdirectory or the catalogs subdirectory
(as defined in wd.env).

Use a miscellaneous catalog file

You can set up a general catalog table within the .mdb file with all component
types in it. AutoCAD Electrical will reference this table, if it exists. The table
name is MISC_CAT. If found, this catalog information will display in the
dialog for component catalog number selection. In the Insert/Edit dialog box,
Catalog Data section, click Lookup. In the Parts Catalog dialog box, click
Miscellaneous.

Use the last used assignment

During your editing session, AutoCAD Electrical remembers the last MFG /
CAT / ASSYCODE assignment you make for each component inserted into
your wiring diagram. When you insert another component of that type,
AutoCAD Electrical presents the previous component's catalog assignment as
the default (assuming a previous one was made during the current editing
session).

Perform a drawing or project-wide search

In the Insert/Edit dialog box, Catalog Data section, click Project to instruct
AutoCAD Electrical to do a drawing-wide or project-wide listing of similar
components with their catalog assignments.

Pull information from another project

AutoCAD Electrical quickly scans a previous project, finds the instance of that
component, and returns the catalog information to you. This is accomplished
without leaving your active drawing. In the Insert/Edit dialog box, click Project.
In the Find: Catalog Assignments dialog box, select Other project and click
OK. AutoCAD Electrical processes the project you select. It quickly scans each
listed drawing for the target component type and returns a dialog list of what
it found. You can then make your catalog assignment by picking from this
dialog list.

Pull from an external file

You can pull catalog assignments from a generic ASCII file created by a word
processor or output from a spreadsheet or database program. In the Insert/Edit

786 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

dialog box, Catalog Data section, click Project. In the Find: Catalog
Assignments dialog box, select External file, and click OK.

Pull from your own external database application

AutoCAD Electrical provides a means to bypass its internal catalog part number
look-up and temporarily pass control to your custom catalog part number
selection application. In the Insert/Edit dialog box, Catalog Data section, click
Lookup. But instead of immediately accessing the appropriate catalog look-up
table, AutoCAD Electrical passes control to your application. You make the
MFG/CAT/ASSYCODE selection in your own database program. Your
application formats your selection and passes it back to AutoCAD Electrical.

Add multiple BOM catalog numbers to a component

You can add up to 10 additional part numbers to any schematic or panel

component on the fly. These multiple BOM part numbers appear as
sub-assembly part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various
BOM and component reports. In the Insert/Edit dialog box, click Multiple
Catalog to display a dialog for adding the extra catalog part numbers.

Insert components and modify catalog information

Vendor catalog parts lookup and assignment is crucial to enabling AutoCAD
Electrical to automatically create various detailed BOM reports. It is also a key
step in the workflow between control schematic wiring diagrams and derived
physical panel layouts. Catalog parts lookup is through a multitable Microsoft
Access database file (default_cat.mdb) shipped with AutoCAD Electrical. It is
populated with a number of commonly used component part numbers and
descriptions from some of the major electrical controls vendors. The database
content is found at: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My
Documents\Acade {release #}\AeData\Catalogs.

1 Insert a schematic component symbol onto your drawing.

The Insert/Edit Component dialog box displays so you can assign
component-specific information to the new component.

2 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Catalog Data section, click

Lookup to choose a vendor part number to be assigned to this instance
of the component.
AutoCAD Electrical reads the inserted component's AutoCAD block name
and determines the correct table to access in the catalog lookup database
file (default_cat.mdb). The WDBLKNAM field in the family table is used
as the first filter when opening the catalog lookup window for the

Assign catalog information to components | 787

 selection of catalog numbers. This filter removes invalid selections from
the catalog lookup window.

3 In the Parts catalog dialog box, select the vendor and catalog part number
to use.
The block's invisible MANUFACTURER, CATALOG, and ASSEMBLYCODE
attributes are populated with the key values pulled from the selected
record in the target table. Various description and miscellaneous field
values from the picked record are not saved on the block's attributes; only
the MANUFACTURER, CATALOG, and ASSEMBLYCODE values are saved.

When you are finished modifying component information, you can run the
Schematic Bill of Material report. The report queries the inserted component's
MANUFACTURER, CATALOG, and ASSEMBLYCODE attribute values; AutoCAD
Electrical then formats and outputs a detailed BOM report.

Catalog values
This lists the catalog part number information for any/all component (or
footprints) that have the same family block name (WDBLKNAM value) as that
of the component being edited.

Catalog Check Displays its bill of materials description.

OK Copies the highlighted catalog info to the component being ed-

ited.

Overview of the LISTBOX_DEF catalog database

table
This optional table can be included in the catalog database file. It allows
starting MFG/TYPE/RATING combinations to be predefined for each catalog
lookup table when AutoCAD Electrical would normally default to the values
given in the first record of the selected catalog lookup table. The records in
this table are structured as follows:

Field name Width Description

TABLENAME 50 Catalog lookup table name

788 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

Field name Width Description

MANUFACTURER 24 Manufacturer code to default to (Catalog lookup

dialog's 1st pulldown)

LIST2 60 Type value to default to (Catalog lookup dialog's

2nd pulldown)

LIST3 60 Rating value to default to (Catalog lookup dia-

log's 3rd pulldown)

RECNUM n/a AutoNumber field (used internally)

Leaving a MFG, LIST2, or LIST3 field blank causes the respective pull-down
to default to ALL. Example: when you first insert a relay coil symbol and open
the Catalog Lookup dialog, you want the "CR" catalog table display to default
to Siemens part numbers for "600V MAX AC" relays. Using a copy of Microsoft
Access, open the default_cat.mdb catalog lookup file, and select table
_LISTBOX_DEF. Insert a record with these field values: TABLENAME "CR",
MANUFACTURER "SIEMENS", and LIST2 "600V MAX AC." The text you enter
must exactly match existing field values in the target table. Save and exit.
Now, when you insert a relay coil and select Catalog Lookup, the dialog box
opens with these defaults displayed.
In order to browse catalog codes for accessory terminals, you have to add a
line in the _LISTBOX_DEF table like: TRMS(H) MFG HARDWARE, where MFG
is the manufacturer you are interested in (for example, “TRMS(H) AB
HARDWARE”). Similarily, to browse catalog codes for jumpers, you have to
add a line in the _LISTBOX_DEF table like: TRMS(J) MFG HARDWARE (for
example, “TRMS(J) AB HARDWARE JUMPER”, where “JUMPER” is the value
for LIST3).

Overview of the LISTBOX_DEF catalog database table | 789

Copy catalog assignments from component to
component
This utility allows you to insert or edit catalog part numbers onto the currently
selected component or footprint.

1 Click the arrow on the Edit Component tool to access the

Copy Catalog Assignment tool.

2 Click the Copy Catalog Assignment tool.

3 Select the master component from which the catalog data will
be copied.

4 Select the part number information by clicking Catalog Look-

up, Find: Drawing Only, Multiple Catalog, or Catalog Check.
■ Catalog Lookup: Select the catalog table information in the Parts
Catalog dialog box for the selected component type and click OK.
■ Find: Drawing Only: Select from the catalog part number information
for any/all component footprints that have the same family block
name as that of the component being edited. Click OK.
■ Multiple Catalog: Insert extra catalog part numbers onto the currently
selected component or footprint. You can add up to 99 additional
part numbers to any schematic or panel component on-the-fly. Click
OK.
■ Catalog Check: Quickly performs a bill of material check and displays
the result.

5 Click OK.

6 Select the devices to copy the catalog data to.

NOTE Child or related devices are not automatically updated;

they must be included in the selection.

Multiple bill of material information

790 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

 This tool allows you to insert or edit extra catalog part numbers on to the
currently selected component or footprint. You can add up to 99 additional
part numbers to any schematic or panel component on-the-fly. These multiple
BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly part numbers to the main catalog
part number in the various BOM and component reports.

Access:

On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog

box, Catalog Data section, click Multiple Catalog.

NOTE You can also access this dialog by clicking Multiple Catalog on the Copy
Catalog Assignment dialog box (Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤
Copy Catalog Assignment)

The additional catalog part numbers are saved on the symbol as

MFGn/CATn/ASSYCODEn attribute values where "n" is the sequential code
value "01" through "10" selected in the top list box. If these attributes are not
present on the symbols, AutoCAD Electrical saves the information as Extended
Entity Data (Xdata) on the symbol's block insert.

Sequential code

Adds up to 99 extra part numbers (in addition to the main catalog part
number). Pick which one you want to add or inspect/edit. Click the list button
to show all extra part numbers carried on the component.

Catalog Data

Specifies the catalog part number information such as the manufacturer and
catalog number.

Count

Specifies the quantity number for the extra part number (blank=1). This value
gets inserted into a BOM report's "SUBQTY" column.

Unit

Specifies the unit of measure, which can be displayed in the component list
report.

Copy catalog assignments from component to component | 791

 Parts Catalog Lookup

Lists the catalog database table that is to be referenced for the description
information for the given Manufacturer/Catalog/Assembly combination. For
each catalog entry you must provide a name for the catalog look-up table. For
the main catalog entry this information is provided on the symbol itself but
may not be there for these catalog entries. Select List to pick from a list of
tables that are contained in your catalog database file or Misc to use the
MISC_CAT table.

Catalog Lookup

Checks for and displays catalog table information in the Parts Catalog dialog
box for the selected component type.

Catalog Check

Quickly performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result.

Multiple catalog part number assignments

This displays the order in which the extra part numbers will appear in the
various AutoCAD Electrical reports. You can add up to 99 additional part
number assignments to a component..

Access:

On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog

box, Catalog Data section, click Multiple Catalog. Click List Sequential Code on
the Multiple Bill of Material Information dialog box.

NOTE You can also access this dialog by clicking Multiple Catalog on the Copy
Catalog Assignment dialog box (Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤
Copy Catalog Assignment) and then clicking List Sequential Code.

To change the order, highlight the part number and click Move Up or Move
Down to move it in the list.

792 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

Show missing catalog assignments
Use the Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Show Missing Catalog
Assignments tool to graphically indicate or list the parent or stand-alone
components that do not carry catalog information on the active drawing.

Show Displays the components that do not carry catalog information.

They are marked on the screen with a red diamond shape drawn
around the symbol's insertion point in temporary graphics. A
REDRAW restores the screen to its original state.

Report Extracts the information from the active drawing or project and
displays a list of parent or stand-alone components without
catalog information.

TIP Extracted BOM data can be output to a spreadsheet file,

mdb database file, text report file, or comma-delimited for export
to a spreadsheet or database program. It can also be inserted, in
tabular form, on the current AutoCAD drawing.

Use pin lists

AutoCAD Electrical can automatically track how many contacts have been
assigned to a device like a relay or timer coil. When a newly inserted contact
exceeds a predefined limit, AutoCAD Electrical can alert you. AutoCAD
Electrical can also track available terminal pin number pairs as you insert each
new contact and automatically give you the next available pair as a default.
To enable this feature, maximum contact count and pin number pair
information is assigned to the parent symbol (ex: relay or timer coil symbol).
It is carried as Xdata under the name "WD_PINLIST" or, if a PINLIST attribute
is present on the parent device, the pin list is carried on this invisible attribute.
A copy of this pin list data is carried in the project's Access database file
(<project>_cat.mdb or default_cat.mdb) in a table called _PINLIST. This
information can be assigned manually or it can be automatically retrieved
from a pin list database table when a catalog part number is assigned to the
parent device. Then, as each contact is inserted and referenced back to the

Show missing catalog assignments | 793

 parent, AutoCAD Electrical checks the pin information carried on the parent
and verifies that a contact of the proper type is available. If so, it retrieves the
next pair of contact pin numbers from the parent and displays as defaults for
the new contact.
The AutoCAD Electrical automatic pin list lookup and assignment at
component insertion time is not limited to devices that have contacts. You
can encode two wire devices like pilot lights or proximity switch into the
database file. Insert the MFG and CAT numbers and fill in the COILPINS field
with the terminal pin numbers. Leave the PINLIST field blank. Now, when
you insert one of these devices and do a Catalog lookup and part number
selection, AutoCAD Electrical quickly looks for a MFG/CAT match in the pin
list database. On a match AutoCAD Electrical pulls out the device's coil pin
numbers and automatically inserts them on to the newly inserted device.

Pin list data carried on the parent

When AutoCAD Electrical annotates a parent coil or other device with the
pin list information, AutoCAD Electrical inserts it on the following attributes
(if present):

PINLIST The pin list format string of 3-element groups, one for each
available contact

MAXNO Maximum N.O. contact count, blank means undefined, 0 means

none allowed

MAXNC Maximum N.C. contact count

MAXNONC Maximum convertible contact count

If these attributes are not present, AutoCAD Electrical encodes the data on to
the symbol as extended entity data. If AutoCAD Electrical finds a MFG/CAT
match in the pin list database and retrieves the encoded pin list information,
it pre-fills the MAXNO, MAXNC, and MAXNONC values with the quantities
derived from the decoded pin list data.
To view or manually edit these values, select Edit Component and click the
NO/NC Setup button on the Insert/Edit dialog box. AutoCAD Electrical
maintains a copy of the parent's PINLIST information in the project's scratch
database file (in Microsoft Access format). You can view this by opening the
PINLIST table of the wd\user\<projname>.mdb database file.

794 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

 Modify the pin list database
The pin list database file can be viewed, edited, and expanded using the Pin
List Database Editor tool.

NOTE This tool is not limited to relays and timers, but can be extended to other
switch types that can have extra contacts, plug/jacks, and stand-alone PLC I/O
points.

1 Click Component ➤ Cross-Reference ➤ Pin List Database Editor.

2 In the Select Pin List Table dialog box, select the table to edit and click
Edit.

NOTE You can also create a new table by entering the manufacturer name
in the edit box and clicking Create.

3 In the Edit dialog box:

■ To edit an existing record, click Sort, Filter, or Find to search for the
record to edit. Select the record from the list and click Edit.

■ To create a new record, click Add New, or select an existing record

and click Add Copy to create a new record based on an existing one.

■ To delete an existing record, select the record in the list and click
Delete.

4 To edit or create a new record, in the Edit Record dialog box, specify the
values to assign to the record and click OK.

5 In the Edit dialog box, click Save/Exit.

Select pin list table

This tool allows you to select the relevant PINLIST table to edit or create a
new one.

Access:

Click Components ➤ Cross-Reference ➤ Pin List Database Editor.

Select or Type Manufacturer Lists all of the PINLIST tables that are in the catalog
database. The “(Default)” manufacturer is used to
edit the generic _PINLIST table.

Use pin lists | 795

 Select the table to edit or enter a name for a new
one.

Table Displays the proper table name in the catalog

database. This text changes depending on which
manufacturer is selected. For example, if you select
SQD, then _PINLIST_SQD displays.

Create (available only when you enter the name of a

manufacturer) Creates a new table in the catalog
database with the specified name and adds the
table to the list of manufacturers. Once a table is
created, the Edit (Table: _PINLIST_manufacturer)
dialog box displays so you can edit the new table.

NOTE The following characters are not allowed in

the table name: ~ @ # $ % ^ & * - + = \ { } “ ‘ ; : ?
/ < > , ! [ ] |. These characters are replaced with an
underscore (_) if entered in the edit box.

Edit (available only after a manufacturer is selected from

the list) Opens the Edit (Table: _PINLIST_manufac-
turer) dialog box so you can edit the selected PIN-
LIST table.

Edit
AutoCAD Electrical consults a pin list database table when a part number is
added or an existing part number is changed on a parent schematic symbol.
If AutoCAD Electrical finds a match on the part number's MFG, CAT, and
optional ASSYCODE values in this database table, then the associated contact
count and pin number information is retrieved and placed on the parent
schematic component.

Access:

Click Components ➤ Cross-Reference ➤ Pin List Database Editor. Specify the

table to create and click Create or select the table to edit and click Edit.

This lookup database table is a table within the catalog lookup Access .mdb
file. The default file name is default_cat.mdb, table _PINLIST, and comes
populated with a sample of vendor data. You can expand this table as needed.

796 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

 Use your own copy of Microsoft Access or use this dialog box to add new
entries, add entries based on existing entries, edit, and delete entries from the
table.

Sort Sorts the list of database records using either an alphanumeric sort
or number values. You can specify 4 sorts to perform on the list.

Find Sorts the list of database records using either an alphanumeric sort
or number values. You can specify 4 sorts to perform on the list.

Replace Indicates to replace the find value with the new text string that you
specify.

Filter Filters the listing based on certain values in the table. Picking the
blank entry in the list removes the filter for that field. After you define
the values to filter, apply the filter in the database editing window.

Edit Displays the Edit Record dialog box for modifying the existing record
in the database.

Add New Displays the Edit New Record dialog box for entering a new record
into the database.

Add Copy Displays the Edit Copied Record dialog box for modifying and copying
the record to make a new record. You cannot have two duplicate
copies in the database.

Delete Removes the selected record from the database.

Structure of the pin list database table

RECNUM (Microsoft Access internal use)

MANUFACTURER Manufacturer code (value must be consistent with the

catalog lookup files)

CATALOG Catalog number (use wildcards as much as possible)

Use pin lists | 797

ASSEMBLYCODE AutoCAD Electrical internal assembly code (must be con-
sistent with the catalog lookup files)

COILPINS Terminal pin numbers for coils (separate multiple pins with
commas)

PINLIST Contact type and pin numbers

PEER_COILPINS Terminal pin numbers for peer coil

PEER_PINLIST Contact type and pin numbers

Edit record
Access:

Click Components ➤ Cross-Reference ➤ Pin List Database Editor. Specify the

table to create and click Create or select the table to edit and click Edit. In the
Edit dialog box, click Add New, Add Copy, or Edit.

MANUFACTURER

Specifies the Manufacturer code (value must be consistent with the catalog
lookup files).

CATALOG

Specifies the Catalog number (use wildcards as much as possible).

ASSEMBLYCODE

Specifies the AutoCAD Electrical internal assembly code (must be consistent

with the catalog lookup files).

COILPINS

Specifies the terminal pin numbers for coil. This is generally two pin numbers
separated by a comma (for example, K1,K2), but is not limited to just two pin
numbers. At insertion/annotation time, AutoCAD Electrical will take this list
and apply it to the TERMxx attributes it finds on the parent symbol. If the

798 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

parent itself can be either a N.O. or N.C. contact, encode the COILPINS field
in a manner similar to the PINLIST field. For example, "1,A1,A2;2,B1,B2" for
the COILPINS field for a target mfg/cat record in the _PINLIST table will apply
pins "A1/A2" to the parent device pins if the device is a generic N.O. and
"B1/B2" if it is a generic N.C. device. Repeat these values in the PINLIST field
so that AutoCAD Electrical can correctly track all contacts.

PINLIST

Specifies the Contact type and pin numbers. This is a sequence of two or more
element groups with each group defining one available child contact element
for the device. For a two terminal contact there are three elements in the
group. It follows this format:
Contact type, terminal pin, terminal pin
where Contact type = 1 for N.O., 2 for N.C., 0 for convertible contact, , 3 for
Form-C (NO/NC pair), 4 for multi-pole terminal strips or undefined type, and
5 for multiple-pin or stacked terminals. AutoCAD Electrical also allows a
description label associated with a pin pair. To add description labels, encode
the _PINLIST database table entry using a format like this:
1,A1X,A1Y;1,A2X,A2Y,*aux contact=";2,B1X,B2Y,*NC=;
where the optional comment is always the last element of the sublist and is
preceded by an asterisk character (if no asterisk, then the comment is
interpreted as another pin number). The previous example would display in
the pin list pick list dialog as:
A1X,A1Y
aux contact=A2X,A2Y
NC=B1X,B2Y
Convertible contacts encoded as type 0, followed by two pin numbers, assume
that the pin numbers do not change when a contact is flipped from N.O. to
N.C. or vice versa. If the contact's pin number actually does change based
upon whether in a N.O. versus N.C. configuration, encode each type 0 entry
as "0,pinNO,pinNO,pinNC,pinNC;". The first two entries after the "0" flag give
the pin number for the N.O. configuration and the second two for the N.C.
configuration. AutoCAD Electrical picks the correct pair based upon the contact
type being inserted or edited.
For contact type 3 (Form-C), the pins must be entered in this order: common
pin, NO pin, NC pin. A Form-C contact set with NO on pin 5, NC on pin 6,
and pin 8 common to both contacts would be encoded as 3,8,5,6 where "3"

Use pin lists | 799

 flags "Form-C", "8" is the common pin, "5" is the NO pin, and "6" is the NC
pin.

PEER_COILPINS, PEER_PINLIST

There can be two additional "PEER_" fields in the _PINLIST table for defining
special cases where a single part number calls out two parent devices. For
example, a reversing motor starter part number might include two parent
contactor coils, one for forward and one for reverse. Each parent coil symbol
needs to have its own pin list assignment. You set up the second coil's coil
pins and pin list data in the PEER_COILPINS and PEER_PINLIST fields for the
common part number.

■ PEER_COILPINS: Terminal pin numbers for peer coils.

■ PEER_PINLIST: Contact type and pin numbers.

Set pin list assignments for special uses

You can set up subcategories of type 4 pin combinations so that some will
apply to specific contact types and other pin combinations to other contact
types. You can also use a type 4 PINLIST assignment to track and control how
many schematic terminal symbols can be tied to a given terminal tag-ID.

For filtering of special contact use

You can set up subcategories of type 4 pin combinations so that some will
apply to specific contact types and other pin combinations to other contact
types. Encode the Pin List entries with a "4" plus a character to provide further
filtering of what contacts are available for a given child contact. At the contact
end, make sure that an attribute PINLIST_TYPE (or Xdata of the same name)
carries a value of "4" plus a character to match up with the coding in the pin
list string.
For example, a given device has 5 N.O. contacts but they are not all the same.
Three of them are motor contacts and 2 are auxiliary control contacts. Two
different schematic symbols are created - one to be used to show the heavy-duty
motor starter contacts and another symbol to be used for auxiliary contacts.
Set up the motor starter contact symbol with attribute PINLIST_TYPE with a
value of "4C" and the auxiliary contact symbol with PINLIST_TYPE value "4A."
Now, in the _PINLIST database table, encode the part number's pin list
information with type "4" entries but use "4A" and "4C" to differentiate which

800 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs

contact pin combinations are for the auxiliary contacts and which ones are
for the starter contacts.
4A,1L,2L;4A,1R,2R;4C,L1,T1;4C,L2,T2;4C,L3,T3
When either symbol is inserted and associated with the parent, AutoCAD
Electrical sees the symbol's PINLIST_TYPE value. The contact combinations
that do not apply to the inserted component type are filtered out. Inserting
a N.O. auxiliary motor starter contact (preset with PINLIST_TYPE attribute
value of 4A) triggers AutoCAD Electrical to pick the next available 4A pin list
combination of 1L/2L or 1R/2R. Inserting a N.O. main motor contact symbol
(present with PINLIST_TYPE attribute value of 4C) triggers AutoCAD Electrical
to pick the next available 4C pin list combination (L1/T1, L2/T2, or L3/T3).

For multipole terminal block units

You can also use a type 4 PINLIST assignment to track and control how many
schematic terminal symbols can be tied to a given terminal tag-ID (ex. a given
terminal strip has a fixed number of terminals). For example, let's say you
have a fixed, 6-pole terminal strip unit with a manufacturer code of AB and
a catalog part number 1492-HJ86 with pin markings on the terminal strip that
are identified as 1 through 6. Set up the _PINLIST database with the AB and
1492-HJ86 combo defining a PINLIST of 4,1;4,2;4,3;4,4;4,5;4,6. In the
schematic, insert the first terminal of a 6-pole terminal strip, with a TAG-ID
of "TB-1" and do a catalog lookup. Assign the "AB" part number "1492-HJ86."
AutoCAD Electrical finds the pin list information and applies it to the first
peer terminal symbol as an attribute value. Now, as you insert additional
terminals for this TB-1 terminal strip, AutoCAD Electrical tracks what the next
available terminal number is (based on the 1st terminal's PINLIST data). When
you try to insert the 7th terminal for TB-1, you're alerted that there are no
more terminals available for this multi-pole terminal strip.

NOTE This information was previously found in a separate Access file called
wd_pins.mdb. When you use the conversion tools to convert your old .dbf catalog
files to the Access file, this file is converted to the _PINLIST table within the catalog
file.

Set pin list assignments for special uses | 801

802
Reports
14
In this chapter
■ Generate reports
■ Schematic Reports
■ Panel Reports
■ Overview of format files
■ Run automatic reports
■ Modify spreadsheet data
■ Create user-defined
attributes
■ Export to Autodesk
Inventor Professional

803
Generate reports
There is a lot of flexibility with AutoCAD Electrical reports, which can be run
manually or automatically. AutoCAD Electrical extracts multiple fields into
each report type. Different reports contain different fields of information.
When running a report, you can select which fields to include and which
fields to ignore. You can also add your own fields by creating a user-defined
attribute support file (.wda) using the User Defined Attributes List tool. Any
attributes listed in your User Defined Attributes file are added as available
fields to each report. You can strip out some of the field columns of data and
create other useful types of reports. For example, run a component report,
strip out everything except the TAGNAME, DESC1, DESC2, and DESC3 field
columns and you have a legend plate report. If you don't see the specific report
that you need, take advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical flexibility and create
your own.
There are some features that are common to most of the AutoCAD Electrical
reports. You can extract by location or installation values, edit the report,
change the report format, post-process the report with your own programs,
save the report out to a file, print the report, and put the report on your
drawing as a table.
AutoCAD Electrical provides a number of Schematic (page 897)and Panel (page
923)reports. Reports can be formatted from the Report Generator dialog box
or preformatted using Format Files (.set files).

Modify report templates

You can modify Microsoft Excel report templates "wd_template.xls" and

"wd_template_w_macro.xls" so that the report displays the way you need it
to without having to manually modify the report output each time a report
is run. You can change the orientation of a template file to open in Landscape
mode rather than Portrait mode by modifying the template and saving it. Run
a report and save to an Excel file. When the Excel file is opened, it displays
in Landscape mode.

NOTE If you are using the Export Drawing to Spreadsheet tool, modify the
"wd_xls_all_template.txt" template.

TIP Changing some of the setup on template files (such as changing the text in
the first row or the sheet names) can cause the export to fail. Before modifying
any template files, save copies so that you can revert back to the original version
if necessary.

804 | Chapter 14 Reports

Place reports on drawings

Once you generate a report you can place it on a drawing or drawings by

clicking "Put on Drawing" in the Report Generator dialog box. This displays
the Table Generation Setup dialog box where you can select options to format
the look of the table.
Report tables can be updated once they have been inserted, saving you the
trouble of the setup each time. When a report table is inserted, some
intelligence is added to the table object so AutoCAD Electrical can determine
which report this table was for. There are 3 items that make a report table
unique:

■ The report that generated the table (i.e. Bill of Materials, Wire From/To,
Component, and so on.)

■ The scope of the report (for example, project, active drawing, and so on.)

■ The format file (.set file) used to generate the report

If a report is run and a table exists that matches these 3 items, then instead
of inserting a new report table, the existing table objects update with the
current information.
If you want to insert a report table that will not be updated, select "Insert New
(not updatable)." This inserts a report table without the intelligence so that
when you run the same report again, the table is not updated.

Break report tables

You may want to break a report into multiple tables. You can do this from
the Table Generation dialog box without having to run the report multiple
times or clicking "Put on Drawing" multiple times. You can break the report
table by specifying the number of rows per section. If an entry in the report
contains multiple lines of text, such as a Bill of Materials description, each
line of text is considered a row. A table will not be broken in the middle of a
multi-line entry but the entire entry is moved to the next section.
You can also break a report into sections based on some report fields. This
must be selected in the Report Generator dialog box. Different reports may
have different Special Breaks available. After you select Special Breaks, and
click Put on Drawing, the Apply Special Breaks option is available in the Table
Generation Setup dialog box. This option inserts a table object for each section
based on the Special Breaks. These multiple table objects (if inserted as
updatable) are considered one report table by AutoCAD Electrical and can be

Generate reports | 805

 updated and edited as one report using the AutoCAD Electrical Edit Component
command.
Breaking a Report Table across Multiple Drawings
You can break a report table across multiple drawings if the scope of the report
is set to Project and not Active Drawing. In the Table Generation Setup dialog
box, once you have defined a break as described above, you can define how
many table sections should be placed on each drawing. A blank Sections On
Drawing value indicates unlimited sections on the same drawing and you are
not prompted for another drawing. Once you enter a Sections On Drawing
value, when you reach that value you are prompted for another drawing. If
you select a new drawing, you can enter the folder and name for the drawing.
Once generated, the drawing is added to the AutoCAD Electrical project. These
multiple table objects (if inserted as updatable) are considered one report table
by AutoCAD Electrical and can be updated and edited as one report using the
AutoCAD Electrical Edit Component command.

Table generation setup

This displays your report as a table on your drawing. Once you select OK from
the Table Generation Setup dialog box, your cursor will look like a box with
a small "x" in the corner. The box is the size the table will be when generated.
This allows easy placement of the table on your active drawing file. To use
object snap mode, enter an "S" at the command line and AutoCAD Electrical
will flip to a normal AutoCAD pick mode so you can use an object snap.

Access:

Click the Put on Drawing button on any of the report generation dialog boxes.

Table

The available options depend on whether a matching table exists when you
click the Put on Drawing button. If there isn't a matching table on the drawing,
the Insert New and Insert New (non-updatable) options are available. If a
matching table exists on the drawing, the Insert New (non-updatable) and
Update Existing options are available.

Insert New Inserts a new updatable table. If there is an existing

table, new (non-updatable) tables are inserted.

Insert New (non-updatable) Inserts tables with no intelligence.

806 | Chapter 14 Reports

Update Existing Updates existing tables. If existing tables do not exist,
new updatable tables are inserted.

Text

Defines the height, color, and line spacing for the text used in the table. To
define the text color, click the Text Color box. The standard AutoCAD color
selection dialog box opens, displaying the color selections.
The minimum Spacing value is based on the specified text height and the
vertical cell margin of the table style. If you change the text height the spacing
value automatically recalculates. If it is too small it is changed to the minimum
value. If you change the spacing value it is compared to the minimum value.
If it is too small an alert displays and the value adjusts to the minimum value.

Column Labels

Defines whether to include the column heading, the color of title text labels,
and the visibility of the column labels.

Include Column Labels Uses the column headings as the first row of the
table.

Label Color To define the title text color, click the Label Color
box. The standard AutoCAD color selection dialog
box opens, displaying the color selections.

Show Labels on First Section Only Indicates to only show the title on the first section
of the table, if multiple sections are used. If not selec-
ted, the labels will be shown on all table sections.

Title

Defines the table title attributes.

Include time/date Shows the report's time and date above the table.

Include project info Shows the project description lines above the table.
You select which lines will display in the project de-
scription dialog box.

Generate reports | 807

Include title line Shows the report's title above the table. When the
checkbox is active, you may modify the default report
title.

Include special break values Specifies to include special break values for the title
line of each section. Special break values will appear
on each respective section regardless if the Show
Title on First Section Only checkbox is selected.

Title color Specifies what color to use for the table title. To
define the text color, click the Title Color box. The
standard AutoCAD color selection dialog box opens,
displaying the color selections.

Show Title on First Section Only Indicates to only show the title on the first section
of the table, if multiple sections are used. If not selec-
ted, the labels will be shown on all table sections.

Layer

Specifies which layer to place the table on.

Column Width

Specifies the method to use for calculating the width of the columns. You can
either have AutoCAD Electrical automatically calculate the column width
based on text values for each field or you can define a width for each column.
The text will word wrap if the column width is less than the overall length of
the text string.

Borders

Specifies whether to display borders around the table. You can display all table
borders, a border around just the outside of the table, or not have any borders
at all.

First New Section Placement

Specifies where to place the table in the drawing. You can enter x and y values
or pick a point on the screen. The table appears at the specified coordinates
once you click the OK button.

808 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Row Definition

Specifies the number of table rows, the start and end lines, the number of
rows for each section, and whether to build the table from the bottom up.

Start Line/End The starting and ending lines reflect the total number of rows
displayed in the Report Generator dialog box. These values default
to previously used values on subsequent runs of the report.

Build Up Creates the table from the bottom to the top; meaning that the
last line is created first and the first line is created last. The table
title appears at the bottom of the report table when this option
is selected.

Apply Special Breaks Breaks the table sections based upon the selected break criteria.
For example, if you select Manufacturer as the Special Break and
there are 15 different manufacturers in the report, your report
will be broken into 15 sections.

Rows for Each Section/Rows Specifies the maximum number of rows for the table or section,
determining when to split the table.

Force to Maximum Rows Directs AutoCAD Electrical to add blank lines at the end of a table
section if necessary until the number of rows equals the Rows
setting. Individual records cannot be split into two separate sec-
tions.

Section Definition

Defines the number of sections on the drawing and the distance between
sections on the same drawing. If the Sections value is set to 1, the X-Distance
and Y-Distance options are disabled.

Sections Specifies the maximum number of table sections for this report.
A blank value indicates an unlimited number of sections on one
drawing.

X-Distance Specifies the X-distance from the end of one table section to the
beginning of the next. The sections are on the same drawing.

Generate reports | 809

Y-Distance Specifies the Y-distance from the end of one table section to the
beginning of the next. The sections are on the same drawing.

Optional script file reference

This provides the option to save the report file to a script file. You can set up
this script file to automatically know the file name of the report you just
created. For AutoCAD 2000 and later, the report's file name can be retrieved
using the AutoLISP expression (v1-bb-ref 'FNAM).

Access:

Click the Save to File button on a report dialog box (such as Schematic Bill of
Materials). Select the report type and click OK; then select the file to save and
click Save.

The file location and name for your report is displayed at the top of the dialog
box.

Run Script Passes the report file to a script file. This provides
a link to post-processing the data or automatically
passing it on to another application.

Close - no script Closes the dialog box without creating a script file.

Script file options reference

Displays if the report file was created and saved. The report filename and
location are displayed in the title bar of the dialog box. You can execute a
script file and passes the report filename to it. The filename is carried in an
AutoLISP variable called FNAM.

Access:

Click the Save to File button on a report dialog box (such as Drawing Extract
for all locations). Select the report type and click OK; then select the file to save
and click Save. In the Optional Script File dialog box, select Run Script.

Print Prints the default script file.

810 | Chapter 14 Reports

Other Opens a sub-dialog box for selecting a user script file.

Edit report
Use this utility to modify a report before you insert it on to your drawing as
a ruled text table.

Access:

Click the Edit Mode button on any of the report dialog boxes (such as the XLS,
CSV, or MDB File or Bill of Material dialog boxes).

NOTE Different options are available depending on which type of report you are
editing.

New Lines

Indicates to add new lines above or below the selected line, or as a sub-assembly
of the selected line.

■ Add from Catalog: Opens a sub-dialog box for selecting which catalog
lookup table to open. From this catalog table, you can select a part to add
to the report.

■ Add New: Creates a new report line entry. Enter the values in the input
boxes and click OK.

■ Add Copy: Creates a copy of the selected line entry. Modify the values in
the input boxes and click OK.

Edit or Delete lines

■ Edit: Opens a sub-dialog box for editing the values for the selected line.

■ Delete: Removes the selected line from the report.

If you do not select all of the lines that make up a single entry, AutoCAD
Electrical automatically deletes all the report lines that make up that entire
entry. However, if the report contains sub-assembly items, they are not
deleted when the main entry is deleted.

Generate reports | 811

 Re-order lines

Re-orders the lines with the Sort, Move Up, Move Down, Move to Top, and
Move to Bottom buttons.

■ Move Up: Moves the currently selected line(s) up one place in the report.

■ Move Down: Moves the currently selected line(s) down one place in the
report.

■ Move to Top: Moves the currently selected line(s) to the top of the report.

■ Move to Bottom: Moves the currently selected line(s) to the bottom of the
report.

■ Smart Swap: Swaps "*1" with "*2" values in all selected lines. For example,
in the Wire From/To report there may be field names LOC1 and LOC2.
LOC1 is the location code for the component at one end of the wire and
LOC2 is the location code for the component at the other end. This feature
swaps the values of these fields.

Report generator
Displays the results of the report generation. The dialog box options that are
available depend on which report you are creating.

Access:

Select to create any schematic or panel report. Specify whether to process the
project, the active drawing, or selected components, and click OK.

Header

Displays the selected items at the top of each section in the report.

Add Displays the header information inside the report. Select to add
the time/date, a title line, project lines, or column labels.

812 | Chapter 14 Reports

First Section Only Displays the selected header item at the top of the first section
only. The header information is no longer displayed at the top
of each section.

Breaks

Controls how the report breaks across multiple pages. Only one check box
can be selected at a time. Specify whether to add page breaks or special breaks
to the report.

Add page breaks Breaks the report at the 58th line.

Special breaks Specifies the value that controls the section break.
You can break the report into sections based on the
special break selected from the list. The list displays
the report-specific content to apply to the special
break. For example, selecting Wire Layer displays the
wire label records in different sections based on the
wire layer data.

Add special break values to header Adds the special break value to the header. For ex-
ample, if you select a special break of Installation/Loc-
ation, the values provided for these devices in the
schematic are displayed in the report section header.

Suppress subcatalog entries

(for Component Report only) The component report displays all components
and their related catalog numbers. A component can have one or many catalog
numbers associated to it based upon whether or it is set up with subcatalog
numbers or if you choose to assign multiple BOM items to the component.
This removes the extra catalog numbers from the report and displays only the
primary catalog number from the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.

Pin chart

(for Connector Plug Report only)

The Connector Plug report displays the wiring information associated to a
pin symbol in the form of a chart based upon a similar Component tag.
Selecting "On" displays another dialog to set up the chart and yields just the

Generate reports | 813

 specified information into the report generator for printing, saving to a file,
or placing in a table on the drawing.

Tag Name Displays all component tag names in the report.

Remove duplicated pin numbers Eliminates any duplicate pin numbers for the selected
plug from the report.

Left Side / Right Side Displays the wiring information from the left or right
side of the pin symbols. This displays what is connec-
ted to the pin and the wiring information.

Fill In Missing Pin Numbers Identifys additional pin numbering not defined in
the schematic for spare pin connections. For ex-
ample, the connector may have used 4 out of 9 pins
in the schematic and those are the connections that
are being reported. You can then display the 5 spare
pin connections by selecting this check box and
identifying the first pin number as 1 and the last as
9. Label for spares displays a text string under the
wire number column in the report.

Internal/external codes left/right

(for Terminal Plan Report only) Allows the Terminal Plan report to take
advantage of terminals that have the optional "I" (Internal) and "E" (external)
codes on the wire connection. With this check box selected, you can select
from the radio buttons below it to sort within an entry. You can show all of
the Internal or External connections on the left or on the right of the wire
connection.

Squeeze

Specifies whether to reduce the width of the report. Select 1 for maximum
squeezing and 3 for minimum squeezing.

Add blanks between entries

Adds a blank line between report entries.

814 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Insert as Terminal Strip

(for Panel Terminal Strip Report only) Opens the Panel Terminal Strip Graphical
Report - Parameters dialog box for defining a graphical representation of the
terminal strip to place on the active drawing file.

Plug/Male side - Jack/Female side - Show All

(for Connector Details Report only) These 3 radio buttons work with the Type
attribute value of either P or J for Plug (male) or Jack (female). When the pin
symbol is created you can define a Type attribute that defines these
characteristics. Then when reporting you can select Plug or Jack to filter the
overall report (or you can choose to show all).

Sort

Sorts the report. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list.

User Post

Sets up options for running a post-process report before saving the report to
a file or inserting as a table onto your drawing. When you click User Post, the
/viawd/wd/comp.lsp LISP routine runs a function against the data and returns
to the Report Generator Window.
The LISP routine can be modified to meet your needs. It has a dialog that you
can customize and call your own programs.

Display Setup

(for Wire Label report only) Sets up options for label quantity, horizontal or
vertical arrangement of data, display selection of wire labels and cable labels,
and total number of columns for displaying the report.

Display Wire Label Displays the wire label for all wires in the specified
format.

Display Cable Label Displays the cable labels in the specified format.

Label Arrangement Arranges the wire label horizontally or vertically

across the columns.

Generate reports | 815

Label Quantity per Connection Specifies the quantity of wire labels or cable labels.
Wire labels are generated for every wire connection
while cable labels are generated once for every cable.

Number of Columns to Display Arranges the wire labels in the specified number of
columns.

Change Report Format

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.
(for Wire Label report only) There are two categories that you can change the
report format for: wire label or cable label. Once you modify the report format,
you can save it for future use. The wire and cable label formats are stored in
the same file.

Surf

Surfs to the offending symbols. This is generally used for the Missing
Level/Sequence Assignments and Wire Annotation Exception reports.

Edit Mode/Edit Wire Label/Edit Cable Label

Modifies the report before you insert it to your drawing. You can move data
up or down in the report, add lines from a catalog, and delete lines.

Put on Drawing

(Not applicable for Wire Label reports) Opens the Table Generation Setup
dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

NOTE Tables should be placed on drawings that are part of the active project
only.

Once wire label reports are placed on the drawing in table format they are not
editable using the Edit Component tool. You must use the AutoCAD table
edit command to edit the table.

Save to File

Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file from the Save Report
to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs. Choose from: ASCII
report, Comma Delimited, Excel spreadsheet, Access database, and XML format.

816 | Chapter 14 Reports

 NOTE Depending on the file type, you may have the ability to include the project's
LINEx values. These are the values in the 24 description lines entered for the project.

Print

Prints the report. Select the printer, print range, and number of copies.

Conduit marker data fields to display

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

On the Conduit Marker toolbar, click the arrow on the Conduit Reports tool to
access the Conduit Marker Report tool. Run the report and click Change Report
Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
From the Panel Layout menu, click Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Conduit Marker
Report. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator
dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,

Generate reports | 817

 printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

TAG Component tag name

SIZE Conduit size (diameter)

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e. Siemens)

CAT Catalog part number assignment

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to

get part number groups

WIRENO Wire number

WIRELAY Wire layer

WIREDESC Wire type description

WIREDIA Wire gauge or diameter

SPARES Type of spare or unused wires

SP/CNT Count of spare or unused wires

DESC1-2 Description attribute values 1-2

HDL Entity handle number

SH Sheet - the %S value

LEN Length (calculated wire length)

818 | Chapter 14 Reports

INST1 "From" device's installation code (must end with "1")

LOC1 "From" device's location code (must end with "1")

CMP1 "From" device's component tag ID (must end with "1")

PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with
"1")

INST2 "To" device's installation code (must end with "2")

LOC2 "To" device's location code (must end with "2")

CMP2 "To" device's component tag ID (must end with "2")

PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with
"2")

CBL Cable tag

CBLWC Cable wire or cable core color

Drawing list data fields to display

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

In the Project Manager, right-click the project name and select Drawing List
Report. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator
dialog box.
In the Project Manager, right-click the project name and select Drawing List
Report. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator
dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Generate reports | 819

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

NOTE Additional fields may display if the drawing or project is set up with a title
block association. The title block association can be made either through the
Acade_title block with the WD_TB attribute or if there is a .WDT file (can be
project-specific or just a default one).

FILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg)

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

SEC Drawing SEC assignment

SUBSEC Drawing SUBSEC assignment

820 | Chapter 14 Reports

DWGDESC Drawing one-line description text

FULLFILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) with complete path

Cable insert/edit data fields to display

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Cable Markers tool to access the Multiple Cable Markers
tool. Run the report. Select the location codes for the report and click Change
Format on the Cable Insert/Edit dialog box.
From the Wires menu, select Cables ➤ Multiple Cable Markers. Run the report.
Select the location codes for the report and click Change Format on the Cable
Insert/Edit dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-

Generate reports | 821

 nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

WIRENO Wire number

LOC1 "From" device's location code (must end with "1")

CMP1 "From" device's component tag ID (must end with "1")

PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal pin number (must end with
"1")

LOC2 "To" device's location code (must end with "2")

CMP2 "To" device's component tag ID (must end with "2")

PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal pin number (must end with
"2")

WLAY1 Wire layer "From" device (must end with "1")

WLAY2 Wire layer "To" device (must end with "2")

REF1 Line or grid reference location for "From" device (must end with "1")

REF2 Line or grid reference location for "To" device (must end with "2")

SH1 Sheet assignment for "From" device (must end with "1")

SH2 Sheet assignment for "To" device (must end with "2")

CBL Cable tag

CBLWC Cable wire or cable core color

822 | Chapter 14 Reports

CBLLOC Cable location attribute value

CBLMFG Cable manufacturer attribute value

CBLCAT Cable catalog part number

CBLASMB Cable ASSYCODE assignment

DESC1CBL - DESC3CBL Cable description attribute values 1 - 3

CBLP1C2 Cable parent or child (parent = 1, child = 2)

CMP:PIN1 "From" device's component tag and component terminal pin number

CMP:PIN2 "To" device's component tag and component terminal pin number

SEC1 "From" device's drawing section assignment (must end with "1")

SUB1 "From" device's drawing sub-section assignment (must end with "1")

SEC2 "To" device's drawing section assignment (must end with "2")

SUB2 "To" device's drawing sub-section assignment (must end with "2")

INST1 "From" device's installation code (must end with "1")

INST2 "To" device's installation code (must end with "2")

IECCMP1 "From" device's IEC tag name (must end with "1")

IECCMP2 "To" device's IEC tag name (must end with "2")

PD1 "From" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with
"1")

PD2 "To" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with "2")

Generate reports | 823

SEQ1 "From" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "1")

SEQ2 "To" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "2")

PNLWDLEV1 "From" device's panel equivalent level (WDLEV) value (must end with
"1")

PNLWDLEV2 "To" device's panel equivalent level (WDLEV) value (must end with
"2")

CMPHDL1 "From" device's entity handle value (must end with "1")

CMPHDL2 "To" device's entity handle value (must end with "2")

DWGIX1 "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database (must end with "1")

DWGIX2 "To" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database (must end with "2")

DWGNAM1 "From" device's drawing %D value (must end with "1")

DWGNAM2 "To" device's drawing %D value (must end with "2")

CBLHDL Cable entity's handle value

CBLINST Cable installation assignment

CBLDWGIX Cable's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project

scratch database

WIREHDL1 "From" device's connected wire line entity handle value (must end
with "1")

WIREHDL2 "To" device's connected wire line entity handle value (must end with
"2")

824 | Chapter 14 Reports

XDIR1 "From" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 4 = connects
from left (must end with "1")

XDIR2 "To" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 2 = connects from
above (must end with "2")

PNLX1 "From" wire connection's physical X-coordinate value (must end with
"1")

PNLY1 "From" wire connection's physical Y-coordinate value (must end with
"1")

PNLZ1 "From" wire connection's physical Z-coordinate value (must end with
"1")

PNLXDIR1 Panel wire "From" connection point's direction - i.e. 4 = connects

from left, 1 = right, 2 = above, 8 = below (must end with "1")

PNLX2 "To" wire connection's physical X-coordinate value (must end with
"2")

PNLY2 "To" wire connection's physical Y-coordinate value (must end with
"2")

PNLZ2 "To" wire connection's physical Z-coordinate value (must end with
"2")

PNLXDIR2 Panel wire "To" connection point's direction - i.e. 4 = connects from
left, 1 = right, 2 = above, 8 = below (must end with "2")

CLEN Panel layout calculated wire length

Panel bill of material data fields to report

Generate reports | 825

 Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Bill of Material from the report list. Run the
report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Bill of Material from the report
list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator
dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

826 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Available Fields

The fields that are available depend on the report options you selected when
running the report.

ITEM Item number assignment

N/A Not applicable or not used

QTY Quantity

SUB Subassembly quantity

CATALOG Catalog part number assignment

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e. Siemens)

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get
part number groups

DESCRIPTION Multi-line description column

DESC General description line of text

QUERY2 2nd query field (middle pulldown on Catalog Lookup dialog box)

QUERY3 3rd query field (right-hand pulldown on Catalog Lookup dialog box)

MISC1-2 Catalog lookup data field

USER1-3 User field in catalog lookup database

TABNAM Catalog Database (vendor database) table name

TAGS Component tag names

HDL Entity handle number

Generate reports | 827

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of
project scratch database

Panel component exception data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Component Exception from the report list.
Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog
box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Component Exception from
the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report
Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

828 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Available Fields

TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP",

"P_TAG1")

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

COMMENT Comment or explanation of issue

PNL Value of the problem area on the footprint component;

shows the value on the panel layout (i.e. If the Comment
is "Mismatch LOC", the LOC attribute is different between
the Panel Layout and Schematic components).

SCHEM Value of the problem area on the component; shows the

value on the schematic drawing (i.e. If the Comment is
"Mismatch LOC", the LOC attribute is different between
the Panel Layout and Schematic components).

HDL Entity handle number

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

FULLFILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) with complete path

FILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg)

Panel component data fields to report

Generate reports | 829

 Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Component from the report list. Run the
report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Component from the report
list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator
dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

ITEM Item number assignment

830 | Chapter 14 Reports

TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1")

CNT Count

UNITS Units of measurement (i.e. AMPS, VOLTS, mA)

SUBQTY Sub-quantity

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e. Siemens)

CAT Catalog part number assignment

DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3

REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

MOUNT Mount attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-defined
"panel mounting" assignment

GROUP GROUPWITH attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-
defined "group with" assignment

RATING1-12 Rating 1 - 12 attribute values

CATDESC Catalog one-line description text

QUERY1 QUERY1 field pulled from catalog lookup and formatted into output
report

QUERY2 2nd query field (middle pulldown on Catalog Lookup dialog box)

MISC1-2 Catalog lookup data field

Generate reports | 831

USER1-3 User field in catalog lookup database

P1C2 parent = 1, child = 2

WDBLKNAM Related to the name of the component's catalog lookup table

BLOCK Block name

HDL Entity handle number

CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable

marker)

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get
part number groups

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

SEC Drawing section assignment

SUBSEC Drawing sub-section assignment

FAMILY Component family

WDTAGALT Related tag ID of device on alternate drawing type

WDTYPE Alternate type of symbol(i.e. "PN" for pneumatic, "HYD" for hydraulic)

FILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg)

Panel missing level/sequence assignments data

fields to report

832 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Missing Level/Sequence Assignments from
the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report
Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Missing Level/Sequence
Assignments from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format
on the Report Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1")

Generate reports | 833

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

MOUNT Mount attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-defined
"panel mounting" assignment

GROUP GROUPWITH attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-
defined "group with" assignment

HDL Entity handle number

CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable

marker)

DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

FILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg)

Panel wire annotation exception data fields to

report
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Wire Annotation Exception from the report
list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator
dialog box.

834 | Chapter 14 Reports

Access:

Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Wire Annotation Exception

from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Re-
port Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1")

PIN Wire connection terminal pin number

WIRENO Wire number

Generate reports | 835

WTYPE Alternate type of symbol(i.e. "PN" for pneumatic, "HYD" for hydraulic)

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

MOUNT Mount attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-defined
"panel mounting" assignment

GROUP GROUPWITH attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-
defined "group with" assignment

END1 Component and connection information on one end of wire (must

end with "1")

END2 Component and connection information on one end of wire (must

end with "2")

BLKNAME WDBLKNAM attribute value used for the linking of symbols to tables
in the Default CAT database

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database

HDL Entity handle number

CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable

marker, FP = Panel Footprint , FPT = terminal footprint)

PDESC Wire connection point description attribute value

SFX Values of R or L; used for terminal block symbols where we identify

the wire annotation attributes with an R or L for Right or Left of the
symbol

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

836 | Chapter 14 Reports

CBL Cable tag

TEXT Wire annotation text

Panel nameplate data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Nameplate from the report list. Run the report
and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Nameplate from the report
list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator
dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-

Generate reports | 837

 nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1")

DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e. Siemens)

CATALOG Catalog part number assignment

BLKNAME Block name

WITH Nameplate tied in with this footprint device tag

LOC Location attribute value

MOUNT Mount attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-defined
"panel mounting" assignment

GROUP GROUPWITH attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-
defined "group with" assignment

INST Installation attribute value

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

ITEM Item number assignment

RATING1-12 Rating 1 - 12 attribute values

POS1-12 Switch position description text (1 - 12)

838 | Chapter 14 Reports

HDL Entity handle number

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database

Panel terminal exception data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Terminal Exception from the report list. Run
the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Terminal Exception from
the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report
Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-

Generate reports | 839

 nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1")

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

COMMENT Comment or explanation of issue

PNL Value of the problem area on the footprint component; shows the
value on the panel layout (i.e. If the Comment is "Mismatch LOC",
the LOC attribute is different between the Panel Layout and Schem-
atic components).

SCHEM Value of the problem area on the component; shows the value on
the schematic drawing (i.e. If the Comment is "Mismatch LOC", the
LOC attribute is different between the Panel Layout and Schematic
components).

HDL Entity handle number

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

FULLFILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) with complete path

FILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg)

Panel wire connection data fields to report

840 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Wire Connection from the report list. Run
the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Wire Connection from the
report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Gen-
erator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1")

Generate reports | 841

PIN Wire connection terminal pin number

WIRENO Wire number

WTYPE Alternate type of symbol(i.e. "PN" for pneumatic, "HYD" for hydraulic)

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

MOUNT Mount attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-defined
"panel mounting" assignment

GROUP GROUPWITH attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-
defined "group with" assignment

END1 Component and connection information on one end of wire (must

end with "1")

END2 Component and connection information on one end of wire (must

end with "2")

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e. Siemens)

CAT Catalog part number assignment

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get
part number groups

BLKNAME WDBLKNAM attribute value used for the linking of symbols to tables
in the Default CAT database

ITEM Item number assignment on Panel drawings; there is no correlation

between schematic and panel item number attributes

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database

842 | Chapter 14 Reports

HDL Entity handle number

CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable

marker, FP = Panel Footprint , FPT = terminal footprint)

PDESC Wire connection point description attribute value

SFX Values of R or L; used for terminal block symbols where we identify

the wire annotation attributes with an R or L for Right or Left of the
symbol

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

X X-coordinate

Y Y-coordinate

Z Z-coordinate

CBL Cable tag

TEXT Wire annotation text

Autodesk Inventor Professional wire list data

fields to report
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Autodesk Inventor Professional Wire
List from the report list. Run the report. Select the location codes for the report
and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Autodesk Inventor
Professional Wire List from the report list. Run the report. Select the location

Generate reports | 843

Access:

codes for the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator
dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

WIRE ID Wire number

LOC1 "From" device's location code (must end with "1")

REFDES1 "From" device component tag-ID, reference designator #1 (must end

with "1")

844 | Chapter 14 Reports

PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with
"1")

LOC2 "To" device's location code (must end with "2")

REFDES2 "To" device component tag-ID, reference designator #2 (must end

with "2")

PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "2")

WLAY1 Wire layer "From" device (must end with "1")

NAME Wire layer name

REF1 Line or grid reference location for "From" device (must end with "1")

REF2 Line or grid reference location for "To" device (must end with "2")

SH1 Sheet assignment for "From" device (must end with "1")

SH2 Sheet assignment for "To" device (must end with "2")

CABLE ID Cable tag

CONDUCTOR ID Cable wire or cable core color

CBLLOC Cable location attribute value

CBLMFG Cable manufacturer attribute value

CBLCAT Cable catalog part number

CBLASMB Cable ASSYCODE assignment

DESC1CBL-DESC3CBL Cable description attribute values 1 - 3

CBLP1C2 Cable parent or child (parent = 1, child = 2)

Generate reports | 845

CMP:PIN1 "From" device's component tag and component terminal pin number

CMP:PIN2 "To" device's component tag and component terminal pin number

SEC1 "From" device's drawing section assignment (must end with "1")

SUB1 "From" device's drawing sub-section assignment (must end with "1")

SEC2 "To" device's drawing section assignment (must end with "2")

SUB2 "To" device's drawing sub-section assignment (must end with "2")

INST1 "From" device's installation code (must end with "1")

INST2 "To" device's installation code (must end with "2")

IECCMP1 "From" device's IEC tag name (must end with "1")

IECCMP2 "To" device's IEC tag name (must end with "2")

PD1 "From" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with
"1")

PD2 "To" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with "2")

SEQ1 "From" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "1")

SEQ2 "To" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "2")

PNLWDLEV1 "From" device's panel equivalent level (WDLEV) value (must end with
"1")

PNLWDLEV2 "To" device's panel equivalent level (WDLEV) value (must end with
"2")

CMPHDL1 "From" device's entity handle value (must end with "1")

846 | Chapter 14 Reports

CMPHDL2 "To" device's entity handle value (must end with "2")

DWGIX1 "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database (must end with "1")

DWGIX2 "To" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database (must end with "2")

DWGNAM1 "From" device's drawing %D value (must end with "1")

DWGNAM2 "To" device's drawing %D value (must end with "2")

CBLHDL Cable entity's handle value

CBLINST Cable installation assignment

CBLDWGIX Cable's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project

scratch database

WIREHDL1 "From" device's connected wire line entity handle value (must end
with "1")

WIREHDL2 "To" device's connected wire line entity handle value (must end with
"2")

XDIR1 "From" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 4 = connects

from left (must end with "1")

XDIR2 "To" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 2 = connects from
above (must end with "2")

PNLX1 "From" wire connection's physical X-coordinate value (must end with
"1")

PNLY1 "From" wire connection's physical Y-coordinate value (must end with
"1")

Generate reports | 847

PNLZ1 "From" wire connection's physical Z-coordinate value (must end with
"1")

PNLXDIR1 Panel wire "From" connection point's direction - i.e. 4 = connects

from left, 1 = right, 2 = above, 8 = below (must end with "1")

PNLX2 "To" wire connection's physical X-coordinate value (must end with
"2")

PNLY2 "To" wire connection's physical Y-coordinate value (must end with
"2")

PNLZ2 "To" wire connection's physical Z-coordinate value (must end with
"2")

PNLXDIR2 Panel wire "To" connection point's direction - i.e. 4 = connects from
left, 1 = right, 2 = above, 8 = below (must end with "2")

CLEN Panel layout calculated wire length

Bill of material data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Bill of Material from the report list. Run
the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Bill of Material from
the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report
Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

848 | Chapter 14 Reports

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Lines for description The Description field can be multilined. If you include the
Description field in your report, choose which lines make
up this field. Switch on and off the specific fields to define
the Description.

Available Fields

The fields that are available depend on the display options you selected when
running the report. Some fields are not applicable in certain display options.

ITEM Item number assignment; purchase list items for Purchase Tallied
Format reports.

N/A Not applicable or not used; if a report does not use a particular field,
N/A is used to line up the raw data and make them consistent
between all formats for the BOM

QTY Quantity

SUB Subassembly quantity

Generate reports | 849

CATALOG Catalog part number assignment

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e. Siemens)

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get
part number groups

DESCRIPTION Multiline description column

DESC General component description line of text

QUERY2 2nd query field (middle pulldown on Catalog Lookup dialog box)

QUERY3 3rd query field (right-hand pull-down on Catalog Lookup dialog box)

MISC1-2 Catalog lookup data fields

USER1-3 User fields in catalog lookup database

TABNAM Catalog database table name

TAGS or TAG Component tag names

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

HDL Entity handle number

DWGIX DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database

Cable summary data fields to report

850 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Cable Summary from the report list.
Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog
box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Cable Summary from
the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report
Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

CBL Cable tag

Generate reports | 851

DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e. Siemens)

CAT Catalog part number assignment

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get
part number groups

CBLDESCCAT Cable BOM single line description field (pulled from the catalog
lookup file for the cable's catalog part number query)

CBLQ1CAT Cable BOM query1 value (pulled from the catalog lookup file for the
cable's catalog part number query)

CBLQ2CAT Cable BOM query2 value (pulled from the catalog lookup file for the
cable's catalog part number query)

CBLMISC1CAT- Cable BOM miscellaneous fields (pulled from the catalog lookup file
CBLMISC2CAT for the cable's catalog part number query)

CBLUSER1CAT- Cable BOM user fields (pulled from the catalog lookup file for the
CBLUSER3CAT cable's catalog part number query)

REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference

LOC Location attribute value

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

HDL Entity handle number

INST Installation attribute value

852 | Chapter 14 Reports

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of
project scratch database

Cable from/to data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Cable From/To from the report list. Run
the report. Select the location codes for the report and click Change Report
Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Cable From/To from
the report list. Run the report. Select the location codes for the report and click
Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Generate reports | 853

 Available Fields

WIRENO Wire number

LOC1 "From" device's location code (must end with "1")

CMP1 "From" device's component tag ID (must end with "1")

PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with
"1")

LOC2 "To" device's location code (must end with "2")

CMP2 "To" device's component tag ID (must end with "2")

PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "2")

WLAY1 Wire layer "From" device (must end with "1")

WLAY2 Wire layer "To" device (must end with "2")

REF1 Line or grid reference location for "From" device (must end with "1")

REF2 Line or grid reference location for "To" device (must end with "2")

SH1 Sheet assignment for "From" device (must end with "1")

SH2 Sheet assignment for "To" device (must end with "2")

CBL Cable tag

CBLWC Cable wire or cable core color

CBLLOC Cable location attribute value

CBLMFG Cable Manufacturer attribute value

854 | Chapter 14 Reports

CBLCAT Cable catalog part number

CBLASMB Cable ASSYCODE assignment

CBLDESCCAT Cable BOM single line description field (pulled from the catalog
lookup file for the cable's catalog part number query)

CBLQ1CAT Cable BOM query1 value (pulled from the catalog lookup file for the
cable's catalog part number query)

CBLQ2CAT Cable BOM query2 value (pulled from the catalog lookup file for the
cable's catalog part number query)

CBLMISC1CAT - Cable BOM miscellaneous fields (pulled from the catalog lookup file
CBLMISC2CAT for the cable's catalog part number query)

CBLUSER1CAT - Cable BOM user fields (pulled from the catalog lookup file for the
CBLUSER3CAT cable's catalog part number query)

DESC1CBL-DESC3CBL Cable description attribute values 1 - 3

CBLP1C2 Cable parent or child (parent = 1, child = 2)

CMP:PIN1 "From" device's component tag and component terminal pin number

CMP:PIN2 "To" device's component tag and component terminal pin number

SEC1 "From" device's drawing section assignment

SUB1 "From" device's drawing sub-section assignment

SEC2 "TO" device's drawing section assignment

SUB2 "TO" device's drawing sub-section assignment

INST1 "From" device's installation code

Generate reports | 855

INST2 "To" device's installation code

IECCMP1 "From" device's IEC tag name (must end with "1")

IECCMP2 "To" device's IEC tag name (must end with "2")

PD1 "From" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with
"1")

PD2 "To" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with "2")

SEQ1 "From" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "1")

SEQ2 "To" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "2")

PNLWDLEV1 "From" device's panel equivalent level (WDLEV) value (must end with
"1")

PNLWDLEV2 "To" device's panel equivalent level (WDLEV) value (must end with
"2")

CMPHDL1 "From" device's entity handle value (must end with "1")

CMPHDL2 "To" device's entity handle value (must end with "2")

DWGIX1 "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database (must end with "1")

DWGIX2 "To" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database (must end with "2")

DWGNAM1 "From" device's drawing properties %D value (must end with "1")

DWGNAM2 "To" device's drawing properties %D value (must end with "2")

CBLHDL Cable entity's handle value

856 | Chapter 14 Reports

CBLINST Cable entity's handle value

CBLDWGIX Cable's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project

scratch database

WIREHDL1 "From" device's connected wire line entity handle value (must end
with "1")

WIREHDL2 "To" device's connected wire line entity handle value (must end with
"2")

XDIR1 "From" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 4 = connects

from left (must end with "1")

XDIR2 "To" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 2 = connects from
above (must end with "2")

PNLX1 "From" wire connection's physical X-coordinate value (must end with
"1")

PNLY1 "From" wire connection's physical Y-coordinate value (must end with
"1")

PNLZ1 "From" wire connection's physical Z-coordinate value (must end with
"1")

PNLXDIR1 Panel wire "From" connection point's direction - i.e. 4 = connects

from left, 1 = right, 2 = above, 8 = below (must end with "1")

PNLX2 "To" wire connection's physical X-coordinate value (must end with
"2")

PNLY2 "To" wire connection's physical Y-coordinate value (must end with
"2")

PNLZ2 "To" wire connection's physical Z-coordinate value (must end with
"2")

Generate reports | 857

PNLXDIR2 Panel wire "To" connection point's direction - i.e. 4 = connects from
left, 1 = right, 2 = above, 8 = below (must end with "2")

CLEN Panel layout calculated wire length

USER1_1 to USER20_1 "From" device's optional user field

USER1_2 to USER20_2 "To" device's optional user field

Cable label data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Wire Label from the report list. Run the
report and click Cable Label on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Wire Label from the
report list. Run the report and click Cable Label on the Report Generator dialog
box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Separator Specifies the special character to separate the selected fields.

Enter a special character to separate the selected fields in-
side the list box. Do this by selecting a field from the Fields

858 | Chapter 14 Reports

 to Report list, define the separator, select another field,
define a separator, and so on. You can also select the sep-
arator from a list.
The "\n" symbol stands for the new line. When you use
this as separator, the field displays in the new (next) line.

Available Fields

CBL Cable name

LOC1 Location of "From" components

FROM_CMPS Components that are in the "From" end of cable

LOC2 Location of "To" components

TO_CMPS Components that are in the "To" end of cable

DESC1CBL-DESC3CBL Cable's description lines 1-3

PLC component connection data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select PLC I/O Component Connection from
the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report
Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select PLC I/O Component
Connection from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format
on the Report Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Generate reports | 859

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

PLCWNUM Wire number associated with PLC I/O point

PLCTAG PLC tag ID value (attribute "TAG" or "TAG1")

PLCADDR PLC I/O point address (attribute "TAGAxx" where xx is "01"

- "xx")

PLCDESCA-PLCDESCE PLC I/O description text lines 1 - 5

PLCTERM PLC I/O terminal text value, attribute TERMxx

PLCTERMDESC PLC I/O terminal description text value, attribute TERM-

DESCxx

PLCINST PLC I/O module's Installation attribute value

PLCLOC PLC I/O module's Location attribute value

860 | Chapter 14 Reports

WLAY Wire layer name

PLCMFG PLC I/O module's Manufacturer attribute value

PLCCAT PLC I/O module's Catalog part number

PLCASSYCODE PLC I/O module's ASSYCODE attribute value

PLCTERMCODE PLC I/O terminal attribute suffix value (the "xx" part of
TERMxx)

PLCDWGIX PLC Drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project

PLCHDL PLC I/O module's AutoCAD handle value

PLCLINE1 PLC I/O module's LINE1 attribute value (miscellaneous text

such as "Rack" or "Slot")

PLCLINE2 PLC I/O module's LINE2 attribute value (miscellaneous text

such as "Rack" or "Slot")

CMPTAG Connected component tag ID (attributes "TAG1", "TAG2",

"TAGSTRIP")

CMPDESC1-3 Connected component description attribute values 1 - 3

CMPINST Connected component Installation attribute value

CMPLOC Connected component Location attribute value

CMPTERM Connected component TERMxx attribute value (the side

that connects to the PLC I/O point)

CMPTERMDESC Connected component TERMDESCxx attribute value (the

side that connects to the PLC I/O point)

Generate reports | 861

CMPMFG Connected component Manufacturer attribute value

CMPCAT Connected component catalog part number

CMPASSYCODE Connected component ASSYCODE attribute value

CMPDWGIX Connected component's Drawing DWGIX value as listed

in FILETIME table of project scratch database

CMPHDL Connected component's AutoCAD handle value

CMPBLKNAM Connected component's AutoCAD block name

TERMTAG Connected terminal's TAGSTRIP attribute value

TERMINST Connected terminal's Installation attribute value

TERMLOC Connected terminal's Location attribute value

TERMTERM Connected terminal's TERM or TERM01 attribute value

TERMTERMDESC Connected terminal's TERMDESC01 attribute value

TERMMFG Connected terminal's Manufacturer attribute value

TERMCAT Connected terminal's catalog part number

TERMASSYCODE Connected terminal's ASSYCODE attribute value

TERMDWGIX Connected terminal's Drawing DWGIX value as listed in

FILETIME table of project scratch database

TERMHDL Connected terminal's AutoCAD handle value

TERMBLKNAM Connected terminal's AutoCAD block name

CBL Cable tag

862 | Chapter 14 Reports

CBLWC Cable wire or cable core color

CBLHDL Cable entity's handle value

Component wire list data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Component Wire List from the report
list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator
dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Component Wire List
from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Re-
port Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-

Generate reports | 863

 nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

WIRENO Wire number

PIN Wire connection terminal pin number

TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1")

LOC Location attribute value

WLAY Wire layer name

P1C2 parent = 1, child = 2

REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

BLKNAME Block name

HDL Entity handle number

XTERM Wire connection X?TERMxx suffix. (for example, for attribute

X4TERM05 the value would be "05")

CBL Cable

CBLWC Cable wire or cable core color

NONC Contact attribute value; Normally Open (NO) or Normally Closed

(NC) contact state

864 | Chapter 14 Reports

SEC Drawing section assignment

SUBSEC Drawing sub-section assignment

TERMDESC Component wire connection TERMDESCxx value

INST Installation attribute value

DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e. Siemens)

CATALOG Catalog part number assignment

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get
part number groups

RATING1-12 Rating 1 - 12 attribute values

XTERMHDL Wire connection X?TERMxx attribute's entity handle name

XDIR Wire connection X?TERMxx attribute's direction code and suffix

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database

Connector details data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Connector Details from the report list.
Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog
box.

Generate reports | 865

Access:

Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Connector Details from

the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report
Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

CONNECTOR Tag ID of plug/jack connector

PIN Wire connection terminal pin number

TYPE Child contact type; P = Plug and J = Jack

866 | Chapter 14 Reports

WIRENO Wire number

DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e. Siemens)

CATALOG Catalog part number assignment

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get
part number groups

REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

HDL Entity handle number; used internally for programming or customiz-

ation

RATING1-12 Rating 1 - 12 attribute values

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database; used internally for programming or custom-
ization

Connector plug data fields to report

Generate reports | 867

 Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Connector Plug from the report list.
Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog
box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Connector Plug from
the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report
Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

WIRENO Wire number

868 | Chapter 14 Reports

PIN Wire connection terminal pin number

TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1")

LOC Location attribute value

WLAY Wire layer name

P1C2 parent = 1, child = 2

REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

BLKNAME Block name

HDL Entity handle number

XDIR Wire connection X?TERMxx attribute's direction code and suffix

CBL Cable

CBLWC Cable wire or cable core color

SEC Drawing section assignment

SUBSEC Drawing sub-section assignment

TERMDESC Component wire connection TERMDESCxx value

INST Installation attribute value

DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (for example, Siemens)

Generate reports | 869

CATALOG Catalog part number assignment

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get
part number groups

RATING1-12 Rating 1 - 12 attribute values

XTERMHDL Wire connection X?TERMxx attribute's entity handle name

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database

Connector summary data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Connector Summary from the report
list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator
dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Connector Summary
from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Re-
port Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

870 | Chapter 14 Reports

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

CONNECTOR Tag ID of plug/jack connector

MAX Maximum number of pins

USED Count of used or in-use pins

PINSUSED List of wire connection pin number in use

REPEATS Pin numbers repeated

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e. Siemens)

CATALOG Catalog part number assignment

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get
part number groups

HDL Entity handle number

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database

Generate reports | 871

 Component data fields to report
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Component from the report list. Run
the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Component from the
report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Gen-
erator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report
(including user-defined attributes). Select a field from
the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields
to Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to

Report list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields
to Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top
Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column
and the column label (default is Top Left). The vertic-
al portion of the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom)
is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature.
For example, if you select "Top Right" the report is
right-justified during the display, printing and when
saved to a file (the "top" portion is ignored). If you
put the report on the drawing, the report justification
is top right.

872 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Available Fields

ITEM Item number assignment

TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1")

CNT Count on panel component

UNITS Units of measurement (i.e. AMPS, VOLTS, mA) on panel component

SUBQTY Subassembly quantity

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (for example, Siemens)

CAT Catalog part number assignment

DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3

REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

RATING1-12 Rating 1 - 12 attribute values

CATDESC Catalog one-line description text

QUERY1 QUERY1 field pulled from catalog lookup

QUERY2 2nd query field (middle pulldown on Catalog Lookup dialog box)

MISC1-2 Catalog lookup data fields

USER1-3 User fields in catalog lookup database

P1C2 parent = 1, child = 2

Generate reports | 873

WDBLKNAM Name of the component's catalog lookup table

BLOCK Block name

HDL Entity handle number

CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable

marker)

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get
part number groups

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

SEC Drawing SEC assignment

SUBSEC Drawing SUBSEC assignment

FAMILY Component family

WDTAGALT Tag-ID of device on alternate drawing type

WDTYPE Alternate type of symbol (for example, "PN" for pneumatic, "HYD"
for hydraulic)

FILENAME AutoCAD drawing .dwg file name (with full path)

Missing bill of material data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Missing Bill of Material from the report
list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator
dialog box.

874 | Chapter 14 Reports

Access:

Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Missing Bill of Material

from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Re-
port Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top-right.

Available Fields

TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1")

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

Generate reports | 875

DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3

REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference

TABNAM Catalog database table name

HDL Entity handle number

CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable

marker)

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

FILENAME AutoCAD drawing .dwg file name (with full path)

Wire from/to data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Wire From/To from the report list. Run
the report. Select the location codes for the report and click Change Report
Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Wire From/To from the
report list. Run the report. Select the location codes for the report and click
Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

876 | Chapter 14 Reports

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

WIRENO Wire number

LOC1 "From" device's location code (must end with "1")

CMP1 "From" device's component tag ID (must end with "1")

PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with
"1")

LOC2 "To" device's location code (must end with "2")

CMP2 "To" device's component tag ID (must end with "2")

PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "2")

WLAY1 Wire layer "From" device (must end with "1")

WLAY2 Wire layer "To" device (must end with "2")

REF1 Line or grid reference location for "From" device (must end with "1")

Generate reports | 877

REF2 Line or grid reference location for "To" device (must end with "2")

SH1 Sheet assignment for "From" device (must end with "1")

SH2 Sheet assignment for "To" device (must end with "2")

CBL Cable tag

CBLWC Cable wire or cable core color

CBLLOC Cable location attribute value

CBLMFG Cable manufacturer attribute value

CBLCAT Cable catalog part number

CBLASMB Cable ASSYCODE assignment

DESC1CBL-DESC3CBL Cable description attribute values 1 - 3

CBLP1C2 Cable parent or child (parent = 1, child = 2)

CMP:PIN1 "From" device's component tag and component terminal pin number

CMP:PIN2 "To" device's component tag and component terminal pin number

SEC1 "From" device's drawing section assignment (must end with "1")

SUB1 "From" device's drawing sub-section assignment (must end with "1")

SEC2 "To" device's drawing section assignment (must end with "2")

SUB2 "To" device's drawing sub-section assignment (must end with "2")

INST1 "From" device's installation code (must end with "1")

INST2 "To" device's installation code (must end with "2")

878 | Chapter 14 Reports

IECCMP1 "From" device's IEC tag name (must end with "1")

IECCMP2 "To" device's IEC tag name (must end with "2")

PD1 "From" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with
"1")

PD2 "To" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with "2")

SEQ1 "From" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "1")

SEQ2 "To" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "2")

PNLWDLEV1 "From" device's panel equivalent panel (WDLEV) value (must end with
"1")

PNLWDLEV2 "To" device's panel equivalent panel (WDLEV) value (must end with
"2")

CMPHDL1 "From" device's entity handle value (must end with "1")

CMPHDL2 "To" device's entity handle value (must end with "2")

DWGIX1 "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database (must end with "1")

DWGIX2 "To" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database (must end with "2")

DWGNAM1 "From" device's drawing %D value (must end with "1")

DWGNAM2 "To" device's drawing %D value (must end with "2")

CBLHDL Cable entity's handle value

CBLINST Cable entity's installation attribute value

Generate reports | 879

CBLDWGIX Cable's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project
scratch database

WIREHDL1 "From" device's connected wire line entity handle value (must end
with "1")

WIREHDL2 "To" device's connected wire line entity handle value (must end with
"2")

XDIR1 "From" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 4 = connects

from left (must end with "1")

XDIR2 "To" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 2 = connects from
above (must end with "2")

PNLX1 "From" wire connection's physical X-coordinate value (must end with
"1")

PNLY1 "From" wire connection's physical Y-coordinate value (must end with
"1")

PNLZ1 "From" wire connection's physical Z-coordinate value (must end with
"1")

PNLXDIR1 Panel wire "From" connection point's direction - i.e. 4 = connects

from left, 1 = right, 2 = above, 8 = below (must end with "1")

PNLX2 "To" wire connection's physical X-coordinate value (must end with
"2")

PNLY2 "To" wire connection's physical Y-coordinate value (must end with
"2")

PNLZ2 "To" wire connection's physical Z-coordinate value (must end with
"2")

PNLXDIR2 Panel wire "To" connection point's direction - i.e. 4 = connects from
left, 1 = right, 2 = above, 8 = below (must end with "2")

880 | Chapter 14 Reports

CLEN Panel layout calculated wire length

USER1_1 to USER20_1 "From" device's optional user field

USER1_2 to USER20_2 "To" device's optional user field

PLC I/O address and descriptions data fields to

report
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select PLC I/O Address and Descriptions from
the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report
Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select PLC I/O Address and
Descriptions from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format
on the Report Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the

Generate reports | 881

 Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP",

"P_TAG1")

ADDR PLC I/O point's address assignment

TERM Terminal or terminal number assignment (not the STRIP-

ID value)

TERMDESC Component wire connection TERMDESCxx value

DESCA-DESCE PLC I/O point description attribute values (lines 1-5)

LREF Line reference

WIRENO Wire number

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (for example, Siemens)

CAT Catalog part number assignment

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query

to get part number groups

LINE1 PLC I/O LINE1 attribute description text

882 | Chapter 14 Reports

LINE2 PLC I/O LINE2 attribute description text

HDL Entity handle number

XTERMHDL Wire connection X?TERMxx attribute's entity handle name

TERMCODE Wire connection X?TERMxx attribute suffix (the "xx")

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

IEC_P Drawing's IEC project default - the %P value

IEC_I Drawing's IEC Installation default - the %I value

IEC_L Drawing's IEC Location default - the %L value

SEC Drawing section assignment

SUBSEC Drawing sub-section assignment

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME

table of project scratch database

Terminal numbers data fields to report

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Terminal Numbers from the report list.
Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog
box.

Generate reports | 883

Access:

Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Terminal Numbers from

the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report
Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

STRIP-ID Terminal strip TAGSTRIP ID name

TERM Terminal or terminal number assignment (not the STRIP-

ID value)

884 | Chapter 14 Reports

WIRENO Wire number

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

BLKNAME Block name

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e. Siemens)

CAT Catalog part number assignment

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query

to get part number groups

DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3

RATNG1-12 Rating 1 - 12 attribute values

HDL Entity handle number

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME

table of project scratch database

PLC modules used so far data fields to report

Generate reports | 885

 Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select PLC Modules Used So Far from the report
list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator
dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select PLC Modules Used So
Far from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the
Report Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

ADDR_BEG PLC beginning address

886 | Chapter 14 Reports

ADDR_END PLC ending address

TAG PLC tag value

MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e. Siemens)

CAT Catalog part number assignment

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get
part number groups

LINE1 PLC I/O LINE1 attribute description text

LINE2 PLC I/O LINE2 attribute description text

INST Installation attribute value

LOC Location attribute value

REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

SEC Drawing section assignment

SUBSEC Drawing sub-section assignment

DESC General description line of text

HDL Entity handle number

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database

Terminal plan data fields to report

Generate reports | 887

 Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Terminal Plan from the report list. Run
the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Terminal Plan from the
report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Gen-
erator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report
(including user-defined attributes). Select a field from
the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields
to Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to

Report list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields
to Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top
Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column
and the column label (default is Top Left). The vertic-
al portion of the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom)
is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature.
For example, if you select "Top Right" the report is
right-justified during the display, printing and when
saved to a file (the "top" portion is ignored). If you
put the report on the drawing, the report justification
is top right.

Available Fields

INST1 "From" device's installation code

888 | Chapter 14 Reports

LOC1 "From" device's location code (must end with "1")

CMP1 "From" device's component tag ID (must end with "1")

PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with
"1")

PD1 "From" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with
"1")

LAYCMP1 Layer of wire connecting to device component 1 (must end with "1")

CBL1 Cable ID tied to device component 1 (must end with "1")

CBLWC1 Cable wire color tied to device component 1 (must end with "1")

WNUM1 Wire number tied to device component 1 (must end with "1")

LAYTRM1 Layer of wire connecting to terminal side 1 (must end with "1")

STRIP-ID Terminal strip TAGSTRIP ID name

TD1 Terminal pin TERMDESC value for the first wire connection (must end
with "1")

TERM Terminal or terminal number assignment (not the STRIP-ID value)

TD2 Terminal pin TERMDESC value for the second wire connection (must
end with "2")

TINST Terminal symbol's installation value

TLOC Terminal symbol's location value

LAYTRM2 Layer of wire connecting to terminal side 2 (must end with "2")

WNUM2 Wire number tied to device component 2 (must end with "2")

Generate reports | 889

CBL2 Cable ID tied to device component 2 (must end with "2")

CBLWC2 Cable wire color tied to device component 2 (must end with "2")

LAYCMP2 Layer of wire connecting to device component 2 (must end with "2")

PD2 "To" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with "2")

PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "2")

CMP2 "To" device's component tag ID (must end with "2")

INST2 "To" device's installation code

LOC2 "To" device's location code (must end with "2")

SH Sheet - the %S value

REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference

HDL Entity handle number

XDIR1 "From" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 4 = connects

from left (must end with "1")

XDIR2 "To" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 2 = connects from
above (must end with "2")

DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of

project scratch database

Wire label data fields to report

890 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Wire Label from the report list. Run the
report and click Wire Label on the Report Generator dialog box.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Wire Label from the
report list. Run the report and click Wire Label on the Report Generator dialog
box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Separator Specifies the special character to separate the selected fields.

Enter a special character to separate the selected fields in-
side the list box. Do this by selecting a field from the Fields
to Report list, define the separator, select another field,
define a separator, and so on. You can also select the sep-
arator from a list.
The "\n" symbol stands for the new line. When you use
this as separator, the field displays in the new (next) line.

Available Fields

WIRENO Wire number

Generate reports | 891

CMP Component that connects to a wire (at any end) and is written to
the wire label

PIN Wire connection terminal pin number of the component that the
wire connects with

Wire conduit routing data fields to display

Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

On the Conduit Marker toolbar, click the arrow on the Conduit Reports tool to
access the Wire/Conduit Routing Report tool. Run the report and click Change
Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Wire/Conduit
Routing Report. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report
Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select

892 | Chapter 14 Reports

 "Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

CBL Cable tag

CBLWC Cable wire or cable core color

WIRENO Wire number

INST1 "From" device's installation code (must end with "1")

LOC1 "From" device's location code (must end with "1")

CMP1 "From" device's component tag ID (must end with "1")

PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with
"1")

INST2 "To" device's installation code (must end with "2")

LOC2 "To" device's location code (must end with "2")

CMP2 "To" device's component tag ID (must end with "2")

PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "2")

WLAY Wire layer name

ROUTING Conduit routing path description

Cross-reference table data fields to display

Generate reports | 893

 Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project
or drawing name and select Properties. Click the Cross-References tab. In the
component Cross-Reference Display section, select Table Format and click Setup.
In the Table Cross-Reference Format Setup dialog box, Table Style section, click
Define Columns.
From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project
Manager, right-click the project or drawing name and select Properties. Click
the Cross-References tab. In the component Cross-Reference Display section,
select Table Format and click Setup. In the Table Cross-Reference Format Setup
dialog box, Table Style section, click Define Columns

NOTE This can also be accessed from the Insert/Edit Component, Cross-Reference
section. Select Component override and click Setup. In the Cross-reference
component override dialog box, select Table Format and click Setup.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,

894 | Chapter 14 Reports

 printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

W1 Wire number - first wire connection on symbol (TERM01)

T1 Terminal pin number - first wire connection (TERM01)

TYPE Contact type - can be user defined and come from the Contact attrib-
ute on the child symbol - this gets overwritten from the contact
mapping in the dialog box

T2 Terminal pin number - second wire connection (TERM02)

W2 Wire number - second wire connection (TERM02)

REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

FILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg)

FULLFILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) with complete path

Data fields to display

Generate reports | 895

 Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.

Access:

From the Components menu, select Cross-Reference ➤ Cross-Reference Table.

Select the component to evaluate. Click Change Report Format on the Report
Generator dialog box.

Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including
user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to
transfer it into the Fields to Report list.

Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.

Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to
Report list.

Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report
list.

Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to
Report list.

Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left,
Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the
column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of
the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display,
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ig-
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report
justification is top right.

Available Fields

W1 Wire number - first wire connection on symbol (TERM01)

T1 Terminal pin number - first wire connection (TERM01)

896 | Chapter 14 Reports

TYPE Contact type - can be user defined and come from the Contact attrib-
ute on the child symbol - this gets overwritten from the contact
mapping in the dialog box

T2 Terminal pin number - second wire connection (TERM02)

W2 Wire number - second wire connection (TERM02)

REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference

SH Sheet - the %S value

SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value

FILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg)

FULLFILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) with complete path

Generate schematic reports

AutoCAD Electrical has multiple schematic reports that you can run. To access
the schematic reports, click the Schematic Reports tool on the main Electrical
toolbar or select Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports from the menu.

Bill of Materials reports

The Bill of Material reports report only components with assigned BOM
information. These reports provide the following BOM-related features:

■ Extract BOM reports on demand, active drawing or project-wide

■ Extract BOM reports on a per-location basis

■ Change BOM report format

■ Output BOM reports to ASCII report file

Schematic Reports | 897

 ■ Export BOM data to a spreadsheet or database program

■ Insert BOM as a table right on an AutoCAD drawing

■ List parent or stand-alone components without catalog information

Component report

This report performs a project-wide extract of all components found on your

wiring diagram set. This data includes component tags, location codes, location
reference, description text, ratings, catalog information, and block names.

Wire From/To report

If you marked components and/or terminals with location codes, you can
make good use of this report. This report first extracts component, terminal,
location code, and wire connection information from every drawing in the
project set. Then it displays a location list dialog box where you can make
your report's "from" and "to" location selections. All the location codes
AutoCAD Electrical found on the drawing set are listed on each side of this
dialog. Location "(??)" is also included in the list if AutoCAD Electrical found
any component or stand-alone terminal that didn't have an assigned location
code.

Component Wire List report

This report extracts the component wire connection data and displays it in a
dialog. Each entry shows a connection to a component, the wire number,
component tag name, terminal pin number, component location code (if
present), and the layer that the connected wire is on.

Connector Plug report

This report extracts plug/jack connection reports and optionally generates pin
charts. Since each wire tied to each connector pin displays in the report, each
pin has 2 entries - one for the 'in' wire and one for the 'out' wire. To create a
more useful report, select the PIN chart 'on' radio button at the bottom of the
Report Generator dialog box. Make sure the Remove duplicated pin numbers
toggle is checked and click OK. This reformats the report so each pin is listed
only once.

898 | Chapter 14 Reports

PLC I/O Address and Description report

This report lists each PLC module and its beginning and ending I/O address
numbers. It scans your drawing set and returns all individual I/O connection
points it finds. This includes up to five lines of description text and the
connected wire number for each I/O point.

PLC I/O Component Connection report

This report scans the selected drawing(s) and returns information about any
components connected to PLC I/O points. Data for the report starts at each
wire connection point and follows the connected wire. The first terminal
symbol, fuse symbol, or connector symbol that is hit reports in the column
marked with default "TERMTAG" label. The first schematic component reports
in the column with the "CMPTAG" label. If there are multiple instances, the
one closest to the PLC I/O point is the one that shows up in the report column.

PLC Modules Used So Far report

For this report, AutoCAD Electrical quickly scans the wiring diagram set. It
returns in a few moments and displays the I/O modules it finds. Each entry
shows the module's beginning and ending address.

Terminal Numbers report

This project-wide, stand-alone report lists all instances of terminals. Each entry
includes information tied directly to the terminal such as terminal number,
terminal strip number, and location code.

Terminal Plan report

This project-wide, stand-alone report does a wire network extraction. This

means it takes longer to generate, but the report includes wire number and
wire layer name information.

Connector Summary report

This report lists a single line for each connector tag along with pins used,
maximum pins allowed (if the parent carries the PINLIST information), and
a list of any repeated pin numbers used. You can run this report across the
project or for a single component.

Generate schematic reports | 899

 Connector Details report

This report extracts the component wire connection data and displays it in a
dialog box. Each entry shows a connection to a component, the wire number,
component tag name, terminal pin number, component location code (if
present), and the layer that the connected wire is on.

Cable Summary report

This project-wide cable conductor report gives a report listing all of the cable
marker tags (parent tags) found.

Cable From/To report

This project-wide cable conductor report lists the "from / to" for each cable
conductor along with the conductor's parent cable number, conductor color
code, and wire number (if present).

Wire Label report

This report lists wire markers/labels and can be used to create physical wire
or cable labels.

900 | Chapter 14 Reports

Generate a schematic report

1 Click the Schematic Reports tool.

2 Select which schematic report to generate from the report list.

3 Select to process the project, current drawing, or selected

components.

4 Specify any report options (if applicable).

5 Select installation or location codes to extract (if applicable).

6 Indicate whether to update the project database or the wire

connection table with out-of-date drawings.

7 Click OK.

8 In the Report Generator Window, sort, format, or edit the data

before sending the information to the printer, file, or the active
drawing file.
■ Edit Mode: Modifies the report before you insert it to your drawing.
You can move data up or down in the report, add lines from a catalog,
and delete lines.
■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.
■ Save to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file
outputs. Choose from: ASCII report, Comma Delimited, Excel
spreadsheet, Access database, and XML format.
■ User Post: Switch specific functions against the data in the report.
When you select a switch, the LISP routine runs a function against the
data and returns to the Report Generator Window.
■ Change Report Format: Changes what data fields are reported and
the order in which they appear. You can change the justification of
any column and the column label. The Description field can be multi-
lined. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose
which lines make up this field. Switch on and off the specific fields to
define the Description.

9 Once all modifications have been made to the report, save the
report, place the report on the drawing as a table, or print the
report.

Generate schematic reports | 901

 Schematic bill of material
The Bill of Material reports report only components with assigned BOM
information.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Bill of Material from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Bill of
Material from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing.

Include options

Include Cables Specifies to include cable information in the report.

Include Connectors Specifies to include connector information in the

report.

Include Jumpers Specifies to include jumper information in the re-

port.

All the above Specifies to cable, connector and jumper informa-

tion in the report.

List terminal numbers Lists each individual Tag-ID and terminal number
combination if selected. If unselected (default), the
terminals are combined on the same Tag-ID strip
into a single entry with a quantity.

Display option

Normal Tallied Format Identical component or component/assemblies are

tallied and reported as single line items (Ex: Red
pushbutton operator 800EP-F4 with 800E-A3L latch
and two 800E-3X10 N.O. contact blocks).

902 | Chapter 14 Reports

Normal Tallied Format (Group by Installa- Identical component or component/assemblies
tion/Location) with the same installation/location codes are tallied
and reported as single line items.

Display in Tallied Purchase List Format Each part becomes its own line item (i.e. no longer
any sub-assembly items) and each is tallied across
all component types. For example, all 800E-3X10
N.O. contact blocks for all components are reported
as a single line item.

Display in By TAG Format All instances of a given component-ID or terminal

tag are processed together and then reported as a
single entry.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2". Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Generate schematic reports | 903

 Freshen Project Database

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any
out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The sub-dialog box lists the format
files to select from.

Schematic cable summary

This project-wide cable conductor report gives a report listing all of the cable
marker tags (parent tags) found.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Cable Summary from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Cable
Summary from the report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2". Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You

904 | Chapter 14 Reports

 can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Freshen Project Database

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any
out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The sub-dialog box lists the format
files to select from.

Schematic cable from/to

This project-wide cable conductor report lists the "from / to" for each cable
conductor along with the conductor's parent cable number, conductor color
code, and wire number (if present).

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Cable From/To from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Cable
From/To from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project, the active drawing, or selected cables.

Freshen Project Database

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any
out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Schematic PLC I/O component connection

This report scans the selected drawing(s) and returns information about any
components connected to PLC I/O points. Data for the report starts at each
wire connection point and follows the connected wire. The first terminal
symbol, fuse symbol, or connector symbol that is hit reports in the column
marked with default "TERMTAG" label. The first schematic component reports

Generate schematic reports | 905

 in the column with the "CMPTAG" label. If there are multiple instances, the
one closest to the PLC I/O point is the one that shows up in the report column.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select PLC I/O Component Connection from
the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select PLC I/O
Component Connection from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2". Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

List

Lists drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the project's wire connection
table.

906 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Freshen Wire Connection Table

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include
any out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The sub-dialog box lists the format
files to select from.

Schematic component wire list

This report extracts the component wire connection data and displays it in a
dialog. Each entry shows a connection to a component, the wire number,
component tag name, terminal pin number, component location code (if
present), and the layer that the connected wire is on.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Component Wire List from the report
list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Compon-
ent Wire List from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or select components.

Options

Specifies to include stand-alone terminals or plug-jack connectors in the report.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Generate schematic reports | 907

 Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2". Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

List

Lists drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the project's wire connection
table.

Freshen Wire Connection Table

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include
any out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The sub-dialog box lists the format
files to select from.

Schematic connector details

AutoCAD Electrical extracts the component wire connection data and displays
it in a dialog box. Each entry shows a connection to a component, the wire
number, component tag name, terminal pin number, component location
code (if present), and the layer that the connected wire is on.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Connector Details from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Connector
Details from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project or a single pick.

908 | Chapter 14 Reports

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2". Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Location, type the location code in the box, or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Freshen Project Database

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any
out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Schematic connector plug

This report extracts plug/jack connection reports and optionally generates pin
charts. Since each wire tied to each connector pin displays in the report, each
pin has 2 entries - one for the 'in' wire and one for the 'out' wire. To create a
more useful report, select the PIN chart 'on' radio button at the bottom of the
Report Generator dialog box. Make sure the Remove duplicated pin numbers

Generate schematic reports | 909

 toggle is checked and click OK. This reformats the report so each pin is listed
only once.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Connector Plug from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Connector
Plug from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project, the active drawing, or selected wires.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Location, type the location code in the box, or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

List

Lists drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the project's wire connection
table.

910 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Freshen Wire Connection Table

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include
any out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Schematic connector summary

This report lists a single line for each connector tag along with pins used,
maximum pins allowed (if the parent carries the PINLIST information), and
a list of any repeated pin numbers used. You can run this report across the
project or for a single component.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Connector Summary from the report
list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Connector
Summary from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project or a single pick.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code

Generate schematic reports | 911

 that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Location, type the location code in the box, or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Freshen Project Database

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any
out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Schematic component
This report extracts the component wire connection data and displays it in a
dialog. Each entry shows a connection to a component, the wire number,
component tag name, terminal pin number, component location code (if
present), and the layer that the connected wire is on.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Component from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Compon-
ent from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing.

Options

Specifies to include components, cable markers, or connectors in the report.

You can also indicate to include the children for the selected options.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported.

912 | Chapter 14 Reports

 After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Location, type the location code in the box, or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Freshen Project Database

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any
out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Schematic missing bill of material

Extracts the information from the active drawing or project and displays a list
of parent or stand-alone components without catalog information.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Missing Bill of Material from the report
list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Missing
Bill of Material from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing.

Generate schematic reports | 913

 Options

Specifies to include components, cable markers, connectors, or terminals in

the report.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Location, type the location code in the box, or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Freshen Project Database

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any
out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Schematic wire from/to

If you marked components and/or terminals with location codes, you can
make good use of this report. AutoCAD Electrical first extracts component,
terminal, location code, and wire connection information from every drawing

914 | Chapter 14 Reports

 in the project set. Then it displays a location list dialog box where you can
make your report's "from" and "to" location selections. All the location codes
AutoCAD Electrical found on the drawing set are listed on each side of this
dialog. Location "(??)" is also included in the list if AutoCAD Electrical found
any component or stand-alone terminal that didn't have an assigned location
code.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Wire From/To from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Wire
From/To from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project, the active drawing, or selected wires.

List

Lists drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the project's wire connection
table.

Freshen Wire Connection Table

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include
any out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Schematic PLC I/O address and descriptions

This report lists each PLC module and its beginning and ending I/O address
numbers. It scans your drawing set and returns all individual I/O connection
points it finds. This includes up to five lines of description text and the
connected wire number for each I/O point.

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select PLC I/O Address and Descriptions
from the report list.

Generate schematic reports | 915

 From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select PLC I/O
Address and Descriptions from the report list.
Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Location, type the location code in the box, or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Freshen Project Database

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any
out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Schematic terminal numbers

916 | Chapter 14 Reports

 This project-wide, stand-alone report lists all instances of terminals. Each entry
includes information tied directly to the terminal such as terminal number,
terminal strip number, and location code.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Terminal Numbers from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Terminal
Numbers from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Location, type the location code in the box, or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Freshen Project Database

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any
out-of-date drawing files.

Generate schematic reports | 917

 Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Schematic terminal plan

This project-wide, stand-alone report does a wire network extraction. This
means it takes longer to generate, but the report includes wire number and
wire layer name information.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Terminal Plan from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Terminal
Plan from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or select components.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Location, type the location code in the box, or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

918 | Chapter 14 Reports

 List

Lists drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the project's wire connection
table.

Freshen Wire Connection Table

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include
any out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Schematic PLC modules used so far

For the PLC Modules Used So Far report, AutoCAD Electrical quickly scans
the wiring diagram set. It returns in a few moments and displays the I/O
modules it finds. Each entry shows the module's beginning and ending address.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select PLC Modules Used So Far from the report
list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select PLC
Modules Used So Far from the report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Generate schematic reports | 919

 Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
After you click Named Location, type the location code in the box, or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Freshen Project Database

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any
out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Schematic wire label

This report lists wire markers/labels and can be used to create physical wire
or cable labels.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Wire Label from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Wire Label
from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project, the active drawing, or selected wires.

NOTE If you select Active drawing (pick), you must click, the wire rather than the
wire number.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components

920 | Chapter 14 Reports

without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wildcards are supported.
Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2". Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

List

Lists drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the project's wire connection
table.

Freshen Wire Connection Table

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include
any out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Location code selection for from/to reporting

When you select to run a Wire From/To report, AutoCAD Electrical extracts
component, terminal, location code, and wire connection information from
the selected drawings. This dialog box allows you to make your report’s “from”
and “to” location selections. All of the location codes AutoCAD Electrical
found on the drawing set are listed on each side of this dialog box. Location

Generate schematic reports | 921

 “(??)” is also included in the list if AutoCAD Electrical found any component
or stand-alone terminals that didn’t have an assigned location code.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Wire From/To from the report list.
Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or selected wires.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Wire
From/To from the report list. Specify whether to process the project, active
drawing, or selected wires.

Select location codes from the left and right-hand lists to build the the report’s
from/to combinations shown in the middle of the dialog box. Click OK to
display the report. AutoCAD Electrical quickly filters and formats the extracted
data and presents it in the Report Generator dialog box. You can then save it
to a text report file, a comma-delimited file to import into a spreadsheet or
database program, or insert it on to a drawing in table format.

Location codes Displays the “from” (left-hand list) and “to” location
codes (right-hand list) found on the drawing(s).
Clicking a location code moves the selected code
from these lists to the Report From/To list in the
center of the dialog box.

Report From/To Displays the combination of location codes you

selected from the Location Code lists. This is used
to generate the Wire From/To report.

Buttons ■ All >> or All <<: Adds or removes all of the loc-
ation codes from the Report From/To list de-
pending on which side of the dialog box the
button is located.
■ << or> > : Removes the selected location code
from the Report From/To list.

Multiple Combinations Displays the Select Multiple From/To Location

Combinations for Report dialog box. Each location
code in the “From” side is linked to each location
code in the “To” side of the report. For example,
if you select MACHINE (from) and FLOOR (to) in

922 | Chapter 14 Reports

 addition to MCAB5 (from) and JBOX1 (to) the fol-
lowing combinations are created:
MACHINE -> FLOOR
MACHINE -> JBOX1
MCAB5 -> FLOOR
MCAB5 -> JBOX1
Each of the combinations is processed and com-
bined into a single report. Adjust the list as desired
(for example, you can select to remove highlighted
combinations or keep only those combinations you
highlight in the list) and click OK.

Include reverse sequences Includes reversed wire connections in the report. If

unselected, some Wire From/To combinations may
be excluded due to wire sequencing.

Generate panel reports

AutoCAD Electrical has multiple panel reports that you can run. To access the
panel reports, click the Panel Reports tool on the Panel Layout toolbar or select
Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports from the menu.

Bill of Material report

This report parallels the Schematic BOM report, but deals with panel
component and terminal footprint symbols and nameplates. Optionally, it
can include schematic items that are not referenced on the panel layouts (for
example, field devices). You can customize the scope of the report by filtering
on certain location values (for example, report for CAB1 items only), process
only a subset of drawings, or include/exclude certain categories of items. The
report displays and tallies like items (for example, same part number) together.
Those with extra subassembly items are shown with a SUB multiplier value.

Component report

This report lists every occurrence of a smart panel component footprint found
on the current drawing or in the project drawing set. You can customize the

Panel Reports | 923

 scope of the report by filtering on certain location values (for example, report
for CAB1 items only), process only a subset of drawings, or include/exclude
certain categories of items. Each extracted panel component is listed as its
own line item. If it has a part number that results in subassembly part numbers,
or has been individually annotated with multi-BOM part numbers, each
additional part number is a line item right below the main line item.

NOTE This report will not include panel terminals unless you check that option.

Nameplate report

This report is similar to the panel component report, but filters out all but
nameplate symbols.

Wire Connection report

Wire connection reports, extracted from the schematic wiring diagrams, can
be formatted and inserted next to panel footprint symbols as simple wiring
tables. AutoCAD Electrical extracts and formats a small report of wire
connection information for the selected components, referencing the wire
extract file. If your footprint symbols carry the AutoCAD Electrical X?TERMxx
attributes, AutoCAD Electrical reports their XYZ wire connection location.
The location is offset by the value defined in Panel Configuration dialog box.

Component Exception report

This report provides error checking between the schematics and panel layout
drawings. AutoCAD Electrical looks at the selected components, both schematic
and panel, looking for a match in the project. For each schematic component
selected, it tries to find a matching panel component based on tag, location,
and installation information. If a match is found, it compares catalog and
description information, looking for any discrepancies. AutoCAD Electrical
then looks at each selected panel component looking for a matching schematic
component in the same way.

Terminal Exception report

This report provides error checking between the schematic terminals and
panel layout terminals. AutoCAD Electrical looks at the selected terminals,
both schematic and panel, looking for a match in the project. For each
schematic terminal selected, it tries to find a matching panel terminal based
on tag, location, and installation information. If a match is found, it compares
catalog information, looking for any discrepancies. AutoCAD Electrical then

924 | Chapter 14 Reports

looks at each selected panel terminal looking for a matching schematic terminal
in the same way.

Wire Annotation Exception report

This report lists which physical component symbol doesn't have a From and
a To for wire annotation information. For wire annotation, the panel
component symbols contain wiring information as either attributed or Mtext
data. This is used as a troubleshooting mechanism to aid in the assignment
of wiring annotation. End1 is the end of the wire that contains the annotation
and End2 is the end of the wire that was annotated on End1, but is not found
in the range of drawings selected.

Missing Level/Sequencing Assignments report

This report lists which component symbols do not have leveling and
sequencing information already assigned to them. This is used as a
troubleshooting mechanism to aid in the assignment of leveling and
sequencing information to provide better wire routing capabilities.

Generate panel reports | 925

 Generate a panel report

1 Click the Panel Reports tool.

2 Select which panel report to generate from the report list.

3 Select to process the project, active drawing, or selected com-

ponents.

4 Select installation or location codes to extract (if applicable).

5 Specify to extract any installation or location codes (if applic-

able).

6 Indicate whether to update the project database with out-of-

date drawings.

7 Click OK.

8 In the Report Generator Window, sort, format, or edit the data

before sending the information to the printer, file, or the active
drawing file.
■ Edit Mode: Modifies the report before you insert it in your drawing.
You can move data up or down in the report, add lines from a catalog,
and delete lines.
■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.
■ Save to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file
outputs. Choose from: ASCII report, Comma Delimited, Excel
spreadsheet, Access database, and XML format.
■ User Post: Switches specific functions against the data in the report.
When you select a switch, the LISP routine runs a function against the
data and returns to the Report Generator Window.
■ Change Report Format: Changes which data fields are reported and
the order in which they appear. You can change the justification of
any column and the column label. The Description field can be multi-
lined. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose
which lines make up this field. Switch on and off the specific fields to
define the Description.

9 Once all modifications have been made to the report, save the
report, place the report on the drawing as a table, or print the
report.

926 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Panel bill of materials
This report parallels the Schematic BOM report, but deals with panel
component and terminal footprint symbols and nameplates. Optionally, it
can include schematic items that are not referenced on the panel layouts (for
example, field devices). You can customize the scope of the report by filtering
on certain location values (for example, report for CAB1 items only), process
only a subset of drawings, or include/exclude certain categories of items. The
report displays and tallies like items (for example, same part number) together.
Those with extra subassembly items are shown with a "SUB" multiplier value.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Bill of Material from the report list.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Bill of Material from the report
list.

Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing.

Include options

Include Nameplates Specifies to include nameplate information in the

report.

Include Cable/Connectors Specifies to include connector information in the

report.

All the above Specifies to cable, connector and nameplate inform-

ation in the report.

List terminal numbers Lists each individual Tag-ID and terminal number
combination if selected. If unselected (default), the
terminals are combined on the same Tag-ID strip
into a single entry with a quantity.

Include Jumpers Specifies to include jumper information in the re-

port.

Full: include schematic components not refer- Specifies to include all schematic component inform-
enced on panel layout ation not found on the panel layout in the report.

Generate panel reports | 927

 Display option

Normal Tallied Format Identical component or component/assemblies are

tallied and reported as single line items (Ex: Red
pushbutton operator 800EP-F4 with 800E-A3L latch
and two 800E-3X10 N.O. contact blocks).

Normal Tallied Format (Group by Installa- Identical component or component/assemblies

tion/Location) with the same installation/location codes are tallied
and reported as single line items.

Display in Tallied Purchase List Format Each part becomes its own line item (i.e. no longer
any sub-assembly items) and each is tallied across
all component types. For example, all 800E-3X10
N.O. contact blocks for all components are reported
as a single line item.

Display in By TAG Format All instances of a given component-ID or terminal

tag are processed together and then reported as a
single entry.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.

928 | Chapter 14 Reports

 After you click Named Location, type the location code in the box, or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Freshen Project Database

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any
out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Panel component exception

This report provides error checking between the schematics and panel layout
drawings. AutoCAD Electrical looks at the selected components, both schematic
and panel, looking for a match in the project. For each schematic component
selected, it tries to find a matching panel component based on tag, location,
and installation information. If a match is found, it compares catalog and
description information, looking for any discrepancies. AutoCAD Electrical
then looks at each selected panel component looking for a matching schematic
component in the same way.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Component Exception from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Component
Exception from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or a selected component.

Conditions for Report

Specifies which conditions the report checks for: whether the panel item is
on the schematic, whether the schematic item is on a panel, if there are
multiple instances of the terminal, and if there is a mismatch between
schematic and panel terminals.

Generate panel reports | 929

 Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Redisplay Last Run

Displays the previously extracted report.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The sub-dialog box lists the format
files to select from.

Panel component
This report lists every occurrence of a smart panel component footprint found
on the current drawing or in the project drawing set. You can customize the
scope of the report by filtering on certain location values (for example, report
for CAB1 items only), process only a subset of drawings, or include/exclude
certain categories of items. Note: this report will not include panel terminals
unless you check that option. Each extracted panel component is listed as its
own line item. If it has a part number that results in subassembly part numbers,

930 | Chapter 14 Reports

 or has been individually annotated with multi-BOM part numbers, each
additional part number is a line item right below the main line item.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Component from the report list.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Component from the report
list.

Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing.

Options

Specifies to include nameplates or terminals in the report. You can also indicate
to skip components with blank device TAG values or blank manufacturer or
catalog values.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2". Wild-cards are supported.
After you select Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Generate panel reports | 931

 Freshen Project Database

Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any
out-of-date drawing files.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Missing level/sequence assignments

This report lists which component symbols do not have leveling and
sequencing information already assigned to them. This is used as a
troubleshooting mechanism to aid in the assignment of leveling and
sequencing information to provide better wire routing capabilities.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Missing Level/Sequencing Assignments from
the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Missing
Level/Sequencing Assignments from the report list.

In the Missing Level/Sequence Assignments dialog box, click Show to display

temporary graphics around the insertion point of the panel layout symbols
or click Report to run the report.
Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

932 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2". Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The sub-dialog box lists the format
files to select from.

Wire annotation exception

This report lists which physical component symbol doesn't have a From and
a To for wire annotation information. For wire annotation, the panel
component symbols contain wiring information as either attributed or Mtext
data. This is used as a troubleshooting mechanism to aid in the assignment
of wiring annotation. End1 is the end of the wire that contains the annotation
and End2 is the end of the wire that was annotated on End1, but is not found
in the range of drawings selected.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Wire Annotation Exception from the report
list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Wire Annotation
Exception from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.

Generate panel reports | 933

 Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2". Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The sub-dialog box lists the format
files to select from.

Panel nameplate
This report is similar to the panel component report, but filters out all but
nameplate symbols.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Nameplate from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Nameplate
from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or a selected component.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.

934 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Redisplay Last Run

Displays the previously extracted report.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Panel terminal exception

This report provides error checking between the schematic terminals and
panel layout terminals. AutoCAD Electrical looks at the selected terminals,
both schematic and panel, looking for a match in the project. For each
schematic terminal selected, it tries to find a matching panel terminal based
on tag, location, and installation information. If a match is found, it compares
catalog information, looking for any discrepancies. AutoCAD Electrical then
looks at each selected panel terminal looking for a matching schematic terminal
in the same way.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Terminal Exception from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Terminal Ex-
ception from the report list.

Generate panel reports | 935

 Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or a selected component.

Conditions for Report

Specifies which conditions the report checks for: whether the panel item is
on the schematic, whether the schematic item is on a panel, if there are
multiple instances of the terminal, and if there is a mismatch between
schematic and panel terminals.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Redisplay Last Run

Displays the previously extracted report.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Panel wire connection

936 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Wire connection reports, extracted from the schematic wiring diagrams, can
be formatted and inserted next to panel footprint symbols as simple wiring
tables. AutoCAD Electrical extracts and formats a small report of wire
connection information for the selected components, referencing the wire
extract file. If your footprint symbols carry the AutoCAD Electrical X?TERMxx
attributes, AutoCAD Electrical reports their XYZ wire connection location.
The location is offset by the value defined in Panel Configuration dialog box.

Access:

Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Wire Connection from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Wire Connection
from the report list.

Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or a selected component.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location
code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
After you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or
click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD
Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named
installation search.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components
without a location code, or only components marked with a location code
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for
components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Generate panel reports | 937

 Redisplay Last Run

Displays the previously extracted report.

Format

Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files
to select from.

Overview of format files

A Format File (.set file) can be used to pre-format a report for both
manually-run reports and automatic reports. When running automatic reports
more options within the .set file are used since user input is not required for
each report. (Automatic reports are covered in next section). You can create
as many format files as you want. If you are using updatable, intelligent tables,
a format file is the third item that makes a report table unique. If you want
to be able to insert multiple updatable tables for the same report with the
same scope you need to use different format files for each report. If you are
not inserting updatable tables, or the report or scope is different, then you do
not need to use different format files.
A format file defines which fields to include from the available fields, the field
order, justification, and column label. This information from the format file
is used for both manual and automatic reports. When running automatic
reports, the format file can also contain information for saving the report to
file(s) and/or putting the report on the drawing(s) as a report table. The Report
Format File Setup dialog box allows you to create or modify your format files.
You can enter in X-Y coordinates for the first section or click Pick to select a
location. If you are breaking your report table into sections and are allowing
multiple table sections per drawing, you can define the distance from one
table section to the next. The value entered here is the distance between the
end of one table section and the start of the next. For example, if you want 2
inches between table sections horizontally, enter a 2 as the X-Distance value.
A blank value is interpreted as zero.

NOTE Your format file can be saved using any file name but is given a ".set" file
extension. The format files can be edited using any text file editor but it is not
recommended since the syntax for the files is somewhat complicated. It is
recommended that you use the Report Format File Setup dialog box to create or
modify your format files. If you are going to use Automatic Reports to create output
files click "Save Report to File".

938 | Chapter 14 Reports

You can select each file type available for the selected report and enter one
file name per type. If multiple file types are selected, when the report is run
using the Automatic Reports, each file is created from that report data.

Overview of format files | 939

 Define format files

1 Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the

Report Format File Setup tool.

2 Click the Report Format File Setup tool.

NOTE You can also open this dialog box by clicking Format File
Setup on the Automatic Report Selection (page 993)dialog box.

3 Select which report to generate a format file for or open an

existing format file.

4 Specify any report options (if applicable).

5 Select installation or location codes to extract (if applicable).

6 (Optional) Select to add special break values to the page

header. Selecting a special break of Installation/Location, dis-
plays the values for these devices in the report section header.

7 Sort or format the data before saving the format file.

TIP If you are going to use the format file in automatic reports
you should define either the Save Report to File options and/or
Put on Drawing options since the reports are not displayed in the
Report Generator dialog box.

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output
file from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple
file outputs. Choose from: ASCII report, Comma Delimited, Excel
spreadsheet, Access database, and XML format.
■ Change Report Fields: Changes which data fields are reported and
the order in which they appear. You can change the justification of
any column and the column label. The Description field can be multi-
lined. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose
which lines make up this field. Switch on and off the specific fields to
define the Description.
■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup (page 806)dialog
box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your
drawing.

940 | Chapter 14 Reports

 ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of fields in the report.

8 Save the format file for later retrieval and usage when generat-
ing reports.

9 Click Done.

Report format file setup - panel bill of material

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Bill of Material from the Panel report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Bill
of Material from the Panel report list.

Include options

Specifies whether to include nameplates, cable/connectors, or both in the

report. You can also indicate whether to include schematic components not
referenced on the panel layout.

Display option

■ Normal Tallied Format: identical component or component/assemblies

are tallied and reported as single line items (Ex: Red pushbutton operator
800EP-F4 with 800E-A3L latch and two 800E-3X10 N.O. contact blocks).

■ Normal Tallied Format (Group by Installation/Location): identical

component or component/assemblies with the same installation/location
codes are tallied and reported as single line items.

■ Display in Tallied Purchase List Format: each part becomes its own line
item (i.e. no longer any sub-assembly items) and each is tallied across all
component types. For example, all 800E-3X10 N.O. contact blocks for all
components are reported as a single line item.

■ Display in By TAG Format: all instances of a given component-ID or

terminal tag are processed together and then reported as a single entry.

Overview of format files | 941

 Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. The Description field is handled a little
differently than the other fields. This field can be a multi-line field which
is actually made up of multiple fields. If you include the Description field
in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on
and off the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

942 | Chapter 14 Reports

 ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the panel
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - panel component

exception
Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Component Exception from the Panel report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Component Exception from the Panel report list.

Overview of format files | 943

 Conditions for Report

Specifies which conditions the report checks for: the panel item is not on the
schematic, the schematic item is not on a panel, multiple instances of the
component, and if there is a mismatch between schematic components and
panel components.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your

944 | Chapter 14 Reports

 report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the panel
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - panel component

Overview of format files | 945

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Component from the Panel report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Component from the Panel report list.

Options

Specifies to include nameplates, cables, connectors, terminals, or all of them

in the report. You can also indicate to skip components with blank device
TAG values or blank manufacturer or catalog values.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.

946 | Chapter 14 Reports

 The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the panel
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

Overview of format files | 947

 ■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - missing level/sequence

assignments
Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File
Setup tool. Select Missing Level/Sequence Assignments from the Panel report
list.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Missing
Level/Sequence Assignments from the Panel report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
After you pick the Named Installation button, you can type the installation
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
After you pick the Named Location button, you can type the location code
in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a
list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file
outputs. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited (.csv), Excel
spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml) format.

948 | Chapter 14 Reports

 The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options are shown
on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. The Description field is handled a little
differently than the other fields. This field can be a multi-line field which
is actually made up of multiple fields. If you include the Description field
in your report, choose which lines make up this field. Switch on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK in the dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you must save the data after
you select Done to keep the changes.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - wire annotation

exception

Overview of format files | 949

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File
Setup tool. Select Wire Annotation Exception from the Panel report list.
Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Wire Annotation
Exception from the Panel report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported.
After you click the Named Installation button, you can type the installation
code in the box, or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild cards are supported.
After you click the Named Location button, you can type the location code
in the box, or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a
list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options are shown
on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column

950 | Chapter 14 Reports

 and even the column label. The Description field is handled a little
differently than the other fields. This field can be a multi-line field which
is actually made up of multiple fields. If you include the Description field
in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Switch on and
off the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK in the dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you must save the data after
you select Done to keep the changes.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the "Documents and Settings\{user name}" subdirectory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user subdirectory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - panel nameplate

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Nameplate from the Panel report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Nameplate from the Panel report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,

Overview of format files | 951

 or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

952 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the panel
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - panel terminal exception

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Terminal Exception from the Panel report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Terminal Exception from the Panel report list.

Conditions for Report

Specifies which conditions the report checks for: the panel item is not on the
schematic, the schematic item is not on a panel, multiple instances of the
terminal, and if there is a mismatch between schematic terminals and panel
terminals.

Overview of format files | 953

 Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

954 | Chapter 14 Reports

 NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the panel
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - panel wire connection

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Wire Connection from the Panel report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Wire Connection from the Panel report list.

Overview of format files | 955

 Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

956 | Chapter 14 Reports

 NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the panel
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic AIP wire list

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Autodesk Inventor Professional Wire List from the
Schematic report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Autodesk Inventor Professional Wire List from the Schematic report list.

Overview of format files | 957

 Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic bill of

material

958 | Chapter 14 Reports

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File
Setup tool. Select Bill of Material from the Schematic report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Bill
of Material from the Schematic report list.

Include options

Specifies to include cables, connectors, or both in the report.

Display option

■ Normal Tallied Format: identical component or component/assemblies

are tallied and reported as single line items (for example, Red pushbutton
operator 800EP-F4 with 800E-A3L latch and two 800E-3X10 N.O. contact
blocks).

■ Normal Tallied Format (Group by Installation/Location): identical

component or component/assemblies with the same installation/location
codes are tallied and reported as single line items.

■ Display in Tallied Purchase List Format: each part becomes its own line
item (for example, no longer any subassembly items) and each is tallied
across all component types. For example, all 800E-3X10 N.O. contact blocks
for all components are reported as a single line item.

■ Display in By TAG Format: all instances of a given component-ID or

terminal tag are processed together and reported as a single entry.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you click Named Installation, you can type the installation code in the
box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes.

Overview of format files | 959

 Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you click Named Location, you can type the location code in the box
or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file
outputs. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited (.csv), Excel
spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml) format.
First Section Only shows only the selected option (such as title line or time
and date) on the first section of the report if multiple sections are used. If
not checked, the selected options are shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can change the justification of any column and
the column label. The Description field can be multi-lined. If you include
the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this
field. Toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you must save the data after
you click Done to keep the changes you made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The list
displays the report-specific content to apply to the special break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

960 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard drive for later retrieval
and usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic cable from/to

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Cable From/To from the Schematic report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Cable From/To from the Schematic report list.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

Overview of format files | 961

 ■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic cable

summary

962 | Chapter 14 Reports

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Cable Summary from the Schematic report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Cable Summary from the Schematic report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column

Overview of format files | 963

 and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

NOTE You cannot open format files created prior to AutoCAD Electrical 2005
for this report.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

964 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Report format file setup - schematic PLC I/O
component connection
Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select PLC I/O Component Connection from the
Schematic report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
PLC I/O Component Connection from the Schematic report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if

Overview of format files | 965

 multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

NOTE You cannot open format files created prior to AutoCAD Electrical 2005
for this report.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

966 | Chapter 14 Reports

 ■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic component

wire list
Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Component Wire List from the Schematic report
list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Component Wire List from the Schematic report list.

Options

Specifies to include stand-alone terminals or plug-jack connectors in the report.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Overview of format files | 967

 Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

968 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

NOTE You cannot open format files created prior to AutoCAD Electrical 2005
for this report.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic connector

details
Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Connector Details from the Schematic report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Connector Details from the Schematic report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or

Overview of format files | 969

 only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

970 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic connector

plug
Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Connector Plug from the Schematic report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Connector Plug from the Schematic report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.

Overview of format files | 971

 Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

972 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic connector

summary
Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Connector Summary from the Schematic report
list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Connector Summary from the Schematic report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.

Overview of format files | 973

 Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

974 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic component

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Component from the Schematic report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Component from the Schematic report list.

Options

Specifies whether to include components, cable markers, or connectors in the

report. You can also indicate to include the children for any of the selected
options.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Overview of format files | 975

 Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

976 | Chapter 14 Reports

 ■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic missing bill

of material
Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Missing Bill of Material from the Schematic report
list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Missing Bill of Material from the Schematic report list.

Options

Specifies whether to include components, cable markers, connectors, or

terminals in the report. You can select one or multiple options to include.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.

Overview of format files | 977

 Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. The Description field is handled a little
differently than the other fields. This field can be a multi-line field which
is actually made up of multiple fields. If you include the Description field
in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on
and off the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

978 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic wire from/to

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Wire From/To from the Schematic report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Wire From/To from the Schematic report list.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.

Overview of format files | 979

 The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic PLC/IO

address and descriptions
Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select PLC I/O Address and Descriptions from the
Schematic report list.

980 | Chapter 14 Reports

Access:

From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
PLC I/O Address and Descriptions from the Schematic report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

Overview of format files | 981

 ■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic terminal

numbers

982 | Chapter 14 Reports

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Terminal Numbers from the Schematic report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Terminal Numbers from the Schematic report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column

Overview of format files | 983

 and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

Report format file setup - schematic terminal plan

984 | Chapter 14 Reports

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select Terminal Plan from the Schematic report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Terminal Plan from the Schematic report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column

Overview of format files | 985

 and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

NOTE You cannot open format files created prior to AutoCAD Electrical 2005
for this report.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

986 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Report format file setup - schematic PLC modules
used so far
Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report
Format File Setup tool. Select PLC Modules Used So Far from the Schematic
report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
PLC Modules Used So Far from the Schematic report list.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the
installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button
to select from a list of used installation codes.

Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location
code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from
a list of used location codes.

Report options

■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file
from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs
using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited
(.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml)
format.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option
(such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if

Overview of format files | 987

 multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be
shown on all report sections.

■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order
in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off
the specific fields to define the Description.

■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for
specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.

■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report.

NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog
boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data
after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.

Breaks

■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The
drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special
break.

■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the
page header. For example, if you select a special break of
Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic
are displayed in the report section header.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings
File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in
the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.

■ Save Format File: Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with
a different name.

988 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Report format file setup - schematic wire label
The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the dialog boxes.
If you are working in an unnamed format file, you must save the data after
you click Done to keep the changes you made.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File
Setup tool. Select Wire Label from the Schematic report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select
Wire Label from the Schematic report list.

Report Filter

Display Wire Label Displays the wire label for all wires, except
those that are part of a cable.

Display Cable Label Displays the cable labels in the specified

format.

Change Report Fields

Changes which data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.
You can change the justification of any column and the column label.
There are two categories that you can change the report format for: wire label
or cable label. Once you modify the report format, you can save it for future
use. The wire and cable label formats are stored in the same file.

Label Quantity per Connection

Specifies the quantity of wire labels or cable labels. Wire labels are generated
for every wire connection while cable labels are generated once for every cable.

Number of Columns to Display

Arranges the wire labels in the specified number of columns.

Horizontal/Vertical Arrangement

Arranges the wire label horizontally or vertically across the columns.

Overview of format files | 989

 Save Report to File

Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file from the Save Report
to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs. Choose from: ASCII
report (.rep), Comma Delimited (.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database
(.mdb), and XML (.xml) format.
First Section Only shows only the selected option (such as title line or time
and date) on the first section of the report if multiple sections are used. If not
checked, the selected options are shown on all report sections.

Put on Drawing

Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display
your report as a table on your drawing.

NOTE Once wire label reports are placed on the drawing in table format they are
not editable using the Edit Component tool. You must use the AutoCAD table edit
command to edit the table.

Breaks

Special Breaks Specifies the value that controls the section break.
The list displays the report-specific content to apply
to the special break.

Add Special Break Values to Header Adds the special break value to the page header. For
example, if you select a special break of Installa-
tion/Location, the values provided for these devices
in the schematic are displayed in the report section
header.

Installation Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code,
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that
entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you click Named Installation, you can type the installation code in the
box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation
codes.

990 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Location Codes to Extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in
the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Once you click Named Location, you can type the location code in the box
or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes.

Format File

Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating
the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files
are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.

Open Format File Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings File
Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files
(.set) in the user subdirectory. Select a file to edit from the
list and click OK.

Save Format File Saves a format file on the hard drive for later retrieval and
usage when generating reports.

Save As Format File Saves a format file that you opened and modified with a
different name.

Run automatic reports

The Automatic Report Selection tool allows you to run multiple reports at one
time. The Report Generator dialog box is not displayed for each report and
no user input is required once launched. This feature can be used to generate
any number of output files or to automatically place report tables on drawings.
The first step to using the Automatic Reports feature is to create the format
files using the Report Format File Setup dialog box defining the report options
and output as described above. You can create any number of format files for
the same report if you use the same report with different options. Once your
format files are created you are ready to run the reports automatically.
If any of your selected format files contain Table Output, if there are no
existing, updatable matching report tables, the report tables insert on new

Run automatic reports | 991

 drawings. If you are running multiple reports with multiple table output, each
report gets its own. You can specify the first drawing name for any necessary
new drawings and the template name. Subsequent drawing names generate
automatically by incrementing the previous drawing's name.
If you frequently run the same group of reports you can save the set of format
files as a Report Grouping. To set up a Report Grouping, add all your format
files as if you are going to run the reports then click Save Report Grouping.
The information about the format files is saved in a Report Grouping file with
an ".rgf" extension. The next time you want to run that report set, open the
Automatic Reports Selection dialog box, click Open Report Grouping, and
select the ".rgf" file you previously saved; you are ready to run the reports.
When you click OK, the reports run in the selected order. If the format file
contains output options, the files are created. If the format file contains table
output options that report's tables are inserted. If existing, matching report
tables are found, they are updated, otherwise new table objects insert on new
drawings.

992 | Chapter 14 Reports

Generate a report using format files

1 Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the

Automatic Report Selection tool.

2 Click the Automatic Report Selection tool.

3 Select which report to generate from the schematic or panel

report list.

4 Specify the format file to use for the selected report. If there
aren't any format files to select from, you must click the Format
File Setup button to create and save a format file.

5 Click the Add button to add the report name and format file
to the Selected Reports list. This button is not active until both
a report name and format file are selected.

6 Continue adding more reports to the Selected Reports list.

For the File and Table Output options, an 'X' indicates that
the automatic generation will run that portion, while an 'O'
indicates that it will not run that portion.

7 Modify the output of a report type by selecting the report in

the Selected Reports list and then clicking the Modify Output
button. Make changes in the sub-dialog box and click OK.

8 Save the list of report names and format files for later retrieval
and usage.

9 Specify a starting drawing file location and filename, and the

drawing template file to use for the automatic creation of the
drawing files.

10 Click OK to generate a report for the selected type(s).

Automatic report selection

Run automatic reports | 993

 This tool allows you to run multiple reports at one time. This can be used to
generate any number of output files or to automatically place report tables
on drawings.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Automatic Report
Selection tool.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Automatic Report Selection.

NOTE All drawings are automatically added to the bottom of the Project Listing.

Report Name

Displays a list of all schematic and panel reports available for automatic report
generation . Not every AutoCAD Electrical report is available for this command.

Format File Name

Displays a list of format files. These format files are associated with a particular
report name. If there aren't any format files to select from, you must click the
Format File Setup button to create and save a format file.
The Browse button allows you to search for a specific format file that is not
displayed in the list.

Control buttons

■ Modify Output: Changes the output types for individually selected reports.
Each format file definition can determine whether the report is set to a
file or table on the drawing, or both. Select a file in the Selected Reports
list, click the Modify Output button, and click either of the toggle buttons
to turn on or off the output type.

■ Add: Adds the report name and format file to the Selected Reports list. This
button is not active until both a report name and format file are selected.

■ Remove: Removes individual reports from the Selected Reports list. Select
the file from the list so that it is highlighted and press the Remove button.

■ Remove All: Removes all of the reports from the Selected Reports list. There
is no need to select the files in the list; simply press the Remove All button.

994 | Chapter 14 Reports

Selected Reports

Displays the current active listing of all reports for the report generation. The
list displays the report name and format file name, as well as indicators that
show if the report output is a file or table.
For the File and Table Output options, an 'X' indicates that the automatic
generation will run that portion, while an 'O' indicates that it will not run
that portion.

Open or Save Report Grouping

Allows you to define an alias (grouping) file with a pre-defined list of reports
for later retrieval and usage. You can make many grouping files for different
customer types and configurations. The Report Grouping files are maintained
in the Documents and Settings\USER sub-directory. The file names have an
.rgf file extension.

■ Open Report Grouping: Opens a previously saved grouping of report names

and format files.

■ Save Report Grouping: Saves a file that contains the list of report names
and format files for later retrieval and usage. You may define a list of reports
based upon which customer is using the report data and the format that
customer would like to see the reports in.

Drawing Information for Table Output

Specifies a starting drawing file location and filename, and the drawing
template file to use for the automatic creation of the drawing files. You can
select a template drawing file to use for the automatic creation of drawing
files. Type in a template filename or use the Browse button to search for and
select a template file. It is advised to start the first drawing filename with a
numeric suffix.

NOTE If you enter just a filename, the drawing files will be created and saved in
the active project path.

Run automatic reports | 995

Modify spreadsheet data
Use this to edit component tags, descriptions, catalog assignments, wire
numbers, or PLC I/O descriptions from a spreadsheet and then have your edits
update your drawings. Your spreadsheet/database edits can update existing

996 | Chapter 14 Reports

or blank values on existing components, terminals, PLC I/O modules, and
wire numbers but it cannot insert new items into the drawings.

1 Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the

Export to Spreadsheet tool.

2 Click the Export to Spreadsheet tool.

3 Select the data category to export.

If you select General, information for the categories marked
with an asterisk (*) is extracted. Each category is saved to a
separate sheet (spreadsheet format) or table (database format).
The tab-delimited or comma-delimited formats are not avail-
able when writing out to multiple categories.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Data Export dialog box, specify to export the spreadsheet

data for the current drawing or the entire project.

6 Specify the output format (Microsoft Excel, Access file, Tab-

delimited ASCII, or Comma-delimited ASCII) and the location
codes to extract, and click OK.
AutoCAD Electrical creates a file of the data pulled from your
wiring diagram drawings.

7 Open this file in any spreadsheet or database program for view

and edit.
Caution: If you selected a Tab or Comma-delimited ASCII
format, import all fields as text. Some spreadsheet programs
may try to convert some fields into numeric or scientific
notation values. You may need to save the AutoCAD Electrical
extracted data to a file with a .txt extension and then use the
spreadsheet's import wizard to force all fields to be classified
as text.

8 After editing, save the spreadsheet data back out to its original
format.

9 (Optional) Before importing the spreadsheet data back into

the drawing or project, add additional columns to the spread-
sheet data. Label each column with a target ATTRIBUTE name.

Modify spreadsheet data | 997

 During the import function, AutoCAD Electrical checks for
these new attributes and updates them with data you entered
into the spreadsheet.

10 Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the

Update from Spreadsheet tool.

11 Click the Update from Spreadsheet tool.

12 Select the spreadsheet and click Open.

13 In the Update Drawings per Spreadsheet Data dialog box,

specify to import the spreadsheet data for the current drawing
or the entire project.

14 Select any other import options and click OK. The project or
drawing's data automatically updates to match the edits on
the spreadsheet.
All spreadsheet update changes are automatically logged,
complete with time and date, in a text file saved to the Auto-
CAD Electrical user subdirectory.
If you edit the BLOCK field in the spreadsheet and assign a
different block name, AutoCAD Electrical tries to find the new
block during the update. If found, the old block is switched
to the new one.

NOTE Do not edit the HDL and DWGNAME fields. These are used
by the Drawing Update from Spreadsheet utility to link your edits
back to the correct drawing and correct block insert on that
drawing.

Export to spreadsheet

998 | Chapter 14 Reports

 This utility copies the selected data category to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS,
or Access MDB file format for editing.

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export
to Spreadsheet tool.
From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet.

Limitation: Your spreadsheet edits can update existing or blank values on

existing components, terminals, PLC I/O modules, and wire numbers but it
cannot insert new items into the drawings. It only changes existing values.

Component data export

This utility copies components to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS, or Access
MDB file format for editing.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spread-
sheet tool. Select Component from the list.
From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet.
Select Component from the list.

Data export for

Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.

Output format

Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet.

Location Codes to extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

General data export

Modify spreadsheet data | 999

 This utility copies all the data categories to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS, or
Access MDB file format for editing.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spread-
sheet tool. Select General from the list.
From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet.
Select General from the list.

Data export for

Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.

Output format

Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet.

Location Codes to extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

PLC I/O header information export

This utility copies PLC I/O header information to a comma-delimited, Excel
XLS, or Access MDB file format for editing.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spread-
sheet tool. Select PLC I/O header information from the list.
From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet.
Select PLC I/O header information from the list.

Data export for

Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.

1000 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Output format

Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet.

Location Codes to extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

PLC I/O connection export

This utility copies PLC I/O wire connections to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS,
or Access MDB file format for editing.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spread-
sheet tool. Select PLC I/O wire connections from the list.
From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet.
Select PLC I/O wire connections from the list.

Data export for

Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.

Output format

Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet.

Location Codes to extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

PLC I/O address/description export

Modify spreadsheet data | 1001

 This utility copies PLC I/O address/descriptions to a comma-delimited, Excel
XLS, or Access MDB file format for editing.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spread-
sheet tool. Select PLC I/O address/descriptions from the list.
From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet.
Select PLC I/O address/descriptions from the list.

Data export for

Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.

Output format

Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet.

Location Codes to extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Panel layout data export

This utility copies panel components to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS, or
Access MDB file format for editing.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spread-
sheet tool. Select Panel components from the list.
From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet.
Select Panel components from the list.

Data export for

Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.

1002 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Output format

Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet.

Location Codes to extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Panel terminals data export

This utility copies panel terminals to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS, or Access
MDB file format for editing.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spread-
sheet tool. Select Panel terminals from the list.
From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet.
Select Panel terminals from the list.

Data export for

Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.

Output format

Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet.

Location Codes to extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Terminal data export

Modify spreadsheet data | 1003

 This utility copies terminals to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS, or Access MDB
file format for editing.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spread-
sheet tool. Select Terminals from the list.
From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet.
Select Terminals from the list.

Data export for

Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.

Output format

Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet.

Location Codes to extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Update drawings per spreadsheet data

Access:

Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Update
from Spreadsheet tool. Select the spreadsheet and click Open.
From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Update from
Spreadsheet. Select the spreadsheet and click Open.

Process

Specifies to import the spreadsheet data for the current drawing or the entire
project.

Force spreadsheet new values to uppercase

Forces all new spreadsheet values to be displayed in uppercase.

1004 | Chapter 14 Reports

 Flip any updated tag/wire number values to fixed

Fixes all updated tag or wire number values. A fixed component tag does not
update when the Re-tag Update command is run. The tag name keeps its fixed
value.

Create user-defined attributes

You can define your own attributes onto AutoCAD Electrical block files and
modify user-defined attributes using the AutoCAD Attribute Edit command
or the Show/Edit Miscellaneous option on the AutoCAD Electrical Insert/Edit
Component dialog box. The maximum allowable entries for reading or
exporting any *.wda file is 150.
Use the User Defined Attribute List tool to selectively determine which
non-AutoCAD Electrical attributes are allowed in the AutoCAD Electrical report
generators. Otherwise only those attributes defined inside of AutoCAD
Electrical for each component category are processed in the project database
and subsequent reports.

NOTE You can edit the attribute text file (*.wda) in Notepad; however, you must
set the Encoding to Unicode in the Open and Save dialog boxes.

The Project Database Service (PDS) saves all non-AutoCAD Electrical-aware

attributes from block files into the project for processing. The PDS maintains
these database entries when the drawing file is saved and monitors them in
real-time as if they are normal components in the project. Once the PDS
successfully places the attribute values of all blocks from the drawing files into
the AutoCAD Electrical project database, the report generator program is able
to place the listed attribute values into the report generators if a *.wda file is
found with the appropriate name in any of the search paths and has the correct
format.

NOTE The report format files (*.set) support the user-defined attributes for
automatic report generation. If a set file declares an attribute tag that is not found
in the User Defined Attribute List, the column in the report is empty. The user
defined attributes display in the Change Report Format dialog boxes (on the Report
Generator dialog box, click Change Report Format).

Edit user defined attribute list

Once you add an attribute to an AutoCAD Electrical block, you can edit the
attribute using the Show/Edit Miscellaneous option in the Insert/Edit

Create user-defined attributes | 1005

 Component dialog box or using the Enhanced Attribute Editor tool accessed
by double-clicking on an AutoCAD block in the drawing. Attributes can then
be added to the user defined attribute list for report generation.

1 Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the

User Defined Attribute List tool.

2 Click the User Defined Attribute List tool.

3 In the User Defined Attribute List dialog box, click inside the
Attribute Tag column for Row 1. Click Pick.

4 Select the attribute from the drawing.

The attribute displays in the Attribute Tag column in Row 1.

5 (Optional) Specify the column width, justification, and column

title for the attribute for report generation purposes.
Click in a cell to edit the cell or right-click in a cell to copy,
cut, or paste contents from one cell into another. If left blank,
default values are used.

6 Repeat for any additional attributes.

7 Click OK.
If this is the first time the grid content is being saved, the Save
As dialog box displays. Enter the file name and click Save. This
is generally <project_name>.wda or default.wda.

NOTE Click Save As if an existing file needs to be saved in a dif-

ferent location or with a different name.

User-defined attribute list

This tool creates an attribute text file (*.wda) of user-defined attributes defined
on AutoCAD Electrical block files. The User Defined Attribute List is used by
report tools to determine which additional attributes are listed in a report.
The list file name can be the same as the active project or named Default to
be used by the entire system. The Default.wda file is saved in the base project
folder, while the <project_name>.wda file is saved in the same folder as the
project definition file (*.wdp).

1006 | Chapter 14 Reports

 NOTE Attributes can be added to existing block files using the Add Attribute tool
or the AutoCAD ATTDEF command. Edit attributes using the Show/Edit
Miscellaneous option in the Insert/Edit Component dialog box or using the
Enhanced Attribute Editor tool accessed by double-clicking an AutoCAD Electrical
block in the drawing.

Access:

Click the Schematic Reports tool to access the User Defined Attribute List tool.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ User Defined Attribute List.

Sort the list by clicking any of the column headers or move rows up or down
in the list by highlighting multiple rows and dragging the selection on the
sequence number list to the appropriate position.

Attribute Tag Edits and displays the list of attribute tags to be made available
in the Report Generator. The attribute tags can be in any order
in the list. Enter text, click in the cell to edit, or right-click in the
cell to pick, copy, cut, or paste a value.

NOTE An attribute tag is required and must be specified before

you can edit any of the other fields in its row.

Column Width Edits and displays the column width for the attribute tag. Enter
a number, click in the cell to edit, or right-click in the cell to copy
or cut a value.

NOTE If left blank, the column width is restricted to 24 charac-

ters.

Justification Edits and displays the justification of the attribute tag text. Click
in the cell and select from Top Left, Top Center, Top Right, Middle
Left, Middle Center, Middle Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Center
or Bottom Right justification. The justification definition can be
modified inside the Change Report Format dialog box.

NOTE If left blank, Top Left justification is used.

Column Title Edits and displays the column header title in the Report Generator
dialog box. Enter text, click in the cell to edit, or right-click in the

Create user-defined attributes | 1007

 cell to copy, cut, or paste a value. The column title can be modi-
fied inside the Change Report Format dialog box.

NOTE If left blank, the attribute tag is used as the column

header.

Pick Selects an attribute from the drawing to use as the Attribute Tag.

Open Browses for an existing User Defined Attribute List file for editing.

Save As Creates a new User Defined Attribute List file with extension .wda.

Right-click options

Pick Allows selection of an attribute from the drawing. This is available

only for the Attribute Tag.

Copy Copies the cell contents to paste in another.

Cut Removes the cell contents to paste in another.

Paste Places the copied or cut cell contents in a new cell.

NOTE You can also copy, cut, and paste entire row contents from one row to
another (one at a time), however you cannot paste the row contents into a single
cell.

Set up for export to Autodesk Inventor Professional

Cable & Harness
You can export wire list information from AutoCAD Electrical and directly
import it into Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness. In order to
merge electrical and mechanical data, you must first create a one-to-one

1008 | Chapter 14 Reports

 mapping from the electrical data to the mechanical assembly. Make sure the
following are correctly set up before running the report.

Pin numbers on component symbols

The pin numbers on the component symbols in AutoCAD Electrical must

correspond to the Pin Name property on the equivalent pin in Autodesk
Inventor Professional Cable & Harness. Use the Pin Properties dialog box in
Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness to change the pin name
property.

Component tags

Each component is defined with a unique Tag ID classified as the Component

Tag. The component tags on each component in AutoCAD Electrical must
correspond to the unique identifier or reference designator (RefDes property
value) for the corresponding electrical part instance in the designated harness
assembly in the Cable & Harness application. Use the Part Properties dialog
box in Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness to change the RefDes
property.
You can define attributes on components in AutoCAD Electrical that can map
to properties when exported to Autodesk Inventor Professional. These attributes
can be component definition (catalog database) or component occurrence
specific. Use the Edit Component tool to edit the occurrence of a component.
Upon selection of a catalog number from the AutoCAD Electrical catalog
database, component definition properties can be applied to the component
occurrence and the information exported into the XML file.

NOTE When you apply additional parts to the component occurrence, their
respective component definition properties can also be applied in the overall
component occurrence. Up to 10 additional part numbers can be applied to the
occurrence of a component. Each of these catalog numbers can have their own
set of component definition properties.

Wires

In order to map wires from the schematic to the 3D design, each wire needs
a persistent tag or number used to uniquely identify it within the design. The
wire number in AutoCAD Electrical is used as the Wire ID property value in
Cable & Harness. The cabling application needs a From/To list with a unique
identifier to track inputs from multiple wire lists and to know when wires
have moved or been updated on subsequent imports. The wires in the

Set up for export to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness | 1009
 schematic must be fixed, mapped to a wire in the Cable & Harness Wire
Library, and have distinct wires into the same pin.

NOTE The wire number must be unique for individual From and To connections
and a wire network ladder style cannot be used.

You can define attributes and properties on a wire that can map to properties
when exported to Autodesk Inventor Professional. These attributes can be
wire definition (wire type) or wire occurrence specific. Use the Edit Wire
Number tool to edit the wire number. Upon selection of a wire type from the
Set/Edit Wire Type dialog box, wire definition properties can be applied to
the wire layer occurrence and the information exported into the XML file.

Wire layers

Not all nets in a schematic are physical wires; some are representative of other
types of connections, such as those made by attaching a component to a bus
bar. When attempts are made to map these nets in a harness assembly, the
corresponding pins/parts are often not present. Only the nets that are to be
mapped into wires in 3D should be drawn with a layer identified as a wire for
inclusion in the output report file for Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable
& Harness. If a wire that is included in the custom report output file is not
recognized as a library wire in the Cable & Harness Library during the Import
Wire List process, the wire occurrence will not be imported.
The layers defined in AutoCAD Electrical must first be defined as valid wire
layers. Each AutoCAD Electrical wire layer must then correspond to a valid
library wire in the Cable & Harness Library. While the wire layer in AutoCAD
Electrical is just a label or name, the Cable & Harness wire definition defines
how the wire is displayed - including size (outer diameter and gauge) and
color.

Cables

When cables are used in the schematic, the name of the cable conductor (wire)
layer defined in the drawing of AutoCAD Electrical must correspond to a valid
cable definition in the Cable & Harness Library. The Wire Color/ID of each
conductor in AutoCAD Electrical must correspond to a Conductor ID used in
that cable definition in the Cable & Harness Library. This Wire Color/ID can
be overwritten on each cable conductor occurrence by selecting Edit
Component on a cable marker and making the change in the Insert / Edit
Cable Marker dialog box. The Conductor list in the AutoCAD Electrical catalog
can also be changed to reflect the same Conductor ID used in Cable & Harness.

1010 | Chapter 14 Reports

 The cable occurrence definition is made up of one parent symbol and multiple
children symbols depending on the number of wire included. Upon selection
of a catalog number from the AutoCAD Electrical catalog database, component
definition properties can be applied to the component occurrence and the
information exported into the XML file.

NOTE When you apply additional parts to the component occurrence, their
respective component definition properties can also be applied in the overall
component occurrence. Up to 10 additional part numbers can be applied to the
occurrence of a component. Each of these catalog numbers can have their own
set of component definition properties.

Splices

Each splice is defined with a Splice ID (component tag). The Splice ID in

AutoCAD Electrical is used as the RefDes property value in Cable & Harness.
Use the Edit Component tool to edit the splice component. Upon selection
of a catalog number from the AutoCAD Electrical catalog database, splice
definition properties can be applied to the component occurrence and the
information exported into the XML file.

NOTE When you apply additional parts to the component occurrence, their
respective splice definition properties can also be applied in the overall component
occurrence. Up to 10 additional part numbers can be applied to the occurrence
of a component. Each of these catalog numbers can have their own set of
component definition properties.

Branches and Ts in nets

Branches and Ts in nets are not valid on nets imported into Cable & Harness.
These types of representations map to multiple possible physical configurations.
The exact physical intent of each wire must be depicted in the wiring diagram.
Both non-physical and physical splices must be used so that each net that
represents a wire has only two nodes, a From and a To. In AutoCAD Electrical,
direct connections into a component must be created (no Ts) so that each
physical wire has a definitive From component/pin and a To component/pin.

Set up for export to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness | 1011
 AutoCAD Electrical attributes mapped to Autodesk Inventor
Professional properties

There are 4 Autodesk Inventor Professional assembly entity types that get
AutoCAD Electrical attributes: components, wires, cable, and splices.

Attribute TAG Attribute Type Description

Component Properties

INST & LOC Occurrence Installation and Location code; associ-

ated to the component tag (RefDes)

TAG1 & TAG2 Occurrence Component TAG - RefDes property

name

DESC1- DESC3 Occurrence Descriptions used to describe the

component

CAT Occurrence Main AutoCAD Electrical catalog

number - Part Number property name
in Autodesk Inventor Professional

MFG Occurrence Manufacturer - Vendor of Part Number

property name in Autodesk Inventor
Professional

ASSYCODE Occurrence Assembly code for part - if part is a

subset of an assembly

CAT01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM part numbers

MFG01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM Manufacturer associ-

ated to the Multiple BOM part num-
bers

ASSYCODE01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM Assembly codes associ-

ated to the Multiple BOM part num-
bers

1012 | Chapter 14 Reports

RATING1-12 Occurrence Rating information associated to the
component definition

FAMILY Definition Family code definition - FAMILY attrib-

ute on AutoCAD Electrical block file

WDBLKNAM Definition Block name definition used for catalog

lookup

Wire Properties

WIRENO Occurrence Unique wire number ID - AutoCAD

Electrical wire number

LAYER NAME Occurrence Wire layer name (AutoCAD Layer) -

Wire Definition name in Autodesk In-
ventor Professional

Layer Name - Wire Proper- Definition Wire layer properties (Xrecords on

ties Xrecords AutoCAD layer) - Definition custom
properties on the wire number in
Autodesk Inventor Professional

WIRENO attributes Occurrence Wire attributes on wire number block

WIRENO01-10 file - Occurrence custom properties on
the wire number in Autodesk Inventor
Professional

Cable ID Properties

INST & LOC Occurrence Installation and Location code; associ-

ated to the component tag (RefDes)

TAG1 & TAG2 Occurrence Component TAG - RefDes property

name

RATING1 Occurrence Cable conductor ID; AutoCAD Electric-

al Rating1 attribute - Cable Wire name
in Autodesk Inventor Professional; add

Set up for export to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness | 1013
 a numeric value along with the con-
ductor color

DESC1- DESC3 Occurrence Descriptions used to describe the

component

CAT Occurrence Main AutoCAD Electrical catalog

number - Part Number property name
in Autodesk Inventor Professional

MFG Occurrence Manufacturer - Vendor of Part Number

property name in Autodesk Inventor
Professional

ASSYCODE Occurrence Assembly code for part - if part is a

subset of an assembly

CAT01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM part numbers

MFG01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM Manufacturer associ-

ated to the Multiple BOM part num-
bers

ASSYCODE01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM Assembly codes associ-

ated to the Multiple BOM part num-
bers

FAMILY Definition Family code definition - FAMILY attrib-

ute on AutoCAD Electrical block file

WDBLKNAM Definition Block name definition used for catalog

lookup

Splice Properties

INST & LOC Occurrence Installation and Location code; associ-

ated to the component tag (RefDes)

1014 | Chapter 14 Reports

TAG1 Occurrence Component TAG - RefDes property
name

DESC1- DESC3 Occurrence Descriptions used to describe the

component

CAT Occurrence Main AutoCAD Electrical catalog

number - Part Number property name
in Autodesk Inventor Professional

MFG Occurrence Manufacturer - Vendor of Part Number

property name in Autodesk Inventor
Professional

ASSYCODE Occurrence Assembly code for part - if part is a

subset of an assembly

CAT01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM part numbers

MFG01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM Manufacturer associ-

ated to the Multiple BOM part num-
bers

ASSYCODE01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM Assembly codes associ-

ated to the Multiple BOM part num-
bers

RATING1-12 Occurrence Rating information associated to the

component definition

FAMILY Definition Family code definition - FAMILY attrib-

ute on AutoCAD Electrical block file

WDBLKNAM Definition Block name definition used for catalog

lookup

Set up for export to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness | 1015
 Output reports to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable
and Harness
Use this tool to export component, connector, wiring/cable, and splice data
from your 2D connector drawing into an XML file that can then be imported
into Autodesk Inventor Professional to aid in the generation of a cable and
harness assembly.

NOTE You must first configure wire numbering to be "On per Wire Basis" for
export and set up the appropriate variables before running the report.

1 Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the

Autodesk Inventor Professional Export tool.

2 Click the Autodesk Inventor Professional Export tool.

3 In the Autodesk Inventor Professional Export dialog box, spe-

cify whether to process the project or current drawing and
click OK.

4 In the Autodesk Inventor Professional XML File Export dialog

box, define the location and filename for the export file. By
default file is saved with a .xml extension to the C:\Documents
and Settings\{username}\My Documents folder.

Configure wire numbering for export

There are several steps to set up the wire numbering convention in AutoCAD
Electrical for the import of data into Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable
and Harness.

Define wire layers

Layers defined in AutoCAD Electrical must be defined as valid wire layers.

While the following steps do not create the layers on the drawings that need
to be mapped into the Cable and Harness Library, they tell AutoCAD Electrical
which layers are treated as valid wire types.

1 Select Wires ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type.

1016 | Chapter 14 Reports

 2 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, click Add Existing Layer to add
the wire line layers in use in the schematic to the list to be recognized as
layers by AutoCAD Electrical.

3 In the Layers for Line Wires dialog box, enter the layer name or pick a
wire from the existing layer list.
A wildcard used in the name selects a group of layers. For example, RED_*
selects all layers that begin with "RED_."

4 Click OK.

5 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, click OK.

NOTE You can also change layer properties using the Project Manager tool. In
the Project Manager, right-click on the project name and select Properties. In the
Drawing Format tab, Layers section, click Define.

Set unique wire IDs

You need to assign each wire a unique wire ID or number before they can be
imported into another application.

1 Click the Project Manager tool.

2 In the project listing, right-click the project name, and select

Properties.

3 In the Project Properties dialog box, click the Wire Numbers

tab.

4 In the Wire Number Options section, select On per Wire Basis.

5 Click OK.

Fix wire numbering

You must fix the wire numbers so they stay the same for subsequent imports
into Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness. Do this after the wire
numbers have been assigned. Use any of the following procedures to fix wire
numbers.

Set up for export to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness | 1017
 Automatic wire numbering:

1 Click the Insert Wire Numbers tool.

2 In the Wire Tagging dialog box, select Insert as Fixed if it is

not already selected.

3 Click Project-wide, Drawing-wide, or Pick Individual Wires

depending on which method you want to use to update your
wire numbers.

Manually inserting wire numbers:

1 Click the Edit Wire Number tool.

2 Click a wire that does not currently have a wire number as-
signed to it.

3 In the Insert wire number dialog box, select Make it Fixed to

force the wire number to a fixed state.

4 Click OK.

Inserting wire numbers using project-wide utilities:

1 Click the arrow on the Projects New/Existing tool to access

the Project-Wide Utilities tool.

2 Click the Project-Wide Utilities tool.

3 In the Project-Wide Utilities dialog box, select Set all wire

numbers to fixed.

4 Click OK. All wire numbers in the project are now flagged as
fixed.

Autodesk Inventor Professional export

Extracts wire list information into an XML export file to be used exclusively
with Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness.

1018 | Chapter 14 Reports

 NOTE You must first configure wire numbering to be "On per Wire Basis" for
export and set up the appropriate variables before running the report.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Autodesk Inventor
Professional Export tool.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Autodesk Inventor Professional Ex-
port.

Select to export the active drawing or the entire project.

The Autodesk Inventor Professional XML File Export dialog box then displays
allowing you to define a location and filename for the export file. By default
the file is saved with an .xml extension to the C:\Documents and
Settings\{username}\My Documents folder. You can change the location and
the last saved folder is persistent.

Set up for export to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness | 1019
1020
Panel Layout
15
In this chapter
■ Overview of panel layouts
■ Panel drawing configuration
and defaults
■ Relationship between
schematic drawings and
panel layouts
■ Overview of footprint
attributes/Xdata
■ Footprint/Terminal
Insertion
■ Layout Wire Connection
Annotation
■ Lookup Files
■ Item Numbers/Balloons
■ Nameplates
■ Panel Leveling/Sequencing
Tools

1021
Overview of panel layouts
Panel Layout tools create intelligent mechanical / panel layout drawings. Here
are the key features:

■ Layouts can be driven from information carried on the AutoCAD Electrical

schematic wiring diagram drawings or they can be constructed
independently of schematics.

■ AutoCAD Electrical places no requirements on special naming or attribute

requirements on mechanical footprint symbols. This means that vendor
supplied footprint symbols, in AutoCAD format, can be used as is with
AutoCAD Electrical.

■ Bi-directional update capabilities allow certain schematic wiring diagram

edits to automatically update the panel drawings and vice versa.

■ Wire number, wire color/gauge information, and connection sequencing

data can be extracted directly from the schematics and annotated on to
the panel footprint representations.

■ AutoCAD Electrical extracts various reports from these smart panel layout
drawings including panel BOM, panel component/item lists, nameplate
reports, and schematic versus panel exception reports.

Automatic schematic/panel update

AutoCAD Electrical allows limited bi-directional updating between schematic

components and the associated footprint blocks. The link is through the
common tag identifier - for example, relay coil CR104 schematic symbol links
to the panel layout footprint that carries a CR104 attribute value or extended
entity data value. Forcing the coil's name to CR104A triggers AutoCAD
Electrical to update not only the coil's child contacts but also update the panel
footprint's data. If a nameplate is tied to the footprint, its text updates as well.

Access panel layout tools

You access the AutoCAD Electrical panel layout command set from either the
main Panel Layout option on the Electrical pull-down menu or from a
panel-specific toolbar.

1022 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

Using the pull-down menu

Select the various panel layout commands from AutoCAD Electrical's Panel
Layout menu.

Using the toolbar

If the Panel Layout toolbar is not visible, you can turn it on by right-clicking
on a toolbar and selecting ACE:Panel Layout. Main-level options on the Panel
Layout toolbar include:

Insert Component Footprint

Terminal Strip Editor

Copy Footprint

Edit Footprint

Insert Balloon

Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint

Overview of panel layouts | 1023

 Panel Reports

Miscellaneous Panel Tools

Panel Configuration

Using the mouse

Put your cursor over any panel component and click your right mouse button
for a quick shortcut to AutoCAD Electrical commands. A component-specific
menu displays at your cursor position.
Double-click on the component itself to edit that component. The AutoCAD
Electrical double-click feature is disabled if AutoCAD's "selection" mode is set
to "Noun/Verb selection" (i.e. system variable PICKFIRST is set to 1).

Panel drawing configuration and defaults

Configuration settings are saved as attribute values on a non-visible block
named WD_PNLM. If your current drawing does not have this block present
when any AutoCAD Electrical panel layout command is invoked, AutoCAD
Electrical pauses and asks you for permission to insert this block. It inserts at
0,0 but this location is not critical. The key point is that the non-visible block
needs to be present somewhere on the drawing.

1024 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 NOTE You can make this block visible by typing ATTMODE at the AutoCAD
command line prompt, changing the value from 1 to 2, and then typing REGEN.

Access:

Click the Panel Configuration tool.

From the Panel Layout menu, select Panel Configuration.

There are a few settings related to panel layout drawings that can be modified
through the Panel Configuration dialog box. These settings are retrieved and
saved back to attributes on the non-visible block named WD_PNLM.

Item Numbering

Specifies the number/letter to use as the first item number. AutoCAD Electrical
will manage item number, drawing-wide or project-wide (over many drawings),
so that the same number is always applied to identical components.

Balloon

Opens a sub-dialog box for setting the type of balloon marker (circle, ellipse,
polygon, text), marker size, margin, and text gap.

Footprint layers

Opens the Panel Component Layers sub-dialog box for setting the panel
component layers, non-text graphic layers, and nameplate layers. Panel
footprint layering works in the same way AutoCAD Electrical schematic
layering. When AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint, it is modified on the
fly to match the layering scheme set up in this dialog.

Wiring level defaults

Sets the optional 3-digit wiring level codes. These are applied as defaults when
codes are not defined on panel layout components or terminal strip
representations. Preferred wire connection sequence follows this level and
numeric-code-within-level hierarchy.

Default spacing for multiple inserts

Specifies the x and y distance spacing for multiple footprint inserts.

Panel drawing configuration and defaults | 1025

 Footprint insert

Specifies the default insert scale for panel footprint symbols. Also, defines how
to determine the scale of the attribute template added on the fly when the
footprint is inserted. Select a scale factor, 1.0 to insert as is, or select to scale
to a specific text height.

Panel wire connection report XYZ offset reference

Specifies the x, y, or z-offset value for the mtext added next to a panel
component when adding the wire connection information. Use the Setup
button to define the default wire connection text format.

Relationship between schematic drawings and

panel layouts
Generally the schematic ladder diagram is created first and then the physical
panel layout is created from the schematic drawing.
Using pilot lights as an example, each symbol shown on the schematic ladder
diagrams needs to map to a scaled, physical pilot light representation on the
panel layout drawings. The physical layout drawing might be a control panel
enclosure door layout. The door layout shows where each push button
component is to be mounted and can indicate the size of the hole in the sheet
metal door for mounting.
Pilot light components come in many styles, sizes and ratings from dozens of
vendors. On the schematic ladder diagrams, all pilot lights of a given type are
identified by the same schematic symbol whether they are miniature pilot
lights or a very large, explosion projected pilot light. It is on the physical panel
layouts where the pilot lights are shown as they actually look and in actual
size (i.e. the physical footprint representation).
For example, look at the three pilot light symbols shown in this schematic
drawing.

1026 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

The top and bottom ones are assigned an Allen-Bradley part number for a
30mm pilot light (catalog part number 800H-PR16R) and the middle one is
given a part number for a smaller, 22.5mm pilot light (catalog part number
800MR-P16RS). The manufacturer and catalog part number assignments are
carried on invisible attributes MFG and CAT on each instance of the repeated
red pilot light symbol. All three symbols look the same on the schematic since
they are the same AutoCAD block symbol. The difference is the assigned part
number attribute values that each carries: LT411 and LT413 have the 30mm
pilot light catalog part number and LT412 has the smaller pilot light part
number.
The three red pilot lights are represented as footprints in the panel layout as
shown.

On the physical panel layout drawing, these pilot light symbols are inserted
as footprint blocks using the Insert Footprint (Schematic List) tool. Notice
that LT412 (the 22.5mm pilot light) appears smaller than the others.
AutoCAD Electrical knows which physical representation block symbol to use
for each instance of the pilot light schematic symbol based on the
manufacturer and part number assignments applied to the MFG/CAT attributes.
The vendor name and part number are mapped to the correct footprint drawing
(.dwg) file. This drawing is then inserted as a block on the panel layout
drawing.

Relationship between schematic drawings and panel layouts | 1027

 There are two key elements that make this work:

■ Vendor footprint library (.dwg) files - two symbols from this library are
shown here. These are for Allen-Bradley red pilot lights 30mm and 22.5mm
styles respectively.

■ Footprint mapping file (footprint_lookup.mdb) - a table is assigned to each

manufacturer.

Overview of footprint attributes/Xdata

AutoCAD Electrical doesn't have attribute or naming requirements for the
mechanical footprint block symbols. As AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint
symbol into the drawing, it copies various data to the footprint block such as
component/device tag name, description, manufacturer code, and catalog
number. It first looks for target attributes to copy the data to, but if not found,
AutoCAD Electrical simply inserts the schematic values as standard AutoCAD,
non-visible extended entity data (Xdata).
Some manufacturers provide free, to-scale mechanical libraries of their control
components, all in AutoCAD format. Or you may have your own in-house
footprints set up. In either case, since AutoCAD Electrical doesn't have naming
or attribute requirements, these libraries can be used as is. When AutoCAD
Electrical inserts such a block footprint symbol, it immediately becomes
AutoCAD Electrical smart.

Footprint block attribute/Xdata names

Below is a list of footprint block data names that can be inserted or read by
AutoCAD Electrical. If the footprint block has an attribute with any name
listed here, AutoCAD Electrical will use that attribute to carry the specific piece
of data. Otherwise, AutoCAD Electrical uses extended entity data with names
based on the data names listed here but with a WD_ prefix (ex: "WD_DESC1").

FP Identifies block as a component footprint

1028 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

FPT identifies block as a terminal footprint

NP identifies block as a nameplate

P_TAG1 pnl component tag (used on component footprints and nameplates)

DESC1-3 description line 1 - 3 (60 char max)

P_ITEM item/detail number

MFG manufacturer name (24 char max)

CAT catalog number (60 char max)

ASSYCODE optional assembly code (internal use by AutoCAD Electrical)

INST installation code (24 char max)

LOC location code (16 char max)

MOUNT mount location code (24 char max)

GROUPWITH group location code (24 char max)

WDBLKNAM schematic symbol block name (used for catalog lookup)

RATING1-12 rating values (60 char max each)

P_TAGSTRIP terminal strip ID (terminal footprints only)

TERM terminal number (terminal footprints only)

WIRENO wire number (terminal footprints only)

Overview of footprint attributes/Xdata | 1029

 Minimum attribute/Xdata requirements

Below are the minimum requirements for AutoCAD Electrical to recognize a

block as a panel footprint or nameplate.
Component footprint - block must carry a minimum of one of the following:

Xdata name VIA_WD_FP

Attribute FP (blank value)

Attribute P_TAG1 (and no attribute NP present)

Terminal footprint - block must carry a minimum of one of the following:

Xdata name VIA_WD_FPT

Attribute FPT (blank value)

Panel nameplate - block must carry a minimum of one of the following:

Xdata name VIA_WD_NP

Attribute NP (blank value)

Select Xdata to change to a block attribute

This tool converts any piece of non-visible extended entity data (Xdata) into
a visible attribute tied directly to the footprint block.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Edit Footprint tool to access the Make Xdata Visible tool.
Select a footprint.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Make Xdata Visible. Select a footprint.

After you click Insert, the dialog box disappears. Click on the location for the
attribute. The attribute inserts, is linked to the footprint block, and the dialog

1030 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 box redisplays. Repeat the process to quickly convert other pieces of Xdata
into visible attributes.

Xdata Displays all AutoCAD Electrical-related pieces of extended entity

data (Xdata).

Height Specifies the height for the attribute value.

Justification Specifies the justification for the attribute value.

Visibility Indicates whether the attribute will be visible on the screen.

Ratings Opens a sub-dialog for setting the values for rating attributes.

Style Sets the width factor and text style for the attributes.

NOTE To add or modify the Xdata, use the AutoCAD Electrical Xdata Editor.

Select and insert footprints

Use AutoCAD Electrical to insert smart footprint outlines of electrical
components and devices onto layout drawings. The most common ways to
insert these are: semi-automatic mode or manually. In the semi-automatic
mode, AutoCAD Electrical uses the component's manufacturer and catalog
number information, goes to a manufacturer look-up database table, finds a
match for the catalog number, and selects the associated footprint block
symbol to insert. You pick the insertion point and orientation for the footprint.
In a manual insert mode, you create smart footprint outlines on the fly or
convert existing layout representations to be compatible with AutoCAD
Electrical.

Semi-automatic insertion from schematic data

Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Schematic List)

Panel Layout ➤ Insert Terminal (Schematic List)

Footprint/Terminal Insertion | 1031

 Let your project set of schematic wiring diagrams help drive the panel layout.
Component catalog number information comes directly from manufacturer
and catalog data carried on each electrical component. AutoCAD Electrical
finds a match for the manufacturer and catalog number combination to
determine the correct footprint block to insert.
If a copy of the schematic data is not in memory, then AutoCAD Electrical
prompts you to select which schematic data you want to extract. Make your
selection in the dialog box and click OK. A list of all parent components is
extracted from the project's schematic wiring diagrams. Select from the
schematic list and place the equivalent footprint on the layout. AutoCAD
Electrical determines the equivalent footprint block from the footprint look-up
file.

Insert footprints from an icon menu

Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu) or Panel Layout ➤ Insert

Footprint (Icon Menu)
For items that might not be included on the schematics, you have 2 options
for insertion:

■ Pick the item from a vendor icon menu that is preset with specific catalog
number data and footprint block names. Choosing from this menu supplies
AutoCAD Electrical with the manufacturer and catalog information and
the footprint block name, bypassing any look-up.

■ Pick a general component category from a generic icon menu (such as

pilot lights).

Insert footprints manually

Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Manual)

Select to use a generic marker only, draw shapes, select a similar footprint,
choose from a file dialog, or pick on an existing block on the current drawing
to convert it to AutoCAD Electrical on the fly.

Insert footprints from a catalog list

Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Lists) ➤ Insert Footprint (Catalog List)

Inserts panel symbols by choosing a catalog number or a component
description from a user-defined pick list. The data displayed in this pick list
is stored in a database in generic Access format. The file name is

1032 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

wd_picklist.mdb and can be edited with Access or from Add/Edit/Delete along
the bottom of the pick list's dialog box.

Insert footprints from equipment lists

Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Lists) ➤ Insert Footprint (Equipment List)

This tool lists data extracted from your equipment list, finds the appropriate
panel symbol by querying the footprint_lookup.mdb, and inserts the panel
footprints at your pick point. Each line or record in the equipment list
represents a single entry into the Equipment in dialog box for schematic
component selection. The quantity for a selected catalog number is not
supported.

Insert panel footprints from a schematic list

When you insert a panel footprint from a list of the schematic components,
if the MFG and CAT values match, it displays the WD_AB icon menu. When
the icon menu displays, make your specific footprint block selection. Your
menu pick provides AutoCAD Electrical with the footprint block name to use
for the target MFG/CAT combination. You can set up multiple
orientations/configurations of a single footprint, all tied to the same MFG/CAT
part number match in the footprint lookup table. Pick the
orientation/configuration of the footprint you want to use, and insert it into
the layout drawing.

1 Create a schematic symbol with a TAG1 attribute.

2 Place the symbol in a drawing. In the Insert/Edit Component

dialog box, give the TAG attribute a value, and click OK.

3 Save the drawing and navigate to the drawing you want to

add a panel footprint to.

Select and insert footprints | 1033

 4 Click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint tool to
access the Insert Footprint (Schematic List) tool.

5 Click the Insert Footprint (Schematic List) tool.

6 In the Schematic Components List ➤ Panel Layout Insert

dialog box, select Project and click OK.

7 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, select the drawing

that has the schematic symbol you inserted. Click Process, and
then click OK.
This extracts a list of all schematic devices found in the drawing
and displays them in a dialog box for selection.

8 In the Schematic Components dialog box, select the schematic

component you inserted in step 2 and click Manual.
Another option is to select the schematic component from
the list and click Insert. AutoCAD Electrical looks at the entry's
manufacturer and catalog part number. It then takes the
manufacturer attribute value (MFG) and finds a table in the
footprint_lookup.mdb file with this name. If found, AutoCAD
Electrical queries this specific vendor table using the selected
entry's catalog (CAT) part number attribute value. If a record
match is found, AutoCAD Electrical returns the block name
from the matched record. It starts the Insert Footprint com-
mand and prompts for the insertion point for the footprint
block. As the block inserts, attributes are added in to make the
footprint AutoCAD Electrical "smart" and the schematic sym-
bol's values are copied to the footprint representation.

9 In the Footprint dialog box, Choice B section, click Browse.

10 In the Pick dialog box, browse to and select the block you want
to insert for the footprint. Click Open.

11 Place the symbol in the drawing. In the Panel Layout - Com-

ponent Insert/Edit dialog box, notice that this symbol has the
same TAG value as the schematic symbol. Click OK.
As each footprint is inserted, it gets checked off the list in the
Schematic Components dialog box (an "x" appears in the left-
hand column). This helps track what has already been inserted
onto the drawing.

1034 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 12 In the Schematic Components dialog box, click Close.

Syntax for encoding an icon menu page display for footprint selection

(wdmenu "n:/myfolder/my_lookup_menu.dat" 5)
where
"n:/myfolder/my_lookup_menu.dat" = your AutoCAD Electrical icon menu
file
5 = the "*Mx" page number in that menu (x = 5)
This is entered into the third edit box, the one labeled "Footprint block name,"
where the AutoCAD block name normally goes. It signals AutoCAD Electrical
to open the icon menu file and jump to the menu page number ("5" in this
example). Then AutoCAD Electrical waits for you to pick from the icon menu
selection. The specific footprint block path/name to use is encoded into the
icon menu file page "5" (excerpt from example "my_lookup_menu.dat"
AutoCAD Electrical icon menu file shown below).
**M5
300 AMP FRAME MCP
2-D plan view|mcp_300_2dpv.sld|"MCP300-2Dp.dwg"
3-D plan insertion|mcp_300_3dpv.sld|"MCP300-3Dp.dwg"
2-D side view|mcp_300_2dsv.sld|$C=wd_infpx "MCP300-2Ds.dwg"
3-D side insertion|mcp_300_3dsv.sld|$C=wd_infpx "MCP300-3Ds.dwg"
When you select an icon from the icon menu, it returns the footprint block
".dwg" file to use. This technique of footprint selection is useful for situations
where there may be multiple possible orientations of a given footprint part
number.

Select and insert footprints | 1035

 Insert panel footprints using vendor menus

1 Click the Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu) tool.

NOTE This dialog box is also available by clicking Vendor Menu

Select on the Vendor Panel Footprint dialog box after a vendor is
first selected.

In the Vendor Menu Selection dialog box, select the vendor

menu to use and click OK. You can select one from the list or
click Browse to search for a vendor (.pnl) menu file.

2 In the Vendor Panel Footprint dialog box, select the compon-

ent to insert from the Symbol Preview window and click OK.
Clicking an icon inserts the footprint into the active drawing
as defined by the command in the .pnl file.

3 Select the insertion point on the screen.

Insert footprint
This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom
menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon
Menu Paths section of the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box.
(Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the project name
and select Properties.) Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu.
The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.env". Add entry
"WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout
icon menu.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint (Icon
Menu) tool.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Icon Menu).

1036 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure.
The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just
above the menu tree structure.

Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.

■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the
current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the
main menu is selected in the Menu tree view.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview
window and Recently Used window. The current view option
is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with
text, Icon only or List view.

Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*.dat).
The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus
defined in the .dat file.

NOTE If the program cannot find any of the icon menu files listed
in the *.wdp, an alert dialog displays.

Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol images corresponding to the menu or the
sub-menu selected in the Menu section. Clicking on the icon
performs one of the following functions based on the icon prop-
erties as defined by the *.dat file:
■ Executes a command
■ Displays a submenu

NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name
and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information.

Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing
session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list
box follows the view options setting in the symbol preview win-
dow (icon, icon with text or list view) and the total number of
icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit
box.

Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list
box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10.

Select and insert footprints | 1037

No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting
symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click
the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.

No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique

Component Tag). The untagged value that displays is the com-
ponent's TAG1/TAG2 default value. To add component detail
later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component
to edit.

Always display previously used Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open
menu the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a
push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you
open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu
displays by default.

Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to
the value set in the Panel Drawing Configuration dialog box.
Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing
editing session ends.

Scale panel Specifies the footprint insertion scale. This defaults to the value
set in the Panel Drawing Configuration dialog box. Once set, this
value is remembered until reset or until the drawing editing ses-
sion ends.

Type it Manually type in the component block to insert.

Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert.

Right-click menus

Options for the Menu tree structure view

Right-click the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to
display the following options:

■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus.

1038 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or
submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the
Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.

Options for the Symbol Preview window

Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display
the following options:

■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and
Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check
mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view.

■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view
the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name/image/block names
and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties.

Panel layout - terminal insert/edit

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the arrow on the Terminal Strip Editor tool
to access the Insert Terminal (Manual) tool. Select the method for inserting a
terminal strip and place the terminal strip on the drawing.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Insert Terminal (Manual). Select the method for inserting
a terminal strip and place the terminal strip on the drawing.
On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Edit Footprint tool. Select the terminal
strip to edit.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Edit Footprint. Select the terminal strip to edit.

NOTE You can also use the Insert Terminal (Schematic List) tool to insert a terminal
onto the drawing.

Tag Strip

These controls determine the overall tagging of the terminal strip in the project.
The Installation, Location and Tag Strip values define which strip the terminal
belongs to.

Select and insert footprints | 1039

 NOTE Assigning short installation or location codes to components like "PNL" and
"FIELD" allow you to later take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to
create installation or location-specific BOM and component lists.

Installation Changes the installation code(s). Click Browse to

search the active drawing, entire project and an
external list (default.inst) for installation codes. Pick
from the list to automatically update the compon-
ent with the installation code.

Location Changes the location code(s). Click Browse to

search the active drawing, entire project and an
external list (default.loc) for location codes. Pick
from the list to automatically update the compon-
ent with the location code.

Tag Strip Specifies the Tag ID given to the terminal strip. If

there is an existing name, it appears in the edit box.
If not, you can enter a specific ID name or click the
< and > buttons to increment or decrement the last
digit/character in the Tag Strip value.

Number Specifies the terminal number. If there isn’t PINLIST

information, the < and > buttons increment or
decrement the terminal number. You can also click
Pick to select a text object or an attribute on the
active drawing to use for the terminal number.
If the panel footprint is already associated to a
schematic symbol, this edit box is already populated
with its value.

Modify Properties/Associations

These controls support associations between schematic terminal symbols and

their panel terminal footprint and between multiple schematic terminal
symbols.

1040 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 NOTE You cannot associate terminals using the Add/Modify or Break Out Panel
options when you insert a terminal using the Insert Terminal (Schematic List) tool.
However, once the terminal is inserted onto the drawing, you can modify the
associations using these tools..

Add/Modify Displays the Add/Modify Associations dialog box

where you can select terminal strips and their re-
spective blocks to make an association to the ter-
minal symbol being inserted or edited.

NOTE This is disabled if the active drawing is not

part of the active project.

Break Out Panel Removes the selected terminal symbol out of the
defined association. The properties from the original
association and the terminal’s levels are maintained.

Block Properties Displays the Block Properties dialog box where you
can define and maintain terminal block properties.

NOTE This is disabled if the active drawing is not

part of the active project.

Properties/Associations

The list box displays the current status of the edited terminals association. It
lists all associated terminal symbols from the schematic and terminal panel
footprints. If the terminal symbol is being inserted for the first time, the list
box only displays the reference for itself. The number of levels defined in the
block properties displays at the top of the Properties/Associations group. The
terminal number being edited is highlighted in the list box.
You can double-click in the list to modify the terminal association in the
Add/Modify Associations dialog box.

NOTE Pin numbering is related to the terminal level and not the terminal tag
number instance.

Label Lists the level description defined in the terminal

block properties.

Select and insert footprints | 1041

Number Lists the terminal numbers defined in the associ-
ation. Only one terminal number is allowed per
level and each level displays its respective terminal
number or text. Panel terminal symbols do not
display terminal numbers.

PinL Lists the pin numbers defined left side of the termin-
al block. This data is entered into the L0nPINL at-
tribute if present; otherwise, it is placed in the
xdata.

PinR Lists the pin numbers defined on the right side of

the terminal block. This data is entered into the
L0nPINR attribute if present; otherwise, it is placed
in the xdata.

Reference Lists the terminal symbol’s reference location in the

project. The syntax is ‘Sheet,Reference’ based on
the drawing configuration.

Catalog Data

You can do a drawing-wide or project-wide listing of similar terminals with

their catalog assignments. During your editing session, the last MFG / CAT /
ASSYCODE assignment for each terminal you insert into your wiring diagram
is remembered. When you insert another terminal of that type, the previous
terminal’s catalog assignment is set as the default (assuming a previous one
was made during the current editing session).

Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer name for the terminal. Enter a value or
select one from the Catalog lookup.

Catalog Lists the catalog number for the terminal. Enter a value or select
one from the Catalog lookup.

Assembly Lists the assembly code for the terminal. The Assembly code is
used to link multiple part numbers together.

Item Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each terminal. The tag

value can be manually typed in the edit box.

1042 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

Catalog Lookup Opens the terminal’s catalog database from which you can select
the Manufacturer and Catalog values. Search the database for a
specific catalog item to assign to the selected terminal. Database
queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog with
the database hits listed in the dialog box's main window.

Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar terminals in the current
drawing.

Project Lists the part numbers used for similar terminals in the project.
You can search in the active project, another project, or in an
external file.
■ Active project: All the drawings in the active project are
scanned and the results are listed in a dialog box. Select from
the list to assign your new terminal with a catalog number
that is consistent with other similar terminals in the project.
■ Other project: Scans each listed drawing in a previous project
for the target terminal type and returns the catalog informa-
tion in a sub-dialog box. Make your catalog assignment by
picking from the dialog list.
■ External file: You can pull catalog assignments from a gen-
eric ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a
spreadsheet or database program. A dialog box displays the
contents of the selected text file. Find and highlight the de-
sired entry. AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the
file and breaks it into its component parts. These are displayed
in the left-hand dialog list. For each relevant item, highlight
it and then pick the appropriate category button in the center
column. The highlighted item is transferred to the correspond-
ing category (and then to the Insert/Edit dialog box once OK
is clicked).

Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected
terminal. You can add up to 10 part numbers. These multiple
BOM part numbers appear as subassembly part numbers to the
main catalog part number in the various BOM and terminal re-
ports.

Catalog Check Extracts the details from the catalog database to display what the
selected item will look like in a Bill of Material template.

Select and insert footprints | 1043

 Descriptions

Specifies the optional description attribute text to assign to the terminal block
(up to 3 lines of text can be specified). Click Browse to search for all terminal
descriptions in the project or active drawing. Select the description you want
to copy to the edited terminal block by selecting it in the list and clicking OK.

Ratings

Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings
attributes on a terminal. Select Show All Ratings to display a list of default
values.

NOTE If this button is unavailable, the terminal you are editing does not carry
any rating attributes.

Mount or Group

Changes the mount and group codes. You can search the current drawing or
entire project for the codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing
files is done and a list of codes used so far is returned. Select from the list to
automatically update the component with the codes.

Show/Edit Miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

External List

Assigns information from an external list to specified data in the Panel Layout
- Terminal Insert/Edit dialog box. Any existing information from the dialog
box appear in the edit box. To define the information from the selected file,
highlight the desired information in the Choices list and select the appropriate
button next to the desired edit box.

Schematic components list panel layout insert

This report provides error checking between the schematics and the panel
layout drawings. The program looks at the selected components, both
schematic and panel, to find a match in the project. For each schematic
component selected, the routine tries to find a matching panel component
based on tag, location, and installation information. If a match is found, then
it further compares catalog information looking for any discrepancies. The

1044 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 program looks at each selected panel component looking for a matching
schematic component in the same way.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint tool to access the Insert
Footprint (Schematic List) tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Schematic List).

If you start with panel layouts before you create schematics, schematic pick
list data is not available to automate footprint selection and annotation. If
you list your panel components in a spreadsheet and in a format that AutoCAD
Electrical expects, this spreadsheet data can become your schematic pick list
data for panel layout.

Extract component list for

Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.

Save list to external file

Uses a previous project's schematics to create a component or terminal

spreadsheet listing. This can help drive the new project's panel layout.
AutoCAD Electrical creates a comma-delimited file of the schematic data. You
can display this data in spreadsheet format (open it in comma-delimited "CSV"
format), edit, and then save back out.

Location Codes to extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Footprint
Some schematic components may not carry manufacturer/catalog information
or have a part number assigned that is not listed in the footprint lookup file.
In such a case, AutoCAD Electrical cannot determine what footprint block

Select and insert footprints | 1045

 needs to be used so you have to select to make catalog assignments, select or
create a footprint, or create a lookup entry on the fly.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint tool to access the Insert
Footprint (Icon Menu) tool. Select the footprint to insert.
Click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint tool to access the Insert
Footprint (Manual) tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Icon Menu). Select the
footprint to insert.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Manual).

NOTE Review Choice B below for the Insert Footprint (Manual) tool.

Choice A

Enter catalog information, or if there isn't a catalog assignment use the catalog
lookup to find and select catalog information. An attempt will be made to
find a match in the manufacturer's footprint lookup or the _PNLMISC
miscellaneous lookup file.

Choice B

Skips the catalog assignment. Select to draw a simple footprint representation

of the selected device, browse for a footprint block file, pick on an existing
block on the current drawing to convert it to AutoCAD Electrical-smart on
the fly, or invoke an external program to find and insert a footprint
representation of a given catalog number.

Use generic marker only Inserts a block with just the component's tag, descrip-
tion text, and so on.

Draw shapes Draws a rectangle, circle, or octagon to represent

the component. Text and hidden information inser-
ted when drawn.

Pick "just like" footprint Select a block from the drawing.

Browse Pick a block from a list of .DWG files on disk.

1046 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

Pick Pick a non-AutoCAD Electrical block on the drawing
to be instantly changed into a smart AutoCAD Elec-
trical block.

ABECAD Pick your own ABECAD install to link to.

Choice C

A footprint lookup database table matches MFG/CAT part number

combinations with their appropriate footprint blocks. In cases where a
MFG/CAT number is given but isn't in a lookup file, AutoCAD Electrical enables
this option.
There are two categories of panel footprint lookup files: manufacturer and
miscellaneous.

Add Entry to Manufacturer Adds a new entry to the manufacturer-specific foot-

print lookup table and matches it with an existing
footprint block or drawing file. It will have the same
name as the component's manufacturer name.

Add Entry to Miscellaneous Adds a new entry to a miscellaneous (catch all)

footprint lookup table called "_PNLMISC". This will
add the MFG/CAT combination to the footprint
lookup table and match it with an existing footprint
block or library symbol. If the lookup table does not
exist it will be created.

Panel layout - component insert or edit

You can go back to any component at any time and make changes. In some
cases, a footprint update may be required due to manufacturer, catalog or
assembly value changes. When asked whether to manually force a footprint
change, click No to leave the existing footprint block as is or click Yes to set

Select and insert footprints | 1047

 up a footprint lookup database file or manually draw a simple footprint
representation.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint (Icon
Menu) tool. Select the footprint to insert and specify the insertion point on the
drawing.
Click the Edit Footprint tool. Select the footprint or nameplate to edit.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Icon Menu). Select the footprint to insert
and specify the insertion point on the drawing.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Edit Footprint. Select the footprint to edit.

NOTE The dialog box options differ depending on whether you are inserting or
editing a footprint or nameplate.

Item Number

This is automatically assigned when the catalog part number values match
an existing component that is already assigned an Item number. If no existing
match is found, you can manually enter an item number. These item numbers,
which can be linked to "smart" balloons, display in panel BOM and component
lists.

Find Scans each listed drawing for the target component type and returns
a list of what was found. You can make your catalog assignment by
picking from the list.

List Displays a list of numbers found in the current drawing or project so

you can select similar descriptions to edit.

Next Finds the next available item number.

Catalog Data

Does a drawing or project-wide listing of similar components with their catalog

assignments. During your editing session, the last MFG / CAT / ASSYCODE
assignment for each component type you insert into your wiring diagram is
remembered. When you insert another component of that type, the previous

1048 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 component's catalog assignment is set as the default (assuming a previous one
was made during the current editing session).

Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the footprint. Enter a value or select
one from the Catalog lookup.

Catalog Lists the catalog number for the footprint. Enter a value or select one
from the Catalog lookup.

Assembly Lists the assembly code for the footprint. The Assembly code is used
to link multiple part numbers together.

Count Specifies the quantity number for the part number (blank=1). This
value gets inserted into a BOM report's "SUBQTY" column.

Unit Specifies the unit of measure, which can be displayed in the compon-
ent list report.

Catalog Lookup Opens the component's catalog database from which you can
manually enter or pick the Manufacturer or Catalog values. Search
the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the currently se-
lected component. Database queries are set up in the lists across the
top of the dialog with the database hits listed in the dialog's main
window.

Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the current
drawing.

Project Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the project.

Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the currently selected
component. You can add up to 99 part numbers. These multiple
BOM part numbers appear as subassembly part numbers to the main
catalog part number in the various BOM and component reports.

Catalog Check Show how the selected item displays like in a Bill of Material template.

Select and insert footprints | 1049

 Rating

Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings
attributes on a terminal. Select Show All Ratings to display a list of default
values.

NOTE If this button is unavailable, the component you are editing does not carry
any rating attributes.

Component Tag

Any existing tags appear in the edit box. To define the component tag, edit
the existing tag or type a specific tag in the edit box. Select Fixed if you don't
want this tag to be updated on a retag.

Schematic List Applies an ID tag number to link the panel component back to its
equivalent device on the schematics.

External list file Assigns a tag from an external list file.

Description

Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered.

Drawing Displays a list of descriptions found in the current drawing so you

can select similar descriptions to edit.

Project Displays a list of descriptions found in the project so you can pick
similar descriptions to edit.

Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can select standard descrip-
tions.

Installation/Location Codes

Changes the installation, location, mount, and group codes. You can search
the current drawing or entire project for the codes. A quick read of all the
current or selected drawing files is done and a list of installation codes used
so far is returned. Select from the list to automatically update the component
with the codes.

1050 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you
can take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to create
location-specific BOM and component lists later.

Switch Positions

Labels the positions of a selector switch.

Show/Edit Miscellaneous

View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.

Multiple bill of material information

This tool allows you to insert or edit extra catalog part numbers on to the
currently selected component or footprint. You can add up to 99 additional
part numbers to any schematic or panel component on-the-fly. These multiple
BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly part numbers to the main catalog
part number in the various BOM and component reports.

Access:

On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog

box, Catalog Data section, click Multiple Catalog.

NOTE You can also access this dialog by clicking Multiple Catalog on the Copy
Catalog Assignment dialog box (Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤
Copy Catalog Assignment)

The additional catalog part numbers are saved on the symbol as

MFGn/CATn/ASSYCODEn attribute values where "n" is the sequential code
value "01" through "10" selected in the top list box. If these attributes are not
present on the symbols, AutoCAD Electrical saves the information as Extended
Entity Data (Xdata) on the symbol's block insert.

Sequential code

Adds up to 99 extra part numbers (in addition to the main catalog part
number). Pick which one you want to add or inspect/edit. Click the list button
to show all extra part numbers carried on the component.

Select and insert footprints | 1051

 Catalog Data

Specifies the catalog part number information such as the manufacturer and
catalog number.

Count

Specifies the quantity number for the extra part number (blank=1). This value
gets inserted into a BOM report's "SUBQTY" column.

Unit

Specifies the unit of measure, which can be displayed in the component list
report.

Parts Catalog Lookup

Lists the catalog database table that is to be referenced for the description
information for the given Manufacturer/Catalog/Assembly combination. For
each catalog entry you must provide a name for the catalog look-up table. For
the main catalog entry this information is provided on the symbol itself but
may not be there for these catalog entries. Select List to pick from a list of
tables that are contained in your catalog database file or Misc to use the
MISC_CAT table.

Catalog Lookup

Checks for and displays catalog table information in the Parts Catalog dialog
box for the selected component type.

Catalog Check

Quickly performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result.

Multiple catalog part number assignments

1052 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 This displays the order in which the extra part numbers will appear in the
various AutoCAD Electrical reports. You can add up to 99 additional part
number assignments to a component..

Access:

On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog

box, Catalog Data section, click Multiple Catalog. Click List Sequential Code on
the Multiple Bill of Material Information dialog box.

NOTE You can also access this dialog by clicking Multiple Catalog on the Copy
Catalog Assignment dialog box (Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤
Copy Catalog Assignment) and then clicking List Sequential Code.

To change the order, highlight the part number and click Move Up or Move
Down to move it in the list.

Panel equipment in
This tool lists data extracted from your equipment list, finds the appropriate
panel symbol by querying the footprint_lookup.mdb, and inserts the panel
footprints at your pick point. Each line or record in the equipment list
represents a single entry into the Equipment in dialog box for schematic
component selection. The quantity for a selected catalog number is not
supported.
You can select to insert a single panel footprint or multiple footprints from
the equipment list.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint
tool, then click the arrow on the Insert Footprint (Catalog List) to access the
Insert Footprint (Equipment List) tool. Select the spreadsheet file to use and
click Open. Specify to use default or previously saved settings and click OK.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Lists) ➤ Insert Footprint
(Equipment List). Select the spreadsheet file to use and click Open. Specify to
use default or previously saved settings and click OK.

Sort List

Sorts the list of components. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list.

Select and insert footprints | 1053

 Catalog Check

Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. This is enabled if the
selected panel component contains catalog data.

Footprint scale

Specifies the block insert scale. (1.0 = full)

Rotate

Specifies the block rotation angle. (blank = "ask")

External Program

Executes an external user routine to retrieve the footprint block name and
catalog data. Requires the WD_XCAT reference in the wd.env and a user
AutoLISP file to manage the data send/receive with the external routine.

Manual

Specifies to manually pick the panel footprint. The Panel Component dialog
box displays, so you can define the footprint to use.

Insert

Finds and inserts footprint for the highlighted component. This is based upon
a match between the footprint symbol's catalog part number and an entry in
a schematic lookup file. If 0 matches are found you will be prompted to
manually draw the footprint, add an entry in the lookup file, or select an
existing footprint drawing file. If multiple components are selected in the list,
the Spacing for Footprint Insertion dialog box displays, allowing you to define
how you want the first component of each device inserted.

Use Footprint tables Accesses the standard footprint lookup table that matches
the device's MFG code. This table is set up to insert a full
mechanical representation of the device.

Use Wiring diagram tables Accesses an alternate table in the footprint lookup table.
This table matches the MFG code but attaches an "_WD"
suffix. The tables with the "_WD" suffix are set up to insert
a symbol that carries the wire connection attributes.

1054 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 Convert Existing

Inserts selected entry's data on an existing "dumb" block insert. This instantly
converts the block to a smart AutoCAD Electrical footprint.

Pick File

Allows you to pick a file for the insert. Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical
extracted panel component list file or extract a fresh copy of panel component
data from the current project's database.

Schematic component or panel footprint

Inserts schematic or panel symbols by choosing a catalog number or a
component description from a user-defined pick list. The data displayed in
this pick list is stored in a database in generic Access format. The file name is
wd_picklist.mdb and can be edited with Access or from Add/Edit/Delete along
the bottom of the pick list's dialog box. The AutoCAD Electrical normal search
path sequence is used to locate this file.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component
(Catalog List) tool.
From the Component menu, select Insert Component (Lists) ➤ Insert Com-
ponent (Catalog List).
Click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint
(Catalog List) tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Lists) ➤ Insert Footprint
(Catalog List).

Both schematic and panel layout symbols can be included in the pick list
database but only schematic or panel entries are displayed at a time depending
on whether the routine is called from the AutoCAD Electrical or Panel Layout
toolbar.

Sort by Specifies how to sort the record list. You can sort by description,
catalog number, or manufacturer code.

Add Opens a dialog box for creating a new record. If the footprint block
is not in an AutoCAD or an AutoCAD Electrical search path, include
the part of the path that needs to be appended to one of these search

Select and insert footprints | 1055

 paths (or you can enter the full path). If the new record is similar to
an existing record, highlight the existing record before you click Add.

Edit Opens a dialog box for editing an existing record. Highlight the record
and click Edit. Modify the record in the displayed dialog box.

Delete Removes an existing record.

Schematic terminals list panel layout insert

This report provides error checking between the schematic terminals and
panel layout terminals. The program looks at the selected terminals, both
schematic and panel, looking for a match in the project. For each schematic
terminal selected, it tries to find a matching panel terminal based on tag,
location, and installation information. If a match is found, then it compares
catalog information, and description information, looking for any
discrepancies. The program then looks at each selected panel terminal looking
for a matching schematic terminal in the same way.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Terminal
(Schematic List) tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Terminal (Schematic List).

If you start with panel layouts before you create schematics, schematic pick
list data is not available to automate footprint selection and annotation. If
you list your panel components in a spreadsheet and in a format that AutoCAD
Electrical expects, this spreadsheet data can become your schematic pick list
data for panel layout.

Extract component list for

Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.

Save list to external file

Uses a previous project's schematics to create a component or terminal

spreadsheet listing. This can help drive the new project's panel layout.
AutoCAD Electrical creates a comma-delimited file of the schematic data. You
can display this data in spreadsheet format (open it in comma-delimited "CSV"
format), edit, and then save back out.

1056 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 Location Codes to extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Settings
This spreadsheet organizes the selected user-created equipment list and presents
the list in a pick list. As you pick an item from the pick list, the appropriate
schematic symbol is found and inserted in the drawing at your pick point.
Your equipment list can be an AutoCAD Electrical-generated Component
report, or it can be a list of motors giving horsepower and starter type along
with motor ID and descriptions.

NOTE You can open a comma-delimited file, Excel spreadsheet, or Access database
file for input.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component
(Equipment List) or click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the
Insert Footprint (Equipment List) tool. Select the spreadsheet file to use and
click Open. Click the table to edit and click OK.
From the Components menu, select Insert Component (Lists) ➤ Insert Com-
ponent (Equipment List) or select Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Lists) ➤
Insert Footprint (Equipment List). Select the spreadsheet file to use and click
Open. Click the table to edit and click OK.

Default settings Uses the default settings for managing equipment lists.

Read settings Reads and uses the settings for a previously saved file.

Spreadsheet/Table columns Defines the order of the data in the selected equipment list
file. Assign column numbers to data categories (such as
Manufacturer, Catalog, and Installation) in the Equipment
List Spreadsheet Settings dialog box.

Save settings Saves the column information in a text file to be reused.

The filename is user-defined with the extension WDE.

Select and insert footprints | 1057

 Vendor menu selection
This can save a lot of time if you frequently use the same vendor and panel
components. You can even apply this method to create client-specific menus
making it easier to use the vendor or components that each client prefers.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint
tool to access the Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu) tool.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu).

NOTE This dialog box is also available by clicking Vendor Menu Select on the
Vendor Panel Footprint dialog box after a vendor is first selected.

The vendor icon menu files that are found in AutoCAD Electrical are listed in
the dialog box.

Vendor panel footprint

This can save a lot of time if you frequently use the same vendor and panel
components. You can even apply this method to create client-specific menus
making it easier to use the vendor or components that each client prefers.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint
tool to access the Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu) tool. Select the vendor
menu to use and click OK.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu). Select the vendor
menu to use and click OK.

1058 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 Clicking an icon inserts the footprint into the active drawing as defined by
the command in the .pnl file.

Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.

■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the
current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the
main menu is selected in the Menu tree view.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview
window and Recently Used window. The current view option
is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with
text, Icon only or List view.

Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*.dat).
The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus
defined in the .dat file.

Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol images corresponding to the menu or the
sub-menu selected in the Menu section. Clicking on the icon in-
serts the footprint into the active drawing as defined by the
command in the .pnl file.

Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing
session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list
box follows the view options setting in the symbol preview win-
dow (icon, icon with text or list view) and the total number of
icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit
box.

Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list
box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10.

No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting
symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click
the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.

No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique

Component Tag). The untagged value that displays is the com-
ponent's TAG1/TAG2 default value. To add component detail

Select and insert footprints | 1059

 later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component
to edit.

Always display previously used Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open
menu the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a
push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you
open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu
displays by default.

Scale Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to

the value set in the Panel Drawing Configuration dialog box.
Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing
editing session ends. There are separate scale factors for schem-
atic and panel components.

Vendor Menu Select Displays the Vendor Menu Selection dialog box.

Type it Manually type in the component block to insert.

Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert.

Right-click menus

Options for the Menu tree structure view

Right-click the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to
display the following options:

■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the folders.

■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to modify the existing menu or

submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the
Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.

Options for the Symbol Preview window

Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display
the following options:

■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and
Recently Used window. The current view option is indicates with a check
mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view.

1060 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 ■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to
modify the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name/image/block
names and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties.

Insert a copy of a panel footprint

Use the Copy Footprint tool instead of AutoCAD Copy when a panel
component footprint has a balloon or a nameplate associated with it. Since
AutoCAD Electrical establishes invisible Xdata pointers when these are tied
to a footprint, they are properly updated when copied using this utility.

1 On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Copy Footprint tool.

2 Select the panel component to copy.

3 Click the drawing to specify the insertion point or enter a

value.
The Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box displays.

4 Specify any necessary values such as the component tag,

catalog information, or description.

5 Click OK.

Copy code values to components

Use this tool to quickly insert or copy installation, location, group or mount
code values to selected components. These values extract into various reports
and may be useful for sorting or grouping purposes. Copied values show up
on the target footprints as an attribute value if an attribute is present or as
invisible Xdata.

Insert a copy of a panel footprint | 1061

 NOTE This procedure uses the Copy Location Code tool, but you can use the
same steps for any of the Panel Location Copy tools.

1 On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the arrow on the Miscel-

laneous tool to access the Panel Location Copy tool.

2 Click the Panel Location Copy tool.

3 Click the Copy Location Code tool.

4 In the Copy Installation\Location\Mount\Group to compon-

ents dialog box, select the code names you want to copy.

5 Enter a value for the code:

■ Pick Master: Select a panel component from the drawing carrying the
desired values for the all of the codes you want to copy.
■ Enter a value in the edit box.
■ Drawing: Select a value from a list of values used on the active draw-
ing.
■ Project: Select a value from a list of values used in the project.
■ Pick: Select a panel component from the drawing carrying the desired
value for the specific code.

6 Click OK.

NOTE Schematic components only update installation or location values when

the component carries an installation or location attribute respectively. Panel
components update with either of the two data categories whether target attributes
are present or not.

Copy installation\location\mount\group to
components

1062 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 This tool lets you do mass copies of location, installation, group, or mount
codes to all of the components you select. You either type in the desired code,
pick from an on-line list, or pick a similar master component.

Access:

On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access
the Panel Location Copy tool. Select the Copy Installation Code, Copy Location
Code, Copy Mount Code, or Copy Group Code tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Miscellaneous Panel Tools ➤ Copy Install-
ation Code, Copy Location Code, Copy Mount Code, or Copy Group Code.

Pick master Retrieves existing values by selecting a panel component from the
drawing carrying the desired Installation or Location value you wish
to copy.

Installation Specifies to copy the installation code that you enter in the edit box.

Location Specifies to copy the location code that you enter in the edit box.

Mount Specifies to copy the mount code that you enter in the edit box.

Group Specifies to copy the group code that you enter in the edit box.

Drawing Selects a value for the code from a list of values used on the current
drawing.

Project Selects a value for the code from a list of values used in the project.

Copy code values to components | 1063

Pick Selects a value for the code from a master component's list of values.

Use panel templates

You can use templates to create a panel layout drawing or to automatically
insert attributes to footprints during insertion time.

Panel layout template drawings

You can set up an AutoCAD template drawing for panel layout drawings with
the WD_PNLM block pre-inserted and set up with your own default settings.
You can also set up client-specific template drawings and reference the
appropriate one when starting a new AutoCAD Electrical panel drawing.

Attribute template drawings

You can set up to have visible attributes added to any footprint automatically
at footprint insertion time. This means that using non-intelligent footprint
representations can insert with smart AutoCAD Electrical attributes added
automatically, on the fly.

There are 5 attribute template drawings:

wd_ptag_addattr_comp.dwg component footprints

wd_ptag_addattr_trm.dwg terminal footprints

wd_ptag_addattr_wtrm.dwg terminal with wire no. as terminal number

wd_ptag_addattr_itemballoon.dwg balloons

Wd_ptag_addattr_pnltermstrip.dwg terminal footprints (when inserted by

Level/Sequencing tools)

If AutoCAD Electrical finds that the template exists, a copy gets exploded and
merged (for example, blocked with the panel footprint as AutoCAD Electrical
inserts the footprint into the drawing). Then the schematic data is placed on

1064 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

the footprint either as visible attribute data (if the target attribute exists) or
as nonvisible Xdata if the target attribute does not exist on the footprint block.
As AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint and prepares to merge this attribute
definition template into the block, it attempts to find the center of the inserted
block by collecting and averaging the parts and pieces that make up the block.
It adds the attribute definition template at this calculated location. Next, for
each attribute definition in the merged template, AutoCAD Electrical checks
to see if the original block is already coming in with that particular attribute
tag name. If there is no attribute with that name, the merged attribute
definition stays, otherwise AutoCAD Electrical erases the merging one and
keeps the existing one. AutoCAD Electrical re-blocks the added attribute
definitions with the existing footprint. Finally, if there is schematic data to
put on the footprint, AutoCAD Electrical annotates the attributes, if present,
or writes the data out as nonvisible Xdata.

Insert panel footprint assemblies

You can Wblock assemblies of panel components out to disk for insertion
later. Use the Insert Panel Assembly utility instead of the AutoCAD
Insert/Explode command when you want to insert a WBlocked group of panel
component footprints with balloons or nameplates. Since AutoCAD Electrical

Use panel templates | 1065

 establishes invisible Xdata pointers when these are tied to a footprint, they
are properly updated when copied using this utility.

1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access

the Insert Panel Assembly tool.

2 Click the Insert Panel Assembly tool.

3 Specify whether to add the intelligence needed for each block

to be treated as an AutoCAD Electrical footprint.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Wblocked Assembly to Insert dialog box, select the as-

sembly and click Open.

6 Specify the insertion point for the block.

7 Enter a rotation angle or press Enter to use the default.

Your block is inserted onto the drawing at your picked point.

You can also insert copies of panel assemblies that are already on your active
drawing.

1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access

the Copy Assembly tool.

2 Click the Copy Assembly tool.

3 Select the panel component to copy and right-click.

4 Enter a base point or displacement value.

5 Specify the second point and right-click.

Your block is inserted onto the drawing at your picked point.

Select component data from a spreadsheet

1066 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 If you start with panel layouts before you create schematics, schematic pick
list data is not available to automate footprint selection and annotation. An
alternative is available. If you list your panel components in a spreadsheet
and in a format that AutoCAD Electrical expects, this spreadsheet data can
become your schematic pick list data for panel layout.

Component spreadsheet data format

The spreadsheet data must be in this order and have 28 columns of data and
be saved in a "CSV comma delimited" text format. Most of the fields can be
left blank:

1 TAG Component tag id (ex: "PB101")

2 INST Optional installation code

3 LOC Optional location code

4 MOUNT Optional mount code

5 GROUPWIDTH Optional group code

6 MFG Manufacturer code

7 CAT Catalog number

8 ASM Optional catalog assembly code

9 CNT Optional count value

10 UM Optional unit of measure

11-13 DESC1-DESC3 Three lines of description text

14 BLKNAM Schematic block name (used to determine cata-

log lookup table name)

15-26 RATING1-12 Optional rating values

Select component data from a spreadsheet | 1067

27 ITEM Optional item number assignment

28 (blank)

Panel terminals spreadsheet data format

The spreadsheet data for panel terminals must be in this order and have 30
columns of data and be saved in a "CSV comma delimited" text format. Most
of the fields can be left blank:

1 TAGSTRIP Terminal strip tag id (ex: "TB1")

2 INST Optional installation code

3 LOC Optional location code

4 MOUNT Optional mount code

5 GROUPWIDTH Optional group code

6 MFG Manufacturer code

7 CAT Catalog number

8 ASM Optional catalog assembly code

9 CNT Optional count value

10 UM Optional unit of measure

11-13 DESC1-DESC3 Optional description text

14 BLOCK Optional schematic block name (blank)

15-26 RATING1-12 Optional rating values

27 ITEM Optional item number assignment

1068 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

28 TERMNO Terminal number

29 (blank)

30 WIRENO Optional wire number tied to terminal

Previous project's schematic spreadsheet data

If your new project is similar to a previous project, you can use the previous
project's schematics to create a component or terminal spreadsheet listing.
This can then help drive the new project's panel layout.
Open the previous project in AutoCAD Electrical. From the Panel Layout
menu, select Insert Footprint (Schematic List) or Insert Terminal (Schematic
List). On the selection dialog, check the Save List to External File option and
then extract from the project. AutoCAD Electrical creates a comma-delimited
file of the schematic data. You can then display this data in spreadsheet format
(open it in comma-delimited "CSV" format), edit, and then save back out.
Now follow the procedure described for picking and inserting the panel
component or terminal footprints from the spreadsheet driven pick list.

Schematic terminals list panel layout insert

This report provides error checking between the schematic terminals and
panel layout terminals. The program looks at the selected terminals, both
schematic and panel, looking for a match in the project. For each schematic
terminal selected, it tries to find a matching panel terminal based on tag,
location, and installation information. If a match is found, then it compares
catalog information, and description information, looking for any
discrepancies. The program then looks at each selected panel terminal looking
for a matching schematic terminal in the same way.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Terminal
(Schematic List) tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Terminal (Schematic List).

If you start with panel layouts before you create schematics, schematic pick
list data is not available to automate footprint selection and annotation. If
you list your panel components in a spreadsheet and in a format that AutoCAD

Select component data from a spreadsheet | 1069

 Electrical expects, this spreadsheet data can become your schematic pick list
data for panel layout.

Extract component list for

Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.

Save list to external file

Uses a previous project's schematics to create a component or terminal

spreadsheet listing. This can help drive the new project's panel layout.
AutoCAD Electrical creates a comma-delimited file of the schematic data. You
can display this data in spreadsheet format (open it in comma-delimited "CSV"
format), edit, and then save back out.

Location Codes to extract

Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical
automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.

Schematic components or terminals

AutoCAD Electrical processes the project drawing set. It presents a list of all
parent components or terminals (plus any child components/terminals that
carry non-blank MFG/CAT values) extracted from the project's schematic
wiring diagrams. First, you pick from this schematic list, and then place the
equivalent footprint on the layout. AutoCAD Electrical determines the
equivalent footprint block automatically through a manufacturer/catalog
match pulled from the footprint look-up file.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint tool to access the Insert
Footprint (Schematic List) tool. Select Project and click OK. Select the files to
process and click OK.
Click the arrow on the Terminal Strip Editor tool to access the Insert Terminal
(Schematic List) tool. Select Project and click OK. Select the files to process and
click OK.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Schematic List) or Insert
Terminal (Schematic List). Select Project and click OK. Select the files to process
and click OK.

1070 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 Sort List

Sorts the list of schematic footprints. You can specify four sorts to perform on
the list.

Reload

Reinitializes the display. This causes the dialog box to return to the Schematic
components (or terminals) list panel layout insert dialog box.

Mark Existing

Puts an "x" in the left-hand column position for any listed schematic
component (or terminal) tag that already has its footprint inserted on the
panel layout and there is an exact on Catalog and Manufacturer values between
the two. Displays a "o" if the tags match but there is mismatch on Catalog and
Manufacturer values between the two.

Display

Show All/Hide Existing Specifies to show all or hide the existing compon-
ents or terminals.

Multiple Catalog [+] Shows a full listing of the main catalog numbers
plus the multiple catalog entries. Each multiple
catalog entry displays in the list as a line entry, al-
lowing you to insert each entry as a separate foot-
print.

Catalog Check

Quickly performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result.

Footprint Scale

Specifies the block insert scale. (1.0 = full)

Rotate

Specifies the block rotation angle. (blank = "ask")

Select component data from a spreadsheet | 1071

 External Program

Executes external user routine to retrieve footprint block name and/or catalog
data. Requires WD_XCAT reference in wd.env and a user AutoLISP file to
manage the data send/receive with the external routine.

Manual

Specifies to manually pick the insertion point.

Insert

Finds and inserts footprint for highlighted component (or terminal). This is
based upon a match between the schematic symbol's catalog part number and
an entry in a footprint lookup file. If no match is found you will be prompted
to manually draw the footprint, add an entry in the lookup file, or select an
existing footprint drawing file.

Use Footprint tables Accesses the standard footprint look-up table that
matches the device's MFG code. This table is set
up to insert a full mechanical representation of the
device.

Use Wiring diagram tables Accesses an alternate table in the footprint look-up
table. This table matches the MFG code but at-
taches an "_WD" suffix. The tables with the "_WD"
suffix are set up to insert a symbol that carries the
wire connection attributes.

Convert Existing

Inserts selected entry's data on an existing dumb block insert. This instantly
converts the block to a smart AutoCAD Electrical footprint.

Pick File

Specifies to pick a file for the insert. Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical
Schematic extracted component (or terminal) list file or extract a fresh copy
of schematic component (or terminal) data from the current project's database.

Spacing for component or footprint insertion

1072 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 If a device selected from the schematic extract list has any associated secondary
contacts, these contacts are inserted along with the primary component. Use
the options within the Device Spacing area to define how you want the first
component of each device inserted. Use the options within the Components
for Selected Device area to define how you want to insert all the components
that are associated with a selected Device Tag.

Access:

Run any of the component or footprint insertion from list commands (such as
Components ➤ Insert Component (Panel List)). Select the drawings to process
and click OK. Select multiple components or terminals to insert and click Insert.

The components display in the list box in the order they are inserted. To
modify the order, select an item from the list, then select Move Up or Move
Down in the list.

Prompt for each location Specifies the location for each component or terminal
using the Insert dialog box.

Fence Insertion (for component insertion only) Specifies the location

for all of the components. Specify the insertion points
on the drawing and right-click. The Insert/Edit dialog
box displays. Once you click OK on the Insert/Edit
dialog box, the component inserts on the drawing.

Use uniform spacing Specifies the location for the first component (or
terminal). The values in the X-distance and Y-distance
boxes are used to calculate the insertion coordinates
for the remaining components (or terminals).

NOTE You can set the default values for the X-dis-
tance and Y-distance in the Panel Configuration dia-
log box.

Suppress edit dialog and prompts (for footprint insertion only) Suppresses the edit
dialog box that normally appears each time a com-
ponent (or terminal) is inserted. The Panel Insert/Edit
dialog box displays after each insert if this option is
not selected.

Select component data from a spreadsheet | 1073

Move Up Moves the selected component or terminal up one
spot in the list.

Move Down Moves the selected component or terminal down

one spot in the list.

Reverse Rearranges the list of terminals in descending order.

Re-sort Sorts the list of terminals in ascending order.

Merge schematic wire numbers onto footprints

AutoCAD Electrical supports a transfer of schematic wire numbers to panel
footprint representations. There are two ways that this information can be
assigned to the panel footprint, MTEXT or attributes. If the footprint does not
carry certain target attributes then AutoCAD Electrical will generate MTEXT
to display the wire connection information.
Before trying this feature make sure you have added wire numbers to your
schematics. Once this is completed then you will need to run an AutoCAD
Electrical command to extract the wire connection information from the

1074 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 schematics. Then you may add the wire connection information to the
footprint blocks.

1 Click the Panel Configuration tool.

2 Click Panel wire connection report XYZ offset ref Setup.

3 Define the formats for the "From" TERM annotation text and
symbol.

4 Specify any additional options to include on the "To" compon-

ent TagID.

5 View/test the report.

6 Click OK-Project-wide to format the wire connection annota-

tion project-wide.

Format: schematic layout wire connection

annotation
Defines the default wire connection text format. After you add wire numbers
to your schematics and extract this information, you are ready to annotate
your panel footprint symbols with this information. The information can be
added to the drawing in two different ways. You can build your panel footprint
symbols with some target attributes that are used for the wire connection
information.

Access:

Click the Panel Configuration tool. Click Panel wire connection report XYZ offset
reference Setup.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Panel Configuration. Click Panel wire con-
nection report XYZ offset reference Setup.

NOTE You can build two sets of panel footprint symbols, one set that does not
carry the target attributes for wire information and a set that does. When you
insert your panel symbols from the schematic extract, select Use Footprint tables
to access the first set of symbols or Use Wiring diag tables to access the second
set.

Merge schematic wire numbers onto footprints | 1075

 Format

There are two format edit boxes on the dialog. The "Full" format will be used
if AutoCAD Electrical does not find the target attributes and inserts MTEXT.
The "Partial" format is used if AutoCAD Electrical finds the target attributes
(described later). Each format uses parameters that are then replaced with the
specific wire information. AutoCAD Electrical provides some pre-defined
formats for you to select from the list box at the right. Or you can enter your
own format using replaceable parameters (page 126).
Parameters must be separated by non-blank delimiters for AutoCAD Electrical
to be able to re-extract wiring diagram information into reports. For example,
"%T=%W %1 %G" is not acceptable because there is only a space between the
%W and %1 and %G parameters. Acceptable formats include "%T=%W (%1)
%G" or "%T=%W / %1 (%G)" or "%T=%W (%1) %G".

NOTE Commas cannot be used in the format. They signal multiple wire connection
annotations onto a single wire connection attribute.

Additional options for the "To" component tag

There are additional options that can be included in the text.

Add terminal pin as a suffix to tag Adds the terminal text as a suffix.

Add terminal description to tag Adds any terminal description value as a suffix.

Include installation prefix to IEC tag Adds any installation value as a prefix.
format

View/Test

Allows a preview or test of the report.

Suppress any duplicated annotation on each terminal

Indicates to hide duplicated annotations so that they do not show on the

report.

1076 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

Add wire information to footprints
After you add wire numbers to your schematics and extract this information,
you are ready to annotate your panel footprint symbols with this information.
The information can be added to the drawing in two different ways. You can
build your panel footprint symbols with some target attributes that are used
for the wire connection information. If these target attributes are not present
on the panel footprint, AutoCAD Electrical adds a smart MTEXT entity to
carry the wire information. If the panel footprint blocks are modified to carry
certain target attributes, then these are updated with the wire information.

1 Click the Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint tool.

2 Specify to export the data for the active drawing or the entire
project and click OK.

3 Select the wire numbering format to use.

4 Select the layout devices to update with the schematic wire

connection information.

5 Click OK.

6 If you are exporting the data for the entire project, select the
drawings to process, and click OK.

Schematic wire numbers panel wiring diagram

Annotates panel footprint symbols with wire connection information extracted
from selected schematics.

Access:

Click the Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint tool.

From the Panel Layout menu, select Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint.

Panel connection annotation for Specifies to create an annotation for the active
drawing, object in the drawing, or the entire project.

Add wire information to footprints | 1077

Freshen Updates the wire connection table with the out-of-
date files

List Lists the drawings that appear to be out-of-date with

the project's wire connection table.

Report only (no drawing update) Specifies to update only the report - not the drawing.

Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for components with
specific location value(s). Once you pick Named
Location, type the location code in the box or click
List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of
used location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically
creates a comma-delimited list for the named location
search.

Replaceable parameters for defining wire annotation

%P Terminal pin text

%Q Terminal pin TERMDESC text

%I IEC-style installation code

%L IEC-style location code

%M Mount assignment (on panel footprint equivalent)

%U Group assignment (on panel footprint equivalent)

%W Wire number

%C Cable tag + conductor/core color combination (format is "tag-color")

%E Cable tag

%J Cable conductor/core color

1078 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

%V Cable tag substituted for wire number if cable tag is non-blank.
The wire number is displayed when a cable ID doesn't exist.

%G Wire color/gauge (or wire layer name)

%H Cable wire color substituted for wire number if cable color is non-blank.
The wire layer is displayed when a wire conductor in conjunction with a cable
ID doesn't exist.

%T Terminal strip terminal pin assignment

%K Terminal strip TERMDESC text - useful for multi-stack terminals

%1 Destination component tag ID. You can use only one of the (%number) para-
meters.

%2 Equivalent of "%1:%P" (component tag:term)

%3 Equivalent of "%1:%P:%D" (component tag:term:termdesc)

%4 Equivalent of "%L%1" (IEC component tag)

%5 Equivalent of "%L%1:%P" (tag:term)

%6 Equivalent of "%L%1:%P:%D" (tag:term:termdesc)

%7 Equivalent of "%I%I%1" (INST prefix+IEC component tag)

%8 Equivalent of "%I%L%1:%P" (tag:term)

%9 Equivalent of "%I%L%1:%P:%D" (tag:term:termdesc)

The part after the ":" is suppressed if the value is blank in %2 - %9 parameters.
For example, %2=comp tag:term. The ":term" part is suppressed if blank.

Schematic layout wire connection annotation

Defines the wire connection text format.

Add wire information to footprints | 1079

 NOTE You can define the default wire connection text format using the Panel
Configuration dialog box. Select Panel Layout ➤ Panel Configuration, and click
Panel Wire Connection Report XYZ Offset Reference Setup.

Access:

Click the Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint tool. Make your selections and
click OK.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint. Make
your selections and click OK.

NOTE You can build two sets of panel footprint symbols - one set that does not
carry the target attributes for wire information and a set that does. Then when
you insert your panel symbols from the schematic extract, select to Use Footprint
Tables to access the first set of symbols or select Use Wiring Diagram Tables to
access the second set.

Format

There are 2 format edit boxes on the dialog. The "Full" format is used if the
target attributes are not found and MText is inserted. The "Partial" format is
used if the target attributes are found (described later). Each format uses
parameters that are then replaced with the specific wire information. AutoCAD
Electrical provides some pre-defined formats for you to select from the list
box at the right; or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters
(page 126).
Parameters must be separated by non-blank delimiters for AutoCAD Electrical
to be able to re-extract wiring diagram information into reports. For example,
"%T=%W %1 %G" is not acceptable because there is only a space between the
%W and %1 and %G parameters. Acceptable formats include "%T=%W (%1)
%G" or "%T=%W / %1 (%G)" or "%T=%W (%1) %G".

NOTE Commas cannot be used in the format. They signal multiple wire connection
annotations onto a single wire connection attribute.

Additional options for the "To" component tag

There are additional options that can be included in the text.

Add terminal pin as a suffix to tag Adds the terminal text as a suffix.

1080 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

Add terminal description to tag Adds any terminal description value as a suffix.

Include installation prefix to IEC tag Adds any installation value as a prefix.
format

View/Test

Allows a preview or test of the report.

Suppress any duplicated annotation on each terminal

Indicates to hide duplicated annotations so that they do not show on the

report.

If wire numbering converts to MText

The default MText insertion point is the same as the footprint block's insertion
point. The default text size either matches that of existing wire number
attributes found on the footprint symbol or, if none present, the MText size
is forced to match the current value of the AutoCAD system variable
"TEXTSIZE".
If you want to predefine the MText insertion point, text size, and text style
on footprint blocks, you can do this by inserting an invisible attribute "WXREF"
on your footprint block library symbol. Open up each footprint symbol in
AutoCAD and insert a blank attribute definition "WXREF". Put its origin at
the point where you want AutoCAD Electrical to insert the block's MText wire
connection information. Mark this attribute definition invisible and set its
text size and style to the desired MText size and style.

Use the footprint lookup file

A key part of the AutoCAD Electrical design workflow is to first create the
schematic ladder controls diagrams and then use this information to help
automate the creation of the related physical panel layouts. The former shows
interconnected generic schematic symbols of the components and the latter
shows the related footprint representation of each component. These footprint

Lookup Files | 1081

 representations are supplied as a library of .dwg files and are inserted onto the
layouts in the form of AutoCAD block inserts.
AutoCAD Electrical makes use of the footprint lookup database
(footprint_lookup.mdb) to identify the footprints corresponding to the
MANUFACTURER, CATALOG, and ASSEMBLYCODE attribute values of the
schematic symbols. The footprint lookup file maps catalog information from
a schematic component to a specific panel footprint library symbol. The
database content is found at: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My
Documents\Acade {release #}\AeData\Catalogs.
Within the database file are tables based on manufacturer codes. When you
select a component from an AutoCAD Electrical extract file or select a
component from a catalog lookup file, it carries a manufacturer code, MFG.
AutoCAD Electrical takes this MFG code, goes to the matching table name in
the footprint lookup database and tries to find a match on the catalog number
(plus ASSEMBLYCODE if not blank). If a match is found, AutoCAD Electrical
retrieves the footprint block path/name (or optional geometry definition)
from the matching record and inserts the footprint representation into the
drawing.
The footprint lookup file supplied with AutoCAD Electrical points to symbols
that are full-size physical representations of the device. There may be times
you want to insert a footprint that is not necessarily a physical representation
but one that carries wire connection attributes. With this type of symbol
AutoCAD Electrical can annotate the symbol with schematic wire connection
data to create a panel wiring diagram drawing. From the Insert Footprint from
Schematic dialog box, if you select Use Wiring diagram tables, AutoCAD
Electrical accesses an alternate table in the footprint lookup table. This table
matches the MFG code but attaches a "_WD" suffix. The tables with the "_WD"
suffix are set up to insert a symbol that carries the wire connection attributes.
You must expand and modify these tables to meet your specific Panel footprint
needs. You can do this using tools provided with AutoCAD Electrical or
through the use of a database program that can read/write the Access file
format. You may use the footprint_lookup.mdb or a project-specific footprint
lookup file, called <project>_footprint_lookup.mdb. If the project-specific
.mdb file is used, it must in the same subdirectory as the <project>.wdp file.
AutoCAD Electrical search sequence
1st choice -- <project>_footprint_lookup.mdb in project's subdirectory
2nd choice -- footprint_lookup.mdb in project's subdirectory
3rd choice -- footprint_lookup.mdb in user subdirectory
4th choice -- footprint_lookup.mdb in panel subdirectory

1082 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 5th choice -- AutoCAD search paths

Lookup file naming convention

AutoCAD Electrical takes the target footprint's MFG code and looks for a table,
in your Access schematic_lookup.mdb file format file with that name. For
example, if the footprint's MFG value is SQD, then AutoCAD Electrical searches
for a schematic lookup table called SQD; manufacturer code of AB yields the
table name AB. The alternate table should carry the MFG name with a "_WD"
suffix. For example, for AB the alternate table would be named AB_WD.

Lookup file format

Footprint lookup tables are in a Microsoft Access database file. Each record
consists of these fields (in this order):

CAT Catalog number, wild cards allowed

ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value - internal AutoCAD Electrical use only

BLKNAM Footprint block name with partial path or geometry definition

DESC Optional short description used for display purposes only

Block name vs. geometry definition

You can encode a simple geometry definition in place of a footprint path/block

name in the lookup file. For example, if a footprint shape for a given part
number is a 3x4 rectangle, instead of creating and saving a 3x4 rectangle as
a Wblocked .dwg file you can encode the instructions for drawing the rectangle
in the lookup file like this:
("LINE" "0,0" "@4.00,0" "@0,3.00" "@-4.00,0" "C")
The example above follows the command sequence you'd type in to create
the footprint outline. When AutoCAD Electrical comes across this instead of
a path/block name in the lookup file, it executes the command sequence and
blocks it on the fly.

Use the footprint lookup file | 1083

 Edit footprint lookup files
You can make edits and additions to footprint lookup files using the Footprint
Database File Editor tool or you can edit them directly using Microsoft Access.

1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access

the Footprint Database File Editor tool.

2 Click the Footprint Database File Editor tool.

3 Select the Edit Existing Table button.

4 Select the table to edit and click OK.

5 In the Footprint lookup dialog box, decide if you want to edit

an existing record or add a new one.
■ If you decide to edit an existing record, select the record to edit and
click Edit Record.
■ If you decide to add a new record, click Add New.

6 Add or edit the record values and click OK.

The Catalog Number and Footprint block name, at a minimum,
must be filled in to provide a key field for the search and a
block or geometry definition for the matching footprint.
Your new record is added to the list. You can also immediately
see any changes you made to an existing record.

7 Click Save to save your changes and keep the dialog box open
for more editing, or click OK / Save/ Exit to save your changes
and close the dialog box.

Panel footprint lookup database file editor

The footprint lookup database links a manufacturer's catalog part numbers to
appropriate footprint block .dwg files. This information is in a multi-table

1084 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 Access database file (footprint_lookup.mdb). There is a table for each
manufacturer code.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Footprint
Database File Editor tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Database File Editor ➤ Footprint Database
File Editor.

Each entry in the table maps a given part number to its footprint block name.
The table name must match the manufacturer code.

Edit existing table Opens a sub-dialog box for editing existing manufacturer
footprint lookup tables.

Create new table Opens a sub-dialog box for creating new manufacturer
footprint lookup tables.

Create empty file Opens a sub-dialog box for creating a blank footprint
lookup file. This option is available if a Footprint_look-
up.mdb file does not exist in the designated location.

Footprint lookup
This tool allows you to examine the records and, modify, delete or add records.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Footprint
Database File Editor tool. Select the Edit Existing Table button, select the table
to edit, and click OK.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Footprint Database File Editor. Select the
Edit Existing Table button, select the table to edit, and click OK.

Edit record Opens a sub-dialog box for editing an existing record. Highlight the
record and click on the Edit button. Modify the record in the displayed
sub-dialog.

Delete Removes an existing record.

Use the footprint lookup file | 1085

Add new Opens a sub-dialog box for creating a new record. Fill in the fields as
desired. If the footprint block is not in an AutoCAD search path or an
AutoCAD Electrical search path, include the part of the path that
needs to be appended to one of these search paths (or you can enter
the full path). If the new record is similar to an existing record, high-
light the existing record before you click on the Add button.

Add or edit footprint record

This tool makes edits and additions to footprint look-up files. You may also
edit them directly using Microsoft Access.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Footprint
Database File Editor tool. Select the Edit Existing Table button, select the table
to edit, and click OK. Click Add New or Edit Record on the Footprint Lookup
dialog box.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Footprint Database File Editor. Select the
Edit Existing Table button, select the table to edit, and click OK. Click Add New
or Edit Record on the Footprint Lookup dialog box.

NOTE The Catalog Number and Footprint block name, at a minimum, must be
filled in to provide a key field for the search and a block or geometry definition
for the matching footprint.

Catalog Number

Specifies the catalog part number for the record. Click View to display a list
of catalog fields on a per table basis. The catalog value may contain wildcards.
Wild card characters include:
* = match any characters
? = match any single character
# = match any single numeric digit
@ = match any single alphabetic character

Assembly code

Specifies the assembly code for the record.

1086 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 Footprint block name

The Block value can be a symbol name or AutoLISP expression. If the footprint
block is not in an AutoCAD search path or an AutoCAD Electrical search path,
include the part of the path that needs to be appended to one of these search
paths (or enter the full path to the footprint block).

Browse Locates the block name.

Pick Captures the block name if it already exists on the

current drawing.

Geometry Substitutes a simple on-the-fly generated outline

for the matching footprint. Several shapes are se-
lectable or you can manually enter the definition.

Icon Menu Opens an AutoCAD Electrical icon menu page for

the block you specify in the Catalog Number sec-
tion of the dialog box.
Enter the menu name or browse for it. Once selec-
ted, click List to see a list of the sub-menu pages
defined within that icon menu to select from or
enter the number of the menu page to display and
click OK.
The menu number corresponding to the catalog
number is then saved in the footprint lookup table.

Comment

Specifies the optional comment for the footprint record. This is for reference
in this file only. It does not get extracted into any AutoCAD Electrical report.

Assign an item or detail number to a footprint

An item or detail number can be assigned to a component's footprint through
the Insert/Edit dialog box. This is stored as a data value on the footprint block
itself. To bring this item number out to a visible label, a balloon for example,

Item Numbers/Balloons | 1087

 select the Balloon icon from the toolbar and pick somewhere on the footprint
block. The footprint's item number is retrieved and then you are prompted
to select start/end for a leader.
A single item number attribute, B_ITEM, is inserted on the balloon symbol.
You can set up a template to have additional visible attributes added to the
balloon automatically at insertion time. Create this drawing with the attribute
definitions you want to include with the balloon symbol:
\wd\panel\wd_ptag_addattr_itemballoon.dwg.
If an existing template is found, a copy of it gets exploded and merged (i.e.
blocked with the balloon as AutoCAD Electrical inserts it into the drawing).
The AutoCAD Electrical item balloon labels are smart in that they update
automatically if the footprint's item number is manually changed through
the EDIT dialog.

TIP To build up a multiple balloon, let's say of a switch and a nameplate

combination, insert a balloon with leader on the switch. Then insert a balloon
without leader on the nameplate. Use AutoCAD MOVE command to move the
second balloon so that it touches the first. Both balloons still remain "smart".

Assign an item number to a component's footprint

1 Click the Insert Balloon tool on the Panel Layout toolbar.

2 Select the component for the balloon or press S at the com-

mand line prompt to open the Balloon Setup dialog box.

3 Specify the leader start or balloon insertion point.

4 Specify the leader end and press Enter when you are done
specifying the leader.
You can also press Enter without specifying the leader end to
create the balloon at the first picked point (the balloon won't
have a leader).

5 Enter the item number and press Enter.

NOTE You can also preset the balloon shape, size, text size, and arrow type from
the balloon setup section on the Panel Configuration dialog box.

1088 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 Resequence item numbers

All Panel components and nameplates are extracted and their item numbers
resequenced starting at the value you provide.

1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access

the Re-sequence Item Numbers tool.

2 Click the Re-sequence Item Numbers tool.

3 Specify the beginning number to use.

4 Specify to process the data for the current drawing or the entire
project. If you select Project, you will be able to select which
drawings from within the project. If you select Current Drawing
only, AutoCAD Electrical will not check other drawings for
existing item number assignments.

5 Click OK.

Panel balloon setup

Sets the type of balloon marker for the footprint, marker size, margin, and
text gap.

Access:

Click the Panel Configuration tool. Click Balloon Setup.

From the Panel Layout menu, select Panel Configuration. Click Balloon Setup.

Balloon Specifies the type and size of balloon marker to insert. Choose from
Circle, Ellipse, Polygon, and None.
Circle - select either Diameter or Fit. Enter the diameter value or the
Fit Margin, which sizes the circle automatically to fit the text plus the
margin value.
Ellipse - select either Axis or Fit. Enter the horizontal and vertical axis
sizes or the Fit Margin as above.
Polygon - select a polygon shape by picking on the current shape
icon. Choose either Diameter or Fit as above.

Assign an item or detail number to a footprint | 1089

 None (text only) - enter the gap value (the amount of space between
the end of the leader line and the text).

Text Specifies the text size for the marker.

Arrow Specifies the arrowhead and size. Choose the type of arrowhead for
the leader from the list and enter the arrowhead size in the box. These
values correspond to AutoCAD leader/dimension system variables.

Resequence panel item numbers

This tool assigns or resequences item number assignments on a drawing or
project. This extracts all panel components and nameplates and resequences
their item numbers starting at the value you provide. Resequencing is based
on the main MFG/CAT/ASSYCODE value combination. Additional
multi-catalog numbers on a specific component are ignored. Only the main
part number combination is used to group similar components together under
a common item number.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Resequence
Item Numbers tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Miscellaneous Panel Tools ➤ Resequence
Item Numbers.

Select the beginning item number to use. This processes the drawing or project
drawing set and assigns incrementing item numbers for each new part number.
Any old item number assignments are overwritten with new ones, existing
balloons are updated, and repeated part numbers are assigned the same item
number, even when running project-wide.

Start Specifies the beginning number to use. Add leading zeros

if desired (ex: "001" instead of "1") to enable better report
sorting on item number.

Drawings to Process Specifies to process the data for the active drawing or the
entire project. If you select Project, you can select which
drawings to process from within the project. If you select
Active Drawing, other drawings are not checked for existing
item number assignments.

1090 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

Insert nameplates
A nameplate is inserted on to the drawing as a block. It can either be referenced
to an existing component footprint block or inserted as a stand-alone
nameplate.
When tied to a component footprint, the component footprint is the parent
and the nameplate is a child of that parent. AutoCAD Electrical establishes
the link automatically by using invisible Xdata pointers on each block. This
is different from the schematic parent/child link where a common
"TAG1/TAG2" tag ID defines the relationship. AutoCAD Electrical automatically
annotates the nameplate with the parent's description data lines and tag value
(if the nameplate block carries these target attribute names).

Create your own nameplates

Use this example to create your own stretchable nameplate symbols. The
nameplate attribute definitions (P_TAG1 and DESC1 through DESC3) are
created and saved as drawing npxxtd3.dwg. Another drawing, _npxxtd3.dwg,
is created and the first drawing is inserted as a block at 0,0. A polyline rectangle
is positioned around the block and then the drawing is saved. Now the panel
icon menu file, wd_pmenu.dat, is edited with any text editor (ex: WordPad)
and the "_npxxtd3" entry is referenced as shown below. Enter the full path if
the symbol is not in the default \Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade
{version}\libs\panel folder.
**M28
D3W
NAMEPLATES
Generic, TAG and 3 DESC | s1(npxxtd3) | $C=wd_inrnp_xg "" "" "" "_NPXXTD3"
Generic, TAG number only | s1(npxxt) | $C=wd_inrnp_xg "" "" "" "_NPXXT"
Generic, 3 DESC lines only | s1(npxxd3) | $C=wd_inrnp_xg "" "" "" "_NPXXD3"
Nameplate, cat lookup|pnl2(_np)|$C=wd_inrnpx

NOTE You only need to define the D*W row if you plan on using this .dat file in
a version of AutoCAD Electrical prior to AutoCAD Electrical 2008.

Nameplates | 1091
 Insert a nameplate
Several generic, rectangular nameplates with stretchable boundaries are
provided. Three generic nameplates are shown on the top row of the sub-dialog
box. Each of these consists of a nested block, which AutoCAD Electrical
explodes and groups upon insertion. The rectangular outline of the resulting
nameplate can be stretched using AutoCAD Grips or the Stretch Window
command.

1 Click the Insert Footprint tool.

2 Select Nameplates from the list.

3 Select the desired nameplate from the sub-dialog box.

4 Pick the target footprint and press Enter.

To insert a stand-alone nameplate, simply press Enter without
first selecting a component.

5 Pick the insertion point and move your cursor to rotate the
nameplate to the desired alignment. Click the left mouse but-
ton to end the dynamic insertion.

6 Specify the nameplate tag, description, installation and loca-

tion codes, and catalog data in the Panel Layout - Nameplate
Insert/Edit dialog box.
AutoCAD Electrical immediately annotates the nameplate with
a copy of the description data that it finds carried on the
footprint (which is the same description that is found on the
schematic representation of the component).

7 Click OK to insert the nameplate.

TIP Use AutoCAD MOVE command to position the nameplate in relation to the
parent footprint.

1092 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

Remove sequencing assignments
Routing assignments found on components, boundary boxes, or terminals
can be removed when no longer needed.

1 On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the arrow on the

Level/Sequencing Assignments tool to access the Remove
Level/Sequencing Assignment tool.

2 Click the Remove Level/Routing Sequencing tool.

3 Select the terminal strip, component, or boundary box to re-

move the assignments from.
The leveling assignments are automatically removed.

4 Press ESC to exit the command.

Show sequencing assignments

You can select a supplementary terminal strip to display its defined leveling
assignments to the command line. You can also select two panel footprint
symbols to display wire connection information in a visual path on the screen.

Panel Leveling/Sequencing Tools | 1093

 Show terminal strip sequencing assignments

1 On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Show Termin-

al Strip Sequencing Assignments tool.

2 Select a supplementary terminal strip.

The leveling assignments for the selected terminal strip display
in the command line. You will see something similar to: LEV4-
LEV1=001-001-001-001.

3 Press ESC to exit the command.

Show footprint sequencing assignments

1 On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Show Foot-

print Sequencing Assignments tool.

2 Select footprint to show the routing path from.

3 Select the device to show the path to.

The wire connection information for the selected footprints
display on the screen.

4 Press ESC to exit the command.

1094 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

Swap terminal strip wire text
Use this to swap wire annotation text from one side of the terminal strip to
the other. The Internal and External default definition applies when the
terminal strip is initially placed.

1 On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Panel Termin-

al Strip Swap Wire Text tool.

2 Select the wire annotation text to swap.

The wire annotation is flipped to the other side of the selected
terminal strip.

3 Press ESC to exit the command.

View/edit panel component connection sequence

This tool allows you to view and rearrange the sequencing of all panel footprint
components that share a common set of Level 1-4 level code assignments.
This coding, when present, influences the way that AutoCAD Electrical
calculates the wire connection from/to sequence. As it processes the schematic
component representations and wiring, it checks for any coding found on the
panel footprint and panel terminal strip representations. When present, it
adjusts the from/to sequencing accordingly.

NOTE Leveling is required prior to assigning sequencing on the panel footprints.

Access:

On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the View/Edit Component Sequence

tool. Select a footprint with a set of level codes assigned to it.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Panel Level/Sequencing ➤ View/Edit Component Se-
quence. Select a footprint with a set of level codes assigned to it.

Swap terminal strip wire text | 1095

 The components that have level codes matching the picked footprint are
displayed in the list box in the order they will be inserted. This includes panel
footprint components that might appear on drawings other than the active
drawing (marked with "*" in the list). To modify the order, select an entry in
the list, then select Move Up or Move Down in the list. Multiple selection is
supported.

Move Up Moves the selected component(s) up one spot in the list.

Move Down Moves the selected component(s) down one spot in the list.

Pick Mode Defines the sequence by actual picks at each component. Pick
near each component in the order of how you want the sequence
to proceed from component to component. Picking is limited to
components on the active drawing.

Remove All Removes the component sequence information from all listed
components.

OK-new Saves the sequence assignments and writes them out to the
panel footprint representations. The data is stored on attribute
WDLEV or as extended entity data (xdata) on the symbol if the
target attribute is not available.

Copy level assignments

Use this tool to define or capture a common set of level assignments for panel
footprint components and then copy these 3-digit level codes to one or
multiple footprints. This coding, when present, influences the way that
AutoCAD Electrical calculates the wire connection from/to sequence. As it
processes the schematic component representations and wiring, it checks for

1096 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 any coding found on the panel footprint and panel terminal strip
representations. When present, it adjusts the from/to sequencing accordingly.

Access:

On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Copy Level Assignments tool.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Panel Level/Sequencing ➤ Copy Level Assignments.

Level 4/Level 3/Level 2/Level 1 You can type in the level assignments or select from
the drawing using Pick. Categories: Level 4 (shipping
split - highest level), Level 3 (unit), Level 2 (cubical),
and Level 1 (pan or plate - lowest level). You can
copy all level information or unselect one or more
level categories prior to copying.
An enabled, blank edit box indicates to erase any
existing values and forces the use of the drawing-
wide default value. If an edit box is grayed out, the
existing value is not overwritten. Use the switches to
enable or disable the edit box for each level category.

Terminal strips only Applicable only the level assignments are to be

copied to panel terminal strip representations, and
the terminal strips are referenced on the schematics
as well as the panel layout drawing. (In other words,
they are not supplementary terminal strips that are
only represented on the panel layout drawings).
Select this option, and then select one of the follow-
ing:
■ Disable (Default) AutoCAD Electrical treats the
terminal connections through the terminal strip
normally. It uses the terminal's level category
code assignments to influence how the from/to
wire sequencing is calculated.
■ Enable Processes the terminal's connection cal-
culations last. It checks each of the strip's terminal
potentials against those on any supplementary
terminal strip found that is at the same level
combination. For each potential match, it at-
tempts to make the from/to calculation for that
terminal to be a simple jumper assignment from

Copy level assignments | 1097

 the terminal strip's terminal up to the supplement-
ary terminal strip. When a match is not found,
the from/to calculation through the terminal strip
operates in a normal fashion.

Pick Selects the footprint representation on the drawing

to copy the leveling code from.

Insert panel wiring diagram terminal strip

representation
Use this to define a rectangle as a supplementary terminal strip to be used in
the wiring routing information over large control system equipment.

Access:

On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Insert Terminal Strip Repres-
entation tool.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Panel Level/Sequencing ➤ Insert Terminal Strip Repres-
entation.

Use generic marker only Inserts a terminal strip with just the component's tag,
description text, and so on.

Draw shapes Draws a rectangle, circle, or octagon to represent

the terminal strip. Text and hidden information are
inserted when drawn.

Pick "just like" footprint Select a terminal strip from the drawing.

Browse Pick a terminal strip from a list of .DWG files on disk.

1098 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

Pick Pick a non-AutoCAD Electrical block on the drawing
to be instantly changed into a smart AutoCAD Elec-
trical block.

Insert/edit panel level assignment: terminal strip

Use this tool to view, assign, or edit 3-digit level codes on panel terminal strip
representations. This coding, when present, influences the way that AutoCAD
Electrical calculates the wire connection from/to sequence. As it processes the
schematic component representations and wiring, it checks for any coding
found on the panel footprint and panel terminal strip representations. If
present, it adjusts the from/to sequencing accordingly.
This panel terminal strip coding can trigger supplementary or "shipping split"
terminal strip references, not necessarily shown on the schematics, to be
inserted into the schematic from/to wiring calculation. Specific wire connection
sequencing defined directly on the schematics using the Define Wire Sequence
command override this Panel level/sequencing assignment mechanism.

Access:

On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Insert/Edit Panel Level Assign-
ment tool. Select an existing panel terminal strip representation.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Panel Level/Sequencing ➤ Insert/Edit Panel Level Assign-
ment. Select an existing panel terminal strip representation.

Default

Displays a dialog box to set the drawing-wide default assignments for each of
the four level categories. Values entered here become the default level
assignments for all unassigned panel layout footprint component and terminal
strip representations on the active drawing.

NOTE This dialog box can also be accessed from the Panel Configuration dialog
box.

Enter the optional 3-digit level codes (for example, 001, 002, and so on) for
one or more of the four level categories. For example, if everything on the
active drawing is in the fourth cubical of the second unit, and all of this is

Insert/edit panel level assignment: terminal strip | 1099

 part of the first shipping split section, enter 004 for level category 2 (for
example, cubical), 002 for level category 3 (for example, unit), and 001 for
level category 4 (for example, highest category shipping section). With these
defaults in place only the lowest level category 1 needs to be assigned on an
individual panel terminal strip basis.

Pick

Selects a panel layout footprint symbol or terminal strip representation on

the active drawing and copies its level category settings over to the currently
edited component. Multiple picks are allowed with each additional pick
prompting you for an overwrite or append.

Level 4/Level 3/Level 2/Level 1 edit boxes

Shows the valid level code or codes assigned to each of the four level categories,
Level 4 = shipping split (highest level), Level 3 = unit, Level 2 = cubical, and
Level 1 = pan/plate (lowest level). The level code assignments should be 3-digit
values and match up with level codes of panel layout footprints whose wiring
is to pass through the terminal strip. Multiple code entries are comma
separated.
If codes are not defined in the edit boxes, the drawing-wide default values
displayed in the left-hand column of uneditable edit boxes are used (if defined).

Level code/location

Controls whether the Level 1 edit box displays the 3-digit level code
assignments or the device's LOC attribute value. This location display mode
is for display purpose only; the underlying 3-digit Level 1 code is always used
for the sorting installation.

Level 4/Level 3/Level 2/Level 1 radio buttons

Selects the level category at which the terminal strip representation operates.
The categories are Level 4 = shipping split (highest level), Level 3 = unit, Level
2 = cubical, and Level 1 = pan/plate (lowest level). The level code assignment
codes should be 3-digit values and match up with level codes of panel layout
footprints whose wiring is to pass through the terminal strip. Multiple code
entries are comma separated.

1100 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 Jumper Directly to Supplementary Terminal Strip: Enable/Disable

This option is applicable to the terminal strip only if it is referenced on the

schematics as well as the panel layout drawing (that is, it is not a
supplementary terminal strip that only is represented on the panel layout
drawings).

Disable AutoCAD Electrical treats the terminal connections through this ter-
minal strip normally. It uses the terminal's level category code assign-
ments to influence how the from/to wire sequencing is calculated.

Enable AutoCAD Electrical saves this terminal's connection calculations until

last. It then checks each of the strip's terminal "potentials" against
those on any supplementary terminal strip found that is at the "same"
level combination. For each potential match, it attempts to make the
from/to calculation for that terminal to be a simple jumper assignment
from the terminal strip's terminal up to the supplementary terminal
strip. When no match is found, the from/to calculation through the
terminal strip is done in a normal fashion.

Connection left/right

Two-character code that controls whether the Level 1 assignments show "Panel
Terminal Strip Report" connection information on the internal or external
side of the terminal block. The first character represents the left side of the
terminal strip and the second character represents the right side.

Internal (I) Refers to the side of the terminal that "receives" wire connections
from panel footprint components marked with the target Level 1
code.

External (E) Refers to the side of the terminal strip with wiring going off to other
Level 1 through 4 codes.

Both (B) Means that both internal and external wiring is on the same side of
the terminal strip with the other side empty, code of "x". (for example,
for customer connections).

For example, a single Level 1 terminal strip marked with Level 1 code
"001,002,004" runs between three back plates with mounted components,
two on the left (footprint Level 1 codes of "001" and "002") and one on the

Insert/edit panel level assignment: terminal strip | 1101

 right (footprint Level 1 codes "004"). If the terminal strip is marks as follows:
"IE 001," "IE 002," and "EI 004," then wiring leaving the left-hand back plates
attach to the terminal strip on the left-hand side ("I" in the first character
position) and wiring leaving the right-hand plate attaches to the right side of
the terminal strip ("I" in the second character position).

Maximum wires per terminal connection

Defines the number of wires (either 1 or 2 per side) allowed per terminal
connection in the Panel Terminal Strip report.

Maximum terminals

Defines the total number of terminal blocks on the entire supplementary

terminal strip for the Panel Terminal Strip report. A blank value indicates that
the terminal strip length is undefined.

Maximum/minimum wire size

Determines a range of wire sizes allowable to be connected to the

supplementary terminal strip. Wires that are outside the terminal strip's allowed
range bypass it. A blank value in both maximum and minimum edit boxes
indicates that this check is not performed.
A connected wire's size is extracted from the wire line's layer name. AutoCAD
Electrical simply parses the wire's layer name for the first numeric value found
within the name. For example, a wire layer name based on metric wire sizes
of "WHITE-2.5MM^2" yields a size value of "2.5". A wire layer that might be
set up for AWG wire sizes, "RED_14_XHW", indicates a size value of "14".
For example, the project used AWG-style wire sizes with layer names to match
(for example, BLK_12_THHN and RED_16_MTW). The terminal block accepts
wire sizes from thin AWG 24 through heavy AWG 12. Set up the maximum
edit box to read "12" and the minimum edit box to read "24."

Allowed level to level connection direction

Select from:

All Wiring from 3-digit code assignments both higher and lower than
the terminal's assigned operating level code (the "Level 1-4 radio
buttons" described above) can pass freely through this terminal strip.

1102 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

Higher only Wiring from 3-digit code assignments higher than this terminal's as-
signed operating level code can pass through this terminal strip.

Lower only Wiring from 3-digit code assignments lower than this terminal's as-
signed operating level code can pass through this terminal strip.

Example: the middle "002" shipping section has a Level 4 terminal strip at the
left-hand end and another at the right-hand end. Wiring from anywhere in
the first "001" shipping section needs to come in through the left hand terminal
strip. It is marked "Lower only". Wiring going on to the next shipping section
"003" needs to pass through the right-hand terminal strip, marked "Higher
only."

Multiple terminal strip usage priority

Provides priority for wiring information to be applied to the supplementary

terminal strip. If there can be multiple, valid terminal strip paths that match
up with the level code combination of a given from/to inter-connection, the
path chosen is influenced by this priority setting.

Level code edit: boundary box

Use this tool to view or edit 3-digit level codes for boundary boxes. Devices
placed within the boundary box take on the boundary's level codes. The dialog
box lists the number of device footprints found within the boundary and the
number of devices that currently do not match the boundary default.

Access:

On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the arrow on the Insert/Edit Panel
Level Assignment tool to access the Insert/Edit Boundary Box Assignment tool.
Select a boundary box.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Panel Level/Sequencing ➤ Insert/Edit Boundary Box
Assignment. Select a boundary box.

Default Sets the drawing-wide defaults to use for the wire level codes.
This references the panel drawing files default leveling assignment
values defined in the Panel Configuration dialog box. Enter op-

Level code edit: boundary box | 1103

 tional 3-digit level codes. These are applied as defaults when
codes are not defined on footprint devices.

Level 4/Level 3/Level 2/Level Specifies which level codes to use in the sequencing. Level 4 =
1 ship split, Level 3 = unit, Level 2 = cubical, and Level 1 =
pan/plate. The leveling assignment codes should be 3-digit values
since they are used in for sorting component data in the project
database. If codes are not defined in the edit boxes, the drawing-
wide default values are used.

Level code/location Indicates whether the level codes are displayed in the Level 1 input
field or in the location code of the device defined on the schem-
atic.

Pick Selects another physical footprint symbol on the drawing to copy

the level codes from.

Insert/edit panel level assignment: component

Use this tool to view, assign, or edit 3-digit level codes and 4-digit sequence
codes on panel footprint components. This coding, when present, can
influence the way that AutoCAD Electrical calculates the wire connection
from/to sequence. As it processes the schematic component representations
and wiring, it checks for any coding found on the panel footprint and panel
terminal strip representations. If present, it adjusts the from/to sequencing
accordingly.
This panel level assignment coding also can trigger supplementary or "shipping
split" terminal strip references, not necessarily shown on the schematics, to
be inserted into the schematic from/to wiring calculation. Specific wire
connection sequencing defined directly on the schematics using the Define

1104 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 Wire Sequence command overrides this Panel level/sequencing assignment
mechanism.

Access:

On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Insert/Edit Panel Level Assign-
ment tool. Select an existing footprint component.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Panel Level/Sequencing ➤ Insert/Edit Panel Level Assign-
ment. Select an existing footprint component.

Default

Displays a dialog box to set the drawing-wide default assignments for each of
the four level categories. Values entered here become the default level
assignments for all unassigned panel layout footprint component and terminal
strip representations on the active drawing.

NOTE This dialog box can also be accessed from the Panel Configuration dialog
box.

Enter the optional 3-digit level codes (for example, 001, 002, and so on) for
one or more of the four level categories. For example, if everything on the
active drawing is in the fourth cubical of the second unit, and all of this is
part of the first shipping split section, enter 004 for level category 2 (for
example, cubical), 002 for level category 3 (for example, unit), and 001 for
level category 4 (for example, highest category shipping section). With these
defaults in place only the lowest level category 1 needs to be assigned on an
individual panel terminal strip basis.

Level 4/Level 3/Level 2/Level 1

Shows the level code assigned to each of the four level categories, Level 4 =
shipping split (highest level), Level 3 = unit, Level 2 = cubical, and Level 1 =
pan/plate (lowest level). The level code assignments should be 3-digit values
and chosen with the idea that their sort order on a per-level category basis
influences the actual inter-level wire sequence calculation.
The List button for each level category displays a dialog box showing the level
combinations that have been assigned so far. Picking from this dialog box
assigns those same level category assignments to the currently edited panel
layout footprint. If codes are not defined in the edit boxes, the drawing-wide
default values displayed in the left-hand column of non-editable edit boxes
are used (if defined).

Insert/edit panel level assignment: component | 1105

 Level code/location

Controls whether the Level 1 edit box displays the 3-digit level code assignment
or the device's LOC attribute value. This location display mode is for display
purpose only. The underlying 3-digit Level 1 code is always used for the sorting
installation.

Pick

Selects another panel layout footprint symbol or terminal strip representation

on the active drawing and copies its settings over to the currently edited
component

Bypass terminal strips

Controls this component's wiring bypass of one or more level categories of

supplementary terminal strips. For example, special signal wiring passes from
the currently edited component to some other components in a different
cubical/unit/ship split section. To disable any supplementary terminal strip
connections that might automatically be included in the from/to calculations
between this edited component and other connected components identified
in other level assignment combinations, switch all four bypass options on.

Sequence on Level 1

Influences the wire connection sequencing of the schematic components

whose physical footprints share the same combination of four level category
assignments. The sequence assignment is a 4-digit number (for example, 0001,
0002, and so on) and is sorted to give a default wire connection sequence.
For example, all of the pushbutton and pilot light footprint representations
on a door layout carry the same Level 1 through Level 4 category code
assignments, but carry sequence value assignments that increase from left to
right and top to bottom on the layout. This means that AutoCAD Electrical
calculates the from/to connections for a common wire starting at the top left
and leaving the door at the component located in the bottom right-hand
corner.

1106 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

 Pick list for panel terminal strip report/graphical
report
Use this to select a supplementary terminal strip representation to display
wiring information inside of a report generator dialog, and subsequently insert
a terminal strip layout drawing.

Access:

On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Panel Terminal Strip Report
tool.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Panel Level/Sequencing ➤ Panel Terminal Strip Report.

All supplementary terminal strips found in the active drawing display in the
dialog box. Select from the list or click Pick to select the terminal strip from
the drawing. Once the terminal strip is selected (either from the list or the
active drawing), the report displays in the Report Generator dialog box.
In the Report Generator dialog box, click Insert as Terminal Strip to define a
graphical representation of the terminal strip for placement on the active
drawing file.

Panel terminal strip graphical report parameters

Access:

On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Panel Terminal Strip Report
tool. Select a terminal strip and click OK. In the Report Generator dialog box,
click Insert as Terminal Strip.
Click Panel Layout ➤ Panel Level/Sequencing ➤ Panel Terminal Strip Report.
Select a terminal strip and click OK. In the Report Generator dialog box, click
Insert as Terminal Strip.

Text height Defines the height of the terminal strip text.

Pick list for panel terminal strip report/graphical report | 1107

Terminal box width Defines the width of the boxes that make up the terminal
strip.

Terminal box height Defines the height of the boxes that make up the terminal
strip.

Group the terminals/text Inserts the graphical report as a set of grouped objects.
You can select any member of the group or select the group
as a whole. You can toggle group selection on and off by
pressing CTRL+H or SHIFT+CTRL+A.

Orientation Specifies the orientation for the terminal strip: vertical, left
to right, or right to left.

Wire connection format Each format uses parameters that are then replaced with
the specific wire connection information. AutoCAD Electrical
provides a predefined default format for you to select from
the button. You can also enter your own format using the
replaceable parameters (page 126).

Add spare terminals Displays extra terminals at the bottom of the graphical
representation.

1108 | Chapter 15 Panel Layout

Conduit Tools
16
In this chapter
■ Overview of conduit tools
■ Overview of conduit
marker support files
■ Generate a conduit marker
report
■ Generate a conduit routing
report

1109
Overview of conduit tools
AutoCAD Electrical provides a set of utilities to help you label, size, and report
on conduits. A conduit can be represented by a line or a poly line and by itself
does not carry any intelligence. However, you may insert a conduit marker
symbol and associate it to a conduit. The conduit marker symbol then carries
wire information intelligence pulled from the AutoCAD Electrical drawings.
The first time (per AutoCAD session) that you insert a conduit marker you
will have to instruct AutoCAD Electrical to read the wire information. You
may read the wire information from multiple drawings within the project,
the current drawing, or read the existing WFRM2ALL table in the scratch
database.

NOTE To use any of the conduit related utilities you will need to turn on the
Conduit toolbar by selecting View ➤ Toolbars. Select Electrical as the menu group
and click the ACE: Conduit Marker checkbox.

The conduit marker is a block inserted to add intelligence to a line or pline

representing a conduit on a layout drawing. There are 4 blocks, called WWAYT,
WWAYB, WWAYL, and WWAYR. The blocks are identical except for the insert
point, T=top, B=bottom, L=left, R=right. The program will pick which block
based on the leader drawn.

Conduit Marker Intelligence

C_TAG Each marker will receive a unique tag number.Use Setup to define
the next tag.

C_SIZE Conduit size, i.e. 3/4"

DESC1 Optional description line 1

DESC2 Optional description line 2

WIREINFO# Wire information for each wire included in the conduit. Wire# ;
Wire Layer ; Wire Description ; Wire Size

W_SPARES# Spare wires defined. Wire Description ; Count

1110 | Chapter 16 Conduit Tools

Insert conduit markers
Use the Conduit Marker (Pick) tool

1 Click the Conduit Marker (Pick) tool on the Conduit Marker

toolbar.

2 Type S and press Enter to setup the conduit marker.

3 Specify the text for the marker tag and the scale for the marker
block. Click OK.

4 Select the line that represents the conduit for the marker on
the drawing.

5 Click points to define the leader and press Enter.

6 Select the conduit tag and press Enter.

7 Specify the conduit tag, catalog information, conduit size,

description, or included wires in the Insert or Edit Con-
duit/WirewayLabel dialog box.
The conduit marker symbol will carry wire information intel-
ligence pulled from the AutoCAD Electrical drawings.

8 Click OK.

Use the Conduit Marker (From/To List) tool

1 Click the Conduit Marker (From/To List) tool on the Conduit

Marker toolbar.

2 Select the line that represents the conduit for the marker on
the drawing.

3 Click points to define the leader and click Enter or the right
mouse button.

4 Select the location codes for the conduit marker and click OK.
These build the From/To combination for the Wire Run
From/To Report.

5 Specify the conduit tag, catalog information, conduit size,

description, or included wires in the Insert or Edit Con-

Overview of conduit tools | 1111

 duit/WirewayLabel dialog box.
The conduit marker symbol will carry wire information intel-
ligence pulled from the AutoCAD Electrical drawings.

6 Click OK.

Edit all conduit marker information

Once your conduit marker is inserted, you may need to supply some additional
information for the marker. You can add the information at the time you
insert the marker or select the Edit Conduit Marker on the conduit toolbar
after it is inserted.

1 Click the Edit Conduit Marker tool on the Conduit Marker

toolbar.

2 Pick the conduit to edit.

3 Make any changes to the conduit tag, catalog information,

conduit size, description, or included wires in the Insert or
Edit Conduit/Wireway Label dialog box.

4 Click OK.

Insert or edit conduit/wire way label

There are two ways to insert a conduit marker depending on where you want
to pick the wire information from. You can get the wire information from an
actual device on your drawing represented by either a schematic symbol or a
panel layout footprint symbol. You may also pull the wire information out
of a wire from/to report based on your schematics. Finally, you can extract
the information from multiple conduit markers to combine together into a
separate conduit marker.

Access:

Click the Conduit Marker (Pick) tool or the Edit Conduit Marker tool on the
Conduit Marker toolbar. Either select the line that represents the conduit, click
to define the leader, and then select layout devices or branching conduit
markers and press Enter; or click on an existing conduit marker.

1112 | Chapter 16 Conduit Tools

Access:

From the Panel Layout menu, select Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Conduit Marker
(Pick) or Edit Conduit Marker. Either select the line that represents the conduit,
click to define the leader, and then select layout devices or branching conduit
markers and press Enter; or click on an existing conduit marker.

Conduit Tag

AutoCAD Electrical selects a default conduit tag which can be overridden at

any time.Click Drawing to use a tag used for similar conduits in the active
drawing or click Project to use a tag used for similar conduits in the project.
See Conduit Marker Setup (page 1115)to define the default format for the conduit
tags.

Size

The conduit size can be selected from the list of available sizes or entered in
the box.To make this a little easier AutoCAD Electrical can calculate the
percentage full for each conduit size available. To do this AutoCAD Electrical
needs 2 support files (page 1116)containing wire size information and conduit
size information. If there isn’t a .WW1 file or if the wire sizes aren't in the file,
the calculations are not made.

Catalog Area

Assign catalog information to the conduit that will be extracted into a bill of
materials report.You can do a drawing-wide or project-wide listing of similar
conduits with their catalog assignments.

Find Scans each drawing for the target conduit type and returns a list of
what was found. You can make your catalog assignment by selecting
from the list.

Lookup Opens the conduit's catalog database from which you can manually
enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values.Search the database
for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected conduit. Database
queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog with the
database hits listed in the dialog’s main window.

Overview of conduit tools | 1113

Previous Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected conduit
and returns the conduit values. You can then make your catalog as-
signment by picking from the dialog list.

Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar conduits in the current drawing.

Project Lists the part numbers used for similar conduits in the project. You
can search in the active project, another project, or in an external
file.
■ Active project: All of the drawings in the current project are
scanned and the results are listed in a sub-dialog box. Select from
the list to assign your new conduit with a catalog number that
is consistent with other similar conduits in the project.
■ Other project: Scans each listed drawing in a previous project
for the target component type and returns the catalog information
in a sub-dialog box. Make your catalog assignment by picking
from the dialog list.
■ External file: You can pull catalog assignments from a generic
ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a spread-
sheet or database program. A dialog box displays the contents
of the selected text file. Find and highlight the desired entry.
AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the file and breaks
it into its component parts. These are displayed in the left-hand
dialog list. For each relevant item, highlight it and then pick the
appropriate category button in the center column. The high-
lighted item is transferred to the corresponding category (and
then to the Insert/Edit dialog box once OK is clicked).

Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers onto the selected conduit.
You can add up to 10 part numbers to any conduit. These multiple
BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly part numbers to the main
catalog part number in the various BOM and conduit reports.

Catalog Check Displays what the selected item will look like in a Bill of Material
template.

Description

Optional description lines.

1114 | Chapter 16 Conduit Tools

 Wires to include in conduit/wireway

Define which wires are to be included in this conduit. Select from the available
list in the upper box and add to the included list in the lower box.At any time
you can pick from a from/to list by clicking Add Wires from List, or you can
add wires from additional devices by clicking Pick Devices.

Add Wires from List Adds wires by picking from a from/to list

Pick Devices Adds wires from additional devices

Spares Defines the spares to include in the conduit

Sort Sorts the list of conduit wires using an alphanumeric sort.

Report/Print

Opens the Report Generator dialog box for running a Conduit marker report.

Conduit marker setup

The conduit marker is a block inserted to add intelligence to a line or pline
representing a conduit on a layout drawing. There are 4 blocks, called WWAYT,
WWAYB, WWAYL, and WWAYR. The blocks are identical except for the insert
point, T=top, B=bottom, L=left, R=right. The program will pick which block
based on the leader drawn.

Access:

Click the Conduit Marker (Pick) tool on the Conduit Marker toolbar. Type S and
press Enter.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Conduit Marker
(Pick).Type S and press Enter.

Conduit tag Specifies the marker tag. Each conduit marker will receive a unique
tag. Enter the text for the next tag. Each successive tag will be incre-
mented from the previous tag.

Scale Defines the scale to insert the conduit marker block.

Add spare wires

Overview of conduit tools | 1115

 This defines the spare wires to include in your conduit.

Access:

Click the Conduit Marker (Pick) tool on the Conduit Marker toolbar.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Conduit Marker
(Pick). Click the Spares button on the Insert/Edit Conduit/Wireway Label dialog
box.

Select wires from Lists the spare wires that can be added to the conduit. The
list is built from the .WDW support file.

Type it If the wire type is not listed, type your spare wire description
in the edit box.

Wires to Add Lists the wires that will be added to the conduit.

Count Specifies the number of wires to add to the conduit.Adjust

your quantity by typing the number or by selecting the
<or > buttons.

Update Quantity If you type the quantity, you may need to select this button
to see the new quantity in the list.

Overview of conduit marker support files

AutoCAD Electrical has a couple of support files containing wire size
information and conduit size information: the .wdw file and the .ww1 file.
These files are simple text files that can be edited with any text editor such as
WordPad.

.WDW file

The .WDW file contains the wire information. You may have a different file
for each project.Simply create a projname.wdw file and put in the same
directory as your project file (.WDP). If you want to use the same file for all
projects, then create or modify the DEFAULT.WDW file in the USER folder
(in the Project Manager, right-click the project name and select Settings to
find the full path).

1116 | Chapter 16 Conduit Tools

There should be a separate line in the file for each AutoCAD Electrical wire
layer.The line has three fields, each field separated by a semi-colon.The first
field is the actual wire layer name used on the drawing.The second field is the
wire layer description. This description is used in the AutoCAD Electrical Wire
Color/Gauge Label tool. The third field is the wire size.
For example, if you have a wire layer called 14_RED_THHN and you want the
wire color/gauge label to read #14AWG RED for this layer, and the wire itself
has a wire diameter of 0.0087, the line in the .WDW file would read:
14_RED_THHN;#14AWGRED;0.0087

.WW1 file

The .WW1 file contains the conduit information. You may have a different
file for each project. Simply create a projname.ww1 file and put in the same
directory as your project file (.WDP). If you want to use the same file for all
projects, then create or modify the DEFAULT.WW1 file in the USER folder (in
the Project Manager, right-click the project name and select Settings to find
the full path).
There should be a separate line in the file for each conduit. Each line has two
fields.The first field is the conduit size that will be shown in the Conduit
Marker dialog box. The second field is the conduit size, i.e. the inner
cross-sectional area of the conduit, so AutoCAD Electrical can determine how
full the conduit is once you add up all the wire diameter sizes from the wires
(pulled from the .WDW file). For example, if you have a 1" conduit with an
inner diameter of 0.8 resulting in a cross-sectional area of 0.5024, the line in
the .WW1 file would read:
1";0.5024

NOTE If you create a .WW1 file AutoCAD Electrical will show only the conduits
listed in this file in the Conduit Marker dialog box.

Overview of conduit marker support files | 1117

Generate a conduit marker report
You must have at least one conduit marker with wire connections on your
drawing in order to run this report.

1 Click the Conduit Report tool on the Conduit Marker toolbar.

2 Specify whether to run the report across selected drawings

from the project, the current drawing, or just selected conduit
markers.
You can specify to display the last report run from this dialog
box instead of running a new report by clicking the Redisplay
Last Run button.

3 Click OK.

4 Select the drawings or conduit markers to process (depending

on whether the report is being run across the projector selected
markers).

5 In the Report Generator dialog box, make any changes to the

report format. You can specify to add the time and date, title
line, project lines, column labels, page numbers, and blank
spaces between report entities.

6 (Optional) Click Edit Mode to edit the report.

7 If the report is formatted correctly specify to print the report,

put it on the drawing, or save the report to a file.

Conduit marker report

This utility extracts conduit marker information into a report. Extractable
conduit marker symbols are named "WWAY*". A conduit can be represented
by a line or a polyline and by itself does not carry any intelligence. However,
you can insert a conduit marker symbol and associate it to a conduit.The

1118 | Chapter 16 Conduit Tools

 conduit marker symbol then carries wire information intelligence pulled from
the AutoCAD Electrical drawings.

Access:

On the Conduit Marker toolbar, click the arrow on the Conduit Reports tool to
access the Conduit Marker Report tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, click Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Conduit Marker
Report.

Decide if you want to run the report across selected drawings from the project,
the active drawing, or just selected conduit markers.

Generate a conduit marker report | 1119

Generate a conduit routing report
You must have at least one conduit marker with wire connections on your
drawing in order to run this report.

1 Click the arrow on the Conduit Reports tool on the Conduit

Marker toolbar to access the Wire/Conduit Routing Report
tool.

2 Click the Wire/Conduit Routing Report tool.

3 Specify whether to run the report across selected drawings

from the project, the current drawing, or just selected conduit
markers.
You can specify to display the last report run from this dialog
box instead of running a new report by clicking the Redisplay
Last Run button.

4 Click OK.

5 Select the drawings or conduit markers to process (depending

on whether the report is being run across the projector selected
markers).

6 In the Report Generator dialog box, make any changes to the

report format. You can specify to add the time and date, title
line, project lines, column labels, page numbers, and blank
spaces between report entities.

7 (Optional) Click Edit Mode to edit the report.

8 If the report is formatted correctly specify to print the report,

put it on the drawing, or save the report to a file.

Wire/conduit routing report

AutoCAD Electrical provides a set of utilities to help you label, size, and report
on conduits. A conduit can be represented by a line or a poly line and by itself
does not carry any intelligence. However, you can insert a conduit marker

1120 | Chapter 16 Conduit Tools

 symbol and associate it to a conduit. The conduit marker symbol then carries
wire information intelligence pulled from the AutoCAD Electrical drawings.

Access:

On the Conduit Marker toolbar, click the arrow on the Conduit Reports tool to
access the Wire/Conduit Routing Report tool.
From the Panel Layout menu, select Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Wire/Conduit
Routing Report.

Decide if you want to run the report across selected drawings from the project,
the active drawing, or just selected conduit markers.

Generate a conduit routing report | 1121

1122
Conversion Tools
17
In this chapter
■ Convert promis.e drawing
files to AutoCAD Electrical
■ Convert non-AutoCAD
Electrical blocks
■ Convert text to an
attribute
■ Convert Arrows
■ Overview of ECDS legacy
conversion
■ Tagging and Linking Tools

1123
Convert promis.e drawing files to AutoCAD
Electrical
The promis.e Conversion tool converts drawing files from promis.e to AutoCAD
Electrical, while maintaining graphical elements. The drawing file data is
converted into a format that can be edited and maintained in AutoCAD
Electrical. You can convert a single drawing file or an entire project.
A log file is created in the same location as the drawing file or project to display
all modifications. The log file name is either [drawing file name]_cnv.log or
[project name]_cnv.log.
The conversion does the following:

■ Inserts the WD_M block if it does not exist in the drawing.

■ Searches for Installation/Location drawing-wide defaults.

■ Searches for blocks, cross-reference tables and field boxes.

■ Extracts a list of cross-reference symbols.

■ Processes cable marker symbols, PLC modules, line entities, wire connection
point, cross-reference tables, and block inserts.

■ Copies footprint P_TAG1 values to the associated nameplate.

■ Renames terminal block names.

■ Cleans up cross-reference inserts.

■ Flips ladder line references to AutoCAD Electrical “smart.”

■ Processes wire numbers.

■ Inserts a copy of the WD_PNLM block at 0,0.

NOTE You cannot see the command window messages during conversion unless
you turn on the command trace mode. (Select Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Command
Trace Mode ➤ Command Trace On.)

1124 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

Convert promis.e drawings to AutoCAD Electrical drawings
Use this to convert promis.e drawings to AutoCAD Electrical "smart" drawings.

1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the promis.e Conversion

tool.

2 Select to convert the active drawing, multiple drawings in the

active project, or an entire promis.e project.

3 Click OK.

4 If you selected Convert Multiple Drawings, Active Project select

the drawings to process and click OK.

5 If you selected Convert promis.e Project select the promis.e

project mapping file and click Open. Select the drawings to
process and click OK. In the Convert promis.e Project dialog
box:
■ Select the project to convert and click Open.
■ Select the installation codes to convert.
■ (Optional) Make any changes to project, installation, and drawing
naming.
■ (Optional) Make any changes to the conversion setup, or symbol lib-
raries.
Make sure the specified symbol library path contains the
wd_m.dwg block necessary for the conversion.
■ Enter the AutoCAD Electrical project path into the text box.
■ Click OK.

NOTE If the project file already exists and is marked active, the
conversion cannot finish. You must have another project open so
AutoCAD Electrical can temporarily activate the other project,
delete the active project (the one being overwritten), write the
new .wdp file and reactivate the project.

promis.e conversion
This tool converts drawing files from promis.e to AutoCAD Electrical. It
examines the current symbol attributes on the drawing and maps them to the

Convert promis.e drawing files to AutoCAD Electrical | 1125

 equivalent AutoCAD Electrical attribute to make them AutoCAD Electrical
"smart."

Access:

Click the Convert promis.e Drawings tool on the Conversion toolbar.

Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ promis.e Conversion.

Convert Active Drawing Only Converts only the open and active drawing file from
promis.e format to AutoCAD Electrical. Drawing files
are not renamed or added to the project. This option
is unavailable if the active drawing is unnamed.

Convert Multiple Drawings, Active Project Converts drawing files that are already associated
with the active project.

Convert promis.e Project Selects an existing promis.e project and uses your
AutoCAD Electrical project definitions to rename the
folders and files to adhere to the names defined in-
side of promis.e. The drawing files are found in the
promis.e structure.

Convert promis.e project

This defines the conversion process from promis.e to AutoCAD Electrical.
Once you click OK, this creates AutoCAD Electrical project definition file and
folders, and then copies the drawing files into the new folders.

NOTE You cannot see the command window messages during conversion unless
you turn on the command trace mode (select Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Command
Trace Mode ➤ Command Trace On.)

Access:

Click the Convert promis.e Drawings tool on the Conversion toolbar. Select
Convert promis.e Project and click OK. Select the promis.e mapping file and
click Open.
Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ promis.e Conversion. Select Convert
promis.e Project and click OK. Select the promis.e mapping file and click Open.

1126 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

 promis.e Projects

Project Names Lists the promis.e projects defined in the project mapping
file.

Installation Codes Lists the installation codes defined in the project installation
mapping file and the number of selected drawings.

The drawing count shows the number of drawings in the selected promis.e
Project.

AutoCAD Electrical Project

Naming (Project, Installation, Drawing) Uses replaceable parameters to name projects (%P),
installations (%I), drawing file names (%S), and
folders. Replaceable parameters take on the values
from the promis.e mapping files, however you can
add additional characters.

Conversion Setup Specifies pre- and post-processing script files to run

against the entire project, and the AutoCAD Electrical
support files to use (Default_wdtitle.wdl and De-
fault.wdt). After you select the desired support file,
it is renamed and placed in the same folder as the
new project definition file (*.WDP). You also have
the option to save the command line error message
to a log file.

Symbol Libraries Opens the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings

dialog box for selecting library search paths and icon
menu files for the new project.

Conversion destination (base folder)

Specifies the AutoCAD Electrical project path. This is where the new project
folder and drawing files are located. A path must be specified before the
conversion can take place.

Convert promis.e drawing files to AutoCAD Electrical | 1127

Convert non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks
This utility takes non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks or graphics representing a
symbol and replaces it with an AutoCAD Electrical block and transfers the
attribute or text values to this new AutoCAD Electrical block.

1 Click the Convert to Schematic Component tool on the Con-

version toolbar.

2 Pick your non-AutoCAD Electrical block containing attributes

and/or text entities.

3 Pick an AutoCAD Electrical block from the Insert Component

dialog box to use in its place.

4 Specify the insertion point.

5 From the Component Parent/Stand-Alone Annotation dialog

box, assign text/attribute values to AutoCAD Electrical attribute
names and click Done.
If your non-AutoCAD Electrical block has attributes, or you
picked some text entities, the dialog box includes buttons to
make it easier to assign your values to AutoCAD Electrical at-
tributes.

Finish mapping values from non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks

This allows you to continue what you started with the Convert to Schematic
Component tool. Use this if you did not finish mapping values from your
non-AutoCAD Electrical block.

1 Click the Map Attributes From Old To New tool on the Con-
version toolbar.

2 Select the block for additional attributes.

3 Optionally, select any non-AutoCAD Electrical block or text

objects to map values to the AutoCAD Electrical attributes and
click Done.

1128 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

 Component annotation
These utilities may take non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks or graphics representing
a symbol, replace it with an AutoCAD Electrical block and transfer the attribute
or text values to this new AutoCAD Electrical block.

Access:

On the Conversion toolbar, click the Convert to Schematic Component tool.

From the Projects menu, select Conversion Tools ➤ Convert Drawing ➤
Convert to Schematic Component.
On the Conversion toolbar, click the Map Attributes from Old to New tool.
From the Projects menu, select Conversion Tools ➤ Convert Drawing ➤ Map
Attributes from Old to New.

The left-side of the dialog box lists the text or attributes to map to an AutoCAD
Electrical block while the right-side of the dialog box lists valid attribute fields
to fill in.

NOTE Your options may differ depending on how you accessed the dialog box.

Text value (available only if you select non-AutoCAD Electrical

elements) Lists the available text values to assign to
the attributes. All AutoCAD Electrical attributes for
the block inserted are displayed in the Text Value list
(if there is a block to map with existing attribute
values).

= (available only if you select non-AutoCAD Electrical

elements) Transfers the text value to the selected at-
tribute. Select a value from the list at the left and
then pick the "="button next to the desired AutoCAD
Electrical attribute.

+ (available only if you select non-AutoCAD Electrical

elements) Appends the text value to the end of the
current value for the selected attribute. Select a value
from the list at the left and then pick the "+"button
next to the target AutoCAD Electrical attribute.

Convert non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks | 1129

Pick Picks text or attribute objects from the drawing to
assign to the AutoCAD Electrical attribute.

Hide Makes the AutoCAD Electrical attribute visible or in-

visible.

Drawing/Project Lists the installation, location, mount, and group

annotations already used on the current drawing or
project.

Miscellaneous, Ratings, Positions, Pins Opens sub-dialog boxes for changing the attribute
list to reflect ratings, pins, and so on.

Delete original non-AutoCAD Electrical Deletes a non-AutoCAD Electrical block once you've
block mapped all of the attributes.

Delete picked text objects Replaces the picked text with the new AutoCAD
Electrical attribute. To leave the selected text as is,
then make sure you turn this option off.

Zoom window Defines an area of the drawing to fill the graphics

window. Click to define the graphics window; the
image is then zoomed to the area that you defined
in the window.

Zoom extents Zooms the selected block to the size of the graphics
window.

Zoom in Increases the magnification of the view so the blocks

appear larger.

Zoom out Decreases the magnification of the view so the blocks

appear smaller.

Pan Shifts the location of the view without changing the

magnification. Use the Pan button to move the view
in the graphics window in any direction planar to
the screen.

1130 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

Convert text to an attribute
This tool converts a text object into an attribute definition. The original text
string becomes the default value of the attribute. For example, if you convert
the text “120 VOLTS AC” to an attribute definition with a tag name of
“RATING1”, the original text becomes the attribute’s default value..

1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the Convert Text to Attribute

Definition tool.

2 Select the text entity to convert.

3 Define the attribute tag name. Enter a value or click the arrows
to increment or decrement the displayed attribute tag name
(for example, click the > button to increment the tag name
“RATING5” to “RATING6”).

4 Click OK.

Convert text to attribute definition

Converts a text object (that is not associated to a block) into an attribute
definition. You can convert an attribute definition on a library symbol that
becomes an attribute when the symbol drawing is inserted as a block into
another drawing. For example, if you convert the text “120 VOLTS AC” to an
attribute definition with a tag name of “RATING1”, the original text becomes
the attribute’s default value.

Access:

On the Conversion toolbar, click the Convert Text to Attribute Definition tool.
From the Components menu, select Attributes ➤ Convert Text to Attribute
Definition.

Attribute tag name Specifies the attribute tag to assign to the selected
text. Enter a value or click the arrows to increment
or decrement the displayed attribute tag name (for
example, click the > button to increment the tag
name “RATING5” to “RATING6”).

Convert text to an attribute | 1131

Convert non-AutoCAD Electrical arrows
Use the Convert Block to Source Arrow tool to replace a non-AutoCAD
Electrical source arrow with a smart AutoCAD Electrical source arrow and map
the information to the new AutoCAD Electrical source.
Use the Convert Block to Destination Arrow tool to replace a non-AutoCAD
Electrical destination arrow with a smart AutoCAD Electrical destination arrow.

1132 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

 Convert a block to a source arrow

1 Click the Convert Block To Source Arrow tool on the Conver-

sion toolbar.

2 Select your non-AutoCAD Electrical source block and/or any

text related to it that you might want to map to the new
AutoCAD Electrical source.

3 Select the wire end for the source arrow.

4 Define the Source Signal Code and click OK.

5 Define attribute values.

Convert a block to a destination arrow

1 Click the Convert Block To Destination Arrow tool on the

Conversion toolbar.

2 Select your non-AutoCAD Electrical destination block and/or

any text related to it that you might want to map to the new
AutoCAD Electrical destination.

3 Select the wire end for the destination arrow.

4 Define the Destination Signal Code and click OK.

5 Define attribute values.

Overview of ECDS legacy conversion

For this conversion to be effective, AutoCAD Electrical must have information
to intelligently swap AutoCAD Electrical type blocks with the blocks used on
your ECDS drawings. It also must know how to map the values carried on
each attribute on the blocks. This information is all supplied in an Access
database file called WDVIACMP.MDB.
COMPSWSAP table
The COMPSWAP table tells AutoCAD Electrical how to swap blocks. It is simply
a list of the blocks used on your ECDS drawings with a corresponding list of

Overview of ECDS legacy conversion | 1133

 AutoCAD Electrical blocks. When the converter is run, AutoCAD Electrical
looks for the block in the ECDS list and if it finds it, swaps it out for the block
in the AutoCAD Electrical list.
If the origin for the AutoCAD Electrical block is different than the ECDS block,
enter an XY Offset. If you need to use multiple AutoCAD Electrical blocks to
"build up" the ECDS symbol, use an available AutoCAD Electrical command
$C=wd_via_cv_3unit, followed by the individual block names.
ATTRMAP table
The ATTRMAP table tells AutoCAD Electrical how to map the information
held on the attributes within each block. For each attribute used on the ECDS
blocks, enter the AutoCAD Electrical attribute name in the next column to
create the attribute map. Then when AutoCAD Electrical swaps out the blocks,
the information carried on the individual attributes are not lost.
Notice the line mapping the attribute DESCRIPTION to DESC#. If you have
blocks which contain multiple copies of the same attribute, for example,
DESCRIPTION, you can map these to separate AutoCAD Electrical attributes
such as DESC1, DESC2, DESC3. The "#" in the AutoCAD Electrical Attribute
field, indicates that each time a DESCRIPTION attribute is found within a
block, the AutoCAD Electrical attribute name should be incremented by 1
(starting with 1).
IOATTRMAP table
The IOATTRMAP table is the same as the ATTRMAP table but is used when a
PLC block is swapped out. This accounts for some of the same attributes being
mapped differently for PLC blocks than other blocks.

Convert using the ECDS to Electrical Database Builder

The Access database file used for the ECDS to Electrical converter,
WDVIACMP.MDB, can be modified directly with Microsoft Access or with the
ECDS to Electrical Database Builder tool.

1 From the Projects menu, select Extras ➤ ECDS Legacy Conversion ➤

ECDS to Electrical Database Builder.

2 Select the line within the list to edit.

Individual values appear in the edit boxes.

3 Edit the necessary fields and click Update.

4 Add a new line to the database by filling in the fields and clicking Add.

5 Delete a line by selecting the line and clicking Delete.

1134 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

 6 Click OK.

Convert VIA ECDS or Jr. Project to AutoCAD

Electrical
If you used ECDS you may have drawings you want to use with AutoCAD
Electrical. AutoCAD Electrical provides a conversion tool that converts the
intelligence of your ECDS drawings to the intelligence that AutoCAD Electrical
expects.

Access:

From the Projects menu, select Extras ➤ ECDS Legacy Conversion ➤ ECDS
to Electrical Drawing Convert.

Project Options

Existing VIA ECDS or Jr. Project (.VPJ) Specifies the ECDS project name. Enter your ECDS
project name or browse for it.

AutoCAD Electrical Project (.WDP) Specifies the AutoCAD Electrical project name. Enter
an AutoCAD Electrical project name, either existing
or new. If you are adding the drawings to an existing
AutoCAD Electrical project make sure you select that
option, otherwise the .WDP project file are overwrit-
ten. The ECDS drawings are copied to another loca-
tion before they are converted. A default location for
the converted drawings are supplied, but you can
enter any location. If the directory does not exist,
AutoCAD Electrical creates it.

Library path Specifies the path to the schematic symbol library to

use for the project. A default search path is supplied
pointing to the Symbol library of converted symbols.
You can include electrical, pneumatic, or other
schematic libraries in the path. You can also include
a series of paths for AutoCAD Electrical to search in
order.

Symbol1, Symbol2, Symbol3 Adds the path for a specific library of converted
symbols. AutoCAD Electrical provides three libraries

Overview of ECDS legacy conversion | 1135

 of converted symbols. These symbols look just like
the older ECDS symbols but carry the expected
AutoCAD Electrical attributes. The path to those
symbols are added to your search path. Also, when
you select your project to convert, AutoCAD Electrical
reads the old ECDS PROJECT.CFG, and look for the
Symbol library name. You can also type in any direct-
ory path you wish.

NOTE The libraries of converted symbols are sup-

plied in a zip file called ConvSym.zip. Before running
the conversion utility you must unzip the libraries.
Unzip pointing to your /Program
Files/Autodesk/Acade .../Support directory but make
sure you use the folder names within the zip file. The
zip file creates three subdirectories called "Converted
Symbol1," "Converted Symbol2," and "Converted
Symbol3."

Drawing Options

Your drawings are copied to another directory and converted; the original
drawings are not changed.

Copy Directory Specifies the path for the converted drawings. If the
directory does not exist it is created.

Drawing Configuration Sets up the drawing defaults that are used for each
drawing. The defaults are read from your ECDS
PROJECT.CFG file, if possible.

AutoCAD Electrical presents a list of drawings in your ECDS project. Select

the drawings you want to convert. AutoCAD Electrical then calls up each
drawing, converts the intelligence and saves it. A log file is created named
projnam_cv.log and saved in the same directory as the .WDP file. The log file
contains information about any problems encountered in the conversion.

1136 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

Use tagging and linking tools
Apply these manual tools to enable nonblocked geometry to be made AutoCAD
Electrical-aware. The existing geometry stays in place and is unblocked, but
key text entities are converted to attributes with user picks and are linked into
a generic, nongraphical block insert. Wire connection attributes can also be
merged into this generic block insert. The process to convert it from dumb
text, circle, and line entities takes only moments to complete and the result
appears as a fully functional AutoCAD Electrical-aware block insert.
Tagging results:

■ The selected text entities are replaced with a template block file.

■ The TAG attribute takes on the value of the converted text.

■ The TAG attribute is set to fixed.

■ The color of the TAG attribute is by layer. The attribute is the same layer
as defined on the WD_M block.

■ The TAG attribute takes on the same ACAD properties as the tagged text.

Linking results:

■ The selected text entities are replaced with an AutoCAD Electrical attribute.

■ Colors change to visually distinguish what has been already converted as

defined in the WD_M block.

■ Temporary lines display the link.

Wire Connection Results:

■ Visual indicators (x) appear where the wire connection attributes have
already been applied.

■ Wire connection attributes, terminal attributes, and terminal description

attributes are added.

■ The block definition is automatically modified during the attribute addition

process.

Tagging and Linking Tools | 1137

 ■ Terminal attribute colors change to visually distinguish what has been
already converted as defined in the WD_M block.

Add Geometry Results:

■ TAG1, TAG2, PLC TAG, and TAGSTRIP attributes are defined and selected
first.

■ The block definition is automatically modified.

■ The geometry's color changes by layer to visually distinguish what has

been already converted as defined in the WD_M block.

Tag and link components

You can do multiple tagging and linkages without exiting the commands.

NOTE This procedure uses schematic components, but the same procedure can
be done using panel components.

1138 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

Initial set-up

1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the Special Explode tool.

2 Explode any existing blocks.

This explodes attributes and blocks to geometry and text entit-
ies while maintaining the value previously defined in the at-
tribute.

3 On the Conversion toolbar, click the Change/Convert Wire

Type tool.

4 Select the wire layer from the grid to add wire lines to.
The selected wire layer highlights in blue to indicate which
layer is selected; the current wire layer highlights in gray.

5 Click Pick and select wire lines from the drawing to add to a
wire layer.

6 Click OK.

Tag components

1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Tag

Schematic tool to access any of the schematic tagging com-
mands.

2 Select the text entity to replace with the component TAG1

template block file.
The selected text string highlights indicating what has been
selected for conversion.

3 Right-click to apply the tag.

4 (Optional) Tag any other text entities with the proper block
file.

5 Right-click to exit the Tagging command. You may need to

right-click a few times before exiting.

Use tagging and linking tools | 1139

 Link components

1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link

Schematic tool to access any of the schematic linking com-
mands.

2 Select the existing tagged TAG1 block definition.

3 Right-click to apply the selection.

4 Select the text to link to the tagged attribute. The selected text
properties are applied to the new attribute.
Colors change to visually distinguish what has been converted
and temporary lines display the link.

5 Right-click to create the link.

6 (Optional) Link any other text entities to the proper attribute.

7 Right-click to exit the Linking command. You may need to

right-click a few times before exiting.

Add geometry and wire connections

1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link

Schematic tool to access the Add Wire Connections tool.

2 Select the block to tie the wire connections to.

3 Select the end point of the wire or a position on a symbol.

Press Shift, right-click, and select End Point from the menu to
easily select the end point.

4 After you define the wire connection attribute, you can select
the terminal text if the drawing contains the value. If not,
continue with the next wire connection attribute.

5 Right-click to apply the selection.

Visual indicators (x) appear where the wire connection attrib-
utes have already been applied.

6 Repeat the selection for the other end point.

7 Right-click to exit the command. You may need to right-click

1140 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

 a few times before exiting.

8 On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link

Schematic tool to access the Add Geometry tool.

9 Select the block to add the geometry to.

10 Pick or window select the geometry to associate to the template

block file.

11 Right-click to apply the selection.

12 Specify the insertion point.

Special explode
Use this tool to explode attributes and blocks to geometry and text entities
while maintaining the value previously defined in the attributes. You can take
advantage of the tagging tools to modify the text entities to attributes and
the linking tools to make various blocks.

NOTE Use AutoCAD Explode to convert Mtext to normal text for tagging and
linking.

Access:

On the Conversion toolbar, click the Special Explode tool.

Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Special Explode.

Select the block to explode into separate text entities and geometry.

Tag schematic
Use these tools to convert text entities into an attributed block. Through the
insertion of a template block, you have control over which attributes are
inserted and visible. All necessary attribute definitions are automatically placed.

Use tagging and linking tools | 1141

 During the tagging process, the text entity is removed and replaced with a
template block file that contains multiple attributes used in AutoCAD Electrical.

Access:

On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Tag Schematic tool to access
any of the schematic tagging commands.
Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Tag Schematic. Select one of the
schematic tagging commands from the list.

Click any of the tagging tools. Select the text entity to replace with the
component TAG1 template block file, and right-click to apply the tag.

Tag Schematic Compon- Makes selected text entities an attributed block

ent file with the TAG1 attribute visible. The template
block file (HDV1_CONVERT.DWG or
VDV1_CONVERT.DWG depending on the draw-
ing properties) contains attributes for a schematic
component.

Tag PLC Makes selected text entities an attributed PLC

address associated to a PLC tag. The template
block file (PLCIO_ADDR_CONVERT.DWG,
PLCIO_CONVERT.DWG, PLCIO_V_ADDR_CON-
VERT.DWG, or PLCIO_V_CONVERT.DWG depend-
ing on the drawing properties) contains attrib-
utes found useful for PLC addressing. After the
addressing is defined on the block, select a PLC
Tag or place one into the symbol definition for
use with AutoCAD Electrical.

Tag Child Makes selected text entities an attributed block

file with the TAG2 attribute visible. The template
block file (HDV2_CONVERT.DWG or
VDV2_CONVERT.DWG depending on the draw-
ing properties) contains attributes used for a child
component.

Tag Child - N.O. Makes selected text entities an attributed block

file with the TAG2 attribute visible. The template
block file (HDV21_CONVERT.DWG or

1142 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

 VDV21_CONVERT.DWG depending on the
drawing properties) contains attributes used for
a child normally open contact component.

Tag Child - N.C. Makes the selected text entities an attributed

block file with the TAG2 attribute visible. The
template block file (HDV22_CONVERT.DWG or
VDV22_CONVERT.DWG depending on the
drawing properties) contains attributes used for
a child normally closed contact component.

Tag Child - Form C Makes the selected text entities an attributed

block file with the TAG2 attribute visible. The
template block file (HDV23_CONVERT.DWG or
VDV23_CONVERT.DWG depending on the
drawing properties) contains attributes used for
a child Form C contact component.

Tag Schematic Terminal - Makes the selected text entities an attributed

Terminal Number block file with the TAGSTRIP and TERM01 attrib-
ute visible. The template block file (HT0T_CON-
VERT.DWG or VT0T_CONVERT.DWG depending
on the drawing properties) contains attributes
used for a terminal block component containing
a terminal number.

Tag Schematic Terminal - Makes the selected text entities an attributed

Wire Number block file with the TAGSTRIP and WIRENO attrib-
ute visible. The template block file
(HT0W_CONVERT.DWG or VT0W_CON-
VERT.DWG depending on the drawing proper-
ties) contains attributes used for a terminal block
component containing a wire number as the
terminal number.

Tag Schematic Terminal - Makes the selected text entities an attributed

Wire Number Change block file with the TAGSTRIP and TERM01 attrib-
ute visible. The template block file (HT1T_CON-
VERT.DWG or VT1T_CONVERT.DWG depending
on the drawing properties) contains attributes
used for a terminal block component that

Use tagging and linking tools | 1143

 changes the wire number. This creates a terminal
number block that has a different wire number
for each wire connected to it.

Link schematic
Use these tools to associate nonblocked text to previously placed template
blocks. Through the modification of a template block, you have control over
which attributes are inserted and visible. All necessary attribute definitions
are placed using the properties of the existing text entities, such as justification,
height, and location. If multiple template block files are selected, the value
of the text is added to the previously defined template block attributes as
hidden attributes and the text is not removed.

Access:

On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link Schematic tool to access
any of the linking commands.
Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Link Schematic. Select one of the linking
commands from the list.

Click any of the linking tools. Select the existing tagged TAG1 block definition,
and right-click to apply the selection. Select the text to link to the tagged
attribute. The selected text properties are applied to the new attribute.
Right-click to create the link.

Link Description Links simple text as Description 1-3 attributes on

an AutoCAD Electrical block file. You can link
them as description attributes to one or more
existing template block definitions. During the
conversion process, the text entity is removed
and replaced with the next available description
attribute, up to 3.

Link Split Tag Links another string of text to a tag attribute,

creating a split tag. Create the device Tag using
the TAG1, TAG, or P_TAG1 attributes, and then
use this tool to select the existing TAG attribute
on the drawing and link another string of text,
creating a split tag situation. The first TAG be-
comes the Part1 of the split tag while the linked
portion becomes the Part2 of the split tag.

1144 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

Link PLC Address Descrip- Links simple text to a PLC address attribute as
tion PLC I/O address description attributes. During
the conversion process, the text entity is removed
and replaced with the next available PLC address
description attribute, up to 5.

Link Terminal Number Links simple text to a TAGSTRIP attribute as a

terminal number attribute on an AutoCAD Elec-
trical terminal block symbol. During the conver-
sion process, the text entity is removed and re-
placed with the TERM01 or WIRENO attribute.

Link Location Code Links simple text as Location attributes on an

AutoCAD Electrical block file. The entity value is
used as the Location value for one or more tem-
plate block definitions. If only one template block
is selected for the link, the text entity is removed
and replaced with the Location attribute.

Link Installation Code Links simple text as Installation attributes on an

AutoCAD Electrical block file. The entity value is
used as the Installation value for one or more
template block definitions. If only one template
block is selected for the link, the text entity is
removed and replaced with the Installation attrib-
ute.

Link Manufacturer Links simple text as manufacturer attributes on

an AutoCAD Electrical block file. The entity value
is used as the Manufacturer value for one or more
template block definitions. If only one template
block is selected for the link, the text entity is
removed and replaced with the Manufacturer
attribute.

Link Catalog Number Links simple text as Catalog Number attributes

on an AutoCAD Electrical block file. The entity
value is used as the Catalog Number value for
one or more template block definitions. If only
one template block is selected for the link, the

Use tagging and linking tools | 1145

 text entity is removed and replaced with the
Catalog Number attribute.

Link Rating Links simple text as Rating 1-12 attributes on an

AutoCAD Electrical block file. The entity value is
used as the rating value for one or more template
block definitions. If only one template block is
selected for the link, the text entity is removed
and replaced with the rating attribute, up to 12.

Link User Links simple text (that is not an attribute defini-

tion or part of geometry) as User (01-99) attrib-
utes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file. The
entity value is used as the user value for one or
more template block definitions. If only one
template block is selected for the link, the text
entity is removed and replaced with the user at-
tribute, up to 99. Window selection is allowed.

Tag panel
Use these tools to convert text entities into an attributed block file. Through
the insertion of a template block, you have control over which attributes are
inserted and visible. All necessary attribute definitions are automatically placed.
During the tagging process the text entity is removed and replaced with a
template block file that contains multiple attributes used in AutoCAD Electrical.

Access:

On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Tag Panel tool to access any
of the panel tagging commands.
Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Tag Panel. Select one of the panel tag-
ging commands from the list.

Click any of the tagging tools. Select the text entity to replace with the
component TAG1 template block file and right-click to apply the tag.

Tag Panel Component Makes selected text entities an attributed block

file with the P_TAG1 attribute visible. The tem-
plate block file (ACE_P_TAG1_CONVERT.DWG)
contains attributes for a panel component.

1146 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

 Tag Nameplate Makes selected text entities an attributed block
file with the DESC1-3 attributes visible. The
template block file (ACE_NP_CONVERT.DWG)
contains attributes used in nameplate symbols.
If the description text strings were previously
defined as attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical
panel component block definition, the attribute
values on the panel component are hidden and
the nameplate attributes DESC1-3 are added and
made visible.

Tag Panel Terminal - Ter- Makes selected text entities an attributed block
minal Number file with the TERM01 terminal number attribute
visible. The template block file (ACE_TER-
MT_CONVERT.DWG) contains attributes for ter-
minal numbers.

Tag Panel Terminal - Wire Makes selected text entities an attributed block
Number file with the WIRENO wire number attribute vis-
ible. The template block file (ACE_TERMW_CON-
VERT.DWG) contains attributes for panel terminal
symbols.

Link panel
Use these tools to associate nonblocked text to previously placed template
blocks. Through the modification of a template block, you have control over
which attributes are inserted and visible. All necessary attribute definitions
are placed using the properties of the existing text entities, such as justification,
height, and location. If multiple template block files are selected, the value
of the text is added to the previously defined template block attributes as
hidden attributes and the text is not removed.

Access:

On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link Panel tool to access any
of the linking commands.
Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Link Panel. Select one of the linking
commands from the list.

Click any of the linking tools. Select the existing tagged TAG1 block definition
and right-click to apply the selection. Select the text to link to the tagged

Use tagging and linking tools | 1147

 attribute. The selected text properties are applied to the new attribute.
Right-click to create the link.

Link Description Links simple text as Description 1-3 attributes on

an AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file. You can
link them as description attributes to one or more
existing template block definitions. During the
conversion process, the text entity is removed
and replaced with the next available description
attribute, up to 3.

Link Split Tag Links another string of text to a tag attribute,

creating a split tag. Create the device Tag using
the TAG1, TAG, or P_TAG1 attributes, and then
use this tool to select the existing TAG attribute
on the drawing and link another string of text,
creating a split tag situation. The first TAG be-
comes the Part1 of the split tag while the linked
portion becomes the Part2 of the split tag.

Link Item Number Links simple text as an Item Number attribute

on an AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file. During
the conversion process, the text entity is removed
and replaced with the Item Number attribute
(P_ITEM).

Link Location Code Links simple text as Location attributes on an

AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file. The entity
value is used as the Location value for one or
more template block definitions. If only one
template block is selected for the link, the text
entity is removed and replaced with the Location
attribute.

Link Installation Code Links simple text as Installation attributes on an

AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file. The entity
value is used as the Installation value for one or
more template block definitions. If only one
template block is selected for the link, the text
entity is removed and replaced with the Installa-
tion attribute.

1148 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

 Link Manufacturer Links simple text as manufacturer attributes on
an AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file. The entity
value is used as the Manufacturer value for one
or more template block definitions. If only one
template block is selected for the link, the text
entity is removed and replaced with the Manu-
facturer attribute.

Link Catalog Number Links simple text as Catalog Number attributes

on an AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file. The
entity value is used as the Catalog Number value
for one or more template block definitions. If
only one template block is selected for the link,
the text entity is removed and replaced with the
Catalog Number attribute.

Link Rating Links simple text as Rating 1-12 attributes on an

AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file. The entity
value is used as the rating value for one or more
template block definitions. If only one template
block is selected for the link, the text entity is
removed and replaced with the rating attribute,
up to 12.

Link User Links simple text (that is not an attribute defini-

tion or part of geometry) as User (01-99) attrib-
utes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file. The
entity value is used as the user value for one or
more template block definitions. If only one
template block is selected for the link, the text
entity is removed and replaced with the user at-
tribute, up to 99. Window selection is allowed.

Add geometry
Use this tool to add AutoCAD geometry to a template block file to be created
as part of a unique block instance. It creates a new block definition with the

Use tagging and linking tools | 1149

 newly added geometry. You can subsequently create a new block file if the
block is exploded.

Access:

On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link Schematic or Link Panel
tool to access the Add Geometry tool.
Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Link Schematic (or Link Panel) ➤ Add
Geometry.

Select the block to add the geometry to. Pick or window select the geometry
to associate to the template block file, and right-click to apply the selection.
Specify an insertion point.

Add wire connections

Use this tool to add wire connection attributes to the existing tagged block
file. Select line endpoints or geometry to add the appropriate wire connection
attributes to. A new block definition is created with the newly added wire
connections. You can subsequently create a new block file if the block is
exploded.

Access:

On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link Schematic or Link Panel
tool to access the Add Wire Connections tool.
From the Projects menu, select Conversion Tools ➤ Link Schematic (or Link
Panel) ➤ Add Wire Connections.

Select the block TAG or PLC Address to tie the wire connection to. Select the
wire end or pick near the selected block to select a location if no wire exists.
If you picked a location, the Wire Direction dialog box displays. Select where
you want the wire to come from: above, right, below, or left of the selected
block. Right-click to apply the wire connection.

Show links

1150 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

 Use this tool to select the tagged template block file and display everything
(such as description, location, manufacturer, and catalog number codes) that
has been linked to it.

Access:

On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link Schematic or Link Panel
tool to access the Show Links tool.
Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Link Schematic (or Link Panel) ➤ Show
Links.

Select a single link by picking or multiple links by windowing. Temporary line

graphics show what was previously linked.

Un link
Use this tool to select an existing linked attribute and unlink the attribute
from the symbol, changing the attribute to AutoCAD text.

Access:

On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link Schematic or Link Panel
tool to access the Un Link tool.
Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Link Schematic (or Link Panel) ➤ Un
Link.

Select the link to remove; the link between the attributes and the block it is
associated to is removed.

Overview of block/attribute mapping

You can perform drawing-wide or project-wide block replacements using a
user-defined Microsoft Excel spreadsheet and an AutoCAD Electrical-aware
symbol library that it references. The spreadsheet performs a lookup for each
block name and finds the corresponding new block. Each new block drawing
is pulled from the AutoCAD Electrical symbol library and inserted (scaled and
rotated as required) in the drawing. The spreadsheet is checked to copy the
old attribute values to the appropriate new names on the newly-inserted block.
This process continues across the drawing, and terminates when no more
block names remain or it automatically continues to the next drawing if
project-wide mode is selected.

Overview of block/attribute mapping | 1151

 The mapping spreadsheet has two parts: Attribute mapping defaults and Block
name mapping. Each section is a sheet within the spreadsheet and must follow
a defined column format. The sheets must be in order, where sheet 1 defines
the attribute mapping and sheet 2 defines the block mapping.

Attribute mapping defaults General mapping of old attribute names to new at-
tribute names so that the old values on the blocks
can be copied to the swapped AutoCAD Electrical-
smart block.

Block name mapping Maps existing specific or wild-carded block names

to the new AutoCAD Electrical block to use during
the block instance swap. Each row of this spreadsheet
is a mapping record for an old name to a new name
swap.

Attribute mapping sheet format

Column A / Old Attribute Name Attribute tag found on the legacy, non-AutoCAD
Electrical block insert. Wildcards and AutoLisp-style
punctuation for wildcards are supported.

Column B / AcadE Attribute Name Attribute tag name found on the AutoCAD Electrical
block insert. Wildcards and AutoLisp-style punctu-
ation for wildcards are supported.

Block name mapping sheet format

Column A / Old Block Name Legacy, non-AutoCAD Electrical block insert name.
Wildcards and AutoLisp-style punctuation for wild-
cards are supported.

Column B / AcadE Block Name AutoCAD Electrical block name to use as a replace-
ment for all instances of the block query match on
columns A and C.

Column C / Filtering Expression Optional AutoLisp expression, or attribute definition,

that along with column A are what the program uses

1152 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

 to query the table to find the correct mapping entry
for a given block name to swap.

Column D/ Scale Multiplier If blank, the new block swaps in at the same scale as
the existing block it replaces. If this field is not blank,
the swapped block is scaled up or down per the
field's multiplier value.

Column E / X-Y Offset If blank, the new block swaps in at the same XY co-
ordinate as the existing block it replaces. If not blank
and in the format of a coordinate pair, the swapped
block inserts offset from the original block's origin
by this XY amount.

Column F / Attribute name overrides Defines specific attribute Old=New mapping that is
not defined in sheet 1 or is to override what is found
in sheet 1. Multiple entries in this field are supported
with this syntax: Old1=New1;Old2=New2.

Column G / Attribute Value Overrides Defines specific attribute values to insert into the
newly swapped attributes. Multiple entries in this
field are supported with this syntax:
New1=val1;New2=val2. An entry of "New1=" blanks
out that attribute value.

The block replacement process generates a log file of the results. The log file
({projectname}_cnv.log) is created in the same folder as the .wdp project file.
The following conditions are reported:

■ Problem finding/opening mapping spreadsheet

■ Problem inserting WD_M block (if not already present)

■ Legacy block name not mapped to an AutoCAD Electrical block

■ AutoCAD Electrical block not found in library search path

■ Problem inserting AutoCAD Electrical block

■ Legacy attribute name not mapped

Overview of block/attribute mapping | 1153

 Map block values using a user-defined spreadsheet
NOTE A user-defined spreadsheet is required for this tool. Refer to the "Learn
about block/attribute mapping" file for help on creating the spreadsheet if you do
not already have one created.

1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the Block Replacement tool.

2 Select to run the block replacement for the entire project, the
active drawing, or a selected component on the active drawing.

3 Click OK.

4 On the Select Mapping Spreadsheet dialog box, select the

spreadsheet to be used for mapping the blocks and attributes.

5 Click Open.
If you select an existing spreadsheet the block replacement
automatically begins. If the spreadsheet file does not exist you
are presented with the option to create the spreadsheet
framework for the block/attribute mapping.
If a spreadsheet was not found, on the Spreadsheet Not Found
dialog box, click OK to run through the active project's drawing
set, and fill in a blank spreadsheet with extracted block names
and attributes. Only the first column of each of the sheets are
filled in. You can then add the block/attribute mapping inform-
ation and then rerun the command using the new spreadsheet.

Block replacement
Performs drawing-wide and project-wide block replacements using a
user-defined spreadsheet. This automatically maps the unconverted drawing's
non-AutoCAD Electrical block inserts and attributes to appropriate AutoCAD
Electrical-smart component symbols drawn from a symbol library.

Access:

On the Conversion toolbar, click the Block Replacement tool.

From the Projects menu, select Conversion Tools ➤ Block Replacement.

1154 | Chapter 17 Conversion Tools

Select to run the block replacement on the entire project, the active drawing,
or a single symbol on the active drawing.

Overview of block/attribute mapping | 1155

1156
Miscellaneous Tools
18
In this chapter
■ Overview of power check
tools
■ Overview of pneumatic
tools
■ Insert hydraulic
components
■ Insert P&ID components
■ Troubleshooting Tools

1157
Overview of power check tools
You can add information to your schematic components to indicate power
source and load values using the supplied Power Check tools. Once these
values have been added, you can run the Power Load Check Report to scan
the wire interconnections and report if there is too much load on a given
power source.
There are 3 tools to use for checking power source/load:

Add/Edit Power Source/Load values Marks a component with a power source and load
value. The value is added to an AutoCAD Electrical
connection attribute. This dialog box contains a list
of available connection points. If you select near the
connection point for the power value it will be pre-
selected in the dialog box. Enter the power source
and load value and an optional units value. These
values will be saved on the connection point as invis-
ible xdata.

Set Pass Power Marks a component with a PASSPWR flag. The

PASSPWR flag instructs the Power Report to pass
through the marked component when calculating
the load on a given source. If a component carries
the PASSPWR flag the Power Report program will
pass through the component and continue looking
for load values on the network

Power Load Check Report Looks for any components assigned as a power
source and then follows any wires connected to that
terminal. When a load is hit, it stops reading on that
wire segment and doesn't search past the load. For
example, if you apply a supply value to the left power
bus on a ladder, there are a bunch of pilot lights and
relay coils in the ladder. AutoCAD Electrical goes
down the left bus and checks each connected rung.
It reads through contact and terminals, but when it
hits a load on a rung, it accumulates the load value
(if present) and stops going any further on that rung.
The utility will still check the other rungs tied to the
left-hand bus and try to find more loads.

1158 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

 Tip:Adding Xdata to library symbols prior to insertion

You can add the Xdata on the library symbol prior to inserting it. If a drawing
already contains that block, you must use the Update Block option prior to
running the report. Open the library symbol and use the Xdata Editor to add
Xdata directly onto the appropriate TERM## attribute. The following xdata
could be added at the library level:

■ Source - VIA_WD_PWR_SRC

■ Load - VIA_WD_PWR_LOAD

■ Unit - VIA_WD_PWR_UNIT

■ Potential - VIA_WD_POTENTIAL

Set power source/load value

This utility marks a component with a power source and load value. A related
routine, when invoked, then scans the wire interconnections and reports if
there is too much load on a given power source.

Access:

On the Power Check toolbar, click the Add/Edit Power Source/Load Levels tool.
Click Wires ➤ Wire Number Miscellaneous ➤ Power Check ➤ Add/Edit
Power Source/Load Levels.

Select the component for the power source or load value. The value is added
to an AutoCAD Electrical connection attribute. This dialog box contains a list
of available connection points. If you select near the connection point for the
power value it will be pre-selected in the dialog box. Enter the power source
and load value and an optional units value. These values will be saved on the
connection point as invisible xdata.

NOTE As you add these power source or load values, think of AutoCAD Electrical
tracing through these components to see what the load is on the power source.
Pick which terminal to add the value to accordingly.

Source/load assignment

Source/Load Indicates to set the source or load value.

Overview of power check tools | 1159

Value Specifies the source or load value to save on the connection point.

Units (Optional) Specifies the units for the source or load value. Select
from the drop-down list to specify the units.

Potential assignment

Optional for voltage level mismatch checks. Select from the drop-down list
to specify the potential value.

Set pass power

This utility marks a component with a PASSPWR flag. The PASSPWR flag
instructs the Power Report to pass through the marked component when
calculating the load on a given source. If a component carries the PASSPWR
flag the Power Report program will pass through the component and continue
looking for load values on the network.

NOTE Certain components don't need a PASSPWR flag (such as terminals and
contacts) since they are automatically 'passed' through.

Access:

On the Power Check toolbar, click the Mark Component To Pass Power tool.
Click Wires ➤ Wire Number Miscellaneous ➤ Power Check ➤ Mark Com-
ponent To Pass Power.

Each selected component is displayed in the list. If the component already

carries the PASSPWR flag, a * appears next to the tag. To set or unset the
PASSPWR flag, click on the component's tag in the list.

Power source/load report

Once a component is marked with a power source and load value, this utility
scans the wire interconnections and reports if there is too much load on a
given power source.

Access:

On the Power Check toolbar, click the Power Load Check Report tool.
Click Wires ➤ Wire Number Miscellaneous ➤ Power Check ➤ Power Load
Check Report.

1160 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

 Select to run the report on the project, selected components in the active
drawing, or all components in the active drawing. You can also select to
redisplay the last Power Check report.

Overview of pneumatic tools

Use the Insert Pneumatic Component tool on the Extra Libraries toolbar to insert
your Pneumatic symbols (to access the toolbar, select Projects ➤ Toolbars ➤
Extra Libraries or right-click on any toolbar and select ACE: Extra Libraries). Then
use all of the AutoCAD Electrical drafting and editing tools to modify the
pneumatic layout, including Stretch, Trim and Scoot.

The Icon Menu provides easy access to pneumatic library symbols. The
pneumatic symbol library consists of all the pneumatic symbols and is found
at \Program Files [x86]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\pneu_iso125.

Recommended Settings for drawing pneumatic diagrams

Setting Value Where this can be set

Ladder Orientation Horizontal Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing

Format

Insert component
This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom
menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon
Menu Paths section of the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box.
Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the project name
and select Properties. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu.
The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.env." Add entry
"WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout
icon menu.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component or Components ➤ Multiple Insert
➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).

Overview of pneumatic tools | 1161

Access:

NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or
P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable
markers; and saved circuits.

Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure.
The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just
above the menu tree structure.

Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.

■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the
current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the
main menu is selected in the Menu tree view.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview
window and Recently Used window. The current view option
is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with
text, Icon only or List view.

Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*.dat).
The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus
defined in the .dat file.

Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the
menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure.
Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions
based on the icon properties as defined by the *.dat file:
■ Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing
■ Executes a command
■ Displays a submenu

NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name
and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information.

1162 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing
session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list
follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window
(icon only, icon with text or list view) and the total number of
icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit
box.

Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list
box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10.

Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This is

opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation.

No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting
symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click
the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.

No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique

Component Tag). The untagged value that displays is the com-
ponent's TAG1/TAG2 default value. To add component detail
later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component
to edit.

Always display previously used Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open
menu the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a
push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you
open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu
displays by default.

Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to
the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog
box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the
drawing editing session ends.

Scale panel Specifies the footprint insertion scale. This defaults to the value
set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.
Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing
editing session ends.

Type it Manually type in the component block to insert.

Overview of pneumatic tools | 1163

Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert.

Right-click menus

Options for the Menu tree structure view

Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view
to display the following options:

■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus.

■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or

submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the
Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.

Options for the Symbol Preview window

Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display
the following options:

■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and
Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check
mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view.

■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view
the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name, image, block names
and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties.

Pneumatic, Hydraulic and P&ID icon menus

The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type
(pneumatic, hydraulic or P&ID). The Insert Pneumatic Component, Insert
Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed on the
Extra Library toolbar.

Insert Pneumatic Component

Insert Hydraulic Component

1164 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

Insert P&ID Component

Overview of pneumatic tools | 1165

Insert hydraulic components
Use the Insert Hydraulic Component tool to insert a component into the
drawing.

1 On the Extra Libraries toolbar, click the Insert Hydraulic

Component tool.

2 On the Insert Component dialog box, select the starting ori-

entation for the component: horizontal or vertical.

3 (Optional) If you want to turn off the Insert/Edit Component

dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing, select
No edit dialog.

4 (Optional) If you want to insert the component, untagged (for

example, without assigning a unique Component Tag) select
No tag. The untagged value that displays is the component's
TAG1/TAG2 default value.

5 Select the component to insert (such as Filters ➤ Centrifugal)

from the Symbol Preview window.
The Recently Used column displays components inserted
during the current editing session. You can also select the
component to insert from this list.

6 Specify the insertion point in the drawing.

The orientation of the symbol tries to match the underlying
wire. The wire breaks automatically if the symbol lands on it.

7 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, annotate the com-

ponent.

8 Click OK.

Recommended Settings for drawing Hydraulic diagrams

Setting Inch Unit Metric Unit Where this can be set

Grid Size 0.125 2.5 Tools ➤ Drafting Settings

1166 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

Snap 0.125 2.5 Tools ➤ Drafting Settings

Scale Factor 1 20 Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing

Format

Ladder Orienta- Horizontal Horizontal Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing

tion Format

Insert component
This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom
menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon
Menu Paths section of the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box.
Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the project name
and select Properties. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu.
The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.env." Add entry
"WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout
icon menu.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component or Components ➤ Multiple Insert
➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).

NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or
P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable
markers; and saved circuits.

Insert hydraulic components | 1167

 Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure.
The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just
above the menu tree structure.

Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.

■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the
current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the
main menu is selected in the Menu tree view.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview
window and Recently Used window. The current view option
is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with
text, Icon only or List view.

Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*.dat).
The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus
defined in the .dat file.

Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the
menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure.
Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions
based on the icon properties as defined by the *.dat file:
■ Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing
■ Executes a command
■ Displays a submenu

NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name
and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information.

Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing
session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list
follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window
(icon only, icon with text or list view) and the total number of
icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit
box.

Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list
box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10.

1168 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This is
opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation.

No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting
symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click
the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.

No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique

Component Tag). The untagged value that displays is the com-
ponent's TAG1/TAG2 default value. To add component detail
later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component
to edit.

Always display previously used Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open
menu the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a
push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you
open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu
displays by default.

Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to
the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog
box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the
drawing editing session ends.

Scale panel Specifies the footprint insertion scale. This defaults to the value
set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.
Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing
editing session ends.

Type it Manually type in the component block to insert.

Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert.

Right-click menus

Options for the Menu tree structure view

Insert hydraulic components | 1169

 Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view
to display the following options:

■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus.

■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or

submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the
Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.

Options for the Symbol Preview window

Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display
the following options:

■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and
Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check
mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view.

■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view
the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name, image, block names
and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties.

Pneumatic, Hydraulic and P&ID icon menus

The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type
(pneumatic, hydraulic or P&ID). The Insert Pneumatic Component, Insert
Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed on the
Extra Library toolbar.

Insert Pneumatic Component

Insert Hydraulic Component

Insert P&ID Component

1170 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

Insert P&ID components
Use the Insert P&ID Component tool to insert a component into the drawing.

1 On the Extra Libraries toolbar, click the Insert P&ID Compon-

ent tool.

2 In the Insert Component dialog box, select the starting orient-

ation for the component: horizontal or vertical.

3 (Optional) If you want to turn off the Insert/Edit Component

dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing, select
No edit dialog.

4 (Optional) If you want to insert the component, untagged (for

example, without assigning a unique Component Tag), select
No tag. The untagged value that displays is the component's
TAG1/TAG2 default value.

5 Select the component to insert from the Symbol Preview win-

dow.
The Recently Used column displays components inserted
during the current editing session. You can also select the
component to insert from this list.

6 Specify the insertion point in the drawing.

The orientation of the symbol tries to match the underlying
wire. The wire breaks automatically if the symbol lands on it.

7 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, annotate the com-

ponent.

8 Click OK.

Recommended Settings for drawing P & ID diagrams

Setting Inch Unit Metric Unit Where this can be set

Grid Size 0.125 2.5 Tools ➤ Drafting Settings

Insert P&ID components | 1171

Snap 0.125 2.5 Tools ➤ Drafting Settings

Scale Factor 1 20 Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing

Format

Ladder Orienta- Vertical Vertical Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing

tion Format

Insert component
This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom
menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon
Menu Paths section of the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box.
Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the project name
and select Properties. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu.
The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.env." Add entry
"WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout
icon menu.

Access:

Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool.
Click Components ➤ Insert Component or Components ➤ Multiple Insert
➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).

NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or
P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable
markers; and saved circuits.

1172 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

 Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure.
The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just
above the menu tree structure.

Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.

■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the
current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the
main menu is selected in the Menu tree view.
■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview
window and Recently Used window. The current view option
is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with
text, Icon only or List view.

Menu The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file (*.dat).
The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus
defined in the .dat file.

Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the
menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure.
Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions
based on the icon properties as defined by the *.dat file:
■ Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing
■ Executes a command
■ Displays a submenu

NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name
and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information.

Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing
session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list
follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window
(icon only, icon with text or list view) and the total number of
icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit
box.

Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list
box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10.

Insert P&ID components | 1173

Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This is
opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation.

No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting
symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click
the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.

No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique

Component Tag). The untagged value that displays is the com-
ponent's TAG1/TAG2 default value. To add component detail
later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component
to edit.

Always display previously used Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open
menu the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a
push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you
open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu
displays by default.

Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to
the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog
box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the
drawing editing session ends.

Scale panel Specifies the footprint insertion scale. This defaults to the value
set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box.
Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing
editing session ends.

Type it Manually type in the component block to insert.

Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert.

Right-click menus

Options for the Menu tree structure view

1174 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view
to display the following options:

■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus.

■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or

submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the
Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.

Options for the Symbol Preview window

Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display
the following options:

■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and
Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check
mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view.

■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to view
the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name, image, block names
and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties.

Pneumatic, Hydraulic and P&ID icon menus

The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type
(pneumatic, hydraulic or P&ID). The Insert Pneumatic Component, Insert
Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed on the
Extra Library toolbar.

Insert Pneumatic Component

Insert Hydraulic Component

Insert P&ID Component

Insert P&ID components | 1175

Overview of real-time error checking
Although AutoCAD Electrical checks for duplicated schematic component
reference designations and wire numbers during the insert or edit process,
you have the option of displaying the warning in real time. Real-time error
checking is enabled by default in the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings
(page 99) tab.
If you enter an existing component tag/wire number during the insert/edit
process, a warning dialog box displays. This alerts you of the duplication and
suggests alternative tag names based on the user-defined format. You can
select whether to use the duplicated tag or use a new tag that is suggested (or
you can type in a new tag).

NOTE The combined value of the component tag and installation code is used
for error checking in IEC mode.

An error log file is created for every project if you chose to display the real-time
warnings. The real time warning is saved in the log file named
"<project_name>_error.log" and is saved in the User subdirectory. If a log file
already exists, the new content is added to the same file. A blank line separates
one error record from another.
About the .wdn file
The .wdn file is a text file used specifically for auditing terminals. Terminal
numbers listed in the .wdn file are not checked for duplication. You can use
wildcards to exclude a range of terminals for duplication checking such as all
terminals with a tag name starting with "T" and with terminal number "1."
AutoCAD Electrical searches for the <project_name>.wdn file in the same
folder as the project definition file (*.wdp). If <project_name>.wdn is not
found, AutoCAD Electrical looks for the default.wdn file in the project folder
(C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade
{version}\AeData\Proj).
The default .wdn file contains the terminal number filters GND, PE, and E.
These are ignored when checking for duplication and will not be listed in the
Electrical Audit report.

1176 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

Use the troubleshooting tools
There are many tools to use for troubleshooting your AutoCAD Electrical
drawing.

Use the audit tool

Use this tool to identify and clean up some types of problems that might affect
an AutoCAD Electrical drawing. The Electrical Audit tool displays a report of
detected problems for the active project. You can save this file for reference
or surf the file to view and correct the errors.

1 Select Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Electrical Audit.

When you run the command, the progress bar describes the progress of
the audit process. Once the audit is complete, a text box displays the total
number of errors found.

2 Click Details to view the detected problems.

3 Click any of the tabs highlighted with an error icon.

These are the areas where problems were found in your project. If no
errors were found, the Details button is not enabled.

4 Click on an audit record in the dialog box and click Go To (or double-click
the audit record).
Once you browse to an error location an 'x' appears in the audit dialog
box.

5 Fix the error using any of the AutoCAD Electrical editing tools.
After correcting the error, you can select another audit record in the
dialog box for correction.

6 Click Close after correcting errors, Save As/Save All if you want to save
the report, or Print if you want to print the report.

NOTE Run the Drawing Audit tool to perform wire-related clean-up functions
automatically. You can look for problems related to missing wires which were
connected via gap pointers, clean up wires pointing to non-existent wire numbers,
erase wire numbers that are not linked to a wire network, and draw a red outline
around each wire entity.

Clean the drawings

1 Select Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Clean Drawing Utility.

Overview of real-time error checking | 1177

 2 On the Clean Drawing Utility dialog box, select the drawings to clean:
drawings in the active project, a single drawing, or all drawings in a
selected folder.

3 (Optional) Click Purge All to run the AutoCAD Purge command and
purges all unused items (such as block definitions, dimension styles,
layers, linetypes, and text styles).

4 Click OK.

5 If you selected to clean all drawings in the active project, select the
drawings to process and click OK.
New, clean copies of the selected drawings are created and inserted into
the drawing.

Use the debug tool

If you receive a message that AutoCAD Electrical is having trouble updating

your project's scratch database file, you may want to turn on the Debug Trace.
This can help track down the problem. Select one of the following commands:

■ Select Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Command Trace Mode ➤ MDB Command

Trace On.
To turn the tracing off, select Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Command Trace Mode
➤ MDB Command Trace Off.

■ Select Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Command Trace Mode ➤ Command Trace

On.
To turn the tracing off, select Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Command Trace Mode
➤ Command Trace Off.

Check, repair, or trace wire and gap pointers

The Check/Repair Gap Pointers utility verifies that the invisible Xdata pointers
on both sides of a wire gap/loop are valid. If not, appropriate pointers are
established. The Check/Trace a Wire utility single steps through and highlights
each connected wire of the selected wire network.

1178 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

Check/repair wire gaps

Use this utility to create wire number jumps (on the current drawing) without
resorting to individual signal source/destination arrow symbols.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the

Check/Repair Gap Pointers tool.

2 Click the Check/Repair Gap Pointers tool.

3 Select each wire segment as directed.

Gap data is added as needed. The result of the check/repair is
shown in the command prompt area.

Check/trace a wire

Overview of real-time error checking | 1179

 This utility can help you troubleshoot problems with unconnected or shorted
wires and invalid wire crossing gap pointers.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the

Check/Trace a Wire tool.

2 Click the Check/Trace a Wire tool.

3 Select a wire on the network. You can select "A" to show All
Segments. If you prefer to step through wire by wire, press the
spacebar.

4 Determine whether to pan or zoom the selected wire.

The connected wire segments endpoints are shown in the
command prompt area.

Check multiple wires

1 Select Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Drawing Audit from the menu.

2 Select whether to process the active drawing or the entire project, and
click OK.

3 Indicate which areas to check for errors. You can look for problems related
to missing wires which were connected through gap pointers, clean up
wires pointing to nonexistent wire numbers, erase wire numbers that are
not linked to a wire network, and draw a red outline around each wire
entity.

4 Click OK.
The Drawing Audit utility displays a report of wire-related clean-up
functions that were performed.

Electrical audit
This utility identifies problems that affect the active project. When you run
the command, the progress bar describes the progress of the audit process.
Once the audit is complete, a text box displays the total number of errors

1180 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

 found. Click Details to view the detected problems, and then go to the error
location within the project and correct the error.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Electrical Audit tool.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Electrical Audit.

Wire - No Connection Displays the unconnected wires for the active project. The
report lists the unconnected wire number, location point,
error message, and the drawing where the error occurs. If
there isn't a record of a wire number, the wire number
column is blank.

Wire Exception Displays missing or duplicated wire numbers for the active
project. The report lists the duplicated wire number, error
message, and the drawing where the error occurs. If a wire
number is missing, the wire number column is blank.

Cable Exception Displays the duplicated cable and wire id for the active
project. The report lists the duplicated cable tags or cable
tags with duplicated wire id, error message, reference of
the cable tag, and the drawing where the error occurs.

Component - No Catalog Number Displays components with no bill of material part assign-
ments. The report lists the component reference designa-
tion tag, reference of the component tag, error message,
and the drawing where the error occurs.

Component Duplication Displays the duplicated schematic/panel components. The

report lists the schematic/panel component reference des-
ignation tag, reference of the component tag error mes-
sage, and the drawing where the error occurs.

Component - No Connection Displays component connections with no connected wires.

The report lists the component reference designation tag,
reference of the component tag, error message, and the
drawing where the error occurs.

Overview of real-time error checking | 1181

Terminal Duplication Displays duplicated schematic terminal numbers. The report
lists the terminal tag id and duplicated terminal number,
reference of the terminal number, error message, and the
drawing where the error occurs.

NOTE Terminal numbers listed in WDN files (located in

the same folder as the project definition file (*.wdp)) are
not checked for duplications. You can use wildcards to ex-
clude a range of terminals for duplication checking making
use of this text file.

Pin Exception Displays duplicated component pin assignments. The report

lists the schematic component reference designation tag
and component wire connection pin, reference of the
component tag, error message, and the drawing where
the error occurs.

Contacts Displays any children without a parent schematic compon-

ent. The report lists the component reference designation
tag for the child without a parent, reference of the child
component tag, error message, and the drawing where
the error occurs.

Recovery Tip Displays the recovery tip so that you can fix the error.

Go To Goes to the error location within the project and correct

the error. This is enabled when you select a single audit
record in the dialog box. Once you browse to an error
location an "x" appears in the left-hand column of the
Electrical Audit dialog box.

NOTE You can also double-click an audit record to go to

the error location.

Save As/Save All Saves the audit report. Save As saves only the active report
while Save All saves the complete audit report.

Print Prints the audit report.

Drawing audit

1182 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

 The Drawing Audit tool displays a report of wire-related clean-up functions
that were performed.

Access:

Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Drawing Audit tool.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Drawing Audit.

Audit drawing or project Specifies to run the audit on the active drawing or selected
drawings in the active project.

Previous Redisplays the last audit report that was run. You can then
surf to the performed function, save the report, or print
the report for reference.

Surf Goes to the error location within the drawing where the
error occurred and was fixed.

After you click OK, you can select the type of drawing audit to run. If you selected to audit the
project, select the drawings in the active project to audit, and click OK.

Wire gap pointers Looks for problems related to missing wires which were
connected via gap pointers. Also see Wires ➤ Wire Num-
bers Miscellaneous ➤ Check / Repair Gap Pointers.

Bogus wire number and color/gauge Looks for and cleans up wires pointing to nonexistent wire
label pointers numbers (this is the opposite of wire number floaters). Also
looks for bad color/gauge label pointers.

Zero length wires Looks for and erases zero length line entities on the wire
layer.

Wire number floaters Looks for and erases wire numbers that are not linked to a
wire network (for example, the wire was manually erased
but wire number remains).

Show wires (mark in red) Draws a red outline around each wire entity. (Available
when running on the active drawing only.)

Overview of real-time error checking | 1183

Modify invisible data
For some functions AutoCAD Electrical adds invisible information to a block
insert or even to a specific attribute. This invisible data is called Xdata. To add
or modify this invisible data, AutoCAD Electrical provides an Xdata editor.

Edit existing invisible data

1 Select Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Xdata Editor.

2 Select an attribute in the drawing.

3 If Xdata exists for the attribute, select the Xdata to edit from the list in
the dialog box.
The existing name and value will be shown in the edit boxes allowing
you to edit them.

4 Edit the name and value as desired. Once you click out of the edit box,
the name or value will be updated in the list.

5 Click Save Changes to update the selected block or attribute with the
Xdata changes.

Add invisible data to an attribute

1 Select Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Xdata Editor.

2 Select an attribute in the drawing.

If the selected block or attribute does not carry any Xdata, the list box
will indicate this.

3 Click Add New.

4 Enter the name for the Xdata and its value. Click OK.

5 Click Save Changes to update the selected block or attribute with the
Xdata changes.

Xdata editor

1184 | Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Tools

 For some functions AutoCAD Electrical adds invisible information to a block
insert or even to a specific attribute. This invisible data is called Xdata. To add
or modify this invisible data, AutoCAD Electrical provides an Xdata editor.

Access:

From the Projects menu, select Extras ➤ Xdata Editor. Select an attribute in
the drawing.

The dialog displays showing any existing Xdata information. If the selected
block or attribute does not carry any Xdata, the list box will indicate this. If
the selected block or attribute carries any Xdata already, the names and values
will be displayed in the list box at the top of the dialog.

Name Specifies the Xdata name. To edit the name, click on it in the list.
The existing name is shown in the edit boxes allowing you to
edit it. Once you click out of the edit box, the name is updated
in the list.

Value Specifies the Xdata value. To edit the value, click on it in the list.
The existing value is shown in the edit boxes allowing you to edit
it. Once you click out of the edit box, the value is updated in the
list.

Add New Adds new Xdata information. Enter in the application name for
the Xdata and its value.

Delete Xdata Removes the selected Xdata from the list.

Modify invisible data | 1185

1186
Advanced Productivity
19
In this chapter
■ Set up peer-to-peer
component relationships
■ Create automated pin
assignments
■ Set up AutoCAD Electrical
for multiple users
■ Show source and
destination markers on
cable wires
■ Use the PLC Database File
Editor
■ Add your own symbols,
circuits and commands to
the icon menu
■ Build your own symbols
■ Configure projects for
various drawing standards
■ Use Autodesk Vault with
AutoCAD Electrical

1187
Set up peer-to-peer component relationships
The following example has a valve representation on
an instrument drawing, FE100, and its equivalent on
the electrical schematic, SOL2500. They are the same
physical device, but carry different tags based on the
drawing discipline in which they appear. Though
each device is represented as a parent symbol, you
can set up a peer-to-peer relationship between them
so that the electrical schematic's tag name automat-
ically cross-references to the instrument drawing,
and the instrument bubble's tag cross-references to
the schematic's tag.
The instrument bubble symbol is set up with an op-
tional split tag. Instead of a single TAG1 attribute, it
has 2 tags: TAG1 PART1 and TAG1 PART2. The instru-
ment bubble is also set up as a normal AutoCAD
Electrical parent schematic symbol without the wire
connection points. It includes 2 extra attributes bey-
ond what a normal parent symbol carries:
■ WDTAGALT - carries a copy of the schematic
symbol's TAG1 value.
■ WDTYPE - an invisible attribute with a nonblank
value indicating the drawing discipline. Example:
"PID" or "IN" or "PNEU" or "HYD."

The schematic parent solenoid symbol includes just

one extra attribute: WDTAGALT carries a copy of the
instrument bubble's value.

Your drawings must be part of the active AutoCAD Electrical project so that
the WDTAGALT value on the instrument drawing is automatically updated
when you edit the schematic parent tag name and vice versa. Using AutoCAD
Electrical SURF on one automatically includes the other in the surf pick
window.

1 Open the Project Manager.

2 Open the project containing the instrument and schematic drawings.

3 On the Project Manager, double-click the schematic drawing to open it.

4 Zoom in so that your schematic symbol is visible.

1188 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 5 On the Project Manager, double-click the instrument drawing to open
it.

6 Zoom in so that your valve representation is visible.

7 On the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select

Properties.

8 On the Project Properties, Cross-References dialog box, Cross-Reference

Options section, select Peer-to-Peer.

9 Click OK.

10 Right-click the schematic symbol to edit in the drawing (in this case,
SOL2500).

11 Select Edit Component from the context menu.

12 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click Tags Used: Schematic.

13 Select Show all components for all families.

The tag values from the other symbol are displayed in the list.

14 Select the valve representation (in this case, FE100) with a family code
of IN (for instrument).

15 Click Copy Tag.

16 On the Copy Tag dialog box, click WDTAGALT.

17 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click Show/Edit Miscellaneous.

18 Verify that the WDTAGALT value lists the valve's TAG1 value (in this
case, FE100) and click OK.

19 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.

20 On the Update Other Drawings dialog box, click Now to update the
drawing.

Set up peer-to-peer component relationships | 1189

 The schematic symbol's WDTAGALT value is automatically updated and
the valve's TAG1 value (or TAG1 PART1/TAG1 PART2 combined value)
displays next to the symbol in the drawing.

The valve's WDTAGALT value is automatically updated and the schematic

symbol's TAG1 value displays next to the valve in the drawing.

Create automated pin assignments

AutoCAD Electrical consults a Pin List database when a part number is added
or an existing part number is changed on a parent schematic symbol. If
AutoCAD Electrical finds a match on the part number's MFG, CAT, and
optional ASSYCODE values (which ties to the catalog number to make unique
parts) in this database table, then the associated contact count and pin number
information is retrieved and placed on the parent schematic component.
Any device can have pins assigned to it, but common components that carry
pin assignments are relays, motor starters, and connectors. Pins are used for:

■ Error checking

■ Accurate connection information

■ Providing correct connections

You can expand the Pin List database table as needed. Many users have
difficulty creating their own database entries so the following procedures
simplify this procedure for you.

Basic workflow

Pin lists are directly associated to catalog numbers and therefore are not applied
to a component symbol until the catalog number has been assigned. You can
use wildcards inside the Pin List database to find the catalog number to apply

1190 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

a single pin list to multiple symbols. The basic workflow for pin numbers
being assigned to a symbol is as follows:

■ Insert a component.

■ On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, assign a catalog number.

■ Pin List database is queried.

■ Coil pins are applied to the parent symbol's terminal attributes.

■ The Pin List is applied to the parent symbol as xdata or attributes.

If the pin numbers are assigned as xdata, there isn't a PINLIST attribute
since the pin assignment comes from the pin list table.

Setting up COILPINS

The COILPINS column in the Pin List database specifies the terminal pin
numbers for a coil or parent symbol of a component. This is generally two
pin numbers separated by a comma (such as K1,K2). When a component calls
for additional pin assignments on the parent, you can continue the list with
each value separated by commas. These values are applied to the TERM01 and
TERM02 attributes respectively on the parent symbol.
If you set COILPINS = "K1,K2;" then pins K1/K2 are assigned to the parent
symbol of a component.
In the example below, TERM01 = K1 and TERM02 = K2.

Setting up COILPINS for two wired devices

The automatic pin list look-up and assignment at component insertion time
is not limited to relay devices as shown in the example above. You can encode
two wire devices like pilot lights or proximity switches into the database file.
Insert the Manufacturer and Catalog numbers and fill in the COILPINS filed
with the terminal pin numbers. Leave the PINLIST field blank. Now, when
you insert one of these devices and do a catalog lookup and part number
selection, AutoCAD Electrical quickly looks for a MFG/CAT match in the pin
list database. On a match, AutoCAD Electrical pulls out the device's coil pin
numbers and inserts them in the newly inserted device.

Create automated pin assignments | 1191

 Setting up a PINLIST

The PINLIST column in the Pin List database specifies the contact types and
their respective pin numbers. A two terminal contact has three elements in
this format: contact type, terminal pin, terminal pin. Each PINLIST value can
have up to 256 characters. Use a value from 0-5 to specify the contact type,
where:

■ 0 = convertible contact

■ 1 = N.O.

■ 2 = N.C.

■ 3 = Form-C (NO/NC pair)

■ 4 = multiple-pole terminal strips or undefined type

■ 5 = multiple-pin or stacked terminals

If you set PINLIST = "0,13,14;0,23,24" then 0= contact type, 13 (or 23)=

TERM01, and 14 (or 24)= TERM02.
If you set PINLIST = "0,13,14,*prompt," "*prompt" adds a description label.
This optional label is always the last element of the list and is preceded by an
asterisk character (if the asterisk is left out, the comment is interpreted as
another pin number).
To view or manually edit the PINLIST values, select Edit Component, and
then click NO/NC Setup on the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.

Setting up PEER_COILPINS and PEER_PINLIST

The PEER_ fields in the Pin List database specify pin list assignments for a
single part number with two parent devices. You set up the second coil's coil
pins and pin list data in the PEER_COILPINS and PEER_PINLIST fields for the
common part number. This is commonly used for setting up forward and
reversing starters or latching and unlatching relays. You apply the pins to the
forward (latching) relay, and then apply the peer pins to the reversing
(unlatching) relay.
To split the pin list data between two peer coil symbols:

1 Insert the first coil symbol and make the catalog look-up selection.
The COILPINS and PINLIST data is found and applied to the coil symbol.
Any defined peer coil and pinlist data is also saved on the symbol as
invisible xdata.

1192 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 2 Insert the second coil symbol but do not make a catalog assignment.

3 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click NO/NC Setup.

4 Click Pick.

5 Select the first coil symbol.

The saved peer pinlist data is moved from the first symbol over to this
peer symbol. Child contacts can now be auto-annotated with the selected
coil's available pin list information and max NO/NC count tracked on a
per-coil basis.

Set up AutoCAD Electrical for multiple users

You can manually move any shared files to a new central location after
installation by using normal Microsoft Windows operations to cut or copy
and paste from their local location to a central shared location. These shared
files are located by AutoCAD Electrical as long as they are placed in the
AutoCAD Electrical defined path (such as in the project's subdirectory), the
path given by the AutoCAD Electrical environment variable, or AutoCAD
search paths.

NOTE We recommend that you create a backup of your information in another

location and remove the shared data from your local drive to ensure the data is
being located correctly.

Shared files

The following shared files can be pasted from your local machine to a shared
location. The table lists the file names, default location, and any WD.ENV file
lines that must be modified.
The main executables and static support files are located under C:\Program
Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\, while user-modifiable support files
and database content are found under C:\Documents and
Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release
#}\{country code}\.

Set up AutoCAD Electrical for multiple users | 1193

 NOTE It is not required that you share these files, but sharing makes it easier for
multiple users to work with projects in AutoCAD Electrical.

Databases default_cat.mdb, footprint_lookup.mdb, schematic_look-

up.mdb, wd_lang1.mdb, wd_picklist.mdb, wddinrl.xls
C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Docu-
ments\Acade {version}\AeData\Catalogs
WD.ENV file edit:
Original path: WD_CAT,%WD_DIR%/catalogs/,AE catalog
file path
Edited path: WD_CAT,N:Electrical/Shared_Files/Catalogs/,AE
catalog file path

NOTE These files must be kept in the same location since

the program locates them according to the same WD.ENV
file entry.

Symbol libraries jic1, jic125, iec2, iec4, jis2, gb2, panel, pneu_iso125
C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs

NOTE The symbol library path is stored with each project

in its .wdp file and must be modified.

AutoCAD Electrical icon menu (In- ACE_AS_MENU.DAT, ACE_GB_MENU.DAT,

sert Component menus) ACE_HYD_MENU.DAT, ACE_IEC_MENU.DAT,
ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT, ACE_JIS_MENU.DAT, ACE_PAN-
EL_MENU.DAT, ACE_PID_MENU.DAT,
ACE_PNEU_MENU.DAT, WD_ABECAD.DAT
C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country
code}\Support

NOTE The menu path is stored with each project in its

.wdp file and must be modified.

Slide images for AutoCAD Electrical ACE_GB.slb, ACE_JIS.slb, ace_as.slb, ace_hyd.slb,

menus ace_pid.slb, bb.slb, iec1.slb, loc2.slb, pn0.slb, pn1.slb,
pn2.slb, pn3.slb, pnl2.slb, pnl.slb, s1.slb, s2.slb, Ww.slb
C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country
code}\Support

1194 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 S_LDPC.SLB, WD_LOCAL.SLB, WDSIG.SLB, WDSIG_1.SLB,
gepb.slb
C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Sup-
port
WD.ENV file edit:
Original path: *WD_SLB,x:some path/, to override path
pointing to ".slb" slide lib support files
Edited path: WD_SLB,N:/Electrical/Shared_Files/Slides/, to
override path pointing to ".slb" slide lib support files

NOTE For the path in the .env file to be recognized, the

asterisk (*) in front of the line must be removed. These slide
files may be relocated using this path, or they can just be
placed in the same location as the menu files.

PLC database/images Content of PLC folder (ace_plc.mdb and bitmap files)

C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Docu-
ments\Acade {version}\AeData\PLC

NOTE These files must be in a location that is specified as

an AutoCAD Support path. They can be placed in a location
that is already defined as being a support path, or you can
add a new support path pointing to this location.

Description selections wd_desc.wdd

C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country
code}\Support

NOTE These files must be in a location that is specified as

an AutoCAD Support path. They can be placed in a location
that is already defined as being a support path, or you can
add a new support path pointing to this location.

Installation code selection list default.inst

Optional file, does not exist by default. To create this file
in Notepad, create a file with the project name and an .inst
extension (or use default.inst) and save to an AutoCAD
Support path so the program can find it.

Set up AutoCAD Electrical for multiple users | 1195

 NOTE These files must be in a location that is specified as
an AutoCAD Support path. They can be placed in a location
that is already defined as being a support path, or you can
add a new support path pointing to this location.

Location code selection list default.loc

Optional file, does not exist by default. To create this file
in Notepad, create a file with the project name and a .loc
extension (or use default.loc) and save to an AutoCAD
Support path so the program can find it.

NOTE These files must be in a location that is specified as

an AutoCAD Support path. They can be placed in a location
that is already defined as being a support path, or you can
add a new support path pointing to this location.

Using network deployment

You can alternately install AutoCAD Electrical databases, symbol libraries,

part footprint files, and support files to a shared network location, so all users
can work from a common standard database and simplifying database
management and configuration.
To start network deployment, select Network Deployment in the AutoCAD
Electrical installation program. Install the Network Installation Wizard (NIW)
and run it from the start menu. From the NIW you can create an image for
client installations.
Use the Symbols Libraries, Catalog Database and Support Files dialog box to
install these files to a shared network location so that multiple users can work
from a common standard symbol library and parts database.

NOTE You cannot set up network deployment after installing AutoCAD Electrical
as a stand-alone program on individual machines.

Referencing icon menus from other menu files

You can also share custom symbols to be accessed by multiple users. The
easiest way to do this is to create and link to your own menu file.

1196 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 You can set up AutoCAD Electrical's icon menuing system so that you can
switch back and forth from the default menu file (such as ACE_JIC_menu.dat)
to your own menu (for example "special_menu.dat").

1 Add a line similar to this to AutoCAD Electrical's ACE_JIC_menu.dat file:

Special menu|special_menu.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu
"special_menu.dat")(c:wd_insym_go2menu 0)

2 In your new "special_menu.dat" file, add this line so you can switch back
to AutoCAD Electrical's default menu:
Default Electrical menu|back2wd.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu
"ACE_JIC_menu.dat")(c:wd_insym_go2menu 0)

3 In AutoCAD Electrical's default icon menu, select the new entry.

Your menu immediately appears. When you want to go back to AutoCAD
Electrical's default menu, select Default Electrical menu on your own
special menu. AutoCAD Electrical immediately switches back to the
AutoCAD Electrical default icon menus.

Show source and destination markers on cable

wires
There may be times when you want to show the individual wires of a cable
at each end where they connect and yet you want to show the wires coming
together to form a single line cable in between the ends. Showing individual
wires along the entire run of the cable is too messy or not an option.
You can use the Fan-In/Out command set to do this. The Fan-In/Out command
relies on special pairs of source/destination markers plus a special layer for
the single line part of the cable representation. This layer is defined in the
Define Layers dialog box.

Show source and destination markers on cable wires | 1197

 Setting up layers

1 In a blank AutoCAD Electrical drawing, click the Drawing

Properties tool.

2 On the Alert dialog box, click OK to add the WD_M block.

3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Style tab.

You can select the default Fan-In/Out marker style here along
with defining the layers for the wires. Notice that the default
layer name for fan in/out single line layers is "_MULTI_WIRE."

4 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click OK.

5 Click the AutoCAD Layer tool.

6 In the Layer Properties Manager dialog box, change the color

of "_MULTI_WIRE" to red and the color of "WIRES" to blue for
this example. The color difference illustrates how the feature
works.

7 In the Layer Properties Manager dialog box, click OK.

Inserting components

1 Click the Insert Component tool.

2 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box,

select Push Buttons.

3 In the JIC: Push Buttons dialog box, select Push Button N.O.

4 Press F9 to turn SNAP on.

5 Insert the push button anywhere on the left-hand side of the

drawing.

6 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK-Repeat to

insert two more push buttons directly below the first one.

7 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK after the

last push button is inserted on the drawing.

1198 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

8 Repeat to insert 3 Limit Switches N.O. Insert the limit switches
anywhere on the right-hand side of the drawing (slightly below
the push buttons you just inserted).

Show source and destination markers on cable wires | 1199

 Adding wires

1 Click the Insert Wire tool.

2 Add a wire to the top push button. Drag the wire to the right.

3 Repeat for the other two push buttons.

4 Add a wire to each of the limit switches. Drag the wires to the
left.

5 Press F9 to turn SNAP off.

6 Select all of the wires and verify that they were created on the
WIRES layer.

1200 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

Adding source and destination markers

1 Click the arrow on the Source Destination Signals tool to access

the Fan In/Out Source tool.

2 Click the Fan In/Out Source tool.

3 In the Fan In/Out Source dialog box, select Solid as the Source
marker style.

4 Click the left button to set the wire connection orientation.

5 Select in the middle of the wire that is connected to the top

push button.

6 In the Signal - Source Code dialog box, enter "cbla" as the code
and "RED" as the description.
If you enter the color of the wire in the Description field,
AutoCAD Electrical reports use this information in the Wire
Color field.

7 Click OK.

8 In the Source/Destination Signal markers (for Fan In/Out)

dialog box, click Yes to insert the matching destination marker
now.

NOTE Since the destination wires are nearby it's easier to insert
them right away. If the wires were on another drawing you could
wait until later to add the destination markers.

9 In the Fan-In/Fan-Out Signal Destination dialog box, select

Solid as the destination marker style.

10 Click the right button to set the wire connection orientation.

11 Select in the middle of the wire connected to the top limit

switch.
Notice that the wires for both change from blue to red and

Show source and destination markers on cable wires | 1201

 the description, RED, displays on both.
AutoCAD Electrical breaks the wire and changes the appropri-
ate wire piece to the defined layer. When inserting a source
marker the wire coming out of the marker changes; when in-
serting a destination marker, the wire going into the marker
changes.

You are prompted to define the next source.

12 Repeat for the middle and bottom wires for each group.
For the middle wire: In the Signal - Source Code dialog box,
click Use to enter "CBLA-01" as the code and enter "BLUE" as
the description.
For the bottom wire: In the Signal - Source Code dialog box,
click Use to enter "CBLA-02" as the code and enter "WHT" as
the description.
Notice that the wires change from blue to red and the descrip-
tions, BLUE and WHT, display on both sets of wires.

13 Press Esc to exit the command.

14 Select all of the wires and verify that they are on the
_MULTI_WIRE layer.

1202 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

Creating connecting wires

1 At the command line, type L and press Enter.

2 Click on the end of the uppermost wire and drag down across each of
the wires connected to the push buttons. Continue dragging past the
push buttons and click.

3 Drag your cursor to the right to create a horizontal line, and click.

4 Drag down across the ends of the wires connected to the limit switches,
ending on the bottom wire and click. Press Enter to create the lines.

Show source and destination markers on cable wires | 1203

 5 Type MA at the command prompt to run the AutoCAD MATCHPROP
command.

6 Click the wire connected to the top limit switch.

7 Click each of the lines you just created. The lines change from black to
red since they are taking on the properties of the wire you selected.

8 Press Enter to exit the command.

1204 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 Adding cable markers

At this point you have established the link between the pushbuttons and the
limit switches. You can now include a cable marker identifier that is associated
with these wire connections in various wire and cable reports.

1 Click the Cable Marker tool.

2 Select to insert a cable marker.

3 Insert the cable marker on the horizontal line.

4 In the Insert/Edit Cable Marker (Parent wire) dialog box, click

Catalog Data Lookup.

5 In the Parts Catalog dialog box, select the 3 conductor (second

item in list) and click OK.

6 In the Insert/Edit Cable Marker (Parent wire) dialog box, delete

the wire color/id value (BLK), and click OK.

7 In the Insert Some Child Components dialog box, click Close.

Use the PLC Database File Editor

AutoCAD Electrical can generate any of hundreds of different PLC I/O modules
on demand, in a variety of different graphical styles, all without a single,
complete I/O module library symbol resident on the system. Modules
automatically adapt to the underlying ladder rung spacing, whatever that
value might be, and can even be stretched or broken into two or more pieces

Use the PLC Database File Editor | 1205

 at insertion time. This is all possible because AutoCAD Electrical generates
PLC I/O modules via a parametric generation technique driven by a PLC
database (ACE_PLC.MDB).

1206 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

Creating new PLC modules

By default, when creating a new PLC module the PLC Database File Editor
lists as many blank field Terminal Types as there are terminals defined in the
New Module dialog box.

1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (parametric build) tool to

access the PLC Database File Editor tool.

2 Click the PLC Database File Editor tool.

3 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, highlight PLCs in

the PLC selection list and click New Module.

4 In the New Module dialog box, specify the following:

■ Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley
■ Series: 1746
■ Series Type: Discrete Input
■ Code (Catalog Number): 1746-IA9
■ Terminals: 9
■ Addressable Points: 8

5 Click OK.

You now have a new blank input module with 9 terminals

and 8 addressable I/O points. You now need to define some
information for each terminal in the module, the most import-
ant being what symbols AutoCAD Electrical should stack to-
gether to build the module. Usually the top-most symbol for
the module is a little different than the rest so that it can carry
some basic information for the module that only needs to oc-
cur once in the final symbol.

Use the PLC Database File Editor | 1207

 Assigning Terminal Types

1 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, right-click Terminal Type 1
and select Edit Terminal from the context menu.
The Select Terminal Information dialog box displays. There are 3 categories
for top symbols: Top Input, Top Output, and Top Terminal. Top Input
and Top Output are addressable terminals, while the Top Terminal
category consists of non-addressable terminals.

2 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box, select Top Input.

The available terminals for that category are displayed along with any
recently used terminals. Each terminal shown is slightly different. It may
have an input wire connection terminal or have terminals for both input
and output, or it may not have a wire connection.

3 Select to use Module Info Input I/O Point Wire Left by selecting the
picture and then click OK.
The selected terminal is assigned to the Terminal Type in the PLC Database
File Editor dialog box. AutoCAD Electrical looks at the block to see what
attributes come in when the block is inserted. Some of the attributes come
in with predefined values that can be overwritten. You will see these
predefined values in the grid below the terminal type list.

4 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, multiple-select the next 7
terminals, right-click and select Edit Terminal.

NOTE You can select multiple fields to edit at the same time by dragging
your mouse across contiguous fields or by holding down the Control key
while selecting non-contiguous fields.

1208 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 5 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box, select the Input category
and look at the available terminals.

6 Select the Input I/O Point Wire Left terminal and click OK.
All 7 terminals are assigned at the same time.

7 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, right-click on the last terminal
and select Edit Terminal.

8 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box, select the Terminal

category.

9 Click the Terminal Point Wire Right terminal and click OK.

As an alternative to the Select Terminal Information dialog box, you can use
the drop-down list of predetermined Terminal Types. Click the arrow for the
Terminal Type and select from the list of available terminal types.

Setting additional terminal information

Some modules may have terminals that are not used. When you build your
PLC module on an AutoCAD Electrical drawing there is a choice inside the
Module Layout dialog box to include unused/extra connections. When this
toggle is not selected, all terminal entries marked as "Show: When Including
Unused" in the PLC Database File Editor are skipped. When this toggle is

Use the PLC Database File Editor | 1209

 selected, all entries marked with "Show: When Excluding Unused" are skipped.
This gives flexibility to how a module is represented.

1 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, make sure all of the terminals
are set to Show: Always.

2 Make sure all of the terminals are set to Optional Re-prompt: No.
You can trigger AutoCAD Electrical to prompt for a new beginning address
number when the parametric build flips from inputs to outputs or vice
versa. On the line where you want AutoCAD Electrical to re-prompt for
a new output address, select Output. If you want a re-prompt for a new
input address, select Input from the list.

3 If you want a prompt for an automatic break in the PLC module, select
the toggle in the Break After column.

4 If you want to override the rung spacing for the I/O and wire connection
point spacing, enter a value in the Spacing Factor column.
When AutoCAD Electrical generates a PLC module, it uses the current
rung spacing for I/O and wire connection point spacing. When a Spacing
Factor is specified, AutoCAD Electrical sees this spacing factor value on
any terminal type I/O point or wire connection entry line, it uses a factor
of the rung spacing. For example, a 2 for a given entry inserts this point
down 2 times the rung spacing instead of a full rung spacing. A value of
1.5 inserts the point down an extra half rung spacing than normal. A
value of 0.0 puts the particular I/O point at the same location as the
preceding one.

Modifying the terminal box dimensions

The Style Box Dimensions dialog box defines the module box dimensions
(such as the offset values and line properties) based upon the style number
used when the PLC was created.

1 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, click Style Box Dimensions.

2 Select Style 2 as the graphic style for your plc module. Styles 1-5 are
predefined, styles 6-9 may be user-defined. Select a style number - a sample
portion of a PLC module displays.
There are about two dozen symbols (with a file name "HP?*.dwg" where
"?" is the style number) associated with each style in the \Program Files
[(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade\libs\jic1 subdirectory. To create a new style,
copy an existing style's symbols to one of the unused style numbers (6-9)
and edit each library symbol.

1210 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 3 Specify the module box dimensions for the selected style.
These values set the right, left, top, and bottom offsets for the rectangle
that surrounds the module. The optional Split Top and Split Bottom
specify the offsets for a split module where Split Top specifies the offset
for the top of a split module and Split Bottom specifies the offset for the
bottom of the split module. If left blank, the rectangle Top and Bottom
values are used.

4 Specify any properties for the lines that make up the box. You can set
the color and line type using the properties fields. To predefine the color,
enter "COLOR colorname" into the box. For line type, enter "LTYPE
linetypename" in the box.

5 Click OK.

Modifying the terminal block settings

The Terminal Block Settings dialog box is used to manage the library symbols
in the PLC Database File Editor. You can add a terminal to the list by clicking
in any box in the last entry of the list. A blank entry line is added to the bottom
of the list. You must define the block name, assign it to a terminal category
for selection, give it a description, and assign a bitmap to be used for dialog
displays.
The list displays the block name, category, unique description, and sample
bitmap file for each terminal type.

Block Name As defined when creating the parametric PLC blocks. Block
file names adhere to the naming conventions to identify
the PLC style numbering in the third position and the ori-
entation in the first position.

Category Used in the PLC Database File editor to easily find specific
types of terminals.

Unique Description These descriptions are used during the terminal type selec-
tion process. They need to be maintained as unique

Sample Bitmap File This file is also used by the PLC database File editor to dis-
play a view of the terminal for selection.

Use the PLC Database File Editor | 1211

 NOTE Symbols and BMP files need to be created outside
of the PLC database file editor. Symbols are found in the
standard library search path, while PLC Bitmap images are
maintained in the same OS folder as the PLC Database itself
(Typically C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My
Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\).

1 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, click Settings.

The Terminal Block Settings dialog box lists the library symbols for the
terminal blocks that appeared in the Select Terminal Information dialog
box. Notice that row 1 lists the block file name and sample bitmap file
for the terminal we selected for Terminal Type 1.

2 Switch between the various graphic styles. Notice that the block name
updates depending on the style and orientation you select. For example,
the block name is "HP1WA-DL" for Style 1, Horizontal. If you select Style
4, Vertical the block name changes to "VP4WA-DL".
Graphical styles are used during the operation of the PLC Parametric
Selection process. These bitmap images are displayed during normal
operation and selection of PLC entries and are found at C:\Program
Files\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Acade. Use the same file names that are
already there: P_STYLEx.bmp where 'x' is the plc style 1-9.

3 Click View DWG or View Bitmap to view the PLC parametric symbols.

4 After you are done viewing the various symbols, click Cancel.

Adding terminal attributes

1 Select the first terminal in the list of terminals.

The attributes associated to the block, along with any predefined values,
are displayed below the Tree Structure section of the dialog box.

Notice that the value for the LINE1 is RACK %%1 and LINE2 is SLOT
%%2. The prompting values of %%1 and %%2 are populated with what
you type into the text box when prompted. The static text of Rack and
Slot appears in the attribute once the PLC module is created. There are
multiple prompting variables from %%1 through %%9. Prompting strings
can be added to any existing attributes on the terminal block. If you
wanted to add additional prompts with out using the existing attributes

1212 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 you would have to modify the block file to add additional attributes such
as Line3.
Top terminals are the only symbols which can accept prompts during
the parametric PLC insertion process.

2 Edit each attribute value for the TAG attributes to read "IN-%%N."
Besides the Module Prompt variables, AutoCAD Electrical also supports
the use of an address variable. When the module is inserted, the PLC I/O
addresses are calculated based on some AutoCAD Electrical settings and
the module settings. You can trigger AutoCAD Electrical to include a
prefix or suffix to each address value it inserts.
The %%N represents the calculated I/O address and the IN- is the prefix
that gets added to the address value. You can also use the prompt values.
For example, if you want to permanently encode the rack and group
numbers (%%1 and %%2 prompts) into each I/O address value, encode
each I/O address entry in the date file with "TAGA_=%%1%%2%%N."

3 If you want to assign a text constant to any attribute value, combine a

text constant with the variables as shown in the module prompts and
addressing examples above.

Inserting the PLC module into the drawing

1 Click Save Module to save the module to the PLC database file.

2 Click Done/Insert.
The PLC Parametric Selection dialog box displays.

3 Click OK to insert the new PLC module onto the drawing.

4 Specify the insertion point on the drawing.

5 In the Module Layout dialog box, click OK.

6 In the I/O Address dialog box, specify a beginning I/O address or use the
quick picks to select an address (such as I:/00).

7 Click OK.
Your module should look similar to the following. The Manufacturer,
Catalog Number, and Description attributes also display at the top of the
module (not shown).

Use the PLC Database File Editor | 1213

Add your own symbols, circuits and commands
to the icon menu
AutoCAD Electrical supplies two default icon menus: one for schematic symbols
and the other for panel symbols. Each menu is driven by a text file. AutoCAD
Electrical defaults to icon menu ACE_<standard>_MENU.DAT (where
<standard> = JIC, IEC, GB, HYD, JIS, PID, or PNEU) for schematic symbols
and ACE_PANEL_MENU.DAT for panel symbols. These menu files are found
in the C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support
subdirectory.

1214 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

You modify or expand the icon menus by editing the underlying icon menu
text file. You can use a generic text editor and edit it manually or you can use
the AutoCAD Electrical Icon Menu Wizard.
Use the Icon Menu Wizard dialog to select the function to be performed when
the icon is selected from the icon menu.

■ Add component: Inserts a symbol

■ Add circuit: Inserts a prebuilt circuit. This causes AutoCAD Electrical to

insert and explode the .dwg name supplied.

■ Add new submenu:Starts a new submenu.

■ Add command: Performs a command. Use Command for inserting

three-phase schematic symbols and panel footprints.

Add your own symbols, circuits and commands to the icon menu | 1215
 Add components to the icon menu

The Icon Menu Wizard can be used to add or modify icons for both the
schematic and panel symbol libraries.

1 Create your new AutoCAD Electrical compatible library symbol.

For schematic symbols, follow the guidelines regarding the
symbol ".dwg" file naming convention (page 163)and required
attributes. (page 177)

2 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon

Menu Wizard tool.

3 Click the Icon Menu Wizard tool.

4 In the Select Menu File dialog box, select to modify the

schematic menu file, and click OK.

5 In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, select Add ➤ Compon-

ent to add a new icon to the menu.

NOTE You can also right-click in empty space and select Add icon
➤ Component.

Three pieces of information are needed for the new icon but-
ton.

1216 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 6 On the Add Icon - Component dialog box, specify the image
file name and graphic to appear in the icon button. The image
name can be manually typed into the edit box . You can browse
to an existing .sld or .png file to assign to the icon, use an
image file that matches the active drawing name, use an image
file that matches a picked block on the drawing, or use an
image with the same name as the block name entered for the
block name.

NOTE Browse cannot be used if you are using a slide library (in-
stead of individual <slide>.sld files). Manually enter these as "library
name(slide name)". For example, "S1(hpb11)."

If you have not created the slide image and want to have it
created automatically from the current screen image, select
Create PNG from current screen image. The Icon Menu Wizard
runs the AutoCAD MSLIDE command on your current screen
image to create the .png and .sld file. If the file does not exist,
then Create PNG from the current screen image is selected by
default. If you do not want to create the image from the current
drawing's displayed image, switch it off. If you want to redo
an existing image, click this switch on.

7 Specify the block name to insert on the icon. The symbol's file
name can be typed into the edit box or you can browse for an
existing WBlocked ".dwg" file to assign to the icon, insert the
full active drawing as a block, or select an existing block on
the current drawing.

8 Click OK.
The new menu button displays in the menu and the text you
entered for the icon label appears in the tooltip or in the list
if you set the viewing option to either Icon with text or List
view.

Add your own symbols, circuits and commands to the icon menu | 1217
 9 Select the appropriate Insert Component command and test
your new symbol insert.

Add an icon menu page

You can add new menu pages to the AutoCAD Electrical icon menu, and then
populate them with your own custom symbols. Each new page can have icon
selections that cascade down to other new menu pages. Once you click OK,
your trigger icon and new submenu page are added.

1 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, select Add ➤ New submenu to
add a new icon to the menu.

NOTE You can also right-click in empty space and select New Submenu.

The Create New Submenu dialog box displays. Here you can select the
function that will be performed when the icon is selected from the icon
menu.
Three pieces of information are needed to trigger the new menu page.

2 On the Create New Submenu dialog box, specify the image file name and
.sld or .png graphic to appear in the icon button. The image name can
be manually typed into the edit box. You can browse to an existing .sld
or .png file to assign to the icon, use an image file that matches the active
drawing name, use an image file that matches a picked block on the
drawing, or use an image file with the same name as the block name
entered for the block name.

NOTE Browse cannot be used if you are using a slide library (instead of
individual <slide>.sld files). Manually enter these as "library name(slide name)".

3 Specify the submenu's title.

1218 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 4 Click OK.

5 Select the appropriate Insert Component command and test your new
symbol insert.

Add an icon to trigger a command

An icon can be configured to trigger an AutoCAD command, trigger an

AutoCAD Electrical command, or run a program. For example, "Rectangle"
can be typed into the edit box so that every time you click the box, it runs
the AutoCAD Rectangle command.

1 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, click Add ➤ Command.

NOTE You can also right-click in empty space and select Add icon ➤
Command.

2 On the Add Icon - Command dialog box, specify the name to appear on
the icon and the image file to use on the icon button.

3 Specify the command to execute when the icon button is selected.

Click List to select from a list of AutoCAD Electrical Commands for Panel
and Schematic multi-pole symbol inserts. This makes it easier for you to
build the appropriate command to insert a multipole symbol or a panel
symbol. To see the command line parameters for a specific AutoCAD
Electrical command, select the command in the list and the parameters
display at the right. If quotation marks are shown, then enclose the
parameter value within quotation marks.

NOTE If you select an API command that requires parameters you must
manually enter the additional parameters as indicated. Commands that require
parameters should be inside of parenthesis. If you use one of the AutoCAD
commands from the list, no parenthesis are needed. For example, to add an
icon that will insert a black flush pushbutton, Allen-Bradley, catalog number
800T-A2A, with no rotation, select the command WD_INFP from the list.
When you return to the Command dialog box, you must enter in the rest of
the parameters.

■ "family" is used for the catalog file lookup table name

■ "mfg" is used for the footprint lookup

■ "cat" is the actual catalog number

Add your own symbols, circuits and commands to the icon menu | 1219
 ■ "assycode" is the catalog number assembly code (often blank)

■ "footprint" is the library symbol name

WD_INFP "PB11" "AB" "800T-A2A" "" "AB/ABPB3"

4 Click OK.

Add circuits to the icon menu

Add Circuit is the same as Insert Command except that the block file is made
up of more than one AutoCAD Electrical block definitions and related wire
lines.

1 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, click Add ➤ Add circuit.

NOTE You can also right-click in empty space and select Add icon ➤ Add
circuit.

Three pieces of information are needed for the new icon button.

2 On the Add Existing Circuit dialog box, specify the image file name and
.sld or .png graphic to appear in the icon button. The image name can
be manually typed into the edit box. You can browse to an existing .sld
or .png file to assign to the icon, use an image file that matches the active
drawing name, use an image file that matches a picked block on the
drawing, or use an image file with the same name as the block name
entered for the block name.

NOTE Browse cannot be used if you are using a slide library (instead of
individual <slide>.sld files). Manually enter these as "library name(slide name)".

3 Specify the circuit name to insert on the icon. The symbol's file name
can be typed into the edit box or you can browse for an existing WBlocked
".dwg" file to assign to the icon or insert the full active drawing as a block.

4 Click OK.
The new menu button displays in the menu.

5 Select the appropriate Insert Component command and test your new
symbol insert.

1220 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

Change the icon's image

There are times when you might want to change the image associated with
an icon menu choice. The AutoCAD Electrical Icon Menu Wizard provides a
quick, easy way to reassign or reshoot a slide image. Slides can be saved as
individual files in the AutoCAD Electrical search path or they can be
maintained inside of a library of slide files called the slide library.

NOTE If you make custom slides or slide libraries for the menu, copy them to the
same subdirectory as the menu file since AutoCAD Electrical looks for menu slides
in the active icon menu file's directory.

1 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, right-click an icon button to edit
and select Properties.

2 On the Properties dialog box, specify the image file name and .sld or .png
graphic to appear in the icon button. The image name can be manually
typed into the edit box. You can browse to an existing .sld or .png file to
assign to the icon, use an image file that matches the active drawing
name, use an image file that matches a picked block on the drawing, or
use an image file with the same name as the block name entered for the
block name.
If you have not created the .png image and want to have it created
automatically from the current screen image, select Create PNG from
current screen image. The Icon Menu Wizard runs the AutoCAD MSLIDE
command on your current screen image to create the .png and .sld file.
If the file does not exist, then Create PNG from current screen image is
selected by default. If you do not want to create the image from the
current drawing's displayed image, switch it off. If you want to redo an
existing image, click this switch on.

NOTE Browse cannot be used if you are using a slide library (instead of
individual <slide>.sld files). Manually enter these as "library name(slide name)".

3 Click OK.
The new menu button displays in the menu.

4 Select the appropriate Insert Component command and test your new
symbol insert.

Add your own symbols, circuits and commands to the icon menu | 1221
 Edit the DAT file with a text editor

There may be times when you want to bypass the Icon Menu Wizard and edit
the menu DAT file directly. It is important to maintain the menu file structure,
otherwise your menu may not activate properly. An AutoCAD Electrical menu
".dat" file is a text file that can be viewed and edited with any text editor (ex:
WordPad or Notepad). See Overview of the icon menu file. (page 760)

Best practices for icon menu changes

We recommend that you create your own icon menu and leave the AutoCAD
Electrical icon menu intact. This provides you with easier migration when
upgrading to the next version of AutoCAD Electrical. You can set up the
AutoCAD Electrical icon menu system so that you can flip back and forth
between the default ACE_<standard>_MENU.DAT (such as
ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT) and your own "my_menu.dat."

1 Copy the standard menu into a new file name instead of creating the file
from scratch. Open the new DAT file with a text editor and remove
everything except for the top portion of the file (shown below).
**M0
INSERT COMPONENT: JIC SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS
Rename the title line to indicate that this is your very own personal menu
file.

2 Add a line similar to the following in the ACE_<standard>_MENU.DAT

file.
My schem menu|mymenu.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu
"my_menu.dat")(c:wd_insym_go2menu 0)

3 In your new "my_menu.dat" file, add a line similar to the following one
so that you can jump back to the default AutoCAD Electrical icon menu.
Default AutoCAD Electrical menu|back2wd.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu
"ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT")(c:wd_insym_go2menu 0)
**M0
My Menu: My Companies Symbols
AutoCAD Electrical menu|back2wd.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu
"ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT")(c:wd_insym_go2menu 0)

4 In the AutoCAD Electrical default icon menu, click the new "My menu"
entry.

1222 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 Your menu should immediately appear and remains the default for
subsequent component inserts. If you want to go back to the AutoCAD
Electrical default menu, click the "AutoCAD Electrical menu" button you
added to your custom menu. AutoCAD Electrical flips back to the default
icon menu and it now remains the default for subsequent inserts.

Build your own symbols

You can use the Symbol Builder to easily create an AutoCAD Electrical symbol
or to convert existing non-AutoCAD Electrical symbols. This utility builds a
smart schematic symbol by either adding AutoCAD Electrical attributes to the
symbol's geometry or by converting text entities to AutoCAD Electrical
attributes. You can also use AutoCAD attribute definition and editing
commands to do the same thing. This tool makes the task easier by letting
you quickly pick and place attributes. It tracks what attributes are present and
checks your work to make sure that any required attributes are not omitted.
For this exercise, we are going to create a symbol and add AutoCAD Electrical
attributes to the new geometry.

Create a parent schematic symbol

In this exercise, we are going to create a power supply using the Symbol Builder
tool.

Build your own symbols | 1223

 NOTE If at any time you exit out of the Symbol Builder, restart it, and select any
graphics and attributes you've added so far. You can then start from where you
left off.

1 In an AutoCAD Electrical drawing, click the Miscellaneous tool

to access the Symbol Builder tool.

2 Click the Symbol Builder tool.

3 At the command prompt press Enter.

You can create your own symbol rather than modify an exist-
ing symbol.

4 In the Symbol Builder: Choose symbol category dialog box,

Schematic Symbol section, click Parent.

5 In the Symbol Builder - Schematic Parent or Stand-alone

symbol dialog box, click Rectangle.

6 Draw a rectangle on the drawing.

Add attributes to symbol

1 In the Symbol Builder - Schematic Parent or Stand-alone
symbol dialog box, click Standard.
This option assigns attributes to the rectangle as well as sets
the height and justification for each attribute. In this exercise
we will add 5 attributes: TAG1, DESC1, LOC, INST and FAMILY.
However you are not limited to these 5 attributes and you can
include your own user-defined attributes on the AutoCAD
Electrical block files. The TAG1 attribute is the only one re-
quired for a parent schematic symbol and indicates to Auto-
CAD Electrical that the symbol should be treated as a parent.
The Component type: Schematic Parent or Stand-alone dialog
box displays listing the AutoCAD Electrical attributes that you

1224 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 can insert and define as part of the symbol. Once an attribute
is inserted on the symbol it is disabled in the Missing attributes
list. AutoCAD Electrical allows only one insertion of each at-
tribute.

NOTE You cannot create a symbol with the Symbol Builder until
the minimum attribute requirements are met. In most cases this
means the TAG1 or TAG2 attribute.

2 Select TAG1, Height = 0.125 and Justify = Center.

3 Click Insert Attribute.

4 Insert the attribute above the rectangle.

The TAG1 default code dialog box displays. The default code
is the %F value of the tag format (such as "CR", "PB", "LT").

5 In the TAG1 default code dialog box, enter PS and click OK.
Notice that the Component type: Schematic Parent or Stand-
alone dialog box redisplays. The TAG1 option is now grayed
out since that attribute has been placed for the parent symbol.
Continue placing the rest of the attributes.

6 Select DESC1, Height = 0.125 and Justify = Center.

7 Click Insert Attribute.

8 Insert the attribute below TAG1.

You do not have to insert the MFG, CAT or ASSYCODE attrib-

utes at this time since they are automatically added through
the Symbol Builder's WBLOCK option and set to invisible by
default.

9 Insert the LOC, INST, and FAMILY attributes (in order) as in-
dicated below.
■ LOC: Height = 0.0625, Justify = Center, Insertion point = above TAG1

Build your own symbols | 1225

 ■ INST: Height = 0.0625, Justify = Center, Insertion point = above LOC
■ FAMILY: Insertion point = anywhere

Once you place the FAMILY attribute, the FAMILY code dialog box displays. The
Family value generally matches the TAG1 %F value. This value is only used when
naming the block.
10 Click OK.
Notice that the FAMILY and TAG1%F codes display in the
Component type: Schematic Parent or Stand-alone dialog box
above the Insert Attribute button. These values should both
be PS.

11 Click Back to Main Menu.

Add wire connection points

1 Click Wire Connection.

You can define wire connection points and terminal text for
the library symbol. The Terminal style/configuration dialog
box displays.

2 Select terminal style 1=Screw.

This terminal style inserts both the graphic to represent the
screw and the wire connection points.
You have to determine which direction the wire will attach to
the component. In this exercise, wire connection attributes
are inserted at the left, bottom, and right side of the symbol.

1226 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

3 Click the button with the wire coming in from the left.

4 Insert the terminal in the center of the left-hand side of the

rectangle as shown.

TIP Always use an AutoCAD Snap to insert the wire connection

point.

Once you select the wire connection point, you can insert a
terminal attribute and assign a default pin number to the at-
tribute. The TERM01 attribute ➤ X?TERM01 wire connection
point dialog box displays. The terminal number TERMxx at-
tribute text can be linked to a wire connection point X?TERM
attribute. This is done by a match on the last two characters
of the TERMxx and the X?TERMxx attribute names.

NOTE The "xx" in TERMxx is an incrementing number based

upon how many terminal attributes have been added.

Use this dialog box to move the TERM01 text, change the text
height or justification, convert existing text entity to TERM-
DESC01 or TERM01 attribute, and indicate that there shouldn't
be a TERM text entity for the wire connection.

5 If the TERM01 text is not where you want it, click Move and
select the new location for the text.

TIP You may have to move the dialog out of the way to see where
the terminal insertion was originally placed.

6 Click OK.

7 In the Pin number default value dialog box, enter "L1" and
then click OK.

Build your own symbols | 1227

 This sets "L1" as the default terminal pin number.
The Terminal style/configuration dialog box redisplays.

NOTE If you want to add multiple instances you can use the
Multiple Insert option. This prevents you from having to insert
the pins one at a time.

1228 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 8 Click the button with the wire coming in from the bottom.

9 Insert the terminal in the bottom center of the rectangle.

10 In the TERM02 attribute ➤ X?TERM02 wire connection point

dialog box, click OK.

11 In the Pin number default value dialog box, enter "GND" and
then click OK.

12 Click the button with the wire coming in from the right.

13 Insert the terminal in the center of the right-hand side of the

rectangle.

14 In the TERM03 attribute ➤ X?TERM03 wire connection point

dialog box, click OK.

15 In the Pin number default value dialog box, enter "L2" and
then click OK.
Your drawing should look like the following.

16 In the Terminal style/configuration dialog box, click Back to

Main Menu.
The Symbol Builder - Schematic Parent or Stand-alone symbol
dialog box redisplays. Notice that the number of connection
points that were placed is listed next to the Wire Connection
button.

Finishing the parent symbol

The additional options for creating a symbol listed below are not used for this
example, but you can use them when creating your own symbol if desired.
■ Terminal: Pace the TERMxx attribute if you didn't already place it. For ex-
ample, if you had selected "None" as the terminal style earlier, you could

Build your own symbols | 1229

 now use this option to insert the TERMxx attribute for each wire connection
point. You can use this option only if you already defined an AutoCAD
Electrical wire connection attribute to which you want to link terminal text.
■ NO/NC:Add an attribute for the contact state (NO, NC, NO-HC).
■ Dashed:Inserts Dash Link Line attributes that allow the program to draw
dashed link lines between a parent symbol and its related child contact.
This requires special attributes at the point where the dashed line connects
to the symbol.
■ Convert Text:Converts existing text entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes
in the same location as the original text. If you windowed existing geometry
and text entities at the initial prompt of the Symbol Builder, this converts
the existing text entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes "in place." Select
Convert to AutoCAD Electrical attributes to map your text/attributes to the
attribute names for the selected symbol type

1 Click Rating.
Place optional rating attributes on the symbol. You can add
up to 12 rating attributes. Attribute prompts that you define
display in the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when you
insert or edit the new symbol.

2 In the Add Rating attributes dialog box, select 0.125 and

Center for RATING1 and click Insert.

3 Insert RATING1 just below DESC1 on the symbol.

4 Select 0.125 and Center for RATING2 and click Insert.

5 Insert RATING2 just below RATING1 on the symbol.

Your symbol should look like the following.

6 Click Back to Main Menu.

1230 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 The Symbol Builder - Schematic Parent or Stand-alone symbol
dialog box redisplays. Notice that the number of rating values
that were placed is listed next to the Rating button.

7 Click WBlock.
WBlock creates the symbol file to be inserted while Block cre-
ates the symbol for this drawing file only.
AutoCAD Electrical provides a default name for the new sym-
bol. Avoid changing the first 4 letters of the file name and
limit the total length to 32 characters.

NOTE If the Wblock tools is disabled you have not satisfied the
requirement of the TAG1 attribute on the block. If this is the case,
make sure you have inserted the TAG1 attribute.

8 Enter a file name or accept the default and click Save.

9 In the Block insertion base point dialog box, click OK.

10 Specify the insertion point. Pick the point in-line with the top
terminals so that it is easy to later place on a wire.

11 When asked to insert an instance of this block now, click OK.

12 Place the symbol on your drawing. If you place the symbol on

an existing rung, the wire breaks, the component tag inserts,
and the wires connect to the symbol.
New symbols you create can also be inserted with the AutoCAD
Electrical Insert Component or Insert Panel Component com-
mands. You can add your new symbol to the icon menu or
you can select it from the Type it or Browse dialog file selection
options in the icon menu.

13 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.

Build your own symbols | 1231

 Create a schematic terminal symbol

1 In an AutoCAD Electrical drawing, click the Miscellaneous tool

to access the Symbol Builder tool.

2 Click the Symbol Builder tool.

3 At the command prompt press Enter.

This allows you to create your own symbol rather than modify
an existing symbol.

4 In the Symbol Builder: Choose symbol category dialog box,

Schematic Symbol section, click Terminal - Schematic terminal
(follows wire number).

5 In the Symbol Builder - Schematic Parent or Stand-alone

symbol dialog box, click Rectangle.

6 Draw a square on the drawing.

Add attributes to symbol

1 In the Symbol Builder - Schematic Parent or Stand-alone

symbol dialog box, click Standard.
The Component type: Schematic Terminal dialog box displays
listing the AutoCAD Electrical attributes that you can insert
for the symbol. Once an attribute is inserted on the symbol it
is disabled in the Missing attributes list. AutoCAD Electrical
allows only one insertion of each attribute.

NOTE You cannot create a symbol with the Symbol Builder until
the minimum attribute requirements (TAGSTRIP) are met.

2 Select TAGSTRIP, Height = 0.125 and Justify = Center.

3 Click Insert Attribute.

1232 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

4 Insert the attribute above the rectangle.
Notice that the Component type: Schematic Terminal dialog
box redisplays. The TAGSTRIP option is now grayed out since
that attribute has been placed for the symbol.

5 Select WIRENO, Height = 0.125 and Justify = Center.

6 Click Insert Attribute.

7 Insert the attribute above TAGSTRIP.

You do not have to insert the MFG, CAT or ASSYCODE attrib-

utes at this time since they are automatically added through
the Symbol Builder's WBLOCK option and set to invisible by
default.

8 Click Back to Main Menu.

Add wire connection points

1 Click Wire Connection.

This allows you to define wire connection points and terminal
text for the library symbol. The Terminal style/configuration
dialog box displays.
You have to determine which direction the wire will attach to
the component. In this exercise, wire connection attributes
will be inserted at the left and right side of the symbol.

NOTE Wire connection attributes should be on all 4 sides of a

terminal block so that it can be inserted in either horizontal or
vertical wires.

Build your own symbols | 1233

 2 Click the button with the wire coming in from the left.

3 Insert the terminal in the center of the left-hand side of the

rectangle.

TIP Use the Midpoint OSnap to insert the wire connection point
in the middle of the line.

4 Click the button with the wire coming in from the right.

5 Insert the terminal in the center of the right-hand side of the

rectangle.
Your drawing should look like the following.

6 In the Terminal style/configuration dialog box, click Back to

Main Menu.
The Symbol Builder - Schematic Terminal dialog box redisplays.
Notice that the number of connection points that were placed
is listed next to the Wire Connection button.
Finishing the terminal symbol

1 Click WBlock.

2 In the New Terminal block name dialog box, click No Wire

Change.
AutoCAD Electrical terminals follow a specific naming conven-
tion. The first two characters are "HT". The third character is
a "0" if the wire number does not change through its terminal
or it is a "1" if the terminal symbol should trigger a wire num-
ber change. The 4th character is an underscore (_) if the ter-
minal does not carry attributes for AutoCAD Electrical to pro-
cess (meaning it is a blank terminal symbol). Otherwise the
4th - nth character positions are user-defined. By clicking No
Wire Change the terminal block name is filled in for you.

3 Click OK.

1234 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 4 Enter a file name or accept the default and click Save.

5 In the Block insertion base point dialog box, click OK.

6 Specify the insertion point. Pick the center of the square so

that it is easy to later place on a wire.

7 When asked to insert an instance of this block now, click OK.

8 Place the symbol on your drawing. If you place the symbol on

an existing wire, the wire breaks, the component tag inserts,
and the wires connect to the symbol.
New symbols you create can also be inserted with the AutoCAD
Electrical Insert Component or Insert Panel Component com-
mands. You can add your new symbol to the icon menu or
you can select it from the Type it or Browse dialog file selection
options in the icon menu.

9 In the Terminals dialog box, click OK.

10 Select Wires ➤ Insert Wire Numbers from the menu.

11 Click Pick Individual Wires.

12 Select the wires on either side of the terminal.

Wire numbers are assigned and populated on the block.

Build your own symbols | 1235

 Convert existing geometry

1 Explode any existing blocks.

2 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol

Builder tool.

3 Click the Symbol Builder tool.

4 Select any geometry and text that are to become part of the
converted symbol and press Enter.

5 In the Symbol Builder: Choose symbol category dialog box,

Schematic Symbol section, click Parent.

6 In the Symbol Builder - Schematic Parent or Stand-alone

symbol dialog box, click Standard.
The Component type: Schematic Parent or Stand-alone dialog
box displays listing the AutoCAD Electrical attributes that you
can insert for the symbol. Once an attribute is inserted on the
symbol it is disabled in the attribute list. AutoCAD Electrical
allows only one insertion of each attribute.

7 Select TAG1, Height = 0.125 and Justify = Center.

8 Click Pick Text.

9 Select the text you want to change to the TAG1 attribute ("ID"
in this example).
The text changes automatically from its original value ("ID")
to "TAG1."

10 In the TAG1 default code dialog box, enter PB and click OK.
Notice that the Component type: Schematic Parent or Stand-
alone dialog box redisplays. The TAG1 option is now grayed
out since that attribute has been placed for the parent symbol.
Continue placing the rest of the attributes.

1236 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

11 Select DESC1, Height = 0.125 and Justify = Center.

12 Click Pick Text.

13 Select the text you want to change to the DESC1 attribute

("DESCRIPTION" in this example).

Finishing the parent symbol

1 Click Back to Main Menu.

The Symbol Builder - Schematic Parent or Stand-alone symbol
dialog box redisplays.

2 Click WBlock.
AutoCAD Electrical provides a default name for the new sym-
bol. Avoid changing the first 4 letters of the file name and
limit the total length to 32 characters.

3 Enter a file name or accept the default and click Save.

4 In the Block insertion base point dialog box, click OK.

5 Specify the insertion point. Pick the center of the symbol so

that it is easy to later place on a wire.

6 When asked to insert an instance of this block now, click OK.

7 Place the symbol on your drawing. If you place the symbol on

an existing rung, the wire breaks, the component tag inserts,
and the wires connect to the symbol.
New symbols you create can also be inserted with the AutoCAD
Electrical Insert Component or Insert Panel Component com-
mands. You can add your new symbol to the icon menu or
you can select it from the Type it or Browse dialog file selection
options in the icon menu.

Build your own symbols | 1237

 8 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.

Create a panel footprint

A panel footprint symbol can be in either of two general forms: a to-scale

physical representation of the device or a generic wiring diagram representation
whose main purpose is to show wire connection annotation information.
The procedure for creating a panel footprint is similar to that of creating a
schematic symbol with the following differences:

■ Panel footprint symbols do not have to carry the wire connection attributes
that schematic symbols almost always carry.

■ There are no parent/child versions of a symbol for panel footprint symbols.

■ Some of the attribute names are different. A panel symbol must have the
P_TAG1 or P_TAGSTRIP attribute rather than the TAG1 or TAGSTRIP
attribute.

■ Panel footprint symbol block naming does not follow the special naming
convention. The first 4 or 5 characters of the block name for a panel symbol
is not as critical as it is for schematic symbols.

1238 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

In this example, we will take geometry (either geometry you just drew,
geometry you have been using, or a vendor representation) and convert it to
an AutoCAD Electrical panel footprint using the Symbol Builder.

1 Explode any existing blocks.

2 In an AutoCAD Electrical drawing, click the Miscellaneous tool

to access the Symbol Builder tool.

3 Click the Symbol Builder tool.

4 Select any geometry and text that are to become part of the
symbol and press Enter.

5 In the Symbol Builder: Choose symbol category dialog box,

Panel Layout Symbol section, click Footprint.
Add attributes to symbol
Below are the minimum attribute requirements for AutoCAD
Electrical to recognize a block as a panel footprint. The com-
ponent footprint block must carry a minimum of one of the
following:

1 In the Panel Symbol Builder dialog box, click Standard.

This option allows you to assign attributes to the rectangle as
well as set the height and justification for each attribute. There
are 7 attributes that should be added to the panel symbol:
P_TAG1, DESC1, DESC2, LOC, INST, MFG and CAT.
The Component type: Panel Footprint dialog box displays
listing the AutoCAD Electrical attributes that you can insert
for the symbol. Once an attribute is inserted on the symbol it
is disabled in the attribute list. AutoCAD Electrical allows only
one insertion of each attribute.

Build your own symbols | 1239

 2 Select P_TAG1, Height = 0.125, Justify = Center and Visible.

3 Click Insert Attribute.

4 Insert the attribute above the symbol graphics.

Notice that the Component type: Panel Footprint dialog box
redisplays. The P_TAG1 option is now grayed out since that
attribute has been placed for the symbol. Continue placing
the rest of the attributes.

5 Select DESC1, Height = 0.125, Justify = Center and Visible.

6 Click Insert Attribute.

7 Insert the attribute below P_TAG1.

8 Select DESC2, Height = 0.125, Justify = Center and Visible.

9 Click Insert Attribute.

10 Insert the attribute below DESC1.

11 Insert the LOC, INST, MFG and CAT attributes (in order) as
indicated below.
■ LOC: Height = 0.01, Justify = Center, Invisible, Insertion point = just
below DESC2 and to the left
■ INST: Height = 0.01, Justify = Center, Invisible, Insertion point = above
LOC
■ MFG: Height = 0.01, Justify = Center, Invisible, Insertion point = just
below DESC2 and to the right
■ CAT: Height = 0.01, Justify = Center, Invisible, Insertion point = above
MFG

1240 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

12 Click Back to Main Menu.
Finishing the panel symbol

Additional options for creating a symbol. These options will not be used for this
example, but you can use them when creating your own symbol if desired.
■ Rating: Inserts optional rating attributes. AutoCAD Electrical allows up to
12 Rating attributes. These attributes can be used for anything from amps
to motor horsepower. If you insert one or more of these optional attributes,
define an attribute prompt for each such as "Motor FLA" or "Voltage". These
prompts display in the Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box
when you insert your new symbol.
■ Terminal/Wire Numbers: Inserts attributes to show terminal and wire
number connection annotation. For each wire number you need, select the
desired wire number direction and then place the point on your new symbol.
Select one of the supplied wire number or terminal styles from the menu.
You can edit existing terminal styles or create your own. Learn more about
creating your own terminal symbols in the AutoCAD Electrical Help.
■ Convert Text: Converts existing text entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes
in the same location as the original text. If you windowed existing geometry
and text entities at the initial prompt of the Symbol Builder, this converts
the existing text entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes "in place." Select
Convert to AutoCAD Electrical attributes to map your text/attributes to the
attribute names for the selected symbol type.

1 Click WBlock.
WBlock creates the symbol file to be inserted while Block cre-
ates the symbol for this drawing file only.

2 Enter a file name or accept the default and click Save.

3 In the Block insertion base point dialog box, click OK.

Build your own symbols | 1241

 4 Specify the insertion point. Pick a point in the center of the
symbol graphics.

5 When asked to insert an instance of this block now, click OK.

6 Place the symbol on your drawing.

New symbols you create can also be inserted with the AutoCAD Electrical Insert
Panel Component commands. You can add your new symbol to the icon menu
or you can select it from the Type it or Browse dialog file selection options in
the icon menu.

7 In the Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box,

Component Tag section, click Schematic List.

8 Select the schematic device to tie the panel footprint to from

the list and click OK.
The Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box is filled
in with the schematic device information such as the tag, In-
stallation code, Location code, Manufacturer, and Catalog
Number.

9 Click OK.

Adding attributes using templates

If you do not want to use the Symbol Builder to add attributes to the panel
footprint, you can use an attribute template to automatically add attributes.
You can have certain attributes added to any footprint automatically at
footprint insertion time. There is an attribute template drawing, C:\Program
Files\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\panel\wd_ptag_addattr_comp.dwg, that
gets exploded and re-blocked automatically with the panel footprint as it
inserts into the drawing. If this template does not exist or if it doesn't contain
certain target attributes needed to carry values pulled across from the

1242 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 schematics, AutoCAD Electrical annotates the footprint with the data in
extended entity data format.
You can set up to have visible attributes added to any footprint automatically
at footprint insertion time. There are 3 attribute template drawings:

wd_ptag_addattr_comp.dwg component footprints

wd_ptag_addattr_trm.dwg terminal with terminal number

wd_ptag_addattr_wtrm.dwg terminal with wire number as terminal number

If AutoCAD Electrical finds that the template exists, a copy of it gets exploded
and merged (i.e. blocked with the panel footprint as AutoCAD Electrical inserts
the footprint into the drawing). Then the schematic data is added on to the
footprint either as visible attribute data (if the target attribute exists) or as
nonvisible Xdata if the target attribute does not exist on the footprint block.
As AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint and prepares to merge this attribute
definition template into the block, it attempts to find the center of the inserted
block by collecting and averaging the parts and pieces that make up the block.
It inserts the attribute definition template at this calculated location. Next,
for each attribute definition in the merged template, AutoCAD Electrical checks
to see if the original block is already coming in with that particular attribute
tag name. If there is no attribute with that name, the merged attribute
definition stays, otherwise AutoCAD Electrical erases the merging one and
keeps the existing one. AutoCAD Electrical re-blocks the added attribute
definitions with the existing footprint. Finally, if there is schematic data to
put on the footprint, AutoCAD Electrical annotates the attributes, if present,
or writes the data out as nonvisible Xdata.

Configure projects for various drawing

standards
AutoCAD Electrical has multiple configuration options so that you can
configure your drawings in a manner that fits your needs. You can configure
drawings for IEC standard or automatically override family tag codes.

Configure projects for various drawing standards | 1243

 Configure for IEC standard

Below is a list of configuration options (both project properties and

drawing-specific properties) that are most commonly used when dealing with
the IEC drawing standard and a description of each.
Project Properties
Project Properties are configured by right-clicking on the project name in the
Project Manager and selecting Properties. The options configured here are
project-wide options, such as the paths to symbol libraries, or drawing default
options for new drawings that are created in the selected project. The drawing
options defined in the Project Properties dialog box can also be applied to any
drawing in the project if needed.

Project Settings Tab

Schematic Libraries AutoCAD Electrical contains two specific IEC-type

symbols, IEC2 and IEC4. The main difference
between these libraries is the size of the text associ-
ated with them.
■ IEC2 symbols have a text size of 2.5 for the
main text items such as Component Tag, Install-
ation, Location, Component Description, and
so on.
■ IEC4 symbols have a text size of 3.5 for the
Component Tag and a text size of 2.7 for Install-
ation, Location, Component Description and
so on.

Schematic Icon Menu File AutoCAD Electrical contains one IEC-specific icon
menu file: ACE_IEC_MENU.DAT.

Components Tab

Component TAG Format In IEC you may want your components to be

tagged with “Sheet Number, Family Code,” fol-
lowed by a number that is either sequential or ref-
erence-based. To do this, in the Tag Format edit
box, enter: “%S%F%N” where %S = the sheet
number, %F = the family code defined for the
component being inserted and %N = the number-

1244 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

Components Tab

ing scheme for the active drawing (either sequential

or reference-based).
For sequential numbering, you can enter a starting
number to use as a starting component number.
For reference-based numbering, you can use one
of the following numbering formats:
■ X-Y Grid
■ X Zones
■ Reference Number

Component TAG Options Defines most of the specific tagging options to

conform to the IEC tagging mode. Select the option
that best fits your needs:
■ Combined Installation/Location Tag Mode:
Uses the combined installation/location tag for
interpreting component tag names. For ex-
ample, 100CR relay contact marked with loca-
tion code PNL1 is interpreted as being associ-
ated with a different relay coil than relay con-
tact -100CR marked with location code PNL2.
If this setting is not selected, both contacts are
associated with the same parent relay coil, -
100CR.
By selecting this option, your compon-
ent tags are automatically prefixed with
the =, +, and - where applicable.
■ Suppress dash when first character of tag:
Suppresses any single dash character prefix in
an IEC tag that does not have a leading Install-
ation/Location prefix(i.e. "-K101" dash is sup-
pressed to "K101" but "+LOC1-K101" remains
unchanged.
When switched OFF, it automatically
adds a single dash character to an IEC
tag that does not already have a single
leading dash prefix and does not have
a leading Installation/Location prefix.
For example, tag "K101" becomes "-

Configure projects for various drawing standards | 1245

Components Tab

K101" but "+LOC1-K101" remains un-

changed.

NOTE This suppression takes place auto-

matically in reports; and takes place
graphically only when a component is in-
serted, edited, or retagged.

■ Format Installation/Location into tag: Specifies

to exclude the Installation and Location code
values as part of the tag when displaying. For
example, if this is not on, a tag might show up
as K16 in the Surf dialog box. But if selected,
the tag might show up +AAA-K16 (where AAA
is the location).
■ Suppress Installation/Location in tag when
match drawing default: Suppresses Location
and Installation values on components if they
match the drawing default values.
■ Suppress Installation/Location in tag on reports:
Specifies to exclude Installation and Location
values as part of the tag when displayed in re-
ports.
■ Upon insert: automatic fill Installation/Location
with drawing default or last used: Fills the In-
stallation and Location edit boxes on the In-
sert/Edit component dialog box and the attrib-
utes on the block with drawing default or last
used values (if no drawing default).If not selec-
ted, these edit boxes and attributes are not
filled in and are assumed.

Cross-Reference Tab

Cross-Reference Format In IEC, you may want to configure your cross-refer-

encing text to display the “Sheet Number - Refer-
ence Number.” To do this, in the Same Drawing

1246 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

Cross-Reference Tab

edit box, enter “%S-%N” (or click the %S-%N

button). You can also define the format of the cross-
referencing text that references other drawings in
the Between Drawings edit box.

Suppress Installation/Location codes when Select this if you want to suppress IEC prefixes.
matching the drawing defaults
NOTE You must run the Component Cross-Refer-
ence command to update any existing cross-refer-
encing text.

Component Cross-Reference Display In IEC, it is common to display a representation of

the type of child component (Normally Open,
Normally Closed or Form-C contact) in either a
graphical or table format. If you select the graphical
(nontable) format, you can define details of the
graphical format by clicking Setup.

Styles Tab

Wire Style In IEC, it is sometimes preferable to display wire

connections as tee markers instead of connection
dots. To do this, in the Wire Tee section, select the
appropriate angle tee marker from the list.

Drawing Format Tab

Ladder Defaults In IEC, the most common ladder orientation is Ho-

rizontal. In the Ladder Defaults section, configure
how to display your horizontal ladders.

Format Referencing Defines the type of referencing that is used to re-

place the %N value for component tag and wire
number formats. In IEC the most commonly used
format is X Zones.

Configure projects for various drawing standards | 1247

Drawing Format Tab

NOTE If you want AutoCAD Electrical to place the

labels for the X-Y Grid or X Zones referencing style,
use the appropriate command from the Insert
Ladder toolbar.

■ X-Y Grid: All referencing is tied to an X-Y grid

system of numbers and letters along the left-
hand side and top of the drawing.Set your
drawing's vertical and horizontal index numbers
and letters, spacing, and origin in the X-Y grid
setup dialog box.

TIP Use negative spacing values for Hori-

zontal or Vertical if you want to change
the X-Y grid system's origin to be other
than the upper left-hand corner of the
drawing

■ X Zones: Similar to X-Y Grid, but there isn't a

Y-axis. Set your drawing's horizontal labels,
spacing, and origin on the X Zones setup dialog
box.

TIP Use negative zone spacing value if

you want the zone reference origin to be
at the right side of the drawing.

Scale Scale for IEC drawings is normally set to mm full

size.

Drawing Properties
Drawing Properties are configured by either right-clicking on the drawing
name in the Project Manager and selecting Properties ➤ Drawing Properties,
or by selecting Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. The options configured here
are only applied to the drawing that they were configured on.

1248 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 NOTE Options that are duplicated on the Drawing Properties and Project Properties
dialog boxes are not be described in this section.

Drawing Settings Tab

IEC-Style Designators Defines Installation and Location codes that are

used for drawing defaults when placing compon-
ents on the drawing and no override Installation or
Location values are given on the specific compon-
ent. These values are used when the Combined In-
stallation/Location tag mode option is selected
(described previously in Project Properties section).

Automatically override family tag codes

A component’s family name can be overridden at insertion time, during a

later edit, or automatically using the wd_fam.dat mapping file. The wd-fam.dat
file overrides the family tag code of library symbols by mapping the codes to
new values. The tag code of a symbol is used in generating the tag-ID of
inserted components, such as the “PB” of tag-ID “PB101.”
AutoCAD Electrical searches for this mapping file in the following order:

1 User subdirectory (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application

Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country
code}\Support\User\)

2 Active project's .wdp file subdirectory

3 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options ➤ Files ➤ Support Files

Search Path

Depending on how you want to override component family names, you can
move the wd_fam.dat file into the various locations mentioned above.

■ To always substitute a new family value for all projects you create, place
the file in the User folder. (option 1)

■ To use AutoCAD Electrical defaults most of the time but sometimes override
them with project-specific defaults, place the file in the project folders for
the project you want to override. You can have different defaults for each
project. (option 2)

■ If you want a default override from the AutoCAD Electrical default values,
but sometimes want a project override to the global override, you will want

Configure projects for various drawing standards | 1249

 to use option 3 and 2. Place the file somewhere in the AutoCAD support
path, like “C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Acade 200x\Acade,” and then
when you want to override these values, place the file in the project folder.

Use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical

Autodesk Vault allows you to keep a history of your design changes. You can
review how your designs have progressed and rollback to a previous version
if necessary. Vault also acts as a central shared secured repository of drawings
and data with the ability to search for required information across multiple
drawings and projects.
The AutoCAD Vault add-in works within AutoCAD Electrical, adding data
management tools to the interface. Through the AutoCAD Vault add-in, you
can add files to a vault, and check files in and out. The add-in works with
both DWG and image files. In AutoCAD Electrical, you work on one project
at a time. The project file (.wdp) lists all the .dwgs that are part of a project.
When you make a change in one drawing, all files related to that drawing
automatically update.

Perform vault tasks with the Project Manager

When working with AutoCAD Electrical and Autodesk Vault, you check out
projects or individual drawings from a vault location to edit. You can perform
all vault tasks within the Project Manager when you are logged into the vault.
You can also manage the relationships between a project file and its dependents
in the vault, while standard project management operations continue to be
available.

NOTE Access to vault folders depends upon the permissions you are granted. You
cannot see files or folders that you do not have permissions for viewing.

AutoCAD Vault ARX adds vault features to the Project Manager once logged
into the Vault. The vault commands are available by right-clicking on a project
or drawing within the AutoCAD Electrical Project Manager. You can use the
Project Manager to:

■ Log in and out of the vault

Upon initial start-up of AutoCAD Electrical you are not logged into the
vault. You must log into Autodesk Vault to work with projects in the vault.
You can also log into the vault using the File ➤ Vault menu

■ Check projects in and out of the vault

1250 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 The most basic requirement of the vault is that you never work directly
on a file in the vault. You must check out the project to the working folder
on your local drive to edit it. When you finish working on the project, you
must check the project back into the vault.
When a project file and its related drawing files are checked out of a vault,
only the files that are not currently checked out are downloaded. If the
working copy of a file is older than the version in the vault, you are
prompted to replace the working copy. If the working copy is currently
checked out, it is not replaced.

TIP If you want others to view updates you made to a project and you want
to continue modifying the project, select the Keep Checked Out option on the
Check In dialog box. This checks in the updates you made to the project and
keeps the project checked out to you.

NOTE You must have all references of a project file downloaded to your
working folder to edit the project file.

■ View the status of files in a design

The status icons indicate the status of your local files as compared to the
same files in the vault. You can tell when the local copy is in sync with
the vault and when it is not. The tooltip for each status icon describes the
state of the file and suggests the next logical step. The status of a local file
is updated when it is saved to disk.

NOTE The vault status icons are only available in the list view and only appear
when you are logged into the vault.

Setup for single user vs. multiple users

You can perform vault operations on the entire project or individual drawing
files listed within the project in AutoCAD Electrical. However, in a
multiple-user design environment, you can choose to check out and edit
individual files as they are needed rather than checking out the entire project
at once while still maintaining drawing file dependencies and versions. After
you make changes to the files and check them back into the vault, the
associated files simultaneously update.
Use the Project Manager to perform all vaulting operations. In AutoCAD
Electrical, you can select a file (or multiple files) within a project to:

■ Check in (all)

Use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical | 1251

 ■ Check out (all)

■ Get latest (all)

Workflow overview

1 Start AutoCAD Electrical.

2 Log into Vault.

3 In a single user environment, if you did not set a working folder yet, start
Autodesk Vault Explorer and set a working folder on your local
computerand then switch back to AutoCAD Electrical.
In a multiple-user design environment, set the working folder on a
sharednetwork resource for the entire project team. This allows
simultaneous access for all users on the same dataset and maintains the
data consistency.

4 Open a project you want to add to the vault.

5 Add the opened project to the vault using the Check In or Check In Folder
command.

6 Use the Open from Vault or Check Out command to open and check out
the file from the vault.

7 To work on more files in the project, check out multiple files to the
working folder using the Check Out All command in the Project Manager.

8 When you finish modifying the files, check them back into the vault
using the Check In All command in the Project Manager. All related files
update.

Best practices for vault commands

Below are the suggested workflows for using the most common vault
commands with AutoCAD Electrical.
Open from vault
Use Open from the Vault to access files in the vault for viewing or editing. To
modify a file from the vault, the file must be checked out to you and worked
on from your local drive. You must be logged into the Autodesk Data
Management Server to open and check out a file.

1 In the Project Manager, select Open Project from Vault from the project
selection menu.

1252 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

 2 In the Select file dialog box, navigate to the project definition file, and
then select it. To maintain the relationship between the drawing files
that are defined in the project file, you must check out all files specified
in a project file when opening a project from Vault.

3 Click Open.

Get latest version

Get Latest Version retrieves a read-only copy of the most recent design data
that is checked in. You cannot modify it until you check it out using Autodesk
Vault Explorer or the Vault add-in for AutoCAD-based products.

1 In the Project Manager, select a file.

2 Right-click and select:

■ Get Latest Version to get the most recent version of the selected project
file.

■ Get Latest Version for All to get the most recent version of the selected
project file and all of the related files.

3 In the Get Latest Version dialog box, click OK.

The most recent versions of the selected files are downloaded from the
vault. If the working copy of a file is newer than the most recent version
of the file in the vault, you are prompted to chose either losing changes
made to the current working copy or to not get the latest version of that
file.

4 Click Settings to get the parents and children of the selected file.

Get previous version

Get Previous Version retrieves a past version of a file or a project and places
a read-only copy in your working folder. Historical versions can never be
modified. You can only create a new version of a file.

1 In the Project Manager, right-click a file or project, and then click Get
Previous Version.

2 In the Get Previous Version dialog box, select a version of the file or
project to retrieve.

3 If the file has parents and children to get, click Settings, and then specify
which related files are retrieved as well.

4 Click OK.

Use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical | 1253

 A read-only copy of the file is placed in the local working folder. You can
view the file but you cannot modify it. To modify the file, you must check
it out.

Create a project version

Project versions are controlled by project file (.wdp) versions. The project file
acts as the parent for all drawings in the project and each version of the .wdp
is associated to the latest versions of the drawing at that instance. You can
edit individual drawings of a project and create versions of the drawings as
needed. When you want to take a project snapshot (create a project version),
check out the .wdp and check it back in.
Even if the .wdp is not modified, if any drawings have newer versions, a
newwer version of the .wdp is created, associating all newer drawing versions.

TIP Use Vault Explorer to examine the relationship between versions of the project
file and corresponding drawings.

Roll back to a previous project version

You can roll back to a previous project version using Vault Explorer, restoring
the project file (.wdp) and all associated drawing and project configuration
files to a previous version.

1 Close the project and drawings in AutoCAD Electrical.

2 Using Vault Explorer, examine the .wdp file and corresponding drawing
versions.

3 Select the desired .wdp file.

4 Click Get Previous Version.

Automatically check in drawings

Some operations in AutoCAD Electrical (such as project-wide or reporting

tools) cause Vault to automatically check out all affected drawings. These
drawings can be automatically checked in when modifications are complete.
When asked whether to check the file in, click Yes or Yes to All. If you do not
want to be prompted to check in your drawings since you want the check in
to happen automatically, in the Options dialog box, select Check In dialog
on auto check in.

1254 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

When files are checked in, comments are automatically added to help identify
and distinguish between the versions of the files that are automatically created.
You can modify the comments as desired during check in unless you suppressed
the Check In dialog box.

Shared sandbox guidelines

A shared workspace is a working folder located on a shared server for all users
to access. The shared workspace configuration can be used with:

■ Autodesk Vault Explorer

■ Autodesk Productstream

■ AutoCAD Vault Add-in

■ Microsoft Vault Add-in

You can choose to work in a local or shared working folder according to your
design requirements. A shared working folder is highly recommended for the
AutoCAD Electrical environment, especially in a multi-user situation, because
it enables you and your design team to keep all files up-to-date.
To use a shared workspace, the system administrator should preset a consistent
working folder for all project members to use. Assign the working folder
location to the root level ($) of the vault. A shared working folder cannot be
assigned to a subfolder.

NOTE If Inventor add-in clients will access the same vault, do not enforce a shared
working folder. If Inventor and AutoCAD Electrical are sharing the same vault, the
vault administrator cannot enforce the shared working folder. Each AutoCAD
Electrical user must set the working folder individually to point to a common
network drive.

Rules For Using Shared Working Folders

Using a shared workspace means multiple users may be working on the same
files. All your vault operations are protected as long as you log into the vault
prior to working on the files. The following guidelines will help prevent you
from overwriting the changes made by someone else, and vice versa.

1 Remain logged into the vault at all times. You can use the Vault auto
login option so you are automatically logged into the vault when
AutoCAD Electrical starts.

Use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical | 1255

 2 If a file is currently checked out to another user, you cannot perform the
following operations:
■ Get Latest Version

■ Get Previous Version

■ Check Out

3 You cannot check out a file that is currently opened for read-write by
another user.

4 You can still check out a file that is opened for read-only by another user.

5 You can open a file in read-only when it is currently checked out to

someone else using the same working folder.

6 Ensure the drawings are checked back into the vault after you finish
working on them so they are available to other users who may need to
modify them.

1256 | Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity

AutoCAD Electrical
Command 20
In this chapter
■ AutoCAD Electrical
Commands

1257
AutoCAD Electrical Commands
These topics are usually called from within the command itself. If you do not
find all the information you need, look further in the Help.
3 Phase Wire Numbers (page 491)

Add Attribute (page 431)

Add Connector Pins (page 645)

Add/Edit Internal Jumper (page 397)

Add/Edit Power Source/Load Levels (page 1159)

Add Geometry (page 1149)

Add Rung (page 480)

Add Table to Catalog Database (page 86)

Add Wire Connections (page 1150)

Adjust In-Line Wire/Label Gaps (page 511)

Align (page 332)

Associate Terminals (page 570)

Autodesk Inventor Professional Export (page 1018)

Automatic Report Selection (page 993)

Bend Wire (page 659)

Block Replacement (page 1154)

Break Apart Terminal Associations (page 572)

Cable Markers (page 449)

Change Attribute Justification (page 424)

Change Attribute Layer (page 403)

Change Attribute Size (page 428)

Change/Convert Wire Type (page 157)

Change Cross-Reference to Multiple Line Text (page 414)

1258 | Chapter 20 AutoCAD Electrical Command

Check/Repair Gap Pointers (page 1178)

Check/Trace Wire (page 1178)

Child Location/Description Update (page 416)

Clean Drawing Utility (page 1177)

Component Cross-Reference (page 383)

Conduit Marker (From/To List) (page 1112)

Conduit Marker (Pick) (page 1112)

Conduit Marker Report (page 1118)

Continue Surfer (page 690)

Convert Block to Destination Arrow (page 1132)

Convert Block to Source Arrow (page 1132)

Convert Ladder (page 483)

Convert Text to Attribute Definition (page 1131)

Convert to Schematic Component (page 1129)

Copy/Add Component Override (page 365)

Copy Assembly (page 1065)

Copy Catalog Assignment (page 790)

Copy Circuit (page 385)

Copy Component (page 308)

Copy Footprint (page 1061)

Copy Function-Installation Code (page 1062)

Copy Group Code (page 1062)

Copy Level Assignments (page 1096)

Copy Location Code (page 1062)

Copy Mount Code (page 1062)

Copy Project (page 50)

Copy Terminal Block Properties (page 572)

AutoCAD Electrical Commands | 1259

 Copy Wire Number (page 511)

Copy Wire Number (In-Line) (page 511)

Create/Edit Wire Type (page 152)

Create New Drawing (page 64)

Create New Project (page 48)

Cross-Reference Check (page 340)

Delete Component (page 332)

Delete Connector Pins (page 647)

Delete Wire Gap (page 473)

Delete Wire Numbers (page 521)

Destination Signal Arrow (page 536)

Drawing Audit (page 1182)

Drawing Properties: Components (page 116)

Drawing Properties: Cross-References (page 121)

Drawing Properties: Drawing Format (page 123)

Drawing Properties: Drawing Settings (page 96)

Drawing Properties: Styles (page 114)

Drawing Properties: Wire Numbers (page 493)

ECDS to Electrical Database Builder (page 1134)

ECDS to Electrical Drawing Convert (page 1135)

Edit Component (page 288)

Edit Conduit Marker (page 1112)

Edit Footprint (page 1047)

Edit Jumper (page 573)

Edit Language Database File (page 704)

Edit Selected Attribute (page 401)

Edit Wire Number (page 508)

1260 | Chapter 20 AutoCAD Electrical Command

Edit Wire Sequence (page 533)

Edit User Table Data (page 352)

Electrical Audit (page 1180)

Export to Spreadsheet (page 998)

Fan In/Out Destination (page 549)

Fan In/Out - Single Line Layer (page 550)

Fan In/Out Source (page 549)

Find/Edit/Replace Component Text (page 407)

Find/Replace Terminal Text (page 408)

Find/Replace Wire Numbers (page 501)

Fix Wire Numbers (page 506)

Fix/UnFix Component Tag (page 413)

Flip Wire Gap (page 473)

Flip Wire Number (page 511)

Footprint Database File Editor (page 1084)

Hide Attribute (Single Picks) (page 410)

Hide Attribute (Window/Multiple) (page 410)

Hide/Unhide Cross-Referencing (page 361)

Hide Wire Numbers (page 521)

Icon Menu Wizard (page 734)

IEC Tag Mode - Update (page 89)

In-Line Wire Labels (page 467)

Insert 22.5 Degree Wire (page 437)

Insert 45 Degree Wire (page 437)

Insert 67.5 Degree Wire (page 437)

Insert Balloon (page 1089)

Insert Component (page 284)

AutoCAD Electrical Commands | 1261

 Insert Component (Catalog List) (page 312)

Insert Component (Equipment List) (page 318)

Insert Component (Panel List) (page 325)

Insert Connector (page 650)

Insert Connector from List (page 678)

Insert Angled Tee Markers (page 531)

Insert Dot Tee Markers (page 531)

Insert/Edit Boundary Box Assignment (page 1103)

Insert/Edit Panel Level Assignment (for components) (page 1104)

Insert/Edit Panel Level Assignment (for terminal strips) (page 1099)

Insert Footprint (Catalog List) (page 1055)

Insert Footprint (Equipment List) (page 1057)

Insert Footprint (Icon Menu) (page 1036)

Insert Footprint (Manual) (page 1045)

Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu) (page 1058)

Insert Footprint (Schematic List) (page 1044)

Insert Hydraulic Component (page 1167)

Insert Ladder (page 478)

Insert Panel Assembly (page 1065)

Insert P&ID Component (page 1172)

Insert PLC (Full Units) (page 221)

Insert PLC (Parametric) (page 219)

Insert Pneumatic Component (page 1161)

Insert Reference Arrow - From (page 344)

Insert Reference Arrow - To (page 344)

Insert Saved Circuit (page 395)

Insert Splice (page 685)

1262 | Chapter 20 AutoCAD Electrical Command

Insert Stand Alone Cross-Reference (page 359)

Insert Terminal (Manual) (page 1045)

Insert Terminal (Panel List) (page 325)

Insert Terminal (Schematic List) (page 1056)

Insert Terminal Strip Representation (page 1098)

Insert WBlocked Circuit (page 395)

Insert Wire (page 437)

Insert Wire Gap (page 473)

Insert Wire Numbers (page 488)

Language Conversion (page 703)

Link Catalog Number (Panel) (page 1147)

Link Catalog Number (Schematic) (page 1144)

Link Components with Dashed Lines (page 361)

Link Description (Panel) (page 1147)

Link Description (Schematic) (page 1144)

Link Item Number (Panel) (page 1147)

Link Installation Code (Panel) (page 1147)

Link Installation Code (Schematic) (page 1144)

Link Location Code (Panel) (page 1147)

Link Location Code (Schematic) (page 1144)

Link Manufacturer (Panel) (page 1147)

Link Manufacturer (Schematic) (page 1144)

Link PLC Address Description (Schematic) (page 1144)

Link Rating (Panel) (page 1147)

Link Rating (Schematic) (page 1144)

Link Split Tag (Panel) (page 1147)

Link Split Tag (Schematic) (page 1144)

AutoCAD Electrical Commands | 1263

 Link Terminal Number (Schematic) (page 1144)

Link User (Panel) (page 1147)

Link User (Schematic) (page 1144)

List Signal Code (page 342)

Location Box (page 422)

Location Symbols (page 420)

Make Xdata Visible (page 1030)

Map Attributes from Old to New (page 1129)

Mark/Verify Drawings (page 702)

Mark Component to Pass Power (page 1160)

Merge Utility (page 783)

Missing Level/Sequence Assignments (page 932)

Modify Symbol Library (page 430)

Move Circuit (page 385)

Move Component (page 332)

Move Connector Pins (page 649)

Move/Show Attribute (page 410)

Move Wire Number (page 511)

Multiple Cable Markers (page 461)

Multiple Insert (Icon Menu) (page 284)

Multiple Wire Bus (page 436)

Panel Bill of Materials Report (page 927)

Panel Component Report (page 930)

Panel Component Exception Report (page 929)

Panel Configuration (page 1024)

Panel Nameplate Report (page 934)

Panel Terminal Exception Report (page 935)

1264 | Chapter 20 AutoCAD Electrical Command

Panel Terminal Strip Report (page 1107)

Panel Terminal Strip Swap Wire Text (page 1095)

Panel Wire Connection Report (page 936)

Pin List Database Editor (page 796)

PLC Database File Editor (page 232)

PLC I/O Wire Numbers (page 525)

Power Load Check Report (page 1160)

Project Manager (page 38)

Project Properties: Components (page 102)

Project Properties: Cross-References (page 109)

Project Properties: Drawing Format (page 112)

Project Properties: Drawing Settings (page 99)

Project Properties: Styles (page 111)

Project Properties: Wire Numbers (page 105)

Project-Wide Utilities (page 509)

Project-Wide Update/Retag (page 697)

Promis.e Conversion (page 1125)

Publish to Web (page 706)

Push Description Down (page 409)

Push Description Up (page 409)

Rebuild/Freshen Project Database (page 90)

Remove Component Override (page 366)

Remove Level/Sequencing Assignment (page 1093)

Rename Schematic Layers (page 148)

Rename Panel Layers (page 148)

Renumber Ladder Reference (page 697)

Report Format File Setup - Missing Level/Sequence Assignments (page 948)

AutoCAD Electrical Commands | 1265

 Report Format File Setup - Panel Bill of Material (page 941)

Report Format File Setup - Panel Component (page 945)

Report Format File Setup - Panel Component Exception (page 943)

Report Format File Setup - Panel Nameplate (page 951)

Report Format File Setup - Panel Terminal Exception (page 953)

Report Format File Setup - Panel Wire Connection (page 955)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic AIP Wire List (page 957)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Bill of Material (page 958)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Cable From/To (page 961)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Cable Summary (page 962)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Component (page 975)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Component Wire List (page 967)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Connector Details (page 969)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Connector Plug (page 971)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Connector Summary (page 973)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Missing Bill of Material (page 977)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC/IO Address and Descriptions

(page 980)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC I/O Component Connection

(page 965)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC Modules Used So Far (page 987)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Terminal Numbers (page 982)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Terminal Plan (page 984)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Wire From/To (page 979)

Report Format File Setup - Schematic Wire Label (page 989)

Report Format File Setup - Wire Annotation Exception (page 949)

Resequence Item Numbers (page 1090)

Retag Components (page 413)

1266 | Chapter 20 AutoCAD Electrical Command

Reverse Connector (page 642)

Reverse/Flip Component (page 339)

Revise Ladder (page 483)

Rotate Attribute (page 410)

Rotate Connector (page 640)

RSLogix 500 Export to Spreadsheet (page 268)

Save Circuit to Icon Menu (page 393)

Schematic Bill of Material Report (page 902)

Schematic Cable From/to Report (page 905)

Schematic Cable summary Report (page 904)

Schematic Component Report (page 912)

Schematic Component Wire List Report (page 907)

Schematic Connector Details Report (page 908)

Schematic Connector Plug Report (page 909)

Schematic Connector Summary Report (page 911)

Schematic Database File Editor (page 349)

Schematic Missing Bill of Material Report (page 913)

Schematic PLC I/O Address and Descriptions Report (page 915)

Schematic PLC I/O Component Connection Report (page 905)

Schematic PLC Modules Used So Far Report (page 919)

Schematic Terminal Numbers Report (page 916)

Schematic Terminal Plan Report (page 918)

Schematic Wire From/To Report (page 914)

Schematic Wire Label Report (page 920)

Scoot (page 332)

Set Wire Type (page 158)

Settings Compare (page 130)

AutoCAD Electrical Commands | 1267

 Show Footprint Sequencing Assignments (page 1094)

Show Links (page 1150)

Show Missing Catalog Assignments (page 793)

Show Terminal Strip Sequencing Assignments (page 1094)

Show Wire Sequence (page 528)

Show Wires (page 486)

Signal Error/List Report (page 541)

Source Signal Arrow (page 537)

Special Explode (page 1141)

Split PLC Module (page 335)

Split Connector (page 335)

Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility (page 259)

Squeeze Attribute/Text (page 425)

Stretch Attribute/Text (page 425)

Stretch Connector (page 643)

Stretch PLC Module (page 332)

Stretch Wire (page 439)

Surfer (page 690)

Swap/Update Block (page 212)

Swap Connector Pins (page 648)

Swap Wire Number (page 511)

Symbol Builder (page 202)

Tag Child (page 1141)

Tag Child - Form C (page 1141)

Tag Child - N.C. (page 1141)

Tag Child - N.O. (page 1141)

Tag Nameplate (page 1146)

1268 | Chapter 20 AutoCAD Electrical Command

Tag Panel Component (page 1146)

Tag Panel Terminal - Terminal Number (page 1146)

Tag Panel Terminal - Wire Number (page 1146)

Tag PLC (page 1141)

Tag Schematic Component (page 1141)

Tag Schematic Terminal - Terminal Number (page 1141)

Tag Schematic Terminal - Wire Number (page 1141)

Tag Schematic Terminal - Wire Number Change (page 1141)

Terminal: Erase Internal/External Connections (page 579)

Terminal: Mark External Connections (page 579)

Terminal: Mark Internal Connections (page 579)

Terminal: Show Internal/External Connections (page 579)

Terminal List (From File) (page 582)

Terminal List (Manual Picks) (page 582)

Terminal Properties Database Editor (page 631)

Terminal Renumber (Pick Mode) (page 578)

Terminal Renumber (Project-Wide) (page 578)

Terminal Strip Editor (page 588)

Terminal Strip Table Generator (page 624)

Title Block Setup (page 715)

Toggle Angled Tee Markers (page 532)

Toggle NO/NC (page 340)

Toggle Wire Number In-Line (page 492)

Trim Wire (page 439)

Unlink (page 1151)

Update from Project Scratch Database (page 86)

Update from Spreadsheet (page 1004)

AutoCAD Electrical Commands | 1269

 Update Signal References (page 360)

Update Stand-Alone Cross-Reference (page 360)

Update Symbol Library WD_M Block (page 142)

Update to New WD_M Block, No Changes (page 141)

Update to New WD_M Block, Values, Layers (page 141)

Update to New WD_PNLM Block, No Changes (page 141)

Update to New WD_PNLM Block, Values, Layers (page 141)

Unhide Attribute (Window/Multiple) (page 410)

Unhide Wire Numbers (page 521)

Unity Pro Export (page 281)

Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet (page 275)

User Defined Attribute List (page 1006)

View/Edit Component Sequence (page 1095)

Wire Annotation Exception Report (page 933)

Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint (page 1077)

Wire Arrows for Reference Only (page 284)

Wire Color/Gauge Labels (page 442)

Wire/Conduit Routing Report (page 1120)

Wire Number Leader (page 511)

Xdata Editor (page 1184)

X-Y Grid Setup (page 523)

X Zones Setup (page 522)

Zip Project (page 83)

1270 | Chapter 20 AutoCAD Electrical Command

Index
_PINLIST database table 800 terminals 568
.rgf files 991 attributes 134, 172, 177, 192, 196–197,
.set files 938 199, 201, 302, 337, 400, 403,
.wda files 1005 409–410, 416, 418, 424–425, 431,
.wdn files 1176 708, 1005, 1061, 1064, 1128,
.wdp files 29, 77 1131, 1137, 1151
.wdw files 1116 add 431
.ww1 files 1116 annotate from external 302
.xhw files 270 blocks 431
.xsy files 270, 280 child components 177
child update 416
3 Phase Wire Numbering dialog box 491 connector parametric build 177
3-phase bus 435, 660 copy 196
copy codes 1061
COPYTAG 196
A edit 400, 403
explode 1137
ace_plc.mdb 225 for schematics (all) 177
Add Attribute dialog box 432 force to layers 403
add catalog record 766 hide 410
Add Catalog Record dialog box 775 hydraulic symbols 192
Add Existing Circuit dialog box 744 in-line wire labels 177
Add Footprint Record dialog box 1086 insert missing 201
Add Icon - Command dialog box 739 justification 424
Add Icon - Component dialog box 736 layers 403
Add New Table to MDB dialog box 86 link 1137
Add Record dialog box 314 location 418
Add Spare Wires dialog box 1116 map 1128
Alert dialog box 142 mapping 1151
alternate environment settings 160 mapping list 1005
angled tee markers 530 miscellaneous 197
angled wires 437 missing 134
annotate from external file 302 move 403, 410
arrow styles 536 non-AutoCAD Electrical 197
assemblies 1064 P&ID symbols 192
Assign Wire Numbering Formats by Wire parent 416
Layers dialog box 504 parent components 177
associate terminals 585 plc i/o symbols 177
Associate Terminals dialog box 618 predefine 199
associations 568, 585 push 409
add 568, 585 ratings 337
modify 568, 585 rotate 410

1271 | Index
 show 410 setup 1087
sizes 425 Batch Plotting Options and Order dialog
splices 177 box 695
split tag names 172 Bill of Material Data Fields to Report dialog
styles 425 box 848
tag 1137 bill of materials 298, 300, 790–793, 902,
TAG1 196 913, 1051, 1053
TAG2 196 copy 790
template drawings 1064 list 300, 792, 1053
terminal block footprint missing 793
symbols 192 missing report 913
terminal symbols 177 multiple 298, 791, 1051
text conversion 1131 schematic report 902
title block 708 block 431
use template drawings 1064 values 431
user-defined 1005 block mapping 1151
WD_M block 134 block properties 568
wire connections 177 copy 568
wire signal symbols 177 block replacement 1151
audit 1176 Block Replacement dialog box 1154
drawings 1176 blocks 209, 330, 431, 568, 1128, 1149
project 1176 add geometry 1149
AutoCAD Electrical Publish to Web - attributes 431
Banner, Title Text, Options dialog convert 1128
box 707 properties 568
Autodesk Inventor Professional 662, split 330
667, 673, 678, 1008 update 209
import 662, 667, 678 boundary box sequence 1103
report setup 1008
spreadsheet structure 673
wire list output 1008
C
Autodesk Inventor Professional Export cable conductor database 542
dialog box 1018 Cable From/To Data Fields to Report dialog
Autodesk Inventor Professional Wire List box 853
Data Fields to Report dialog cable from/to report 905
box 843 Cable Insert/Edit Data Fields to Display
Autodesk Vault 50 dialog box 821
automatic fill 414 Cable Insert/Edit dialog box 462
automatic report selection 991 Cable Label Data Fields to Report dialog
Automatic Report Selection dialog box 858
box 994 cable markers 443, 466, 542
child 443
B database 542
edit 443
balloons 1087 extract 443
insert 1087 insert 443

1272 | Index
 multiple 443 circuits 384, 1214
parent 443 add custom - advanced 1214
report 443 copy 384
shields 466 insert 384
Cable Summary Data Fields to Report move 384
dialog box 851 save 384
cable summary report 904 save icons 384
catalog database table 777, 788 scale 384
catalog lists 312 clean drawings 1176
Catalog Lookup dialog box 101 client subdirectories 83
Catalog Values dialog box 788 client-specific libraries 83
catalogs 86, 101, 629, 766, 777, 781, codes 1061
785, 788, 790, 793 command trace mode 1176
add tables 86 Commands 1258
assignments 785 Compare Drawing and Project Settings
check 785 dialog box 130
copy 790 compare settings 129
database structure 777 Component Annotation dialog box 1129
expand catalog tables 766 Component Annotation from External File
information 766 dialog box 302
LISTBOX_DEF 788 Component Cross-Reference dialog
lookup file 101 box 383
merge database files 781 Component Data Export dialog box 999
merge utility 781 Component Data Fields to Report dialog
missing assignments 793 box 872
modify 785 component exception report 943
modify data 766 component overrides 362
project-specific 785 remove 362
records 766 Component Reference Listing dialog
tables 766 box 341
terminal properties database 629 component report 912
values 785 component tables 766
Change Attribute Size dialog box 428 component tags 411
Change Attribute/Text Justification dialog fix 411
box 424 Component Type 203, 207
change spreadsheet data 996 Panel Footprint, Terminal, or
Change/Convert Wire Type dialog Nameplate dialog box 207
box 157 Schematic Parent, Stand-Alone, or
check contacts 1176 Child dialog box 203
child attributes 196 Component Wire List Data Fields to Report
child components 308 dialog box 863
Child Contact and Panel Update from component wire list report 907
Schematic Parent dialog component wiring list 1077
box 416 components 96, 209, 284, 302, 308,
Circuit Scale dialog box 395 312–313, 316, 323, 330, 338,
340, 349, 355, 389, 396, 400,

1273 | Index
 409, 413–414, 418, 446, 468, report setup 975
698, 967, 975, 1055, 1061, 1067, retag 413, 698
1093, 1104, 1128, 1137, 1161, reverse 338
1166–1167, 1171–1172, 1176 schematic symbols 284, 355, 389,
align 330 446, 468, 1161, 1167, 1172
annotate from external file 302 sequence 1104
annotations 1128 split 330
attributes 400 stretch 330
block update 209 swap 340
check 340, 1176 tag 1137
child 308 tags 284
copy 308 wire list report 967
copy codes 1061 Conduit Marker Data Fields to Display
copy group 1061 dialog box 817
copy installation 1061 Conduit Marker Report dialog box 1118
copy location 1061 Conduit Marker Setup dialog box 1115
copy mount 1061 conduit markers 1110, 1116, 1118, 1120
descriptions 409 add spares 1110
drawing properties 96 block 1110
duplicate 1176 edit 1110
edit 284 insert 1110
edit child 308 report 1118, 1120
edit lookup file 349 setup 1110
equipment list 316 spare wires 1110
erase 330 support files 1116
fence 308 conduit routing report 1120
flip 338 conduit sequence report 1120
hydraulic 1166 configuration 126
insert 284, 308, 323 connection codes 579
insert by catalog 313, 1055 erase 579
insert from catalog lists 312 connection sequencing 525
insert from panels 323 Connector Details Data Fields to Report
insert multiple 1067 dialog box 865
insert panel 323 connector details report 908
jumpers 396 Connector Layout dialog box 656
link 1137 connector list file 667, 678
location 418 Connector Pin Numbers in Use dialog
location code 414 box 658
lookup file 316 Connector Plug Data Fields to Report
manipulate 330 dialog box 868
move 330 connector plug report 909
P&ID 1171 Connector Selection dialog box 667, 678
pin numbers in use 284 Connector Summary Data Fields to Report
project properties 96 dialog box 870
reference listing 340 connector summary report 911
remove sequencing 1093

1274 | Index
connectors 330, 554, 559, 636, 667, Copy Active Drawing Settings To dialog
673, 678, 685 box 142
add pins 636 copy codes 1061
delete pins 636 copy drawing settings 134
edit pins 636 Copy Installation\Location ount\Group
generate 636 to Components dialog
import 667, 678 box 1063
import file structure 673 Copy Level Assignments dialog
insert 636 box 1096
layout 636 Copy Project 50
move pins 636 Step 1 - Select Existing Project to Copy
pin layout 636 dialog box 50
reverse 636 COPYTAG 196
rotate 636 Create New Circuit dialog box 741
sequencing 554, 559 Create New Drawing dialog box 64
splices 685 Create New Project dialog box 49
split 330, 636 Create New Submenu dialog box 746
stretch 636 Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box 152
swap pins 636 Cross-Reference Component Override
contact states 340 dialog box 365
contact types 800 cross-reference reports 383
contacts 308 cross-reference setup 362, 368, 372, 374,
conversion tools 1124, 1128, 1131– 380
1133, 1137, 1151 graphical 368
add geometry 1137 table 374, 380
add wire connections 1137 table examples 372
AutoCAD Electrical schematic 1128 text 362
block replacement 1151 cross-reference symbols 353
convert VIA 6.0 drawings 1133 Cross-Reference Table Data Fields to
explode blocks 1137 Display dialog box 894
link 1137 cross-reference tables 377
map attributes 1128, 1151 update 377
promis.e 1124 cross-references 96, 340, 353, 361–362,
show links 1137 368, 372, 374, 377, 380, 383,
tag 1137 414, 416
unlink 1137 check 340
convert lines 150, 156 child update 416
Convert promis.e Project dialog components 383
box 1126 destination symbol 353
convert text 703, 1137 drawing properties 96
Convert Text to Attribute Definition dialog graphical formats 368
box 1131 hide 361
Convert VIA ECDS or Jr. Project to multi-line text 414
AutoCAD Electrical dialog override 362
box 1135 project properties 96
remove override 362

1275 | Index
 settings 362 show 543
source symbol 353 Din Rail dialog box 348
table formats 372 din rails 344
table setup 374, 380 display configurations 68
table updates 377 dot tee markers 530
text setup 362 Drawing Audit dialog box 1183
unhide 361 drawing files 34, 38, 52, 63, 68, 82, 91–
visibility 361 92, 96, 129, 624, 700, 708, 1124,
cross-referencing 1188 1176
advanced 1188 archive 82
changes 91, 700
clean 1176
D convert 1124
dashed lines 344, 361 create 38, 52, 63
with arrows 344 display configuration 68
dat files 1214 drawing properties 96
data export 1008 group 34
data fields 812, 921 open 38, 52
location from/to 921 preview 34
Data Fields to Display dialog box 896 process 91
data import 662 properties 96
database files 90, 781 remove 34
merge 781 reorder 34
rebuild 90 select 91
debug 1176 title blocks 708
default panel settings 134 unavailable 92
default schematic settings 134 update 91
default_cat.mdb 766 update settings 129
default_wdtitle.wdl 70, 83 Drawing List Data Fields to Display dialog
default.grp 70 box 819
default.inst 70 Drawing List Display Configuration dialog
default.loc 70 box 69
default.mnt 70 Drawing Properties 114, 117, 119, 121–
default.wdt 83 122, 124, 132, 494, 517, 540
define format file setup 940 Components tab dialog box 117
Define Layers dialog box 145 Cross-References tab dialog box 121
descriptions 409, 708 Drawing Format tab dialog box 124
move 409 Drawing Settings tab dialog
multiple 708 box 114, 132
Descriptions dialog box 303 Styles tab dialog box 122, 540
destination arrows 1132 Wire Numbers tab dialog box 119,
convert 1132 494, 517
destination codes 536 drawing setup 96, 131
destination markers 536, 543, 1197 drawing standards 1243
advanced 1197 advanced 1243
insert 536 drawing template 131

1276 | Index
duplicate numbers 1176 plc i/o header data 999
duplicate tags 1176 plc i/o wire connections data 999
spreadsheet data 999
terminals data 999
E export I/O 267
ECDS to AutoCAD Electrical 1133 Export to Spreadsheet dialog box 999
Edit Attribute dialog box 401
Edit Catalog Record dialog box 775 F
Edit dialog box 350, 632, 796
Edit Entry dialog box 555 family overrides 302
Edit Footprint Record dialog box 1086 fan in/out 543
edit IEC components 294 Fan-In/Fan-Out Signal Destination dialog
edit IEC pins 294 box 549
Edit Language Lookup File dialog Fan-In/Fan-Out Signal Source dialog
box 704 box 549
Edit Miscellaneous and Non-AutoCAD Fan-In/Out Single Line Layer dialog
Electrical Attributes dialog box 550
box 198 fan-in/out styles 548
Edit Multi-Connection Sequence Terminal file formats 77
Symbol dialog box 555 Files Unavailable for Processing dialog
Edit PLC I/O Point dialog box 249 box 92
Edit PLC Module dialog box 221 Find or Replace Wire Numbers dialog
Edit Record dialog box 314, 351, 633, box 501
798 Find/Edit/Replace (drawing or project)
Edit Report dialog box 88 dialog box 406
edit schematic reports 811 Find/Edit/Replace Component Text dialog
edit spreadsheet reports 811 box 407
Edit Terminal dialog box 611 Find/Replace Terminal Text dialog
Edit Terminal Jumpers dialog box 576 box 408
Edit User Table Data dialog box 352 fix component tags 411
Edit Wire Connection Sequence dialog Fixed/Unfix Component Tag dialog
box 533 box 413
Electrical Audit dialog box 1180 Footprint dialog box 1045
Electrical Database Builder 1133 footprint lists 323
equipment list 316, 320, 1053, 1057 Footprint Lookup dialog box 1085
insert from 316 footprint lookup file 313, 1055
settings 320, 1057 footprint_lookup.mdb 1081
error checking 1176 footprints 143, 313, 344, 781, 785,
exception reports 383 1026, 1028, 1031, 1036, 1055,
explode blocks 1141 1061, 1064, 1067, 1077, 1081,
export 999 1087, 1093, 1128
component data 999 assign item number 1087
general data 999 attributes 1028
panel components data 999 balloons 1087
panel terminals data 999 component annotations 1128
plc i/o descriptions data 999 component values 785

1277 | Index
 copy 1061 missing level/sequence
copy assembly 1064 assignments 938
din rails 344 nameplate 938
edit 1031 PLC I/O address and
equipment list 1031 descriptions 938
insert 1031 PLC I/O component connection 938
insert assembly 1064 PLC modules used so far 938
insert by catalog 313, 1055 terminal exception 938
insert component 1031 terminal numbers 938
insert from list 1031 terminal plan 938
insert multiple 1067 wire annotation exception 938
layers 143 wire connection 938
lookup database editor 1081 wire from/to 938
lookup file 313, 1026, 1055, 1081 wire labels 938
manual insertion 1031 format reports 812
mapping 1026
merge 781
panel layout symbols 1036
G
project-wide 1067 General Data Export dialog box 1000
select component data from graphical cross-reference 368
spreadsheets 1067 Graphical Cross-Reference Format Setup
selection 1031 dialog box 370
sequencing 1093 graphical terminal strips 585
vendor menus 1031
vendor selection 1031
wire information 1077 H
Force Attribute/Text to a Different Layer
dialog box 403 help 24
Format 1075 hydraulic attributes 192
Schematic Layout Wire Connection
Annotation dialog I
box 1075
format description text 305 I/O points 246
format file setup 938 icon menu files 759
AIP wire list 938 icon menu wizard 730, 1214
bill of materials 938 advanced 1214
cable from/to 938 Icon Menu Wizard dialog box 734
cable summary 938 icon menus 730, 759–760, 1031, 1214
component 938 add circuit 730
component exception 938 add command 730
component wire list 938 add component icon 730
connector details 938 add new icon 730
connector plug 938 advanced 1214
connector summary 938 alternate files 759
missing bill of materials 938 create circuit 730
customize 730

1278 | Index
 file format 760 invisible data 1184
modifying 760
panel layout 1031
properties 730
J
IEC component tag modes 89 jr. project to AutoCAD Electrical 1133
IEC Tag Mode Update dialog box 89 jumper terminals 573
import data 662 jumpers 573
import spreadsheet data 1004 edit 573
in-line markers 467 select 573
in-line wires 492
information lines 708
input file format 320, 1057 L
Insert Accessory dialog box 616
Insert Component dialog box 284, 355, ladders 253, 475, 480–482
389, 446, 468, 1161, 1167, 1172 change rung spacing 482
Insert Connector dialog box 650 change size 480
Insert Destination Code dialog box 536 configure 253
Insert dialog box 322 defaults 475
Insert Footprint dialog box 1036 from spreadsheet 253
Insert Ladder dialog box 478 insert 475
Insert Panel Wiring Diagram Terminal insert rungs 482
Strip Representation dialog line reference numbers 482
box 1098 move 481
Insert Spare Terminal dialog box 614 references 253
Insert Wire Color/Gauge Labels dialog renumber 480
box 442 reposition 481
Insert/Edit Cable Marker (2nd+ wire of Language Conversion dialog box 704
cable) dialog box 458, 460 language tables 304, 703
Insert/Edit Cable Marker (Parent Wire) review 304
dialog box 450, 454 language translation 304, 703
Insert/Edit Child Component dialog view 304
box 309, 311 lastproj.fil 29
Insert/Edit Component dialog box 288, layers 143, 150
294 add wire 150
Insert/Edit Conduit/Wire Way Label dialog create wire 150
box 1112 manage 143
Insert/Edit Panel Level panel components 143
Assignment 1099, 1104 panel rename 143
Component dialog box 1104 rename 143
Terminal Strip dialog box 1099 schematic rename 143
Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog setup 143
box 560 leaders 512
insert/edit terminals 559 Level Code Edit 1103
installation codes 618 Boundary Box dialog box 1103
internal jumpers 396 level codes 1096
define 396 copy 1096

1279 | Index
level sequencing 1096, 1099, 1103–1104 merge utility 781
copy 1096 Merge Utility dialog box 783
Library Swap -- All Drawing dialog miscellaneous attributes 197
box 214 Missing Bill of Material Data Fields to
library symbols 83, 162–163, 173–174, Report dialog box 874
197, 199, 201, 429 missing bill of materials report 913, 977
change 429 setup 977
client-specific 83 missing catalog assignments 793
convert existing 201 missing level/sequence assignments 948
create 199, 201 missing level/sequence assignments
default location 173 report 932
hydraulic 174 Modify Line Reference Numbers dialog
manage 197 box 483
modify 197 Modify/Fix/Unfix dialog box 508
multiple 173 Module Box Dimensions dialog box 237
naming 162–163 Module Layout dialog box 220
P&ID 174 Module Specifications dialog box 244
substitute 197 MTEXT 1077
text sizes 429 multi-connection terminals 554
link information 718 multi-level terminals 568
link symbols 1151 multi-line text 414
linking tools 1137 multi-stack terminals 568
links 344, 361 multi-tier terminals 568
dashed 361 Multiple Bill of Material Information
LISTBOX_DEF 788 dialog box 298, 791, 1051
load value 1158 multiple bill of materials 298, 791, 1051
Location Box dialog box 422 multiple bill of materials lists 300, 792,
location boxes 422 1053
insert 422 Multiple Cable Markers dialog box 461
location codes 414, 617 Multiple Catalog Part Number
insert 414 Assignments dialog box 300,
location marks 418 792, 1053
location symbols 418 multiple clients 83
add to menu 418 multiple libraries 173
Location Symbols dialog box 420 Multiple Wire Bus dialog box 436
lookup 316
N
M
nameplates 934, 1091
map AutoLISP values 724 create 1091
mapping files 83 generic 1091
Mark and Verify dialog box 702 insert 1091
mark changes 700 report 934
marker extract 443 New Module dialog box 239
merge databases 781 next 693
merge panel symbols 781 non-AutoCAD Electrical attributes 197

1280 | Index
numbers 1087 panel layout 1022, 1026
assign item 1087 drawings 1022, 1026
assign to footprints 1087 toolbar 1022
detail 1087 tools 1022
item number 1087 Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit
resequence item 1087 dialog box 1047
Panel Layout - Terminal Insert/Edit dialog
box 1039
O Panel Layout Data Export dialog
open drawings 693 box 1002
Option 302 Panel Layout List - Schematic Components
Tag Format "Family" Override dialog Insert dialog box 325
box 302 panel layout symbols 1036
Optional ENV File Assignment for Current panel layouts 1064
Project dialog box 160 templates 1064
override tags 302 panel linking 1147
Panel Missing Level/Seqeuence
Assignments Data Fields to Report
P dialog box 833
Panel Nameplate Data Fields to Report
P&ID attributes 192 dialog box 837
Panel Balloon Setup dialog box 1089 panel nameplate report 934
Panel Bill of Material Data Fields to Report panel reports 804, 923, 991
dialog box 826 about 804
panel bill of materials report 927 automatic generation 991
Panel Component Data Fields to Report bill of materials 923
dialog box 830 component 923
Panel Component Exception Data Fields component exception 923
to Report dialog box 828 generate 923
panel component exception report 929 missing level/sequence
Panel Component Layers dialog box 149 assignments 923
panel component list 322–323 nameplate 923
insert from 322 terminal exception 923
panel component report 930 wire annotation exception 923
Panel Components dialog box 326 wire connection 923
Panel Drawing Configuration and Defaults Panel Reports dialog box 923
dialog box 1024 Panel Symbol Builder dialog box 208
Panel Equipment In dialog box 1053 Panel Tag List dialog box 302
panel footprint database editor 1081 panel tagging 1146
Panel Footprint dialog box 313, 1055 Panel Terminal Exception Data Fields to
Panel Footprint Lookup Database File Report dialog box 839
Editor dialog box 1084 panel terminal exception report 935
panel footprints 1024 panel terminal list 322–323
setup 1024 insert from 322
panel footprints (see footprints) 1031 Panel Terminal List - Schematic Terminals
panel layers 143 Insert dialog box 325
rename 143

1281 | Index
Panel Terminal Strip Graphical Report annotate modules 221
Parameters dialog box 1107 annotate points 246
panel terminal strip report build symbols 225
parameters 1107 change settings 253
panel terminals 1056, 1069 copy 225
Panel Terminals Data Export dialog copy modules 225
box 1003 database file 225
Panel Terminals dialog box 329 database file editor 225
Panel Wire Annotation Exception Data database format 253
Fields to Report dialog box 834 edit database 225
Panel Wire Connection Data Fields to edit modules 221
Report dialog box 841 generate I/O drawings 253
panel wire connection report 937 generate modules 218
panel wiring diagram 1077 graphics style 225
parameters 126 I/O points 246
parent attributes 196 insert 218, 221
parts catalog 772 insert I/O symbol 246
Parts Catalog dialog box 772 insert spaces 218
parts lookup 772 insert symbol 246
pass power 1158 ladder configuration settings 253
physical representation block ladder references 253
symbols 1026 layout modules 218
Pick List for Panel Terminal Strip merge databases 781
Report/Graphical Report dialog modify modules 225
box 1107 modify symbols 246
pin list database 795–796, 798 modify terminals 225
edit 795, 798 module dimensions 225
pin list table 795 module layout 218
create 795 module prompts 225
pin lists 793, 795–796, 798, 800, 1190 parametric build 218
advanced 1190 report 905
assignments 800 report format files 965
create table 795 RSLogix export 267
edit 796 save settings 253
edit record 798 selecting styles 218
type 4 800 selection 225
pin numbers 306 spreadsheet format 253
pin numbers in use 636 stand-alone I/O points 246
Pin Numbers in Use dialog box 306 stand-alone points 246
PINLIST_TYPE 800 stand-alone symbols 246
pins 284 styles 251
edit 284 symbol placement 225
piping & instrumentation symbols 1171 update symbols 225
PLC 218, 221, 225, 246, 251, 253, 267, wire numbers 525
525, 781, 905, 965 PLC Component Connection Data Fields
add modules 225 to Report dialog box 859

1282 | Index
PLC database file editor 225, 1205 Project Database Table Data - Project
advanced 1205 Drawing Files Update dialog
PLC Database File Editor dialog box 233 box 86
PLC I/O Address and Descriptions Data project manager 38, 52
Fields to Report dialog box 881 Project Manager dialog box 38, 52
PLC I/O address and descriptions Project Properties 99, 102, 106, 110–
report 915 112, 496, 539
PLC I/O Address/Description Export dialog Components tab dialog box 102
box 1002 Cross-References tab dialog box 110
PLC I/O component connection Drawing Format tab dialog box 112
report 905 Project Settings dialog box 99
PLC I/O Connection Export dialog Styles tab dialog box 111, 539
box 1001 Wire Numbers tab dialog box 106,
PLC I/O Header Information Export dialog 496
box 1000 project related files 70
PLC I/O Wire Numbers dialog box 525 .wdn 70
PLC Modules Used So Far Data Fields to catalog lookup 70
Report dialog box 886 description defaults 70
PLC modules used so far report 919 external component 70
PLC Parametric Selection dialog box 219 family code map 70
PLC Selection dialog box 236 footprint lookup 70
plot 694 installation codes 70
pneumatic tools 1161 location codes 70
point-to-point tools 636 project labels 70
add pins 636 ratings defaults 70
delete pins 636 RSLogix import 70
edit pin numbers 636 Spreadsheet to PLC 70
insert connectors 636 title block 70
move pins 636 wire color and gauge labels 70
reverse connector 636 Project Zip dialog box 83
rotate connector 636 Project-wide Schematic Terminal
split connectors 636 Renumber dialog box 578
stretch connector 636 Project-wide Update or Retag dialog
swap pins 636 box 698
position tags 172 project-wide utilities 509
potential assignment 1158 Project-wide Utilities dialog box 509
power check 1158 projects 29, 50, 70, 77, 82–83, 86, 90–
power check report 1160 91, 96, 129, 160, 509, 697, 705,
power flag 1158 1243, 1250
power source 1158 add drawings to a project 29
overview 1158 alternate environment settings 160
report 1158 archive 82
Power Source/Load Report dialog collaborate 50
box 1160 configure - advanced 1243
previous 693 copy 29
create 29

1283 | Index
 database file 90 wire numbers 96, 492
database table data 86 x zones 523
descriptions 29 x-y grid 524
file formats 77 Properties - Circuit dialog box 755
files 29 Properties - Command dialog box 752
group drawings 29 Properties - Component dialog box 750
manager 29 Properties - Main Menu dialog box 749
multiple clients 83 Properties - Submenu dialog box 757
open 29 Publish to Web - Temporary Folder for
preview 29 Build dialog box 707
properties 96
recent 29
related files 70
R
remove drawings 29 ratings 337
reorder drawings 29 annotate 337
save to web 705 Ratings Defaults dialog box 337
script file 697 Reassign Terminal dialog box 612
select 29 Rebuild Database File dialog box 90
setup 96 records 314, 349, 351, 766, 777, 1081
task list 91 add 314
update settings 129 add footprint 1081
utilities 509 catalog record 766
vault 50 catalog structure 777
vault - advanced 1250 edit 314, 351
promis.e 1124 edit footprint 1081
convert 1124 edit schematic 349
promis.e Conversion dialog box 1125 Ref Des 1008
Prompts at Module Insertion Time dialog Remove Component Override dialog
box 245 box 366
properties 96, 131, 492, 523–524, 730 Rename Panel Layers dialog box 148
circuits 730 Rename Schematic Layers dialog
commands 730 box 148
component 730 Renumber Terminal Strip dialog box 613
components 96 replaceable parameters 126
cross-references 96 Report Format File Setup - Missing
drawing 96 Level/Sequence Assignments
drawing cross-references 96 dialog box 948
drawing format 96 Report Format File Setup - Panel Bill of
drawing settings 131 Material dialog box 941
drawing styles 96 Report Format File Setup - Panel
drawing wire numbers 96 Component dialog box 946
icon menus 730 Report Format File Setup - Panel
project 96 Component Exception dialog
set 96 box 943
styles 96 Report Format File Setup - Panel
submenus 730 Nameplate dialog box 951

1284 | Index
Report Format File Setup - Panel Terminal Report Format File Setup - Wire
Exception dialog box 953 Annotation Exception dialog
Report Format File Setup - Panel Wire box 950
Connection dialog box 955 report format files 940
Report Format File Setup - Schematic AIP reports 383, 541, 810, 812, 897, 923,
Wire List dialog box 957 991, 1005, 1008, 1107
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Bill attribute mapping list 1005
of Material dialog box 959 automatic 991
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Cable cross-reference 383
From/To dialog box 961 exception/error 383
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Cable export for cabling 1008
Summary dialog box 963 file options 810
Report Format File Setup - Schematic generate 812
Component dialog box 975 grouping 991
Report Format File Setup - Schematic output to .csv 1008
Component Wire List dialog panel 923
box 967 schematic 897
Report Format File Setup - Schematic setup for export 1008
Connector Details dialog stand-alone signals 541
box 969 terminal pick list 1107
Report Format File Setup - Schematic wire signal 541
Connector Plug dialog box 971 resequence 698
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Resequence Panel Item Numbers dialog
Connector Summary dialog box 1090
box 973 retag 698
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Retag Components dialog box 413
Missing Bill of Material dialog Reverse/Flip Component dialog box 339
box 977 routing 1093
Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC remove 1093
I/O Address and Descriptions row styles 620
dialog box 980 RSLogix 267
Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC change module 267
I/O Component Connection export I/O 267
dialog box 965 import 267
Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC RSLogix 500 Import Change Module dialog
Modules Used So Far dialog box 269
box 987 RSLogix 500 Import dialog box 269
Report Format File Setup - Schematic rung spacing 482
Terminal Numbers dialog rungs 482
box 983 insert 482
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Terminal Plan dialog box 985
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Wire
S
From/To dialog box 979 Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Wire box 393
Label dialog box 989 save settings 129

1285 | Index
save to file 810 schematic symbols 284, 355, 389, 446,
schematic attributes 177 468, 1161, 1167, 1172
Schematic Component dialog box 313, schematic tagging 1141
1055 Schematic Terminals List Panel Layout
Schematic Components List Panel Layout Insert dialog box 1056, 1069
Insert dialog box 1044 Schematic Wire Numbers Panel Wiring
Schematic Components or Terminals Diagram dialog box 1077
dialog box 1070 scratch databases 86
schematic database editor 349 script file creation 697
schematic drawing properties 96, 131 script files 810
Schematic Equipment In dialog box 321 Select Description from AutoCAD Electrical
schematic ladder diagrams 1026 Language Table dialog box 304
schematic layers 143 Select Description Text Format dialog
rename 143 box 305
Schematic Layout Wire Connection Select Drawings to Process dialog box 91
Annotation dialog box 1079 Select Pin List Table dialog box 795
schematic linking 1144 Select Row Cell Styles dialog box 620
schematic lists 1031, 1056, 1067, 1069 Select Terminal Information dialog
schematic lookup database 349 box 237
schematic lookup file 316, 349 Select Terminal Properties Table dialog
edit 349 box 631
schematic project properties 96, 99 Select Terminals to Jumper dialog
schematic reports 525, 804, 897, 991 box 574
about 804 Select Xdata to Change to a Block Attribute
automatic generation 991 dialog box 1030
bill of materials 897 sequence footprint components 1095
cable from/to 897 sequencing 1093
cable summary 897 remove 1093
component 897 show 1093
component wire list 897 Set Pass Power dialog box 1160
connector details 897 Set Power Source/Load Value dialog
connector plug 897 box 1159
connector summary 897 Set Wire Type dialog box 159
control from/to 525 settings 96, 99, 131, 253
generate 897 drawing properties 96, 131
missing bill of materials 897 PLC I/O 253
PLC I/O address and project properties 99
descriptions 897 Settings dialog box 320, 1057
PLC I/O component connection 897 settings list tool 88
PLC modules used so far 897 settings list utility 806
terminal numbers 897 table setup 806
terminal plan 897 Setup Title Block Update dialog
wire from/to 897 box 715, 721, 725
wire label 897 Signal Code dialog box 342
Schematic Reports dialog box 897 Signal- Source Code dialog box 537

1286 | Index
signals 342, 353, 536 fan-in/out 548
destination 342 project properties 96, 536
follow 342 support files 1193
source 342 advanced 1193
slide files 251 surf 688
source arrows 536, 1132 codes 688
convert 1132 continue a previous surf 688
source markers 536, 543, 1197 drawings 688
advanced 1197 Surf dialog box 690
show 543 swap 209
Spacing for Component or Footprint library 209
Insertion dialog box 1073 update block 209
spare terminal strips 585 Swap Block/Update Block/Library Swap
Special Explode dialog box 1141 dialog box 212
splices 685 swap NO/NC 340
Split Block dialog box 335 symbol annotation 199
split tags 172 symbol builder 201, 1223
spreadsheet data 811, 996, 1067 advanced 1223
components 996 create symbols 201
edit report 811 panel symbols 201
export 996 schematic symbols 201
general data 996 Symbol Builder 202
import 996 Choose Symbol Category dialog
modify 996 box 202
panel components 996 Symbol Builder - Schematic Symbols dialog
panel terminals 996 box 205
plc i/o descriptions 996 Symbol Library Attribute Text/Scale Resize
plc i/o header information 996 dialog box 430
plc i/o wire connections 996 symbols 134, 162–163, 173, 197, 199,
terminals 996 201, 209, 353, 418, 429, 1161,
spreadsheet import structures 673 1214, 1223
spreadsheet mapping 1151 add custom - advanced 1214
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog advanced 1223
box 259 annotate 199
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Setup dialog convert panel 201
box 262 convert schematic 201
Stand-Alone DestinationCross-Reference create 199
Symbol dialog box 359 cross-references 353
stand-alone I/O points 246 default library 173
edit 246 library 429
Stand-Alone Source Cross-Reference library swap 209
Symbol dialog box 359 location 418
standard description lists 303 multiple libraries 173
Style Box Dimensions dialog box 243 naming 162–163
styles 96, 536, 548 pneumatic library 1161
drawing properties 96, 536 stand-alone 353

1287 | Index
 substitute 197 insert spares 585
WD_M block 134 installation codes 585
location codes 585
preview 585
T row styles 585
Table Cross-Reference Format Setup dialog terminal strip 585
box 374, 380 wire constraints 585
table cross-reference updates 377 Terminal Strip Editor 590, 595, 600, 604
table cross-references 368, 372, 374, 380 Cable Information tab dialog
table generation 806 box 600
tabular terminal strips 585 Catalog Code Assignment tab dialog
tag wire numbers 484 box 595
project-wide 484 Terminal Preview tab dialog
TAG1 196 box 604
TAG1_PARTX 172 Terminal Strip tab dialog box 590
TAG2 196 Terminal Strip Representation - Setup
TAG2_PARTX 172 dialog box 584
tagging tools 1137 Terminal Strip Representation dialog
Tags in Use dialog box 301 box 583
Task List dialog box 91 Terminal Strip Selection dialog box 588
tasks 91 Terminal Strip Table Data Fields to Include
tee connection symbols 530 dialog box 621
template drawings 1064 Terminal Strip Table Generator dialog
templates 131 box 624
Terminal Block Properties dialog terminal strips 582, 585, 624, 1093,
box 566, 609 1095, 1098–1099, 1104, 1107
Terminal Block Settings dialog box 241 accessories 585
terminal blocks 192 associate 585
footprint symbols 192 draw shapes 1098
Terminal Data Export dialog box 1004 drawing files 624
terminal exception report 953 edit 585
terminal numbers 578 graphical format 585
resequence 578 insert 585, 1098
Terminal Numbers Data Fields to Report insert accesories 585
dialog box 883 insert spares 585
terminal numbers report 917 installation codes 585
Terminal Plan Data Fields to Report dialog location codes 585
box 888 panel report parameters 1107
terminal plan report 918 pick list 1107
terminal row styles 620 renumber 585
Terminal Strip Definition dialog box 589 row styles 585
terminal strip editor 585 sequence 1099, 1104
cable information 585 sequencing 1093
catalog code assignment 585 swap text 1095
define columns 585 table creation 624
insert accessories 585 tabular format 585, 624

1288 | Index
 unique records 585 terminal 408
terminals 225, 323, 408, 554, 559, 568, text conversion 1131
573, 578–579, 582, 585, 629, Text Cross-Reference Format Setup dialog
1067, 1093, 1107 box 367
add associations 559 text cross-references 362
associations 568 text justification 424
blocks 225 text sizes 425
break apart 568 text styles 425
break associations 568 TEXTVALS 777
connections 579 Title Block Setup (User-Defined) dialog
copy properties 568 box 717, 724, 727
edit 585 Title Block Setup dialog box 716, 723,
edit associations 559 726
edit database record 629 title blocks 83, 708, 718, 724
edit levels 585 customize 718
edit properties database 629 embedded information 718
edit symbol 559 link 718
edit type 225 map 718
information 225 map AutoLISP 724
insert 323, 559 project-wide update 708
insert multiple 1067 setup 708
insert panel 323 update 708
jumpers 573 Toggle Installation Codes dialog box 618
list 582 Toggle Location Codes dialog box 617
marking 579 track changes 700
modify sequence 225 translate descriptions 703
multi-connection 554 troubleshoot tools 1176
multi-level 568
multi-stack 568
multi-tier 568
U
orientation 582 unavailable files 92
pick list 1107 Unity Pro 270, 280
properties database 629 export 270, 280
reassign 585 import from 270
remove sequencing 1093 Unity Pro Export dialog box 281
renumber 578, 585 Unity Pro Import dialog box 275
select properties database 629 unlink symbols 1151
setup 582 Update Block - New Block’s Pathƒilename
show associations 568 dialog box 215
text 408, 582 update drawings 1004
text 405, 408, 414, 1095 Update Drawings per Spreadsheet Data
edit 405, 408 dialog box 1004
multi-line 414 Update Title Block dialog box 713
replace 405 update title blocks 708
swap 1095 Update Wire Signal and Stand-Alone
swap terminal annotation 1095 Cross-Reference dialog box 360

1289 | Index
used panel tags 302 publishing drawing files 705
used schematic tags 301 WEBLINK assignment 777
user data 351 What's New 2, 26
edit 351 wire annotation exception 950
User-Defined Attribute List dialog wire annotation exception report 933
box 1006 wire colors 502
user-defined attributes 1005 encode 502
edit 1005 information 502
utilities 82 Wire Conduit Routing Data Fields to
zip 82 Report dialog box 892
wire connection 579
terminals 579
V wire connections 914, 979, 1074, 1077,
vault 50 1150
vault drawings 1250 add 1150
advanced 1250 annotations 1077
vault projects 1250 default 1074
advanced 1250 from/to report 914
Vendor Menu Selection dialog box 1058 report format files 979
vendor menus 1031 text 1077
Vendor Panel Footprint dialog box 1058 Wire From/To Data Fields to Report dialog
vendor part numbers 785 box 876
vendor selection 1031 wire from/to report 914
verify changes 700 Wire Jumpers dialog box 397
View/Edit Panel Component Connection Wire Label Data Fields to Report dialog
Sequence dialog box 1095 box 891
wire label report 920, 989
format files 989
W wire layers 150, 156, 502
add existing 150
WD_AB icon menu 1031 change 150, 156
wd_fam.dat 70 convert 156
wd_lang1.mdb 703 create 150
WD_M block 134 edit 150
alert 134 setup 150
defaults 134 wire list export 1008
insert 134 wire markers 467
WD_M blocks 63, 362 wire networks 525
new drawings 63 edit 525
overrides 362 sequence 525
WD_PNLM block 134 show 525
insert 134 wire numbers 96, 484, 492, 501–502,
WD_SLB 730 506–508, 511–514, 516, 519, 521,
wd.env files 29, 70, 77 525, 1074, 1077
wddinrl.xls 344 3-phase bus 484
web 705 add to footprints 1077
create pages 705

1290 | Index
 copy 514 Wire/Conduit Routing Report dialog
drawing properties 96, 492, 516 box 1120
edit 506 wires 156, 434–435, 437, 439–440, 443,
erase 521 467, 473, 484, 525, 541, 585,
extra 513 659–660, 1074, 1077, 1176
find 501 3-phase bus 435
fixed 506–507 angled 437
flip 516 bend 659
format 502 cable marker report 443
hide 521 change type 156
increment 519 check 1176
insert 484, 492 color labels 440
insert special 484 colors 440
leader 512 connection annotations 1077
make vertical 519 constraints 585
merge 1074 duplicate 1176
mirror 514, 516 gaps 473
motor circuits 484 gauge labels 440
move 511–512 in-line markers 467
panel wiring diagram 1077 insert 437
plc tags 525 insert 3-phase bus 660
position 492 insert labels 440
project properties 96 multiple wire bus 435
project-wide 508 repair 1176
replace text 501 report sequencing 525
reposition 511 show 484
reposition leader text 512 signal report 541
rotate 512 stand-alone reference report 541
show 484 stretch 440
size 519 trace 1176
swap 513 trim 439
tag 484 ungap 473
toggle 516 wire connection text 1074
wire sequence 1095 wiring 636
wire shields 466 WO_CBLWIRES 542
Wire Signal or Stand-Alone Reference
Report dialog box 541
wire tag mode 484
X
project-wide 484 X Zone Setup dialog box 523
Wire Tagging (project-wide) dialog X-Y Grid dialog box 524
box 490 xdata 1028, 1184
Wire Tagging dialog box 489 add 1184
wire types 156 editor 1184
edit 156 make visible 1028
set 156 Xdata Editor dialog box 1185

1291 | Index
Z zip utility 82

1292 | Index